unclassified - Sturmpanzer.com

^^- T fWAR DEPARTiEIT TECHNICAL MANUALTM-E30ANDBOOK ONGERMANLITARY FORCESWAR DEPARTMENT

WAR DEPARTMENT TECHNICAL MANUALTM-E 30-451HANDBOOK ONGERMANMIL1TAR.YFORCESWAR DEPARTMENT 15 MAR C H 19 45' RESTRICTED. DISSEMINATION OF RESTRICTED MATpSHf^The informationcontained in restricted documents and the essential characteristics QêStficted material may be givento any person known to be in the service of the United Staêtfrufto persons of undoubted loyalty anddiscretion who are cooperating in Governmentwg[fcf*t!ftwill not be communicated to the public or to thepress except by authorized military pubji««»*lations agencies. (See also par. 23b, AR 380-5, IS Mar 44.)UNCLASSIFIEDREGRAOEDAUTMO»United States Government Printing Office~\Washington : 1945

-E 30-451 ,$us been pttbli.dd to ~rwidr? a bertnunc’tri comprehcnsiw manual on the GernfoArmed Porces.For tlie most part material in tkls handbook IJ bawd on injormution available ufi toI5 Eehruary 1945.A loose-leaf format has been adopted to facilitate revisionWAR DEPARTMENT\TASH1~.(.TOX 25, D. C., 15 MARCH 1945TM-E 30451, Handbook on German ilililitary Forces, is publisl~cd fc~r theinformation and guidance of all concerned.[AG 300.7 (15 Mar 45)]BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:OFFICIAL:J. A. ULIO ^Ma.jor GeneralThe Adjutant GeneralG. C. MARSHALLCl&f of StaffDISTRIBUTION :AAF (10) ; AGF (56) ; ASF (2); T of Opns (200) escept POA, CBI &SWPA (10) ; Dept (2) ; Base Comds (2) ; Is Comds (2) ; Arm & Sv Bd(2) ; Def Comd (5) ; S Div ASF (1) ; Tech Sv (2) ; Sv (2) ; PC & S(ZI only) (1); Gen & Sp Sv Sch (200); USMA (100) ASF Tng C(200) ; AGF Rep1 Tng C (200) ; A (20); CHQ (20) ; AF (5) ; Followingin ETO, MT0 & ZI only: D (5) ; B (3); R (3); Bn (2) ; C (1) ; G (5);Refer to FM 21-6 for explanation of distribution formula.U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE; 1 945 — 62813 1 — TM - 30

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-ECONTENTSCHAPTER I.THE GERMAN MILITARY SYSTEMPa °?Section I.IntroductionI—1// .The German Soldier ;I—2./// .The High Command1—15IV.Organization of the Army for R’ar....... ...............IL41V.Functions of the Corps AreaI—45VI.Conscription, Replacement, and TrainingI—54CHAPTER II.Section I.//.///.W.V.VI.VII.ORGANIZATION OF THE FIELD FORCESOver-all Field Organizationi n in the FieldOrganization of Higher HeadquartersPrinciples and Trends in Unit Organization and Equipment... .DivisionsCombat Troops »Service TroopsIf—1IT—1IT—4II—7II—711—3311—98CHAPTER III.Section I.II.///.IV.OTHER MILITARY AND AUXILIARY ORGANIZATIONSSS and PoliceAuxiliary OrganizationsOther Party OrganizationsEmergency Defense of German SoilIll—1HI—24Til—27ITI—28CHAPTERIV.TACTICSSection I.General Tactical DoctrinesIV—1//.ReconnaissanceIV—2///.MarchesIV—4IV.OffensiveIV—5V.DefensiveIV—20VI.Retrograde Movements.IV—31VII.MinefieldsIV—35VIII.Special OperationsIV—45CHAPTER V.FORTIFICATIONS AND DEFENSESSection I.Doctrine of FortificationsV—1//.Characteristics of FortificationsV—2CHAPTER , VI.SUPPLY, EVACUATION, AND MOVEMENTSSection I.Higher Organization of SupplyVI—1//.System of Supply within GermanyVI—2///.System of Supply of the Field Army1-1—11IV.Maintenance Requirements*VI—18V.EvacuationVI—21VI.Troop MovementsVI—25IB

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45IrCHAPTER VII.Section I.II.III.IV.V.J’I.VII.J’III.IX.CHAPTER VIII.CHAPTERSection I.II.III.IV.J’.VI.VII.IX.Section I.II.III.• IV.v.J/I.L’II.CHAPTER X.Section I.II.III.IV.J7.J-I.VII.WEAPONSPWIntroductionVII—1Small ArmsVII—1MortarsVIT—1.3Artillery VTT- I 1 )Self-propelled ArtilleryVTT—57Armored VehiclesVIT—76Rocket Weapons ' VII—88GrenadesVTT—95Other Weapons '. VIT—104EQUIPMENTIntroduction VTTT- 1Automotive Equipment VIII-- -2Artillery Fire Control EquipmentVI IT—10Signal EquipmentVIII—19Engineer EquipmentVIII—63Chemical Warfare : VITI—10.3Cooking EquipmentVTTT—122UNIFORMS, INSIGNIA, AND INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENTArmy Uniforms .................................... lSP~ lX— 1Army Insignia ...................................... 1x—13Air Force Uniforms and Insignia .................... I x—14Elite Guard Uniforms and Insi$ia .................. l X—16Decorations ......................................... IS—17Auxiliary Forces and Semi-Military OrganizationsIS--19Individual Equipment ............................... IS—21GERMAN AIR FORCEAir Force High Command X —1Chain of Command X— 1Air Force Arms and Services X—6Army and Navy Cooperation X —12EquipmentX—1.3Training X—29Tactics X—30iv

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDCHAPTER ITHE GERMAN MILITARY SYSTEMI. Total WarSection 1.INTRODUCTIONThe Germans have long devoted a large partof their national energies to both the study. andthe application of the science of war. The GermanArmy which was built up under the Naziregime and which challenged the world in 1939was the final product of this study. It representedthe fruition of decades of long-range planning,organization, experimentation, and mechanicaldevelopment directed toward the sole end ofcreating a military instrument which would bea match for any foreseeable combination of adversaries.Supported . by the entire economic,political, and psychological resources of a totalitariangovernment, it was destined to overrunalmost the whole of Europe in a series of victoriouscampaigns unequaled since the days ofNapoleon. The three greatest nations on earthwere forced to muster all their human and materialpower to crush the German military machineby the only possible method—overwhelmingsuperiority of force.Total war is neither a modern invention nor aGerman monopoly.‘ But total mobilization, in thesense of the complete and scientific control of allthe efforts of the nation for the purposes of war,and total utilization of war as an instrument ofnational policy have been developed to their highestdegree by the German militarists. Centralcontrol and careful coordination, by qualified experts,of a military machine which is built withall the best available materials and put togetherfor the highest efficiency of operation have beenthe secret of such military victories as the Germanshave achieved.It is the purpose of this Handbook to describethis military machine in all its aspects. No oneof the supporting pillars of the German Army—its personnel, its High Command, its administrativcstructure, its unit organization, its weapons,its tactical doctrines—can stand or fall alone.The various chapters and sections which followmust be studied together as various facets of awhole.2. The German Army TodayWhen the German Panzer divisions struck outacross the Polish frontier at dawn on 1 September1939, no one could predict the scope, intensity,and duration of the armed conflict which theywere precipitating. The German Army then wasfresh, vigorous, expansive, and obviously superiorto its contemporaries. Its weapons werenew and shiny; its tactics and techniques—theold doctrines adapted to the new conditions—were untried; its officers and men were youngand full of enthusiasm. A career of easy conquestseemed to open up before it.After five and a half years of ever growingbattle against ever-stronger enemies, the GermanArmy in 1945 looks, at first glance, much theworse for wear. It is beset on all sides and isshort of everything. It has suffered appallingcasualties and must resort to old men, boys, invalids,and unreliable foreigners for its cannonfodder. Its weapons and tactics seem not to havekept pace with those of the armies opposing it;its supply system in the field frequently breaksdown. Its position is obviously hopeless, and itcan only be a question of time until the last Germansoldier is disarmed, and the once proudGerman Army of the great Frederick and ofScharnhorst, of Ludendorff and of Hitler, existsno more as a factor to be reckoned with.Yet this shabby, war-weary machine has struggledon in a desperate effort to postpone its inevitabledemise. At the end of 1944 it was stillable to mount an offensive calculated to delayfor months the definitive piercing of the westernI—I

UNCLASSIFIEDbiARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451bulwarks of Germany. Despite the supposedchronic disunity at the top, disaffection amongthe officer corps, and disloyalty in the rank andfile, despite the acute lack of weapons, ammunition,fuel, transport, and human reserves, theGerman Army seems to function with its old precisionand to overcome what appear to be insuperabledifficulties with remarkable speed. Only bypatient and in&ssant hammering from all sidescan its collapse be brought about.The cause of this toughness, even in defeat, isnot generally appreciated. It goes much deeperthan the quality of weapons, the excellence oftraining and leadership, the soundness of tacticaland strategic doctrine, or the efficiency of controlat all echelons. It is to be found in the militarytradition which is so deeply ingrained in thewhole character of the German nation and whichalone makes possible the interplay of these variousfactors of strength to their full effectiveness.The German Army of 1939 was a model ofefficiency, the best product of the concentratedmilitary genius of the most scientifically militaryof nations. A study of the German Army of1945, however, older and wiser, hardened andbattle-tested, cornered and desperate as it is, willshow best how this military science and militarygenius operate in the practical exigencies of longdrawn-outtotal war.Section II.THE GERMAN SOLDIERI. Fanatic or Weakling?The German soldier who faces the Allies on thehome fronts in 1945 is a very different type fromthe members of the Army of 1939 which Hitlercalled "an Army such as the world has neverseen". The German soldier is one of severaldifferent types depending on whether he is a veteranof 4 or 5 years, or a new recruit. Theveteran of many fronts and many retreats is aprematurely aged, war weary cynic, either discouragedand disillusioned or too stupefied tohave any thought of his own. Yet he is a seasonedcampaigner, most likely a noncommissionedofficer, and performs his duties with the highestdegree of efficiency.The new recruit, except in some crack S S units,is either too young or too old and often in poorhealth.He has been poorly trained for lack of timebut, if too young, he makes up for this by al—2fanaticism bordering on madness. If too old, heis driven by the fear of what his propagandistshave told him will happen to the Fatherland incase of an Allied victory, and even more by thefear of what he has been told will happen to himand his family if he does not carry out ordersexactly as given. Thus even the old and sickperform, to a certain point, with the courage ofdespair.The German High Command has been particularlysuccessful in placing the various types ofmen where they best fit, and in selecting those toserve as cannon fodder, who are told to hold outto the last man, while every effort is made to preservethe elite units, which now are almost entirelypart of the Wafen-SS. The German soldierin these units is in a preferred category and isthe backbone of the German Armed Forces. Heis pledged never to surrender and has no moralcode except allegiance to his organization. Thereis no limit to his ruthlessness.The mentality of the German soldier of 1945is the final result of that policy of militarismwhich, even in the 19th century, caused a famousGerman general to rccommcntl that soldiers shouldbe trained to ask of their superiors: "Master,order us where we may die."2. Manpower Problemsa. ANNUAL CLASS SYSTEM. When Hitler reintroducedgeneral conscription in 1935, the greatestpossible care was taken to create a strong militaryforce without disrupting the economic life ofthe nation. Men lvere registered by annual classesand during the \-ears before the war those of theolder classes were called only in small groups toattend training exercises of limited duration. Evenfor the younger classes, all feasible arrangementswere made for the deferment of students and ofthose engaged in necessary occupations. he n acceptedfor active service were called to the colorsby individual letter rather than by public announcementfor their annual class. This systemwas continued in the gradual mobilization whichpreceded the outbreak of the war in such a waythat the wartime Army could be built up organicallyand the normal course of life was not seriouslyupset.b. \~CTAR DEVELOPMENTS, AS long as the warwas conducted on a limited scale, the ArmedForces were very liberal in granting occupationaland medical discharges. As the war progressedand grew in scope and casualties mountid, it be

I MARCH 1945came necessary to recall many of these men andeventually to reach increasingly into both theolder and the younger age groups.After Germany changed from the offensive tothe defensive in 1943, it became both possible andnecessary to transfer an increasing number ofAir Force and naval personnel to the Army, toenforce "voluntary" enlistment in the Waffen-SS,and to commit line-of-communication units toregular combat not only against partisans butagainst regular enemy forces.The increasingly heavy losses of the Russiancampaign forced Hitler to :ancel his order exempting"last sons" of derimated families andfathers of large families frcm front-line combatduty. Prisons and concen ration camps werecombed out for men who coild be used in penalcombat units with the inducenent of possible laterreinstatement of their civic rijhts.Although a "total mobilizaton" was carried outin the spring of 1943, after Stalingrad, it becamenecessary by the end of tha year to lower thephysical classification standads drastically andto register men up to 60 yers of age for militaryservice. Even men wh severe stomachailments were drafted into spcial-diet battalions.During the summer of 1944, ivilian occupationswere reduced to an absolutely Ecessary minimum.Finally, the remaining male c/ilians from 16 to60 were made liable for hote defense combatservice in the "Volkssturm" and even HitlerYouth boys and girls were calld up as auxiliaries.Along with these measures here went a continuousreorganization of comat as well as administrativeunits for the purose of increasingefficiency and saving personnel.The strength of divisions us lowered whiletheir firepower was increased (d their componentswere made more flexible, evere comb-outswere made among rear-area peonnel and technicalspecialists. The strongest fssible measureswere introduced against waste c manpower, inefficiency,and desertions, partidarly after theArmy was brought under therver increasingcontrol of the SS, in the sumnr and autumnof 1944.After the Allied breakthrough iFrance, Himmlerwas appointed Commander f the ReplacementArmy and as such made ihWaffen-SS thebackbone of German national ifense. Wholeunits of the Air Force and Navyere taken overand trained by the Waffen-S&nd then distributedamong depleted field uni The organi-UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451zation and employment of the Volksstur~ti isunder Himmler's direct control.The complicated record system of the ArmedForces was maintained in principle but streamlinedfor the sake of saving manpower.c : FOREIGN ELEMENTS. (1) Original policy.In their attempts to solve their ever acute manpowerproblems, the Germans have not neglectedto make the fullest possible use of foreign elementsfor almost every conceivable purpose andby almost every conceivable method. Originally,great stress was laid on keeping the ArmedForces nationally "pure". Jews and Gypsies weraexcluded from military service. Foreign volunteerswere not welcomed. Germans residingabroad and possessing either German or dualcitizenship were rounded up through the Germanconsulates from 1937 on. When Germany setout to invade other countries, beginning with Austria,only the inhabitants of these countries whowere held to be of German or related blood becameliable to German military service; the Czechminority in Austria, for example, was exempted.(2) Recruiting of foreigners. With the invasionof Russia in June 1941, German propagandistsset themselves to the task of changing thewhole aspect of the war from a national Germanaffair to a "European war of liberation .fromCommunism". In this way the Nazis were ableto obtain a considerable number of volunteersfrom occupied and even neutral countries, whowere organized in combat units of their own inGerman uniforms and under German training.The original policy was to incorporate raciallyrelated "Germanic" people, such as the Dutch andScandinavians, into the Wafen-S’S and non-Germanicpeople such as the Croats into the Army.When the failures in Russia and other increasingdifficulties began’ to affect the morale of thkforeigners, their "voluntary recruitment" becamemore and more a matter of compulsion and theirservice in separate national units had to bebrought under more rigid supervision. The organizationof such units, therefore, was turnedover in increasing measure to the Waflen-SS,even in the case of racially non-Germanic elements.At the same time, it became necessary for theArmy to fill its own depleted German units byadding a certain percentage of foreign recruits.This was done partly by declaring the inhabitantsof annexed territories, such as the Polish Corridor,to be "racial Germans" (Volksdeutscke),1—3

MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E ‘30-45Imaking them provisional German citizens subjectto induction into the Armed Forces. A considerablesource of manpower was Soviet prisonersof war of different national origins. Some of+ese were put into regular German units as"racial" Germans; others were employed in suchunits as "auxiliary volunteers". Separate nationalunits also were created from Cossacks and fromthe numerous peoples who inhabit the Caucasusand Turkestan and are collectively referred to bythe Germans as "Eastern Peoples" (Ostr~tilkcr).Every possible inducement has been used for thecruiting of foreigners, including their religion,) ; ”as in the case of the Mohammedans in the Balicans.Only in the case of Jews and Gypsies wasthe original policy of exclusion not only upheldbut extended during the war to include those of50 per cent Jewish descent.3. Duties and Rights of the Soldiera. THE OATH. Every German soldier, uponinduction, is compelled to affirm his legally establishedmilitary obligation by means of thefollowing oath (vow, for atheists) : "I ~zvcar byGod this holy oath (I vow) that I will renderunconditional obedience to the Fiihrer of Germanyand of her people, Adolf Hitler, the SupremeCommander of the Armed Forces, andthat, as a brave soldier, I will be prepared tostake my life for this .oath (vow) at any time."If, because of an oversight, the oath has not beenadministered to a soldier, he is held to be in thesame position as though he had sworn it; theoath is regarded only as the affirmation of an inherentlegal duty.b. MILITARY DISCIPLINE. The German systemof military discipline is rigorous, and excessesare severely punished. In principle, absoluteand unquestioning obedience towards superiorsis required. However, since the summerof 1944, when the Army came under the politicalinfluence of the Nazi Party, new orders wereissued providing that disloyal superiors not onlyneed not be obeyed but in emergencies may beliquidated by their own men. Officers who donot lead their men into combat or show othersigns of cowardice or who, for any reason, mutilatethemselves, are normally condemned to death.Divisional commanders and other high-rankingcombat officers are specifically ordered to set anexample of leadership in the front lines; this explainsthe high casualty rate among German generals.Traditionally, German superior officers wereaddressed only indirectly, in the third person, as"Herr Major is absolutely right." Hitler, however,is addressed directly as "My Leader".Therefore, the Nazis made use of the directform of address toward superior officers at firstoptional, then compulsory. Superior officers andnoncommissioned officers are addressed as "Mr."(Herr) followed by their rank; in the Wa@-SS,however, only by their rank: "Herr Leutnant!",but " Unterstiirnz fiillrcr!"Originally, a distinction was made between theregular military salu:e and the "German salutation"(Dcutschcr GI-zss) which consists of saying"Heil Hitler!" with the right arln outstretched.In August 1944 the litter type of salute was madecompulsory throug1out. E,veryone salutes hisown superiors as wdl as others entitled to a saluteaccording to the f dlowing general rules: Everyofficer is the supericr of all lower-ranking officersand all enlisted mer; every noncommissioned officeris the superiol of all privates; every noncommissionedofficr in one of the first threegrades is the supeior of lower-grade noncommissionedofficers n his own unit. There is no- ge?eral rank supciority otherwise among noncommissionedofficrs or among the various gradesof privates; howeer, all members of the ArmedForces are obligald to "greet" one another as amatter of militaryetiquette.Members of tk Armed Forces are forbiddento associate with oreigners even if they are raciallyrelated; mariages between soldiers and non-German women :e subject to approval, which isgiven only after3 very thorough investigation ;the offspring of Ich marriages are considered tobe German. In.he Wafle&YS, such marriagesare entirely probited for German personnel.Men who sev-ely and repeatedly violate militarydiscipline, it not to an extent that warrantsa death sentete, are transferred to correctionbattalions for probationary period and givenarduous and *ngerous assignments; if incorrigible,they £ then turned over to the policefor extreme plishment.C. PRESERV~ON OF HONOR. Honor is consideredthe sdier's highest possession. Exceptin extreme cas, he may be given the opportunityto redeem hirelf for a dishonorable action bya heroic deal in battle or, in milder cases, byexceptionally rave and meritorious service inthe lowest gre of private to which he is reducedfrom his fora rank. However, there also existsa rigid persal honor code for officers. Under

I MARCH 1945its provisions, they are obligated to defend theirown personal honor as well as the good nameof their wives by every possible means and areheld to account for violations committed by themselvesor their wives. According to the Germanconception, special honor rules apply to officersand those civilians who are socially their equals.These rules provide in extreme cases for settlementby duel with pistols until one of the twoparties is fully incapacitated. This is a leftoverfrom feudal times; before Hitler's assumption ofpower, a half-hearted attempt was made to outlawduelling by officers, but the penalties prodwere i d did not carry moral stigma.It is significant that under Hitler, duelling of officerswas legalized in cases where all efforts atsettlement by an officers' court of honor (appointedby a regimental or higher commander)fail; however, for duels between two officers, butnot between an officer and a civilian, a decisionmust first be obtained from the Commander-in-Chief of the Army. Their medieval conception ofhonor has a strong influence on the mentality andactions of many German officers. An officer isobligated to react to deliberate insults instantaneously,in a positive and masterly fashion, and toprotect other officers from becoming the objectof public disgrace.In the SS, "qualified" enlisted men (i.e. thosewho ar e dagger) are subject to the samehonor rules as officers, being obligated to "defendtheir honor by force of arms".4. Morale Factorsa. RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN OFFICERS ANDMEN. The opening of the officer's career tothe common German man of the people was arevolutionary change in the German social systembrought about by Hitler. It has created anentirely different type of relationship among theranks than existed in the armies of Imperial Germany.No one can become an officer without being acertified Nazi, even if not a member of the Party,and without being considered capable of imbuinghis men with the Nazi spirit. Thus, the socialmingling between officers and men in off-dutyhours, which has been encouraged by the Nazisto some extent, appears to have a strong propagandistpurpose. A sincere personal interest ofthe officer in his men is encouraged, the all-importantrequirement being that he must have theirconfidence. In case of death, the soldier's nextUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451of kin receive their first notification through apersonal letter from his company commander,which is handed to them by the local leader ofthe Nazi Party.1). POLITICS IN THE ARMED FORCES. Traditionally,all German military personnel is barredfrom all political activities including the right tovote. Hitler, when introducing general conscription,maintained this tradition in order to obtainthe full support of the military and decreed thatmembership in the Nazi Party and all politicalactivities would be dormant during the period ofany man's active service. In the later stages ofthe war, however, serious reverses and the increasingdanger of sagging morale caused theofficial introduction of politics into the GermanArmed Forces. This ‘occurred progressively fromthe latter part of 1943 on, by appointment of National-Socialistguidance officers (NS-Fiilzrungsojiziere)on all staffs, the organization of politicalmeetings, and other efforts at raising morale,as well as through the merciless terrorization ofwavering officers and soldiers by the "strong men"of the Wuffcn-SS.c. AXVARDS. A very extended and clever usehas been made of honorary titles for units, medalsand awards for individual achievements, and commemorativedecorations for participation in outstandingcombat engagements. It is significant,for instance, that because the German is basicallyaverse to hand-to-hand combat, the golden closearms”.bar was created in 1944, which is bestowedby Hitler personally at his headquarters, as thehighest honor offered the German soldier. Himmlershortly thereafter created the golden partisancombatbar which he bestows personally at hisheadquarters. The requirements for winningeither bar are extremely severe so that soldierswill do their utmost. Awards and decorationsmay be held to have acted as very important morale-buildersfor the German Armed Forces.5. Ranksa. RANK GROUPS AND CLASSES. German soldiersare divided into the following four rankgroups:(1) Oficers (Ofi&re) :1st rank class: general officers (Generule).en rank class: field officers (Stabsofigiere).3rd rank class: captains (Hauptleute undRittmcister).4th rank class: lieutenants (Lcutnnnte).(2) Musirinns (activities suspended in November1944).r—5

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(3) Noncommissioned Oficers (Untero&icre) : rank of first sergeant; rather, this is a position1st rank class: fortress shop-foremen and usually held by a master sergeant or technicalhorseshoeing instructors (see table).sergeant. A corporal in the German Army func- 2d rank class: noncommissioned officersof the lst, Zd, and 3d grades. (Unter- tions as acting sergeant and normally is promotedofiziere mit Portepce)to the rank of staff sergeant rather thhn sergeant;3d rank class: officer candidates and non- as to the latter rank, see paragraph e.commissioned officers of the 4th and Sth d. PRIVATES. There are three grades in thegrades. (Fiihwiche und Unterofiziereohne Porte@)group which correspond to U. S. privates first(4) Privates (Murznschaften). class, and a soldier may be promoted from anyof them to become a corporal. They may be de-Figures 1 and 2 show tables of U. S. andGerman equivalent ranks.scribed as chief private first class in administrativeposition (Stabsgefreiter), senior private firstb. OFFICERS. Nearly all German officer ranks class who functions as acting corporal (Obcrgecorrespondto U. S. Army rank, although their freiter), and ordinary private first classterminology differs for general officers, a Gcn- (Gefreiter). A soldier cannot become chief prieralmujorbeing the equivalent of a brigadier vate first class without having been a senior prigeneral.The functions, hoivever, do not always vate first class. In most branches there arecorrespond. This is partly clue to the fact that senior privates first class (Obcrgrcnadiere in in-German wartime ranks are permanent, which fantry, Oberkanonicrc in artillery; the Obrrjiigrr,makes it often impossible for German officers however, in the light, mountain, and parachuteto be promoted to the higher rank which their divisions, is a corporal) and ordinary privateswartime appointment actually would warrant. (Grenadiere, Kanoniere, etc.).c. NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS. The non- e. PROMOTION OF ENLISTED MEN. In mostcommissioned officer ranks are divided into two branches, a soldier cannot become a private firstgroups: the first group .corresponds to the first class without having been a senior private andthree grades in the U. S. Army. There is 110 he cannot become a corporal without having beenU. S. Army German Special Type ofEquivalent Basic Rank Dcsigltation PersonnelGeneral of the Arm?. G Gelzrral frld~~~arsrhallGeneral .GeneraloberstLieutenant General . .. General . .. General drr Infantcrie e^c Infantry, etc.Generalobcrstabs-Ar,ot .................... MedicalVetcrindrVcterinar?IntendantAdministrativeRichtcrJudiciaryMajor General Generalleutnant Generalstabs-Arzt, etc. as above Medical, etc. as aboveErigadier General G eueralnzaj or . .. General-Arzt, etc. as above Metlical, etc. as aboveColonel Oberst Obcrst-Arct, etc. as above Metlical, etc. as aboveLieutenant Colonel .... OberstlcutnantOberf eld-Art=, etc. as above Medical, etc. as aboveMajor . Major ... .... Oberstabs-Arzt, etc. as above. Mctli cal. Medical, etc. as aboveCaptain ... . l lauptinqnn . Stabs-Rittmeister (cav) Artz, etc. as above Zcdical, etc. as aboveFirst Lieutenant Oberleutnant Ober-Arzt . MedicalVeterinar . .VeterinaryZahlvneistcrAdministrativeSecond Lieutenant Lx&ant Assistenz-ArztMedicalVeterin i irVeterinaryZohlmcistwAdministrativeFigure l.—Table of oficer ranks.1—6

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIED E30 - 451li. S. ArmyEquivalentGerrrlailBasic RankSpecialDesignation.Typc ofPersonnelI~~‘~stlltqsobrr- ..Fortress Chief Shop Fore’rrkmcistcrmanOberhufbeschlags- .. Chief Horseshoeing In-LchrmcisterstructorFcstzfrlgs-FortressW erkincistcrShop- Foremanzrfbcschlags- ........... HorseshoeingLehrmeisterInstructorMaster Sergeant . * .... SfabsfcldzL’cb&Technical Sergeant ... . OberfcldwebelStaff SergeantSergeantCorporal.. l:cldulebrlUntcrf eldzccbclUnterojizierPrivate First Class(administrative) .... Stuhsgefrcitcr(acting corporal) ... Obergefrciter(ordinary)GcfreiterPrivate(Senior)(ordinary)Obcrsoldtrt(collective term)Soldat(collective term)Slabs—H'achliiieisler\rly. Cav, A ABcscl~ltmrrrrist(~ ~ . 1 IorseshoeingFcucnvcrkerOrdnanceSchirrr,lcistcr .. SupplyI;zcrrkmci.rtrr ..... Signall~rirftclubcrrjrlcistcr ... l'igeoneerOber—Il/ac/rtrrlcistrrArty, Cav, AAetc., a.s above as aboveOberfiihnrichSenior Officer CandidateUnter—ArztMedicalVetcriniirVeterinaryIl’achtmeister .............^rty, Cav, AAetc., as above as aboveF ahnm jzlllker-l;elda,cl~~~l . .. Advanced Officer Candidatelilzterzutachtllrcisfcr .4rty. Cav, A.4t;ahnenjunkcrOfficer CandidateOberjiigerLight and Mt Inf.HauptgefreiterAir ForceC)bcyqrcrzadierInfantq(Oberschiitx)(rifleman)Panzer-Obergrcuadier;-\rmorctl InfantryOberschiit,-rTanks, AntitankOber-Reiter.CavalryKnnorricr;YrtillcryPionirrEnginecrsFmkrrSignalFahrzrTransl)ort (horse-drawn)KrafffahrerJiotor TransportSanitatssoldatMedicalGrenadierInfanlr!(.Schiifx)(rifleman)Panzer-GrenadierArmored Infantry(Schiif3).ItigcrLight llountain InfantryFlicgerAir ForceKeitrr, etcCavalry, etc.as above . as aboveFigure Z.—Table of enlisted runks.1—7

V,. •I MARCH 1945_UNCLASSIFIED TM - E 3 0-4 5 .1Promotions to all noncommissioned officer ranks except sergeant and master sergeant normally arcdependent upon tables of organization, in addition to the following specifications:After 4 mo~rtlrs scrG-c inFrom To combat unit other field unitafter:Private FirstClassCorporal2 years total service(Ordinary,no limitat ationSenior, Chief)Corporal or Staff Sergeant 1 year in grade 2 years in gradeSergeantCorporal or Technical Sergeant 1 year in grade 2 years in gradeSergeant or in First SergeantStaff Sergeant positionStaff Sergeant Technical Sergeant 1 year in gracle 2 years in gratlcAfter 4 months t~ri~i~.c inFrom To corrrbot unit otlzcr jicld ztnit othcvwiscc7ftc.r n totd uctiw scwi~.c pwiod of: uftcrSenior Private Private FirstClass 6 months 1 year 2 years(Ordi,nary)Private First Senior Private 2 years 2 years 3 yearsClassFirst Class(Ordinary)Senior Private Chief, Private 5 years 5 years 6 yearsFirst Class First Class (2 in gratic)’ (2 in grade) (2 in grade)at least an ordinary ln-ivate first class (GefGtev). tinw iI1 grade without having been promoted toParachutists (Fallscllil-11~ljiiger) may be privates staff sergeant may bc promoted to sergeant; havtobegin with, but the lowest rank provided for ing served the maximum time in that grade withintheir table of organization is corporal (Ober- out having been promoted to technical sergeant,jiiger), in lieu of a. pay’ bonus. Otherwise, the he may be promoted to mastrr sergeant. as showndesignation (Emcmuq~) as senior private, which in table below.does not involve an increase in pay, is now auto- After 4 months of service in a combat unit,matic in principle upon completion of the basic privates of any rank who arc squad leaders maytraining period. Promotions to any grade of pri- be promoted to corporals and corporals who arevate first class are dependent on time limits and platoon leaders may lx promoted to staff sermerit,but not on tables of organization, as shown geants, regardless of length of total service orin the table above.service in grade.Promotions to the ranks of sergeant and master Honorary promotions may be awarded for dissergeantare not dependent on tables of organiza- tiiiguishetl conduct iti battle (l~ostliun~ously totitin ; a corporal who has served the maximum those killctl in action).dfter 4 months service inFrom To combat unit other field unit 0thrr7wiseafter a total active service period of: nfterCorporal Sergeant 6 years 6 years 6 years(3 in grade) (3 in grade) (4 in grade)Sergeant Master Sergeant 12 years 12 years 12 yearsor TechnicalSergeant‘I—8

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASWEDTM-E 30-4516. Compensation mschlag), less a wartime deduction (Ausgleichsbetvag)which in the ranks from major upwarda. TABLE OF BASE PAY. Every member ofcancels out the war service pay and in the lowerthe German Armed Forces in active wartimeranks offsets it in part according to a slidingservice (except when a prisoner of war) receivesscale. This compensation is known as Armedtax-free war service pay (Wehrsold), paid to himForces regular pay (Wehrmachtbesoldung) ; itsin advance, monthly or at shorter intervals ofrecipients are not entitled to civilian family supnotless than 10 days, by his unit paymaster. Ifport. Payments, usually by check, are made byhe has dependents, he receives (also when aa local garrison administration in Germany (usuprisonerof war) family support payable direct alIy near the man's home) for two months into his dependents through the civilian authorities.advance (until 1 January 1945 it was one monthA professional soldier receives, in addition to in advance) to the soldier's bank account or towar service pay (but also when a prisoner of his dependents, if any. These payments are subwar)the equivalent of his regular peacetime pay ject to an income-tax deduction at the source(Fricdensbesoldwrg) consisting of base pay according to a sliding scale based on the amount(Grundgchalt), quarters allowance (Wohnungs- of pay and the number as well as category ofzuschlag), and allowance for children (Kirtder- dependents.Column 1 Column 2Armed ForcesRank (or Wartime) IVar Srwice PayRegular PayPay (Less PayGroup Dollars Tax) Group DollarsGeneral of the Army W 1 11,120 1 (438) la 120(with official quarters) 11,008l (394) 120General W 2 771 (295) lb 108Lieutenant General W 3 705 (264) 2 96Major General W 4 560 (203) 3 84Brigadier Generalw s467 (164) 4 72Colonel W 6 372 (125) 5 60Lieutenant Colonel W 7 284 ( 87) 6 48Major W 8 237 ( 68) 7 43Captain W 9 171 ( 39) 8 38First Lieutenant W 10 109 ( 16) 9 32Second Lieutenant W 11 2 80 ( 7) 10 28Master Sergeant W 19 70 ( 6) 11 24Technical Sergeant W 20 68 (. 5) 11 24less than 12 yrs” W 21 62 ( 4) 24Staff Sergeant W 22 64 ( 4) 12 21less than 12 yrs 3 W 23 60 ( 4) 21Sergeant W 24 63 ( 4) 13 18less than 12 yrs 5 W 25 55 ( 3) 18Corporal W 26 56 ( 3) 14 16less than 12 y-s ’ W 2T 46 ( 2) 16Chief Private W 30 36 ( 52) IS 14First ClassSenior Private W 31 31 (-1 15 14First ClassPrivate First Class 15 14Senior Private, orPrivate with 15 14less than 2 yrs 3 16 121 Regardless of rank: Commander in Chief of a branch of thz Armed Forces (Army, etc.); Chief of the Armed Forces HighCommand.3 Pay Groups W 12.W 16: Musicians; activities suspended in Nov. 44.W 17-W 18: Fortress Shop-Foremen and Horseshoeing Instructors.W 28.W 29: Navy only.3 Total length of active service.Figure 3—Tahlc of ham pay (l)er month).l—9

• MARCH 1945Professional Armed Forces officials (Wehumachtbeawzte)receive, in addition to war servicepay, their peacetime salaries and allowances(Friedensgebiihmisse), less a wartime deductionoffsetting their war service pay as a whole or inpart in the same manner as for professional soldierswho receive Armed Forces regular pay.Non-professional soldiers from the rank ofsenior private first class (Obergefreiteg) upwardmay apply for wartime regular pay (Kriegsbesoldung).They are then paid exactly like professionalsoldiers and consequently are not entitledto civilian family support. Therefore, soldierswith dependents will not make this applicationif the amount of their civilian family supportis higher than their wartime pay would be.Armed Forces officials who have no peace timesalary receive war time regular pay without havingto apply for it.In the foregoing table, column 1 shows theArmed Forces regular pay (Welwmachtbcsoldung)for professional soldiers or wartime regularpay (Kriegsbesoldung) for non-professional’soldiers in ranks from senior private first class(Obergefrcitw) upward and for wartime oficials.The amounts quoted represent the minimum basepay for single men without dependents beforededuction of the income tax, which is shown inparenthesis at the minimum rate applying whenthe soldier has no additional income. All figuresare quoted according to the most recent revision,on 9 November 1944, of the Military War CompensationLaw of 1939. The pay rises for menwith dependents according to a scale which providesfor additional amounts up to 10 children.Column 2 shows the war service pay (Welzrsold)for all members of the Armed Forces, includingofficials, regardless of whether they are also paidunder column 1 or not. The amounts are shownin U. S. dollars at the basic rate of exchange(1 Reichsvvlark equal to $0.40).b. ALLOWANCES. All soldiers in ranks fromgeneral to private receive $0.40 daily as combatarea service compensation (Frontzulage). Thisis granted not because of the danger to life andlimb but for the "more difficult living conditions".On trips taken in the line of duty, the soldier,regardless of rank, receives an allowa&e forovernight quarters and $2.40 per diem additional.Every member of the Armed Forces is entitledto free rations, quarters, and clothing; those whomust or are allowed to take their meals outsidereceive $1.20 per diem as ration money. NoI—IOUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451additional allowance is paid for living quartersin view of the fact that this is already includedin the regular pay, whereas soldiers who receiveonly war service pay are entitled to civilian familysupport. Clothing is free except for officers,who receive a one-time clothing allowance of$180.00 ($280.00 for those wearing the bluenaval uniform) and a monthly upkeep allowanceof $12.00. Soldiers contracting for professionalservice receive a cash bonus, known as Kapitzrlalztc~rhandgrld.of $120.00 (12-year contract) or$40.00 (4%-year contract).c. PENSIONS. Regular officers and professionalsoldiers are entitled to various benefitsupon their clischarge ; the extent of these dependson length of service. They include lump-sumcompensations, unemployment assistance, and, insome cases. pensions. Discharged professionalnoncommissioned officers are encouraged to gointo civil service or agriculture; particularly inthe latter case they receive substantial cash SUIIISfor the purchase or lease of land. All honorablydischarged soldiers receive a mustering-out payof $20.00.d. LEAVES, ETC. Leaves and furloughs areclassified according to their purpose such as recreation,convalescence, occupational, bombing, oremergency. Transportation is free, in principle.The considerable liberality regarding leaves thatwas practiced in the early stages of the war wasradically curtailed under the strain of the lateremergencies, which in 1944 led to their completefreezing, except, possibly, in the case of convalescents.7. Categories of Officers and Other Personnela. REGULAR OFFICERS (aktive Offiziere). Thesmall corps of regular officers inherited by theNazi regime from the pre-1935 German Reichswehrwas substantially increased, before the war,by the recall of all suitable retired officers, theabsorption of many police officers, and the creationof new officers from volunteer officer candidatesand suitable noncommissioned officers andprivates from the regular ranks. At the beginningof the war, suitable professional noncommissionedofficers were given temporary officerranks (as "Kriegsofiziere"), which were madepermanent in 1942.Special categories of regular officers are medicalofficers (Sa&ttitso@7icrc), veterinary officers(Vete&iivofizieve), and ordnance officers (Waf

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451fenoffiziere, commonly designated as Ofiiziere(W)).After 1934, a number of First World Warofficers were recalled, mostly in administrativepositions, as supplementary officers (Ergiimungsofiziere)and designated as aktive Ofiziere (E) ;the (E) has since been dropped and those whowere qualified have been taken into the regularofficer corps. Many officers who had been retiredas "officers not in service" (Ofiziere ausserDienst—-a.D.) as well as many regular officerseligible for retirement were designated as subjectto active service in recalled status "at thedisposal of a branch of the Armed Forces (Army,Air Force, or Navy)" (Ofiziere BUY Verfiigzlngeines Wehmzachtteiles—z. V.). Retired officersdesignated z.V. were normally not recalled to activeservice before mobilization, but a number ofthem were appointed in peacetime to fill certainopen officer positions as "officers recalled to service"(Ofiziere ZUY Dienstleistmg—z.D.). Duringthe war, the designation z.D. has been usedfor certain officers whose qualifications are indoubt and whose final status (regular or reserve)is not determined, The designation of regular,,officers subject to retirement as 2.V. continues inwartime, which means that, such officers, immediatelyupon their discharge as regular officers,are retained in active service in recalled statusin any position in which they may be needed.b. GENERAL STAFF CORPS OFFICERS (Generalstabsofiziere,0fli.i.G.). General Staff Corpsofficers are carefully selected and trained to representthe German General Staff Corps in both commandand staff functions. On division staffs, as"la", they hold the position of operational chiefsof staff, and as "lb" they are chiefs of the rearechelon. In the higher echelons, the intelligenceand training staff sections are likewise in the personalcharge of General Staff Corps officers.c. RESERVE,OFFICERS (Rcserveofizierc). Thenucleus of the reserve officer corps consists ofconscripts who because of their qualifications andperformance during their first year of servicewere accepted in peacetime as reserve officeraspirants (Reserve-O fizier-Anw & ter-—R.O.A.),received special training in platoon-leadershipduring their second year, and were designatedreserve officers after their discharge and subsequentrecall for a four-week exercise period withtheir old unit. Suitable professional noncommissioned‘officers were made reserve second lieutenantsupon being discharged at the end of theircontractual period.In wartime, there cannot be any reserve officercandidates of the peacetime type, as conscriptsare not being discharged upon completion of acompulsory two-year service period; instead,qualified volunteers and suitable conscripts fromthe ranks are designated as reserve officer applicants(Reserve-O fizicr-Be-werber—R.O.B.).Originally, there were two age groups of reserveofficers, those of the reserve class underthe age of 35, designated as O@icre der Reserve—O.d.R.), and those of the Lalzdwehr reserveclass above 35, designated as Ofiziere der Landrzhr—0.d.L.Both types of officers, collectively,were called "officers in inactive status"(Ofiziere des Beul-laubtenstandes—0.d.B.).During the war, the designation 0.d.L. has beeneliminated, so that all reserve officers are 0.d.R.as well as 0.d.B.d. ARMED FORCES OFFICIALS (Wehrmachtbeamte).Officials in administrative, legal, andtechnical service positions are a category peculiarto the German Armed Forces. They consist ofcivil service personnel performing functions withinthe Armed Forces and are recruited, in part,from former professional noncommissioned officerswho became military candidates for civilservice (Militiirar~wtirtcl-) at the end of their 12year contractual period of active military service.Until 1944, none of these officials were classifiedas soldiers, but certain groups have now beenconverted into officers in the Special Troop Service(Trztppensonderdicnst—TDS). These arethe higher administrative officers (Intendanten)in ranks from captain to lieutenant general; thelower administrative officers (Zahl~~&ter) in theranks of first and second lieutenant, and the judgeadvocates (Richter) in ranks from captain tolieutenant general. It was also made possible forreserve technical service officials to become reserveofficers of the motor maintenance troopsif qualified.In addition to regular Armed Forces officials,there are the categories of reserve officials(Beamte dcs Beurlaztbtcnstandcs—B.d.B., also referredto as B.d.R.), officials in recalled status"at the disposal of the Army, etc." (Beamte zurVerfiigung—B.z.V.), and officials appointed forthe duration (BeavPzte auf Kriegsdauer—B.a.K.).These three categories are collectively referred toas supplementary Armed Forces officials (Ergiin1-11

I MARCH 1945zungswehrmachtbeamte). Functionaries of themilitary administration in occupied areas (Militiirverwaltungsbeamte)who are not civil serviceofficials in peacetime are treated in the same manneras these three categories in matters of compensation.e. SPECIALIST LEADERS. Certain positions inranks frotn major to lieutenant and in all noncommissionedofficer ranks except sergeant may befilled by specialists in foreign languages, propagandawork, and similar matters, who have beentrained to fill such positions as "Specialist leader"(Sonderfiihrer). They receive the pay applicableto the position they are holding, but only byvirtue of their appointment to the temporary positionand without the disciplinary powers vested inthe rank.f. NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS (l i nterofiziere).Professiqnal noncommissioned officersare under either a 1Zyear or a 4%-year servicecontract, except officer applicants, who are undercontract for an indefinite period of service. Nonprofessional?are designated as reserve corporals,etc. (Unterofiziere, etc., d.R.) ; the same appliesif they are reserve officer candidates (Fahnenjunker,etc., d.R.).g. WOMEN AUXILIARIES (Helferinnen). Thereare several women's auxiliary corps in the GermanArmed Forces, known as the corps of theheadquarters auxiliaries (Stabshelferinnen) ; signalcorps auxiliaries (Nachrichtenhelferinnen) ofthe Army, Air Force, Waflen-SS, ‘and Navy; andantiaircraft auxiliaries (Flakwaffenhelferinnen)of the Air Force. All wear uniforms and areunder military discipline, receiving free rations,quarters, and clothing. However, they are paidaccording to civil service rates and are not consideredmembers of the Armed Forces. Theranks of their female leaders (Fiihrerinnen) donot correspond to officer ranks. It is possiblethat they have been upgraded in status under recenttotal mobilization measures.h. "CIVILIAN" SOLDIERS (Volkssturm). InOctober 1944, all German male civilians from 16to 60 were made liable to emergency defenseservice under the Armed Forces in a nationalmilitia known as the "V olkssturm". They aredistinguished by armbands and are stated to havemilitary status. It is believed that they do notreceive any service pay while in training but thatthey may be compensated when mobilized forcombat away from their home area.i. OTHER ARMED FORCES PERSONNEL (Wehr1—12UNCLASSIF\EDTM-E 30.451machtgefoige). A distinction must be made betweenmembers of the Armed Forces (Welzrmachtangehiirige)who may be either soldiers orofficials (Beamte), and persons employed by orattached to the Armed Forces (Zzrgeh5rigc zzwWchrmacht), who are collectively referred to asArmed Forces auxiliaries (Wrlzrllzac-htgefolge).The women auxiliaries described above, as well asthe numerous Party organizations when they operatewith the Armed Forces, are in this generalcategory.8. Personal Docturbtstiona. SERVICE RECORD (Welzrpass). The basicpersonal record of the members of the ArmedForces is their service record. This is a bookof passport size issued to them at the time of theirfirst physical examination for military service.It contains a complete record of their pre-militaryservice in the .German Labor Service (Reichsarbeitsdienst),their military status at all times, andall their military activities until the expiration oftheir liability to military service. This book isin their personal possession only while they are-m inactive status, and is retained at their companyheadquarters as long as they are on active service.In exchange for it, as soldiers, they carry ohtheir person a pay and identification book issuedto them at the time of their first induction.b. PAYBOOK (Soldbuch). The paybook of theGerman soldier; is his official means of identificationand contains, in addition to personal data,a record of all units in which he has served andtheir replacement affiliations; his clothing andequipment record, inoculations, hospitalization;his promotions, pay rate group, payments receivedfrom units other than his own, decorations, furloughs,and other data pertaining to his person orhis active service. The paybook contains boththe soldier's military registration number (Welzrnacmmer),under which his service record wasissued to him before his actual induction, and theinscription and number on his identification disc(Beschriftung und Nulnllacr dcr Erkennkngzmarke).c. IDENTIFICATION DISC (Erkennungsmarke).The identification disc which the German soldierwears around his neck consists of two halves,both with identical inscriptions. It is issued tohim by the unit (normally at company level) intowhich he is first inducted; both the name of thatunit and the serial number under which the discwas issued to him are inscribed on it, as well as

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451his blood type. Any unit, however, may issue adisc to a member who has lost his original one,with its own name and a new serial number.tl. UNIT, ROSTER SHEET (Krirgsstal?l?~~lz~lZenblatt).Every Field Army unit and those unitsof the Replacement Army which are of FieldArmy or training type keep an individual rostersheet on every one of their members, containingthe record of the individual's service in the unit.This sheet is to be closed upon the termination ofthat service and then forwarded direct to the soltlier'shome recruiting station (Wrlzrcvsatzdifnststrllc),where his basic military records are kept.There are two different forms: one for officersand officials of all ranks, the other for enlistedmen.e. BASIC MILITARY RECORDS. At the time ofthe first physical examination when the servicerecord (Welzrpass) is issued to the soldier by hisrecruiting sub-area headquarters (Wehrbezirkskommando),the latter opens a correspondingbasic military record book (Wehrstammbuch) forhim, together with an accompanying health recordbook (Gesundheitsbuch) and a classification card(Verwendungskarte). His military registrationcard (Wehrstammkarte), which was made out bythe police authorities as part of his miltary registrationrecord ( Wehrstammblatt), is pasted insidethe front cover of the Wehrstammbuch. Actually,this card is an open envelope with the soldier'sregistration record on its face and containing apolice report (Polizeibericht) on his conduct priorto registration.f. MILITARY REGISTRATION NUMBER (Wehrnummer).This is determined at the time theWehrpass is issued to the soldier; in other words,while he is still a civilian. He retains it permanently,regardless of whether he is in activeservice or not, as his identifying number withthe authorities which administer the conscriptionlaws. It normally consists of the following fiveelements (although there are some variations) :Name of the W chrbezirkskommando.Last two digits of the year of birth.Number of military registration police precinct(in certain larger cities, number correspondingto first letter of family name).Serial number of the conscription (or volunteer)roster sheet (W ehrstammrollenblatt).Number indicating registrant's place on thatsheet (from 1 to 10).g. UPKEEP OF MILITARY RECORDS. The basicmilitary records accompany the soldier to his firstinduction unit, but upon his transfer from it arereturned to and kept at his home recruiting station(Welzre~satsdienststrllc), which normally isa recruiting sub-area hcatlquarters (Wchrbczirkskonzmando)for officers or a subordinate militaryreporting office (Wrhrmcldramt) for enlistedmen. The soldier's unit roster sheets, which areclosed and forwarded to his home recruiting stationupon his transfer from one unit to another,are filed in the inside rear cover pocket of hisWrlzrsta~~znzbrtch. Since the autumn of 1944, thetransfer into the Wehrstammbuch of entries fromthese or other documents that are received forfiling in the pocket has been suspended until afterthe war; it is planned that the entries then bemade from the Wchrpass, which is kept up at alltimes by the unit in which the soldier is serving.The Wehrersatzdienststelle is the home recruitingstation of all Germans who are subject toconscription and therefore is responsible for allmembers of the German Armed Forces, includingvolunteers, regardless of whether they servein the Army, Air Force, Navy, or Waffen-SS.The Wehrstammbuch of naval personnel, however,is kept by their own home base replacementunits. It does not contain any unit roster sheets(Kricgsstammrollenbliitter), as these are replaced,in the Navy, by a conduct book (Fiihrungsbuclz)for enlisted men which follows them from unitto unit, as does their Wchvpass. The health recordbook (Grsundlzeitsb~tch), which otherwise iskept at the Wehrersatzdienststelle together withthe Wclzrstall2llzbzlrh, is in the personal possessionof naval personnel as is, of course, their paybook.Before 1944, the classification card (Vcmefzdlrngsknrtr)was used for entering the soldier'straining record and was forwarded to his firstfield unit for inspection, to be returned within 3days to the home recruiting station. Since theautumn of 1944, the card has not been sent to thefield; but the same purpose is served by the detailedtraining record sheet (Ausbildu~zgsnarlzzeleis),introduced in 1933, which the soldier, uponhis transfer to the field, carries in the pocket ofhis paybook; it is supposed to be destroyed bythe fieldunit, but this is not always done.Records peculiar to the Waffrr~-SS are the S Sbasic record card (SS-Stammkartc), which followsthe soldier from unit to unit as does hisWehrpass, and the SS control card (SS-Oberwachungskarte),which is kept by his SS replacementunit and never follows him into the field.I1—13

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451h. OFFICER RECORDS. Officers, in addition tothe basic records described above have a personalrecord folder (Personalnachweis). In the Navy,which has no unit roster sheets for either officersor enlisted men, the officer's Perso~zalnachweistakes the place of the enlisted men's Fiihrulzgsbuch.Otherwise, the officer's Personalnuchweisnormally is kept in several copies, which may befound at the rep!acement unit of his peacetimeunit; at the corps area headquarters (Wehrkrelskom.mando);at the Army Personnel Office(Heercspcrsonalamt) ; or in the case of reserveofficers at their recruiting sub-area headquarters( Wehrbezirkskommando).In case of discharge or death, one copy is inall cases forwarded to the Armed Forces Welfareand Pension Office (WehrmnchtfiirsorgcundVersorgullgsamt) accompanied by the oficer'smedical record papers (Krankenpapiere).i. PUNISHMENT RECORDS. An individual excerptfrom the unit punishment book (Auszzrg uzudem Strafbuch) is forwarded upon the transferof an enlisted man, together with his Wehrpass,whereas the punishment record of an officer appearsin his character and efficiency report (Bcurteilungsnotiz).In the event of a disciplinary reductionin rank, the soldier's Soldbuch, Wehrpass,and Kriegsstam~~~rollenblatt are closed by his unitand forwarded, for filing in the Wehrstammbuchpocket, to his home recruiting station, which issuesa new Wehrpass. The unit itself issues a newSoldbuch at once, and a new Kriegsstammrollenblattis opened which, in the case of a formerofficer, must be of the enlisted man type. Thereduction is entered only on the closed Kriegsstammrollellblatt.The records of a degradedregular Air Force officer must be requested fromthe Air Force Personnel Office. In the Savy, thePersona2nzachwei.s of a degratletl officer is closed,the reduction having been entered on it, is sentto his home recruiting station, and is replacedby an enlisted man's Fiihrulfgsbztch; whereas thtlI~iihrungsb~~clz of a degraded noncommissionedofficer is continued after the reduction has beenentered. i no s is the reduction entered ineither thr old or the new Soldb~ch or Wchrpass.j . TERMIIYATI~N OF SERVICE. The Wehrpassis given to the soldier upon his honorable dischargefrom active service, rven when such adischarge is temporary (e.g. for occupational reasons).In the latter case, his Soldbuch is returnedto him in exchange for the W&pass\vhen he is recalled to active duty. Otherwise,the Soldhuch and all other basic military recordsremain on file at his home recruiting station. Dischargedsoltlirrs are given a discharge certificate(Entlass~cl~gsscl~~~ill).In case of death, all basic military records ofjhe,, solclier arc filed by the home recruiting stationexcept his Wchrpass, which is given to the nextof kin. A report on his death and burial, togetherwith the broken-off lower half of his identificationdisc and a description of the grave, issent to the Armed Forces Information Bureaufor War Casualties and Prisoners of War, whichis the only agencv authorized to handle inquiries.However, the L@affell-SS had its own informationbureau.1—14

I MARCH 1945Section III. THE HIGH COMMANDI. IntroductionThe basic principle under' the German militarysystem is unity of command. This principle isexemplified in the highest as well as the lowerechelons. Under this system the Army, Navy,and Air Force are regarded as branches of a singleservice (Die U’elwwzacht), headed by the ArmedForces High Command (Oberkommaudo drrWehrwzacht or OKW) (l)*. The OKW controlsall matters of inter-service policy in both peaceand war. It is responsible for all preparationfor national defense in time of peace, and for theconduct of operations in time of war. The headof the OKW is a cabinet member and representsthe joint interest of the three branches with respectto other departments of the Government.In effect, therefore, the ‘German High Commandis divided into four parts, as follows:Armed Forces High Command—Oberkornmalldoder Wehrnzacht (OK?+/) (2); Army High Command—Oberkommandodes Heeres (OKH) (3) ;Navy High Command—Oberkowwza~zdo derKriegsmarine (OKM)(3); Air Force HighCommand—Oberkommando der L,uftwaffe(OKL)(4).Under this system it is not unusual in a taskforce for units of one branch of the ArmedForces to come under the immediate commandof another branch. All personnel may he transferredfrom one branch to another in the sameor equivalent rank. This, in fact, has been doneon a very considerable scale in 1943 and 1944,with a transfer of thousands of members of theAir Force and Navy to the Army.The OKW is supreme and responsible for* thecoordination of the active war effort by the threesubordinate branches, while the OKH is responsiblefor all purely Army matters, just as eachof the other two High Commands is responsiblefor the application of general policies within itsown sphere.In wartime, each High Command has a forwardechelon (1. Stafl el) (5) and a rear echelon(2. Staff eZ). The forward echelon moves to alocation appropriate to the theater of main operations,while the rear echelon remains in Berlin.(Almost all elements of the rear echelon wereevacuated from Berlin beginning in October* See Section 4 for an explanation of the use of thesenumbers.UNCLASSIFIED- E 30-45 11943.) The object of this division is to insurethat all purely routine and administrative matterswill be handled in the rear and not obtrude themselvesinto the actual conduct of operations by theforward headquarters.There is a fairly standardized method of indicatingthe relative size and importance of thevarious subdivisions within a high command. Indescending order. these units with the acceptedtranslations used in this book are:Amt—Office (6)A 111ts gruppc—Group (7 )Abteilung—Uranch (8)(Prlrppr—Section (9)Refer&—Desk (10)In general (with sonle exceptions) an Amt orAmtsgruppr is headed l)!. a general officer and anAbteilztrlg by a field officer.However, these subdivisions are not necessarilysubordinate to one another schematically; i.e.,the channel downward from an Amt may skipAuatsgruppe and go direct to Abtcilung or even toRefcmt.The following description gives the nomenclatureand function of only the more importantsubdivisions of the Armed Forces High Command(Ok’%‘) and the Army High Command! Ok’H). All the German abbreviations used areexplained in a glossary at the end of the section.It should be noted that thi? is the organizationexisting at the beginning of 1945, and that underpresent circumstances the High Command, likeall other aspects of the German ,%rnmed Forces,is subject to rapid and unforeseen changes.2. The OKW (1I)Hitler himself is the Supreme Commander of theArmed Forces (Oberster Befehlslzabcr der Wehrmaclft)(12). Under him, Keitel is the Chief ofthe Armed Forces High Command (Chef desOk’lV) (13) and as such serves as Hitler's chiefexecutive officer in the administration of the,4rmed Forces and the application of his policiesand plans.The operational part of the OKW is theArmed Forces Operations Staff (Wehrwzuchtfiihrzmgsstab),which constitutes the main advisorybody to Hitler on strategy and planning.It is located at the field headquarters of the OK@‘,which is known as the Fiihrerhaziptcluarticr(14).The other subdivisions of the OKW are mostlyl—15

SUPKEME COMMANDER (Obil.HITLERMi l2TOoCHIEF OF ARMED FORCES HIGH COMMAND (CHEF O.K.W.l*KEITELARMED FORCESARMED FORCES ARMED FORCES GENERAL ARMED FORCES ARMED FORCES CONSCRIPTION tINSPECTOR GENERAL OFNATIONAL-SOCIAUSTCENTRAL OFFICE OPERATIONS STAFF OFFICE ECONOMIC OFFICE RECRUITING OFFICEF I C E STAFF MOTOR TRANSPORTATION(G«n Imp KfwP(WZAI IW F St)« (A W Al (Wi A) (W E AlINSF/OKWJ*IGENERAL ARMED FORCESCHIEF OF ARMED FORCESDEPUTY CHIEFMOTOR TRANSPORTATIONBRANCH(CHEF WKWI* (Stellv Ch«f W F St>* (W AilglARMED FORCESREPLACEMENTECONOMIC BRANCHBRANCH(Wi) (Abl E)INTERIOR GROUP(Ag J)ARMED FORCESCHIEF OF ARMED FORCES FOREIGN GROUP ADMINISTRATION SAW MATERIALSTRANSPORTATION (RAIL ft lAg Auill (W VI BRANCHWATER (Ch.f.Trtp)* (FOR MILITARY ATTACHES) (R.I"PARTY LIAISON(Gr zbVICHIEF OFPRISONERS OF WARCHIEF OF ARMED FORCES INTER-SERVICE CENTRAL(Chat Kri.g.g.f)PATROL SERICE COMMUNICATIONS RAW MATERIALS BRANCH(Ch»f W Sir)* (Ag W N V)* (R» Si Al**ARMED FORCESCRYPTOGRAPHIC BRANCHINSPECTORATE FORWELFARE. PENSIONS(In F V)ARMED FORCESSURGEON GENERAL(Chi)*TIRE CENTER ,IChaf W Son)'(W R SI)ARMED FORCES WELFARE IPENSION BRANCH(W VarilCHIEF OF ARMY STAFF ARMED FORCES CENTRALWITH CHIEF OKW HISTORICAL BRANCH PETROLEUM BRANCH(Ch*f H StbChaf OKW)* IW Kr Gaich) CIVILIAN PENSIONS (Min St Al "BRANCH(Abt Rcilhfven)BUREAU OF ARMED FORCES ECONOMIC EXPERTSECONOMIC WARFARE PROPAGANDA BRANCH PERSONNEL SECTIONARMED FORCES(Slob W Fat hi(Sd SI HWKIIW Pr>*CASUALTY BRANCHIW V WlINSPECTOR GENERAL FORPW AFFAIRS IGen Intpactordar Kriagigefangenen)PLENIPOTENTIARY FORSETTLEMENT(B W SiadlCONTRACTS—PRICECONTROL BRANCH(Prai.pr)*'ARMED FORCE5BUDGET BRANCH(W H)HITLER YOUTHLIAISONIA W A HJIARMED FORCESJUDGE ADVOCATE GENERALIW MMILITARY SCIENCEBRANCH(W WIM»Figure 4.—Armed Forces High Commaftd.I

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451with the rear echelon and deal with numerousadministrative matters of joint interest to thet&ree branches of the Armed Forces.The accompanying chart (Figure 4) shows theprincipal branches of the OKW and their subordination.Their functions are discussed in thefollowing paragraphs.a. ARMED FORCES CENTRAL OFFICE (Wchsnzachtzentralanzt—WZA)(15). The officer incharge of this agency is responsible for centralorganizational matters, such as increasing or reducingthe personnel of branches of the HighCommand. The office also includes the ArmedForces Central Group (Ag WZ) (16).b. CHIEF OF ARMED FORCES MOTOR TRANSPOI(TATION (Chef dcs W ehrmai7htkraftfahrwcsens—Chef WKW)(17). This officer is administrativehead of all matters concerning motortransportation. At the same time he holds theposition of Chief Motor Transport Officer in theArmy General Staff (Gen St d li/Gen Qu/Gend Kfw) and controls the Inspectorate of MotorTransport in the General Army Office (AHA/Gend Kfw/.Tn 12). His activities are subject to theclose supervision of Hitler's personal appointee,the Inspector General of Motor Transport (GenImp Kfw).c. CHIEF OF ARMED FORCES TRANSPORTATION(RAIL AND WATER) (Chef des Transportwesensder Wehrmacht—Chef Trspw d W)(18). Thisofficer is administrative head of all rail andwater transportation and also is believed tobe the Chief Army Transportation Officer inthe. Army General Staff (Gen St d H/Chef dTrspw). Subordinate to him are the Field TransportationBranch (F Abt) (19) ) the Central-4rmed Forces Transportation Command (WTrsp Ltg Mitte) (20), and the Traffic Branch(Yerk Abt) (21).d. CHIEF OF THE ARMED FORCES PATROL SERVICE (Chef des W ehrmachtstrcifendienstes— ChefW Str 0)(22). This officer, 'appointed inMarch 1944, is head of all Armed Forces patrolsand all welfare matters concerning troops awayfrom their field units. The welfare function concerningtroops in transit was formerly the responsibilityof the General for Special EmploymentIV (Gen.2.b.l’. IV) (23) in the OKH, anoffice which apparently was superseded by that ofthe Chief of the Armed Forces Patrol Service.e. ARMED FORCES SCR(;EON GENERAL (Chefdes Welarmachtsa~&itswcscns—Chef W San)(24). Subordinate to the Chief of the OKWand, in medical matters, to the CommissionerGeneral of Medicine and Sanitation (General-Komfnissar des Fiihrers fiir das San&its- undGesundheitswesen). The Armed Forces SurgeonGeneral formerly also held the positions of ChiefArmy Medical Inspector (H Sara In@) and ArmySurgeon (H Arzt). In August 1944, the personalunion was dissolved, but the latter two positions,as well as the equivalent positions in the Navy andAir Force, are all subject to the supervision andcontrol of the Armed Forces Surgeon Generalin medical matters.f. CIIIEF OF AR&IV STAFF WITH CHIEF OKW(Chef dcs Hcrrcsstabcs hcim Chef OKW— ChefH St b Chef OKW) (25). Chief Liaison Officerof the Army at Keitel's field headquarters.g. BUREAU OF ECONOMIC WARFARE (Sondcrstabfiir Hand&k&g und wirtschaftliche Kampfmassnahmen—-SdSt HWK) (26). This is asmall agency to represent the interests of theArmed Forces with other government agenciesconcerned with economic warfare and to coordinateglobal economic policies with Japan.h. INSPECTOR GENERAL FOR PRISONER OF WARAFFAIRS (Gcrleralinspekteur fiir das Kriegsgefangenenwcsendcr Wehrma,cht—Gen InspKriegsgef) (27). This personal appointee of Hitleris responsible for insuring the security ofprisoner of war installations in Germany and themost effective employment of prisoner-of-warlabor. He may issue orders to other OKW andOKH agencies concerned with prisoners of war.i. ARMED FORCES BUDGET BRANCH (Wehrmachthaushaltsabtcilu~zg—WH)(28). This isconcerned only with the budget of the OKW andnot with those of the other high commands.j . ARMED FORCES JVDGE ADVOCATE GENERAL(Wehrmachtrcchtsabtcilu~zg—WR) (29).k. ARMED FORCES OPERATIONS STAFF (Wehrmachtfiihrurlgsstab— WFSt) (30). This is ajoint general staff containing officers from ‘allthree branches. It is responsible for over-all planningand strategy and advises and assists Hitlerin the planning and execution of military operations.It includes:(1) Deputy Chief of the Armed ForcesOperations Staff (Stcllvertretender Chef desWehrmachtfiihrungsstabcs—Stellv Chef WFSt)(31). This officer controls the staff proper,which consists of sections concerned with operations,organization, intelligence, and supply. Each

MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451of these sections includes officers representing allthree branches of the Armed Forces. (The intelligencesection now embodies elements of theformer counterintelligence branch and other operationalportions of the old Foreign and CounterintelligenceOffice of the OKW, the bulk of whichwas taken over by the 6\S" in the middle of 1944.)(2) Foreign Group (Amtsgruppe Ausland—Ag Ausl) (32). This includes the Branch forMilitary Attaches of the OKH (Att Abt d OKH)(33). It also is concerned with acquisition offoreign newspapers, rules on travel to foreigncountries, and relations of German military personnelwith foreigners.(3) Armed Forces Signal CommunicationsGroup (Amtsgruppe Wehrmachtnachrichtenverbindungen—AgWNV) (34).' This group maintainsthe trunk communications between the highcommands and is the nerve center of the top commandechelons. It has at least two signal regimentsof the Army at its disposal to maintain aspecial network of land cables and radio channelslinking the OKW, OKH, OKL, and OKM andthe principal subordinate headquarters. It containsa radio communications branch (Ag WNV /Fu)(35) and a wire communications branch (AgWNV/KF) (36).(4) Cryptographic Branch (Chiffrier-Abteilung—Chi) (37).(5) Armed Forces Historical Branch (KriegsgcschichtlicheAbteilung dir Wehrmacht—W KrGesch) (38). Headed by the Fuhrer's OfficialMilitary Historian (Der Beauftr d Fiihrers fiirdie mil Geschichtsschr. This officer also heads theArmy Historical Branch (Kr Gesch Heer) andother historical agencies in the OKH. Thisbranch records all military history which concernsthe three branches of the Armed Forces as awhole.(6) Armed Forces Propaganda Branch (Abteilungfur W'ehrmachtpropaganda—W Pr) (39).Headed by the Chief of the Propaganda Troops(Chef Pr Tr) (40), this branch is responsiblefor all types of military propaganda except thatwhich is fed to the troops by the National-SocialistGuidance Staffs (NSFSt) of the varioushigh commands. It includes sections for the administrationof the propaganda troops, propagandato the home front, military censorship,propaganda to foreign countries, and counterpropaganda.1. GENERAL ARMED FORCES OFFICE (AllgerneinesW ehnnachtatnt—AW A) (41). This office is composed of independent branches in theOKW, grouped together for administrative purposes.It contains:(1) General Armed Forces Branch (AligemeineAbteilung—W Allg) (42).(2) Armed Forces Administration Group(Amtsgruppe Wehrmachtverwaltung—Ag WV)(43). Responsible for the administration of allOKW agencies and OKW personnel and forcertain fiscal matters.(3) Chief of Prisoners of War (Chef desKricgsgcfangenenwesens—Chef Kriegsgef) (44).The administrative head of all matters relatingboth to German and to Allied prisoners of war,he also performs the function of inspector ofprisoner-of-war installations. In this latter capacityhe acts under the directives of the InspectorGeneral for Prisoner-of-War Affairs (Gen InspKriegsgef), who comes directly under the Chiefof the OKW. The agency is divided into a GeneralBranch (Kriegsgef Al/g.) (45) which dealswith treatment, exchange, and release of prisoners; administrative and punitive matters; andrelations with the protective powers and with theInternational Red Cross; and an OrganizationBranch (Krirgsgef. Org.) (46), which dealswith the employment and living conditions ofprisoners of war in German hands.(4) Insfiectorate for Welfare and PensionsAgencies (Inspektion der Fiirsorge und Versorgungsdicrlststrllcllim OKW—Jn FV) (47).Welfare and pension matters for all branches ofthe Armed Forces are controlled by this agency.Subordinate to it are the Armed Forces Welfareand Pensions Branch (W Vers) (48) ) the CivilianPensions Branch (Abt. Reichsvers.) (49),and the Armed Forces Education Branch (WV)(50). Until 1944 the Armed Forces EducationBranch was a separate branch of the AW A.(5) Armed Forces Casualty Branch (AbteilungWehrmachtverlustzvesen—WVW) (51).(6) Armed Forces Plenijotentiary For Settlenzent(R cz~ollnliichtigtcr dcs OKW fiir Siedlungsfragen—BWSied) (52). Arranges for resettlementof Germans in annexed territory.(7) Hitler Youth Liaison (Vertreter der Wehrmachtbeim Jugendffhrer des Deutschen Reichs—AWA/HJ) (53). Represents the interests ofthe Armed Forces in the Hitler Youth organization.(8) Military Science Branch (Abteilwrg Wissenschaft—WWiss) (54). Studies develop1—18

I MARCH 1945mentg of the physical sciences which affect themilitary.IX. ARMED FORCES ECONOMIC OFFICE (Wehrze~irtsclzaftsamt—WiA) (55). This office is responsiblefor long-range military-economic planning,the economic exploitation of occupied areas,and representing .the interests of the ArmedForces with other government departments concernedwith production, raw materials, labor, agriculture,and foreign trade. It contains:(1) Armed Forces Economic Rrarrch (WehrwirtschaftlicheAbteilztng—Wi) (56). Concernedwith general planning matters and controlof the subordinate regional agencies of the office.(2) Razf Materials Branch (Rohstoflabteilung—Ro) (57). This agency has been transferredto the control of the Ministry of Armament andWar Production for the duration of the war. Itincluded or cooperated with the Central RawMaterials Branch (Ro St A) (SS), the ArmedForces Tire Center (W R St) (59) (still underthe Armed Forces Economic Office), the CentralPetroleum Branch (hlin St A) (60), and theEconomic Experts Personnel Section (Stab WFach) (61) (still under the Armed FoicesEconomic Office).(3) Contracts and Price Control Branch (Vertrays-undPreispriifwcsen—Prcispr) (62). Thefixing of prices for Armed Forces Contracts issupervised by this branch. It is now under theMinistry of Armaqent and War Production.n. CONSCRIPTION AND RECRUITING OFFICE(Wehrersatzallz~--—WEA) (63). This office wascreated in the summer of 1943, when the functionof controlling recruiting and conscription for thethree branches of the Armed Forces was transferredfrom the Army High Command to theOKW. It controls the Replacement Branch(Abt. E) (64) ) which was formerly part of theGroup for Replacement and General Troop Matters(Ag E Tr) in the OKH.o. NATIONAL-SOCIALIST GUIDANCE STAFF OFTHE OKW (N ationalsozialistischer Fiihrungsstabdes OKW—NSF/OKW) (65). Established inDecember 1943, this agency is to ensure uniformpolitical indoctrination in the Armed Forces, incooperation with the Party chancellery. It includes:(1) Interior Group (Amtsgruppe Inland—Ag J)’ (66). Formerly a branch (Abt.) of theGeneral Armed Forces Office (2WA), this wasupgraded to a group (Ag.) and transferred tothe National-Socialist Guidance Staff of theUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451OKW during February 1944. It maintains liaisonbetween the OKW and civilian agencies inGermany. It contains a domestic security branch(Ag 3/1) (671, and an ideological guidancebranch (Ag J/Z) (68).(2) Party J*iaisofl (Gruppe z.b.V.—Gr.z.6.V.) (69). Formerly part of the General ArmedForces Office (AM’A), this section was transferredto the cbntrol of the National-SocialistGuidance Staff of the OKW in 1944. It is believedto maintain thv liaison with the National-Socialist Party and to control such matters ascollections for charitable (U Party purposes withinthe LArmed Forces.p. INSPECTOK GENERAL OF MOTOR TRANSPORT( Gelzcralirlspcktcur fiir- das Kraftfahrzwsen—Gcn In@ Kfw) (70). He is immediately subordinateto Hitler and coordinates all matters regardingmotor transport. He may issue ordersto other OKPt’ and OJ

• 0SUIlEME COMMANDI” ,ob,,. N,,.,HITLERNATIONAL-SOCIALISTGUIDANCE STAFFOF THE ARMY1 frijd d Pi TrlCHIEFS OF BRANCHES ZHIEF OF ARMY EQUIPMEN1 BRANCH FOR ALL ARMSARMYATTACHED TOAND COMMANDER OF (Kr Geseh Heer) IGen d Pi Abw)PERSONNEL OFFICEREPLACEMENT ARMYGENERAL STAFF(WoffengenerolelIPA1MILITARY HISTORYINSPECTOR OFRESEARCH INSTITUTIONPANZER TROOPS(kr Geich Forsch Allimp d Pi Trlintt. Inspectorate 6CENTRAL BRANCH OFOFFICERS' RECORDS,INSPECTOR GENERAL FOBCHIEF INFANTRY OPOTENTIAL OFFICERS ANDJCHIEF OF ARMY ARCHIVE!GENERAL STAFF (GZ) (Gen d Inf) PROMOTIONS (Ag P 11IChef Auib) NCOt (G JF) FIELD ARMY BRANCHIChef H Ar

I MARCH 1945simply Generalstab, is a category of speciallyselected and carefully trained officers who fill almostall the important comriland as well as staffpositions throughout the Army. The Army GeneralStaff, on the other hand, occupies a positionanalogous to that of the War Department GeneralStaff; it is the main advisory body to theCommander-in-Chief on operations, intelligence,organization, supply, and general matters ofArmy policy.Both the Army General Staff and the GeneralStaff Corps are headed by the Chicf of the ArmyGeneral Staff (Chef des Gcrwralstabs dcs Hecrcs(72) ) also referred to simply as Chef drs Gcncr&tabs).In time of war the Army General Staff is stationedat field headquarters, leaving only a smallrear echelon in Berlin.The Army General Staff basically consists of12 branches which cover all the proper staff andplanning functions and which are grouped underfive senior officers known as ObcrquartiFvltzeistcr1—V (73). In wartime, a number of additionalhigh-ranking officers are appointed as chief cdviserson the employment of the various armsand services in the field and on certain othertechnical matters; some of these officers and thesections which they control are absorbed organicallyinto the Army General Staff for the durationof the war, while others are regarded as attachedto it. By far the most important of them is theChief Supply and Administration Officer (GencraZquartiermeistcr)(74), who is responsible forthe whole supply and administrative structure ofthe Field Army. Since he and the other wartimeappointees perform the functions of some of theregular branches of the General Staff, it is believedthat the separate functioning of these particularbranches is largely suspended in wartime.Moreover, with the partial merging of the fieldheadquarters of the OKW and the OKH underHitler's personal command at the end of 1941,some of the other normal functions of branchesof the Army ‘General Staff have been wholly orpartly taken over by the Armed Forces OperationsStaff (WFSt). Thus the grouping underOberquartierllleistcr seems to have l)erome largelymeaningless, and it is even doubtful whether thesepositions are actually filled at the present time.Since, however, they are a part of the permanentorganization of the Army General Staff, they aregiven here and on the accompanying chart withtheir appropriate functions and subordinateUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451branches. It is indicated in each case belowwherever the functions of a particular branch arebelieved to have been largely or wholly suspendedor transferred to some other agency:Central Branch (Zentralabteilulzg—GZ) (75).This branch is concerned principally with centraladministrative matters pertaining to the GeneralStaff Corps rather than with the functions ofthe Army General Staff. Until 1943 it made allappointments and promotions of General StaffCorps officers at all echelons; this responsibilitythen was transferred to Branch 3 of the ArmyPersonnel Office (PA/P 3).FIRST SIZIOR GI~NI:I~AL STAFF OFFICER (ObcrqunrtirrnwistrrI—O Qu IJ (76). Thisoffice whichdeals with operations and related matters is reportedto have been vacant for some time, itsfunction being performed largely by the operationssections of the Armed Forces OperationsStaff (.U”FSt). The grouping 0 Qu I includes:Branch 1 (1. Abtcilung or O/I Abt) (77).This branch, concerned with operations, developsand vltzeistc r basic tactical rules and methodsof conducting warfare. Its function of advisingthe cd - of Staff and Commander-in-Chief onactual operations and strategy. has largely lapsed.Branch 5 (5. Abtcilmg) (78). The functionof this branch which deals with transport, hasbeen handled since the beginning of the war bythe Chief Transportation Officer attached to theGeneral Staff (GEM St d H/Chef Trspw).P,ranch 6 (6. Abteilzrng) (79). Functions ofthis or which is concerned with rear echelonshave been handled since the beginning of the warby the Chief Supply and Administration Officer(GeuSt d H/Gen 0~).Branch 9 (9. Abtril!tJrg) (SO). Topography,specific responsibility of this branch, has beenhandled since 1941 by the Chief of Mapping andSurvey in the General Staff (Gcn St d H/KrIinrt Venn Chef).El-an& 10 (10. Abtcilung) (81). Maneuversand operational planning, now for the most partare divided among a number of other agenciesof the OKTV and OKN, both at field headquartersand at the rear echelon.GEL Y SEN TOR GKNEKAT. STAFI; OFFICER(Ohc’l’(lucrl-tirrrlrllistc~ II—O Qu II) (82). Thrtraining functions of this grouping largely aretaken over in wartime by the Home Command; itincludes:Branch 4 (4. Abtcihg or Ausb. Abt.) (83).This branch is responsillle in wartime only for1—21

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45Itraining within the Theater of Operations; alltraining in the Zone of the Interior is under theChief of Training in the Replacement Army(Chef Ausb).Branch 11 (11. A&&lung) (84). Militaryschools and officer training which are the functionsof this branch are now entirely under the HomeCommand, especially the Inspector General forPotential Officers NCOs (GJF).THIRD SENIOR GENERAL STAFF OFFICER (OberquartiermeistcrIII—O Qu111) (85). This grouping,responsible for organization includes:Branch 2 (2. Abteilung or Org. Abt.) (86).This branch is ,responsible for laying down rulesrelating to various aspects of organization in thefield and, in conjunction with the chiefs of armsand services attached to the General Staff, recommendingto the General Army Office (AHA)the issuance of changes in the existing Tables ofOrganization.Branch 8 (8. Abteilung) (87). The functionof this branch ‘which was concerned with technicalservices is now probably handled by otheragencies such as the Chief of Technical Troopsunder the Chief Supply and AdministrationOfficer (Gelz Qu/Gen d Tech% Tr).FOURTH SENIOR GENERAL STAFF OFFICER(OberquartiermeisterIV—OQuIV) (88). Theintelligence branch is probably the only one of thefive major groupings in the Army General Staffwhich is still fully operative. Its two geographicalbranches are subdivided into various geographicalsections which collect and evaluate informationand disseminate intelligence regardingthe armies of the various countries in the form ofprinted manuals and periodic reports. . Thegrouping includes:Branch 3, Eastern Armies (3. Abteilung, FrdHeere Ost) (89). Deals with the armies of theSoviet Union, Scandinavia, the lower Balkans,Africa, and the Far East.Branch 12, Western Armies (12. Abteilung,Fr$ Heere West) (90). Deals with the armiesof Western Europe (Section II), Great Britain(Section III), the upper Balkans (Section IV),and the Western Hemisphere (Section V). TheWestern Hemisphere section was transferredfrom the Eastern Armies Branch to WesternArmies Branch after Pearl Harbor.FIFTH SENIOR GENERAL STAFF OFFICER (OberquartiermeisterV—O Qu V) (91). Deals withmilitary history. This group formerly includedspecial sections for historical research, Army lil—22braries, and Army archives, all of which weretransferred in 1942 to the Fiihrer's Official MilitaryHistorian (D. Beauftr d Fiihrers fiir die milGeschichtsschr) (92). It still nominally includesBranch 7, Military Science Branch (7. Abteilungor Kr Wiss Abt) (93), but the functions of thisbranch are also believed to have been largely takenover by the new Army Historical Branch (KrGesch Heer) under the I;iihrer's Official MilitaryHistorian.CHIEF SUPPLY AND ADMINISTRATION OFFICER(Generalquartiermcister—Gcn Qu) (94). Thisofficer does not belong to the basic organization ofthe Army General Staff in peacetime but was appointedat the beginning of the war, in accordancewith previous plans, to take charge of thewhole supply and administrative structure of theField Army. He was given an elaborate organization,described below, including a number ofattached officers as chiefs of the various servicesfor the Field Army; these officers bear the samerelationship to the General Staff as the chiefs ofarms except that they come under the Chief Supplyand Administrative Officer instead of beingattached directly to the Chief of General Staff.The organization given below is basically thatwhich applied in the early stages of the war andtakes into account only the more important ofthe temporary modifications which have occurredsince. It should be noted that the first threesections, called supply sections (Quarticrmcistcr-Gruppell 1, 2, 3) (9.5) are concerned with theplanning, organization, and general operation ofthe services in the field; they are each headed bya General Staff Corps officer and may be regardedas constituting the G-4 division of the ArmyGeneral Staff. All the other sections, which arenumbered according to the standard German stafforganization, deal with the actual functioning ofthe various services and are headed by the chiefsof these services for the Field Army.Section Qu 1 (Gruppe Qu 1) (96). Generalplanning and organization of supply in the field,establishment of communication lines and rearboundaries of the Theater of Operations, transportquestions in conjunction with the Chief ArmyTransportation Officer (Chef Trspzer), and controlof those service troops not sub-allotted toarmy groups and armies.Section Qu 2 (Gruppe Qu 2) (97). Civilaffairs policies in the communications zone, especiallythe exploitation of the country for mili

I MARCH 1945tary purposes; evacuation, booty, and prisonersof war.Section Qu 3 (Gruppe Qu 3) (98). Action onsupply requisitions from army groups and armiesfor ordnance, fuel, and engineer equipment.These requisitions are adjusted in accordancewith over-all plans and policies and are then forwardedto the authorities in the Zone of the Interior.Section II a (Gruppe II a, Adjutantur) (99).Personnel and security matters within the staffof the Chief Supply and Administration Officer.Section III, Field Legal Administration{Gruppe III, Feldjustizvemaltung) (100).Headed by the chief of the Judge Advocate General'sDepartment in the field, responsible forquestions of military law and jurisprudence.This section was upgraded to a branch and transferredto the control of the General for SpecialEmployment (Gen z b V) sometime after thebeginning of the Russian campaign,Section IV a, Chief Army Administrative Oftiter(Gruppe IV a, Hecresintendant) (101).Resppnsible for the general control of administrativematters and the personnel who deal withthem throughout the Field Army. These mattersinclude pay, clothing, personal equipment, rations,billeting, and fiscal matters.Section IV b, Army Surgeon (Gruppe IV b,Heeresarzt—H Arzt) (102). Controls all medicalmatters and medical personnel throughout theField Army, subject to the direction of the ChiefArmy Medical Inspector (H San Imp). (Atpresent these two positions are believed to beunited in one person.)Section IV c, Army Veterinarian (Gruppe IV c,;fecrcmeteriniir—H Vet) (103). Controls allveterinary matters and veterinary personnel inthe Field Army, subject to the direction of theChief Veterinary Inspector (Vet Imp).Section V, Chief Motor Transport Officer(Gruppe V, General dcs Kraftfahrwesens—-Gen dKfw) (104). Controls the motor maintenancetroops in the Field Army and is responsible forgeneral questions of availability and utilizationof motor transport. He is simultaneously incharge of a group in the General Army Office(AHA) responsible for the same matters in theZone of the Interior, and holds concurrently theoffice of Chief of Armed Forces Motor Transportation(Chef WKW) under the OKW.Section Z, Civil Commissioner (Gruppe 2,Zitilbeauftragter) (105). Responsible for non-UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451military matters in the civil administration of occupiedareas in the Theater of Operations, includingrelations with the civil authorities andthe discipline of the population; cooperates withSections Qu 2 and III above. This section isbelieved to have been renamed Qu 5.Chief of Supply Troops (General der Naclz- eschubtruppen) (106). Controls all GeneralHeadquarters supply troops, working in cooperationwith Section QU 3 on questions of theiremployment. Known as H cercs~zaclzschubfiilzreruntil October 1942.Section F. P., Army Postmaster (Gruppe F.P., Hcevesfeldpostmeister) (107). Responsiblefor all questions relating to the Army PostalService in the Field Army.Chief of Technical Troops (General der TechnisclzenTruppelz—Gen d Tech Tr) (108).Chief adviser on the organization and employmentof the ,technical troops. These troops,while classified as a combat arm, perform a numberof highly technical services requiring specializedequipment for the armies in the field.Senior Military Police Officer (Hiihcrer Feldgcndarllzcrir-O~tfi,-icr—HohFeldgen Offs) (109).Responsible for all matters concerning the organizationand employment of the military policein the Field Army.c. CHIEFS OF BRANCHES ATTACHED TO THEGENERAL STAFF. The Commander-in-Chief ofthe Army and the .Chief of the Army GeneralStaff have at their disposal in wartime a groupof general officers representing the various combatarms \vho serve as the principal advisers onthe organization, training, equipment, and tacticalemployment of their respective arms in the field.They usually have no actual command authoritybut may issue instructions and suggestions tothe troops based on the evaluation of experiencein the field. For the publication of technicalmanuals and the like they collaborate with theinspectorates of their branches in the GeneralArmy Office. They may also recommendchanges in the organization or equipment of thetroops to the Organization Branch of the GeneralStaff (Gen St d H/Org Abt) for forwarding tothe inspectorates.Three officers in this category, whose titles beginwith Chef instead of General, are regarded asorganically absorbed into the General Staff forthe duration of the war instead of being attachedto it like the others.The chiefs of those branches of the GermanI—23

IMARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45IArmy which are ,classified as service troops arelikewise attached to the General Staff in wartimebut, as has been shown above, are placed underthe Chief Supply and Administration Officer.(The Chief 61 Technical Troops, which are officiallyclassified as a combat arm, is neverthelessunder the Chief Supply and Administration Officersince these troops actually have the functionof service troops.)The absence of a representative of the Panzertroops from this group of senior officers is explainedby the creation in 1943 of the InspectorGeneral of Panzer Troops (Gcn Insp d Pz Tr)to supersede the previous Chief of Mobile Troops,who had been attached to the General Staff likethe other chiefs of branches. The InspectorGeneral of Panzer Troops is represented in theGeneral Staff by his Chief Antitank Officer forAll Arms (Gen d Pz Abw aller Waff en).(1) Chief Infantry Oficer (General der Infanterie—Gen d Inf) (110). Responsible forregular infantry, light infantry, mountain infantry,cavalry, and reconnaissance matters.(2) Chief of Armored Trairls (Kommandcurdcr Eisenbahn-Panzerziige—Kdr d Eish Pz Ziige)(111).(3) Chief Artillery Oficcr (Gcncrcl der Artilleric—Gel?d Art) (112). Controls the ChiefCoast and Fortress Artillery Officer (Gen d HKiist u Fest Art)(113), the Chief Army AntiaircraftArtillery Officer (GCU d H Flak Tr)(114), and the Chief Armored Artillery Officer(Hijh OffzPz Art) (115).(4) Chief of Mapping and Sur~,ey (Chef dcsKriegskartex- und Vermessungswesens—Kr KartVerm Chef) (116). This officer is a part of therear echelon of the General Staff (Gelz St d H/2.Stafel) and is represented at field headquartersby the Commander of Mapping and SurveyTroops (Kdr d Kurt u Verm Tr) (117) ) who ishis direct subordinate.(5) Chief Signal Oficer (Chef dcs Heercsnachrichtenwesens-—ChefHNW) (118). Part ofthe General Staff in wartime, with offices at therear echelon as well as at field headquarters.(6) Chief Engineer and Fortifications Oficer(General der Pioniere ,und Fcstungen—Gen d PiuFest) (119). Controls the Inspector of Fortifications(Insp Fest) (120) and shares with the GeneralArmy Office control of the Chief of AmphibiousEngineers (Hijh Ldgs Pi Fii) (121).(7) Chief Chemical Warfare Officer (Generalder Nebeltruppen—Gen d Nbl Tr) (122).l—24(8) Chic/ of Volunteer Units (Gcncral derFreiwilligenverbti~lde—Gen d Freiw Verb) (123).This post was created in January 1944 to replacethat of the former General of Eastern Troops(Gen d Ost Tr)(12-l). It tlrals \\-ith the organization,equipment, training, and employment ofunits formed from impressed Soviet prisoners ofwar. The Chief of \-oluntcer Units is subordinateto the Chief of the Army General Staff inmatters concerning the Field Army and to theChief of Army Equipment and Commander ofthe Replacement Army (Chef II Riist II. BdE) inmatters affecting the Zone of the Interior. Hispermanent representative in the ReplacementArmy is the Commander of Volunteer Units(Kdr d Freiw Verb) (125).(9) Chief Army Transportation Officer (Clzcfdcs Transportwescns—Chef Trspw) (126). Alsobelieved to hold the post of Chief of ArmedForces Transportation (Chef Trspw d W). Partof the Army .General Staff, responsible for railand water transportation. He controls the Chiefof Railway Troops (Gen d Eisb Tr)(127).(10) Ge)zeral for Special E~?aploynzent (Discip$ne)(General zu besondcrcr Verwendung—Gen z b V)(128). Responsible for the maintenanceof discipline, counter-espionage, and legalmatters in the Field Army. Controls the Branchfor Army Matters (Hecr U’cs Abt), which isconcerned with the maintenance of discipline; thePenal Section (Gr Str) ; and the Army FieldLegal Branch (H Feld Just Abt), which wasformerly the Field Legal Administration Sectionunder the ChiefOfficer.Supply and Administrationd. MEDICAL AND VETERINARY INSPECTORS.The following chief inspectors are in charge ofall medical and veterinary matters throughout theGerman Army and are directly under the Commander-in-Chief:(1) Chief Army Medical Inspcrtor (Hrrrrs-Sanitiitsins~ckteur—H San Insp) (129). Instructsthe Army Surgeon (H Arzt) on medicalmatters in the Field Army and controls medicalmatters in the Replacement Army, in the samemanner as the inspectors -of branches, through theMedical Inspectorate (S Jn) in the General ArmyOffice. His activities are subject to the supervisionand control of the *Armed Forces SurgeonGeneral (Chef W San). (At present the ChiefArmy Medical Inspector is believed to hold concurrentlythe office of Army Surgeon.)(2) Chief Veterinary Inspector (Veteriniirin

I MARCH 1945spckteur—Vet Insp) (130). Instructs the ArmyVeterinary (H Vet) on veterinary matters in theField Army and controls veterinary matters in theReplacement Army, in the same manner as theinspectors of branches, through the VeterinaryInspectorate (V Jn) in the General Army Office.e. ARMY PERSONNEL OFFICE (Hccrcspersonalamt—PA)(131). This office is independent ofboth the General Staff and the Hcftne Commandand comes under the direct control of the Commander-in-Chiefof the Army. It is responsiblefor all appointments, transfers, promotions, andother matters concerning all types of officers inthe German Army. It therefore has been a powerfulinstrument in exercising control over the officercorps.The order for the promotion of an officer tothe rank of colonel or above is issued by Hitlerhimself on the recommendation of the PersonnelOffice. In lower ranks it makes the promotionson its own responsibility.The authority to transfer various types of specialistofficers (medical, veterinary, ordnance, motormaintenance, and Special Troop Service) isdelegated by the Personnel Office, so far as thelower ranks are concerned, to the technicalbranches which deal with these services; for theupper ranks, the Personnel Office orders the transferson the recommendation of the technicalbranches.The Personnel Office does not concern itselfwith Armed Forces officials, who are dealt withexclusively by the Army Administration Office(VA) ; it should be noted, however, that two importantformer categories of these officials arenow classified as officers in the new Special TroopService and are therefore handled by the PersonnelOffice.The Personnel Office includes seven main subdivisionsdesignated as P 1, P 2, etc. Three ofthese are now groups (Amtsgruppen) with severalsubordinate branches each, while the othersare independent branches (Abteilungen). GroupP 6 is a recent offshoot of the basic Group P 1,and for this reason its-subordinate branches arenumbered consecutively with those of P 1.While the bulk of the Personnel Office is normallystationed in wartime with the rear echelon'of the High Command, each of its branches alsohas a forward echelon at field headquarters, wherethe major decisions in personnel matters are made.(1) Group P 1 (Amtsgruppe P 1—Ag P 1)(132). Responsible for all officers' records, ap-UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451pointments, transfers, and promotions as well asfor basic directives regarding the handling ofofficer personnel matters. Its various br’anchesdeal with officers according to categories orbranches of service. It includes :(a’) Branch 1, C‘ci~fl-al Hranclc (1. Zcntral-AZ&lung) ( 133). Handles basic policies and directives,including such general matters as thetransfer of large groups of officers from otherbranches of the Armed 1;orces to the Army.(b) Branch 2 (2. /lhtcilulzg) (134). Infantryand cavalry officers.(c) Brallch 3 (3. ifbtcilung) (135). Officersof the Panzer troops and of the supply troops.(d) Brancl~ 4 (4. rfhtrilwg) (136). Artilleryand chemical warfare officers.(e) nranclz 5 (5. Ahteilzorg) (137). Engineerand signal officers.(f) Branch 6 (6. rlhtrilulzg) (138). Reserveofficers and officers in recalled status (Ofiziere2. V.).Branch 7, which deals with specialist officers(medical, veterinary, ordnance, motor maintenance), is believed to have formed the nucleus forthe new Group P 6 formed in May 1944 (see below).(2) Group P 2 (Amtsgruppc P 2—Ag P 2)(139). Responsible for officer education andwelfare. It was expanded from a branch in August 1942 when "ideological training" for the oficercorps was added to its functions. It includes:ia) Policy Srctiorl, forwrYly Branch 1 (Chef~/YzI~@, formerly 1. Abtrilmg) (140). Education,questions of honor among officers, political matters,special cases involving general officers andhigh staff officers.(b) Branclz 2 (2. Ahtcilung) (111). Final decisionsin all individual cases involving honor,sub - and officer- behavior.(c) Branch 3 13. .fhtrilw~~g) (142). Complaints,questions of 12ryan ancestry, marriage,welfare measures, and personal assistance forofficers and their dependents.(3) Branch P 3 (Ncrres-Prrsollalahteilung 3—P 3)(143). Responsible for all General Staff. Corps officers, including their selection and trainingas well as their transfer and promotion. It tookover full responsibility for these functions fromthe Central Branch of the Army General Staff(Gen St d H/GZ) in nfarch 1943.(4) Branch P 4 (Hrcrrs-Prrsonalabtrilung 4—P 4) (144). Responsible for officer replacements. Lays down general directives for the In1—25

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Spector General for Potential Officers and Noncommissionedofficers (G/F).(5) Branch P 5 (Heeres-Perso?zalabteilung 5—P 5) (145). Responsible for decorations andawards. Divided into several sections, each dealingwith a different type of decoration or award.(6) Group P 6 (Amtsgruppe P 6-Ag P 6)(146). Responsible for personnel matters ofofficers in the specialist careers (Sonderlaufbah-Taen) and of specialist leaders (Sonderfiihrer). Itwas formed in May 1944 as an offshoot of GroupP 1 as a result of the creation of the SpecialTroop Service (TSD), comprising the administrativeofficers (Intendanten) and the judge advocates(W ehmzachtrichter), who were formerlyclassified as Armed Forces officials and dealt with •by the Army Administration Office. The numbersof the branches in this group follow those ofGroup P1 . It includes :(a) Branch 7 (7. Abtcilung) (147). Medical,veterinary, ordnance, and motor maintenance officers.In the lower ranks the authority to transferthese officers is delegated to the Chief Army MedicalInspector (H San In.@), the Chief VeterinaryInspector (Vet Imp), the Ordngnce Inspectorate(Fz Jn), and the Chief Motor Transport Officer(Gcn d Kfzu) ; in the upper ranks, transfers aremade on the recommendation of these agencies.(b) Bramh 8, General Bramlt (8. Allg.)Abteilung) (148). Handles basic policies and issuesgeneral directives regarding officers controlledby the group.(c) Branch 9 (9. Abteilung) (149). Probablyhandles the officers in the Special Troop Service(TSD).(d) Branch 10 (10. Abfeilung (Sdf.)) (lS0).Responsible for personnel matters of specialistleaders (Sdf) (such as interpreters). They wereformerly taken care of by Branch 7 when it wasstill part of Group 1.(7) Brarlch P 7 (Hem-es-Personalabteilung 7—P 7) (151). Responsible for personnel mattersof all officers belonging to Field Army units underthe control of Himmler, primarily Yolks Grenadierdivisions (VD). This branch was formed inOctober 1944.(8) Special Section (Gruppe z b V)(152).This section contains the officers who are chargedwith the handling out of decorations and medalsand the performance of other ceremonial functions.It was formerly called Section for Representationand -Honors (Gruppe Rep/E).(9) Coztrscs fOl Senior Personnel Oficcrsl—26(Lehrg i ingc fiir hiihcre Adjtcfalltell—-Lehrg jhiihere Adj) (153). This section deals with theadministration of special six to eight-week coursesgiven by the Army Personnel Office for SeniorPersonnel Officers. These consist mainly of lectureson the functioning and policies of the ArmyPersonnel Office and affiliated agencies.f. CHIEF OF ARMY EQUIPMENT AND COMMANDER OF THE REPLACEMFNT ARMY (Chef dnHeercsriistwlg wzd Befehlshabrr dcs Evsatsheercs—Chef H Riist u BdE) (154). This officer is thewartime deputy of the Commander-in-Chief ofthe Army charged with all the functions of theZone of the Interior. These are primarily theconscription, training, aand replacement of personnel; the procurement, storage, and issue ofequipment; and territoria1 administration. Hecontrols all the principal offices of the High Commandwhich are left behind as the rear echelonon mobilization, with the exception of the PersonnelOffice. These are discussed in the followingsix lettered paragraphs.g. GENERAL ARMY OWICE (AllgenzeiltrsHre~csamt—AHA) (155). Similar in functionto the General Armed Forces Office in the OKW(AWA), this office is composed of a number ofimportant, but partly unrelated, branches in theOKH, grouped together for administrative purposes.Its chief is believed to act as the deputyto the Chief of Army Equipment and Commanderof the Replacement Army. It is used byvarious agencies both in the Home Command andin the Field Army and does most of the paperwork for the OKH. It contains:(1) Staff (Stab AHA) (156). The staff ofthe General Army Office is a central agency whichapproves the publications written by subordinateunits and issues tables of organization, tables ofequipment, manuals, and other publications. Itincludes the Army Regulations Administration(Hecrcs-Druckvorschriftcmwrrt ~ alfw~g — HDvV)(1571, a section which issues all directives onclothing and uniforms (Stab/BkZ) (lSS), and asection concerned with .technical developments inweapons and equipment (Soudcrstab A) (159).(2) Inspectorates of Ar~ns and Services.There are approximately 15 of these inspectorates.grouped. under the General Army Office, whichare the principal agencies for handling the paperwork for their respective arms and services. Theyhave no command functions themselves but keeprecords and publish orders, directives, trainingmanuals, and other material on behalf of the two

I MARCH 1945types of chiefs of arms and services: the inspectors(W’a.#cninspekfeure) in the ReplacementArmy and the chiefs of branches (Waflcugcrzerale)attached to the General Staff in theField Army. They are referred to either as inspectorates(Ins~ektioncrz—In) or as branches(Waffenabteilulzgen). Most of them have numbers,ranging between 2 and 13, but several havebeen upgraded to the status of a group (Amfsgruppe)and control two numbered branches./n 1, the Inspectorate of Cadet Schools (Inspektionder Kriegsschulcn), was in peacetime directlysubordinate to the Commander-in-Chief of.the Army; its function has now been taken overby the Inspector General for Potential Offcrrsand Noncommissioned officers (GJF). Thepresent inspectorates of arms and services are asfollows:(a) Infantry Branch — Inspectorate 2 (Infanterieabtcilulzg—Jn2) (160). Attached to theInfantry Branch is the Senior Infantry Officerfor Land Fortifications (Hijh Inf Offz fiir dieLandesbcf ) (161), who is directly subordinate tothe Chief of the General Army Office. He assiststhe Chief Engineer and Fortifications Officer(Inspector of Fortifications) (Insp Fesf) at theArmy General Staff in fortification matters concerningthe infantry. He is also responsible forthe uniform training of officers charged with thedefense of fortifications.(b) Riding-and Driving Branch—Insprctorafc3 (Abteilurig Reit- und Fahrwesen—Jn 3) (162).Concerned with the training of men who handlehorses as riders or drivers.(c) Artillery Group (Anztsgruppe Artilleric— -Ag Art)(163). Formed in July 1944 to controlthe following two inspectorates :Artillery Branch—Inspectorate 4 (Artillerieabt&lung—Jn4) (164).Army Antiaircraft Artillery Branch-—Inspectorate13 (Hceres-Flakartillcricabtetiluug—Ju 13)I165).((1) Engineer Branch — Inspectorate 5 (Piouierabteilung—Jn5) (166).(e) Inspectorate of Fortifications (Inspektionder Festungen—Jn Fest) (167). Concerned withthe training of fortress engineers.(f) Panzer Troop Branch — Inspectorate 6(Abteilung Panzertruppe—Jn 6) (168). Believedtransferred to the control of the InspectorGeneral of Panzer Troops (Gen Insp d Pz Tr)when that office was created in 1943.(g) Signal Group (Arntsgruppe Nachrz’chtcn-UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451zecscn) (169). Formed in December 1943 withthe expansion of Inspectorate 7. May be controlledby the Chief of Training (Chef Ausb) aswell as the General Army Office. It includes:Signal Cranch—Inspectorate 7 (N achrichtentruppen-Abteilung—Jn7) (170).Signal Equipment Branch (Nachrichtengeriit-Abtcilung—N. Gcr. Abt)(171)..1rmy Communications Branch (Heeresnaclz~lchtc~~vcrbi~~d~r~~~ls-.3btrilung — HNV). Similarin function to the Armed Forces CommunicationsGroup in the OKW (Ag WNY)(172).(Ii) Supply Branch — Inspcctorate 8 (AbteilungNachschubtruppcn—Ju 8). (173). Attachcdto this branch is the Senior Officer of AdministrativeTroops (Hoh Off d Vera TY)(174), responsible for the uniform training ofthe administrative troops in the ReplacementArmy under the directives of the Chief of Training.(i) Chemical Warfare and Air Raid ProtectiojlBranch—Iusficctorate 9 (Abteiluug Nebeltruppe,Gasabwehr uud Luffschutz-—Jn 9) (175).(j) Rail-way Errginecs Branch—Impectorate10 (Eisenbahllpionier- rlbteilung—Jn 10) (176).(k) Branch for Tcchuical Troops-—inspectorate11 (Abtcilung Tcchnische Truppen—Jn(1) Group of the Chief Motor TransportOficcr (General dcs k’raftfnlr)‘~lcseI2s-—Gen dKfw) (178). Formerly called Chief of Motorization(G&n d Mot)(179). The Chief MotorTransport Officer, in addition to being responsiblefor all motor transport in the field, also controlsthe following agencies in the General Army Office :Motor Transport Branch—Inspectorate 12(ilbtcilung Kruftfahrwrseri—Ju 12) (180).Chief of Motor Repair (Chef des Instandsetzungsivcscn—cl~c~fInst) (181).Senior Motor Maintenance Troop Officer (H i i-Jicrcr Offizicr der Kraftfahrparktruppc—Hoh Offzd Kf Pk Tr)(1%). He supervises the trainingof motor maintenance troops in the ReplacementArmy and his position is equivalent to that of aninspector.(111) dfcdical Inspectnratc (Heeres-Saniti i tsinspektion—SJn)(183). This inspectorate alsocontains the staff of the Chief Army Medical Inspector(HSan lnsp) and is equivalent to a group.It includes:Personnel Branch (Personalabteilung—S Jn/Pevs)(184).l—27

IMARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Organization Branch (Orga~aisatio~zsabteilu~zgtion staff was set up to liquidate the affairs of—S Jn/Org) (185).Branch for Medical Science and Hygiene(Abteilung fiir Wissenschaft und Gesundheitsfiihrung—.SJn/Wi G) (186).(11) Veterinary Inspectorate (Veteriniirinspektion—V19%)(187). This inspectorate alsocontains the staff of the Chief Veterinary Inspector(Vet Imp).(0) Ordnawe Inspcctoratc (Fcldzcugi~zspcktion—FxJGZ)(188).The head of the inspectoratealso holds the position of Chief Army OrdnanceOfficer (Hecrcsfcldzcugrncistcr) (189). Assuch he controls the entire system of ordnancedepots in Germany.units which were destroyed in the Sixth Army.It later was expanded to deal with those destroyedin Army Group Africa. In the summer of 1944this staff was m q de a permanent part of the HighCommand structure, with the mission of inactivatingall units destroyed on any front. It takescharge of auy remaining funds which were theproperty of such units.(6) Drnaobilizatior~ BranclL (Abteilurlg Demobilmachuug—AbtDcmob) (197). Issues rulesand directives for future demobilization.17) Chief of Army Mz~.srurn.s ( Chef dcr Hccresmusee+—ChefHccr Mus) (108).h. CHIEF OF TRAINING IN THE REPLACEMENT(3) Group for Rcplacemcn,t and General Troop AKMIIY (Chef dcs Ausbildadngswesens iwa Ersatz-Matters (Amtsgruppe Ersatzwcscn und Allgr- hccr—Chef Ausb) (199). Appointed in OctofneilzeTrzL~pe~zangclegc~theitel1 — Ag E Tr) ber 1942, this officer is immediately subordinate(190). This group has generally the same responsibilitiestoward enlisted personnel as theArmy Personnel Office (PA) has toward officers,except that it does not concern itself with individuals.It establishes policies and issues directiveson all types of personnel matters. Until thesummer of 1943 it included the ReplacementBranch (Abt E), whi’ch has since been incorporatedinto the Conscription and RecruitingOffice (WEA) in the OKW. It is believed thatnevertheless the name of the group has thus farremained unchanged. It contains :(a) Branch for Gcwral Troop Itfattcrs (Abtcilwzgfiir Allgcmcine Truppcna~lgclcgfnllcitcll—T+Abt)(191). This is the most important branchin the group, and probably of larger size than itsname implies. It issues all types of orders to thetroops, such as transfer regulations, promotionpolicies, and regulations regarding welfare andpersonal affairs. It includei a penal section, a sectionfor noncommissioned officer affairs, and asection for German prisoners of war in Alliedhands.(b) Chaplains Section (Gruppe Scclsorgc—GrS)(192).(c) Branch for Billets and Maxeuwer Areas(Abteilung Unterkunft und Trupperaiibungsplirttzc—Abt U) (193). Arranges for the requisition ofpremises needed for military purposes.(4) Arnty Jztdgc 14dvocatY Gtw~ral's Grout(Amtsgruppz Heeresrechtsweselz—Ag HR Wes)(194). Contains a Judge Advocate's branch(HR) (195) and a legal section (Just).(5) Unit Inactivation Staff (Abzwicklutlgsstah—Abw St) (196). After Stalingrad an inactival—28to the Chief of Army Equipment and Commanderof the Replacement Army. He controls alltraining conducted within the Replacement Army,using as his representatives the inspectors of armsand services (Wafleninspekteure) (ZOO) listedbelow. Through these inspectors he utilizes thefacilities of the inspectorates of the correspondingarms and services in the General Army Officefor working out the details of training programsand methods, the issuance of directives and manuals,and other paper work. The Chief of Trainingis not responsible for the specialized trainingof the medical, veterinary. ordnance, and motormaintenance troops, as this is handled by the inspectoratesof these branches in the General ArmyOffice operating under the direct control of theirown independent inspectors.The following are subordinate to the Chief ofTraining:(1) Inspector of Infantry (Znspekteur der 1~fanteric—Zjlsp d Zjlf) (201)(2) Inspector of Riding and Driving (It~spcktcurdcs R&t- und Falwwcsrrls) (202).(3) Inspector of Artillery (Inspekteur derArtilleric—Itasp d Art) (203).(4) Inspector of Army Antiaircraft Troops(Insprktrur der Heercsflaktruppen—Insp HFlak) (204).(5) Inspector of Engineers aud Railway Engineers(Ins/wktraw der Piowicrc zwd Eisenbahnpio&-e—Inspd Pi u Eisb Pi) (205).(6) Inspector of Construction Troops (Inspcktcurdcr Rautratppcrl—Insp d Bau Tr) (206).(7) Inspector of Signal Troops (Inspekteztr

I MARCH 1945der Nachrichtentruppen—Insp d Nach.r Tr)(207).(8) Inspector of Supply Troops (Iraspekteurder Nachschubtruppen—Insp d Nachsch Tr)(208).(9) * of Chemical Troops (Inspekteurder Nebeltru@en—-lnsp d Nbl Tr) (209).(10) Training Film Branch (Abteilung Lehrfilnz)(210). Controls the archives of the Army,the production and proper distribution of trainingfilms, and the training of film operators.i. ARMY ORDNANCE OFFICE (Heereswaflenamt—WaA) (211). This office is responsiblefor the design, testing, development, and acceptanceof all ordnance equipment. It works invery close collaboration with the Ministry ofArmament and War Production (Reichsministcriuntfiir Bemaflnung urrd Kriegsproduktion)some of whose branches are even located at theXrmy Ordnance Office. It is organized as follows:(1) Central Group (Zentral-Amtsgruppe desHeereswaflenamts— Wa 2) (212). This grouphas no special ordnance functions but is only anadministrative agency. It includes:(a) Organization Branch (Organisationsabteilung2WaZ 1) (213). Issues general directiveson organization to subordinate ordnanceagencies.(b) Admiuistrative Section (Gruppe fiir AllgemeineVerwzltungsangelegenheiten—Wa Z 2)(214). Responsible for general administrativematters.(c) Branch for Plant Efficiency (BetriebszwirtschaftlicheAbteilung—Wa 2 3) (215).(d) Regulations Branch (Vorschriftenabteilung—Wa2 4) (216). Publishes all orders,manuals and directives originating in the ArmyOrdnance Office.(e) Branch for Housing, Construction, andGuard Matters (Allgemeine Unterbringungs- zBan- und Uberwachungsangelegenheiten—Wa 26) (217). Responsible for the acquisition ofpremises and the construction and patrolling ofArmy Ordnance Office buildings.(2) Development and Testing Group (Amtsgruppefiir Entwicklung und Priifung—WaPriif) (218). This group is responsible for thedevelopment and testing of ordnance equipmentfor all arms and services. Besides certain subdivisionswhich have special fields, there are thosedealing with ordnance equipment of each combatarm; the numbers assjgned to these branchesUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30451correspond mostly to those of the inspectoratesof the same arm in the General Army Office.This group is composed of:(a) Ballistic and Ammunition Branch (Ballistischeund Munitiorrsabteilung—Wa Priif 1)(219). Responsible for the development andtesting of all types of ammunition. Divided intovarious sections dealing with ammunition of thedifferent arms, special types of ammunition, firingtables, explosives, and other special technica mattersconnected with projectiles.(b) Infantry Branch (I rtfanterieabteilung—•Wa Priif 2) (220).(c) Artillery Brarrch (ArtilIerieabteiZung—WaPriif 4) (221).(d) Elzginecr and Railway Engineer Branch(Pionier- urrd Eisenbahn @onier-Abteilung—WaPriif 5) (222). Composed of sections dealingwith engineer combat equipment, bridging andother river-crossing materials, engineering machines,water supply equipment, work tools, engineertransport vehicles, special constructionequipment, and equipment for railway and waterwayoperation.(e) Fortress Engillccr Branch (Festungspio nierabteilung—Priif Fest) (223).(f) Panzer alld Motorized Equipment Branch(Panzer- und Motorisicru~tgsabtcilung—Wu Priif6) (224). Divided into a separate section forthe development and testing of tanks and motorizedequipment.(g) Signal Branch (Nachrichtenabteilung—•Wa Priif 7) (225).(h) Branch for Optical, Survey, Meteorological,Artillery Fire Control, and Map-PrintingEquipment (Abteilung fiir Optik, Messwesen,Heereswettcrdienst, Fezrcrleitung und Kurtendruck—WaPriif 8) (126).(i) Gas Protection Brajrch ( Gasschutzabteilung—Wa Priif 9). Controls the Army Gas Protectionlaboratories at Spandau iHecres-GasschutzZaboratorienSpandau) (227).(j) Special Equipment Branch (Abteilung fiirSondergeriit—Wa Priif 11) (228). Possiblythe branch responsible for the development ofsome of the V weapons.(k) Branch for Proving Grounds (Abbeilungfiir Versuchsplhtze—Wu Priif 12) (229). Controlsthe experimental stations which are locatedat most maneuver areas (Truppe~iibungspl~~~e).(3) Group for Weapons and EquipmentManufacture (Amtsgruppe fiir Industrielle Riistung—Waflen und Geriit—Wa J R&—W u G)1—29

I MARCH 1945(230). This group is responsible for the procurementof all ordnance materiel except ammunition.Its main function is the placing oforders with industry. Here too the numbers ofthe branches mostly correspond to those of inspectoratesof the same branch of service in theGeneral Army Office. It includes:(a) Branch for General Army Equipment(Allgevneines Heeresgeriit—Wa J Rii—W u G1) (231). Handles all types of equipment, ineludingmedical and veterinary.(b) Weapons Branch (Waffenabteilung—WaJ Rii—W u G 2) (232). Divided into sectionsresponsible for weapons of the various arms.(c) Engineer, Railway Engineer, and FortressEquipment Branch (Pionier-, Eisenbahnpionier-,und F estungs-Geriiteabteilung-W a J Ru—WuG 5) (233).(d) Tanks and Tractors Branch (Panzerkawpfwagen-und Zugkraftwagen-Abteilung—Wa J Rii—W uG6) (234)(e) Signal Equipment Branch (Nachrichtengeriitabteilung—WaJ R&-—W u G 7) (235).(f) Optical and Precision Instruments Branch(Abteilung fiir optisches und feinmechanischesGerat—Wa J Rii—W uG 8/20) (236). Composedof various sections responsible for generaloptical instruments for all three services, specialarmy optical instruments, precision antiaircraftartillery parts, artillery fire control parts, and thelike.(g) Motor Vehicle Equipment Branch (Kraftwagengeriitabteilung—WaJ Rii—W u G 12)(237).(4) Group for Ammunition Manufacture(Amtsgruppe fiir Industrielle Riistung (Munition)—WaJ Rii Mun) (238). This group isresponsible for all ordnance equipment. It ineludes:(a) Ammunition Branch 1 (MunitionsabtcilungI—Wa J Rii MUM 1) (239).(b) Ammunition Branch 2 (Munitionsabtrilung2—Wa J Rii Mun 2) (240).(c) Ammunition Branch 3 (Munitionsabteilung3—Wa J Rii Mun 3 uzbV) (241). Probablymanufactures special types of munitions.(d) Ammunition Branch 4’ (Munitionsabteilung4—Wa J Rii Mun 4) (242).(e) Ammunition Branch 5 (Munitionsabtei-Zung 5—Wa J Rii Mun 5) (243).(5) Acceptance Group (Amstgruppe fiir Abnahme—WaAbn) (244). This group is respon1—30UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45Isible for seeing that all ordnance materiel ismanufactured according to specifications and foraccepting it on behalf of the i\rmy. It controlsthe Acceptance Inspectors (Abnah~~zeinspizienten)(245) located in each Wehrkreis. It iscomposed of a Central Branch and Branches 1and 2.(6) Chief Ordnance Engineer Group (AmtsgruppeChefingenieur—Wa Chef Zng) (246).This group contains various technical brancheswhich design and supervise the manufacture ofcertain ordnance parts. It includes :(a) The Chief Designer's Branch (Chefkonstrukteur—WaChef Ing I) (247) contains a sectionwhich maintains liaison with the Reich PatentOffice (Reichspatentamt).(b) Pig Iron Branch (Halbzeugstelle—WaChef Ing ~/HZ) (248).(c) The Manufacture Branch (Fabrikationsabteilung—WaChef Ing 4) (249) containsvarious sections for studying methods of manufactureof weapons, vehicles, and other equipment.(d) The Machine Recording Branch (MaschinellesBerichtwesen—Wa Chef Ing 5 M B)(250) is responsible for punch-card machinesand other mechanical office aids.(e) Section for the Manufacture of MachineTools, Gauges, and Tools (FabrikationsgruppcWerkzeugrnaschinen, Lehren und Werkzeuge—Wa Chef Ing 6) (251).(f) Section for the Manufacture of Ammunition(Fabrikationsgruppe Munition—Wa ChefIng 7) (252).(7) Group for Antiaircraft Artillery Development(Anztsgruppe fiir Flakentwicklurrg—GL/Flak-E) (253). Includes:(a) Branch for Ballistics and Development ofAntiaircraft Ammunition (Ahfcilrcng fiir Ballistikund Entwicklung der Flaknzunition—GL/Flak-E /l) (254).(b) Branch for the Development of AntiaircraftEquipment (Abteilung fiir Geriitentwicklung—GL/Flak-E/2)(255).(c) Branch for Technical and General Matters(Abteilung fiir technische und allgemeine Angelegenheifen—GL/FIk-E/3)(256).(d) Branch for Weapons Development (Abteilungfiir Waffenentwicklung—GL/Flak-E/4)(257).(e) Antiaircraft Armament Branch (AbteilungFlakriistung—GL/Flak-Rii) (258).

I MARCH 1945TM-E 30-451(8) Ordnance Research Branch (Forschungsabtcilung—WaF).j . ARMY ADMINISTRATION OFFICE (Heeresverwaltungsamt—VA)(259). This office is responsiblefor what is defined by the Germans as ArmyAdministration (HeeresvemmJtung). Its responsibilitiesinclude mainly the procurement of rations,billets, pay, and clothing for the Army.Until May 1944 the personnel connected withArmy Administration normally were ArmedForces officials (Wehrmachtbeanzte), divided intoa large number of technical and non-technical"careers" (Laufbahnen). At that time those inthe important careers of the Administrative Service(Verwaltungsdienst) and of the Judge Advocates(W ehrvnachtrichter) were made into anew category of officers in the Special TroopService ( Truppensonderdienst—TSD) ( 260).Their activities still are controlled by the ArmyAdministration Office, but their promotions andtransfers are now the responsibility of the ArmyPersonpel Office (PA).The Administration Office includes:(1) Group for 0ficial.s and Civilian bt’ol-kers(Anztsgruppe Allgemeine Heeresbeamtelz-, Angestcllten-,Arbcitrr- und Kassenangelegep&eiten—-Ag V1) (261). Responsible for personnel administrationand pay for Armed Forces officials,salaried workers (Angestellte), and wage earners(Arbeiter). Consists of:(a) Branch for Army Officials (Heeresbeamtcnabteilung—V1) (262).(b) Branch for Civilian Workers (Abteilungfiir Gefolgschaftsangelegenheiten des Heeres—V 8) (263).(c) Branch for Army Accounts and Pay ofOfficials (Heereskassen- md Beamtenhesoldungsabteilung—V9) (264).(cl) Cashier of the OKH (Anztskasse desOberkomnzandos des Heeres—AK (OKH))(265) is responsible for paying personnel of theOKH.(e) Pay and Allowance Department of theOKH (Gebiihrnisstelle des Oberkommandos desHeeres—G St OKH) (266) handles pay andallowances of military personnel and ArmedForces officials in the OKH.(f) Wage and Salary Office (Lohnstelle desObcrkonmandos des Heeres—Lohnst OKH)(267) has sections concerned with salariedemployees, wage earners, and various types ofpay deductions.(g) Accounting Offices of the Chief of ArmyEquipment and Commander of the ReplacementArmy (Zahlmeistereie~t des Ch H Riist u. B d E)(268) have four accounting offices carrying theRoman numerals I to IV.(2) Group for Real Estate, Agriculture, andForests (Allrtsgruppc Liegmschaftm, Land- undForstwirtschaft—Ag V 11) (269). Includes:(a) Branch for Real Estate of Garrisons andProcurement of Quarters (Abteilulzg fiir Liegenscllaftmdcr Stundorte und W ohnungsfiirsorge—V 2)(270).(1)) Branch ior the Administration of ManeuverAreas (Abteilzrng fiir Verwaltung von Ubungs/&itzen—V 6) (271).(c) Army Forestry Branch (Heeresforstabteilung—V10) (272).(3) Rations and Procurement Group (AmtsgruppeHeeresverpjlegungs- und -Beschaffungswesen—AgV 11Z) (273). Responsible for theprocurement and administration of rations. Includes:(a) Army Rations Branch (Hceresverpfleglcngsabtcilfrllg—V3) (274).(b) Army Procurements Branch (Heeresbeschaffungsabteilung—V5) (275).(c) Rations Inspector in the OKH (Verpjlepngsinspekteurim OKH—Verpfl Imp OKH)(276) is responsible for over-all planning ofrations supplies in the whole Theater of War.(4) Construction Group (Anztsgruppe Bau—Ag V II’) (277). Responsible for all army construction.Includes:(a) Branch for Administration of Army Construction(Heeresbauvrr-waltungsabteilung—V 4)(278).(1)) Branch for Army Construction Activities(Hrercsbnuairtschaftsabteilung—V 7) (279).(5) Budget Group (Agl~stgruppe HazrshaltsundBcsoldungswrscn—Ag Haushalt) (280).This group was formed in February 1944 by anamalgamation of four independent branches connectedwith budget and finance matters. up toAugust 1944 it was immediately under the Chiefof Army Equipment and Commander of the ReplacementArmy; it was placed under the controlof the Chief of the Army Administration Office.It includes:(a) Army Budget Branch (Heeres-Haushaltsabteilulzg—HHaush) (281).(b) Central Branch in the OKH (Zentralabteilzmginz OKH (Chef H Riist u. RdE)—Z)(282).I— 3I

I ~M‘ARCH 1945(c) Army Pay Branch (Heeresbcsoldungsabteilung—HBes Abf) (283).(d) Army Finance BrTnch (H ecyes-Finanzierungsabteilung)( 284 ).k. INSPECTOR GENERAL FOR POTENTIAL OFFICERS AND NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS (Generalinspekteurfiir den Fiihrernachwuchs des Heeres—43q (285). Formerly the Inspector of Army(Training and Education (Zpz EB) (286) ; renamedand broadened in scope .amd authorityin March 1944. Subordinate to the Chief ofArmy Equipment and Commander of the ReplacementArmy ‘(Chef H Riist u BdE). Heis responsible for the uniform recruiting, Nation&Socialistinstruction and guidance, and uniformtraining of all potential o’fficers and noncommissionedofficers (Fiihrernachzfachs). Heis in charge of all officer candidate and noncommissionedofficer schools and determines thesubject-matter and methods of instruction, particularlythe political aspects. He controls:(1) Bymach for the .Procureme& of Leaders(Abteilung Hecresnackwurhs—Abt. HN) (287).This branch was independent up to 1944 but becamesubordinate to the Inspector General forPotential OfficeSs and Noncommissioned Officerswhen he was appointed. This branch representsthe Army in dealing with other services and agenciesin all questions concerning the procurementof leaders.(2) Cadet School Branch (Abteilung Kriegsschulen—KS)(288). Previously called Inspectorate1 (In 1) and directly under the Chief ofArmy Equipment and Commander of the ReplacementArmy. Administers all officer candidateschools.(3) Nonconkssioned Oficer School Brad(Abteilung Untero@ier-V orschulcn u, -S~hulcn—US) (289).(4) Inspector of Army Oficer ProcurenrenfOfies (Inspcktcuy dey Annal~mrsfrllen fiiv OjjizieFbewerbcrdes Heeres—Insp d Axnst) (2%).Set up in 1943 as an independent agency in theArmy Personnel Office; transferred to the controlof the Inspector General for Potential Of?icer andnoncommissioned officers in 1944. Controls theofficer candidate acceptance centers located in eachWehrkreis.1. MBCELLANEOUS AGENCIES The followingare independent agencies, all immediately subordinateto the Chief of Army Equipment and Commanderof the Replacement 'Army (Chef H Riistu. BdE) :l—32UNCLASSIFIEDTM-B 30-451(1) SigHal Comnunicatio~zs Branch of theChief of Army Equipment and and ofthe Replacement Army (N achrichten-Betriebs-Abteilamg des Ch H Riist u. BdE) (291). Containsa telephone operating company, a telegraphcompariy, a signal exploitation company, and aradio transmission center.(2) Amay Raw Materials Branch (Heeres-Rolzsto~abteilung—H Ro) (292). Charged withthe procurement of raw materials for the OKH.Formerly a s&ordinate unit of the Army OrdnanceOffice (Rohsfoflstelle OKH—Wa Chef Ing2/:5Va Ro) (293), it was made an independentbranch in 1942.(3) Arlrzy Map Service (Hrcresplankalrllller-—HPK) (294). Contains a foreign maps branch,and a map production branch.(4) Army Technical Bureau (HeerestcchnischesBiiro (HTB) (295). Believed to be astaff of engineers at the disposal of the OKH.(5) Women's Aat,*iliary Corps (Nachrichtenlzelferin~le~a-Ei~~sat~abteilztng—NH-E~nsat~abteilung) (296). The women's auxiliary corps is believedto be subordinate to the Chief of ArmyEquipment and Commander of the ReplacementArmy. It is formed into special battalions (Einsatsabteilungen)and used throughout the Fieldand Replacement Armies for signal communicationsand o,fice work at higher headquarters.m. NATIONAL-SOCIALIST GUIDANCE STAFF OFTHE ARMY (~ationalsozialistischer Fiihrungsstabdes He&es—NSF St d H) (297). Establishedin March 1944 to control the uniform National-Socialist indoctrination and guidance in the Army.Directly subordinate to Hitler but attached to theArmy High Comtnalld. Issues directives to theNational-Socialist Guidance Officers (NSFO) inthe field.n. THE FUHRER'S OFFICIAL MILITARY HISTORIAN (Der Beawftrugtc dcs Fiihrers fiir diemilit&rische Geschichtsschrcibung—D Beauftr dFiihrcrs fiir die mil Geschiclrtsschr) (298). Appointedin 1942 to take charge of the writing ofmilitary history of World War II. Directlysubordinate to Hitler but attached to the ArmyHigh Command. Upon his appointment, theagencies connected with military history in theArmy were transferred from the jurisdiction ofthe Fifth Senior General Staff Officer (O Qu V)to his control but remained subordinate to theOKH. In addition, historical branches were setup at both the OKW and the OKH to record thewar for the Armed Forces and for the Army

i MARCH 1945respectively. This obviated the need for theMilitary Science Branch still under the O Qu V,and it is believed that its existence is only nominal.The Fiihrer's Official Military Historiancontrols within the OKH:(1) Army Historical Branch (KriegsgeschichtlicheAbteilung des Heeres—Kr Gesch Heer)(299). Established in 1942. Probably tookover all the functions of the Military ScienceBranch (Kr I Abt.) in the Army GeneralStaff. It includes the editorial staff of the magazine"Military Science Review" (Milita'rwissenschaftlicheRundschau).(2) Military History Research Institute(Kriegswissenschaftliche Forschungs-Anstalt)(300). Originally under the control of the ArmyGeneral Staff but believed to have been transferredto the control of the Fiihrer's Official MilitaryHistorian, sometime after 1942.(3) Chief of Army Archives (Chef der Heeresarchive—ChefH Arch) (301). Transferredfrom the Army General Staff in 1942. Armyarchives have been kept in Potsdam, with abranch office at Liegnitz.(4) Chief of Army Libraries (Chef ,derHeeresbiichereien—Chef H Bitch) (302). Thisposition was created in 1942, first under the controlof the Army General Staff and then transferredto Fiihrer's Official Military Historian.Responsible for the administration of all militaryliterature.(5) Captured Documents Exploitation Center{Wehrmacht-Sichtungsstelle—We Sist) (303).Exploits captured documents (Beuteakten) forthe whole of the Armed Forces.o. INSPECTOR GENERAL OF Panzer TROOPS(Generalinspekteur der Panzcrtruppen—Gen Inspd Pz Tr) (304). Appointed in 1943 as a suc-UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451cessor to the Chief of Mobile Troops (Generalder Schnellen Truppenj (305) who had been attachedto the Army General Staff. Directly subordinateto Hitler but attached to the Army HighCommand. Controls the whole Panzer arm; responsiblefor its organization, training, and replacementsystem. His prerogative extend to theAir Force and Waffen-SS Panzer units. Hecontrols:(1) Chief Antitank Oficer for All Arms(General der Panzerabwchr aller Wafl en) (306).Appointed in November 1944 to coordinate antitanktactics throughout the Armed Forces. Healso acts as liaison officer for the Pa.naer troopsat the .Army General Staff replacing the formerPanzer Officer at the Army General Staff (PaO&b GmStdH) (307).(2) Inspector of Parlser Troops (Inspekteurder Panzertruppen—Insp d Pz Tr) (308). Hasa function similar to that of the other inspectorsin the OKH except that he is not controlled by theChief of Training in the Replacement Army(Chef Ausb). He controls the Panzer TroopBranch, Inspectorate 6 (Jn 6) (309), althoughthe latter may still be administratively under theGeneral Army Office.(3) Field Army Branch (Abteilung Feldheer)(310). This branch maintains liaison between theInspector General of Panzer Troops and theField Army. It is responsible for the properevaluation and use of all combat experience andmakes suggestions on the organization, training,and development of the Panzer arm.(4) Training Branch (Ausbildungs-Abteilung—Ausb Abt (311). Formed in 1944, thisbranch took over the administration of the trainingof Panzer troops from Inspectorate 6. Itissues a regular monthly periodical dealing withthe experience of Panzer troops in the field.1—33

I MARCH 19454. ,Glossary and Index of German Terms andAbbreviationsThis glossary consists of German designationsfor all the principal agencies of the Armed Forcesand Army High Commands, together with theirusual abbreviations and approximate translations.The glossary is designed to assist the reader infinding an explanation of the function of eachagency. The numbers following the terms serveas a cross-reference to paragraph 3, where theexplanations are numbered serially.Abnahmeinspizient (Acceptance Inspector) 245Abt—Abteilung (Branch) 81. Abt 771. (Zentra!) Abt 1332. Abt 86, 134, 1413. Abt 89, 135, 1424. Abt 83, 1365. Abt 78, 1376. Abt 79, 1387. Abt 93, 1478. Abt 878. (Allg) Abt 14s9. Abt 80, 14910. Abt 81, 15011. Abt 84Abt Allgemeines Kriegsgefangenenwesen (Genera!Branch for Prisoner of War Matters) 45Abt Demobil—Abteilung Demobilmachung (DemobilizationBranch) 197Abt E—Abteilung Ersatzwesen (ReplacementBranch) 64Abteilung—See AbtAbt Ersatzwesen (Replacement Branch) ‘64Abt Feldheer (Field Army Branch) 310Abt fiir A!!geme:ne Truppenangelegenheiten(Branch for Genera! Troop Matters) 191Abt fur Wehrmachtfachschulunterricht (ArmedForces Educational Branch) 50Abt fur Wehrmachtpropaganda (Armed ForcesPropaganda Branch) 39Abt HN—Abteilung Heeresnachwuchs (Branch forthe Procurement of Leaders) 787Abt Krafttahrwesen—Jn 12 (Motor TransportBranch—Inspector-ate 12) 180Abt Kriegsschulen (Cadet School Branch) 288Abt Lehrfi!m (Training Film Branch) 210Abt Nachschubtruppen—Jn 8 (Supply Troops BranchInspectorate 8) 173Abt Nebeltruppe, Gasabwehr, und Luftschutz—Jn 9(Chemical Warfare and Air Raid ProtectionBranch—Inspectorate 9) 175Abt Organisation des Kriegsgefangenenwesens (OrganizationBranch for Prisoners of War) 46Abt Reichsvers—Reichsversorgungsabteilung (CivilianPensions Branch) 49Abt Reit- und Fahrwesen—Jn 3 -(Riding and DrivingBranch—Inspectorate 3) 162Abt Technische Truppen—Jn 11 (Branch for TechnicalTroops—Inspectorate 11) 177Abt U—LJnterkunft and Truppcniihungs!)litzeUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45I(Branch for Billets and Xlaneuvcr Areas) 193Abt Untcroffizier-Vorsclmlen unt! -Schulcn—(NC0Schools Branch) 289Abt Wehrmachtnachrichtenverbindungen Funkwesen(Armed Forces Radio Communications Branch)35Abt Wehrmachtverlustwcsen—(~\rmet! Forces CasualtyBranch) 51Abt Wissenschaft—(Military Science Branch) 54Abwicklungsstab (Unit Inactivation Staff) 196Adjutantur (Personnel Section) 99Ag—Amtsgruppe (Group) 7Ag Art—Amtsgruppe Artillerie (Artillery Group)13Ag Ausl—Amtsgruppe Auslant! (Foreign Group) 32Ag Chefingenieur (Chief Ordnance Engineer Group)246Ag E Tr—Ersatzwesen und Allgemeine Truppen-Angelegenheiten (Group for Replacement ant!Genera! Troop Matters) 190Ag fur Abnahmc (Acceptanrc Group) 244Ag fur Industrielle Riistung—Waffen und G&it(Group for Weapons and Equipment Manufacture)230, 138Ag GL/F!ak-E—Amtsgruppe fur Flakentwicklung(Group for Antiaircraft Artillery I)cve!opment)253Ag Haushalt—Amt.sgruppe Haushalts- und Besoldungswesen(Budget Group) 280Ag HR—Heeresrechtswesen (Army- Judge AdvorateGeneral's Group) 194Ag J—Ag Jnland (Interior Group) 66Ag Nachrichtenwcsen (Signal Group) 169>4g P 1 (Group P 1, Officers' Records, Transfersand Promotions) 132Ag P 2 (Group P 2, Olficers' Education and Welfare)139I’ig P O—-Amtsgruppe P 6 (Group P 6, SpecialistOfficers) l-l6Ag V I—Allgemeine Heeresbeamten- Angestellten-,Arbeiter- und Kassenangelegenheiten (Group for.Officials and Civilian Workers) 261Ag V II—Amtsgruppe Liegenschaften, Land- unt!Forstwirtschaft (Group for Real Estate, Agriculture,and Forests) 269Ag V III—Amtsgruppe Hecresverpflegungs- undBeschaffungswesen (Rations and ProcurementGroup) 273Ag V IV—Amtsgruppe Bau (Construction Group)277Ag WNV-—Amtsgruppe We!trmac!ttnachric!iten-Verbindungen(Armed Forces CommunicationsGroup) 34Ag WNV/Fu—Amtsgruppe Wehrmachtnachrichten-Verbindungen, Abteilung Funkwesen (ArmedForces Radio Communications Branch) 35Ag WNV/KF—Amtsgruppe Wehrmachtnachrichten- Verbindungen, Kriegsfernmelde - Abteilung(Armed Forces Wire Communications Branch)36Ag WV—A mtsgrupp e Wehrmachtverwaltung(Armed Forces Administration Group) 43AHA—Allgemeines Hceresamt (Genera! ArmyOffice) 155l—34

1 MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451AK (OKH)—Amtskasse ties Oberkommandos desHeeres (Cashier of the OKH) 205Allgemeine Abteilung (General Armed ForcesBranch) 42Allgemeines Heeresamt (General Army Office) 1SSAmt (Office) 6Amtsgruppe—see AgAmtskasse des Oberkommandos des Herres (Cashierof the OKH) 265Artillerieabteilung—Jn 4 (Artillery Branch, Inspectorate4) 164Att Abt d OKH—Attacheabteilung des OKH(Branch for Military Attaches of the OKH) 33Ausb. Abt—Ausbildungs-Abteilung (TrainingBranch) 83, 311AWA — Allgemeines Wehrmachtamt (GeneralArmed Forces Office) 41AWA/HJ—Vertreter der Wehrmacht beim Jugendfiihrerdes Deutschen Reichs (Hilter YouthLiaison) 53BW Sied—Bevollmachtigter des OKW fiir Siedlungsfragen(Armed Forces Plenipotentiary forSettlement) 52Chef Ausb—Chef des Ausbildungswesen im Ersatzheer(Chief of Training in the ReplacementArmy) 199Chef der Heeresarchive (Chief of Army Archives)301Chef der Heeresbiichereien (Chief of Army Libraries)302Chef der Heeresmuseen (Chief of Army Museums)198Chef der Propagandatruppen (Chief of the PropagandaTroops) 40Wa J Ri*—WuG 12—Kraftwagengeratabteilung(Motor Vehicle Equipment Branch) 237Chef des Ausbildungswesens im Ersatzheer (Chiefof Training in the Replacement Army) 199Chef Gen St d H—Chef des Generalstabs des Heeres(Chief of General Staff) 72Chef des Heeresstabes beim Chef OKW (Chief ofArmy Staff with Chief OKW) 25Chef HNV—Chef des Heeresnachrichtenwesens(Chief Signal Officer) 118Chef des Instandsetzungswesens (Chief of MotorRepair) 181Chef des Kriegsgefangenenwesens (Chief of Prisonersof War) 44Chef des . Kriegskarten- und Vermessungswesens(Chief of Mapping and Survey) 116Chef des OKW (Chief of the Armed Forces HighCommand) 13Chef des Transportwesens (Chief Army TransportationOfficer) 126Chef des Wehrmachtkraftfahrwesens (Chief ofArmed Forces Motor Transportation) 17Chef des Transportwesens der Wehrmacht (Chiefof Armed Forces Transportation (Rail andWater) 18Chef des Wehrmachtsanitatswesens (Armed ForcesSurgeon General) 24Chef des Wehrmachtstreifendienstes (Chief of theArmed Forces Patrol Service) 22Chefgruppe (Policy Section) 130Chef H Arch—Chef der Heeresarchive (Chief ofArmy Archives) 301Chef H Biich—Chef der Heeresbiichereien (Chief ofArmy Libraries) 302Ch H Riist u. BdE—Chef der Heeresriistung undBefehlshaber des Ersatzheeres (Chief of ArmyEquipment and Commander of the ReplacementArmy) 154Chef H St b Chef OKW—Chef des Heeresstabesbeim Chef OKW (Chief of Army St& withChief OKW) 25 ,Chef Inst—Chef des Instandsetzungswesens (Chiefof Motor Repair) 181Chef Kriegsgef-—-Chef des Kriegsgefangenenwesens(Chief of Prisoners of War) 44Chef Pr Tr—Chef der Propagandatruppen (Chief ofthe Propaganda Troops) 40Chef Trspw—Chef des Transportwesens (ChiefArmy Transport Officer) 126Chef Trspw d W—Chef des Transportwesens derWchrmacht (Chief of Armed Forces Transportation(Rail and Water)) 18Chef WKW—Chef des Wehrmachtkraftfahrwesens(Chief of Armed Forces Motor Transportation)17Chef W San—Chef des Wehrmachtsanitatswesens(Armed Forces Surgeon General) 24Chef W Str D (Chief of the Armed Forces PatrolService) 22 ,Chi—Chiffrier-Abteilung (Crytographic Branch) >7Der Beauftr d Fiihrers fiir die mil Geschichtsschr—Der Beauftragte des Fiihrers fiir die militiirischeGeschicht.sschreibung (Fiihrer's official ‘militar,historian) 38, 92, 298Eisenbahnpionierabteilung—Jn 10 (Railway EngineerBranch, Inspectorate 10) 176F Abt—Feldtransportabteilung (Field TransportationBranch) 19Feldzeuginspektion—Fz Jn (Ordnance Inspectorate)188Forschungsabteilung (Ordnance Research Branch)258Frd Heere Ost—Fremde Heere Ost (EasternArmies Branch) 89Frd Heere West—Fremde Hcere West (WesternArmies Branch) 90Fiihrerhaul)tquarticr (Field Headquarters of theOKW) 11Fz Jn—Feldzeuginspektion (Ordnance 1nsl)ectorate)188Gen—See GeneralGeneral der Artillerie (Chief Artillery Officer) 112General der Eisenbahntruppen (Chief of RailwayTroops) 127General der Freiwilligenverbande (Chief of VolunteerUnits) 123General der Heeres-Flaktruppen (Chief Army Anti-Aircraft Artillery Officer) 114rce s der Heereskiisten- und Festungsartillerie(Chief Coast and Fortress Artillery Officer) 113General der Motorisierung (changed to Gen d Kfw)179l—35

IUNCLASSIFIEDMAR & 1945 TM-E 30-451General der Nachschubtruppen (Chief of SuppI>Troops) 106General der Nebeltruppen (Chief Chemical WarfareOfficer) 122General der Osttruppen (changed to Gen d FreiwVerb) 124General der Pioniere und Festungen (Chief Engineerand Fortifications Officer) 120General der Panzerabwehr aller Waff cn (ChiefAntitank Officer for -411 Arms) 306General ‘der Schnellen Truppen (changed to GenInsp d Pz Tr) 10General des Kraftfahrwesens (Chief Motor TransportOfficer) 104General des Kraftfahrwesens/AHA (Group of theChief Motor Transport Officer in the GeneralArmy Office) 178General zu besonderer Verwendung (General forSpecial Employment (Discipline)) 128Generalinspekteur der Panzertrtippen (InspectorGeneral of Panzer Troops) 304Generalinspekteur des Kraftfahrwesens (InspectorGeneral of Motor Transport) 70Generalinspekteur fiir das Kriegsgefangenwesen derWehrmacht (Inspector General for Prisoner ofWar Affairs) 27Generalinspekteur fiir den Fiihrernachwuchs desHeeres (Inspector General for Potential Officersand NCOs) 285Generalquarticrmeister (Chief Supply and AdministrationOfficer) 74, 94Generalstab des Heeres (Army General Staff) 71General z b V IV (General for Special EmploymentIV—now Chef W Str D) 23Gen Insp d Pz Tr—Generalinspekteur der Panzertruppen(Inspector General of Panzer Troops)304Gen Insp Kfw—Generalinspekteur fiir das Kraftfahrwesen(Inspector General of Motor Transport)70Gen Insp Kriegsgef—Generalinspekteur fiir dasKriegsgefangenenwesen der Wehrmacht (InspectorGeneral for Prisoner of War Affairs) 27Gen Qu—Generalquartiermeister (Chief Supply andAdministration Officer) 74, 94Gen St d H—Generalstab des Heeres (Army GeneralStaff) 71GJF—Generalinspekteur fiir den Ftihrernachwuchsdes Heeres (Inspector General for PotentialOfficers and NCOs) 285GL/Flak-E—Amtsgruppk fiir Flakentwicklung(Group for Antiaircraft Artillery Development)253GL/Flak-E/l—Abteilung fiir Ballistik und Entwicklungder Flakmunition (Branch for Balli.stics andDevelopment of Antiaircraft Equipment) 254GL/Flak-E/2—Abteilung fiir Geritentwicklung(Branch for the Development of AntiaircraftEquipment) 255GL/Flak-E/3—-Abteilung fiir technische und allgemeineAngelegenheiten (Branch for Technical andGeneral Matters)GL/Flak-E/4—Abteilung fiir Waffenentwicklungl—36(Branch for the Development of A A Weapons)257GL/Flak-Rii—Abteilung Flakriistung (AntiaircraftArmament Branch) 258G St OKH—Gebiihrnisstelle des OKH (Pay andAllowance Department of the OKH) 266Gr—See GruppeGr S—Gruppe Seelsorge (Chaplains' Section) 192Gruppe (Section) 9Gruppe IIa—Adjutantur (Personnel Section) 99Gruppe III—Feldjustizverwaltung (Field Legal AdministrationSection) 100Gruppe IVa—Heeres-Intendant (Chief Army AdministrationOfficer) 101Gruppe IVb—Heeresarzt (Army Surgeon) 102Gruppe IVc—Heeresveterinir (Army Veterinarian)103Gruppe V—General des Kraftfahrwesens (ChiefMotor Transport Officer) 101Gruppe Z—Zivilbeauftragtcr (Civil Commissioner)105Gruppe FP—Heeresfeldpostmeister (Army Postmaster)107Gruppe z b V—Gruppe zur besonderen Verwendung(Party Liaison) 69Gruppe z b V—Gruppe zur besonderen Verwendung(Ceremonial occasions) 152G St OKH—Gcbiihrnisstelle des OKH (Pay andAllowance Department of the OKH) 266GZ—Zentralabteilung (Central Branch of ArmyGeneral Staff) 75.H Arzt—Heeresarzt (Army Surgeon) 102H Hes Abt—Heeresbesoldungsabteilung (Army PayBranch) 283Heeresbesoldungsabteilung (Army Pay Branch) 283Heeresdruckvorschriftenverwaltung (Army Regulationsadministration) 157Heeresfeldzeugmeister (Chief Army Ordnance Officer)189Heeres- Finanzierungstabteilung (Army FinanceBranch) 284Heeres-Flakartillerieabteilung—Jn 13 (Army AntiaircraftArtillery Branch, Inspectorate 13) 165Heeres-Haushaltsabteilung (Army Budget Branch)281Heeres-Intendant (Chief Army AdministrativeOfficer) 101Heeres - Nachrichtenverbindungs - Abteilung (ArmyCommunication Branch) 172Heeres-Personalabteilung 3—P 3 (Branch P 3 GeneralStaff Officers) 143Heeres-l’ersonalabteilung 4—P 4 (Branch P 4,Oflicer Replacements) 144Heerrs-Personalabteilung 5—P 5 (Branch P 5,(Branch P 5. Decorations and Medals) 143Heeres-Persona!abteilung 7—P 7 (Branch P 7,Officers in VoIksgrenadier Units) 151Heerespersonalamt (Army Personnel Office) 131Heeresplankammer (Army Map Service) 294Heeres-Rohstoffabteilung (Army Raw MaterialsBranch) 2’12Heeres-Sanitiitsinspekteur (Chief Army MedicalInspector) 129

I MARCH 1945Heeres-Sanitatinspektion S Jn (Medical Inspectorate)183Heerestechnisches Biiro (Army Technical Bureau)295Heeresverwaltungsamt (Army AdministrationOffice) 259Heereswaffenamt (Army Ordnance Office) 21 xHeeresforstabteilung (Army Forestry Branch) 2/ZH Haush—Heeresforstabteilung (Army ForestBranch) 281HNV—Heeresnachrichtenverbindungsabteilung(Army Communication Branch) 172Hoherer Offizier der Kraftfahrparktruppe (MotorMaintenance Troops Officer) 182Hoh Inf Offz fur die Landesbef—Hoherer fn-InfOff z fiir die Landesbef-HGherer(Senior Infantry Officer for Land Fortifications)161Hoh Ldgs Pi Fii—Hoherer Landungspionier-Fiihrer(Chief of Amphibious Engineers) 121Hoh Offz d Kf Pk Tr—Hoherer Offizier der Kraftfahrparktruppe(Senior Motor MaintenanceTroops Officer) 182Hoh Offz d Verw Tr—Hoherer Offizier der Vcrwaltungstruppen(Senior Officer of AdministrativeTroops) 174HPK—Heeresplankammer (Army Map Service) 294HR—Heeresrechtsabteilung (Judge Advocate General'sBranch) 195H Ro—Heeres-Rohstoffabteilung (Army Raw MaterialsBranch) 292H San Insp—Heeres-Sanitatsinspekteur (ChiefArmy Medical Inspector) 129HTB—Heerestechnisches Biiro (Army TechnicalBureau) 295H Vet—Heeresveterinar (Army Veterinarian) 103Infanterieabteilung—Jn 2 (Infantry Branch—Inspectorate2) 160In FV—Inspekteur der Fiirsorge- und Versorgungsdienststellen(Inspector for Welfare and PensionsAgencies) 47Insp d Annst—Inspekteur der Annahmestellen fiirOffizierbewerber des Heeres (Inspector of ArmyOfficer Procurement Offices)Insp d Pz Tr—Inspekteur der Panzertruppen (Inspekteurder Panzer truppen 308Inspekteur der Annahmestellen fiir Offizierbewerberdes Heeres (Inspector of Army Officer ProcurementOffices) 290Inspekteur der Artillerie (Inspector of Artillery)203Inspekteur der Bautruppen (Inspector of ConstructionTroops) 206Inspekteur der Festungen (Inspector of Fortifications)120Inspekteur der Heeresflaktruppen (Inspector ofArmy Antiaircraft Troops) 204Inspekteur der Infanteric (Inspector of Infantry)201Inspekteur der Nachrichtentruppen (Inspector ofSignal Troops) 207Inspekteur der Nachschubtruppen (Inspector ofSupply Troops) 208UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Inspekteur der Nebeltruppen (Inspector of ChemicalTroops) 209Inspekteur der Panzertruppen (Inspector of PanzerTroops) 308Inspekteur der Pioniere und Eisenbahnpioniere (Inst r of atio n and Railway Engineers)259Inspekteur des Reit- und Fahrwesens (Inspector ofRiding and Driving) 202Inspektion der Fiirsorge- und Versorgungsdienststellenim OKW (Inspectorate for Welfare andPensions Agencies) 47Insp Fest—Inspekteur der Festungen (Inspector ofFortifications) 120Jn 1—Kriegsschulenabteilung (Cadet School Branch—Inspectorate 1) 288Jn 2—Landesbefestigungen (Infantry Branch—Inspectorate2) 160Jn 16 1 und Fahrwesen (Riding and DrivingBranch—Inspectorate 3) 162Jn 4—Artillerieabteilung (Artillery Branch—Inspectorate4) 164Jn M a intenance (Engineer Rranch—Inspectorate5) 166Jn 6—Panzertruppenabteilung (Panzer TroopsBranch—Inspectorate 6) 168, 309Jn 7—Nachrichtentruppenabteilung (Signal Branch—1nspectorate 7) 170 ,Jn 8—Gen - Nachschubtrul)p~n (Supply Branch—Inspectorate 8) 173Jn 9—Abteilung Nebeltruppe, Gasabwehr, undLuftschutz (Chemical Warfare and Air RaidProtection Branch—Inspectorate 3) 175Jn 10—Eisenbahnpionierabteilung (Railway EngineerBranch—Inspectorate 10) 176Jn 5—Abteilung Technische Truppen (Branch forTechnical Troops—Inspectorate 11) 177Jn 12—Abteilung Kraftfahrwesen (Motor TransportBranch—Inspectorate 12) 180Jn 13—Heeres-Flakartillerieabteilung (Army AntiaircraftArtillery Branch—Inspectorate 13) 165Jn EB—Inspektion des Rrziehungs- und Bildungswesensf i i r (Inspectorate of Army Trainingand Education) 286Jn f f ices ) der Frstungen (Inspectorate ofFortifications) 167Jn 8—Inspektion drr Ftirsorgc- und Versorgungsdienststellenim OKW (Inspectorate for Welfareand Pensions Agencies) 47Just—Justiziare des OKH (Legal section in theOKH) 195Kdr d Eisb Pz Ziige—Kommandeur der Eisenbahnnstruc - of Armored Trains) 111Kdr d Freiw Verb—Kommandeur der FreiwilligenFortifi c a -of Volunteer Units) 125KF—Kriegsfernmeldeabteilung (Armed Forces WireCommunications Branch)Kr Gesch Heer—Kriegsgeschichtliche Abteilung desHeeres (Army Historical Branch) 299Kr k t e ur—Chef des Kriegskarten- undVermessungswesens (Chief of Mapping and Survey)116Kriegsgef Allg—Allgemeine Abteilung des Kriegsgefangenenwesens(General PW Affairs Branch)1—37

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Kriegagef Org—Organisationsabteilnng des Kriegsgefangenenwesens (PW Affairs . OrganizationBranch) 46Kriegsgeschichtliche Abteilung des Heeres (ArmyHistorical Branch) 299Kriegsgeschichtliche Abteilung der Wehrmacht(Armed Forces Historical Branch) 38Kriegswissenschaftliche Forschungs-Anstalt desHeeres (Military History Research Institute) 300Kr Wiss Abt—Kriegswissenschaftliche Abteilung(Military Science Branch) 93Kr Wiss Forsch Anst—KriegswissenschaftlicheForschungsanstalt (Military History Research Institute) 300KS—Abteilung ' Kriegsschulen (Cadet SchoolBranch) 288Lchrglnge fur h,ijhere Adjhtanten (Courses for Senior Personnel Officers) 153Lohnst OKH—Lohnstelle des Oberkommandos desHeeres (Wage and Salary Office of the OKH)Militlrwissenschaftliche Rundschau (Military Science Review)Min St A—Mineraliilstammabteilung (Central Petroleum Branch) 60Nachrichtenbetriebsabteilung des • Ch H Rust u.BdE (Signal communications branch of the Chiefof Army Equipment and Commander of the Replacement Army) 292Nachrichtenger;itabteilung (Signal EquipmentBranch) 171, 235Nachrichtenhelf erinnen-Einsatzabteilung (FemaleAuxiliary Corps) 296Nachrichtentruppenabteilung—Jn 7 (Signal Branch,Inspectorate 7) 170Nationalsozialistischer Fiihrungsstab des Heeres(National Socialist Guidance Staff of the Army)297N Ger Abt—Nachrichtengeratabteilung (SignalEquipment Branch) 171, 235NH—Einsatzabteilung — Nachrichtenhelf erinnen-Einsatzabteilung (Female Auxiliary Corps) 296NSF/OKW—Nationalsozialistischer Fiihrungsstabdes OKW (National-Socialist Guidance Staff ofthe OKW) 65NSF St d H—Nationalsozialistischer Ftihrungsstabdes Heeres (National-Socialist Guidance Staff ofthe Army) 297Ob d H—Oberbefehlshaber des Heeres (Commander-in-chief of the Army) 70aOberkommando des Heeres (Army High Command)3, 70aOberkommando der Kriegsmarine (Navy HighCommand) 3Oberkommando der Luftwaffe (Air Force HighCommand) 4Oberkommando der Wehrmacht (Armed ForcesHigh Command) 1, 2, 11Oberquartiermeister—See 0 Qu0 Qu—Oberquartiermeister (Senior General StaffOfficer) 73I ..................... e ................. 73, 76II ........................... 73, 82III .................. * ........ * .. 73, 85IV73, 88l—38,V .... a .................................. 73, 91Op Abt—Operationsabteilung (Operations Branch)77Oberster Befehlshaber der WTehrmacht (SupremeCommander of the Armed Forces) 12Obst Bfh d Wm—Oberster Befehlshaber derWehrmacht (Supreme Commander of the ArmedForces) 12OKH—Oberkommando des Heeres (Army HighCommand) 3OKL—Oberkommando der Luftwaffe (Air ForceHigh Command) 4OKM—Oberkommando der Kriegsmarine (NavyHigh Command) 3OKW—Oberkommando der Wehrnmacht (ArmedForces High Command) 1, 2, 11Org Abt—Organisationsabteilung (OrganizationBranch) 86Qu—Quartiermeistergruppe (Supply section) 95I95, 96II ................... 95, 97III ................... 95, 98P 3—Heeres-Personalabteilung (Branch P 3, General Staff Officers) 143P 4&Heeres-Personalabteilung (Branch P 4, OfficerReplacements) 144P S—Heeres-Personalabteilung (Branch P 5, Decorations and Awards) 145P 7—Heeres-Personalabteilung 7 (Branch P 7, Officers in Volksgrenadier units) 151PA—Heerespersonalamt (Army Personnel Office)131Panzertruppenabteilung — Jn 6 (Panzer TroopsBranch Inspectwate 6) 168, 309Pionierabteilung—Jn 5 (Engineer Branch—Inspectoratr 5) 166Preispr-—-Vertrags- und Plleispriifwesen (Contractsand Price Control Branch) 62Prfif Fest—Festungspionierabteilung (Fortress Engineer Branch) 223Pz Offz b Gen St d H—-Panzeroffizier beim Generalstab des Heeres (Panzer Troops Liaison Officer at the Army General Staff) 307Rcferat (Desk) 10Reichsversorgungsabteilung (Civilian PensionsBranch) 49Ro—Rohstoffabteilung (Raw Materials Branch) 57Rohstoffstelle OKH (Army Raw Materials Center293Ro St A—Rohstoff-Stammabteilung (Central RawMaterials Branch) 55Sdf—Sonderfiihrer (Specialist Leaders) 150Sd St HWK—Sonderstab fiir Handelskrieg undwirtschaftliche Kampfma.ssnahmen (Bureau cfEconomic Warfare) 26S Jn—Heeres Sanitatsinspektion (Medical Inspcctorate) 183S Jn/Org—Organisationsabteilung (OrganizationBranch) of the Medical Inspectorate) 185S JnjPers—Personalabteilung (Personnel Branchof the Medical Inspectorate) 184S Jn/Wi G—Abteilung fiir Wissenschaft und Gesundheitsfiihrung (Branch for Science and Hygiene of the Medical Inspectorate) 186

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Sonderstab A (Special Staff A) l!i9Sonderstab fur Handelskrieg und wirtschaftlicheKampfmassnahmen (Bureau of Economic Warfare)26St-^See StaffelStab AHA—(Staff of the General Army Office) 1.56Stab/Bkl—(Clothing Staff of the General Arnr~Office) 158Stab W Fach—Stab fur wehrwirtschaftliche Fachkrafte(Economic Experts Personnel Section) 61Staffel—(Echelon) 51. (Forward Echelon) 52. (Rear Echelon) 5Stellv Chef WFSt—Stellvertretender Chef desWehrmachtfiihrungsstabes (Deputy Chief of theArmed Forces Operations Staff) 31Tr Abt—Abteilung fur Allgemeine Truppenangelegenheiten(Branch for General Troop Matters)191TSD—Truppensonderdienst (Special Troop Service)260US—Abteilung Unteroffizier-Vorschulen L -Schulen(NC0 School Branch) 289V I—Heeresbeamtenabtcilung (Branch for ArmyOfficials) 262V 2—Abteilung der Licgenschaften der Standorteund Wohnungsfiirsorge (Branch for Real Estateof Garrisons and procurement of Quarters) 270V 3—Heeresverpflegungsabteilung (Army RationsBranch) 274V 4&Heeresbauverwaltungsabteilung (Branch forthe Administration of Army Construction) 278V .5—Heeresbeschaffungsabteilung (Army ProcurementsBranch) 275V 6—Abteilung fur Verwaltung von Ubungsplatzen(Branch for the Administration of ManeuverAreas) 271V 7—Heeresbauwirtschaftsabteilung (Branch forArmy Construction Activities) 279V 8&Abteilung fur Gefolgschaftsangelegenheitendes Heeres (Branch for Civilian Workers) 263V 9—Heereskassen und Beamtenbesoldungsabteilung(Branch for Army Accounts and Pay of Officials)264V IO—Heeresforstabteilung (Army Forcstr yBranch) 272VA—Heeresverwaltungsamt (Army AdministrationOffice) 259Verk Abt—Verkehrsabteilung (Traffic Branch) 21Verpfl Insp OKH—Verpflegungsinspekteur im OKH(Rations Inspector of the OKH) 276Vertags- und Preispriifwesen (Contracts and PriceControl Branch) 62Vertreter der Wehrmacht beim Jugendfuhrcr desDeutschen Reichs (Hitler Youth Liaison) 53Veterinlrinspekteur (Chief Veterinary Inspector)131V J—Veterinarinspektion (Veterinary inspectorate)187Wa A—Heereswaffenamt (Army Ordnance Office)211Wa Abn—Amtsgruppe fur Abnahme (Acceptancegroup) 244Wa Chef Ing—Amtsgruppe Chetingenieur (ChiefOrdnance Engineer Group) 246Wa Chef Ing 1—Chefkonstrukteur (Chief Designer'sBranch) 247Wa Chef Ing 2/Wa Ro—Rohstoffstelle OKH(Army Raw Materials Center) 293Wa Chef Ing J/Hz—Halbzeugstelle (Pig IronBranch) 248Wa Chef Ing 4-—Fabrikationsabteilung (Wa ChefIng 4) 249Wa Chef Ing 5 M B—Maschinelles Berichtwcsen(Machine Recording Branch) 250Wa Chef Ing 6—Fabrikationsgruppe Werkzeugmaschinen,Lehren und Werkzeuge (Section forthe Manufacture of Machine Tools, Patterns, andTools) 251Wa Chef Ing 7—Fabrikationsgruppe Munition(Section for the Manufacture of Munition) 252Wa F—Forschungsabteilung (Ordnance ResearchBranch) 258Waffengenerale—(Chiefs of arms and services) 110Waffeninspekteure-( Inspectors of arms and services)200Wa J Rii-Mun—Amtsgruppe fur Industrielle Riistung(Munition) (Group for Ammunition Manufacture)238Wa J Rii-Mun 1—Munitionsabteilung 1 (AmmunitionBranch 1) 239Wa J Rii-Mun 2—Munitionsabteilung 2 (AmmunitionBranch 2) 240Wa J Ku-Mun 3 u zbV—Munitionsabteilung 3 u zbV(Special Purpose Ammunition Branch) 241Wa J Rii-Mun 4—Munitionsabteilung 4 (Ammuni-.tion Branch 4) 242Wa J Rii-Mun S—Munitionsabteilung 5 (AmmunitionBranch 5) 243Wa J Rii-WuG—Amtsgruppe fur Industrielle Riistung—Waffen untl Gerat (Group for Weapons andEquipment Manufacture) 230Wa J Rii-WuG I—Allgemeines Heeresgerat(Branch for General Army Equipment) 231Wa J Rii-WuG 2—Waffenabteilung (WeaponsBranch) 232Wa J Rii-WuG S—Pionier-, Eisenbahnpionier- undFestungs-Gersteabteilung (Engineer, Railway Engineer,and Fortress Equipment Branch) 233Wa J Rii-WuG 6—Panzerkraftwagen und Zugkraftwagenabteilung(Tanks and TractorsBranch) 234Wa J Ku-WuG f—Nachrichtenger;itabteilung (SignalEquipment Branch) 235Wa J Rii-WuG 8/ZO—Abteilung fur optisches undfeinmechanisches Gerit (Optical and Precision InstrumentsBranch) 236W Allg—Allgemeine Abteilung (General ArmedForces Branch) 42Wa Priif—Amtsgruppe fur Entwicklung und Priifung(Development and Testing Group) 218Wa Priif I—Ballistische und Munitionsabteilung(Ballistical and Ammunition Branch) 219Wa Priif 2—lnfantcrieabteilung (Infantry Branch)200Wa Priif 4—Artillerical)tcilung (Artillery Branch)221l—39

I MARCH 1945Wa Prbf 5—Piomer- und Eisenbahnpionier-Abteilung(Engineer and Railway Engineer Branch)222Wa Prcf 6—Panzer- und Motorisierungs-Abteilung(Panzer and Motorized Equipment Branch) 224Wa Priif 7—Nachrichtenabteilung (Signal Branch)225Wa Priif 8& Abtcilung fiir Optik, Messwesen,Heereswetterdienst, Feuerleitung und Kartendruck(Branch for Optical, Survey, Meteorological,. Artillery Fire Control and Map Printing Equipment)226Wa Priif 9—Gasschutzabteilung (Gas ProtectionBranch) 227Wa Priif 11—Abteilung fiir Sonderger i i tEquipment Branch) 228We Priif 12—Abteilung fiir Versuchspl;tze (Branchfor Proving Grounds) 229Wa Priif Fest (See Priif Fest)Wa Z—Zentral-Amtsgruppe des Heereswaffenamts(Central Group of Army Ordnance Office) 212Wa Z 1AOrganisationsabteilung (OrganizationBranch) 213Wa Z 2—Gruppe fiir Allgemeine Verwaltungsangelegenheiten(Administrative Section) 214Wa Z 3—Betriebswirtschaftliche Abteilung (Branchfor internal office management) 215Wa Z 4-—Vorschriftenabteilung (Directive Branch)216Wa Z 6 bAllgcmeine Unterbringungs-, Bau- undUTberwachungsangelegenheiten (Branch for Housing,Construction and Guard Matters) 217WEA—Wehrersatzamt (Conscription and RecruitingOffice) 63Wehrmachtfiihrungsstab (Armed Forces OperationsStaff) 30Wehrmacht-Haushaltsabteilung (Armed Forces BudgetBranch) 28Wehrmacht-Rechtsabteilung (Armed Forces JudgeAdvocate General) 29Wehrmacht-Reifenstelle (Armed Forces Tire Center)59Wehrmacht-Sichtungsstelle (Captured DocumentsExploitation) 303Wehrmacht-Transportleitung Mitte (Central ArmedForces Transportation Command) 20Wehrmacht-Versorgungsabteilung (Armed ForcesWelfare and Pensions Branch) 48UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Wehrmachtzentralamt (Armed Forces Central Office)15Wehrwirtschaftliche Abteilung (Armed ForcesEconomic Branch) 56Wehrwirtschaftsamt (Armed Forces EconomicOffice) 55We Sist—Wehrmacht-Sichtungstelle (Captured DocumentsExploitation Center) 303WFSt—Wehrmachtfiihrungsstab (Armed ForcesOperations Staff) 30WH—Wehrmacht-Haushaltsabteilung (Armed ForcesBudget Branch) 28Wi—Wehrwirtschaftliche Abteilung (Armed ForcesEconomic Branch) 56Wi A—Wehrwirtschaftsamt (Armed Forces EconomicOffice) 55W Kr Gesch—Kriegsgeschichtliche Abteilung derWehrmacht (Armed Forces Historical Branch)38W Pr—Abteilung fiirWehrmaclitpropaganda (ArmedForces Propaganda Branch) 39WR—Wehrmachtrechtsabteilung (Armed ForcesJudge Advocate General) 29W R St—Wehrmachtreifenstelle (Armed ForcesTire Center) 59W Trsp Ltg Mitte—WehrmachttransportleitungMitte (Central Armed Forces TransportationCommand) 20WU—Abteilung fiir Wehrmachtfachschuluntcrricht(Armed Forces Education Branch)W Vers—Wehrmachtversorgungsabteilung (ArmedForces Welfare and Pensions Branch) 48WVW—Abteilung Wehrmachtverlustwescn (ArmedForces Casualty Branch) 51W Wiss—Abteilung Wissenschaft (Military ScienceBranch) 54WZA—Wehrmachtzentralamt (Armed Forces CentralOffice) 15Zahlmeisterei des Ch H Riist u. BdE (AccountingOffice of the Chief of Army Equipment and Commanderof the Replacement Army) 2681. Zeritral-Abt (Branch 1, Central Branch) 133Z—Zentralabteilung im OKH (Chief H Rust u.BdE) (Central Branch in the OKH) 282Zentral-Amtsgruppe des OKW (Armed Forces CentralGroup) 16Zentral-Amtsgruppe des Heereswaffenamts (CentralGroup of the Army Ordance Office) 212I-40

I MARCH 1945Section IV.ORGANIZATION Or THEARMY FOR WARI. Territorial BasisIn peacetime the organization and administrationof the German Army were based on the divisionof the national territory into fifteen corps areas(Wehrkreise). Each one of these contained theheadquarters and component divisions of a corpsand was as the same time the main territorialechelon for conscription, the administration ofarmy property, local defense, and nearly all othermilitary matters. The commander of the corpsarea was simultaneously the commandin’g generalof the corps, which he was destined to lead intothe field on the outbreak of war.The corps areas as well as the corps werenumbered with Roman numerals from I to XIIIplus XVII and XVIII in Austria. Thus theI Corps was located in Corps Area I, and so on.The missing numbers—XIV, XV, and XVI—were used for three non-territorial corps set upto control the motorized, light, and Pa.nzcr divisionsrespectively. After the annexation ofAustria, another non-territorial corps, XIX, wasset up to control Austrian Panzer and light divisions.By 1939 the G&man Army had been expandedfrom the seven divisions of the old Reichswehrto a total of 51 divisions plus corps troops. Theseconsisted of 36 infantry and motorized divisions,numbered from 1 to 36, in Germany proper;three infantry divisions in Austria and the Sudetenareas ; five Pmzer divisions;' four light divisions; and three mountain divisions. They wereorganized as follows:corps(corps area) Headquarters DivisionsI Kiinigsberg 1 11 21II Stettin 12 32III.....Berlin ......,.... 3 23IV...Dresde n 4 14 24V.....Stuttgart 5 25 35VI...Miinste r 6 16 26VII Miinchen 7 27 1 MtVIII Breslau 8 18 28IX Kassel 9 15x Hamburg ....... 22 30XI...Hannove r ...... 19 31XII Wiesbaden ...... 33 34 36XIII... . Niirnberg 10 17 46XVII...Wie n ........... 44 45XVIII Salzburg ...... ‘ . 2Mt 3MtUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 307451Non-territorialCorpsXIV..Magdebur g 2 Mtz 13 Mtz20Mtz 29 MtzXV..Jen a . 1L 2L 3LXVI Berlin \Pz 3 Ps4P8 5Pzx1X .. M’ ien .... 2P.7 4LAfter the Polish campaign in 1939, two newcorps areas, XX and XXI, were created in annexedterritory in the cast : subsequently CorpsAreas Riihmot lrnd MiihrcI1 and G'efleralgouverye:wnt were added.2. Mobilization PlanThe German mobilization for the present warwas a gradual process lasting several months.The High Command was determined to avoid themistakes of 1914, when millions of men weredrawn into the Army almost overnight to formsecond-rate reserve and Landwehr divisions wjt)serious disruption of the economic life of thgcountry. This time the reservists were callegup individually and deliberately w&-e mixed withthe personnel of regular divisions so that mostof the new units ,formed during the summer of1939 were fully as efficient and well organizedas the original ones. Most of the regular regimentsadded one or more supplementary battalions,composed of men of the older age classeswho had had only 8 or 12 weeks of training;these battalions exchanged pers,onnel with theregular battalions and were then organized intonew divisions just before the attack on Poland.3. Creation of the Field ArmyOn 27 August 1939, in accordance with carefullylaid plans which had been developing since thelatter part of June, the entire German Armywas split from top to bottom into two mutuajlyexclusive parts, which were to perform two distinctfunctions for the duration of the war. Osepart was to be concerned only with military operationsand was known as the Field Army(Feldheer); the other part was devoted to training,procurement, and administration in the Zqneof the Interior and was called the ReplacementArmy (Ersatzhcer). The operational parts .ofthe High Command, including the Commander.in-Chief and the bulk of the General Staff, es7tablished a field headquarters away from Berlipto control the Field Army. The rest of theHigh Command was placed under a deputy of

UNCLASSIFIEDi MAR&i 945 TM-E 30-451iI-—42

I MARCH 1945the Commander-in-Chief to be known as theChief of Army Equipment and Commander of theReplacement Army (Chef der Heeresriistung undBefehlshaber des Ersatzheeres), responsible formaintaining the Field Army by the dispatch ofreplacements, the formation of new units, andthe supply of materiel, as well as continuing thenormal military functions at home.At the same time each of the active corpstook the field under its commanding general, andthe corps areas were placed under deputy commandsto control the Replacement Army, thepermanent installations, and the conscription andtraining system. The new commander in eachcorps area was to be’ known by the dual title ofDeputy Commanding General and Commanderof the Corps Area (Stelluertretender KommandierenderGeneral und Befehlshaber im Wehrkreis).In his capacity as -Deputy CommandingGeneral he was to be responsible for all mattershaving to do with troop units of the Army, particularlythe operation of the replacement system; as Commander of the Corps Area he wasto exercise all territorial functions, such as conscription,control of permanent installations, andlocal defense, on behalf of the entire ArmedForces.The corps of the new Field Army were organizedinto armies (Armeen)—an administrativeand tactical echelon which had not existed inpeacetime. These, in turn, were placed underthe tactical control of army groups (Heeresgruppen),which were directly responsible tofield headquarters for the conduct of operations.At- the lower levels, each unit which tookthe field in 1939 left behind at its home stationa rear echelon which was known as its replacementtraining unit (Ersatzeinheit). An infantryregiment, for example, left behind an infantryreplacement training battalion, bearing the samenumber, which was thenceforth to induct andtrain recruits, dispatch them to the field regimentas needed, and receive personnel back fromthe field unit if they were to be discharged orwhen they came out of general hospitals.4. Functions of the Home CommandThe functions of the wartime command for theZone of the Interior may be described as threefold:a. PERSONNEL. Conscription, training and replacementof personnel include control of mobilizationpolicies and the actual call-up and induc-UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451tion of men; all types of military training, includingthe selection and schooling of officers andnoncommissioned officers; the dispatch of personnelreplacements to field units in response totheir requisitions; and the organization of newunits.1). EQUIPMENT. Design, procurement, acceptance,and storage of equipment of all kinds, andits dispatch to the Field Army, involve: assessmentof the future needs of the field; planningof production; obtaining the necessary raw materialsand labor; development and testing of newweapons; fiscal matters; maintenance of suitablestorage and transport facilities, and of headquartersto control them; and organization ofthe channels for supply requisitions and deliveries.c. ADMINISTRATION. Administration of thepermanent military installations in the Zone ofthe Interior and emergency defense of the hometerritory also are responsibilities of the HomeCommand. The latter function (which would becomeoperative, for example, in case of a surpriseairborne invasion of the heart of Germany)would be exercised by the Home Command onlyuntil an adequate Field Army force could beassembled to take charge of the operations.rc e s . functions of the Home Commandare discussed in detail in Sections V and VI, ofthis chapter and in Chapter VI below.5. Organization of the Theater of WarOn the outbreak of war, all the parts of Europeand its adjacent waters which might be the sceneof operations became, from the German pointof view, the Theater of War (Kriegsgebiet).Within this area the Germans distinguish betweenthe Theater of Operations (Operationsgebiet) andthe Zone of the Interior (Heimatkriegsgebiet).Since, in the German concept, wars should beconducted as far as possible beyond their ownfrontiers, the military nomenclature also providesfor an intermediate area known as the Zone ofMilitary Administration (Gebeit der Kreigsverwaltung)or Occupied Territory (BesetztesGebiet); in fact, much of Europe was in thiscategory during the years when the Germanarmies were fighting in the distant steppes ofRussia and in Africa.The Theater of Operations itself is dividedinto the Combat Zone (Gefechtsgebiet) and theCommunications Zone (Riickwtirtiges Gebiet).The latter may be entirely taken up by the ArmyRear Areas (Riickzetirtige Armeegebiete) or,1-43

I MARCH 1945if the line of communications is long, its rearwardpart may be the Army Group Rear Area (RiickwtirtigesHeeresgebiet).Each of the above subdivisions of the Theaterof War is subject to a different type of administrationby the military, mixed military and civil,or only the civil authorities. The arrangement isshown schematically in Figure 7.The Zone of the Interior was extended in1941 and 1942 to include Denmark, Alsace, Lorraine,Luxemburg, and those parts of Polandincorporated in the so-called Government General;it already included Bohemia and Moravia.By contrast, much of Germany itself was withinthe Theater of Operations and even within theCombat Zone by the end of 1944.The Zone of the Interior is in general thearea under the command of the Chief of ArmyEquipment and Commander of the ReplacementArmy. Special regulations provide for the divisionof authority whenever units or installationsof the Replacement Army are stationed withinthe Theater of Operations, as has happenedwith the pushing back of the front lines into Germany.In such cases the field commander has noauthority over the units or installations in ques-UNCLASSIFIED E3

MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30451munication so that the army group commandercan devote himself entirely to combat operations.Similarly, the Army Rear Area is controlled bya Commander .of Army Rear Area (Kommandantdes rihkwtirtigen Armeegebiets) with the statusof a division commander. The rear area commandershave at their disposal security (Siclzeru8rg.r) units and police troops and set up varioustypes of administrative headquarters.6. Administration of Occupied TerritoryIn occupied territory, or the Zone of MilitaryAdministration (which in some cases has beenthe "friendly" territory of nations allied to Germany),the administrative structure is distinctfrom the operational control of any German combatunits stationed in it. In France before theAllied landing in 1944, for example, the MilitaryAdministration under General von Stiilpnagelwas responsible for local security and fordealing with the French authorities and the population,but had no direct connection with vonRundstedt's army group which was stationedthere for operational purposes. Distinct fromboth these commands were the training unitsin reserve divisions stationed in France, whichcame under the control of the Commander of theReplacement Army in Berlin for training andreplacement purposes.Typical of the flexibility of the German systemwas the great variety shown in the forms ofmilitary administration in the different occupiedcotintries. In each case the form of Germanmilitary control was adapted to the strategic needsas well as to the political, economic, and psychologicalfactors. In Denmark there was officiallyno control at all, sinke the country was regardedas "protected" and not occupied; the Germantroops stationed there came under a Commanderof German Troops in Denmark, while the administrationof the country was left to the constitutionalDanish government, subject only (until1944) to German diplomatic pressure. At theopposite extreme was Poland, where no remnantof the-previous native administration remainedand the Germans had to have tight militarycontrol and even do most of the local policing.In France and ‘some other countries theGermans worked largely through the native authoritiesbut also set up their own administrativearea headquarters (Oberfeldkommandanturen)and sub-area headquarters (Feldkommandanturen)as the local garrison commands.Section V. FUNCTIONS OF THECORPS AREA1. IntroductionAS has been shown, the Home Command in wartimeis responsible for the replacement of personnel,the procurement of equipment, andterritorial administration and defense. Most ofthese functions are exercised through the regionalcorps areas, which are the permanent basis forthe organization and administration of the GermanArmy. It is these functions which are discussedin this secticn.A few, functions of the Home Command areperformed on a basis other than the territorial oneof corps areas and are not included here. By farthe most important of these is the procurement,acceptance, storage, and issue of ordnance materiel,which is hantllc~tl by the Army OrdnanceOffice and the Ordnance Inspectorate operatingthrough their own regional organization ; this func-.tion is discussed in detail in Chapter \‘I below.Other types of supplies, with the exception ofgasoline and lubricants, are administered by thecorps areas after procurement policies have beenestablished by the High Command.2. Corps Area ResponsibilitiesThe functions of the corps area headquarters inwartime may be divided into those which it performsas a territorial command and those whichaccrue to it as the deputy headquarters of a peacetimearmy corps which is now in the field. As aterritorial command it is responsible to the ArmedForces High Command and has responsibilitiesaffecting all three branches of the Armed Forces;in this capacity it is officially refcrrcd to as CorpsArea Headquarters . . . (Wckrkrciskommando. . . ). In its other capacity it is under the ArmyHigh Command alone and is referred to asDeputy Headquarters of the ... Army Corps(Stcllvcrtretcndes Gcncralkommando . . . Armcckorps); as such it is responsible for the replacementtraining system for all the field units whichaye affiliated with it.The following are the principal responsibilitiesof this combined headquarters :Conscription of manpower, carried out througha system of conscription offices. (See Section VIof this chapter below.)Training, conducted in training units whichcome under controlling staffs of regimental and

I MARCH 1945division status and in military schools. (See SectionVI.)Replacgment of personnel for the affiliated fieldunits and formation of new units. (See SectionVI.)Local defense is provided for, in the first instance,by static units of various types, particularlythe local defense battalions (Landcssclziitzen-Bataillone), local construction units (Landesbaupioniere),and river guard units (Landespioniere).Such units are controlled by a special administrativedivision staff (Divisions-Komuznzandoz.b.V.), of which one was set up in each corpsarea early in the war. They provide guards forvital installations and for prisoner of war campsand furnish personnel for local garrison battalions• (Standortbataillolze) and companies. In case ofemergency the corps area commander has extraordinarypowers over civilian agencies as well asthe military units and installations in his territory ;he may then, for example, issue orders to the probvincialand local authorities, commandeer transportand supplies, and take any other steps necessaryuntil outside help arrives.Any General Headquarters units of the FieldArmy which are temporarily stationed in the corpsarea are controlled by the corps area headquartersthrough its special administrative division staff(Div. k-do. 2.b.V.) or other appropriate commandchannel.Auditing of the accounts of all field units affiliatedwith the corps area is another responsibility.All military personnel, regardless of their ownunit affiliation, are subject to the curfews andother disciplinary regulations issued by the localgarrison commander within the corps area. Theseregulations are enforced by a patrol service maintainedby the corps area headquarters as well asby the garrison headquarters. In all territorialmatters the corps area commander has a largedegree of autonomy. He allots units to garrisonsand determines the areas controlled by the garrisoncommanders. He also controls the CorpsArea Administration (W elzrkreisz~erwaltung) andits subordinate administrative offices so far astheir activity concerns the troops stationed in thecorps area.3. Corps Area Headquarters OrganizationThe various responsibilities of the corps area commanderand the corps area headquarters are reflectedin the composition and functions of hisregular staff and attached special command staffs.l—46UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451In principle, the staff is organized like any normalcorps staff. The differences result from thefact that it has, not an operational, but a replacementmission; furthermore it is not a mobile, buta static organization. Thus, for example, SectionI b, which in a field unit handles supply of equipmentand ammunition, is in this case also responsiblefor the supply of manpow-cr and for sendingreplacements to the Field Army; Section I c, normally.ifitelligence, is not primarily concerned withobtaining information about the enemy but withcounterintelligence and security; and Sections II,personnel, and IV a, administration, are expanded,Section II serving also as the depository for personnelrecords while Section IV a is incorporatedinto the large and semi-autonomous organizationof the Corps Area Administration (Wehrkreisverwaltung).The staff is headed by a Chief of Staff (Chefdcs Stabes) and includes the following sections:Section I is responsible for such matters astraining, quarters, air raid protection, gas defense,transportation, training films, surveying and mapping,engineer units. and technical supervision of-utilities in military installations.Signal matters are handled in the I a Sectionby the Commander of Signal Troops (Ko~mandeurder NachrichteMrzcppen). He in turnhas a staff of his own concerned with training,activation, and replacement of signal units, supervisionof radio traffic, static telephone installations,signal equipment, and female auxiliaries.Section I b handles the supply of ordnanceequipment and ammunition for units stationed inthe corps area. As an echelon in the control ofmanpower, this section supervises the conscriptionoffices (Wchrevsatzdienststellen) and is responsiblefor issuing the orders for the transferof replacements to units of the Field Army inresponse to their requisitions.Section I c handles counterintelligence and securityto the limited extent that the corps areaheadquarters participates in these activities. Italso is concerned with Armed Forces propagandaand press relations, as well as the training andemployment of interpreters. Formerly this sectionalso handled troop welfare, morale building, andrecreational activities; later, these became the responsibilityof the National-Socialist GuidanceOfficer (Nationalsozialistischer Fiilzrungsofi.zier)who is an independent staff officer in charge of anewly created section of the staff.Section II, the personnel section, is divided into

I MARCH 1945Subsections II a, dealing with officer personnel,and II b, concerned with enlisted personnel. SubsectionII a keeps individual records fo;’ all p;ofessionalofficers regardless of where they are employedand handles the recruiting of officer candidatesand awards of decorations. Subsection II bdeals with transfers and detachment of individualenlisted men to schools or for other duty. It doesnot keep individual records for enlisted personnel,as these are kept by the conscription offices. Italso handles the rec.ruiting of potential officer andnoncommissioned officer candidates (A~z~&~lzcstellrnfiir den Fiihrcunacll~illtchs), deferment ofessential workers, and furloughs and discharges.Section III is headed by the corps judge(Korpsriclatcr) ; however the corps area heaclquartersis not an important echelon for legalmatters.Section IV a, administratign, is headed by theKorpsintendant who at the same time has chargeof the Corps Area Administration (Wehrkreisverwaltung).Section IV b is headed by the Deputy CorpsSurgeon (Stellvertretelzder Korpsarzt, also calledWehrkreisarzt), who advises the commander -on~medical questions and has a staff of his own.Under him spe/cial medical officers (Trupfieniirzte)supervise discharges for medicab reasons whichare handled through army discharge bureaus(Heeresentlassungsstellelz).Section IV c is the Deputy Corps Veterinarian(Stellvertretender. Korpsveteriniir, also calledWehrkreisveteriniir), who has his own separatestaff.Section IV d comprises the Protestant andCatholic corps area chaplains (W ehrkreispfarrer).Motor transport (Heeres-Motorisierung) ishandled by a separate staff section, sometimes calledSection V or referred to as the Corps Area MotorTransport Officer (Wehrkreiskraftfahvofizier)It deals with the issue of licenses for militarydrivers and vehicles; allocation and distributionof military vehicles, tires, equipment, gasoline,and oil; traffic control; and the supply of vehicles.Independently of this section there exists aCommander of Motor Maintenance Troops(Kowmandeur der Kraftfahrparktruppe), whocontrols motor maintenance training units, niotormaintenance and repair parks, and parks for spareparts and tires. This commander is sometimes, ifnot always, the same man as the Corps AreaMotor Transport Officer.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451On the staff of each corps area headquarters aSection F, Welfare (Fiirsorge), controls the activitiesof welfare officers (Fursorge-Offiziere)who give advice and assistance to professionalsoldiers who are discharged or about to be discharged.All discharged non-professional soldiersare taken care of by the Ministry of Labor.This section represents that part of the GermanWelfare and Pensions (I;iirsorge und Versorgztrlg)organization which is administered by thecorps area commander. The The part, Pensions(Vcrsorgung), is handled on a different level, thechain of command going from the Armed ForcesHigh Command to one of three regional WelfareGroups (Versorgungsgruppen) which are locatedat Berlin, Breslau, and Munich. These controlthe Welfare and Pension Offices (Fiirsorge- undVersorgungsiimtcr), of which there is one in eachcorps area. These offices, which . do not form partof the corps area organization, grant pensionsfor discharged professional soldiers and their dependents.The reason for the separation of theoffices from the control of the corps area commanderis the desire to achieve uniformity in theadministration of pensions throughout the entireReich.Attached to the staff of each corps area headquartersis a Commander of Prisoners of War(Konzmandcw dcr Kriegsgefangenen im Wehrkreis. . .). who is in charge of all prisoner of warcamps in the corps a He r c a . forofficers (Ofizierslagcr or Oflag) and camps orenlisted personnel ( r .lallnscllafts-Stall~mlager orStalag), both types being designated by the Romannumeral of the corps area and distinguished'by letters, as XII A, G, etc.The Commander of Military Police Patrols(Konzmalldcur drs Strcifendicnstes) is the superiorof all road and railway patrols. ’ is directlysubordinate to the corps area commanderand works in close liaison with the garrison commanders.The Officer for Military Economic Affairs(Wehrzvirtscjiaftsoffizier) handles, for the corpsarea commander, all questions of military economicshaving a territorial bearing; he is at thesame time a direct representative of the ArmedForces Economic Office in the Armed ForcesHigh Command and liaison officer to the regionalarmament inspectorates (Riistungsinspektionen)of the Ministry for Armaments and War Production(Ministcrium fiir Riistung und Kriegsproduktion).1—47

UNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 304514. Garrison HeadquartersThe local territorial responsibilities of the corpsarea commander are exercised through ArmedForces Senior Garrison Officers (Wehrmacht-Standorttilteste). In garrisons with permanentheadquarters (Kommandanturen), or on maneuverareas (TruppsntibungsplZtze), the commander(Kommandant) is automatically the senior garrisonofficer.If the majority of the units or installations ina garrison belong to the Navy or Air Force, thesenior garrison officer may be taken from thesebranches of the Armed Forces instead of from theArmy, but he remains subordinate to the corpsarea commander.The area of the garrison town and its immediatevicinity is designated as the garrison district(Standortbezirk), its boundaries fixed by thesenior garrison officer with the approval of thecorps area commander. Within this district thesenior garrison officer is fully responsible fordiscipline, local defense, and related matters onbehalf of the entire Armed Forces; enlisted personnel,for example, require a pass to leave thegarrison district.All parts of the corps area which are not includedin garrison districts are allotted by thecorps area commander to so-called garrison areas(Standortbereiche), which are placed under thecontrol of existing senior garrison officers for theexercise of the same functions as within the districts.If there is an airport (Fliegerhorst) within thegarrison district, it is treated as an autonomousdistrict and placed under the command of a GermanAir Force officer.The senior garrison officer is authorized tocommandeer soldiers and horse-drawn vehicles inhis area to do work for the general purposes ofthe garrison. In case of emergency he may mobilizespecial cletatchments.The senior garrison officer issues regulationsfor garrison guards and patrols and cooperateswith units of the Armed Forces gatrol Service(Wehrwzacht-Streifendienstj. He is responsiblefor local defense measures, especially for the airraid protection of all installations belonging to theArmed Forces, and for the efficiency of the airraid protection services.The senior garrison officer is responsible forthe maintenance of military discipline among allmembers of the Armed Forces within his territory; all military personnel on leave have to report!—48at the garrison headquarters within 48 hours, andthe senior garrison officer may declare certainrestaurants or streets off limits.5. Corps Area Administrationa. GENERAL. All administrative matters in theGerman Army are controlled at the top by theArmy Administration Office (Heeresverzwaltungsamt)in the Army High Command. Under thisoffice the administrative agencies within Germanyare organized on a territorial basis, with the CorpsArea Administration (Wchrkreisvcrwaliung) asthe next lower echelon. Below this, these mattersare handled by the local garrison administrations(Hccres-Standortverwaltungcn) and other specializedtypes of local administrative agencies.This entire system operates independently of thetactical chain of command. The word "administration"(Verzvaltung) in the German Army coversprimarily pay, rations, clothing, and billeting.b. DUAL POSITION OF THE CORPS AREA ADMINISTRATION. The degree of independent authorityof the Corps Area Administration in carryingout its duties depends on the nature of thesubject matter, which is divided into two basic'categories: those in which the Corps Area Administrationacts independently of the Corps AreaHeadquarters and is responsible only to the ArmyAdministration Office, and those in which it actson the orders of the corps area commander. Inthe latter type of subject, the Corps Area Administrationfunctions as the IV a, or administrativesection, of the corps area staff, and these subjectsare usually referred to as "IV a matters". Theyare mostly matters connected with the administrationof the corps area headquarters itself or of theunits directly subordinate to it.The matters in which the Corps Arca Administrationacts independently are those which derivefrom its status as a responsible echelon in theterritorial administrative structure. In these mattersit has its own direct administrative channels,upwards to the Army Administration Office anddownwards to the local garrison administrations.They include the following categories :Pay, accounting, social insurance, and allowances.Procurement, storage, and issue of utensils andgeneral equipment. *Supervision of the handling of food in processingplants and in the ration depots.Billeting, so. far as it is not determined by themilitary decision of the corps area commander.Building and civilian contracts.

I MARCH 1945Personnel matters of all administrative officersin the Corps Area Administration, its subordinateagencies, and Field Army units maintained by thecorps area.Training of administrative officers. In principlethis separation into "IV a matters" and independentlyhandled administrative matters is carrieddown to the lowest administiative echelons, althoughthe scope of their independent authority isless comprehensive than that of the Corps AreaAdministration. This basic division of the administrativeauthority is characteristic of the dualfunctions and responsibilities of the administrativeservice of the German Army.The head of the Corps Area Administration isan administrative officer in the Special TroopService (,Truppensoadcva’ie~zst) with the titleKorpsintefzdant who is at the same time the headof Section IV a of the staff of the corps area commander.As head of the Corps Area Administrationthe Korpsintendant is directly subordinate JOthe Army Administration Office; as a staff officerhe is subordinate to the commanding general.c. FUNCTIONS OF THE CORPS AREA ADMINISUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451TRATION. The principal function of the CorpsArea Administration consists in supervising thevarious local offices in the corps area which constitutethe executive organs of administration.The local administrative offices are:Army garrison administrations (Heeres-Standortzerwaltungen).Army ration main depots (Heeres-Verpjlegungshauptiimtcr)and army ration depots(Heeres-VerPflrgztlzgsiilrlter).Hospital administrations (Lazarettverwaltungen).Clothing offices (Bcklcidu~zgsiimter).Construction ofices (!lrcrcshautinzter).Administrative offices of units of battalion orhigher status located in the corps area (Zahlwzeistereien).An additional function of the Corps Area Administrationis auditing the accounts of the battalionadministrative officers (Truppenzahlmeisfer)of Field Army units affiliated with thecorps area, wherever they are located. It mayissue instructions to these officers, but they arctechnically subordinate not to it but to the FieldCORPS AREAH Q(WKR.KDO.)ARMY HIGH COMMANDARMY ADMINISTRATION OFFICE( HV A)CORPS AREA ADMINISTRATION(WEHRKREIS-VERWALTUNG)I1SECTSECTB 6tz (ft DC U.1*"o(9z53z3oo(00£3O(9>H(0Ct:oUNITPAYMASTERS!RATIONDEPOTSFigure 8.—Corps Area Administration.l—49

I MARCH 1945Army administrative headquarters at higherechelons.The Corps Area Administration is also responsiblefor personnel matters of administrative officersin units affiliated with the corps area andserves as their replacement unit. It also trainssuch officers.d. ORGANIZATION OF TIIE CORPS AREA ADMINISTRATION. Corresponding to its responsibilitiesthe Corps Area Administration is subdivided intothe following sections (Sachgcbiete) :Section A : Fiscal matters ; interpretation ofpay regulations; travel, moving, and transportationallowances ; welfare and pensions ; vocationalschools of the Army ; office equipment; libraries ;general rules for cashiers, bookkeepers, and auditors; office regulations for paymasters.Section B: For the duration of the war thissection is known as the auditing office (Abrechnungsintendantur).It audits the accounts of unitpaymasters in the field and of ordnance installationsin the corps area.Section C: Rations; procurement, administration,and issue of ratibns through the rationdepots; procurement of forage for the remountdepots ; bakeries ; troop-kitchens ; ration supplyfor the troops while on maneuvers ; auditing of theaccounts of the ration depots and of those garrisonadministrations with a "rations" department;auditing of the accounts of the remount depots.Sectidn D: Supervision of th’e garrison administrations;auditing of their accounts; billeting; administration of real estate.Section E : Administration of hospitals; auditingof their accounts ; questions concerning civilianworkers; legal matters so far as not dealtwith in any of the other sections; clothing; supervisionof clothing depots and auditing of theiraccounts.Section F : Construction matters; supervisionof the construction offices; civilian contracts.Section G: Procurement of living quartersfor members of the staff of the Corps Area Administration.Section P : (PI) ,Personnel matters of theadministrative officers. (P II) Personnel mattersof civilian workers.e. SPECIAL ADMINISTRATIVE HEADQUARTERS.Comparable with the Corps Area Administrations,but in a special position, is the Administration forCentral Army Tasks (Verwaltung fiir Zentralaufgabendes Heeres). This office is organized inthe same way as the’ Corps Area AdministrationsI—50UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451and carries out the administration for OKH-controlledestablishments in Corps Area III such asdemonstration units, army specialist schools,academies, and other institutions.f. SUBORDINATE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENCIES.Of the various local administrative agencies subordinateto the Corps Area Administration, thosewhich deal with rations and clothing form part ofthe organization of supply and are therefore dealtwith in detail in Chapter VI below.The most important of the remaining local officesare the garrison administrations (Heeres-Standortverwaltungen).As a rule there is a garrison administration inevery garrison and on every maneuver area; it isalways designated by the name of the garrisontown. Large cities may have more than one garrisonadministration.The head of the garrison administration is anadministrative officer who is appointed by theArmy High Command and who is directly subordinateto the Korpsintendant. The head of thegarrison administration is not on the staff of thegarrison commander, and there is no subordinationof the garrison administration to the garrisoncommander. The two are expected to cooperateclosely, but in practice this dual authority leadsat times to difficulties which have to be adjustedby agreement between the Corps Area Administrationand the corps area commander.The garrison administration normally consistsof the following departments:Real estate management (GI-undstiicksverwZtung).Garrison finance office (Hrcrcsstarldortkasse).Pay records for civilian workers (Standortlohn- .stelle).Pay records for soldiers (Sfandortgcbiihrnisstclle).Utensils and general equipnlcnt depot (Geriitclagcr).The real estate department handles the maintask of the garrison administration, which is themanagement and utilization of the real estate includingtraining area, and the erection, maintenance,and administration of the buildings andother installations owned or rented by the Army.Excluded from these are the garrison hospitals(Standortlazarette) and the installations of theremount depots, which are taken care of by theseorganizations themselves.The garrison finance office has the task of makingpayments and keeping books and accounts

I MARCH 1945for the garrison administration and the constructionoffices (HeeresJauiitizter). It also, keeps thesurplus cash for other local offices of the Army.Affiliated with a garrison finance office are allsmall unit pay offices (ZahlsteZZen) and branchpay offices (Ncbenzahlstellen), which are onlyallowed to make cash payments and which thereforeuse the garrison finance office for other typesof payment.The pay office for civilian workers keeps thepay records for these groups and instructs thegarrison finance office to make the correspondingpayments.The department handling pay records of soldiersin the field determines the regular servicepay (Wehrl~~aclztbesoldung for professional soldiersand Kriegsbesoldung for all other soldiers)and makes the corresponding payments throughthe garrison finance office to their accounts ordependents.The utensils and genera1 equipment depots storetools, utensils, and office equipment used in barracksand other installations. Such utensils andgeneral equipment are procured by the CorpsArea Administration, which orders one or several.of the larger garrison administrations to effectthe purchases for the entire area and store thegoods.Another type of local administrative agency isthe hospital administration (Lazaretts~ewaltungj.This is subordinate to the Corps Area Administrationas well as to the medical officer in chargeof the hospital. It deals independently, under thesupervision of the Corps Area Administration,with payments, bookkeeping, and accounting forthe hospital. In its concern for the medical personnel,officials, and hospitalized soldiers in mattersof pay, rations, and clothing it occupies thesame position as the administrative office (Zahlmeister)of a unit staff. With regard to the administrationof the real estate and buildings belongingto the hospital it has the same responsibilitiesas the garrison administration has for otherproperty.Army construction offices (Heeresbauiimterand Heeresneubauiimter) are established by theArmy High Command, which also ‘appoints thehead of the office and determines the size of hisstaff. The work of the construction offices issupervised by the Director of Construction (SectionF) in the Corps Area Administration.Within their district Army construction officesdeal with the technical side of the construction,UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451repair, and maintenance of buildings owned ‘orrented by the Army and give advice to the otheradministrative agencies.6. Medical Service and Installationsa. MEDICAL SERVICE. Within the ArmedForces the administration of the medical servicesand the use of the medical installations and facilitiesin Germany have been centralized to a highdegree. In considering the medical organizationof the Replacement s\rmy it should be borne inmind that these facilities, to a varying degree,are also at the disposal of the other branches ofthe Armed Forces and of the Wafen-SS.The Chief Army Medical Inspector (HeeressanitZ.tsinspekteur),whose activities are supervisedby the Armed Forces Surgeon Genera1(Chef des Weh~marhtsanittitswesens), is stationedat the headquarters of the Commander ofthe Replacement Army but does not form part ofhis staff. He works through his own staff, theArmy Medical Inspectorate (Heeressantitiitsinspektion),which is part of the General ArmyOffice (Allgemeines Heevesamt). He is the headof the medical services of the Field Army as wellas of the Replacement Army. The Chief ArmyMedical Inspector is the superior of the medicalpersonnel of the Army in disciplinary matters andquestions concerning medical work. He decideson the assignment and promotion of medicalofficers.Within the limits of the directives issued bythe Armed Forces Surgeon General he has thefollowing responsibilities:Training of medical personnel.Direction of the medical service including hygienicand sanitary measures in the Army.Evacuation and hospitalization of casualtiesand the administration of all military hospitals.Supply of drugs and medical equipment for theArmy.The permanent medical installations in Germanycomprise medical units, hospitals, and supplyinstallations which are all organized on astrictly territorial basis.b. CORPS AREA SURGEONS. In the ReplacementArmy the channels of command go through .the chief medical officers of the corps areas.These officers have a dual title. They are calleddeputy corps surgeon (Stellvertretender Korpsarzt)for orders, which concern the troops andemanate from the deputy corps headquarters(Stellvertretendes Generalkommando), and corps1—51

lUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451area surgeon (W ehrkveisarzt) in all territorialmatters which are handled under the jangene),of the corps area headquarters (Wehrkreiskommando).In this dual capacity they are on thestaff of the corps area commander and head o fIV b (medical) section of this staff. They a stherefore subordinate to the commander of thecorps area as well as to the Chief Army MedicalInspector. Within their territory the chief o fcal officers of the corps areas have the more functionsand responsibilities as the Chief ArmyMedical Inspector.c. MEDICAL UNITS. The corps area surgeonscontrol the medical replacement battalions zarettiits-Ersatzabteilungen), one in each corps varywhich train medical replacements for the FieldArmy. They also control the medical battalions(Sanitiits-Abteilungen), which during the warcomprise all the medical personnel other thanthose in training, serving in the ReplacementArmy with units or in general hospitals. Eachcorps area usually has two or three medical battalions,which are designated by their headquarterstown.The medical battalions are composed of bed scal sectiens (Heere’s-Sanith’tsstaffeln) of groupedsize. The medical sections are the local sub-unitsof the medical battalions and generally 'can befound in every permanent garrison and everymaneuver area. They are designated by thename of the garrison town.The commander of the medical section is thelocal representative of the corps area soldiersand also serves as the garrison surgeon theortarzt) and head of the IV b section on thestaff of the senior garrison officer. The garrisonsurgeon is therefore subordinate to the' seniorgarrison officer as well as to the corps area surgeon.The garrison surgeon also trea tmemilitary hospitals in his area.d. HOSPITALS. In peacetime all the larger arearisons had .permanent garrison hospitals tersort-Lazarette). In addition there existed c a lArmy tuberculosis hospitals (Lazarette fiir Lungenkrankedes Heeres) and Army t h e(Kurlazarette des Heeres).In wartime all these hospitals are designatedgeneral hospitals (Reservelazarette) Thus thegarrison hospitals became Reservelazarette, metuberculosis hospitals Reserve-Lazarette fiir sentgenkranke, and the sanatoriums Reserve-Kurlamrette.In addition Army convalescents' homes(Heeres-Genesungsheiwe), general hospitals hasl—52prisoners of war (Reservelazarette fiir Kriegsgefangene),and other types were created.Since the peacetime facilities were entirely inadequatefor the wartime needs, a large numberof civilian institutions and suitable buildings suchas civilian hospitals, hotels, and schools weretaken over and converted into general hospitals.The general hospitals are designated by the nameof the town, and Roman numerals if there ismore than one general hospital in the town—forexample Reservelazarett Kassel III. If a generalhospital controls wards in separate buildingsthese usually are called part-hospitals (Teillazarette).The capacity of a general hospital mayvary anywhere from 100 to 1,000 or more beds.The medical personnel of a general hospitalbelong to the medical section (Heeressanitiitsstaffel)which is stationed in that particular town ordistrict. They therefore are affiliated permanentlywith one of the medical battalions (Sanitdtsabteilungen)of the corps area.For the purposes of medical supervision, generalhospitals, with an aggregate of about 5,000beds in a given area of the Wehrkreis, aregrouped together into general hospital districts(Reservelazarett-Bezirke) dist ri c tssupervision of senior medical officers.The majority of the general hospitals areequipped and staffed to deal with a fairly widerange of casualties and diseases, but a few ofthem specialize, such as general hospitals for blindsoldiers or for soldiers with brain injuries. Inthe military medical organization, the main typesof casualties and diseases are indicated by a systemof code numbers, running from 1 to 21, inorder to facilitate the distribution of casualties tothose hospitals which are best fitted for theirtreatment.For the purposes of evacuation and distributionof casualties each general hospital in a givenarea is subordinate to a transportation headquarters(Transport-Konwnandantur), he a medicalliaison officer handles all these questions. Thedistribution itself is based on daily reports fromthe general hospitals to their local distributingcenters (Kranken-V erteilungs-Stelle) giving thenumber of unoccupied beds.All general hospitals form part of the ReplacementArmy and therefore, as a rule, all soldierssent to a general hospital automatically are transferredfrom the Field Army to the ReplacementArmy. At times, when the Theater of Operationshas extended into Germany proper, this rule has

I MARCH 1945been modified, so that soldiers who are sent togeneral hospitals in the corps areas near the combatzone are transferred to the Replacement Armyonly after having stayed in the general hospitalfor 8 weeks; this is the same period that appliesto field hospitals.7. Veterinary Servicea. CONTROL. At the head of the veterinaryservices of the Armed Forces is the VeterinaryInspector (Yete,;,iivilzspektcur), who is stationedat the heaquarters of the Commander of the ReplacementArmy. Although subordinate to thelatter, he receives his instructions regarding questionsconcerning both the Field Army and theReplacement Army direct from the Commanderin-Chiefof the Army.The staff of the Veterinary Inspector is theVeterinary Inspectorate in the General ArmyOffice (Allgemeines Heeresamt).The Veterinary Inspector is the superior of allveterinary and horse-shoeing personnel in all mattersconcerning their professional or vocationalactivity. He makes suggestions to the Army PersonnelOffice for the appointment of the higherranking veterinary officers of the Army and makesthese appointments himself for the lower ranks.He instructs the Army Veterinarian (Heeres-Ycteriniir) with regard to the veterinary servicein the Field Army, the evacuation of horses, andthe replacement of horses and veterinary equipment.In the Replacement Army the Veterinary Inspectordirects. the veterinary service in accordancewith instructions given by the Commanderof the Replacement Army. He is responsiblefor the training of veterinary and horse-shoeingpersonnel and the replacement of veterinaryequipment. He gives the instructions for thedistribution of horses evacuated from the fieldand their allocation to home horse hospitals(Heimat-Pferde-lazarettc).In the Zone of the Interior the authority ofthe Veterinary Inspector is exercised through thedeputy corps veterinarian (StellvertretendcrKorpsveteriniir), who is on the staff of the deputycorps commander as his IVc. He holds the alternativetitle of Corps Area Veterinarian (Wehrkreisveteriniir)for his territorial functions.Under the deputy corps veterinarian are theveterinary personnel and the veterinary installationslocated in his territory.b. VETERINARY INSTALLATIONS. Each corpsTM-E 30-451area has home horse hospitals (Heimat-Pferdelazarette),to which are evacuated the horseswhich cannot be treated at the installations of theField Army, and sick horses from the ReplacementArmy. The home horse hospitals are numberedwith the Arabic number of the corps area,and if there is more than one horse hospital in acorps area they will be distinguished by adding100, 200, etc., to the number.Horses that have been cured go from the homehorse hospital to a home horse park (Heimatpferdepark).Each corps area has one home horsepark. The Corps Veterinarian orders whichhorses from the home horse park are to go to theField Army and which to the Replacement Army.8. Other Installationsa. REMOUNTS. Army remount purchasing commissions(Heeres-Remontieru~zgskommissionen)procure young horses for the Army. These commissionsare outside the corps area structure anddirectly subordinate to the Army High Command.The young horses purchased for the Army arestabled and maintained by Army remount depots(Heeres-Remonteiimtcr) until they have reachedthe age for training in corps area riding and drivingschools or delivery to troop units. The remountdepots are independent of the remount purchasingcommissions. They are subordinate to thecorps area commander, but in certain respectsthey are under direct control of the Inspector ofRiding and Driving at the Army High Command(Inspektew dcs Reit- und Falwwesens) so as toassure uniformity throughout all corps areas.b. FORESTRY. The Army Forest and FisheriesControl Offices (Hrcrcs-Forstaufsiclztstimter) supervisethe administration and utilization of forestsand fisheries connected with properties belongingto the Army, such as maneuver areas.In Germany proper there are two of these controloffices, at Berlin and Wiesbaden, controlling thelocal offices in the Corps Areas I-XIII.These local offices are called Army Forest Offices(Heeres-Forsfiimtrr) ; they in turn superviseforestry offices (Hceres-Oberfiirstereien andHecrcs-Rcvierfiirstcrric,l ).The Army forest and fisheries control officesact in conjunction with the respective corps areaheadquarters on matters concerning the troops andwith the corps area idministrations in fiscal andbookkeeping questions.c. MILITARY PRISONS. Military prisons ark inter-serviceinstitutions. They are not organizedl—53

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSlFlEDTM-E 30-451on a territorial basis but generally have severalcorps areas allotted to them.There are various kinds of military prisons,each kind receiving prisoners of a different category.These prisoners originate from the ReplacementArmy as well as from the Field Army.Wehrmaclzt-Gefiingrcisse, which are responsibledirectly to the Armed Forces High Command, receivesoldiers who are condemned to terms formore than 3 months. They are also used for prisonersof war who are sentenced to terms of imprisonment.Wehrmacht-Untersuclzungsgefiillgnisse acceptprisoners with sentences of up to 3 months.Wehrmaclrt-Haftanstalten are subordinate togarrison headquarters and take prisoners withsentences of up to 6 weeks.There is one Wehrmacht-Festungshaftanstalt,which takes soldiers whose sentences specify thatthey are to. be confined to a fortress, i.e., thattheir offense is not a a one.d. ARMED FORCES SIGNAL HEADQUARTERS( W ehrmacht-N achriclzte~ako~~~~~zandantu~e~z) aredesignated by the towns in which they are located.They are regional liaison offices between theArmed Forces and the German Postal Service(Dcutsche Reichspost). In addition to their liaisonfunctions they collect data on installations forlong-distance communications which are of militaryimportance.Section VI.. CONSCRIPTION, REPLACEMENT,AND TRAININGI. IntroductionThis section deals with the entire system of personnelreplacement for the Field Army. Theunits of the Field Army do not procure theirown replacements independently. Replacementsfor the field units are obtained only through thespecified units of the Replacement Army, andthose for the units of the Replacement Army inturn come only through the home recruitingstations. Thus, the following main divisions ofthe replacement system are obvious:Conscription—the function of the home recruitingstations (Wehrersat~dienststellcn) underthe Armed Forces High Command (OKW).Replacement and Training—the primary functionof the Replacement Army (Ersatzheer).The following pages describe the machineryfor .the registration and supervision of thoseliable to service, their induction and training in1—54one of the numerous replacement and trainingunits and schools of the Replacement Army, theirdispatch to a field unit, and their return to areplacement unit. The principle of affiliationbetwee’n field and replacement units, the factthat developments in the Field Army are oftenpreceded by corresponding developments in theReplacement Army, and the presence of units ofthe Replacement Army on the fighting frontsshow that, although the German Army wasdivided into two parts in 1939, the Field Armyand Replacement Army are closely interlinkedand cannot be fully understood except as complementaryparts of a whole.2. Conscription Systema. HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT. Systematic universalmilitary training in modern times is aninvention of the Germans and has been developedto its highest degree of refinement by them. Itgrew out of the mass armies which were necessaryto overthrow Napoleon and was introducedby a Prussian law of 3 September 1814 as apart of the far-reaching army reforms initiatedby Scharnhorst and his colleagues to cope withthe< new forms of warfare. Ever since thenuniversal compulsory military service has existedin Germany, with the exception of the periodfrom 1918 to 1935, when it was forbidden by theTreaty of Versailles.b. BASIC LAWS. On 16 March 1935 the universalservice system (allrgcllrc%zr WehrpjIicht)was reintroduced by the I.aw Regarding theStructure of the Armed ITorces (Gesetz iiberden Aufbau der Welzrmacht). This law statedin three short sentences that military service wasto be based on the principle of universal liability,and that the Army was to be expanded (initially)to a strength of 36 divisions. This was followedon 21 May 1935 by the Military Service LawfWchrgcsctz), which established the purpose andscope of universal service, administrative controlof civilian manpower, categories of manpoweraccording to age and training status, rights andduties of military personnel, and methods of callupand discharge. This law, and the decreesissued under it, still govern the German conscriptionsystem after 5 years of war.c. CONTROLLING AGENCIES. The execution ofthe system for exercising military supervision ofmen liable to military service and for examiningand conscripting them from civilian life intothe Armed Forces is a joint responsibility of theGerman civilian and military authorities.

I MARCH 1945(1) Civilian. The Minister of the Interior,controlling all police authorities and the ordinarylocal registration of the civilian population, isresponsible for the registration of men liable formilitary service. This occurs through the localand district police authorities.(2) Civilian and military. The Minister ofthe Interior and the Minister of War jointlyth e and Inter io r the Decree regardingMilitary Examination and Drafting (VerordnungMil i tary und Aushebung), which involvescollaboration of the civilian and militaryauthorities during the phase between first registrationand induction. They were also jointlyresponsible for dividing each corps area intosuitable recruiting areas and sub-areas in sucha way as both to meet the military needs and to fit,so far as possible, the existing civilian administrativesubdivisions of the country.(3) Military. The Armed Forces High CommandMili t a r y . for the call-up, induction,and discharge of personnel. This includesthe recruiting area and sub-area headquarterswhich examine and draft recruits and representthe military interests in the administrativecontrol of civilian manpower before and afterservice.(4) Chain of military command This beinga matter which concerns all three branches of theArmed Forces, it is supervised by the ReplacementBranch (Abteilung Ersatzwesen) of theConscription and Recruiting Office (Wehrersatzamt)in the Armed Forces High Command(OKW).' a m t ) from this agency, ordersare issued through the various Wehrkreis headquarters(Wehrkreiskommandos, Wkr.Kdo.) tothe recruiting area inspectorates (Wehrersatzinspektionen,W.E.I.) and from there to therecruiting sub-area headquarters (Wehrbezirkskommandos,W.B.K.). These control the MilitaryReporting Offices (Wehrmeldeamter, W.M.A.) and set up from time to time in their districtsthe examining boards (Musterungsst'dbe,Must. Stb.). Most Wehrkreise contain two orthree recruiting areas, but Wehrkeis VI, comprisingthre e r e c rui t ing Rhineland region, hasfour, while Wehrkreise VII, XX, XXI, Bohmenund Mdhren, and Generalgouvernement consistof only one such area each. The number of recruitingsub-areas in each area varies between fourand a dozen according to local needs. Eachrecruiting area is controlled by an Inspector ofRecruiting Area (Wehrersatsinspekteur), who isUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451a general officer with the status and disciplinaryauthority of a division commander. (In somecases he may be a naval or air officer, since therecruiting system operates jointly for all threebranches.) Recruiting sub-areas are commanded .by lieutenant colonels or colonels selected fromthe class of officers whose suitability for activeservice in the field has ceased. They have thestatus of regimental commanders.There are two recruiting sub-area headquarterswhich do not come under any Wehr&eisheadquarters but directly under the ArmedForces High Command. The R.ecruiting Sub-Area Headquarters "Ausland" (WehrbezirkskommandoA&and in Berlin) deals with theregistration, control, deferment, and call-up ofGerman citizens in foreign countries (occupiedor neutral). During the war it has establishedbranches abroad in occupied countries; in neutralcountries it is assisted in its mission by the Germanconsulates. The Maritime Recruiting Sub-Area Headquarters (W chrbezirkskornmando See),with its seat at Hamburg, has the supervisionof manpower of all Germans in the merchantmarine.d. CLASSIFICATION OF MANPOWER. (1) Basicconcept. "Military service is honorary service tothe German people. Every German is liableto military service. In time of war, in additionto liability to military service, every German manand every German women is liable to service tothe Fatherland." These are the opening clausesof the Military Service Law of 21 May 1935.(2) Extent of liability. In time of peace allGerman males were liable to military servicefrom their 18th birthday until the 31 March followingtheir 45th birthday. (31 March is theend of the German fiscal year.) In East Prussia(separated from the rest of Germany by thePolish corridor), liability was extended until the31 March following the 55th birthday. The Ministerof War was empowered to extend liabilityin either direction in time of war, and it now ex-'tends from 17 (the class born in 1928) to 61(the 1884 class).(3) Reserve status. All men not doing theiractive military service are classified into the followingcategories:ren, I: Those under 35 who have comp!etedtheir regular period of active service andbeen discharged. There are only very few fitmen in this group today.. Reserve II: Those under 35 who have been1—55

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451through a period of short-term training. Thisapplied before the war to some 01 the olderclasses.Ersatzreserve I: Fit men under 35 who havenot been trained.Ersatzreserve II: Unfit and limited-servicemen under 35 who have not been trained.Landwehr I: Trained men between 35 and 45(actually from 31 March of the year in whichthe 35th birthday occurs until the 31 Marchfollowing the 45th birthday).Landwehr II: Untrained men between 35 and45.Landsturm I: Trained men between 45 and55 (actually from the 31 March following the45th birthday until the 31 March following the55th birthday).Landsturm II: Untrained men between 45and 55. (The two categories of Imzdsturm appliedin peacetime only to East Prussia; theynow include men up to 61.)(4) Exclusion. The following. categories ofmen are described as "unworthy to bear arms"and therefore "excluded from military service":Those sentenced to penal servitude (Zuclltham).Those who do not possess the honorary civilrights.Those subjected to "security and improvement"measures (concentration camp for supposedhabitual criminals).Those deprived of their "worthiness to beararms" by a court martial.Those sentenced for activities inimical to thestate.Jews also are excluded from military service,but in wartime are required to do other tylles ofservice.(5) Exeuzfition. Completely unfit men arereleased from liability to military service. RomanCatholics who have taken holy orders (Subdia-Ronatsweihej were not conscripted in time ofpeace. Nq other category of person is exempt.(6) Deferme~~t. No German can be deferredfor military service in peace or war for purelypersonal reasons or by reason of his dependencystatus except in cases of extreme hardship. Defermentof indispensable employees in essentialindustries may be applied for by the employer,but it is granted only according to a very rigidquota system. No general class of men is deferred,and each case is judged on its itsApplication for deferment must be repeated atfrequent intervals.l—56e. CONSCRIPTION PROCEDURE. (1) Registration.Usually in the spring of each year inpeacetime, under directives issued by the HighCommand, the incoming class (normally thosewho were turning 20 during the year) was summonedby the district police authorities (Kreispolizeibehorde)by means of public notices toappear at the local police stations for militaryregistration (polizciliche Erfassung). It shouldbe noted that under the German administrationsystem the local police always have a completeroster of all residents of their precincts, basedon the required registration of residents.After the outbreak of the war the older classeswho had not been covered by this system wereregistered in a similar manner, and by the endof 1940 all the classes back to those born in 1900had been registered. The upper age limit waslater extended to the 1897 class, then to 1894, andfinally in 1944 to the 1884 class. The incomingclasses have been registered systematically, eachclass being summoned at a slightly earlier agethan the previous one.(2) First examination. Shortly after the registrationthe recruiting sub-area headquarters(Wchrbczirkskommando) issues orders for theholding of the first examination (Musternng) ofthe registrants. This is carried out according tolocal registration districts by an examining board(Musterungsstab) which included representativesof the military authorities, the district and localpolice, the civilian administrative authorities(municipalities or rural district), and the GermanLabor Service, as well as medical officers.On this occasion the registrants are classifiedaccording to their physical fitness. Since December1943 the categories used have been: fit forregular service (Kricgsvcrwcndungsfahig—Kv.) ;fit for limited service in the field (bedingt kriegsverwendungsfahig);fit only for labor service(arbeitsverzvendungsfahig— av.); totally unfit(wchruntauglich—wu.); and temporarily unfit(zeitlich untauglich). Medical standards havebeen lowered progressively since 1942.Following their medical classification the registrantsare placed in a reserve category (normallyErsatzreserve I).(3) Drafting, In peacetime final action onthe question of whether or not each individualwas to be called up for regular service was takenat a second examination or drafting (Aushebung).This was conducted by the same authoritiesas the first examination and resulted

I MARCH 1945either in a deferment or in definite assignmentto a branch of service. The registrant then wastold to go home and await orders. In wartimethe procedure has been accelerated, and the draftingis now combined with the call-up.(4) Call-up. The actual call-up (Einbevzrfuns)is issued by mail by the recruiting suhareaheadquarters in the form of an inductionorder (Gestellungsbefckl) directing the registrantto report. at a specified time at the headquartersof a unit (in wartime a replacement unit),(5) Induction. Recruits reporting at a battalionheadquarters are first subjected to rollcalland then distributed to the &ordinate conpanies,where the final medical examination andactual induction (Eimtcllzrng) takes place. Inductionis followed by a mental and physicaltest to determine the most suitable employmentof each man and the administration of the oathof allegiance.(6) VoZuntcrrs. Volunteer applicants for theofficer and noncommissioned officer careers applyat reception centers for potential officers andnoncommissioned officers (A~zrlalznzcstclle~z fiildenFiilzremaclrwurhs), which come under the Tn-Spector General for Potential Officers and noncommissionedofficers (GJF). Within limits, thevolunteers are given the privilege of selecting theirarm or branch of service.In January 1945 these reception centers werecombined with the recruiting centers for theWaflen-SS to form new "Combined RecruitingCenters of the Army and Waffen-SS" (Ergtinounysstellendes Heeres md dcr Waflm-SS).Under Himmler's orders, one of these was establishedin each Wehrkrcis, with branch of&es inall major cities. They also deal with volunteersto the ranks for Yolks Grenadier divisions andthus facilitate the distribution of manpower underSS control.Volunteers to the ranks have been numerousduring the war, though much less so than in 19141918. At the beginning of the war the lowerage limit was 17 (instead of 18 for conscripts) ;it later was lowered to 16% and then (in 1944)to 16. In the past 2 years a large proportionof the youngest age class has been induced byvarious kinds of pressure to volunteer, largelyfor the Waffen-SS.(7) Discharge. Discharge before completionof the normal period of service was possible inpeacetime if a man became "unworthy to beararms" (by reason of conviction for a major crim-UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451inal offense) or totally unfit, or if it was discoveredthat he had been inducted by error. Boththis type of discharge and the normal dischargeafter two years of service were carried.out bythe unit itself. In wartime this has been modified.In order to be discharged from activeseriiice members of the Field Army first must betransferred to the Replacement Army, either bytheir own unit or by a hospital. In order to relievethese units, however, and to reduce thedistance which the infirm soldier must travelto his place of discharge, army discharge centers(Hcercs-EntlrrssalIlgs-Stc~cIl) have been estabhshedto handle medical discharge cases. TheWaffcsz-SS has its own corresponding medicaldischarge center. In thr German Air Force, thephysical examinations for recc,ption and dischargeare given in both combined reception and - dischargecenters (Annalzrllc- und Entlassungsstellcgz),which handle either procedure all the waythrough.(8) Foreigners. Foreigners and stateless persons,in case they are classified as "racial" Germans,may volunteer for service in the GermanArmy. If they live within Germany, applicationsare handled by the competent recruiting sub-areaheadquarters; if they live in foreign countries,they are dealt with by the Recruiting Sub-areaHeadquarters Auslalld in Rcrlin. Volunteersfrom the Nordic countries (Norway, Sweden,Denmark, Netherlands, Belgium) may be inductedwithout the acquisition of German citizenship.Applications are handled by the Recruiting SubareaHeadquarters Alrslarld in Berlin.Since about 1943 virtually all "racial" Germansliving in Balkan countries under German dominationhave been required to "volunteer". Theconcept of "racial" Germans (Volksdeutsche) hasbeen interpreted very widely by the High Commandwith the growing stringency of the manpowersituation. Especially in the annexed areasof Poland, people who knew scarcely a wordof German were classified as belonging to Section3 of the German Racial List (Abteilmg 3drr Deutsche?z Volkslistc); this meant that theywere vested with German citizenship for a probationaryperiod of 10 years and were liableto military service but could not rise above therank of private first class.Many thousands of genuine foreigners fromother occupied countries have been persuaded tojoin the German Army, often through politicalor economic pressure. The procedure for theirI—57

I MARCH 1945enlistment has varied widely for different nationalitiesand at different times.f. HANDLING OF CONSCRIPTS. The threebranches of the Armed Forces submit to theArmed Forces High Command, their personnelrequirements on the 15th of each month for thesecond month, following. According to the demandsand the general replacement situation thevarious Wehrkrcis headquarters then receiveorders specifying how many men are to be inductedfor each branch of the Armed Forces.The Armed Forces High Command determineswhich age groups are to be drawn uponaccording to the type of service for which theyare required. The Wehrkreis headquarters areboimd by these arrangements but may accept volunteersof all age groups.If men of a certain t’ype are not availablewithin the Wehrkreis where they are required,the Armed Forces High Command may orderthe transfer of recruits from one Wehrkreis toanother.Within the Wehrkreis, the Wehrkreis headquartersis responsible for distributing the replacementrequisitions among the recruiting area andsub-area headquarters as rapidly as possible andwith due regard to the varying characteristicsof the population in different districts. Cityareas provide the best material for motorizedunits, country areas for cavalry and horse-drawnunits. A mixing of rural and urban elements isto be aimed at in the interests of regional andnational solidarity.The Navy accepts volunteers from all partsof the Reich. For its seagoing personnel it hasa priority on recruits who, by reason of theirplace of residence or previous experience, areclassified as belonging to the "seafaring population"(seemiinnische BevSlkerung) ; to man itsshore installations it takes conscripts from theMaritime Wehrkreise—I, II, X, and XX. TheAir Force has a similar priority on conscriptsf classified as part of the "aeronautical population"(jliegerische Bev6lkerung), which includes thosewho have belonged to gliding clubs or who joinedthe aviation branch of the Hitler Youth.The Army aims at assigning every individualconscript to the type of unit for which his physicalcondition, his civilian background, and hisspecial abilities best fit him. With this in view,certain standing regulations have been introduced.Thus mountaineers called up in Wehrkreise thatmaintain no mountain units automatically are1—58UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451transferred to Wehrkreise which do—from WehrkreiseVI, XII, and XX to Wehrkreis VII andfrom Wehrkreise II, III, IV, VIII, IX, X, XI,XXI, and Bohmen und Miihren to WehrkreisXVIII.In general, transfers from one Wehrkreis toanother are not made unless there is a cogentreason for them, and they were not frequent untilgrowing man-power difficulties began to makeit impossible for some Wehrkreise to meet theirobligations from their own resources. In principle,a conscript trains and fights in the companyof men from his own province. One significantdeviation from this policy was in thetreatment of conscripts from the annexed areasof Poland, France, and Yugoslavia. Alsatiansgenerally were sent for training to northeasternGermany (Wehrkreis II) and Poles to the Berlinarea (Wehrkreis III) or to the southwest(Wehrkreis V).3. Replacemenf Training Systema. BASIC PRINCIPLE. Every unit in the FieldArmy is affiliated for personnel replacement pur"poses with a specific unit of the ReplacementTraining Army, located in its own original Wehrkreisand known as an Ersatz unit. The functionof the latter is to induct recruits, to provide fortheir training, and to see that they are held inreadiness to be sent off to the field unit in batchesor individually as required.The normal location of the Ersatz unit is thehome station of the affiliated field unit, to whichthe soldiers expect ultimately to return for theirdischarge or for reassignment. For example, asoldier who is wounded and goes to a reservehospital in the Zone of the Interior will be sent,on leaving the hospital, to his affiliated Ersatzunit before being returned to the field.Whenever feasible, trained replacements aresent by an Ersatz unit to a field unit with whichit is affiliated. If, however, a man for any reasonis diverted to a different field unit, or if he subsequentlyis transferred from one field unit to another,the affiliated Ersatz unit of his new fieldunit must be entered on Page 4 of his paybookunder the heading "present competent Ersatzunit" (jetzt zustdndiger Ersatztruppenteil).In order to understand the intricacies of thepresent Ersatz system it is well to trace the successivestages of its development.b. ORIGINAL OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM.Each infantry regiment which took to the field at

oiARMY HIGH COMMANDINSPECTOR GENERALOF PANZER TROOPSCOMMANDER OF THEREPLACEMENT ARMYCNIEF MEDICALCHIEF “ETEIINARYINSPECTOR OF PANZERCHIEF OF TRAININGGENERAL ARMY OFFICEIAHAICHKF MT OFFICER INAHATROOPSINSPECTORS OF ARMSI SERVICESINSPECTORATES OF ARMS& SERVICESSENIOR OFFICER OFMOTOR MAINTENANCETROOFSWEHRKREISHEADQUARTERSrCOMMANDER OF PANZERTROOPS OR PANZERREPLACEMENT DIVISIONSTAFFREPLACEMENT DIVISIONSTAFFINFANTRY REPLACEMENTt TRAINING REGIMENTALSTAFF IPANZER ARM)INFANTRYUNITSIPANZER ARM)ANTITANKUNITSINFANTRY REPLACEMENTS TRAINING REGIMENTALSTAFFI PANZER IRECONNAISSANCE| UNITS |INFANTRYUNITSARTILLERY REPLACEMENTS TRAINING REGIMENTALSTAFFARTILLERYUNITSIRECONNAISSANCEI UNITSIENGINEER UNITSSUPPLY TROOPUNITSCOMMANDEROF MOTORMMNTENANCETROOPSMOTOR MAINTENANCE UNITSCOMMANDERSIGNAL TROOPSSIGNAL UNITSWEHRKREISSURGEONMEDICAL “N MWEHRKREISVETERINARIANVETERINARYUNITS3COCOFigure 9.—Control of replacemerlt atad trailzhg units.i.fin

UNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451the beginning of the war left behind at its homestation a battalion cadre bearing its own numberand known as its Ersatz battalion. The primarypurpose of this battalion was to receive recruits,train them, and dispatch them as replacements tothe field regiment. At any given time it includedone or more of each of the following types ofcompanies:Reception companies (Stammkompanien), consistingof new recruits and cadre personnel.Training companies (Ausbildungskompanien),also known as Rekruteneinheiten. These companiesprovided for the training of the inductedundrained volunteers. After the training was finishedthe recruits joined the transfer company, ifthey were not transferred to the Field Army immediately.Transfer companies (Marschkompanien) whichwere pools of trained replacements ready to departfor the field unit.Convalescent companies (Genesendenkompanien),consisting of men released from reservehospitals who were being prepared for return tothe field, All other replacement training units areorganized in a corresponding manner.c. ORIGINAL AFFILIATION SYSTEM. The threereplacement training battalions corresponding tothe three infantry regiments of afielddivision werecontrolled by an infantry replacement trainingregimental staff (Grenadier-Eysatz-Regim,ent—Gy.Eys.Rgt.) bearing the number of the division.Thus, the 2d, 23d, and 44th Infantry Regiments,belonging to the 11th Infantry Division, were representedby the 2d, 23d, and 44th Infantry ReplacementTraining Battalions controlled by the1 lth Infantry Replacement Training RegimentalStaff at Allenstein in Wecehykyeis I, the home stationof the division. Replacement training regimentalstaffs usually were commanded by colonels.The replacement training regimental staff alsocontrolled from three to five infantry specialistreplacement training companies which providedthe personnel for the infantry howitzer companies,antitank companies, signal sub-units, engineerplatoons, and mounted platoons of the three infantryfield regiments.The other components of the field division—the artillery regiment, reconnaissance battalion,antitank battalion, engineer battalion, and signalbattalion, were affiliated in a similar way with replacementtraining units of their respective armsback in the Wehykycis from which they came.All the artillery replacement training battalionsI—60in any Wehrkreis were controlled by two or moreartillery replacement training regimental staffsbearing the numbers of artillery field regimentsoriginally raised in that Wehrkreis. The replacementtraining battalions for the smaller divisionalcomponents likewise bore the numbers of someof the corresponding field units from the Wehrkreis,but usually one such replacement trainingbattalion would provide replacements for the correspondingfield battalions of several divisions.Altogether over 50 types of regular replacementtraining units existed.d. CHAIN OF COMMAND IN THE REPLACEMENTARMY. The replacement training units are subordinateto the Wehrkreis Headquarters (Wehrkreiskommandos)in their capacity as DeputyCorps Headquarters (Stellvertretende Generalkommandos,Stv.Gen.Kdo.) through the followingintermediate staffs:One or more Replacement Division Staffs (DivisionNummer . . . ., Div. Nr ) controllingthe replacement training units either directly, asin the case of independent units of the supportingarms and services (reconnaissance, engineer, supplytroop replacement training battalions) orthrough several infantry and artillery replacementtraining regimental staffs (Grenadier-Ersatz-Regiment, Gr.Ers.Rgt. and Artillerie-Ersatz-Regiment, Art.Ers.Rgt.).Possibly one Panzer Replacement Division Staff(Panzer-Division Nummer Pz.Div.Nr. . . .)or a Commander of Panzer Troops (Kommandeurder Panzertruppen, Kdr.d.Pz.Tr.) of either brigadeor regimental status, controlling the replacementtraining units either directly, as in the caseof the independent battalions (tank, antitank, andPanzer reconnaissance replacement training battalions)or through one or two motorized infantryor Panzer Grenadier- replacement training regimentalstaffs.The Commander of Motor Maintenance Units(Kommandeur der Kraftfahrparktruppe, Kdr.d.Kf.Pk.Tr.), controlling motor maintenance replacementtraining units.The Commander of Signal Troops (Kommandeurder Nachrichtentruppe, Kdr.d.Nachr.Tr.),controlling signal replacement training battalions.Wehrkreis Surgeon (Wehrkreisarzt in hiscapacity as Stellvertretender Korpsarzt), controllingmedical replacement training units.Wehrkreis Veterinarian ( Wehrkreisveterindr inhis capacity as Stcllvertyetendcr Korpsveterinar).The Deputy Corps Commanders, who are not

I MARCH 1945only the commanders of the replacement trainingunits but also commanders in the Wehrkreis, aresubordinate to the Commander of the ReplacementArmy (Befehlshaber des Ersatzheeres).They have the right. to shift the location of unitsof the Replacement Army within their areas butmust notify the Commander of the ReplacementArmy.The responsibility of the Commander of theReplacement Army and of his subordinate headquartersand offices for maintaining the FieldArmy on a wartime footing remains in effectwhen parts of the Replacement Army are locatedin the Theater of Operations.The number of replacement division staffs ineach is is regulated by the Army HighCommand. They are responsible for the uniformityof in in their subordinate replacementtraining units. They are to be kept free from alladministrative duties. Regarding correspondencethey are to participate only in what concerns thetraining, arming and equipment of replacementa s as well as the maintenance ofdiscipline (including proceedings of law) and thepersonal matters of their subordinate officers andofficials. Should there be several replacement divisionstaffs in one Wehrkreis, the deputy corpsheadquarters orders which replacement trainingunits are subordinated to either one.e. REQUISITIONING OF REPLACEMENTS. Thefield unit may request replacements if there is adeficiency of more than 10 per cent of their tableof organization strength. Replacements for specialists,such as communication personnel or technicians,are to be requested as soon as their absencewould hamper the efficiency of the fieldunit. Every independent field unit (regiment, independentbattalion) sends its requests for replacementsthrough channels to the division headquarters.The division forwards them direct tothe competent deputy corps headquarters.The deputy corps headquarters thereupon issuesorders to the appropriate replacement units. Thereplacement division staffs usually are consultedonly th e to the state of training of thereplacements before the deputy corps commanderdisposes of them. The commanders of the replacementtraining regimental staffs participatefully in th e If the records which everydeputy corps headquarters has to keep show thatthe competent replacement training unit cannotprovide all or any of the replacements, the deputycorps headquarters passes this order to anotherUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451replacement training unit. If an adjustment isnot possible within the competent area, the Commanderof the Replacement Army is notified andorders another Wehrkveis to provide the replacements.The replacement training units have tonotify the deputy corps headquarters at once onwhat date the replacements will be ready to leave.Although the requisitions are strictly chanthe direct relations between the field unit andthe competent training unit at home always were1considered desirable, in order to strengthen thefeeling of comradeship. This was achieved notonly through the personal connections but alsothrough circular letters and newspapers.f. LATER MODIFICATIONS OF THE REPLACEMENT TRAINING SY~TEXI, 1939-AUTUMN 1942.(1) Early change in the afiliation system. Thesystem of numerical affiliation between replacementtraining mlits and field units, applying particularlyto the infantry units, was valid in generalfor the four initial waves of divisions sent tothe field by each Wehrkreis in the summer andautumn of 1939. These were the "active", orpeacetime, divisions, numbered from 1 to 36, 44,45 and 46; those raised from reservists, numbered52 to 98; those raised from Landwehr personnel,co r p s to 246; and those formed from so-calledErgiinzungs units (special "supplementary"peacetime units for short-term training of men inthe intermediate classes 1901 to 1913), from 251to 269.The component units of divisions formed subsequentto the initial mobilization period, on theother hand, usually were not given new replacementtraining units of their own, but were assigned,through the corresponding Deputy CorpsHeadquarters, an affiliation with existing replacementtraining units of their respective armi. Thuseach infantry replacement training battalioneventually had to feed replacements to severalfield regiments, only one of which bore its ownnumber. Similarly, when the infantry componentin the Panzer divisions was increased from oneregiment to two in 1940, the second regiment usuallywas affiliated with the existing replacementtraining battalion of the original regiment. Somereplacement training units were converted outrightinto field units; on the other hand some field unitswere later dissolved. These changes tended toupset the principle of numerical affiliation, whichunderwent further changes in the following years.It was the practice from the very beginning tocollect groups of trained replacements of the vari1—61

I MARCH 1945ous arms in the Wehrkreis and assemble them intoloosely organized special personnel transfer battalionsknown later as Marschbataillone for thepurpose of conducting them to the combat zone.Originally each such transfer unit normally cupdestined for a particular division, and often reasoried the number of that division, preceded by hadRoman numeral of the Wehrkreis and followedby a serial number. Such battalions usually wereattached to the rear echelon of the division in thefield, and from there the personnel was filteredinto the various divisional components as forces.or they filled up field replacement pools.After the start of the Russian campaign, it wasfound expedient, in view of the long distances involved,to draw on these field replacement pools insome cases without regard to their Wehrkreis oforigin or the division for which they originallywere intended. Thus a division which had sufferedparticularly heavy losses might receive Wlarge portion of the personnel which had fo rtrained and dispatched to the field for a cementent division in an adjacent and less dir e ctIn other cases, all the divisions under a givencorps or in a particular area would share a singlefield replacement battalion. In the African theater,for a time at least, there was gi v en fieldreplacement battalion for all the divisions of heAfrica Corps, although they came from differentWehrkreise. In the middle of 1941, these allunits in Africa were assigned affiliations o n replacementtraining units in Wehrkreise ,711 asembledXII, regardless of the location of their previousreplacement training units; this was done in usedto concentrate the specialized training which fiemen required for operations in the desert.All such measures resulted in a further breakingdown of the system of numerical affiliation andin some cases even a departure from c u rr e n tthe great majority of men in a given unit shouldcome from the same Wehrkreis. It must be bornein mind, however, that all these, as well as all subsequentmodifications up to the beginning of thusin the detailed operations of the replacement ity .ing systems, never have violated its basic principlegnamely, that every field unit at all times must ofaffiliated with a specified replacement training unitto which all men leaving the Field Army are awaymatically sent.(2) Early movements of replacement trainingunits. Despite the fact that the original replacementtraining units were intended to remain octhe home stations of their corresponding thel—62UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451units, acting more or less as the rear echelon ofthe latter, there have been numerous shifts ofunits in the Replacement Army from one part ofGermany to another and from Germany into occupiedcountries and back again for varyingreasons. From 1939 to 1941, when Germany stillhad neighbors to be attacked, the replacementtraining units were withdrawn from the borderregions several months before an offensive was tocommence in order to free the barrack space andother military facilities for the assembling of fieldforces. After the area was no longer being usedfor this purpose, the replacement training unitsgenerally returned to their home stations.Replacement training units, with their controllingreplacement division staffs temporarily thustransferred to another Wehrkreis, are subordinateto the deputy corps headquarters of thisWehrkreis for administrative purposes as well asfor the general supervision of their training; thereplacement division staffs, however, are thedirect recipients of requisitions of replacementsfrom the field units in this case, and at the sametime the contact with the home Wehrkreis was notcompletely broken off. New conscripts, normallygiven orders by their local recruiting sub-areaheadquarters to report to a replacement trainingunit not far from their home town, were sent inthese cases either individually, or in small groups,on long train journeys before induction or wereassembled in special collecting points known asWehrkreis-Ersatz-Depots. The kno wn asused for receiving men who returned from thefield as convalescents or f r om the reason.After the units returned to the Wehrkreis thesedepots were dissolved.All these moves and a number of others, concurrentwith or subsequent to them, served theadditional purpose of garrisoning the annexed orconquered areas adjacent to Germany proper andthus relieved the field forces of this responsibility.At the same time barracks and traininggrounds in Germany were freed for the formationof new units for the constantly expanding GermanArmy, and the recruits were given trainingaway from home and under conditions more likethose in the field. All these moves prior to theautumn of 1942 (except t o th e primarymotive was the evacuation of assembly areas)were by units in border Wehrkreise into adjacentoccupied or annexed territory immediately acrossthe border. The movements thus amounted to a

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451slight extension of the German Zone of the Interiorin all directions.g. REORGANIZATION OF THE REPLACEMENTARMY IN THE AUTUMN OF 1942. (1) Principle.The most far reaching change in the replacementtraining system took place on or about 1 October1942 when all basic replacement training unitswere broken up into their two elements—one tohandle induction and replacement and the other tohandle training. The induction and replacementunit retained the designation Ersatz. But henceforthit was concerned only with receipt of recruitsfrom the conscription offices; issue of theirpersonal equipment and their paybooks; shortmilitary indoctrination of recruits; forwarding ofrecruits as speedily as possible to its sister trainingunit; receipt of convalescents and sendingthem back to a field unit; and with the processingof men from its affiliated field units who for anyreason were to be discharged. The newly createdtraining unit (Ausbildungseinheit) bore the samenumber as the Ersatz unit and was to receive themen from the Ersatz unit, give them their training,and then dispatch them to an affiliated fieldunit.(2) Movements following the re,organization.The purpose of this measure apparently was tofacilitate a shift of most training activities fartherinto the occupied countries, particularly in thewest, without seriously affecting the efficiency ofthe induction and replacement procedure back inthe Wehrkreise.The disadvantages of the earlier removal of thereplacement training units from their home stations,from the administrative point of view, werealmost sufficient to outweigh the advantages. Forthis reason, none of the earlier moves except thosedictated by military necessity were very far fromhome, and the practice of garrisoning more distantoccupied territories with replacement trainingunits never was resorted to under the old system.It was probably these considerations, as much asit was the growing shortage of man-power, whichcaused the German authorities, in September 1942,to divide all the basic replacement training unitsinto their two parts, even though in some casesthey were reunited under a new name. Thismade it possible for the replacement units to occupytheir home stations, and for the trainingunits to enjoy complete freedom of movement.The latter henceforth were used in large numbersto occupy different parts of France, the LowCountries, Denmark, Poland, Lithuania, theSoviet Union, and northern Italy in the form ofreserve divisions. Combined training thus couldbe carried on under more realistic conditions, andnumerous fully organized field divisions were releasedfor service on active fighting fronts. Inmost cases the units from a given Wehrkreiswent to the country nearest them. In the case ofthe basic infantry training units, approximatelytwo-thirds moved out in this way, and only onethirdremained within greater Germany.(3) Changes at battalion level. Under theoriginal system each infantry replacement trainingbattalion. as already indicated, normally containeda reception company, four training companies,and one or more convalescent and transfercompanies. At the time of the reorganization thetraining companies were withdrawn under thebattalion staff. and a new replacement battalionstaff was created to control the remaining componentshaving purely replacement functions. Insome cases, apparently, the new training battalionestablished a transfer company of its own as apool for trained men awaiting transfer to theField Army, while in other cases it seemed to sendthem to the transfer company of the replacementbattalion.In practice, the change took place in either oneor the other of the following ways : In the case ofreplacement training units which were already innewly acquired or occupied territories in theautumn of 1942, the replacement elements in somecases returned to their home stations to resumetheir normal induction and replacement functionsand retained the name Grenadier-Ersatz-Bataillon,etc. The training elements then usually were incorporatedinto reserve divisions and movedfarther afield, receiving the name reserve battalion(Reserve-Bataillou), etc.; if they remainedin Greater Germany they were called training battalions(Ausbildungs-Bataillone), etc. In othercases (both in Germany and in adjacent occupiedor annexed territory) both elements remainedin the a s area and took the form of combinedreplacement and training battalions (Ersatz- undAusbildungsbataillo~ae).The above remarks apply to the various otherarms as well as to the infantry. Most of the servicetroops remained at their home stations as combinedreplacement and training battalions.(4) Changes at regimental level. Many oftheir replacement training regimental staffs becamestaffs of reserve regiments (Reserve-Regimenf)in occupied territory. The only regimentall—63

I MARCH 1945staffs remaining in the Wehrkreise after the rearganizationwere combined replacement and trainingregimental staffs (Ersatz- und Ausbildungs-Regimenter). These controlled combined replacementand training battalions and specialists companiesremaining in the Wehrkreise. In addition,new infantry replacement regimental staffs (Grenadier-Ersatz-Regimenter)were created to controlreplacement battalions and specialist replacementcompanies whose training elements had becomereserve units. These new regimental staffs receivednew numbers mostly in the 500 series, andhad no affiliation with a field division bearing thesame number. However, some of the companiescontrolled by these new staffs retained their originalnumbers. Thus the original numerical affiliationsystem had almost disappeared at regimentallevel.In the artillery the original regimental staffsthat remained in the Wehrkreis took over thefunctions of those which went out to reservedivisions.(5) Cha+ages at division level. For occupationaland defensive purposes, as well as for theconduct of combined training exercises, the reserveunits in occupied territory were organizedinto a new type of training division known as areserve division (Re serve division) which still remainedpart of the Replacement Army. This wasdone in all cases except one by the conversionof one of the former replacement division staffsin the Wehvkreise. If not enough staffs remainedin a Wehrkreis to supervise the induction and replacementactivities of replacement units as wellas the training of combined replacement andtraining units, a new staff was created, sometimestaking a number 300 higher than that of the departedreserve division. Other new replacementdivision staffs were created by conversions of specialadministrative division staffs (Divisionskom-Inundo z.b.V., Div. Kdo. z.b.V.) As a result thenumber of the replacement division staffs wasonly slightly diminished from 34 in September,1942 to 29 in 1943. Each reserve division controlleda group of reserve regiments and supportingunits from its own Wehrkreis, but the allotmentof battalions within the regiment no longerfollowed the original pattern based on the subordinationof infantry regiments to the field divisionof the same number. Sometimes the battalionstook the numbers I, II, and III, and theregimental number, with or without addition oftheir own original numbers. In other respects,l—64UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451also, the reserve divisions took on the characterof defensive field divisions. For instance, someof them received divisional rear service units,numbered 900 plus the reserve division number.These services were part of the Field Army. Thissystem of reserve divisions was developed steadilythroughout 1943. After the summer of 1943new reserve divisions also were formed fromPanzer and motorized training units (Reserve-Panzer-Divisionen) which until then had been stationedin the Zone of the Interior.(6) Reserve corps. To control the replacementfunctions of reserve divisions (i.e., the dispatchof trained replacements to the Field Army)a number of reserve corps (Rescrvckorps) andone or more reserve Panzer corps (Reserve-Panserkorps)were formed. Orders issued to deputycorps headquarters relating to these functionswere now also addressed to the reserve corps, indicatingthat they acted as channels for replacementrequisitions in the same manner as deputycorps headquarters. However, at least some reservecorps controlled one or more defensive infantrydivisions of the Field Army as well astheir reserve divisions.h. THE ULTIMATE FATE OF THE RESERVE DIVISIONS. Altogether, the training units of thedifferent Wehrkreise formed 26 reserve divisionsin 1942 and 1943, four of which were reservePanzer divisions. Thirteen were in the West,seven in the East, three in Denmark, two inCroatia, and one in Italy. From this large numberit is evident that field divisions were relievedfrom defensive and occupational duties to an appreciableextent. In 1943, even before the lastreserve divisions were formed, a number of themwere converted into divisions of the Field Army.Two of them in the East became field trainingdivisions (F eldausbildatngsdivisio~ z c l l ,Div.), which, although retaining training functionsin addition to their line of communicationduties, no longer formed part of the replacementand training structure of their Wehrkreise. Athird reserve division in Croatia was convertedinto a light (Jdger) division, and three other reservedivisions received the designation static(bodenstiindige) divisions.Thus by the end of 1943, 23 reserve divisionswere in existence including the three static divisions.During 1943 several of these divisionswere engaged against partisans while others becamefirmly established along the Channel coast.During 1944 the reserve divisions rapidly dis

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451integrated. Of the five reserve divisions in theEast, two were destroyed or disbanded, and threewent into combat. The remaining reserve divisionin Croatia apparently was disbanded early inthe year. All the 13 reserve divisions in the Westdisappeared. Three reserve Panzer divisions weremerged with remnants of Panzer or Panzer Grenadierfield divisions and lost their identity. Threereserve divisions on the Channel coast were convertedto field divisions in February, 1944. Twoothers were disbanded in July and August, aftergiving up most of their personnel to divisionsthat had suffered heavy losses in the Invasion.The five reserve divisions in southern Franceand on the Biscay coast were engaged againstthe Allied landing in southern France and upgradedto field divisions. The reserve mountaindivision in Italy also may have been upgradedto a field division during the year. Of the threereserve divisions in Denmark, two appear to haveremained intact during 1944, while the third wasin the process of being converted. Thus by theend of 1944, a maximum of six to seven reservedivisions remained, of which perhaps only twowere able to fulfill the functions for which theywere originally created.The reserve divisions had definite disadvantagesas well as advantages. They were good for trainingand garrison functions during the winter of1942-43 and for the greater part of 1943. Butwhen they received definite defense assignments,especially on the Channel coast, they no longercould concern themselves with training. Neithercould they afford to send trained replacements tofield divisions and to replace them with untrainedrecruits and thereby imperil their combat effectiveness.The seriousness of the situation was intensifiedby the fact that during 1942-43 two-thirds of the"training" had been moved out of Germany totake place in these reserve divisions. As a result,at a critical period the continuity of training hadto be interrupted, and a new start made in the' Wehrkreise within Germany.i. RESUMPTION OF TRAINING WITHIN GERMANY. New training facilities had to be providedas one reserve division after another ceased itstraining functions. For a time, some of the reservedivisions had training battalions (Ausbildungs-Bataillone) which could train personnel withoutinterfering with the new defense responsibilitiesof the reserve divisions. But following the Inva-sion in th e 1944, recruits no longer were sent tothe reserve divisions in the West.divi - gradually was resumed within Gerin At first some Wehykreise dispatched re-We s t existing training or combined replacewereand training units of their own Wehrkreisewithin Grena- Germany, and in cne case evento Th r e e units of a neighboring Wehrkreis.c o n - first one and then other trainingcompanies w o added within the different Wehrafter and replacement units were expanded intoi o n s replacement and training units. Bythe a sion . of 1944, virtually all replacementance in some ?V’clzv&eise had regainedtheir again s t and had become combinedu p - and training units. This was espentainthe case with the replacement units of theformer reserve Panzer divisions in the West.thr e e did not start expanding theirtraining hav e until late in 1944. In some casesthe reforming of artillery training units precededthe reforming of infantry training units. In somereserve to help control combined replacementand t w o battalions in the infantry and facilitatethey possible employment in the field, theold ratio of three replacement and training battalionsto one staff was restored through a news a d vantages replacement and training regimentalstaffs.The of of training was aided by theBut that pure replacement battalions had alwaysmaintained a skeleton force of instructors andcadre longe r to provide a minimum of trainither the reception, transfer, and convalescentto Also many reserve divisions returnedtheir instructors and cadres to their Wehrkreise they were converted or disbanded.j. TIVENESS. DURING THE SUMMER ANDAUTUMN OF ie d In the summer of 1944, whenthe Reichsfuhrer-SS took over the command oft o Replacement Army, a number of trends bere sult, Training hours were lengthened,a d the training period was reduced to anthe of 6 weeks. Air Force and Navy perrmany.were retained for the Army, and theVolkssturm was created. Paper work was simplified,N Wehrkreis borders were adjusted.Economy and simplification were achievedthrough:(g) Changes in the afiliatiou system A basicthou t of the affiliation system for infantry regimentsoccurred. A single infantry replacementInva - became the competent replacement unit1—65

I MARCH 1945for all the infantry regiments of one infantrydivision or two static or security divisions. As aresult, infantry regiments no longer had a replacementbattalion carrying their own number,and the traditional relationship that originally existedbetween the old units of the ReplacementArmy and the Field Army thereby practicallywas abolished.(2) Economy measures. Several infantryspecialist replacement and training companieswere combined, as were also some infantry specialistreplacement and training battalions. Anumber of replacement and training battalionsfor service troops, especially for veterinary units,were disbanded.(3) New methods of transferring replacementsto the Field Army. New methods for requestingand transferring men from the ReplacementArmy to the Field Army were established in thefirst half of 1944. The manpower problem didnot permit an even distribution of replacements(with the exception of specialists), but demandeda concentrated supply of men to units with thehighest priority. To achieve this purpose armygroups and independent army headquarters werecharged with the allocation of replacements. Thetransfer of men from the units of the ReplacementArmy no longer took place by means ofloosely organized groups but in one of the followingprincipal ways: In combat transfer battalions(Kampfmarschbataillone) having astrength of about 900 men with better armamentand larger cadre personnel than before; in transferbattalions of 700 to 1000 men; or in transfercompanies of 100 to 250 men. The combattransfer battalion was newly created, whereas thetransfer battalion for infantry and Panzer troopsreceived the table of organization of the field replacementbattalion. Convalescents were returnedto the field in convalescent transfer companies(Genesenen-Marsch,komtzpanien) of 100 to 250men. In general, however, the importance of thetransfer battalion was diminished, in part becauseof the rapidly changing situation in the west. Thename "combat transfer battalion" indicates thatthe battalion as such is considered a fighting unit.k. REPLACEMENT ARMY UNITS IN COMBAT.In the first years of the war, replacement andtraining units as such took part in combat only inisolated instances. Yet during the Allied advancethrough France and Belgium in August 1944,and at the time of the Allied airborne landingin Holland, five or more replacement divisionUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4511"8• 21Ql—66

I MARCH 1945staffs from the four western Wehrkreise weretransferred to the Western Front with the combatelements of their subordinate units.The untrained recruits, unfit convalescents, andcadre personnel necessary for maintaining thereplacement and training schedule remained behind.In some instances, a "reserve" staff probablystayed at the home station to control replacementelements and rebuild the training structure.These hastily collected divisions received a varietyof names, of which "combat divisions" (Kampfdivision,also Div. NY ( K )) seems to havebeen the most common. Five such divisions wereactually in line, and a sixth was in charge of fortificationwork. The subordinate units originallykept the numbers they had in the ReplacementArmy, but later were renumbered as organic fieldunits. Four of the former replacement divisionstaffs were upgraded to field divisions, and a fifthwas dissolved. In addition, the border Wehrkreisfurnished numerous independent battle groups,block units (Sperrverbiinde), and other units,which eventually were absorbed by various fieldunits at the front. Local defense duties of thereplacement and training units are fulfilled byalarm units (Alarmeinheiten).1. STRENGTH AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE REPLACEMENT ARMY AT THE END OF 1944. Theaccompanying table (Figure 10) shows byWehrkreise the distribution of replacement battalionsfor combat troops and affiliated field divisionsat the end of 1944.Each of the 15 Wehrkreise existing at the outbreakof the war has, in addition to the replacementbattalions for combat troops, one to threereplacement division staffs, and two to five infantryreplacement regimental staffs. Most of thelatter control three to four infantry specialist replacementcompanies. Each of these Wehrkreise(except I and XV111) also has one to twoPanzer Grenadier or motorized replacement regimentalstaffs, containing two or three specialistreplacement companies and one to two artillery replacementregimental staffs. The infantry replacementbattalions of both these arms contain reconnaissancebattalions. In addition, there aretwo chemical warfare replacement regimentalstaffs in Wehrkreis X. The many other replacementunits—mostly of service troops, such assupply troops, motor maintenance troops, andmedical troops—are not represented in the tablesince there is generally only one in each Wehrkreis.UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451Also not represented are the four importantreplacement and training brigades for the Grossdeutschland,Feldherrnhalle, Croatian, and "999"units, which are outside the regular series of replacementunits.Wehrkrcis XVIII has mostly mountain troops.Wehrkreis XX, XXI, B t ihmen und Mahren, andGeneralgouvernement are omitted, since they controlonly a very few units. Since units in WehrkreiseXX and XXI are connected with WehrkreisII, and units in Wehrkreis Bohmen undMiihren properly belong to Wehrkreise XIII andXVII, they are listed under Wehrkreise II, XIII,and XVII, respectively. In general, units are listedunder the Wehrkreis that controls them, and notnecesarily under the Wchrkreis in which they arelocated. Although the units in the table have beendesignated simply as replacement units most ofthem are actually combined replacement andtraining units.The strength of battalions will fluctuate greatly,depending upon whether they have just receivednew recruits or convalescents or depleted theirorganization by sending replacements to the field.Thus some battalions in the t may h e astrength of 500 men and others over 1500.Affiliated field divisions are given to permit acomparison between the replacement units and"their" field units. General Headquarters troopsand disbanded or destroyed field divisions arenot included, and converted field divisions couldnot be attributed to a specific Wehrkreis. Thepresent affiliation is the controlling one, eventhough the division was mobilized in anotherWehrkreis.Demonstration regiments and battalions andthe many military schools contain additional reservesof manpower. With the latter, however,attached "kommandiert" personnel is carried bythe old unit and not by the school.At the end of 1943 there were possibly2,000,000 men in the Replacement Army; at theend of 1944 there were probably considerablyless. On the whole, units of the ReplacementArmy were remarkably stable during the 5years of war, with regard to type, number, andin some cases also with regard to the location ofthe replacement elements.However, major changes did occur in the replacementdivision staffs, regimental staffs, andspecialist companies in the years 1942 to 1944.Most of the units dissolved were in the artillerybattalion series. Additional units or new types1—67

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Headquarters Ilzfantry DivisionHeadquarters Infantry DivisionDivision Map SectionMilitary Police SquadInfantry Regiment(2d and 3d Regiments like the 1st Regiment)Headquarters CompanyCyclist PlatoonEngineer PlatoonCommunication PlatoonInfantry Battalion(2d Battalion like the 1st Battalion)Infantry Howitzer CompanyAntitank CompanyDivision Fiisilier CompanyAntitank BattalionMotorized Antitank CompanyArmored Tank Destroyer CompanyAntiaircraft Machine-gun Company.;Artillery RegimentHeadquarters Battery1st Antitank Artillery Battalion2d and 3d Artillery Battalions4th Artillery BattalionEngineer BattalionSignal BattalionField Replacemsnt BattalionCadre PersonnelSupply RegimentHeadquarters TroopMotor Transport Supply CompanySupply Troop (Horse-Drawn)Supply PlatoonInfantry Replacement and Training Battalion3d Battalion Motorized Artillery Demonstration RegimentMilitary Police Replacement RegimentInfantry Replacement and Training BattalionReconnaissance Replacement and Training BattalionInfantry Engineer Replacement and Training CompanyInfantry Signal Replacement and Training CompanyInfantry Replacement and Training BattalionInfantry Howitzer Replacement and Training CompanyInfantry Antitank Replacement and Training CompanyReconnaissance Replacement and Training BattalionAntitank Replacement and Training BattalionAntitank Replacement and Training BattalionAntiaircraft Machine-gun Replacement and TrainingBattalionLight Artillery Replacement and Training BattalionLight Motorized Artillery and Training BattalionLight Artillery Replacement and Training BattalioriMedium Artillery Replacement and Training BattalionEngineer Replacement and Training BattalionSignal Replacement and Training BattalionInfantry Replacement and Training BattalionMotor Transport Supply Troop Replacement and TrainingBattalionMotor Transport Supply Troop Replacement ant1 TrainingBattalionSupply Troop Replacement and Training BattalionSupply Troop Replacement and Training Battalion(Horse-Drawn)Local Defense Replacement and Training BattalionMotor Maintenance Replacement and Training BattalionOrdnance CompanyWorkshop CompanyAdministrative CompanyBakers and ButchersAdministrative Training Replacement and Training BattalionDrivers ..........................................Motor Transport Training Replacement and TrainingBattalionOther Personnel ................................ * ..Local Defense Replacement and Training BattalionMedical Company .......,...........................Medical Replacement and Training BattalionAmbulance Platoon ...............................Medical Replacement and Training BattalionVeterinary Company .................................Veterinary Replacement and Training BattalionField Post OfficeField Post Replacement and Training BattalionFigure Il.—Replacement afiliution of a division, late 1944.of units were created whenever necessary, often modified, is worked out to the smallest detail. Thepreceding developments in the Field Army, as table was valid for a Volks Grenadier division aswitnessed by the formation of assault gun, and late as November 1944. The replacement unitsPanzer howitzer replacement and training bat- shown are mostly of the combined replacementtalions, mortar training companies, and replace- and training type, even though they are designatedment and training battalions for troops with as replacement units.stomach and ear ailments. n. RECENT DEVELOPMENTS. After the Alliedm. EXAMPLE OF AFFILIATION BETWEEN A advance through France in August 1944, most ofFIELD DIVISION AND ITS REPLACEMENT AND the replacement and training units from the out-TRAINING UNITS. The table above shows how lying areas of the western W4wkreise were withthereplacement training system, although greatly drawn farther east within the Wehrkreise. Evil—68

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451dently efforts were being made to preserve thereplacement and training structure within theWehrkreise, even though they were part of theTheater of Operations. A similar attempt wasmade in Wehrkreis I on the Eastern Front. Insome instances, replacement units were moved toanother Wehrkreis, but then only to locations justacross the boundary.Late in 1944, Wehrkreis XII, the middle oneof the western Wehrkreise, moved some of itsreplacements far inland into the central Wehrkreise.These units, however, still remain at thedisposal of Wehrkreis XII.Early in 1945 affiliation between replacementunits and field units was still valid as affiliationfrom the field unit to the replacement unit, butgenerally not in the other direction.4. Traininga. INTRODUCTION. (1) Types of training establishments.The general military training ofthe German soldier takes place principally in thetraining units of the Replacement Army, althougha certain amount of training also is givenin its replacement units. Training units also areprepared to conduct special courses in order toprovide some types of specialized personnel, asrequired by the Field Army, and to secure a poolof personnel trained with particular care as potentialofficers and noncommissioned officers. Inaddition to these general training units, numerousschools and courses have been established with thespecific purpose of training potential officers andnoncommissioned officers. Other schools, designatedas special-service schools (Waffenschulen),have the function of providing specialized trainingfor officers and enlisted men of their particularbranch of service, developing its arms, equipment,and tactics with the help of their demonstrationunits, and furnishing instructors for theArmy. In addition, specialist training schoolsare established to provide instruction for ordnanceofficers, technical officials, and particularly noncommissionedofficer-technicians, or for officersand noncommissioned officers of all arms andservices as specialists in certain particular functions,such as air raid and gas protection.(2) Chain of command. The training in mosttypes of replacement and training units, whichare under the command of the Wehrkreis headquartersexercised through intermediate staffs,is coordinated by the Chief of Training in theReplacement Army. He exercises his authorityefforts the Inspectors of Arms and Services,who issue directives regarding the particulartraining in their arms to the Wehrkreis headquarters.These directives are based on tactical doc-I n worked out in detail by the Inspectorates ofArms and Services in the General Army Office,which, us t follow instructions from the Chiefof Training and his Inspectors.one directives for the training of Panzer troopsare issued by the Inspector General of PanzerTroops, who is directly subordinate to Hitler.The training of medical troops is directed by theChief Army Medical Inspector, who is directlysubordinate to the Army High Command, andthat of veterinary troops by the Chief VeterinaryInspector, immediately under the Armed ForcesHigh Command.The training of potential officers and noncomaining officers wherever it occurs, takes placethe under the command or under the supervisionof the Inspector Genrral for Potential Officersand noncommissioned officers. His authorityis restricted to supervision when this type oftraining takes place in establishments under thecommand of the Chief of Training, the InspectorGeneral of Panzer Troops, or any Wehrkreisheadquarters. Special-service schools and specialisttraining schools are under the commandof the Chief of Training I\-ith the exception ofthe Schools for Pawcr Troops. nhich are commandedby the Inspector General of PanzerTroops.(3) Supplrwr~ztary tvaiilillg. The paragraphsbelow describe how the various types of trainingoned and schools discharge their functions. Itshould be kept in mind that these functions aresupplemented in many ways. A considerablepart of the military training in Germany is givenin the form of pre-Army training by other militaryand auxiliary organizations. Special abilitiesfound in various civilian occupations are put touse by the Army. and only personnel with a certainprofessional backgromld are trained for anumber of technical employments within theArmy. Civilian establishments sometimes areused for the training of Army personnel; forservice s technical courses often are conductedin factories producing special types of equipment.b. GEKERAL TRAINING. (1) Organization oftraining units. In principle, the training unit isa true image of the field unit which it supplieswith trained replacements. Thus, the infantry1—69

CHAIN OF COHMANO- SUPERVISIONCOMMANDER OF THfREPLACEMENT ARMYIi

I MARCH 1945U\jCLASS\F\EDTM-E 30451training battalion, just like any battalion of aninfantry regiment, consists of the lst, 2d, and 3drifle training companies, and the 4th machine-guntraining company. This principle has been somewhatmodified, however, in order to take advantageof specialized training personnel and to expeditethe training; thus, drivers of horse-drawnvehicles, for example, usually are not trainedwithin each training company but combined intoa special detachment within the battalion. Theinfantry training regimental staff, in accordancewith the normal (pre-1944) composition of a regularinfantry regiment, usually controls three infantrytraining battalions, a 13th infantry-howitzertraining company, and a 14th infantry antitanktraining company; in addition, however, itoften has controlled a 15th infantry signal trainingcompany, and every second or third staff a16th infantry engineer training company to furnishtrained personnel for the signal platoons inbattalion headquarters and the signal and engineersplatoons in the regimental headquarterscompany. Recently, a 17th mortar training companyhas been added to train crews for the heavymortars, introduced into the 4th and 8th companiesof the infantry regiments of regular infantrydivisions. Only one training companyfor infantry mounted platoons in each Wehrkreistrained replacements for the mounted platoonsof all the infantry regiments under its responsibility.Recent developments, including the introductionof new weapons and the growing scarcity oftraining personnel in conjunction with’ the increasingpressure of time, have accentuated thetendency of concentration and specialization oftraining, and continuous reorganizations of thefield divisions have made the similarity betweenfield and training units less and less evident.(2) Prograna in training units. The main responsibilityfor the training of recruits rests withthe commander of the training unit of companysize (company, battery, troop). The detailedtraining schedule is prepared within the frameworkof the company. The battalion commandersupervises the progress of the training in thecompanies of his battalion and inspects the recruitsat the end of their basic training. Thecommanders of higher echelons coordinate thetraining in the units under their command andsupervise it. They are also responsible for theeducation and training of officers and potentialofficers and noncommissioned officers within theseunits. The latter are often placed in special companieswithin the training battalions and regiments.The basic training (Grundausbildung) in infantrytraining units normally is planned for 16weeks; actually this period now is reduced to 8weeks in most cases. This period may be followedby an indefinite period of advanced training (Erweiterulzgsausbildztng),lasting up to the time oftransfer of the recruits to a field unit. The basictraining usually is divided into three parts, thefirst of which is devoted to individual training, thesecond to the training of the individual recruitwithin the framework of the squad, and the thirdto the training of the squad within the frameworkof the platoon. During the advanced trainingperiod, the scope of training is amplified to includeexercises on reinforced company or, in artilleryand chemical warfare troops, even battalion level.The basic training components, listed in order ofthe importace attributed to them, are: combattraining, firing, lectures, drilling, sports. The drillfor the modern German soldier is far from whatis generally believed; drilling of the famousgoose-step is not permitted, and "present arms" isnot taught.(3) Training in rcplaccmcnt units. Althoughaccording to their organization basically not equippedfor training purposes, the replacement unitsnevertheless perform training functions on a reducedscale. This is done in three ways:After their induction into a replacement unitwhich is not stationed in the same location as itscorresponding training unit, the recruits immediatelyare combined into training groups to undergoa one to three-week period of preparatorytraining (Vor-Ausbildzmg) until they can be sentto a training unit.Regular training functions are performed inthe convalescent components of replacement units.Their purpose is to restore the health and physiqueof convalescents until they regain full fitness forfield duty, and also to select and train instructorsfor the training units. For the latter purpose specialcourses are conducted by the convalescentunits.After regaining their fitness for field duty, theconvalescents are sent to the transfer components(Marschkompanien, etc.) of their replacementunits, where they are given advanced training untilthe time of their transfer to a field unit.c. NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER TRAINING. (1)General categories. The two basic categories ofI—71

I MARCH 1945noncommissioned officers are the ones enlistingfor either 12 or 4 % years, called active or professionalnoncommissioned officers, and the conscriptspromoted to noncommissioned officer'srank, called reserve noncommissioned officers.The active noncommissioned officers may eitherserve in ordinary noncommissioned officers' functionsin the various arms and services or they mayreceive specialized training as technicians. Typicaltraining establishments for ordinary noncommissionedofficers are the Army noncommissionedofficers' schools (Heeres-Unterofizier-Schulen),for technicians the specialist training schools andthe special-service schools (Waffen-Schulen) ofchemical warfare troops, engineers, and signaltroops. In peacetime, noncommissioned officersserving 12 years were, at the end of their service,trained for civilian occupations in Army vocationalschools (Heeresfachschulen) and ArmedForces vocational schools (Wehrwachtfachschulen); in wartime, this vocational training isrestricted to the rehabilitation of men no longerfit for service. The reserve noncommissioned officersreceive special training in noncommissionedofficer courses (Unterfiihrer-Lehrgiinge), whichmay be conducted in the Field Army as well asin the Replacement Army at various echelons.(2) Ordinary noncommissioned oficers. (a)Selection. In peacetime and to an even largerdegree, in wartime, the German High Commandconsiders the possession of a highly qualifiednoncommissioned officer corps as of vital importancefor the effectiveness of the Army andendeavors by all means of propaganda to fill itsranks. For the professional noncommissionedofficer corps two sources are open:Volunteers for the noncommissioned officercareer may apply at the age of 165 years and, ifaccepted by a selection center for potential Armyofficers and noncommissioned officers, enter theArmy at the age of 17 as noncommissioned officerapplicants (Unterofizier-Bewerber, usually abbreviatedU.B.). Some of these may have hadpre-Army training for this career as junior cadets(Jungschiitzen) in Army noncommissioned officerpreparatory schools (Heeres-Unterofizier-Vorschulen).Conscripts already in service who wish to enlistfor either 12 or 4% years must have a good recordas leaders in combat, instructors, and disciplinarians.They can enlist only after one year's serviceand are finally accepted only after 2 years' service.Only those are accepted for a 1Zyear terml—72UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451who will be not over 38 years of age at the endof their service period; the age limit for men enlistingfor 4% years is 28 years. If acceptable,these men are appointed noncommissioned officerapplicants by their battalion commanders.(b) Training of nonconwzissio~ted oficer applicants.The noncommissioned officer applicantsbelonging to units of the Replacement Army arenormally educated and trained at the Army noncommissionedofficer schools, Up to February1944, the training period of a noncommissionedofficer applicant volunteer at an Army noncommissionedofficer school was 10 months. The first4 months were devoted to basic training, and duringthe remaining 6 months the applicant receivedtraining as a squad leader in his particular branchof service. In February 1944, the basic trainingwas removed entirely from the Army noncommissionedofficer schools, and the applicant volunteersthenceforth were to be sent to training unitsof their appropriate arms for basic training, togetherwith the other recruits inducted at thesame time. The advanced training period, for applicantvolunteers and appointed applicants alike,was reduced to 5 months for branches havingArmy noncommissioned officer schools of theirown, and to 3 months for some specializedbranches, whose applicants are trained at scl~ool~of related branches. These periods may be supplementedby an additional period of 1 or 3months, respectively, spent in training units, makinga total advanced training period of 6 monthsbefore the applicants graduate from the Armynoncommissioned officer school and are promotedto privates first class (Gefreite).transferred to a field unit.They then areAt present, there are about 22 Army noncommissionedofficer schools for infantry, one formountain infantry, seven for Panzer troops, twofor artillery, two for engineers, and one for signaltroops. These schools are usually organized likea battalion of their respective arms; the Armynoncommissioned officer schools for Panzer troopsare specialized in one of the main branches of thisarm (Panzer Grenadiers, tank crews, antitankpersonnel, Panzer reconnaissance personnel).Men enlisting for long-term service while servingin the Field Army (Kapitulanten des Feld-Izeeres) may take part either in a noncommissionedofficer applicant course conducted by a fieldheadquarters, especially in a divisional combatschool, or in a course at a field noncommissionedofficer school (Feld-Unterofizier-Schule). In

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30451their training, these schools approach field con- terminating their enlistment period, most of theseditions to a much larger degree than the Army technicians have the opportunity, after taking adnoncommissionedofficer schools; their training ditional courses at the appropriate specialist trainperiodslast only about 2% months. There is one ing schools, to become advanced technical or ad,field noncommissioned officer school for each of ministrative officials.the three most important arms: infantry, Panzer (b) Training. In addition to an apprenticetroops,and artillery. They originally were located ship in Army units or headquarters required forin occupied territories, but now apparently have most of the technician careers, courses of varyingbeen removed to Germany proper. They are be- length are conducted for the various types oflieved to be organized like a regiment of their technicians at the specialist training schools andrespective arms, including some or all of its more some special-service schools. In many cases, shortimportant special branches.or wartime courses have been established to sup(3) Noncomntissioned o@cer technicians. (a) ply sufficient personnel for the wartime Army;Selection. A number of careers as technicians the men participating in these courses, however,(Sonderlaufbahnen) are open for active noncom- usually will not become full-fledged techniciansmissioned officers who, as a rule, must have en- upon graduating from these courses but only afterlisted for 12 years; exceptions are the medical taking additional courses at a later opportunity.technicians, blacksmith technicians, and musicians, These men are not necessarily active soldiers; ifwho will also be accepted if they enlist for the they did not enlist for long-term service, they are4>&year period. For most of these careers, quali- designated as reserve noncommissioned officerfied professional backgrounds are required. Upon technicians.Length of CoursePeaceWarNCO Technician Germwt Designation Training School (where Knowa)Supply Technician Schirrmeister (F) Army Riding and 12 months(H-Dr T)Driving SchoolSupply Technician Schirrmeister (K) School for Army 4 months(MT)MotorizationSupply Technician Schirrmeister (P) Engineer School 2 3 months(Engr)Supply Technician Schirrmeister (PT)(Tech Engr)Supply Technician Schirrmeister (EP) Railway Engineer(Ry Engr)Supply Technician Schirrmeister (Ch)SchoolSchool for Chemical 7 months A l / 2 months(CW)Warfare TroopsSupply Technician Schirrmeister (Sch) Spandau Army 6 months(SL)Equipment DepotSupply Technician Schirrmeister (Fz)(Ord)Ordnance Technician Feuerwerker Army Ordnance Tech 18 months 6 monthsnician SchoolsI and IIWeapon Technician Waffen-Unteroffizier Army Weapon Tech 12 months 3-5 monthsnician SchoolsI and IISignal Supply Tech- Funkmeister Army Signal School 9 months 3 monthsnicianIIPigeoneer Brief taubenmeister School for Dog and 7 monthsPigeon ServiceFortress-Engineer Festungspionier- Fortress Engineer 3 yearsTechnician Unteroffizier SchoolFortress Maintenance Wall-Unteroffizier Fortress Maintenance 12 monthsTechnicianSchoolMedical Technician Sanitats-Unteroffizier Medical schools 9 monthsBlacksmith Technician Beschlagschmied- Army Blacksmith 4 months 2 monthsUnteroffizierschoolsMusician Technician Musikerl—73

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451The table on page 73 shows the various types oftechnicians, the duration of their courses, and theschools conducting these courses.(4) Training of reserve llolzcollzllzissioned officerapplicants. Conscripts who are acceptableas future noncommissioned officers and are consideredfor promotion, but who are not enlistingfor a definite service period, are appointed reservenoncommissioned officer applicants (Reserve-Utzter b fizier-Bewerber usually abbreviated R.U.B.) by their battalion commanders. The trainingof the reserve officer applicants normallytakes place at Wehrkreis noncommissioned officercourses (Wehrkreis-Unterfiihrer-Lehrgiinge), althoughreserve officer applicants recently have alsobeen trained at Army noncommissioned officerschools. Each of the original Wchrkreise hasone Wehrkreis noncommissioned course, usuallylocated at a maneuver area within the Wehrkreisitself or in a neighboring Wehrkreis. Thesecourses are more or less organized like infantryregiments, but often include, in addition to regularinfantry components, other types of specialistsub-units, such as a reconnaissance troop, a mortartraining company, or a field howitzer battery.In some Wehrkreise, sub-units of the Wehrkreisnoncommissioned officer course for arms otherthan infantry may be established with existingtraining units or Army noncommissioned officerschools of these arms. In Wehrkrcis IX, in additionto its regular Wehvkreis noncommissionedofficer course, such a course for Pamer troopshas been identified.(5) Training of noncommissioned officers forspecial functions. A number of noncommissionedofficers are employed in functions requiringspecial training without being technicians.These may be trained within their own or otherunits or headquarters by practical experience andapprenticeship, or in special courses conductedby units or headquarters (in the field usually bythe division combat schools, in the ReplacementArmy by the Wehrkreise), or at specialist trainingschools.(a) Training by practicd experience. Firstsergeants (Hauptfeldwebel), clbthing supply sergeants(Bekleidungs-Unterofziere), and similartypes of special function noncommissioned officersusually are trained in this manner.(b) Training in special courses conducted byunits and headquarters. This type of trainingusually applies to company clerks (Rechnungs1—74fiihrer) and to supp1y sergeants for weapons andequipment (Gerat-Unteroffizicre).(c) Trailzing at specialist training schools.Gas protection noncommissionetl officers (Gasschuts-Untrrojjizievc)take courses at Army GasProtection Schools 1 and 2, or at the H’ehrkreisgas protection courses. Other noncommissionedofficers receive special training in fire fighting atthe Army Air Raid Protection School or at theWehrkreis air raid protection courses. Fieldcook noncommissioned officel-s (Fcldkoch-Unterofiziere)( mess sergeants (Kiirhcrl-Unterofiziere),and mess clerks (Kiichmbm-hfiihrer) aretrained at Wehrkreis cook schools or by fieldcook instruction staffs.(6) Training of illtclligmce personnel. Linguistswho may be employed as interpreters(Dolmetschcr) in all branches of the Army, butparticularly as intelligence personnel, usually holdthe position of specialist leaders (Sorldevfiihrer)regardless of their actual noncommissioned officeror officer rank. They receive linguistic andintelligence training in the interpreter companies,of which there is one in each Wrhrkreis, and inthe ,Interpreter Demonstration Battalion. In addition,a Signal Interpreter Replacement andTraining Battalion trains signal intelligence personnel.d. TH E TRAINING OF POTENTIAL OFFICERS.(1) General. The system for training Germanofficer replacements in wartime normally extendsover a period of between 16 and 20 months (includingprescribed service in the field) and isdivided into three main phases. These phasesdiffer slightly for active and reserve officer replacements,but the duration and standard oftraining are identical. The only difference betweenactive and reserve officers is that the formerenroll for an unlimited period of service and haveto meet slightly higher physical requirements.For both categories, the training during the threemain phases takes place in schools and coursesdevoted to this particular purpose. In the firstphase, these are either officer applicant courses orreserve officer applicant courses; in the secondphase officer candidate schools or courses; andin the third phase advanced officer candidatecourses.In certain cases selected enlisted men who areover 30 years old and have served in the fieldin cambat units may become officers without attendingofficer candidate schools or courses but

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 36-451merely after a very few months of additionalservice in the field as officer candidates.The following paragraphs outline the normalprocedure for selecting and training active andreserve officer replacements.(2) Potelztial active officers (aktivcr Ofizier-Nachwuchs). (a) Selectioll. Future active officersare selected in the following three ways:Untrained volunteers, usually at the age of 16or 17, after a preliminary selection by a selectioncenter for future Army officers and noncommissionedofficers (Amahmcstclle fiir dm Fiihrerllachwuchsdcs Heeves), enroll for an unlimitedperiod and enter the Army as officer applicants(Ofizier-Be,werber, usually abbreviated O.B.).Conscripts already serving who are under 28and decide to apply for the active officer careerfirst are appointed reserve officer applicants(Reserve-Ofizier-Bewcrber, usually abbreviatedR.O.B.), or if they have already attained noncommissionedofficer grade, reserve officer candidates(Fahnenjmker der Reserve, usually abbreviatedFhj.d.R.), by their regimental (or independentbattalion) commanders. A note is added to therecord indicating that they intend to adopt theactive officer career. They are accepted for thiscareer upon graduating from the officer candidatecourse, but they must first attend a reserve officerapplicant course if they have not already attainednoncommissioned officer grade.Professional noncommissioned officers may,after at least 2 months of service in the field, beappointed officer candidates (Fahnenjunker, usuallyabbreviated Fhj.) and be sent to an officercandidate course.(b) Oficer applicalzt training. This first phaseof the training of future officers lasts 10 monthsand is designed for the untrained volunteer officerapplicants. It is divided into the followingtwo periods:Four months of basic training in a trainingunit.Six months of noncommissioned officer trainingin an officer applicant course (O.B.-Lehrgang1.These courses usually take place at Armynoncommissioned officer schools, some of whichare reserved exclusively to this type of courses.In some special branches, officer applicant coursesare held at the special-service schools or at trainingunits. Upon graduation from the course, inwhich they are especially trained as squad leaders,the applicants are usually promoted to noncommissionedofficers.(c) Oficer candidate trairzing. After completionof their training in the Replacement Army.the officer applicants are transferred to a fieldunit for a period of not longer than 3 months inorder to demonstrate their leadership abilities inthe field. The latest tendency has been to reducethis period as much as possible, even down to avery few days, in order to preserve the potentialofficers who, after completion of 10 months oftraining in the Replacement Army, represent avaluable investment of the Army. As soon asthey have proved themselves in the field theyare appointed officer candidates (Fahnenjunker)and sent to an officer candidate course (Fhj.-Lchrgang) of 3 to 4 months' duration. Thesecourses are usually conducted at the special-serviceschools; the infantry, Panzer troops, and artillery,however, have separate officer candidateschools and courses. It should be noted thatthese courses are not only attended by personnelwho have passed through the officer applicanttraining period but also by conscript and professionalnoncommissioned officers who have beenappointed reserve officer candidates by their regimental(or independent battalion) commanders.Toward the middle of the course, the candidatesare promoted to officer candidate-staff sergeants(Fahnenjunker-Fcldwcbel, usually abbreviatedFhj. Fzu.) ; upon graduation they are promoted toadvanced officer cancliates (Oberfdhnriche, usuallyabbreviated Obfiih~.).(d) Advanced oficer candidate training.After completing the officer candidate course, thecandidates attend an advanced officer candidatecourse (Obcvfiihnr.Lchrga,zg) lasting 3 months.These courses usually are conducted at the specialserviceschools. For advanced officer candidatesof the infantry they may be conducted at especiallydesignated infantry officer candidate schools,and for those of the Pame troops T the Panzertroop advanced officer candidate schools. Upongraduation from these courses, the candidates arepromoted to second lieutenants (Leutnant, usuallyabbreviated Lt.) (The word "promote"—befordevn is always used ; German officers are notcommissioned).(3) Potelztial reserve oficers (Reserve-O@zier-Naclnvuchs). (a) Selection. Potential reserveofficers are selected in the following ways:Untrained volunteers may be accepted by theselection centers for potential Army officers andnoncommissioned officers as aspirants for the reserveofficer career (Anw iir die t e r1—75

I MARCH 1945O fizier-Laufbahn). They are appointed reserveofficer applicants by the regimental (or independentbattalion) commander of their responsible replacementunit after 4 months' service.During the’ condcription procedure suitable menmay be selected by the commanders of recruitingsub-area headquarters. They have a similarcareer to that of the untrained volunteers describedabove.Conscripts in basic training may be appointedreserve officer applicants by the regimental (orindependent battalion) commander of their replacementor training unit.Conscripts already serving for some time maybe appointed reserve officer applicants, or, if theyhave already attained noncommissioned officergrade and, within 1 year previous to the date oftheir appointment, have proved themselves in afield unit, may be appointed reserve officer candidates,by the regimental (or independent battalion)commander of their field or replacementunit.(b) Reserve oficer applicant training. Untrainedpotential reserve officers first undergo4 months of basic training, after which theyare appointed reserve officer applicants. Reserveofficer applicants who have had their basic trainingspend 6 months in a reserve officer applicantcourse (R.O.B.-Lehrgang). These courses usuallyare conducted by the headquarters of replacementand training units, and some infantry andartillery replacement regiments have special officerreplacement companies and batteries (Offizier-Nachzvuchs-Kompanien-Batterien)for thispurpose. Recently, however, the ones for infantryofficer applicants have been more and moreconcentrated on Wehrkreis level; the W&l-kreisheadquarters may designate a particular infantryreplacement battalion as an officer replacementbattalion (Ofizier-Nachwuchs-Bataillon), or conducta special Wehrkreis reserve officer applicantcourse (Wkr. R.O.B.-Lehrgang). Upon conclusionof this course, in which they are primarilytrained as squad leaders, the applicants are usuallypromoted to noncommissioned officers.(c) Reserve oficer candidate training. Aftercompletion of their training in the ReplacementArmy, the reserve officer applicants, just like theactive officer applicants, are transferred to a fieldunit to prove themselves worthy. and then areappointed reserve officer candidates. Subsequently,they attend the same officer candidate schoolsor courses as the active officer candidates, Dur-J—76UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45Iing these courses, they are promoted to reserveofficer candidate-staff sergeants (F1aj.Fw.d.R.) )and upon their termination to advanced reserveofficer candidates (Oberfiihrwicll dcr Reserve,usually abbreviated 0berftilznr.d.R.).(d) Advanced reserve oficcr candidate training.The courses for advanced reserve officercandidates usually are conducted by the Wehrkreisheadquarters. Upon graduation from thesecourses, the candidates are promoted to reservesecond lieutenants (Lcutwant dcr Reserve, usuallyabbreviated Lt.d.R.).(4) Potential oficer specialists. Slightly differentrules apply for the training of potential officersin specialist careers who, in addition to theirmilitary education, require a certain type of professionaltraining. These are the careers of medicalofficer, veterinary officer, ordnance officer, andofficer of the motor maintenance troops. In addition,the administrative officer and judge advocatecareers in the Special Troop Service require specialrules regarding the replacement of their officers.(a) Potential medical officers (Sanitiits-Offiziev-Nachzvuchs).Active medical officer applicantsare selected from secondary school graduatevolunteers by the Wehrkrcis surgeon in connectionwith the recruiting sub-area commander.They take part in the officer applicant trainingconducted for potential infantry officers, and afterits conclusion and a short assignment to a fieldunit are appointed officer candidates. At that time,they are assigned to the Medical Officer Academyand begin taking medical courses at the university.After a certain period of time they are promotedto medical technical sergeant (Fcldmtcrarzt).Upon passing their medical examination, they becomeofficers. Soldiers of the Field and ReplacementArmy may be accepted for this career ifthey fulfill the requiremellts. Doctors and medicalstudents may become reserve medical officers.While taking medical courses at universities, thereserve medical officer candidates are assigned tomedical officer feeder battalions (Sanitiitsofi;xier-Ergiinzungs-Abteilungen).(b) Potential veteriwary oficers (Veterikiir-Ofizier-Nachwuchs). Like the medical officerapplicants, the active veterinary officer applicantsare selected from young civilian voiunteers andfrom soldiers of the Field and ReplacementArmies. Their officer applicant training takesplace in a mounted replacement and training unit.After their promotion to officer candidates they

I MARCH 1945are assigned to the Army Veterinary Academy.are become assig ne d upon passing theirveterinarian examinations. Veterinarians and veterinarystudents may become reserve veterinaryofficers.(c) Potential ordnance officers (Offizier (IV)-Nachwuchs). Active ordnance officers are recruitedfrom active ordnance technicians; reserveordnance officers from ordnance technicians withwartime training who did not enlist for the 12year period. They are selected by their regimental(or independent battalion) commander and sentto an ordnance officer candidate course (Fahnenjunker(W)-Lehrgang) at Army OrdnanceSchool I. During this course, which lasts 3months for active ordnance technicians, and 9months for reserve ordnance technicians, they areappointed ordnance officer candidates (Fahnenjunker(IV)) by the commander of the ArmyOrdnance School. Upon graduating from thesecourses, they are promoted to ordnance lieutenants(Leutnant (IV)).(d) Potential officers of the motor maintenancetroops (Offizier-Nachwuchs der Kraftfakrparktruppe).Active motor maintenance officers arerecruited from supply technicians (MT) who areappointed officer candidates by their regimental(or independent battalion) commander and sentto officer candidate courses at the Motor MaintenanceTroop School. In addition, active or reserveadvanced officer candidates of other armsmay be taken over into the motor maintenancetroops to receive 2 to 3 months of special trainingat the Motor Maintenance Troop School, providedthey have the required technical background. Soldiersin motor maintenance units who are over 38years old, after at least 18 months of service, maybe sent to the officer candidate courses at the MotorMaintenance Troop School; younger men maybe transferred to a tank or Panzer Grenadier regimentand sent to a Panzer troop officer candidatecourse, to become reserve motor maintenance officers.(e) Potential officers of the Special TroopService (Offizier-Nachwuchs des Truppensonderdienstes).The Special Troop Service includes theadministrative career (Laufbahn des Verwaltungsdienstes)and the judge advocate career(Laufbahn der W ehrmachtrichter). The officersof the administrative career are recruited fromsoldiers acceptable as officers of the fightingtroops. Officer candidates of this career in thelower brackets are trained at the Army Adminis-UNCLASSIFIED TM- E 3

I MARCH 1945(6) Senior personnel oficers (H i jhere Adjutanten).Courses for senior personnel officers areconducted by the Army Personnel Office. Theyare usually held at leading Army schools, such asthe War Academy or a special-service school.(7) Battalion commandeYs (BtL-(Abt.-)Fiihrer). Special courses for battalion commandersare conducted at an Army School forBattalion Commanders.(8) Com,pany cowimanders (Kompanieftihrer).Schools for company commanders may be estab-UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451lished by armies or army groups in their rearareas.(9) National-Socialist guidance officers (NS-Fiihrungsofiziere), usually abbreviated (NSFO).National-Socialist guidance officers for divisionsand higher headquarters take part in courses conductedby an Instruction Staff for NS Indoctrination.(10) Gas protection officers (Gasabwehr-Offiziere)usually abbreviated Gabo). Courses forgas protection officers are conducted at Army GasProtection Schools 1 and 2.I—78

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDCHAPTER IIORGANIZATION OF THEFIELD FORCESSection I. OVER-ALL FIELDORGANIZATIONThe High Command frameworks below theArmy High Command are the Army Groups(Hcevcsgruppelzl~onlIl~arldos) that are formed forparticular campaigns to control two to fourArmies in a single Theater of Operations, or inan important and more or less self-containedsector under such a theater. Since 1941 the totalnumber of army groups has been between fourand twelve.The chart on page 3 shows the variations in thenumber of Armies (Aumeeoberkonmandos) perarmy group, of corps per army and of divisionsper corps.Section II. HIGH COMMANDIN THE FIELDUnder the German military system the basicprinciple is unity of command at all levels. Thusthe Army, Navy, and Air Force are consideredbranches of a single service, the Armed Forces(Wehrmacht). This joint High Command is responsiblefor the whole preparation of defense intime of peace and for the general conduct of war;it appoints commands for the joint task forcesin the field and sees to it that the efforts of thethree branches of the armed forces are thoroughlycoordinated.In time of war the Armed Forces High Command,as well as the High Command of eachof the three branches establishes a field headquartersaway from Berlin for the conduct of operations.Its location at any given time depends onthe theater to which the main attention is beingdirected. In the case of the Navy, it is usuallyat one of the naval bases while the headquartersof the Army, the Air Force and the ArmedForces have been in close proximity to each otherat various points since the spring of 1941. TheCommander-in-Chief and the bulk of the GeneralStaff of each High Command are stationed atfield headquarters, while the non-operationalbranches back in the Zone of the Interior continueto handle all basic administrative matters,procurement, mobilization, training and replacementof personnel, and equipment.Hitler is the Supreme Commander of theArmed Forces (Oberster Befehlshaber der Welrmacht).His Deputy as such is General FieldMarshall Wilhelm Keitel, Chief of the ArmedForces High Command (Chef des Oberkommandoder Wehmmacht).Under the Armed Forces High Command thefunctions of the joint general staff are performedby what is known as the Armed Forces OperationsStaff ( Wehmachtfiihrwgsstaf-W.F.St).The field headquarters of the Armed ForcesHigh Command which includes the principal sectionsof the Armed Forces Operations Staff isknown as the Fiilzre~hauptqzlavticr. During thePolish campaign it was stationed between Berlinand the Polish Frontier, moving to the Rhinelandfor the Western campaign in 1940, back to theEast in 1941, and again to the West in 1944.Hitler's headquarters (Fiilzrerlzaztptquartier) isbelieved to have moved recently to southern Germanywhere it is probably located in the vicinityof Berchtesgaden.The personnel of the Armed Forces HighCommand is drawn from all three branches, butthe Army naturally has the largest representation.The name of a command, organization, or unitderiving from the Armed Forces High Commandis often prefixed by Wehmlacht- or Fiihrungs inorder to distinguish it from a similar command,organization, or unit in one of the three branches.Since December 1941, when von Brauchitschwas dismissed as Commander-in-Chief of theArmy (Oberbefehlshuber des Heeres), and Hitlertook direct control of the Army, the field head-II—I

U. S. Designations :A H Comd(0 K H)A Gps(Heercsgrupperlkommandos)Gps(Annceoberkommu~dos)Corps(Korps)Divs(Divisionrn)73oiC GObrrbrfrhlslrabrrdes HcercsOberbefehlshabcr dcrHeeresgrlcppeUrfchlshuber c!t~sArmeeobcrkommandosK omuumdicrenderGeneralDivisionskommandeurc of sChef des Gencralstabcsdcs HeeresChef des Gozr~ralstabcs Chef dcs Gemralstabcs Chrf drs Gcncralstabcs (I-a)G 1Offs Heerespersonalam t II-a, I. Adjztttr;lt II-a, 1. Adjzmlt I I-a, 1. Adjutunt IT-a, I. Adjutant.EMAllgevneines HeeresavrltTmppelzabteilungII-c, 2. Adjzltallt II-c, 2. Adjzbtant II-c, 2. Adjutant II-c, 2. AdjzLtaxtG-2 Obrrqllnrtierl)lcistr~IVI-c, 3. GcncralstabsofizicrI-c, 3. GrncralstabsofiioierI-c, 3. GeneralstabsofiiairrI-c, 3. GcnrralstabsofizierG 3opnsTngObrrqllczrtie~lllcistcrIObcrqzltrrticrrrtristrrTwI-a, 1. GcmralstabsofizicrI-d, 4. Gejteralstabsofizierl-a, 1. GcnrmlstabsofizierI-d, 4. Gcrmalstabsofizier[II-a, 1. GeneralstabsofizierIfI-a, 1. GeneralstabsofizierG-4 Generalqunrtiernzeistrr(Gen. @c.)I-c, 2. GeneralstabsofizierObcrqzmrtiermristcr(0. Qu)Qz~artiervnhstrr(Q- Qu.)T-c, 2. GeneralstabsofizierC Arty 0General derArtillerieStabsofizier derArtillerie (Stoart)Hoherer Artillerickotvmandmr(HarkoiArtilleriekomvnundeur(Arko)Artilleriefiihrer(Arfii)C Engr 0C Sig 0General derPionirre und FestungmChef dt-s Ilcerrs-Izachvicktclswese,lsGeneral dev Piolzirrc(Gela. d. Pi.)llceresgruppennallrichtenfiihrer(H. Gr. Naclzr. Fii.)lrlrc piorzicrfiihr c,r(A. Pi. Fii.)Armeenachrichtenfidtver(A. Nachr. Fii.)Stubsofizi(vr drr I’ionirrc(.Ytopi)Kor~snachrirlatelafiilzrerKommandeur dcsPionierbataillonsKommandeur derVacllriclltcrlabt rilllvli:&•COc Clm 0Gcrrc~al d,,rSrbcltruppc,lHiilrwcr Ko~~~runrdczrrdrr Nebeltruppen >Stabsoffizierji i r Gusabx*chrGasalrzcchroffizier(Gabo)Gasalncchroffizicr orGassihutzoffizier(GaboJC AT 0Gerzeral fi i rP anzrrabwchr.Stabso#ii=icr fiirPanzcrbckampfung ?.Ctrrbsofi.zicr fiirPanzcrbcka'mp fung(Stopak)Stabsoffizier fiirI’ull=‘~rbc~kiimpfu,~gKominnndeur derl’u,z,-erjiigcrabteilungFigure I.—German designations of Stf Offs and Sets ilt the higher cchelom.

OI1. The highest echelon of the High Command framework now 6. Organic army group troops are-—besi~les the army croupconsists of 12 army groups. signal regiment—various staffs and units dealing with adminis- y2. Each army group has two to four armies. There are three trative and operational matters within its territory, including theo.types of armies: ordinary armies, Panzer armies, and one para- trat area. Organic army troops are—-besides the army signalchute army.reararea.—various police units,troopssupply staffs, a field post office3. Each army has two to seven corps. There are six types ofregiment a propaganda company. units,0rsupplyganic corps troops afieldare-—besidesthe corps signal batalion—acompany. police detachmrnt, a supply staff. Rcorp^: Infantry; Mountain, Panccr; Parachute; Corps Commands,th g corpssign a map-printing unit,detachmrnt,a medical company, a veerandReserve.idg e column, a field post oficeunit, and various other services.4. Each corps has two to seven divisions. 7. ompany, troops vary according to mission. (For the types5. For the different type of divisions see charts, Section V. of GIIQ units sec Sections VI and VII.)Figure 2.—Over-all field or.o r gahation.

I MARCH 1945quarters of the Army High Command virtuallyhas been merged with that of the Armed ForcesHigh Command. The functions of the two, however,have remained distinct, and there has beenno personal union except at the top. Keitel actsas Hitler's deputy in the latter's capacity as Commander-in-chiefof the Army as well as in hiscapacity as Supreme Commander of the ArmedForces.For the organization of the Armed ForcesHigh Command see Figure 4, Chapter 1.For the organization of the Army High Commandsee Figure 5, Chapter 1.The Fiilzverl~auptquarticr is frequently locatedin special trains. It is at all times well protectedagainst air or land attacks by crack SS units.In addition to those the following two units ofthe elite army motorized division, the GrossdeutschlandPatloev Grefladier Division, have beentemporarily charged with that protection andwere therefore awarded the honor of including"The Fiihrer" in their unit designation. Theseunits are:The Pi&rev Escort Brigade, which consists ofthree infantry battalions, one artillery battalion,one tank regiment (including one battalion ofPz. Kpfw.IV and one battalion of assault guns),and one engineer company;The Fiihrcr Grenadier Brigade which consistsof:Two infantry battalions (one motorized and onearmored) ; one battalion of self-propelled artillery; one assault gun company; one Panther tankbattalion.Section III. ORGANIZATION OFHIGHER HEADQUARTERSThe headquarters of all German divisions,corps, armies, and army groups consist of commandstaffs (Ko-tmaandobehiirden) which are organizedin a uniform manner. Corps and higherstaffs are known as senior command staffs(hb’here Kommasadobehb’rden). They are headedby a chief of staff, whereas in divisions the firstUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451General Staff officer in charge of operations issimultaneously head of the staff.The sections of these statis are numbered withRoman numerals and letters. Similar to the CUStomin the U. S. Army, the numbers representthe sections as well as the men in charge of them.Originally the positions of I-a, I-b, I-c and I-dwere all reserved for officers of the German GeneralStaff Corps, but in 1944 the I-c at divisionand I-d at army and army group were frequentlyidentified as not being General Staff officers.Figure 3 shows in numerical order the designationsof the staff officers and sections, and Figure4 shows the same staff officers and sections asthey function operationally.. The headquarters of an army group is organizedsimilarly to that of an army, but the ranksof the officers holding corresponding positions arehigher.The headquarters of a corps also is organizedsimilarly to that of an army; however, the specialistofficers more frequently take command inthe field of all the units of their arm whetherorganic or attached.The headquarters of divisions also are organizedsimilarly with most of the specialist officersbeing simultaneously in command of the units oftheir arms, e.g. the commanding officer of thedivision artillery regiment (Avtilleriefiilzrer-ArfE)is also the chief artillery officer on the specialiststaff of the division commander. When GeneralHeadquarters artillery units are attached to thedivision this Arfii usually is subordinated to aspecial artillery commander known as Artilleriekomnzandeurwhose small special staff is supplementedin action by the organic staff of the divisionartillery regiment.While some of the designations of staff officersand sections remain unchanged in all echelons ofhigher headquarters (as the U. S. designationsdo) several of these titles vary in accordance withthe rank and echelon in which they are functioning.It should be noted that the main channel ofsupplies flows from the Zone of the Interior viaarmy to division, while the army group and thecorps are primarily tactical headquarters.

IMARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45I* I• VI XolernenisI6 "P oJS•secoecI "23•i 4o ,_ S .E— o •§Q..IIuISIs i 11> •? 1 T o 5.> isILf S(Misc)wu«t5(/)w> 34 5u C uEcoO-53IJuUJ1o S O"aa| 5 Sla!OnS _£ O Oo?UJSju

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I“NCLASS’F’EDi0 O X1ao 0E< —iTJC o ~o1aa.O• = •si — oaui=*> a_ci Sz0aXwi o'ii! ii 08c

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Section IV.PRINCIPLES AND TRENDSIN UNIT ORGANIZATION AND EQUIPMENTThe German Army, like the U. S. Army, *believesin uniform organization for standard unitsup to and including companies, troops, and batteries.These either are combined as componentsof battalions, regiments, and divisions, or temporarilygrouped in varying combinations as componentsof task forces or combat groups. Eachstandard unit of company size has a table of organizationand table of equipment number designatingits particular type, and each smaller unitadds a letter to that number designating its placewithin that standard unit. The following figuresshowing the organization, strength, and equipmentof various German units are based on these tablesof organization and equipment, but in the field thestrength of any unit will vary in accordance withits specific mission and local conditions. However,even in the greatest deviation from thetables of organization and equipment, the basicpattern still will be clearly recognizable.As shown in Figure 2 in Section I, the GermanArmy in the field is organized into armygroups, armies, corps, and divisions. Divisionsare the largest units in the German Army knownto have a prescribed organization, and those divisionswhich function as tactical units are normallythe smallest formations which include units ofvarious arms and services resulting in operationalself-sufficiency.General Headquarters, army, and corps troopsare being allotted temporarily to lower echelonsin a flexible manner, in accordance with operationalplans or local tactical necessities.From the outbreak of the War until the summerof 1943, comparatively only minor changesoccurred in the tables of organization of mosttypes of German divisions. The average divisionaltable of organization strength for thatperiod was about 15,000 to 17,000 and with thenormally attached troops it usually reached about20,000. From the summer of 1943 until now,however, several series of new tables of organizationand equipment have been issued for almostall types of divisions showing revolutionarychanges in their strength and equipment. In allthese reorganizations the trend is clearly towardsan economizing of manpower and a simultaneousincrease in firepower. This is being accomplishedby a careful distribution of large numbersof automatic small arms, by lowering the numberof mortars, antitank guns, and tanks, but at thesame time increasing potentially their calibers andweights. These changes resulted in the loweringof the table of organization strength of the averageGerman division to approximately 11,000 to13,000 in January 1945 and further drastic actionin that direction may be expected. The varioustypes of German Army, SS, and Air Force divisionsare shown in the following Section V, whiletheir components and the general headquarterstroops are listed in Sections \‘I and VII.Section V.I. Comparative ChartsDIVISIONSThe main types of German divisions, their Germandesignations, and strengths are listed in thefirst two columns of Figure 5. The remainingcolumns on the upper part of that chart showthe main components for the first 13 types ofdivisions. Figure 6 shows the type distributionof weapons and equipment in the first 13 typesof divisions mentioned above.The following paragraphs of this section coverthe more important types of German divisionsand Sections 1’1 and 1’11 include the componentsof these divisions as well as General Headquarterstroops listed together in accordance with their armor service. These sections cover in great detailthe three most numerous types of German divisions:the Infantry Division, 1944 Type; theVolks Grenadier Division; and the Armored Division,as well as the other types of divisions withtheir most important components only.Most of this information is based on factualevidence, and wherever such was not availablethe best possible estimates have been made. Thisrefers particularly to the strength figures of thedivision staffs controlling various units (lowerpart of Figure 5), as such staffs may be temporarilyin charge of much smaller or muchlarger numbers of men in accordance with tacticaland local conditions.II—7

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451DIVISIONSCOMPONESTSTYPES OF DIVISIONSPersonnel H q Re n SigInfInfantry Division, Old Type.....................(Infanteriedivision) (3 Inf Regts of 3 Bns each)Infantry Division, 1944 Type ’ ....................(Infanteriediuision n.A. later Kriegselat 44)(3 Inf Regts of 2 Bns each)Infantry Division, Two Regiment Type..............(Infanterzedinision) (2 Inf Regts of 3 Bns each)T 'oiks Grenadier Division(I’olksgrenadierdivision) (3 Inf Regts of 2 Bns each)SS Infantry Division(55’ Grenadierdivision) (3 SS Inf Regts of 2 Bns each)Army Mountain Division(Gebirgsdivision) (2 Mt Inf Regts of 3 Bns each)Army Light Division(Jiigerdivision) (2 Light Inf Regts of 3 Bns each)SS Mountain Division(5’S Gebirgsdivision) (2 Mt Inf Regts of 4 Bns each)Army Motorized Division(Panzergrenadierdiuision) (2 Mt Inf Regts of 3 Bns each)SS Motorized Division(SS Panzergrenadierdivision) (2 SS Mtz Inf Regts of 3 Bns each1Army Armored Division(Pnnzn dioision) (2 Pz. Gren. Regts of 2 Bns each)SS Armored Division(SS-Panzerdivision) (2 Pz. Gren. Regts of 3 Bns each)Air Force Parachute Division(I.‘alZschirmjiigerdivision) (3 Prcht R Regts of 3 Bns each)Air Force Field DivisionLlcff?i,a~enfelddiuision) (3 Inf Regts of 2 Bns each)Cavalry Division(Knualleuiedzuision) (4 Cav Regts of 2 Bns each)Line of Communication Division(Sicherungsdivision)Coast Defense Division(k’iinstenunteidigungsdioision)Assault Division(Sturmdivision)Frontier Guard Division(Grens?e,achdiuision)Special Administrative Division Staff(Divisionskommando z.6.a.)Replacement Division Staff(Div.Nr...)Reserve Division(Reservedivision)Field Training Division(Feldausbildungsdivision)Non-Motorized Air Force Antiaircraft D i v i s i o n .(Flakdiuision) (oevZegefiihi

MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45IDIVISIONSCOMPONENTSInf Inf ArtyArmd A A Projectors ATEngrSrrvInf Regt Inf Regt Arty Regt— — — AT BnFklgr nnDiv ScrvInf Regt Inf Regt Arty Regt- — .\T BnEngr BnDiv ServInf Regt — Arty RegtAA co .\T (10Engr BnDiv SewInf Regt Inf Rrgt Arty Regt— — .\T BnEngr BnSup Regt.SS Inf Regt S’S Inf Regt SS Arty Regt— SS .\A Hn .‘S :4T Bn.hS Engr BnDiv SewMt Inf Regt — hit Arty Rcgt- — - .\T BnMt Iingr nnDiv ServLight Inf Regt — Arty Regt- - - \ T IlnEngr HnDiv ServSS Mt InfSS Mt .2rtyRegtRegthftz Inf Regt — Armd ArtyRegts s Pz. Gren. — SS Armd ArtyRegtRegtPz. Gren. RegtArmd ArtyRegts s I’-. Crun. — —RcgtPrcht Rifle Prcht Rifle Prcht ArtyRegt Regt Regt.S.S Tk or As s s A.\ Bn SS AT Bnsault Gun COTk or AssauIt A.4 Bn — AT BnGun BnSS Tk Bn SS A A Bn S’S ,\T Bn or .\ssault(Gun BnTk Regt AA Bn — .\T BnSS Tk Regt SS A.4 Bn SS Rkt Pro .S AT or AsjectorI%n sault (Gun I l— Prcht AA Bn Prcht Hv Pi-cht AT Hnhlort H”Figure 5. (Conlimed)SS hit EngrBnrrnd Engr BnSS Yr\rmd EngrBn.\rmd Engr Bn.S.S ‘\rmd EngrnnPrcht EngrnnDiv SewDiv ServDiv ServDiv ServDiv SetvDiv ServII—9

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451DIVISIONSWeapons and equipment (type distribution in the main types of divisions listedunder paragraph 1.)TYPES OF DIVISIOSSCbns0lorts1 i chcDoHEc-i CE0 sC "*?^ ^ c.-r OGa1-1 X CO «MGsfinUILU/20-1Infantry Division, Old Type......... 15500 1100 700 527 116 58 90 20 11Infantry Division, 1941 Type........ 9069 1981 1503 566 90 48 28 108 : 20 20Infantry Division, Two Regiment Type . 497 52 42 24 16 16Volks Grenadier IXvision ............ 6054 1536 2064 369 54 , 42 24 216 12Army Mountain IXvision ........... 485 84 48 24 72 20 12Army hlotorized I)ivision ........... 9455 3222 1441 1019 82 52 24 26 i5 38IArmy Armored IXvision ............ 9186 3317 1543 1157 64 46 16 68 74 38 3. S Armored Division............... 11513 4064 2050 1465 100 58 24 — i 4 18 114 3s 3Air Force Parachute Division. 9689 3810 3026 I 930 80 125 i 63 250 20 33SS Infantry Division—Organized and quipped similarly to the Infantry Division 1944 Type, INNc\-cr wit11 an additionalAntiaircraft Battalion and slightly stronger components.Army Light Division—Organized and equipped similarly to the Army Mountain I)ivisiou wit11 sliglltly more motorization.SS Mountain I~ivision—Orgatliz~(l similarly to the Army Mountain Division, however \vith two mot-e MountainInfantry Battalions. one A\ntiaircraft Battalion and a Tank or Assault Gun Company.55 1 Motorized l)ivisioll—-Organized similarly to the Army Motorized Division, ho\\ever Nitll additional .\ntiaircraftCompanies and an Artillery Observation Battery.Figure 6.11—40

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDDIVISIONSWeapons and equipment (type distribution in the main types of divisions listedunder paragraph 1.)37-mm AA/AT Guns75-mm AT Gur(Mtr-Dr)75-mm ATGuns (SP)75-mm Tk Gun(Long)75-mm Tk Gun(Superlong)88-mm AA/ATGuns75-mmInf-Hows75-mm Inf-Hows (SP)150-mmInf-Hows150-mm Inf-Hows (SP)75-mm Guns105-mm Gun/Hows105-mm Gun/Hows (SP)150-mm Hows150-mm HowsPz. Kpfw. IV'sMtrVehiclesMtrelsH-DrVehiclesX75 20 6 36 12 042 452 11.73 537521 14 18 6 36 12 615 16s 1466 466220 12 12 4 24 54.1 218 726 27349 9 14 38 13 24 12 426 119 1142 30323 24 14 4 24 12 12 500 200 1000 500030 44 48 8 12 12 12 12 6 48 26.37 4698 12 47 52 51 8 12 12 12 12 12 6 52 52 2685 4808 12 69 64 62 12 24 12 12 12 12 6 64 62 3329 530and12 HvGuns21 14 12 20 24 12 2141 389Figure 6. (Co&wed)II—II

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-4512. Infantry DivisionsDespite the important role which has been playedby specialized branches of the German Army,the infantry has been and remains today the foundationfor most Germa’n operations.a. INFANTRY DIVISION, OLD TYPE (Infant&edivision)(THREE REGIMENTS OF THREE BATTALIONS EACH) . Contrary to the Americanconception of a completely motorized infantrydivision, the German infantry divisions mostlyhave relied on horse-drawn vehicles for theirtransportation. In recent reorganizations the proportionof motorization in these types of divisionshas decreased even more. Except for thereorganization of the infantry platoon from threeto four squads after the Polish campaign in 1939,and the temporary increase in the number ofhorses in the divisions employed in Russia from1941 to 1943, the German three-regiment, ninebattaliondivision remained unchanged for allpractical purposes tintil the fall of 1943. Thistype of division probably will not be encounteredany more, . however, as it has been the basic typeof German infantry division for a period of about4 years, it is shown in Figures 7 and 8 and designatedfor explanatory purposes as the InfantryDivision, Old Type.b. INFANTRY DIVISION, 1944 TYPE (Infanteriedivision.n.A later Kriegestat 44) (THREE REGIMENTS OF Two BATTALIONS EACH). In October1943 the Germans reorganized radically their infantrydivisions in reducing the infantry regimentsfrom three to two battalions, and the otherdivisional components were revised accordingly.In the remaining six infantry battalions the numberof squads per rifle platoon was reduced fromfour to three, but without having much effect onthe fire power of the division since the caliber ofthe mortars and antitank guns has been increased,and the number of machine guns kept unchanged.This type of division was designated InfantryDivision, New Type (Infu&eriedivision n.A.).This type of infantry division will not be discussedfurther here, as it soon was designatedthe Infantry Division, 1944 Type (InfanteriedivisiolzKricgcstat 44). This redesignation tookplace in May 1944 after the following additionaleconomies were put into effect. The strength ofthe squad was reduced from ten to nine, the numberof light machine guns per rifle company from16 to 13, and the strength of the trains onall levels was reduced sharply. Figures 9 andII—l210 show the Infantry Division, 1944 Type,but newest regulations point towards a furtherreduction of the components of that type of divisionby approximately 10 per cent and the redesignationof the thus reorganized division asInfantry Division, Type 1945 (~rlfajlteriedivisioIls45). It has just been learned that all Germaninfantry divisions are to be reorganized on thebasis of the Infantry Division, Type 45, and thatthe organization and strength of that division arealmost identical with those of the Volks GrenadierDivision. (See subparagraph d below and SectionVI, paragraph 2, subparagraph a (S).)c. INFANTRY DIVISION, TWO REGIMENT TYPE(Infunteriediz~ision) (Two REGIMENTS OF THREEBATTALIONS EACH) . Independent of the variousstages of organization of the th e regimentinfantry divisions, the Germans have formed,since the spring of 1941, a number of two-regiment,six-battalion, infantry divisions with weakercomponents and over-all reduced strength andfire power. The number of this type of divisionsrecently has been reduced by the reorganizationof several into three-regiment divisions. Werefed to this type of division as Infantry Division,Two-Regiment Type.d. Yolks Grenadier DIVISION (Volksgrenadierdivision)(THREE REGIMENTS OF TWO BATTALIONS EACH) . In September 1944, after HeinrichHimmler, the Chief of the SS, the Policeand the Minister of the Interior had become alsothe Chief of Army Equipment and Commanderof the Replacement Training Army, a new typeof infantry division, the "Peoples Infantry Division"(Volks Grenadier Division) was created.The political significance of this type of divisionlies in designating it: "the Peoples," and thusstressing the emergency of the Fatherland. Asthe members of the Volks Grenadier Division arereported to be interchangeable with the membersof the SS divisions, it is believed that throughtheir creation the influence of the -S-S" on the Armyhas been strengthened. To increase the Espritde Corps of its members, supporting GeneralHeadquarters units also have been designatedVolks Artillery Corps, Yolks Engineer Brigades,and Yolks Rocket Projector Brigades, all ofwhich will be discussed in Section VII.From the organization point of view, the significanceof the Volks Grenadier Division lies inits decrease of personnel and increase of smallautomatic weapons, particularly submachine guns.

INFANTRY DIVISION 2OLD TYPETOoIDIV HO SIG BN INF REGT DIV SERVMAP REPRO SECBN HOREGTLHOREGTLHOREGTLHOREGTLHQBN HQ BN HO DIVSUPMP DETCOMPLATTP COREGTLHQ COREGTLHO COREGTLHO COREGTLHO BTRYCOMPLATENGR CO(PARTLYMTZ)RAD COLIGHTARTY BNAT COENGR CO(PARTLYMTZIMEDUNITSLIGHTSIG CLM— INF BN INF BNLIGHTARTY BNHV COIMTZ)VET COHV WPNTRINF BNINF BNLIGHTARTY BNAT COBR CLM(MTZ)FLD POSTOFFICELIGHTRCN CLM13TH (INFHOWI CO13TH (INFHOW) CO13TH (INFHOWI COMEDIUMARTY BNLIGHTENGR CLM5COCO14TH (AT)CO14TH IAT)CO14TH (AT)COLIGHTINF CLMLIGHTINF CLMLIGHTINF CLMFigure 7.4 nfantry Division, Old Type.mO

MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451aUNIT^ S EK Em Ez E ; E ; ES gB .§ IDiv Hq . 158 2 17 31Rcn Bn 625 625 8 3 3 4 •>3 45 3 3 213Sig Bn 474 17 M 103 7 52Inf Regt 3 250 m 3 V 123 18 6 2 47 T\ 210 683Inf Regt 3,250 12; 3 36 27 12 123 6 2 47 7i 210 683Inf Regt 3,250 12: 3 36 123 12 123 6 2 27 123 210 683Arty Regt2 500 3232 4 840 105 229 2,274AT Bn50 IS IF%45 114Engr Bnx4.3 x4 920 44 87 19 52Div Serv 2.300 3C0 8 88 253 245 735Total ’ .. .. 17.200 52/7 116 90 17. 11 84 58 20 6 36 4 8 20 3 452 942 1,133 5,3751 A Rep1 Bn may be added to any Inf Div.Figwe 8.—Iflfantry Division, Old Type, fotnl strellgtk lf,200.00 00Also company and battalion trains have beenmerged into battalion supply platoons, thus freeingthe company commander from all duties otherthan operational and facilitating a more even distributionof all types of supplies with less personnel.Bazookas replace all antitank guns in theinfantry regiments; the artillery regiment is organizedin batteries of six guns instead of four,with one battalion of eighteen 75-mm guns replacinga normal battalion of twelve 105mmgun/howitzers. An additional new feature is theformation of a divisional supply regiment whichcombines all the divisional syrvicrs except thrmilitary police detachment which has been assignedto the division headquarters. This typeof division is shown on the Figures 14 and 15 asFolks Grenadier Division.e. S S INFANTRY DIVISION (SS Grmadirrdivisio~zc~~)(THREE SS REGIMENTS OF TWO BATTACIONS EACH) . The great majority of Germaninfantry divisions are army infantry divisions.However, there are also scLvcra1 SS infantrydivisions (SS-Gretzadier di?isioflen) which havebeen formed by the armed SS (WaffrwSS).This type of division is organized similarly to theInfantry Division, 1944 Type, but it has slightlystronger components and inclutlt3 an organic antiaircraftbattalion.IL—14

IGERMAN INFANTRY DIVISION T1944 TYPE 11iiDIV HOIFUS BNISIG BNIINF REGT1INF REGT1INF REGT1ARTYREGT1IAT BN1ENGR BN1IDIV SERV1- MAP REPRO SECBN HO — BN HO — REGTl HQ — REGTL HO REGTL HQ REGTL HQ BN HQ — BN HQ DIV SUPMP DETR COIBCL)— TP CO—REGTLHQ CO—REGTLHO COUGTLHQ COREGTLHQ BTRYBN HQCO—ENGR COWORKSHOPCOiIR CORAD CO—INF BN—INF BNINF BNLIGHTARTY BNAT COIMTR-DR)—ENGR COADM1R COHV WPNCOSUPPLAT— INF BNINF HOWCOAT COINF BNINF HOWCOAT COINF BNINF HOWHOWAT CO—UGHTARTY BNLIGHTARTY BNMEDIUMARTY BNAT COISP)AA COISP)—ENGR COIBCL)MEDUNITSVET COFLD POSTOFFICECOHOW-nmOFigwre P.—Infantry Divis@n, 1944 Type.3i

2.- s i si i I s-? ft !i 1 il IT ?! siil II I! I ai iDiv Hq 34 87 106 121 92 12 5 32 21 1Fiis B:i IS 113 580 477 122 127 43 12 0 4 8 5 102 57 165Sig Bn 16 80 283 326 18 35 11 76 13 14 2 54Inf Regt 48 316 1,644 1,373 350 332 107 24 U I I ! 3 8 2 45 20 242 130 495Inf Regt 48 316 1,644 1,373 350 332 107 24 12 8 36 3 6 2 45 20 242 130 495Inf Regt 48 316 1,644 1,373 3.50 332 107 24 12 8 36 3 6 2 45 20 242 130 495Arty Regt” 85 460 1.906 2.065 307 164 69 36 12 7 441 34 2,318AT Bn 17 123 344 318 123 81 29 " 12 12 14 113 20 1Engr Rn 18 92 510 432 136 71 31 6 6 20 17 19 52 25 97Div. Serv. ’ .._._.._... 58 219 1,182 1,181 133 17 57 204 23 131 2!J 573Total _._._. 38P 2,122 9,843 9,069 1,981 1,503 566 90 48 28 108 20 13 21 14 13 6 36 12 615 16S 1,466 551 4,656I A Fld Rep1 Bn with a C Sch may be added to any Inf Div.3 The Arty Regt may be reduced m srxne Die, by 39 NCOs, 399 Pvts, 545 Hs, three 105.mm Gun/Hoas, three 150.mm HOWS, andother equipment.3 Including 71 officials.Figure IO.—Infantry Division, 1944 Type, total strengthcr>3COGOUNIT„ o . 6- -S S 6 |O >5 PM Ku PH tn J S>I hv H(i 33 ’ 61 92 9: 81 7 2 25 21Map Repro SC: ....... 1 7 7 1 2MP Dot 1- 25 7 19 10 5 3 5Total 34" 87 106 121 92 12 5 32 211 Including 10 officials.Figure Il.—Division Headquarters, Infantry Division, 1944 Type, tofal strcngtlz 227.

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30451UNCLASSIFIEDINFANTRY DIVISIONEXPERIMENTAL TYPE|11FUS COARTYAA A IOIV HQSIG BN INF REGT INF REGTENGR BNOIV SEBVIBCLIREGTBN1 1 1 1 1 1 J 1 1MAP REPRO SECCO HQBN HOHQHQBN HOD VS ;pMP DET R PLAT - TP COREGUHO COREGUHO COIEGTLHO BTRY —AT c oIMT”.DR,_ENGR COWORKSHOPc oRR PLATLIGHTSIG CLMINF BN INF BN -LIGHTARTY 8N —MEDUNITSBI-MMMORT SEC —INF BN — INF BN8B-MM ATGUN BN- VET COFLAMETHROWERSECINF HOWCO —INF HOWCOFLO POSTOFFICE— AT CO i — AT COLIGHTINF CLM1—LIGHTINF CLMFigure 12.~Infantry Division, ?‘svo-Regiment Type.UNIT" 3 S 3 % % *3 a a« |- J BS BS e3 E* p fj| I J J£ S a zs, â EP 8< \z< %< zs •?£, So %> a a> wDiv Hq 150 2 38 15Fiis Co . .... 123 16 2 2 5 3 5 20Sig Bn 402 11 85 20 6 25Inf . .......... 2,645 178 24 18 12 3 6 2 51 44 244 631Inf Regt 2,645 178 24 1s 12 3 6 2 51 44 244 631Arty Regt 1,755 43 12 21 52 28 106 968AA/AT Bn 350 17 12 14 88 24Engr Bn ......... . . 4 4 11 3 7 35 6sDiv Serv ............ 1,395 30 159 33 86 391Total .. 9,859 497 52 42 24 16 12 20 12 12 4 21 513 218 726 2,734A Fld Rep1 Bn with a C Sch may be added to any Inf Div.Figure 13.—Infantry Division, Two-Regiment Type, total strength 9,859.IL—17

23DOVOLKSGRENADIER j ftDIVISION 1DIV HQ1FUSCO 1 IBCL)ISIGBNIINF REGT(BCDIINFREGT1INFREGT1ARTYREGT1AT BNENGRRN1SUP REGTMAP RE-PRO SEC—CO HQ—BN HQ—REGTLHaREGTlHa—REGTLHa—REGTLHaBN HQ—BN HODIV SUPMP DE1SUB-MGPLAT—TP COREGTLHQ COREGTLHO CO—REGTLHQ CO—REGTLHO BTRYBN HQCOENGR COIBCL)ORD COSUB-MGPLAT—RAD CO—INF BNIBCL)INF BN—INF BN—7S-MMGUN BNAT COIMTR-DR)ENGR COIBCL)—MAINTPLATIt PUTSUP PLATINF BN —INF BN—INF BN105-MMGUN/HOWHV WPN INF HOW INF HOWINF HOW—105-MM AA COMED——PLAT CO CO CO GUN/HOW ISP) UNITSBNINF HOW BAZOOKA — BAZOOKA—BAZOOKA150-MMSEC CO CO CO HOW BNAT COISP)—ADMUNCLASSIF— VET CO rn1 May b . r.plor.d by a Fiis.Rn.1FID POSTOFFICEFigure 14.—Yolks Grenadier Division.TM-E

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-4?!UNCLASSIFIEDspa00 Oo^ oSHrH O fV]•>CTHsp-HK-UK(dS) sun 0XV UJUI-SZa--ni\[) sun OXV uira-iv(as) sun ossmjoozegsuojvIUUJ-OZISJJOJ\Jluiu-xg1 ^CM00 00CM1^.•J-i

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45IUNIT ;| - | = %•=. EX g »2 d 4 h 1 il h is IJ-S s-s . ^ ss s i&_ g * k §i i & il II ;yDiv . ........ 195 2Mt Ren Bn 650 38 6 6 3bit Rcn Bn ..... 453 11MtInf Reg Rcgt3,064 130 36 18 12 363MtInf Reg Rcgt3 064 130 36 18 12 363MtArty Re Regt ...2,230 69AT Bn ... 500 15 12 18Mt Engr Bn 900 31 6 6 20Div Serv . ... 2,000 59662-i 12 12Total 13 056 485 84 48 24 72 20 12 3 24 14 24 12 12A Fid Repl Bn with a C Sch may be added to any Mt Div.Figure 16.—Army hfozwtai~~ Division, total strength 13,0563. Mountain and Light Divisionsa. ARMY MOUNTAIN DIVISION (Gcbirgnsdi v ision) (Two MOUNTAIN INFANTRY REGIMENTSOF THREE BATTALIONS EACH.). German ArmyMountain divisions are organized and speciallyequipped for mountain warfare as wellas for warfare in difficult terrain. Their meansof transportation therefore will vary from a largenumber of pack horses and mules in higher mountainsto a fair proportion of motorization in flatcountry. The principle of decentralizing heavyweapons is particularly adapted to the relativelyindependent mountain infantry battalions whichare as administratively and tactically self-sufficientas possible. The German army mountain divisionconsists of two mountain infantry regiments witha total of six battalions; and a mountain artilleryregiment, with 75mm mountain howitzers, 10.5mm gun/howitzers, and 1SO-mm howitzers. Itsreconnaissance battalion usually uses bicycles fortransportation and is therefore highly mobile,11. ARMY LIGHT DIVISION (Jiigmdivision)(Two LIGHT INFANTRY REGIMENTS 01’ THRIXBATTALIONS EACH) . The Army Light Divisionis organized similarly to the Army Mountain Divisionbut is believed to have more motorization andless mountain equipment.c. SS MOUNTAIN DIVISION (SS Gebirgsdivision)(Two SS MOUNTAIN INFANTRY REGIMENTS OF FOUR BATTALIONS EACH) . The SSMountain Division is organized similarly to thenrmy Mountain Division, but it has strongercomponents and includes an antiaircraft battalion.The SS Mountain Infantry Regiment may have11—20in addition to three mountain infantry I)attalionsa fourth mountain infantry i)attalion or severalregimental companies.4. Motorized Divisionsa. ARAIY MOTORIZED DIVISION (Parwvgrcmdierdivision)(Two MOTORIZED INFANTRY LHXMENTS OF THREE BATTAIJONS EACH). TheArmy Motorized Division has two motorized infantryregiments of three battalions each butotherwise is organized similarly to the ArmyArmored Division except that it has a tank orassault gun battalion instead of a tank regiment.The motorized infantry battalions originally wereorganized exactly as the n&ma1 infantry battalions,except they used trucks as means of transportation.During the year 1944, however, thecomponents of the motorized infantry battalionhave been reorganized along the lines of thePanzer Grenadier battalions in armored divisions.The two infantry regiments are usually designated(InfantErierCgilllf1It-(nlot)), but in somedivisions they officially adopted the designationof Panzer Grenadier regiment.b. SS MOTORIZED DIVISION (SS-Panzergrenadierdivision)(Two SS MOTOKIZED INFANTRYREGIMENTS OF THREE BATTALIOKS EACH). TheSS Motorized Division is organized similarly tothe Army Motorized Division, except that itsinfantry regiments include additional regimentalcompanies, and the tank batalion has a greaterstrength and a larger number of tanks. The S Smotorized infantry regiments are designated SSPanzer Grenadier regiments.

GERMAN MOUNTAINDIVISIONMARCH| |•omDIV HQMT RCN MT SIG MT INF MT INF MT ARTYAT BN MT ENGR DIVBN BN REGT REGT REGT BN SERV1 1 1MAP RE- REGTL REGTL REGTLBN HQ BN HQ —PRO SECHO HQ HOBN HQ BN HQ SUPRCN CO REGTL REGTL REGTL BN HOTP CO ENGR CART WORKSHOP—(BCDHQ CO HQ CO HQ BTRY CO PLAT CORCN CORAD COMT INF MT INF 75-MM—AT COENGR COIBCL) BN BN BN fBCL1— ADM IRCN CO SUP MT INF MT INF75-MM—AT CO ENGR COMED(BCD—PLAT BN BN BN UNITSII•HV WPN MT INF MT INF 10S-MMCO BN BN BNAA CO ENGR CO — VET CO16TH (AT) — 16TH (AT) 150-MM LIGHT ENGRCO CO BN CLM (MT72GOen— MP DET rnOLIGHT MT LIGHT MT FLD POSTINF CLM INF CLM — OFFICEFigure 17.—A4m~y IfountainDvisiorz.-4mo

ItoMOTORIZED IMNZ E « GRENADIEM DIVISIONARMDRCN BNSIG BNTKBNMTZ INFREGTMTZ INFREGTARMDARMDREGTARMDENGR BNMAP REPRO SECSUPBN HOCOTPCOBN HOCOREGTL HOCOREGTL HOCOREGTl HOBTRYBN HOBTRYBN HOCOBN HOCOARMD CCO IH-TRKISUPCOGRIN. BNIMTZIGREN. BNIMTZIMIXED SPARTY BNHV AABTRY75-MM ATCO ISP)ENGR COIMTZIMEDUNITSLIGHTARMD RCNCO IH-TRKILIGHTSIG CLMGREN. BNIMTZIGSEN. BNIMTZILIGHTARTY BNHV AABTRY75-MM ATCO (SPIENGR CO(MTZIMAINTUNITSARMD RCNCO IH-TRKIGKEN. BNIMTZIG«£N. BNIMTZIMEDIUMARTY BNLIGHT AABTRY75-MM ATCO IMTRDRIENGR COIARMDICOGOHV WPNCO IH-TRKITK CO 150-MM 150-MMINF HOWINF HOWCO ISPICO ISPILIGHT AACLMBRCLMK OR- JFLDPOST OFFICESUPCO75-MMAT CO75-MMAT COFigure 18.—Army Motorized Division.oUI

I6 83 "3 .*.„. §Div Hq 32 31 78 95 44 3 2 32 8Armd Ren Bn ... 27 223 692 434 300 206 147 4 10 6 35 13 193 22Sig Bn 13 223 360 400 300 300 147 107 14Tk Bn 27 212 328 229 286 95 112 5 48 48 94 ‘18Mtz Inf Regt 85 545 2,413 1,938 789 316 201 36 112 12 112 9 6 502Mtz Inf Regt.... 85 545 2,413 1,938 789 316 201 3 13 13 13 9 6 502Armd Arty Regt. 69 365 1,215 1,217 343 203 92 9 12 12 12 6 407 31AA Bn 22 142 600 673 69 47 18 18 8 171 16AA Bn ... 20 166 327 271 142 100 47 12 31 135 17Engr Bn 24 116 733 552 245 102 96 6 6 20 3 . 171 42Div Serv 64 292 1.529 1,708 165 13 86 323 85Total 468 1 2,720 10,688 9,455 3,222 1.441 1,019 82 52 24 26 63 3 38 30 44 48 8 12 12 12 12 6 48 2,637* 4691 Including 64 officials.3 Including 64 of f icials.Figure 19.—Army Motorized Division, total strength, 13,876.00 00OOOOmI

UNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-4515. Armored Divisionsa. ARMY ARMORED DIVISION (Panzevdivisio~l(Two Panzer Grenadier REGIMENTS OF TWOBATTALIONS EACH) . Every German large-scaleattack and counterattack in this war was spearheadedby armored (Panzer) divisions. Thesethrusting attacks account for the great importancethe armored divisions play within the Germanarmed forces and for the especially welltrained personnel and newest types of weaponsand equipment in the armored division. In orderto keep the weapons and equipment in accordancewith the newest development at all times, thereorganizations within that type of division havebeen continuous since the outbreak of the warand are still continuing.In 1939 the German armored divisions whichspearheaded the attack into Poland consisted ofa ‘tank brigade of two tank regiments, a PanzerGrenadier brigade of two regiments, and thesupporting elements. The tank brigade consistedof about 400 light and medium tanks, about twothirdsof which were Pz. Kpfzu. I and II andone-third were Ps. Kpfzw. III and IV. Duringthe winter of 1940 the Germans formed additionalarmored divisions and reduced the tankcomponents of each to one rcgimcnt of approximately200 tanks. 1Vhen these divisions wentinto action in the French campaign, the bulkof the tanks were Pz. Kpf-z. III and IV. In1941 and 1942 the number of tanks per regimentwas further reduced, the Pz. k’pficl. I were withdrawn,and the Pz. Kpfw. II were used mainlyfor reconnaissance purposes. In the fall of 1943the German High Command issued a new tabIeof organization for the armored division specifyinga total number of about 200 tanks of the PZKpf~. IV and Y type exclusively. This plannedstrength, however, remained only a theory, as noarmored division encountered had more than 150tanks, and most of the divisions had approximately100 only. Early in 1944 the German HighCommand issued an order that all companies andbattalion trains in the tank regiment, in thePawer Gvenadirv regiments, and in the armoredreconnaissance battalion should be reduced instrength and merged into supply companies onthe battalion level, thus freeing the company commandersfrom all duties other than operationaland facilitating a more even distribution of alltypes of supplies with curtailed personnel. Themost important changes which occurred in theorganization of other components of the armoreddivision will be covered under the appropriatebranches of arms or services in Sections VI and1’11.While the last known tables of organizationof the army armored division still specify 17tanks for each of the four companies in the tankhattalion, current front reports indicate that anew set of tables of organization is being issuedspecifying the components as shown in Figures20-22.b. SS ARMORED DIVISION ( SS-Panserdivisiolz)(Two Panzer Grenadier REGIMENTS OF TIIREEBATTALIOXS EACH ). The S S Armored Division isorganized similarly to the r\rnly Armoretl Divisionexccljt that it has stronger components. Thetank regiment has a larger number of tanks, eachof the Panzcv Grmadirr regiments has a PtrxrvGvenadicr battalion and an antiaircraft company,the armored artillcrj regiment has one morearmored artillery battalion (1TO-mm guns or 21Ommholvitzcrs), the armorctl engineer 1)attalionusually has an additional bridge column, and thedivision inch&s a rocket projector battalion andan assault gun battalion. The divisional servicesare also proportionately stronger.In accorclance with the above, the SS ArmoredDivision may be considered the strongest type ofdivision in the German armed forces. Only theAir Force Parachute Armored Division, HermanGoering, and the Army Armored divisions,Panzer Lelir and Grossdeutschland, are believedto be of equal strength.II—24

oARMY ARMORED {PANZEJUDIVISION1 1DIV HO ARMD RCN ARMD SIG TK tPAN- PZ. GREN. PZ. GftfN. ARMD ARTY ARMD ENGR DIVDIV HOAA BNCO BN BN Zfff) REGT REGT IARMD) AT BNREGT (MTZ) REGTBNSEKV1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1MAP DE-PRO SECCO HOBN HO—BN HO—REGTl HO—REGTL HOREGTL HO— REGTl HO — BN HO— BN HO - BN HO - SUP120-MMTPREGTL HQ REGTL HQ REGTl HO REGTL HO BN HO >N HO BN HQHO CO_ADMAA PLAT — — —CO CO — CO — BTRY — BTRY —COCOCOMTRCLARMD CRAD CO 37-MM AA PZ. GREW. PZ. GREN. MIXED SP HV AA 75-MM AT ENGR CO MED1— PLATCO IH-TRKI — — PLAT — BN (ARMD) BN IMTZ1 — — BTRY —ABTY BN - IMTZI - UNITS CO ISP)11ENGR COPZ CHEN UGHT LIGHT PZ. KPFW. PZ. GREN. PZ. CHIN. LIGHT HV AA 75-MM ATMAINTARMD RCN CO ISP)' UNITSCO IH-TRKIcrHV MG ARMD RCN PZ. KPFW. HV INF HOW HV INF HOW MEDIUM LIGHT AA 75-MM AT ENGR COPLAT CO IH-TRK) — IV BN — CO (SP) CO ISP) — ARTY BN — BTRY — CO IMTR-DRI - IARMDI —TNHV WPN TK ENGR CO ENGR COCO IH-TRKI MAINT (H-TRKI L_ LIGHT AA SUP FID—CLM— COBD — POST OFFICE—nCO —IH-TRK)CLMK OR JSUP SUP SUPCOCO CO—MP DETCLASSfnoFigure 20.—ArmyL4r~~roved Division.roen

i•"•HK^ H >^ H £ •*UNIT „ feoi | § ,3 S Ej |» »S E, E J ^ E^ 4 E " EDiv Ha ............ 32 31 78 95 44 3 3 8Div Hi Co 3 37 179 138 65 19 16 2 2 4 3 31 28Armd Rcn Bn .... 27 223 692 434 300 206 147 4 10 6 35 13 199 22Armd Sig Bn .. 16 103 396 44l 69 51 35 U4 14Tk (I%) Rcgt .... 69 553 1,039 822 704 228 252 6 8 52 51 52 51 313 53Pz Gren. Regt. (Armd) 64 436 1,794 1,373 595 336 221 26 l-i 8 24 25 12 6 406 81_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ __ _ _ ______ g lg 12380 83Armd Arty X c @.. 69 365 1,215 i.217 313 203 92 9 12 12 12 6 407 31AA Bn 22 142 600 673 69 17 18 1s 171 1sAT Bn '. 20 166 327 271 142 100 47 12 31 135 17Armd Eng Bn ... 24 118 743 562 247 102 96 6 6 20 3 3 174 42Div Serv .._.. 64 292 1,529 1,708 165 13 86 323 86Total 471 * 2.876 10.379 9,186 3,317 1,543 1,157 64 46 16 68 71 38 3 8 12 47 52 51 8 12 12 12 12 12 6 52 51 2,685 2 4801 Including 69 oflicials.2 Including 357 Armd vehicles.Figure 21.-—Army Armored Division, total strength 13,725...... Osu ^S~ M *S8«~=-li-sI^-ios >I-?sl»|§o y, — «u th m j K oo s ô 3Armed Div H( I. 12’ . GJ 30 71 86 4.3 3 30 8Map Repro SW 1 7 7 1 2Div Hq Co 3 37 1iY 138 65 19 16 2 2 4 138 138Total 35 l 68 257 231 109 22 16 2 2 4 63 2311 Including ten officiala.COCO—IFigure 22.—Division Heudqnarters, .4my Armored Division, total strength 360.

a AIMOflCO VAMIltt DIVISION-1n. GUM.REGT1•EGH HO —I IfCTL VIWUH Q-n.GUN.KKAIMOI -\ as— I•OCKETPROJECTOR tTRY*Z. GUN.KAfUCHTAIMD ICNCO IH-TIKlAIMO ICHCO IH-tlKI--n. S«H.IN tMTZ)n. aim.•NIMTZ)ROCKETPROJECTOR ITRV_M I DE,HV MP HOWCO isn-3COFigure 23.~SS Armored Division.L

IUNIT. o „ fe» -i S 3 § |a f« g|6|| 1-I --Pis'flit 1^11 g. U fDiv Hq ......... 32 31 78 95 4. 3 32 8Div Hq Co 3 37 179 138 65 19 16 2 2 4 3 31 28Armd Rcn Bn .... 27 223 692 434 300 206 147 4 10 6 35 13 193 22Armd Sig Bn.... 16 103 396 444 69 51 35 114 14Tk (P a ) Regt... 70 614 1,087 816 719 245 296 6 8 64 62 64 62 313 53Pz. Gren. Regt.... 89 598 2,555 1,957. 852 443 224 38 20 12 24 43 12 6 . 527 8SPz. Gwn. Regt.... 89 598 2,555 1,957 852 443 284 38 20 12 21 43 12 6 527 88Armd Arty Regt.. 89 473 1,605 1,636 409 255 109 12 ' I 12 12 12 6 12 534 40AA Bn 22 148 654 729 73 47 22 j , ,' IS 12 181 16Bn Rkt Projector. 14 1Oi 358 380 40 53 15 18 ~ 107 8Assault Gun Bn... 15 111 218 294 80 70 22 22 100 11AT Bn 20 166 327 271 l-l2 100 47 12 31 135 100 Ej;Armd Engr Bn ._ . 26 132 826 654 254 102 99 6 6 20 33 ~ 212 52 o

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDFigure 25.—Air Force Parachute Division.6. Air Force Parachute Division (Fallschirmjagerdivision)(THREE PARACHUTE RIFLE REGIMENTS OF THREE BATTALIONS EACH)AS the abovementioned •S'.S Armored Divisionmay be considered the strongest type of divisionin the German armed forces, the German AirForce Parachute Division is believed to be thestrongest type of the various infantry divisions.While in the course of this war small Germanparachute units have been employed successfullyas airborne troops in various campaigns, in theWest, in the Balkans, in Crete and Sicily, onegenerally may consider the present Air ForceParachute divisions as especially carefully selected,well trained, and equipped crack infantrydivisions, with only a small percentage of theirpersonnel having received training as parachutistsin the American sense of the word. The significantorganizational difference between the parachutedivision and the army infantry divisionis that each of the three parachute rifle regimentshas three battalions and a larger allotmentof machine guns than the corresponding armyunits. The parachute artillery regiment has onlythree battalions (two light and one medium),but the division includes a parachute antiaircraftbattalion and a parachute 120-mm mortar battalion.7. Air Force Field Division (Luftwaffenfelddivision(THREE INFANTRY REGIMENTS OF TWOBATTALIONS EACH)The Air Force Field Divisions were formed inthe later part of 1942 from surplus personnelof the antiaircraft artillery, the air signal troops,the ground crews of the flying troops, and administrativeunits, as well as a certain numberof recruits and foreigners. Most of these divisionswere sent to the Russian front in the winterof 1942-1943 but some also were encounteredon the Italian front and in France. The organizationof this type of division varied, but it isbelieved that the basic pattern was originally atwo-regiment, three-battalion division, with normalsupporting units and an additional antiaircraftbattalion. In the fall of 1943 the AirForce Field divisions were absorbed by the Army.Many of them had suffered heavy losses andwere disbanded in 1943 and 1944, and the remainingfew were reorganized along the linesof the Infantry Division, 1944 Type.8. Cavalry Division (Kavalluriedivision) (FOURCAVALRY REGIMENTS OF TWO BATTALIONSEACH)The only armv cavalry division identified isthe Cossack Division which consists of Don,Kuban, and Terck Cossacks; some German officers.and noncommissioned officers; and possiblyelements of other nationalities.The Waff~?~-SS is believed to have two cavalrytalion.All three of these cavalry divisions are organizedsimilarly and consist of two cavalrybrigades of two regiments each, a weak artilleryregiment, a reconnaissance battalion, a signal bat-.11-29

II MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451\ O *—< CO CO CO COO\ 00 Mass co »—( r-i i-* Tf lilCO CO POSMOHmu-0541SRNOHturn-so Isung"" - 88(dS) sunXV uiiu-XVtdS) sunoW ""-02 §If) sun f)WSE5|OOZEg tn to 10ouiui-jgs•^S OIVA H2S 8930to.‘3% LTJ IT) LO F^

I MARCH 1945talion, an engineer battalion, and the divisionalservices.9. Line of Communication Division (Sicherungsdivision)Designed for mopping-up duties in the rearareas, such a division may consist of two reinforcedregiments or of a number of independentbattalions.10. Coast Defense Division (Ktlstenverteidigungsdivision)This consists of a division staff controlling fortressbattalions and coast artillery units in acoastal sector.I I. Assault Division (Sturmdivision)This is an honorary title for some divisions withreduced infantry personnel and a concentrationof heavy firepower and automatic weapons.12. Frontier Guard Division (Grenzwachdivision)This consists of a division staff controlling certainfrontier guard units.13. Special Administrative Division Staff (Divisionskommandoz.b.V.)This consists of a division staff controllingLandesschiitse~z Battalions and General Headquarterstroops stationed in a corps area in Germany.14. Replacement Division Staff (Div. NY. . . .)This is a division staff within a corps area in Germanyto supervise the induction of personneland replacements for field units.UNCLASSIFIED15. Reserve Division (Resevvedivision)This controls reserve units for training, occupation,and defensive duties. This type of divisionis organized similarly to field infantry divisions;it has a preponderance of infantry, engineers,and static artillery, but the other elements arebelieved to be very much under strength. Inspite of that, several reserve divisions have beenredesignated combat divisions (Kampfdivisionen)and went into action on short notice.16. Field Training Division (Feldatlsbildzcngsdivision)This co’ntrols field training regiments in the rearof the Eastern Front. Is believed to be organizedsimilarly to the Reserve Division and thereforemay be encountered in the field.17. Antiaircraft Division (Flakdivision)Under the German system, antiaircraft defenseis in the main the responsibility of the German.4ir Force, although the German Army also hasa large number of antiaircraft units of its own.While the composition and equipment of antiaircraftbatteries generally are standardized, theformation of these into battalions, regiments, divisions,or units of equivalent size, however, issubject to more variations than in any other ofthe German arms. The average non-motorized,air force, antiaircraft division, which is shownin the following figure, usually is located in theZone of the Interior. It has a large number oftrailers but very little motorization, and dependsfor mobility on separate transportation units. Aspointed out above, many other combinations ofthe units shown as divisional components may beencountered frequently.DivAirHvAAAAAAHqDef Sig BnSL RegtRegtRegtRegtUNIT.........„£2003002.0432,4482,4482,4486S21129383838< < s

DivHq1AirDefenseSig BnSLRegtANTIAIRCRAFT DIVISION INTHE ZONE OF THE INTERIORAARegtAARegtAARegtAirMed UnitDivServMARCH 19451Regtl Hq SLBn SLBn SLBn Regtl Hq Bar BinBnlightAA BNHvAABnHvAABnBnHq BnHq BnHq BnHq BnHq BnHq BnHq•SL SL SL Bar Bin20-mm 88-mm 105-mm Btry Btry Btry Btry AA Btry AABtry AA Btry1SL SL SL Bar Bin 20-mm 88-mm 105-mmBtry Btry Btry Btry AABtry AA Btry AABtrySL SL SI Bar Bin 20-mm 86-mm 105-mmBtry Btry Btry Btry AABtry AABtry AABtry. UNCGOCOmSL SL SL Bar Bin 37-mm 88-mm 105-mmBtry Btry Btry Btry AABtry AABtry AABtryFigure28.—Antiaircraft Division in Zone of Ideri Iderior.TM-E 30-4

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Section VI. COMBAT TROOPS(FECHTENDE TRUPPEN)1. GeneralThis section consists of a list of the more importanttypes of combat units in the Germanarmed forces, of the status of regiments and belowwith particulars on their organization. Theyare arranged according to the arms and services(Wuflengattungen), divided into organic units(integral parts of divisions) and General Headquartersunits (Heerestrzbppell) (units held in theGeneral Headquarters pool from which they areallotted to army groups, armies, and corps andsub-allotted temporarily to divisions for specificoperations).2. Organic Infantry Unitsa. GENERAL. For the purpose of clarity we areincluding under this paragraph all units which areinfantry units in accordance with the Americanconception. The G&mans consider security troops(Sicherungstruppm) a separate category of unitsof the field army, but in reality they consist principallyof infantry. Similarly, the Germans considerarmored infantry (Panzergrenadiere) as belongingto the armored arm and not to the infantry.SMOHspa"IXJ U-Hsp-UK• J »Kf"Is.vioH JUJsunj)XV mm-Siseyoozua°°^165165ft ftNONO CM 00800 CM ocCMmm CM m*> tr, 00 00 00iuui-18 NO NO

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451tion for most of the infantry regiments now in the type of infantry regiment mentioned in subthefield.paragraph (Z), another type may be encountered(2) 1944 Type Regiment. The above type of which is similar to the basic one mentioned in subregimenthas been superseded by the infantry paragraph (1). It is the three-battalion regimentregiment in the Infantry Division, 1944 Type, of the infantry division, two-regiment type. Howwhichconsists also of three regiments, but each ever, it is believed that there is a trend toward reregimenthas only two battalions in addition to oi-ganizing that type of division on a three-regitheinfantry howitzer and antitank companies. ment, tn.o-battalion basis. After such a reorgan(See Figuvrs 29 to 39.)ization, the regiment probably will be similar to(3) Tkec-Battalion Regiment. In addition to the Infantry Regiment, 1944 Type.INFANTRY REGIMENTREGTL HQREGTLHQ COINF BN INF BN INF HOWCO1—AT COCO HQ BN HQ BN HQ CO HQ CO HQCOM R CO R CO 1ST PLAT AT PIATPLATENGR — R CO R CO 2D PLAT BAZOOKAPLATPLATMTD R CO R CO 30 PUT BAZOOKAPLATPUT•TNHV WPN — HV WPN 4TH PLAT WPNCOCOTNFigure 30.—Infatztry Regiment, Infantry Ilivision, 1944 Type.Il—34

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASS\FIEDTM-E 30-451- o - - i ! a J iO p-< P-i £ 3 t/3 ij («*;> K mr/iCo Hq 1 5 2 3 5 1 1 31st (Corn) Plat ...,... 1 2 29 23 1 9 6 6 720 (Engr) Plat 1 7 65 53 8 13 6 6 13 230 (Mtd) PIat ’ 4 27 20 4 7 3 1 31Tn 2 a 10 42 44 8 2 1 1 5 15 32 4Total 5 ’ 28 165 143 26 32 10 5 28 6 84IThe Mtd Plat may be replaced by a Bcl Plat with 29 Bcls and 2 11s.2 Including two officials.TIFigure 31.—Regimental Headquarters Coxpacy, Iefarztry Division, 1944 Type, total strength 198.INFANTRY BATTALIONBN HQ ft CO R CO R COHV WPNCOHO SEC CO HQ to HQ CO HQ CO HQCOM SEC R PLAT R PLAT R PLATHV MGPLATTN R PLAT R PLAT R PLAT81-MMMORT PLATR PUT R PLAT R PLAT120~MMMOBT PLATHV M G HV MG HV M GSEC SEC SECTNTN TN TNFigure Z—InfantryBattalion, Infantry Division, 1944 Type.II—35

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451UNIT m J S g ' j H E a i c - y i - S j Smtn O w2 ' ^ P t ! • u Ô Z ft « 6 £ en J S SS ~S S> SBn Hq ........... 6l & 13 58 58 8 14 1 1 - 16 4 33 6R Co ............. 2 21 119 96 22 .28 13 2 15 11 27 3R Co ............ 2 21 119 96 22 28 13 2 15 11 27 3R Co 2 21 119 96 22 28 13 2 15 11 27 3Hv Wpn Co 3 37 165 131 48 29 3 6 6 4 7 331 20 51 2Total .... 15 ’ 113 580 477 122 127 43 12 6 4 8 592 57 165 171 Including two officials.Figure 33.—Infantry Rattnlion, Infantry Dim’sio~~, 1944 Type. tofu1 strength 708,UNIT6 - s - -3 * o I -3 JO 7, ft «(J ft en J S> £ K> HHq Set 4 3 10 11 5 4 1 2 4Corn Set 3 22 17 8 4 4 4Tn 2 l 7 26 30 3 2 1 12 25Total 6 ’ 13 58 58 8 14 1 1 2 16 4 331 Including two officials.Figure 34.—Infantry Battalion Hcndqzmrtrrs, Infmfry Dizkion, 1944 Type. fotnl strength 77.UNIT „ » g » z«« u t «S .s -5 S >O S5 Pn «(J PH 7! J MC o H q . . . . 1 3 8 8 2 3 1 1 21st R Plat ................. 1 3 29 22 5 7 4 2 > 32d R Plat ................. 4 29 22 5 7 4 2 33d R Plat 4 29 22 5 7 4 ? 3Hv MG Set: 3 15 11 4 3 2 3 ? 4Tn 4 9 11 1 1 1 2 12 1Total 2 21 119 96 22 28 13 2 1.5 11 27Figure 35.—Rifle Company, IllJantry Division, 1944 Typr, tofnl strclzgtlt 142.UNIT 1 u »i S », Jio S» s H WPlat Hq 1 5 4 2 1 1 2 2 3R Sqd .............. 1 8 6 1 2 1R Sqd 1 8 6 1 2 1R Sqd ................_.... 1 8 6 1 2 1Total .......... 1 3 29 22 5 7 4 2 2 3IL—36Only the 1st Plat of the R Co is commanded by an officer; the 2d and 3d Plats are commanded by NCOq, and consequently thenumber of NCOs in these two platoons increases from three to four.Figure 36.—Rifle Platoon, Infantry Division, 1944 Ty#r, tofal sfrmgth 33.

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDCO Hq ._,._,7_. 1 "1st (HvMG) PIa _.20 (N-mm Mort) Plat(H-Dr) ............30 (120-mm Mart) Plat(Mtz) .......TnTotalO1113^49107737CH1545563910165oiu1531373612131£2152.35348A41007229J213ft663366" S44P.>77%123ffi>2815 Ib36H26U20510191-112Figure 37.—Heavy 1C:eapons Cowpatty, Infantry Divisiort. 194-l Typr, fatal stvcwgth 205.UNIT « « « T G-SET ^ ?; x>Co Hq 1 4 13 14 3 2 1 21st (75-mm Inf How) Plat 1 5 30 27 4 6 1 2 52d (75-mm Inf How) Nat 6 30 27 4 6 1 2 53d (7%mm Inf How) Plat 6 30 27 4 6 1 2 54th (15%mm Inf How) l’lat 1 5 33 29 5 6 1 2 6 2Tn 6 13 16 2 1 1 1 5Total 3 32 149 140 22 2 5 6 2 8 2 7Referred to by the traditional designation: "13th" Co.Figure 3X.—I,rfarltry Ilozcit:er Company, Infantry I)k.i.Guu. lV4f Type, tota/ strc’rrgtll 184.5(75(751513C3UNIT m B " g » 4 % i 2 iCo Hq 1 101st (75-mm AT) Plat (Mtz) 1 42d (Bazooka) Plat (H-Dr) 53d (Bazooka) Plat (H-Dr) 1 4Tn (Mtz) 6Total 3 2926284343111542925252.516120Referred to by the traditional designation: "14th" Co.Figure 39.—Antitatlk Company (partly mortorized), Infantry Divisiolz, 1944 Typr, tofu1 sertngtlt 186.64191935135441173111618183633157134154484482441011—37

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45I(4) Volks Grenadier Regiment. The infantryregiment in the Volks Grenadier Division shows acompletely new organization. The infantry companyand battalion trains are merged to a supplyplatoon on a battalion level. The infantry companyconsists of two sub-machine gun platoonsand a rifle platoon. The heavy-weapons cornpan?of the infantry battalion includes an infantryhowitzer platoon. The regimental infantry howitzercompany is equipped with l-30-mm mortarsand 75-mm infantry ho\vitzers only, and the regimentalantitank company has been replaced bya bazooka company equipped with 72 bazookas.( See Figures 40 to 50.)INFANTRYREGIMENT|REGTL REGTL INFHQ HO CO BNINFBNINF HOWCOBAZOOKAc oCO HOBN HOBN HO CO HQ CO HQCOMPLATSUPPLATSUPPLAT120-MMMORT PLATBAZOOKAPLATENGRPLATGREN COGRENCO1zo-MMMORT PLATBAZOOKAPLATBCLPLATGREN COGRENCO7S-MM INFHOW PLATBAZOOKAPLATTNGREN COGRENCOTNTNHV WPNCOHV WPNCOFigure 40.—Infantry Regiment, Volks Greuadier Division.II—38

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451^ 8 f Si 1 I § 1 IS II I I* *l I °l = . -sRegtl Hq 6 1 12 4 3 14 - 2 3 8 2Regtl Hq . 5 6 1 1 . 2 32 1 1 27 6 53 38Inf Bn 15 95 532 309 80 253 30 8 6 4 2 3 70 32 125 27Inf Bn IS 95 532 309 80 253 30 8 6 4 2 3 70 32 125 27Inf How Co 1 3 32 162 145 21 31 5 8 4 1 33 2 89 4Bazooka Co 2 2 19 146 91 63 14 4 72 1 1 19 12 30 2Total 46 3 267 1,541 991 269 597 79 16 12 8 72 12 9 10 219 84 430 1001 Referred to by the traditional designation: "13th" Co.3 Referred to by the traditional designation: "14th" Co.3 Including four officials.Figure 41.—Infantry Regiment, L’olks Grenadier Division, total strelryth 1,854.£ 8 f Si 1 % i J 4 sO K AH K'J PI M J "=> B> t-iCo Hq 1 5 2 3 4 1 11st (Com) Plat 1 2 29 23 9 6 6 72d (Engr) Plat 1 7 65 53 7 13 6 6 133d (Bel) Plat 4 27^ 20 4 7 3^ i 2 29Tn 2 1 7 34 34 7 2 1 1 1430 4Total 5 1 25 157 133 22 32 10 1 27 653 381 Including two officials.Figure 42.—Regimental Headquarters Company, Volks Greltadier Division, total strength 187.INFANTRY BATTALIONBN HQSUPPLATGRENCOGRENCOGRENCOHV WPNCOHQ SEC CO HQ CO HQ CO HQ CO HQCOM SECSUB-MGPLAT— SUB-MGPLATSUB-MGPLATHV MGPLATSUB-MGPLAT—SUB-MGPLATSUB-MGPLATHV MGPLATR PLAT — R PLAT R PLAT INF HOWPLATFigure 43.—Infantry Battalion, Volks Grenadier Division.81-MMMORT PLAT11—39

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDUNIT „ u -2g

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IUNCLASSIFIEDUNITou55 M^ hH CO*Co Hq 1 8 IS 14 2 51st (MG) Plat 1 6 22 11 1 32d (MG) Plat 7 22 11 1 33d (Inf How) Plat 1 44 38 5 9 7 154th (Medium Mort) Plat 53 34 21 5 15 12 19Total 3 35 156 108 47 39 1 1 28 16 45Figure 48.—Heavy weapons Cowlpatty, Volks Grenadier Dizisiofl, total strength 194.eUNIT „ u J S 5 « | « E M - S« > «.£ .a "3 3 SJj J'S £•£3 ^ CM KU CM V ; J — Ja 1 >Co Hq 11 2 2 1 1 1Bazooka Plat 1 4 45 26 20 4 1 1 5 4 6Bazooka Plat 5 45 26 20 4 1 18 5 4 6Bazooka Plat 5 45 26 20 4 1 18 5 4 6Tn 5 9 11 2 1 1 18 2 1 4 12 2Total 1 2 19 146 91 63 14 4 72 1 1 19 12 30 21 Referred to by the traditional designation: "14th" Co.3 In reserve.Figure SO.—Bazooka Compat~y, Volks Grmadier Division, total strrrugth 167.(5) Volks Grenadier Bicycle Regiment. One battalions of the Volks Gwrladicr Division orof the three infantry regiments in the Volks Gren- may be used as a mobile reserve. (See Figuresadier Division is an infantry regiment (bicycle). 51 to 54.)That regiment includes one infantry battalion(bicycle), and one normal infantry battalion, a The newest type of standard German infantryregimental infantry howitzer company, and a regi- regiment is the Infantry Regiment of the Division,mental bazooka company as shown in sub-para- Type 45, which is believed to have become thegraph (4). This infantry regiment (bicycle) may pattern for all German infantry regiments (seebe employed in the same way as the other two Figures 55 and 56).11—41

1 MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IUNCLASSIFIEDUNITS 6. -o § 6 » Iab1 I* I •* J• o V, P-, wu fc « j W o=S ~3 n K£ S> S E> H X PPRegtl Hq 6 1 12 4 3 14 2 3 8 2Regtl Hq Co 5 25 157 133 22 32 10 1 27 6 53 38Inf Bn (Bcl) 15 95 .589 366 80 253 30 8 6 4 3 3 74 32 219 625Tnf Bn 15 95 532 309 80 253 30 8 6 4 2 3 f0 32 125 27Inf How Co ’ 3 32 162 145 21 31 5 8 4 1 33 2 89 4Bazooka Co ’ 2 19 146 91 63 14 4 72 1 1 1 1 0 2Total 46 3 267 1,598 1,048 269 597 79 16 12 8 72 12 10 10 223 84 524 698133Referred to by the traditional designation: "13th" Co.Referred to by the traditional designation: "14th" Co.Including four officials.I~~igurr 51.—Infantry Regimesft (bicycle), Volks Grenadier Diz~ision, total strength 1,911.UNIT6 . s- •§ I 6 s | s |l 1 -3 £l „O E I ^ S I 3 & si £s II I tt> |5 jg §Rn Hq 4 6 35 22 3 20 1 2 2 4 4 12 30Sup Plat 2 ’ 6 51 54 3 2 1 1 17 54 24Gren. Co. (Bcl) 2 16 110 55 9 64 9 8 4 24 130Gren. Co. (Bcl) 2 16 110 55 9 64 9 8 4 24 130Gren. Co. (Bcl) 2 16 110 55 9 64 9 8 4 24 130Hv Wpn Co (Bcl) 3 35 173 125 47 39, 1 8 6 4 1 29 16 81 181Total 15 l 95 589 366 80 253 30 8 6 4 , 1 74 32 219 6251Including one official.Z;igure. 52.—Ilrfarrtry Battaliolz (bicycle), Volks Grenadier Division, totnl strength 099.UNIT 9 Y) i 2 3a 3 ? °J 1 i £ °! =O "Z Q-i KU P^ ft J K> HCoHq................. 1 5 17 19 1 3 2 1 ~341st (Sub-MG) Plat...... 1 3 31 7 2 26 3 2 1 32d (Sub-MG) P l a t . . . 4 31 7 2 26 3 2 1 33:l (R) Plat 4 31 22 4 9 3 2 1 3Total 2 16 110 .5 9 64 9 8 4 24 730Figure 53.—Infantry Company (bicycle), Yolks Grertadier Division, total strerrgth 128.UNIT „ u d 6 $ E. m ET - |d3 8 I :i I 2 s > ?s % I «lCo Hq 1 8 18 17 3 1 1-3 2 11 381st (MG) P l a t . . . . . . . . 1 6 24 13 9 9 4 4 2 12 42d (MG) Plat 7 24 13 9 9 4 7 21 43J (Inf How) Plat 1 7 48 42 5 9 1 4 15 12 37 464th (Medium Mort) Plat 7 59 JO 21 5 6Total .............. 3 35 173 125 47 39 1 8 6 4 1 29 16 81 181II—42Figwr 54.—Heavy Weapons Company (bicycle), Volks Grenadier Divissio+t, total strength 211

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451CO CM ON s l°3CM CM108CDCO449S HVO CM CM CM 88O OCMco220s.)pitpACO CO coo-UKco CM CM c\CMCMJ U ICOlum-18CM CM1Î S OM A H00 00spopj5 VO c\S DIM A H 00 00 •ootosQK-'ins ; Rj 2 S}[tressy00• * CM270 330sSJOJS1Jif) ^-^~JCO coPO00 ô OO OOo"I^^jS lW!d\O \O VD CMCM 00 OO CMÔ281aSIMIHPI165 1263284!>.CO ONCOCO CO IO1461,532 118 922S HOoCOO o\ CO

I MARCH 1945(6) SS Infantry Regiment. In the SS InfantryDivision the infantry regiment is similarto the Infantry Regiment, 1944 Type.(7) Mountain Infantry Regiment. There areusually two regiments per mountain division organizedespecially for mountain warfare by makingeach of the three battalions self-sufficient.The normal infantry howitzer company is lacking,but mountain infantry howitzers are organicin each battalion. (See Figures 57 to 59..)(8) The Light Infantry Regiment. Light divisionsusually have two regiments organized similarlyto the Army Mountain Division but haveslightly more motorization.(9) The SS Mountain Infantry Regiment.The two infantry regiments per SS MountainDivision are organized similarly to the ArmyMountain Regiment; however, they have either aUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451tourth battalion or additional regimental companies.(10) The Motoriz+ed Infantry Regiment (GYMadierrcgiment(Mot)). Sormally there are tworegiments to the Motorized Division, consisting ofthree motorized infantry battalions, heavy infantryhowitzer company (self-propelled), and anantitank company. The motorized infantry battalionsoriginally were organized similarly to normalinfantry battalions; however, in 1944 theywere reorganized along the lines of the armoredinfantry battalions (Pa~zzcrgrrnadierbataillons) ofthe Armored Division. (See Figurc*s 60 and 61.)(11) TIN SS Motorixd Info~fry Regime?zt(SS-Panscv Grenadier Rrgirucnt). Two regimentsper SS Motorized Division are organizedsimilarly to the army motorized regiment; however,it has an additional antiaircraft company.MOUNTAIN INFANTRYREGIMENTREGTL REGTL MT INF MT INF MT INF 16TH (AT) LIGHT MTHQ HO c o BN BN BN CO INF CLMCO HOCOMPLATBN HOMT INFCOMTN INFCOMTN INFCOMO COHV WPNCO 1BCLPLATHV MGPLAT150-MMMT INFHOW PLATHV MGPLATCOMPLATHV MGPLATENGRPLAT120-MMMORTPLAT75-MMMT INFHOW PLAT81-MM ei-M M 81-MMMORT SEC MORT SEC MORT SEC1 Often referred to Ol a Bn Hq Co.II—4-4F&we 57.—Mountain Infantry Regiment.

MARCH I94S TM-E 30-45lUNCLASSIFIEDUNITRegtl Hq25Regtl Hq Co 182 4Mt Inf Bn 877 40 12MtlnfBn 877 40 12Mt Inf Bn 877 40 1216th (AT) Co 190 6 36Light Mt Clm36Total 3,064 150 36 18 12 36Figure 58.—lt fantry Regiment, total strength 3,064.s6 ess o Bep o z:i22 3 IKUNITd d z Em h |!Bn Hq .. 27Mt Inf Co 147 12 2Mt Inf Co 147 12 2Mt Inf Co 147 12 2MG Co 208 12 4Hv Wpn Co 1 201 4 2Total 877 40 12 6 4 21 Often referred to as a Bn Hq Co.Figure 59.—A4ountain I~lfantry Battalion, total strength877.II—45

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451GRENADIER REGIMENTIMTZ)REGTL HO—REGTL HQCO1CO HQ .GREN. BN(MTZ)1BN HO —GREN. BNIMTZ)1BN HOGREN. BN(MTZ)1BN HOHV INFHOW COISP)1CO HQ7S-MMAT CO1CO HO— COM PLAT —GREN. CO(MTZ)—GREN. COIMTZ) —GREN. COIMTZ)1S0-MMINF HOWPLAT (SP)— 75-MMAT PLATMTRClGREN. CO(MTZ)GREN. CO(MTZ)GREN. COIMTZ)—150-MMINF HOWPLAT (SP)75-MMAT PLATTN —GREN. CO(MTZI—GREN. CO(MTZ)GREN. COIMTZ)75-MMAT PLATHV WPNCO (MTZ)HV WPNCO IMTZ)HV WPNCO (MTZ)—150-MMINF HOWPLAT (SP)SUPCOSUPCOSUPCOTNFigure 60.—Motorized infantry Regiment, Panzer Grenadier Division.IJNITOffsNCOPvtsRCb-MGK 3Rcgtl Hq ........ 6 2 8 7 6 33 3Regtl Hq Co 3 37 97 93 50 4 4 22 18Gren. Bn (Mtz) .... 23 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6 4 6 143 25Gren. Bn (Mb) .... 23 148 697 548 91Gren. Bn (Mb) .... 23 148 697 548 229 91150-mm Inf How Co (SP). 3 31 108 92 28 28OO O O120Mor150-mm InfHows (SI')-mm ATun.s12 6 4 6 143 ?5229 6 4 143 256 28 575-mm AT Co 4 21 109 102 18 14 9 9 23 7Total 85 545 2,413 1,938 789 316 201 36 18 12 18 9 502 108Figure 61.—Motorized Infantry Regiment, Panzer Grenadier Ditisioq total strength 3,043.11-46

! MARCH 1945 aM r * UNCLASSIFIED ‘ TM-E304 5 1>-v(12) The Panzer Grenadier RegiAent. ’‘%etwo regiments of the Armored Division are composedof only two battalions, a heavy infantryhowitzer company (self-propelled), and an engineercompany. One of the four battalions in thedivision is designated armored (Gepanzert orGp.). because it is equipped with armored personnelcarriers with mounted arms enabling the crewsto fight from their vehicles. The other three battalionsof the division are motorized only. Theregiment, of which the armored battalion is acomponent, also is designated armored. The otherregiment which contains two motorized battalionsis designated motorized. (See Figures 62 to 75.)(13) The SS Armored Infantry Regiment(SS Panzer Grenadier Regiment). There are twoper S S Armored Division, each consisting of onearmored and two motorized Panzer Grenadierbattalions, a heavy infantry howitzer company(self-propelled), an engineer company (halftrack),and an antiaircraft company. Componentsof the regiment are organized like those ofthe Army Panzer Grenadier Regiment. (Forthe S S Panzer Grenadier Regiment see Figure76; for the breakdown of the components seeFigures 64 and 65,)PANZER GRENADIER REGIMENT(ARMORED)1|REGTL HOREGTL HQCOPZ. GREN.BN (ARMD)PZ. GREN.BN (MTZ)HV INF HOWc o ISPIENGR CO(H-TRK)j— CO HQ — BN HQ — BN HQ CO HO CO HO— COM PLAT —PZ. -GREN.CO (ARMD)— PZ. GREN.CO IMTZI150-MMINF HOWPLAT (SP)COM SEC— MTRCLPLAT— PZ. GREN.CO (ARMD)PZ. GREN.CO (MTZ)ENGRPLAT_150-MMINF HOWPLAT (SP)TNPZ. GREN.CO (ARMD)PZ. GREN.CO (MTZ)ENGRPLATHV WPNCO (ARMD)HV WPNCO (MTZ)1so-m mINF HOWPU T (SPIENGRPLATSUPCOSUPCOTNHV WPNPLATTNSFrgure 62.—Panzer Grenadier, Army Armored Division.i 1147

( MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451UNIT8 „ s- -i f o a is is gi I? Is5 a £ S6 K w 3 K sa_2___E__g5_ RawiiHowsMtrVehicRegtl Hq 6 2 8 7 6 3 3 3Regtl Hq Co (Armd)....... 3 47 97 93 50 4 14 29 14PzGren. Bn (Armd).... 26 168 673 456 242 179 115 12 6 4 18 12 158 2 4MtrclPz.&en. Bn (Mtz).......... 23 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6. 4 6 143 25Hv Inf How Co (SP)..... ” 3 31 108 92 28 22 8 6 25 5Engr Co (H-Trk) 3 40 211 177 40 37 27 2 2 24 1 48 7Total ................. 64 l 436 1,794 1,373 595 336 224 26 14 8 24 25 12 6 406 811 Including eight officials.a Including 125 Armd Pers carriersFigure 63.—Panzer Grenadier Regiment, Army Armored Division, total strength 2,294PANZER GRENADIER BATTALION(ARMD)BN HQ PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. HV WPN SUPCO (ARMDI CO IARMD) CO IARMD) CO (ARMD) COIII— CO HQ — CO HQ CO HQ CO HQPZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. 75-MM— PLAT — PLAT PLAT — GUN PUT(ARMD) (ARMDI (ARMDI (SP)PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. 75-MMPUT PUT PUT GUN PLAT(ARMD) (ARMD) (ARMD) (SP)PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN.. PZ. GREN..— PLAT PLAT PLAT(ARMD) IARMDI IARMDI120-MMMORTPLATIARMDIHV WPN HV WPN HV WPN— PLAT PUT PUT(ARMD) IARMDI (ARMD)— AA PLAT AA PLAT AA PUT(ARMD) (ARMD) (ARMD)11-48Figure M.—Panzer Grenadikr Battalion, Army Armored Division.

MARCH l945 TM-E 30-461' " '"""'""" UNCLASSIFIEDoUNIT „ „ » S » S g,» 1» E~£ 8 2 fe s 1 3 § ^ if Jl is_ ,vinBn Hq 4 9 30 24 9 10 6 8 4Ps. Gren. Co (Armd) 4 32 147 83 55 45 29 4 2 6 2; iPz. Gren. Co (Armd)........ 4 32 147 83 55 45 29 4 2 6 25 4Pz. Gren. Co (Armd) 4 32 147 83 55 45 29 4 2 6 2 25 4Hv Wpn Co (Armd)....... 3 23 74 46 31 32 17 4 6 21 6sup co .................... T 40 128 137 37 2 5 54 2Total 26 1 168 673 456 242 179 115 12 6 4 18 12 158” 241 Including three officials.2 Including 87 Armd vehiclesFigure 65.—Panzer Grenadier Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 867.UNIT „ ., .2 SS « *S P ! j J§O fc fc BSD fU c/) J ffi 5S SoCo Hq 1 7 • 8 11 2 3 2 4 2Pz. Gren. Plat (Armd). .. 1 3 26 12 10 8 9 4Ps. Gren. Plat (Armd).. 4 26 12 10 8 9 4 •Gren. Plat (Armd) ... 4 26 12 109 4Hv Wpn Plat (Armd).... 1 8 41 28 124 2 2 4AA Plat (Armd) 1 6 20 8 11 6 5Total 4 32 147 8 3 • 55 45 29 4 2 6 2 2S 41 Including 21 Armd pers carriers.Figwe 66.—Panzer Grenadier Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 183.OO O 002UNITo . 6- -I i o h g* I •s«S 8 f -Ji .a •§ g 4 375-mm Inf How Plat (SP).. .. 1 8 26 15 13 15 8 6 9 i75-mm InfHow Plat (SP).. .. 1 8 37 18 (S 13 7 4 8 2Total .. 3 23 74 46 31 31 17 4 6 21 1 61 Including 17 Armd vehicles.Figure 67.—-Heavy Weapons Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 100.fbUNIT' 5 . s- •§ ^ 3 § i« sS 1? I"S sj ? ^^ « •§ g > ?S s^ | § i-§OS; &4 «(J tn tn J B SS fi-H So S>Co Hq 1 5 8 7 5 ~2 1 1 3~Engr Plat 1 ' 7 50 41 7 10 8 8 10Engr Plat ... ‘ . . 1 7 SO 1 0 g 8 8 10Engr Plat 8 50 41 7 10 8 8 10 2Hv ' MG Sec 3 12 8 5 2 2 181-mm m Mort Sec 3 14 7 8 2 2 2 2Main lint t Sec 2 8 9 1 3Tnss. 5 19 23 1 9TotalTotal .... 340 211 177 40 37 37 2 2 24 1 48 l 7lkcluding 28 Armd vehicles.Figure 68.—Engineer Company (half-tracked), Panzer Grenadier Regiment, total strength 254.11—49

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E SO-461UNITS fe- •§ i 3 » l a l a 1 3g § I â I I g ,5 I I §lla IIReetl Ha6 2 8 7 6 3 3 3.Regtl -Hq Co3 47 97 93 50 4 4 22 18Pz. Gren. Bn (Mtz)............. 23 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6 4 6 143 2523Pz. Gren. Bn (Mb). ,> 23 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6 4 6 143 251.50-mm Inf How Co (SP)......3 31 108 92 28 22 8 6 34 5Engr Co (Mtz).................. 3 34 180 161 32 24 12 2 2 18 35 7Total 61' 410 1,787 1,449 574 235 144 26 14 8 18 12 6 380 831 Including eight officials.Figure &.—Panzer Grenadier Regiment (motorized), Army Armored Division, total strength 2,258.PANZER GRENADIER BATTALION 1(MTZ)1BN HQPZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. HV WPN SUPCO (MTZ) CO (MTZ) CO HTZ) CO (MTZ) CO— CO HQ — CO HQ c o n o — CO HQPZ. GREN. — PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN.SO-MM AA—PLAT (MTZ) PLAT IMTZ) PLAT (MTZI PtAT IMTZBPZ. GREN.PZ. GREN.PZ. GREN.—120-MMPLAT (MTZ) PLAT IMTZ) PLAT (MTZ) MORTPLAT (MTZ)PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN. PZ. GREN.PLAT (MTZ) PLAT (MTZ) PLAT (MTZ)MG PLAT MG PLAT MG PLATIMTZI IMTZI IMTZIFigure 70.—Panzer Grenadier Battalion (motorized), Army ArmoredDivision.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451o £ (X «S K w J ffi SS 2S So S>Bn Hq 4 9 29 36 4 2 9 4Gren. Co. (Mtz) 3 29 165 liS 59 29 18 4 2 4 4Pz. Gren. Co. (Mtz)....... 3 29 165 165 59 - 23 165 4 2 24 4pv Gren. Co. (Mtz) 3 29 165 115 59 23 18 4 2 24 4Hv Wpn Co (Mtz) 3 29 79 63 24 17 2 4 6 20 5Sup Co T 30 94 104 24 3 4 42 4Total . 23 1 148 697 548 229 91 60 12 6 4 6 143 251 Including three officials.Figure 71.—Panzer Grenadier Battalion (motorized), Army Armorcd Division, total strength 868.. o . s- I a o atS U > ».§ .2 •§ S 5O

UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451- ' 0 ” $ 8 I 1 o 2O ^ fu 04 O di tfi J XCo Hq . 1 3 5 5 1 3 1 3Com Sec 2 8 10 3Engr Plat '.. .... ’ 1 5 41 36 S 6 4 6 6 1Engr Plat . 1 5 41 36 S 6 4 6 6 1Engr Plat . .... ...... 6 41 36 5 6 4 6 6 1N-mm. Mort Sec.... 3 14 8 8 1 2 2Hv MG Sec 3 12 8 5 2 2 2Maint Set .......... 1 3 4 i iTns 6 IS 18 3 8Total . 3 34 180 161 32 24 12 2 2 18 35 7Figure 75.——E+tgincer Company(motorized), Army Armored Division, total strength 217.UNIT6 » S» -i ^ o S E« |» 11 eS s«o £ (S (56 E w j M SS 2S E H S O KKRegtl Hq 6^ ~2 2 8 77 ^ 6 3Regtl Hq Co 3 47 47 97 93 50 4 47Pz. Gren. Bn (Armd). . . 168 673 456 242 -179 115 12. 6 4 179 242 152....... 26 168 673 45624Pz. Gren. Bn (Mtz). ... 23 148 697 548229 9 60 12 6 4 6 143 229Pz. Gren. Bn (Mtz) . 23 148 697 548229 9 60 229 6 4 6 143 229HvInf How Co (SP) ... 3 31 108 92 108 22 8 6 25 5Engr Hq (H-Trk) 3 40 21 1 1 171777 40 177 27 2 2 24 1 48 7AA Co ... 14 64 28 16 12 16 22 14 64 36Total ..... ... 89 1 2,555 1,957 852 443 284 38 20 12 2 43 12 6 527 s 8889 ’ 598 2,555 1,9571 Including 11 officials.2 Including 89 Armd vehicles.Figure 7&.—SS Panzer Grenadier Regiment, SS Armored Division, total strength 3^42(14) The Parachute Rifle Regiment. Three per infantry. They include some men trained for air-Parachute Rifle Division, these consist of three borne operations, but most of the so-called parachutistsare well trained infantrymen only. Theparachute rifle battalions, a 120-mm mortar or aequipment includes a high proportion of smalllight gun company, and an antitank company. automatic weapons, bazookas, and antitank rocketThese regiments usually are employed as crack pistols. (See Figures 77 to 82.)IJ—52

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED - EPARCHUTE RIFLEREGIMENTREGTLHQ_REGTLHQ COJCO HQPRCHTR BN1BN HQPRCHTR BNPRCHTR COPRCHTR BN1PRCHTR CO120-MMMORT ORLIGHT GUN: CO1PRCHTR COATCO1PR< HTMO COCOMPLATHO SEC CO HQ CO HQCO HQCO HOENGRPLATCOMSECBAZOOKASECBAZOOKASECBAZOOKASECCOMSECPLAT81-MMMORT SEC81-MMMORT SEC81-MMMORT SECHV MGPLATTNS -PRCHTR PUTPRCHTR PUTPRCHTR PLATHV MGPLAT— PRCHTR PUT—PRCHTR PUTPRCHTR PUT—81 MMMORT PUT—PRCHTR PU T—PRCHTR PUTPRCHTR PLAT75 MMLIC >HTGUN PLATTNSTNSTNST MSFigure 77.—Parachute Rifle Regiment, Air Force Parachute Division.UNIT .Regtl Hq7 60 36 17 10 3Regtl Hq Co6 225 182 89 37 11Prcht R Bn... . 828 410 257 214 66 8 13Prcht R Bn 25 828 410 257 214 66 8 13Prcht R Bn. . .. . 25 828 410 257 214 66 8 13120-mm Mort or Light Gun Cogs111oaiZip mh3Gun Co 5 158 83 40 45 6 9 19 4AT Co 3 183 120 51 17 6 54 3 17 5Total . . . 96 X 3,110 1,651 968 751 224 24 39 9 54 3 6 304 711 Including 12 officials.2oCM CM13128181134i191919Figure 78.—Parachute Rifle Regiment, Air Force Parachute Division, total strength 3,206.11—53

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-4511UNITwT 89 57 71 20 212 5... . 1 41 29 13 9 26 14 166 72 59 43 20 315 3. .... .. . 4 166 72 59 43 20315 34 166 72 59 43 20315 3.. .. 5 200 108 46 56 2 8 4 2 18 4Total 25 ’ 828 410 257 214 66 8 13 2 13 214Bn HqCom PlatPrcht R Co.Prcht R Co..Prcht R CoPrcht MG CoOilsIncluding three officials.Figure 79.—Parachute Rifle Battalion, Air Force Parachute Division, total strength 853.Rs orCbnsPistolsSub-MGsLMGsHv MGs81-mmMortsMtrVehiclesMtrclsUNITCo HqPrcht R Plat..Prcht R Plat :Prcht R PlatTns.. . .111.w3538381 3817116161613121515IS2s14999266623 32226Total 4 166 n 59 43 20 3 15 3Figore 80.—Parachute Rifle Company, AAir 0. - Parachute Division, total strength 170.UNITCo Hq1 22 6 6 12 4Corn Set11 741Prcht Hv MG Plat1 37 19 11 9 42Prcht Hv MG Plat1 37 19 11 Q42Prcht 81-mm Mort Plat1 48 28 11 1143Prcht Light Gun Plat1 27 is 5 92 2Tns 18 18 2 2 2 6Total 5 200 108 46 5 2 8 4 2 18 4Figure 81.—Parachute Machine-Gun Company, Air FForce Parachute Division, total strength 205.UNITOffsOffsaRs orCbns Rs orCbnsRs orCbnsoCo Hq 2 13 3 5 9 1 1 4Com Sec 18 18 6 2Prcht 120-mm Mort P l a t . . . . 1 33 15 11 9 1 3 3Prcht IZO-mm Mort Plat 1 33 15 11 9 1 3 3Prcht 120-mm Mort Plat... . 1 33 15 11 9 1 3 3Mun Sec 11 11 1 2Tns 17 17 2 2 2 5Total 5 158 83 40 45 6 9 19 4Note: Some Prcht Regts may have 75.mm of 105.mm Light (Recoilless) Guns instead of the 120.mm Marts.Figure 82.—Parachute 12bmm Mortar or L$ht Gun Company, Air Force Pararhnte Division, total stretigth 163.11—54PistolsPisttolsPistolsSub-MGsASub-MGs LMGsHv MGs LMGsLMGs81-mmMorts81-mmMorts120-mmMortsLightGunsMtr MtrVehicles Mtr VehiclesVehiclesMtrcls31Mtrcls

T5> ^ •*--**&;£I MARCH 1945c. FIELD REPLACEMENT BATTALION (Feldersatzbataillon).Field replacement battalions consistof three to five companies containing replacementelements for the various arms and divisionalcombat school. They may be found in all typesof divisions and are a training unit as well as afield reserve for the entire division. Their personnelmay be drawn from other divisional unitsor may consist of fresh reserves from the rearareas. Figures 83 and 84 show the Field ReplacementBattalions of the Infantry Division, 1944Type, and of the Army Armored (Panzer) Division,but their organization in other types ofdivisions is very similar.d. INFANTRY ANTIAIRCRAFT COMPANY (Znf.Fla-Kp.) The infantry antiaircraft company isorganic in all types of infantry divisions and isusually self propelled. It is subordinated for administrativepurposes to the divisional antitankbattalion, but receives all tactical directives fromthe division. It is equipped with 20-mm and37-mm antiaircraft guns. It may be employedfor both antiaircraft and antitank defense. Similarlyorganized antiaircraft companies organicin the armored division are believed to belong tothe armored arm while most of the non-organiclight antiaircraft companies belong to the airforce.3. General Headquartersa. FORTRESS BRIGADE (Festuugsbr-igade). Independentstatic infantry brigades.b. FORTRESS REGIMENT (FcstzltzgsYegillzetlt).Regimental staffs controlling fortress battalions.c. FORTRESS BATTALIONS (Festungsbataillon).Static infantry battalions employed in the defenseof fixed fortifications. It consists largely of Lnndcsschiitzenpersonnel. It often is attached fortactical purposes to divisions operating in thesame combat area.UNCLASSIFIED••a-HspjJKluiu-coi«"H. J U Isunj)I Vsunfsunf)v vSJ3M0JIJJ,““-021S OJV A HS[O}SI,JTM-E 30-451II—I(i ,d. PERMANENT ~ORTR~ESS BATTALION (Fest.ungsstavnwabteilung).Formed as a cadre personnel,it is attached to corps manning fortificationsin coastal sectors and now is found in theWestwall defenses. The battalions carry theRoman numeral of the corps to which they areattached, but also have been identified with Arabicnumbers in the 300 series. These units may occuras Festungsstamnweginzenter (permanent fortressregiments) or as Festungsstamunkow@anie(permanent fortress companies) depending on thesize of the sector to which they are assigned.“03Nm u. »PII—55;.

MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E• « 8- s = 1 i S ? If If si la Is i If J ! slS g £ as a .3 a a si §1 EH iS K3 K,S sj i£ g a> aBn Hq 2 2 2 2 ' 1C Sch 13 78 5 5 31 86sup co 3 l 13 57 66 7 50 12 6 2 2 1 1 1 1 8” 3 24 48Rep1 Popl 200 200Rep1 Pool 200 200Rep1 Pool 200 200Red Pool 200 200 ~~Total ... 18 ’ 91 864 873 40 86 50 12 6 2 2 i 1 I Ix Including one official.3 Various types of armored vehicles may be attached for demonstration purposes.Figure 84.—Field Replacement Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 973.23 G 48e. MACHINE-GUN BATTALION (Maschinenge- companies. Each company has twelve heavy morwehrbataillon).The independent machine-gun Jars (120-mm).battalion consists of three companies equipped k 1 . ALPINE INFANTRY BATTALION (Hochgewithheavy machine guns and bazookas and a birgsbataillon). The personnel of this battalionheavy weapons company. It probably has been is especially trained for warfare in high terrainredesignated fortress machine-gun battalion. and mountain climbing.f. FORTRESS MACHINE-GUN BATTALION (Fes-1. LOCAL DEFENSE (Laudessrhiitzen) REGItungs-Maschinengewehrbataillon).These staticMENT AND BATTAIJON. A local defense regimentmachine-gun battalions are composed largely ofcontrols a varying number of battalions which areLandesschiitzen personnel. Their organization iscomposed of two to six companies. The averagesimilar to a Maschinengewehrbataillon except forcompany strength is 150, and total battalionthe mobility.strength may vary between 400 and 900. Theseg. SUPER-HEAVY MACHINE-GUN BATTALION units originally were employed for guard duties at(Uberschweres Maschinengewehrbataillon). Or- vital installations and as support for the militaryganization of this battalion is probably similar to administration in occupied territories.that of the Maschinengewehrbataillon. It ism. SECURITY REGIMENT AND BATTALIONequipped wth 20-mm and 37-mm antiaircraft(Sicherungsrcginlent). Numerous Landesschiitzrnbattalions have received additional transportaguns and bazookas.h. LIG,HT ANTIAIRCRAFT BATTALION (Flabationand equipment and been redesignatedtaillon). This consists of light antiaircraft comsecuritybattalions (Sicherullgsbataillone). Whilepanies organized similarly to those found organithestrength of these battalions varies, similarlycally in the infantry divisions. It is believed thatto that of the local defense battalions, Figures 85many light antiaircraft battalions have been reand86 show an average security battalion as itformed and redesignated super-heavy machinemaybe encountered in the field.gun battalions and are being employed as mobiledefense units of fortified zones.Several such battalions may be controlled by ai. TANK DESTRUCTION BATTALION (Panzerversecurityregiment which usually is attached tostiirer Bataillon). This battalion is equipped withcommanders of army groups or army rear areas.bazookas and other infantry antitank weapons. n. For a complete list of all infantry and sej. HEAVY MORTAR BATTALION (Scltweres curity units see the "Order of Battle of the Ger-Granatwerferbataillon). This consists of three man Army", ,March 1945 edition.11-56

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDUNITy1 - “ 2 . I o iO !5 PH «U A< c/3 ,J ffiBn Hq 4 3 11 12 5 4 1 2 6Com Sec 4 14 14 4 2Security Co 2 24 135 97 30 39 10 2 2 2 2 '28Security Co 24 135 97 30 39 10Security Co ? 24 135 97 30 39 10Tns I 1 8 18 20 5 2 1 1 21Total 2 . II 1 87 448 337 100 127 31 6 6 7 2 48 1131 Including one official.2 A Includ in g a o n e of ficial. and accordingly less fire power and transportation.Figure 85.—Security Battalion, total strength 508-546.CM CMCM CM22CM CM2828Co Hq1st Plat2nd Plat3d Plat4t h (Hv Wpn)Tns .. .PlatUNITOffs11NCOs3-34464Pvts632• 3232258Rs orCbns62222221510Pistols2555121Sub-MGs310101051LMGs3331Hv MGs81-mmMorts2 2Total 2 24 135 97 30 39 10 2 2 2 12 28Figure 86.—Security Company, Security Battalion, total strength 161.MtrVehicles11H-DrVehicles22233w1444784. Armored Organic Units that the tables of organization specify 14 tanks forArmored troops (Panzertruppen), created as an each of the companies, distributed as follows:arm in April 1943, include many units which, two in company headquarters, and four in eachaccording to the American conception, belong to of the three platoons. One battalion usually isother arms. This refers specifically to the Panzer equipped with Pz. Kpfw. V tanks, and the otherGrenadier units which the Germans include in the with Pz. Kpfw. IV tanks. (See Figures 87 toarmored troops arm, while we consider them as 96.)belonging to the infantry; tank destroyer units ; b. THE SS TANK (Panzer) REGIMENT. Thisand armored reconnaissance units, each of which regiment is organized similarly to the Army Tankwe oonsider as belonging to their appropriate arm (Panzer) Regiment except that the tank comwhilethe Germans include them under armored panies are believed to consist of 17 instead of 14troops.tanks. They are distributed as follows: two ina. THE ARMY TANK (Panzer) REGIMENT. company headquarters and five in each of theThis consists of two tank battalions of three com- three platoons. The SS tank regiment has therepanieseach, but a. fourth, an assault gun company, fore more strength and fire power than the Armyb e ’ be encountered. It is believed Tank Regiment, (See Figures 97 to 101,)

pdAouuy diiuy')USIU}6J^[ yuvj^—D3SwavD3SNOWivid Nnonnvssv lVid XI 1IVId X I IVId XID3SMMIVId Www-ozNnonnvssvk-l IVId XI IVId X I IVId XID3S1NIVWIVId N3«QNV «ON3SN1NnonnvssvIVId XI IVId Ml IVId XID3S03WIVId ND»QNV WODD3S1NIVWOH ODOH OD— OHODOH ODOH ODOH ODIVIdXIOD Nnonnvssv1OD XIOD|X IOD XIODdnsODOH NSOH N9OH ODOD 1NIVWXIN9 AlMi6X "ZdNS AZiIVIdVV WW-ZEODOH 11O3VOH1103)1I1N3WIO3Vl»3ZNVd) XNV1 AWHV

I MARCH I94S UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451-•• •« _,,-. » 5• %^ *^p^ .yc ^s 1 -: a*jS

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45/UNIT. . .CO.n « - L z 5 | « ill* y > ".3 .2 a S A3«O is (u «o P- tn J SocaCo Hq 1 2 2 3 2 11 18 17 2 27 8 12 6 6 3J+gr and Rcn Plat......... - . . 1 8 45 32 12 10 11 11 720-mm AA Plat (SP)..... "11 4 35~~24 12 4 1 3 4 1Total ............ 4 32 99 61 53 22 24 3 6 6 19= 81 Long-barreled in P,-. Kpfw. IV; superlong-barreled in Ps. Kpfw. V.2 Including five Armd vehicles.Figure 91.—Tank Battalion Headqnarters company, Army Armored DiGsion, total strength 135.UNIT m CT 2£ 8 ~ ° £ 1 2oPn PH j-*> 2Co Hq 3 5 14 13 7 2 4 2Med Serv ...... 1 3 5 2 6 1 3Maint Serv (Mtr Vehicles and \\:pns) 2 34 130 137 4 25 42Fuel Serv 4 22 23 2 1 2 21Mun Serv 3 15 16 • 1 1 1 14Adm S e r v . . . . . . 1 10 . 25 35 1 1 14Total 7 1 59 - 211 226 21 30 4 98 21 Including two officials.Figure 92.—pz. Kpfw,.. J (Panth.er) Tank Battalion S14pply Compa?ty,, Army Armored Division, strength 277.UNITm 3 . zO !? PH « U O. « S>Co Hq 1 9 9 7 10 4 4 2 2 2 2Tk Plat l 11 8 20 4 '8 4 4Tk Plat 1 11 8 20 4 8 4 4Tk Plat l 11 8 20 4 8 4 4Total . . 4 42 33 7 70 16 28 16 14 2 21 Long-barreled in Pz. Kgfw. IV; superlong-barreled in Ps. Kpfw. V.Figure 93.—Tank Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 93.« s , u ! 1 iCo HqO fc &< «u PH C/) J3 5 14 13 7 2 4 2Med Serv ................................. 1 2 5 2 6 3Maint Serv (Mtr Vehicles sand Wpns)...... 2 28 59 65 4 20 27Fuel Serv 3 9 10 1 1 1 8Mun Serv -................ 3 12 13 1 1 1 11Adm Serv................................. 1 10 24 34 1 1 13Total .. . a l 51 123 137 20 24 3 66 21 Including two officials.H—60Figure 94.—Ps. Kpfw. IV Tank Battalion Supply Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 181.

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30451UNIT«v. « gg fe -sV.'£ 8 a °« § * i ?l fc - ?1 O Z CL, K U c- ir. J nOffl rÛ n.Bn Hq 4 3 7 10 3 1 1 3 2Bn Hq Co 4 32 99 61 53 22 24 3 6 6 19 8Sup Co ..... 7 51 . 123 137 20 24 3 66 2Tk Co ... 4 42 33 7 70 16 28 14 14 2 ?,Tk Co 4 .44 2 33 7 70 16 28 14 14 2 ?,Tk Co 4 42 33 7 70 16 28 14 14 2 2Total 27 1212 328 229 286 95 112 3 48 48 94 * , 181 Including two officials.2 Including two of f icials .Figure 95.—Pz. Kpfw. IV, Tank Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 567.g wCo HqTk Maint Plat .Tk Maint PlatTk Salv PlatOrd SecSig Equip Rep SecTnTotal1 Including three officials.UNIT „ t • « §.*O3111u£99714276l 6 l 3939>t,88^50503988616 16185».§eio8595937810820209.«a,2116223•§tn1Sj11413113 2 IS5417 4 44868211116Figure 96.—Tank Maintenance Company, Army Armored Division, total strength 230., 8 a * a 1 2 | ial la ia 1 ^ % *£ j IO E ; ft « U PL< tn j SOB fto Ko Ro^ o, n! S> SRegtl Hq 4 3 7 9 3 2 2 4RegtlHq. . 43 56 37 76 9 16 5 3 5 3 1.5 537-mm AACo. (SP) 1 ... 1 27 49 19 42 16 8 8 7 2Pz. Kpfw. FBn 27 250 439^ 316 29() HI 135 3^ 59 59 127 18Pz. Kpfw. V Bn 27 250 351 226 291 103 133 3 59 59 94 18Tk Maint Co 6 39 185 209 17 4 4 68 6Total 7

UNCLASSIFIEDMARCH .I945 TM-E 30-451c. THE TANK BATTALION. In the Army Mo- tain Division this is organized similarly to the SStorized Division this battalion is organized simi- tank companies in the SS Armored Division; itlarly to the tank battalions in the Army Armored may be replaced sometimes by an assault gun com-Division; it sometimes may be replaced by an pany.assault gun battalion.f. FLAME-THROWER TANK PLATOONS. Theseconsist of six flame-throwing Ps. Kpfw. IItanks,d. THE TANK BATTALION. In the S-S 1 Motor- and are frequently organic in the tank regimentized Division it is organized similarly to the tank (Army and SS). They are either a part. of thebattalions in the SS Armored Division.regimental headquarters company or are assignede. THE SS TANK COMPANY. In the 55" Moun- directly to the regimental headquarters,UNIT „ v, « « c fe | g~ io a 1 g £ 5 2 no& iiolBn Hq 4 4 7 11 1 3 2 4 2Bn Hq Co 4 37 104 61 61 24 27 3 8 8 19 8Sup Co ..... 7 59 211 226 21 30 4 98 2Tk C ; 4 50 39 6 69 18 34 17 17 2 2Tk Co .........*..... .......*. ......*. 4450 39 6 69 18 31 31 31 2 ?Tk Co ........ 4 50 39 6 69 18 31 31 31 2 2’Total ..... 27' 250 439 316 290 111 135 3 5 5 127 a 1111 Including two officials.2 Including five Armd vehicles.Figure 98.—Pz. Kpfw. V, Tank Battalion, SS Armored Division, total strevlgth 716.UNITA » -1 § & **J* 8 f :i i i § usCo Hq O1 ^ 2 PH2 (KU3 O

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASS\F\-EDa | • « "II 1 S jig . 1Bn Hq ... 4 3 7 10 3 1 1 3 2Bn Hq Co. 4 37 10-I 61 61 24 27 3 8 8 61 8sup Co ...... ....... 7 51 123 137 20 2-l 3 66 2Tk C o . . . . . , . ,...... 4 50 39 6 69 18 34 17 172Tk Co ...... 4 50 39 6 ‘69 18 34 17 172Tk Co......... .....4 50 39 6 69 18 34 17 172Total .. 27 % 241 351 226 291 103 133 3 291 291 94 2 11 Including two officials.a Including five Armd vehicles.Figure lOl.—Ps. Kpfw. IV, SS Tank Battalion, SS Armored Division, total strength 619.to to to5. Armored General Headquarters Unitsa. TH E GENERAL HEADQUARTERS PZ Kpfw. VI(Tiger) BATTALION. This type of tank battalionfrequently allotted to corps is the heaviest tankbattalion in the German Armed forces. ( See Egw-es102 to 103.)b. TH E GENERAL HEADQUARTERS PZ. Kpfzz. V(Panther) BATTALION. This is organized similarlyto the Pz. Kpf~. L’I (Tiger) battalion exceptthat some may have 17 tanks per companyinstead of 14.c. THE TANK FLAME-THROWER BATTALION.This is an independent battalion, normally foundemployed under armored corps. It consists ofthree companies of flame-thrower tanks, eitherPz. Kpfw. II, which has two flame throwers, orwith Pa Kpfw. III, which has only one flamethrower, but of greater range. Pz. Kpfw. II ta’nk,platoons originally were organic in the flamethrowertank battalion, but it is believed that theyhave been withdrawn because of their light weightand armament.d. THE HEAVY TANK COMPANY (Tiger)(FKL) (REMOTE CONTROL TANK) This companyis usually found allotted from General Headquartersbut may also be found ol-ganic in crackarmored divisions. It has 14 Tiger tanks and 36remote controlled B-IV tanks. (See Figure 104.)PL,UNIT * u JS d E a ?! @MI O

I MARCH 1945 UiCLASSlFiEDTM-E 30451GHQ PZ.KPFW. VI (TIGER) BNBN HQ BN HQ CO SUP CO TK CO TK CO TK COCO HQ CO HQ — CO HQ CO HQ CO HQCOM ANDRCN PLATMEDSEC— TK PLAT TK PLAT TK PLATENGI AND MAINT TK PLAT TK PLAT TK PLATRCN PLATSEC20-MM FUEL•PWKAA PUTSECTK PLAT TK PLAT TK PLATMUNSECADMSECFigure 103.—Heavy Tank Company (Tiger) (FKL) (Remote Control), tot@1 strengkt 188.UNIT „ u » a „ g§ ft a-3Co Hq 2 8 8 9 9 5 5 14 2 2 4 4 22 ^2 2 3Plat 1 13 18 2 30 5 9 4 4 9Plat 1 13 18 2 30 5 9 4 4 9Plat 14 18 2 30 5 9 4 4 9Maint Sec 6 3030 266 10 4 1 10Tns 7 30 22 1.5 2 1 9 10 1Total . 44 61 123 5 9 129 23 33 11 14 4 36 22 411—64Figure 104.—Heavy Tank Company (Tiger) (FKL) (Remote Control), total strength 188.

I MARCH 194~6. Organic Artillery UnitsIn the German Army much of the field artilleryand all the Army coast artillery and railway artillerybelong to the General Headquarters pool.The coastal artillery is in peace time exclusivelythe responsibility of the Navy, but in war timethe Army also has formed coast artillery unitsprincipally for the protection of coasts in occupiedareas. Coast artillery, Naval or Army, normallyis assigned to the sector command in which it islocated. Units are allotted from this pool toarmy groups or armies according to operationalneeds. They then may be sub-allotted to corpsor divisions, in which case they usually are placedunder the control of special artillery commandersuNCLASS\F\ED TM-E 30-451and staffs. Divisional artillery is frequently reinforcedby General Headquarters artillery, armyantiaircraft artillery, and projector units. Figures10.5-121.a. ARTILLERY REGIMENT (Artillerieregiment).One to a division, this regiment varies in compositionaccording to the type of the division.Several types exist.(1) In Infantry Division, Type 1944. Fourbattalions (I, II, and III equipped with 105~mmgun-howitzers and IV with 150-mm howitzers.,(2) 1~2 Volks Grenodicr Division. Four battalions(I equipped with 75-mm AT guns, II andIII with 105~mm gun/howitzers, and IV with 150mm howitzers).ARTILLERYREGIMENTJREGTL REGTL 75-MMHQ HQ BTRY GUN BN1105-MMGUN/HOWBNI105-MMGUN/HOWBN150-MMHOW BNBT«YHQBN HQBN HQ BN HQ BN HQCOM SECHQ BTRYHQ BTRY HQ BTRY HQ BTRY-MET SECBTRYBTRY BTRY BT«[YMAP RE-PRO SECBTRYBTRY BTRY BTItYBTRYFigure 10.5.~ Artillwy Regime~~t, Injantry Division, 1944 Type.II—65

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30451i 8 | mf I 1 i gz $6 A i IRegtl Hq 5 2 18 17 6 7 3 2 8 1Regtl Hq Btry......., 4 22 59 64 17 6 1 2 1 29 65 31st (Light) Bn19 109 424 460 71 38 17 12 7 1 96 516 132d (Liaht) Bn19 109 424 460 71 38 17 12 7 1 963d (Light) Bn19 109 424 460 71 38 17 12 7 1 964th (Medium) Bn..._. 19 109 5.57 604 71 37 17 12 4 1 124Total ...1 Including ten officials.Figure85'460 1,906 2,065106. -Artillery Regimmt,InfantInfantryr y307 164 69361230 7441Division, 1944 Type, total strength 2,451.CM 00 00 00 OO516 13516 13697 1334 2,318 56UNIT*„siBn Hq . .6 3 8 10 7 42 1Hq Btry Incl Tns . . 4 ’ 22 111 126 16 9 2 2 34150-mm How Btry ... 3 '28 146 156 16 8 5 4 30150-mm How Btry 3150-mm How Btry ... 3to toOO OO:jî146 156 16146 156 16aiOO OOB§^s| iM*i*i!

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451ARTILLERY REGIMENTREGTL REGTL LIGHTHO HO BTRY ARTY BNBTRYHOWRYCOM SEC BTRY BTRY BTRYHO HO HOMET SEC COM COM COM COMPLAT SEC SEC SECMAP RE- SURV GUN GUNGUNPRO SEC SEC ECH ECH ECHMUN MUN MUN MUNPLAT PLAT PLAT PLATODDSECTNFigwe llO.—Artillery Regiment, Yolks Greltadier Division.UNIT . V I 2 m g 5 4 | : 3s s i d I t g M iJ §1 lg I gg g «• aRegtl Hq .............. 5 3 7 7 3 5 4Regtl Hq Btry..... . 4 23 68 74 14 7 1 7 2 15 4 42 475-mm Gun B n . . . 18 123 372 416 55 36 11 18 30 1 71 8 267 12105-mm Gun/How Bn 16 85 270 300 43 28 10 12 22 1 56 6 211 10105-mm Gun/How Bn... 16 85 270 300 43 28 10 12 22 1 56 6 211 ”10150-mm How B n . . 16 86 277 308 43 28 10 12 18 8 87 6 327 13Total ........... 75' 405 1,264 1,405 201 132 45 18 24 12 99 13 285 30 1,062 491 Including ten officials.Figure Ill.—Artillery Regime&, Yolks Grenadier Divisions, total strength 1,744.it—67

MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451UNIT m u m « gBnHqHqBtry75-mm Gun Btry.75-mm Gun BtryTotalO S5 w Pi O p_, C/2 t-J5433318 ’324303333123710 11888888372910710010010041631313131355398883624 64414• 661833818830 1261.5151571292.2899056. 56562671527.21 In&ding two officials.Figure IL?.—Artillery Regiment, Yolks Grenadier Division, total strength 513.UNIT 2 „ &„ -S if 3 i tBn Hq 6 3 8 10 3 4 3 1 9 1Hq Btry 4 2 2 8 8 92 14 8 2326'90 5105-m, Gun/How Btry.. 3 3 0 8 7 99 13 8 4 6 81556 2105-mm Gun/How Btry.. .. 3 30 87 99 13 8 4 6 8 15 2 56 2Total . ..’16’ 85 270 300 43 28 10 12 22 1 56 6 211 101 Including two officials.Figure 113.—105mm Gun-Howitzer Battulion, Volks Grenadier Division, total strellgtlt 371.to to* 8 * 6 S f 3 g ! B J fo a I &6 i A 3 §a s> gBn Hq ................... 10 1 9 1Bn Hq Btry 6 23 3 95 8 100 10 14 3 45 29 100150-mm How Btry ........4 323 3095 87100 99 1314 824 6 6 1 29 109 6150-mm How Btry ........330308787999913138466 1 29 2 109 6Total!T7. . ..316 ’ 308687277993081343828410612618 8 87 6 327 13^7 1? 86 277 308 43 28 10 12 181 Including two officials.Figure 114.—150-mm Howitzer Battalion,. Volks Grenadier Division, total strength 379.CM CMII—68

UNCLASSIFI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451(3) In Arwzorcd and Motorized Divisions. divisions may be found with some variations inThree battalions (I normally equipped with two the General Headquarters pool.batteries of 105mm gun/howitzers and one batteryof 150-mm howitzers all self-propelled, IIb. TH E ARMY ANTIAIRCRAFT ARTILLERY BATequippedwith 105mm gun howitzers, and IIITALION (Heeresflakartillerieabteilung). One to aPanzer and a motorized division, consisting ofwith 1SO-mm howitzers). Panzer and Pan&rtwo %-mm antiaircraft batteries and one 20-mmGrenadier divisions also have a separate Armyantiaircraft battery.antiaircraft artillery battalion as an organic divi-sional component. In SS Panzer divisions a c. THE ASSAULT-GUN BATTALION (Sturwheavy artillery battalion, usually equipped with geschiitzabteilung). This sometimes replaces the170-mm guns, is added as the fourth battalion in antitank battalion in Panzer Grenadier divitheartillery regiment.sions. Those in company strength, but designated(4) In Light and Mountain Divisions. It has battalions organic in infantry, light, and mountainfour battalions—I and II equipped with 75mm divisions, were renamed P anzerjiigerkompanie inmountain howitzers and III with 105mm gun- the fall of 1943. Most of those in the Generalhowitzers. The organization of IV may vary Headquarters pool were renamed Assault Gunbut it normally is equipped with 1.50-mm howit- Brigades, however, a few General Headquarterszers.assault gun battalions are believed to have keptAll the types of artillery battalions organic in their designation.ARMORED ARTILLERYREGIMENTREGTl HO MIXED SP UGHT MEDIUMBTRY ARTY BN ARTY BN ARTY BN— BTRY HQ— BTRY HQ105-MMGUN/HOWBTRY ISPIMAP RE-PRO SEC105-MMGUN/HOWBTRY ISPI150-MMHOW BTRY(SPI' Sam* ~~~onimtion -I mdlum Orty h .Figwe US.—Armorrd Artillery Regimetzt, Army Armored Divisiotb.11—69

-s Jl UJUIII MARCH 19457. General Headquarters Artillery Unitsa. TH E ARTILLERY DIVISION. This consists ofa divisional staff co’ntrolling several artillery regiments.Such divisions were encountered on theEastern Front in the beginning of 1944 but it isbelieved that such a concentration of fire powermay also occur in other theaters. (See Figure122.)IT1STTTRkt Projector BnIO.5mm Arty Regt105mm Arty Regt.. .- O?182424-E6»iA51210CESWoccE2""> OMixed Arty Regt... . 24 12Total 18 48 24 24 ]?,Figure 122.—Artillery Divisionb. ARTILLERY BRIGADE (Artilleriebrigade).This is an independent artillery brigade consistingof a varying number of artillery batteries. All ormost artillery brigades have been converted toVolksartilleriekorps.c. TH E ASSAULT GUN BRIGADE (Sturmgeschiitzbrigade).This is a redesignated GeneralHeadquarters assault gun brigade. The strengthand fire power of the Assault Gun Battalions,which were greater than those of ordinary battallionsmay have warranted this differentiation innomenclature from organic assault gun battalionswhich were actually only of battalion strength, butthe redesignation also may have been motivated bythe aim to raise the morale. The guns of assaultgun brigades are sometimes referred to asSturm artillerie.d. TH E VOLKS ARTILLERY CORPS (Volksartilleriekorps).This corps is an independent GeneralHeadquarters unit which has been convertedfrom artillery brigades. The cords is probablycomposed of six battalions which may be equippedwith 75-mm antitank guns, 105-mm howitzers,and 150-mm and 170-mm howitzers.e. TH E FORTRESS ARTILLERY REGIMENT (Festungsartillericregiment).This controls severalfortress artillery battalions.f. TH E FORTRESS ARTILLERY BATTALION. (Festungsartillerieabteilung).These are static artillerybattalions organized in the summer of 1944,equipped with German and captured guns.g., TH E ARMY COAST ARTILLERY REGIMENTUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451(Heereskiistenartillerieregiment). This normallycontrols two or three army coast artillery battalionsand possibly any number of independentbatteries.h. TH E ARMY COAST ARTILLERY BATTALION(Heereskiistenartillerieabteilwtg). This battalionvaries in composition. It may be organized as aregular battalion with three batteries or as battalionstaff controlling a larger number of independentbatteries.i. TH E NAVAL COAST ARTILLERY BATTALION(Marineartillerieabteilung). This battalion, whichvaries in composition, belongs to the GermanNavy but may come tinder the Army coast cornmandin which it is located.j . ARTILLERY ANTITANK GUN BATTALION(Artillerie-Pak-Abteilung). Equipped with 75or %-mm antitank guns.k. MAPPING AND SURVEYING UNITS (KartenundVermessungseinheiten). Mapping and surveyingunits’ belong to the artillery althoughGerman orders have at times referred to themas a separate arm.(1) The Artillery Observation Battalion (Beobiachtungsabteilung).Normally allotted tocorps, but often attached to divisional artilleryregiments, it contains a sound-ranging battery,light-ranging battery, and meteorological platoon.(2) Light-ranging battery (Lichtessbatterie).Normally one to an observation battalion.(3) Sound-ranging battery (Schallmessbatterie).Normally one to an observation battalions(4) Army or Corps Map Reproduction Cellter(Armce or Korpskartcnstcllc). Previouslyknown as Armee-or Korpskartrnlager.(5) Printing and Survey Battalion (DruckundVcrmessungsabteilung). Probably similarto a Vcrmessungs-und Kartrnabteilung.(6) dlap Printing Ba.ttalion ( Karten-Druckcreiabteilung).(7) Survey and Mapping Battalion (Vermesswags-uadKartenabteilwzg). In General Headquarters,to be allotted to army groups or armies,obtains topographical information and prints mapsand photos which are used for operational purposes.(8) Astronomical Survey Platoon (AstronomischerMcsszug).(9) Observation Battalion Battery (Ballonbatterie)..(10) Magnet Suruey Battc>ry (Magnet-Mrssbatterie).

I MARCH 1945(11) Velocity Measurement Platoon (Velozitiitsmesszug).(12) Meteorological Platoon (Wetterpeilzug).Makes air analyses for artillery units but does notengage in weather forecasting.8. Antitank Units (Panzeriuger)Most of the antitank units are considered by theGermans as part of the armored (Pawer) arm.It should be noted, however, that the personnel ofthe antitank companies in infantry regiments andthe personnel in the antiaircraft companies in theantitank battalions belong to the infantry arm.Almost all German divisions include antitankbattalions in their organic components. Thesebattalions usually consist of three companies, ofwhich two are always antitank companies, whilethe third is either an antitank or an antiaircraftcompany. (See Figures 123 to 125.)It should be noted that the majority of all heavyantiaircraft guns are dual-purpose guns, and unitsequipped with them therefore may be employedfor the support of the antitank units.Similarly, artillery units, particularly thoseequipped with artillery antitank guns or lightcannons, at any time may be employed as antitankunits. In addition, there is a clear trend to equipalmost every unit in the German Armed Forceswith a generous allotment of bazookas and rocketantitank pistols, The allotment of these small anti-UNCLASSlFjEDTM-E 30.451tank weapons, however, has been so irregular thatthey had to be omitted in many of the tables oforganization listed herein.9. General Headquarters Antitank UnitsNumerous types of motor-drawn and self-propelledantitank gun units may be allotted from theGeneral Headquarters pool to corps or divisionsin accordance with tactical needs. Self-propelledGeneral Headquarters units sometimes have beenreferred to as assault gun battalions or brigades.The strongest tyee of General Headquarters antitankbattalions is the Tiger-P antitank battalion.It consists of three companies of fourteen 88-mmantitank guns mounted on the Tiger-P chassis.(See Figures 126 to 129.)The Fortress Antitank Gun Battalion (Festungs-Pak-Bataillon)is similar to ordinary antitankbattalions except that it has very limitedtransport facilities.The Fortress Antitank Gun Command (Festungs-Pak-Verband)is a staff controlling severalindependent fortress antitank gun companies in agiven sector.The Fortress Antitank Gun Company (Festufzgs-PakKompanie) is an independent staticantitank gun company attached for administrativepurposes to a fortress antitank gun command andfor tactical purposes to the field unit which mansthe sector. It is equipped with 76.2 (Russian) 'and 88-mm antitank guns.&

I MARCH 1945 UNULASSIHtu TM-E 30-451Bn Hu .. .Bn H i Co .1st (75-mm) AT Co2d3d(75-mm)(37~mm)TotalAT CoAA Co* Including three officials.(M-Dr).(SP )) .(SP)........).a 8 "a 1 2 i• ia la la J IO S35 14 1 ?.O3 203 442 3d17 1 1190

MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDT/GER-PAT BNBN HQBN HQ COAT COAT COAT COICO HQCO HQCO HQCO HQCOM PLAT AT PLAT AT PLAT AT PLATAA PLAT AT PLAT AT PLAT AT PLATENGR PLAT AT PLAT AT PLAT AT PLATMAINTSECMAINTSECMAINTSECMAINTSECTNS TNS TNSTNS1 The Pz. Jag. Tiger-P (Porsche) also known as the Ferdinand orElephant,’ThePz. consists of the 8.8-cm Stu. K.43/l on the Tiger-P Chassis.Figwe lZ6.—The TigwP Antitank Battalion,II—75

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451«

i MARCH 194510. Chemical Warfare UnitsChemical warfare battalions are organic in SSArmored Divisions, and possibly in some correspondinglystrong Army or Air Force divisions.Usually, however, they are allotted from GeneralHeadquarters to armies, corps, and divisions. Thestandard tactical units of the chemical warfaretroops are:a. ROCKET PROJECTOR BATTALION (MOTORIZED) (Werferabteilung (mot.)).b. HEAVY ROCKET PROJECTOR BATTALION (MOTORIZED (Schwere Werferubtei~ung (mot.)).c. MOUNTAIN ROCKET PROJECTOR BATTALION(Gebirgswerferabteilung).The. first two types of battalions are usuallycomponents of rocket-projector regiments, normallythree battalions per regiment. A rocketprojectorbattalion is designated heavy when ithas more than one heavy-projector battalion (210,300 or 280/320-mm). Two rocket-projector regimentsusually compose a rocket-projector brigade,one of which has been identified as Volkswerferbrigadewith all its components adding the prefix"Volks" to their unit designation. Rocket-projectorunits until now have been employed infiring high explosive, incendiary, and smokerockets, but all of them also are equipped andtrained for gas warfare. All rocket-projector battalionsalso are equipped and their personneltrained for street and road contamination as wellas decontamination.d. In addition to the above listed projectori s there is also an independent armoredprojector company (Panzerwerferbatterie) whichis an independent unit of two platoons, eachequipped with four 150-mm armored rocket projectors.is is a lo-barrelled projector mountedon a medium armored carrier. The company maybe employed either attached to a projector battalionor as an independent company. (For detailson rocket projector regiment (motorized)see Figures 130 to 132.)The following two units are not included by theGermans in the chemical warfare arm but are consideredparts of the medical services.e. TROOP DECONTAMINATION COMPANY (Truppcnentgiftungskompanie).This unit is composedof medical personnel attached to theGeneral Headquarters pool. It is motorized andis sent wherever high gas casualties occur. Thecompany is capable of decontaminating personnel,UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451clothing, and equipment. It carries supplies ofreplacement clothing, and is said to be able to decontaminateand reclothe 1.50 men per hour.f. TROOP DECONTAMINATION PLATOON (Truppenentgiftungm4g).It is reported that one ortwo of this type .of unit may be found in any typeof division. They are medical troops, equippedwith gas protective clothing and responsible forthe establishment of decontamination centers and,presumably, for the care of gas casualties.g. HORSE DECONTAMINATION UNIT (Pfedentgiftungstrupp).This is a veterinary unit, formedwithin veterinary companies and veterinary hospitalsfrom the personnel and with the equipmentalready within these units. It is motorized and canbe sent wherever needed. The capacity of thisunit is stated to be 10 to 20 horses per hour.h. AIR DEFENSE BATTALION (Luftschutzabteihng).This is an Air Force unit, used to clearup the results of enemy air attacks on importantinstallations. It is equippedfor decontaminationof terrain, streets, clothing, and equipment.i. GAS PROTECTION WITHIN THE ARMEDFORCES. Each headquarters down to battalionlevel has a gas officer, and each company has agas noncommissioned officer. They are chargedwith instructing their units in proper gas protectivemeasures and with periodic inspection of allgas protective equipment.so n at all ne l and in all units of a divisionare the Gas Detection Squads (Gasspiirtrupps)and the Decontamination Squads (&tgiftungstrupps).They are fighting troops with additionalgas training. Gas Detection Squads consist of onenoncommissioned officer and three privates. Theduties of the squad are simple gas detection and,upon occasion, minor decontamination. The squadis equipped with light protective clothing, gas detectors,and gas warning devices. DecontaminationSquads consist of one noncommissioned officerand six privates. They are equipped for decontaminationof personnel, terrain, weapons, andequipment.I I. Organic Engineer UnitsThis arm includes the regular combat engineers,as well as fortress engineers, construction engineers,and regional engineers. On the other hand,the engineer arm does not include railway engineersand railway operating troops, and thesetherefore are listed separately. (See paragraph.13, below.)Il—77

I MARCH 1945" It should be noted that the personnel of engineerplatoons in organic divisional units (otherthan the organic engineer battalion) belong to thearm of the unit which they are serving and not tothe engineer arm, although they are trained to performminor engineer functions.Engineer units often form small detachmentswithin their unit for special missions (such asflame-thrower detachments and mine-detection detachments).An engineer battalion (Pionierbataillon) is organicin every German division, varying instrength and composition according to the type ofdivision, (See Figures 133 to 135.)The engineer battalion in the Two-Regiment InfantryDivision is similar to that in the YoEksGrenadier Division except that its components areslightly weaker.The armored engineer battalion in the MotorizedDivision is very similar to the armored battalionin the Army Armored Division.The armored engineer battalion in the SSArmored Division is similar to the armored engineerbattalion in the Army Armored Division. Ithas, however, two bridge columns instead of onIyone.A mountain engineer battalion is approximatelyequal in strength to an armored engineerbattalion; however, it includes mountain climbingdevices and trestle bridge equipment.The parachute engineer battalion is believedto be organized similarly to the engineer battalionin the Infantry Division, 1944 Type.Bridge columns were, until 1943, an organiccomponent of the engineer battalions in all typesof divisions, At the time of the major reorganizationof German divisions the bridge columns werewithdrawn to corps from all but the armored divisions.The different types of bridge columnsare designated by various capital letters, i.e., "B,""J," "K" and "T," each of which represents thetype of bridge-building equipment used. Of these,the bridge column "B" has sufficient equipmentfor building longer bridges than does column "K."However, bridges built by column "B" are ofwood, while those built by column "K" are steel.Armored engineer platoons, Goliath, about 35men strong, may be included in any type of engineerbattalion. These platoons specifically areequipped for the handling of the cable-controlled,small, armored demolition-charge carrier, the GOliath(not to be confused with the large radio controlleddemolition carrier, B-IV, which is emUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451ployed by the Tiger (FKL) Company and thecrew of which belongs to the armored arm, whilethe Goliath crew belongs to engineers).12. General Headquarters EngineersAS the reorganizations of German divisions of1943 and 1944 have greatly reduced the strengthof most types of organic engineer battalions, theGeneral Headquarters engineer units have gainedconsiderably in their importance.Engineer bridging battalions consisting of fourbridging companies and an engineer park cornpany, with a total strength of about 900, may beallotted from the General Headquarters pool.Various types of bridge columns listed underparagraph 11, sub-paragraph g, are usually allottedto corps.Various types of engineer battalions, sometimescontrolled by regimental staffs, may be employedin the support of the division engineers accordingto tactical requirements.The construction engineers belonged formerlyto a separate arm of inferior status known as constructiontroops (Bautruppen). They were reclassifiedas engineers in the fall of 1943, and includedin the designation of their regiments andvarious types of battalions their new arm: engineers(Pioniere).For a complete list of identified engineer unitssee "Order of Battle of the German Army,"March, 1945, edition,13. Railway EngineersRailway Engineers (Eisenbahnpioniere or Eisenbahntruppen)constitute a separate arm. Allrailway engineer units are alloted by the GeneralHeadquarters pool.The railway engineer regiments (Eisenbahnpioniewegiment)consist of two battalions offour companies each. The companies operate independently,and frequently make use of prisonerof-warlabor. Their main work is the maintenanceand repair of tracks and the building of railwaybridges.Railway Construction Companies (Eisenbahnpionierbaukompanien)are specialist companiesengaged in various types of railway constructionwork.14. Railway Operating TroopsRailway Operating Troops (Eisenbahnbetriebstruppen)(formerly part of the railway engineers)11—78

I MARCH 1945were created as a separate arm in November,1943, and include all railway operating units.They are responsible for the operation of militarytraffic; for providing engineers, guards, andantiaircraft protection for military trains, and forsupervising the repair of bomb damage to railroads.15. Organic Signal Troops (Nachrichtentruppen)It should be noted that the personnel of signalplatoons and organic divisional units other than theorganic signal battalion belong to the arm of theunits in which they serve, although they aretrained to perform minor signal tasks. The propagandatroops, which formerly belonged to thesignal troops, are now a separate arm. (Seeparagraph 17 below.)A Signal Battalion {Nachrichtenbataillon) isorganic in every German division, varying instrength and composition according to the type ofdivision. (See Figures 136 to 138.)The signal battalions in all German divisionsare composed of a telephone company, a radiocompany, and a light signal column or a battalionsupply platoon. Their equipment and strength,however, vary considerably in accordance withtheir type of employment.16. General Headquarters Signal UnitsThese are allotted to all echelons of the GermanArmed Forces, from the Armed Forces HighCommand itself down to corps and divisions.The Armed Forces Signal Regiment (Fiihrungsnachrichtenregiment)is under direct controlof the Armed Forces High Command. Its primarymission is to maintain signal communicationsbetween Hitler's headquarters (Fuhrerhauptquartier),army groups, and army headquarters, asUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451well as among the three branches of the armedforces.The Armed Forces Signal Command (Wehrmachtnachrichtenkommandantur)is an interservicesignal headquarters which supervises operationsof permanent signal installations.The Army Group or Army Signal Regiment(Heeres- or Armeenachrichtenregiment) is foundwith either an army group or an army.The Field Signal Command (Feldnachrichtenkommandantur)is found in each army. It is astatic signal headquarters responsible for the permanentsignal installations in the army area.The Corps Signal Battalion (Korpsnachrichtenabteilung)is found with each corps.The Railway Signal Regiment (Eisenbahnnachrichtenregimcnt)controls a varying number ofrailway signal battalions.The Women's Auxiliary Signal Battalion(NachYZC.htenheIf’erinnenubteilung) is engaged insignal work, such as radio, telephone, and telegraphoperation.Independent specialist companies are engagedin various types of signal work. Their functionusually is shown by their title. For a completelist of identified signal units see "Order of Battleof the German Army", March, 1945 edition.17. Propaganda Troops (Propagandatruppen)Formerly belonging to the signal troops, thesebecame a separate arm in the beginning of 1943.They consist mainly of news reporters, photographers,film camera men, and radio commentators.Their main function is front line reporting,but they also conduct propaganda addressed tothe enemy as well as to German troops. The basicunit is the propaganda company : (See Figure139.)IL79

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451IOCKET PROJECTOR MOIMiNTIMTZIlogH t.grl 150-mm 310-mm 150-mm lightHq HqB.ry Praitctot Pro|oclor Proioctor Pro|octorBn Bn ctolHq InH q Proi.cl.1 Pto|«c!or ProloctorBntlq •try Bhv BlryComHq BhyHq BlryMq — BtryHqSurvPlot Cam ComS.cSocOb.n Proi.clOf Pre|«cter ProitclorSoc S*c Sac Soci.Rang*FindingPcol«ctr Prelector Pro|oclorfee Soc SocAT Sic — Am SMHMdrFigure 130.—Rocket Projector Regiment (motorized).UNIT e S B 2£ S Kg g£ g> IRegtl Hq 31 7 3Regtl Hq Btry .............. . 7 3 2Projector Bn ............._ ...._....... ....... 555 20 4 2 109 9Projector Bn 555 20 4 18 109 9Projector Bn . .......................... . . 4 18 109 9Light Projector Clm. . ................... 4 18 20 5Total 1^876 62 ~\2 54 374^ 37A Rkt projector Regt (Mtz) consists of either two 150-mm projector Bns plus one Hv projector Bn (210 or 280/320-mm), orthreeARkt150~mmprojector Bns. A Hv projector Regt (Mtz) consists of two Hv projector Bn (210 or 280/320-mm), plus O r 150-mmprojector Bns.Figure 131.—Rocket Projector Regiment (motorized), total strength 1,876.Hin11—80

IMARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4516 5< * 8 * °* 1 2 g h•s>O £ CM «u CM in J iÔBn Hq 2 3 10 10 3 2 3 ' 1Bn Hq Btry : 3 2 10 10 9 6 2 1 10 2Projector Btry ... 3 27 105 113 70 12 6 1 6 31 2Projector Btry ... 3 27 105 113 10 12 6 1 6 31 2Projector Btry 3 27 105 113 ' 10 12 6 1 6 31 ?,Am Clm 5 45 45 2 3Total . 14 101 440 464 44 47 . 20 4 18 109 9Figure 132.—Rocket Projector Battalion (motorized), total strengti 555.. 8 . 6- -i a o § Is ll I -3 i-y• g g £ d I I 3 •£ II flS II IBn Hq ... 9 1 14 60 65 18 . 7 4 2 14 10 4 1 10Engr Co 3 26 150 , 122 40 21 9 2 2 6 1 3 16 8 29Engr Co 3 26 150 122 40 21 9 2 2 6 1 3 16 8 29Engr Co (Bel) 3 26 150 123 38 22 9 2 2 6 1 3 16 8 29Total 18 1 92' 510 432 136 71 31 6 6 20 17 19~ 52 25 97* Including three officials.Figure 133.—Engineer Battalion, Infantry Division, 1944 Type, total strength 620.. s , JI i I § I !jAj j |i , . *Bn HqO is fc «u PM en J M ooS u,H S> S tf> (-. K pq9» 14 61 60 17 7 10 8 3 1 10 37Engr Co (Bel) 3 26 150 128 49 2 9 2 2 6 1 3 16 8 29 130Engr Co (Bel) 3 26 150 128 49 2 9 2 2 6- 1 3 16 8 29 130Total 15 1 66 361 316 115 11 18 4 4 12 12 14 35 17 68 2971 Including three officials.Figure 134.—Engineer Battalion, Volks Grenadier Division, total strength 442.v to «

lUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNIT :. 6 . 6- -i i

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIED30-451Co HqLight War Reporters PlatLight War Reporters PlatHv War Reporters PlatPropaganda PlatWorking DetTnsTotal1 Including eight officials.UNIT'm«oOua11 ’ 3 179 59 59 5 14 98 23 26 IS2 8 228 10 348 1 57 105 56 26Figure 139.—Propagan&Conlpawy, total strerrgth 21018. Organic Reconnaissance UnitsMost types of German field divisions include anorganic reconnaissance battalion, and the remainderhave strong reconnaissance companies.The following are the basic types of the divisionalreconnaissance units:The reconnaissance battalion of ‘the InfantryDivision, Old Type, consisted of a horse cavalrytroop, a bicycle troop, and a heavy weapons troop.For many years it was the basic reconnaissanceunit of the German Army. Since the end 1943,however, it has been replaced by the Fiisilier battalion.The Fiisilier battalion of the Infantry Division,1944 Type, consists of three rifle companies anda heavy weapons company. This battalion may beemployed either on reconnaissance missions or asa crack divisional reserve unit. (See Figure 140.)When, at the end of 1944, the tables of organizationfor the newly formed Yolks Grenadier divisionswere issued, the reconnaissance unit forthat type of division was specified to be a strongFiisilier company, highly mobile through a largeallotment of bicycles. (See Figure 141.)Front reports indicate, however, that there is atrend toward increasing the strength of theFiisilier battalion again.The armored reconnaissance battalion, aftermany reorganizations in recent years, became a. very strong and highly mobile standard type ofreconnaissance unit in most types of Germanarmored and motorized divisions. (See Figures142 and 143.)The Mountain Battalion (Aufkl~rungsubteilung)is organic in army and S S mountain divisionsand in light divisions. It consists of threebicycle companies and a heavy weapons company.One of the bicycle companies, however, sometimesmay .be replaced by a motorcycle company. Forthe strength and equipment of the mountainreconnaissance battalion, see Section V, Paragraph3.The Mobile Battalion (Schrlelle Abteilung)was formed in 1943 by merging the reconnaissanceand antitank battalions. A considerablenumber of infantry divisions adopted that type ofa reconnaissance unit. Early in 1944, however,the mobile battalions started to revert to theirformer status of a separate antitank battalion anda separate reconnaissance battalion. At that timethe latter was reformed and redesignated Fiisilierbattalion.19. General Headquarters Reconnaissance UnitsThe Mobile Batialion (Schzelle Abtehng) isa component of the Mobile Brigade (SchnelleBrigade). It normally is composed of a mountedtroop, two bicycle troops, and a heavy weaponstroop. It also may contain organic antitank units.The Mounted Regiment (Reiterregiwzent) recentlyhas been identified, A new table of organizationfor cavalry regiments exists, however, andnew units may be formed.The Motorcycle Company (Kradschiitzenkonzpanic)still may be found in organic reconnaissanceunits in mountain and light infantry divisionsand also a component of a Geneial Headquartersmotorcycle battalion.In addition to reconnaissance units mentionedin this paragraph, there are also numerous regimentaland battalion reconnaissance platoons andsquads, but the personnel in these units belongsto the arm of the regiment in which they areserving.11—83

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451* 8 2 4 8 $ d 3 8 &ES 8m sO !5 & eio pn W IJ X SS - S S>Bn Hq ....., 6 1 13 58 58 8 14 1 1 2 16 4 13R Co (Bcl) 2 21 119 96 22 22 1316 16 ?7R Co 2 21 119 96 22 28 1315 11 ?,7R Co 2 21 119 96 22 22 13 ?, 15 11 27Hv Wpn Co.. 3 3 165 131 48 29 3 6 6 4 7 3 15 27 51Total 15 1 113 580 477 122 127 477 12 6 4 8 5 102 57 16S1 Including two officials.Figure 140.—Fusilier Battalion, Infantry Division, 1944 Type, total strength 708.to to< 3 < U 1 1 I ! H £ 1 42HCo. Hq ... .*. 1 8 18 18 3 7 1 3 2 18 18Sub-MG Plat (Bcl). ....... 1 3 31 7 2 262 2 1 6 32Sub-MG Plat (Bcl).... 4 31 7 2 26 2 2 1 6 32R Plat (Bel) 4 31 22 4 9 3 2 1 6 32Hv Wpn Plat ... 1 5 34 1 1 1 2 2 6 5 1 29Inf .How Set 4 4 19 3 5 1 2 4 16 32Total .. .. 3 28 169 28 28 84 8 2 2 2 1 19 10 56 1661 May be replaced by a Fii* Bn similar to the Inf Bn (Bel).Figure 141.—Fusilier Company, Volks Grenadier Division, total strength 200.(3 g '£ SUNIT >i ,. ^ S g . 1 ; S E * « * E ^§ ^ (E S6 jg ^ 3 ffi s i eg gcBBn Hq 4 6 122 13 4 5 3 4 4Bn Hq Co , 3 333 3 88 0 27 61 28 53 3 3 3 ?.3 29 53 7 45 33 25 13 23 ?.Armd Ren Co . 3 3636 144^ 83 55 45 29 4 2 6 ? 21 4... 3 39 125 125 51 51 44 2 2 30 -\Hv Wpn Co 4 32 122 67 32 32 19 6 6 6 27 4sup co T 48 156 172 1 6 4 7l 3Total 2T- 27 1 223 692 434 300 206- 147 4 10 6 434 13 199* 77.1 Including three officials.2 Including 124 Armd vehicles.Figure 142.—Armored Reconnaissance Battalion, Army Armored Division, total strength 942.11—84

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451UNIT » u 2 g » S« u | B .« 8 « SI 1 i s ?S U ?!.a viO fc (£ P4U S en J SS EH1 8 10 12 3 4 2 475-mm Gun Plat 1 7 ?4 4 17 11 7, 6 881-mm Mort Plat 1 12 43 24 20 12 2 6 8Engr Plat 1 5 45 27 13 11 13 6 7 1Total 4 32 122 67 53 38 19 6 6 6 27* 41 Inc'uding 25 Armd vehicles.Figure 143.—Heavy Weapom Company, Armored Reconnaissance Bnttaliou, total strength 1UNIT « » Bp « O ¥„O £ PH ,-J i-c/jRegtl Hq 5 5 29 2 4 32 13 3 1Hv SL Bn 16 97 550 9 30 6 29 85 16Hv SL Bn 16 97 550 9 30 6 29 85 16Hv SL Bn 16 97 550 9 30 6 29 85 16Total . . 53* 298 1,692 29 90 18 94 255 521 Including ten officials.Figure 144.—Heavy Searcltlight Regiment (mm-motorized), total strength 2,043.20. Air Force Antiaircraft Field Units and Air ForceAntiaircraft Units in the Zone of the Interiora. MOBILE UNITS. The composition of antiaircraftunits larger than batteries varies greatlyin accordance with local conditions, as alreadyindicated in Section V, paragraph 17. Normallyan antiaircraft battalion consists of three to fivebatteries, with a maximum of eight. An antiaircraftregiment normally con&.ists of from threeto four battalions, with a maximum of six. Divisionshave three or four regiments.Motorized antiaircraft units have a smallernumber of components than do non-motorizedunits. In accordance with their type of motorizationthey are designated:• Motor-drawn (mot. or mob. 2); mounted onhalf-tracks (w& G1); self-propelled (nlot. 3.).Non-motorized units are designated:Mobile (v for verlegeftihig) ; or Static (O forortsfest).The personnel strength of motorized units isusually approximately double that of non-motorizedones.Mobile antiaircraft units have large numbersof trailers but very little motorization and dependfor mobility on separate transportation units,as already stated in Section V, paragraph 17.Static units usually are employed for the protectionof specific targets.For the difference in German designations ofantiaircraft units and antiaircraft units in theZone of the Interior, see Figure 145.The main components of the non-motorized antiaircraftdivision described in Section V, paragraph17, are one heavy searchlight regimentand three antiaircraft regiments (see Figures 144to 150). Any of the above units may also be encounteredas motorized antiaircraft with correspondinghigher strength. However, the basictactical motorized antiaircraft units are the mixedantiaircraft battalion, the light antiaircraft battalion,and the heavy searchlight battalion. Anycombination of these units totaling three or fourbattalions may be components of a motorized antiaircraftregiment, but most frequently regiments.of three mixed antiaircraft battalions probablywill be encountered. (See Figures 151 to 154.)The Germans designate antiaircraft unitsequipped with 20-mm or 37-mm guns as light;U—85

l MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451antiaircraft units equipped with 88mm, 105-mm,128-mm, or 150-mm as heavy (or, in the case ofthe latter, possibly super-heavy) ; and antiaircraftunits including both these types of equipment asmixed. Similarly, they designate units with 60-cmsearchlights as light, and with 150-cm or 200-cmsearchlights as heavy. The following types ofantiaircraft battalions frequently may be encountered:Motorized BattalionsMixed antiaircraft battalions (three heavy andtwo or three light batteries).Light antiaircraft battalion (three or fourlightbatteries).Searchlight antiaircraft battalion (three orfour heavy searchlight batteries).N on-motor iz ed and Static BattalionsMixed antiaircraft battalion (four heavy andtwo light batteries).Light antiaircraft battalion (three light batteries).Heavy antiaircraft battalion (four heavy batteries).Searchlight antiaircraft battalion (four heavysearchlight batteries).Barrage balloon battalion (four to six barrageballoon batteries).The German Air Force has the main responsibilityfor antiaircraft defense of the Zone of theInterior and of the Field Army. For the employmentof antiaircraft units with the latter, seeFigure 145,b. RAILWAY ANTIAIRCRAFT (Eisenbahnflak).Railway antiaircraft regiments consist of threeheavy or two heavy and one light antiaircraftbattalions. Each railway antiaircraft battalionconsists of three to four batteries which are thetactical units in the employment of the railwayantiaircraft guns. Railway batteries usually consistof single- or four-barrelled 20-mm, 37-mm,88-mm, 105-mm, or 128-mm guns mounted oilrailway cars.c. TOWER MOUNTED ANTIAIRCRAFT BATTALIONS (Tunnzfl~kabteilung). Tower mounted antiaircraftbattalions are equipped with 20-mm (single-barrelled,and four-barrelled) and 105-mmand 128~mm double-barrelled antiaircraft guns.The guns are mounted on one or two platformsof concrete antiaircraft towers constructed in thevicinity of vital installations and of large cities.d. ARMY ANTIAIRCRAFT BATTALION (Heeresflak).Army antiaircraft battalions are foundorganically in all armored, motorized, and parachutedivisions, as well as in all types of S S divisions,They are discussed in paragraph 6, as theybelong to the artillery arm.e. LIGHT ARMY ANTIAIRCRAFT BATTALION(Fla BatailZo?z). Light army antiaircraft battalionsare found in General Headquarters. Theyare discussed in paragraph 3, as they belong inthe infantry arm.f. LIGHT AR~IY ANTIAIRCRAFT COMPANY (FZdKowzpanie). Light army antiaircraft companiesare found with most types of ground personnel,mostly antiaircraft personnel. The strength ofthe regiment is about 3,000 men, and it is believedto have three or four battalions of threeor four batteries each. Each battery of about150 men probably operates three launchingsites, so that the battalion may operate betweennine and twelve and the regiment between 27 and48 launching sites.g. NAVAL ANTIAIRCRAFT UNITS (MarineFlak). The following are the three types ofnaval antiaircraft units:Antiaircraft guns mounted on board of shipsand manned by the ship's crew.Antiaircraft units manning guns for the protectionof shore installations (usually static batteries).Antiaircraft batteries mounted on barges forthe protection of approaches to vital naval installations.r11—86

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451z. as .O "5 s>•2 s

l MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451UNITm 6 I eO !Z PH iJ — C/i N!fisBn Ha ..................._............ 8 l 14 44 1 13 5 3Com Sec ......................... 3 16 4 1SL Btry 2 20 125 2 7 2 3 20 3SL Btry .. ... 2 20 125 2 7 2 20SL Btry ............................... 2 2 7 2 8 1 20SL Btry 2 8 1 2 8 1 20Total *: 16 1 97 550 9 30 6 29 85 161 Including two officialkFigure 146.—Heavy Searchlight Battalion (non-motorized), total strength 662.<

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451Bn Hq 8' 17 51 1 15 7 33 16. 4 1r-"^ -mm Btry 2 21 81 2 2 6 2 9 28%mm Btry ..*................,2 21 816 2 9 288-mm Btry2 21 812 6 2 9 288-mm Btry 2 21 812 6 2 9 2Total Iff 104 391 9 8 24 a 27 43 121 Including two officials.a Some Hv AA Bns may consist of four 105.mm Btries with a total of 16 guns.UNITFigure 150.—Heavy Antiaircraft Battalion (non-motorized), total stresgtlz 511.Regtl Hq .................... 9 1 34 123. 140 20 10 2 25 5"^ Mixed AA Bn ............... 39 403 908 1,OSL 241 17 30 18 12 339 12Mixed AA Bn ............... 39 403 908 1,051 241 93 17 30 18 12 339 38 12Mixed AA Bn 39 403 908 1,051 241 93 17 30 18 12 339 38 12Total 126* 1 1,243 2,847 3,293 743 289 53 90 54 36 1,042 119 361 Including ten officials.UNITUNITOffs OffsNCOs NCOsFigure 151.—Antiaircraft Regiment (moforized), otal stre*lgtk 4,216.Bn Hq and Corn Plat 6 a 31 93 74 41 19 1 28 11@-mm Btry 4 53 110 149 12 10 2 4 4 36 3_ 88-mm Btrv 4 53 110 149 12 10 2 4 4 36 388-mm Btry 4 110 149 12 10 2 4 4 36 36 65 139 151 51 14 2 9 3 58 5 420-mm Btry 6 65' 139 151 51 14 2 9 3 58 54 '20-mm Btry (Four-Barreled) ... 7 73 151 163 59 15 4 12 59 6 4Hv AA Clm 2 10 56 65 3 1 2 28 2Total 39» 403 908 1,051 241 93 17 30 18 12 339 38 12* In some Bns replaced by a 37.mm Btry with nine guns.9 Including two officials.taoPvts PvtsNCOsRs orRs or CbnsCbnsFigure 152.—Mixed Antiaircraft Battalion, Anhrcraft Regimen ( (motorized), total strength 1,350.PvtsPistols PistolsSub-MGs Sub-MGsLMGsCM CM CMLMGs LMGs20-mm AAGuns20-mm AA 20-mm AAGuns Guns88-mm AAGuns20-mm AA 20-mm AAGuns (Four-Guns (Four-Barreled)Barreled)88-mm AAGuns88-mm AAGunsMtrVehiclesMtrVehiclesMtrVehiclesTlrsMtrcisMtrcis60-cm60-cmSLs SLs MtrcisII—89

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451UNIT20-mm Btry........*............20-tnm BtryLight AA ClmTotalm . z 2 Q Q«B 8 « Si 1 ? § | I A 3 reO •5 l fc ft « U PH en J °O26 81 62 36 18 1 62’ 8.....a. 6 65 139 151 51 14 9 3 4 58 56 6 139 151 51 14 2 9 3 4 58 S6 6 139 151 51 14 2 9 3 4 58 51 6 1 56 2 1 2324 1 227 549 571 191 571 7 571 9 1 220 51 Including two officials." Some light AA Bns may have four Btries and about 1,000 men.Figure 153.—Light Antiaircraft Battalion (motorized), total strength 800.Bn Hq and Corn PlatHv SL Btry .Hv SL BtryHv SL BtryTotal1 Including two officials.Some Hv SL Bns may have four Btries and about 950 men.O B AH >-) -it/1 N(/3. 6 l20

I MARCH 1945from any other. German organizations above thedivision should be regarded as. basic t h eframeworks, with a minimum of organically assignedcombat and administrative units; branches.forces are formed around these frameworks.An effort always is made to retain a a n dnumber of combat units in the various types ofGeneral Headquarters pools. Consequently, whena large German unit, such as a corps or a m a nis engaged in combat it almost always will bereinforced by units from the General Headquarterspools. When the amount of reinforcementis large, additional commanders and staffs alsowill be attached. The great influence which GeneralHeadquarters reinforcements can have onthe combat power of a standard th esuch as a division, should not be overlooked.The German system as thus outlined is bothrigid and flexible. It is rigid in the sense that allthe units in any single pool are as nearly Theseas possible; it is flexible because the principle ofcombining units from the various pools is utilizedto obtain any sort of combat organizationwhich may be required for a given purpose. Every German task force assigned to a missionis tactically and administratively an independentand self-contained organization. Coordinationwith other units is arranged in advance. Theforce never is required to depend on other unitsto carry out its mission.The German system of organization for coun tis both economical and effective. It enables thecommanders to concentrate combat power at themost vulnerable points without changing havedispositions. The method also is deceptive to theenemy, as it prevents an easy estimate of Germanstrength in any particular situation.The administrative organization for supply andevacuation is arranged in a manner similar tothat of the combat organization and is employedin conformity with the principle that the administrativeplan must support the tactical or strategicalplan. Like the tactical organization the Germanadministrative organizations differ with thesituation.One of the outstanding characteristics of theGerman military system is unity of command.All units engaged on a single mission are underone commander, who is charged by one twowith responsibility for the success of the tars,sion. As a corollary, two or more German commandsnever are assigned the same mission trai nUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451taneously. Units from the Air Force, the Navy,the Army, and the Armed SS all serve togetherunder a commander chosen from any of the fourbranches. Likewise, in basic training great emphasisis placed on cooperation among the servicesand among different branches of the same service.To sum up, it always should be borne in mindwhen confronting any situation involving Germanforces that the predominating note in allGerman military thought is the combination ofall arms and services necessary for any specificmission into a task force (or combat team) undera single commander.This holds true for all German task forces fromthe highest echelons down to the reinforced regiments,battalions, and companies. (See Figures155 to 163.)b. TH E ARMORED BRIGADES (Panzerbrigaden).These were formed in the summer of 1943 withthe following components:Brigade headquarters.Brigade headquarters company.Tank battalion.Panzer Grenadier Division (armored).Armored engineer company.Sixty-ton column.Medium maintenance platoon.Several armored brigades, however, were encounteredin the field with two Panzer Grenadierbattalions and two tank battalions. Almost allarmored brigades located on the Western Fronthave been incorporated into armored divisions,which were badly in need of replacements.c. ARMORED TRAINS (Eisenbahnpanzersuge).Armored trains have been employed by the Germanssuccessfully since the outbreak G e r with the objective of surprising the wa r by thesudden occupation of a strategically located railroadstation or to protect vital lines of communicationagainst partisan and guerrilla attacks.Armored train, Type EP-42, consists of six armored,infantry, artillery, and antiaircraft railwaycars. The train is armed with two 105-mm gunhowitzersmounted on special cars; two antiaircraftcars, each with one four-barrelled, 20-mmantiaircraft gun, one 76.2-mm Russian gun; andtwo infantry railway cars gun two ; an dtars, one heavy machine gun, and 22 light machineguns. The- total Strength of that armoredtrain is about 113.11—91

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451li2Islilij , • : . iiI111111**11 Mi1ni-i1 1 1iDIvHqtil11—92

i,

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30451UNCLASSIFIEDOF AMIDIUM COMBAT-.1A1C*(Port Mtil1CeH,-QDH-I75-mm AT-BoteafcaWoftlrf) X,-L•o»»otaFigure 15?.—Exampleof a Medium Combat Il‘eam.UNIT6 soBE m '|8 .Bel RegtSig Co (Mtz)Arty BnEngr Co (Bel)M T UnitsAmb Sec . .Total:. ....... ....Iff 461153"6? 65278510020314071,510so400201242,0969193210512113191203434223322111212Figure 15X’.—-Example of a J4edium Combat Team, total strength 2,568.Regtl HqRegtl Hq Co-.Bel BnUNI TitsO....... 7515oUJ5128100m SPH16165550%HJEsS937 6 9W J• o£SJZiJBel BnInf How PlatAT Co (Part Mtz)Total ....151346G461101029.278278^570551541,510U1038439161210193434332211Figure 159.—Bicycle Regiment, Medium Combat Team, total strength 1,834.Jt-94

I MARCH I94SUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451UNIT. 3 . s a i I » § I It 1 I 1O Z PH «SJ CH w ,J B Bid, SS ffi N-

I MARCH 1945d. MILITIA (Volkssturm) UNITS. In October,1944 a decree was issued by Hitler callingup all able-bodied German men between the agesof 16 and 60 for the defense of the Fatherland.That decree calls for the creation of a people'smilitia (Yolkssturm) under the leadership ofHimmler in his function as Commander-in-Chiefof the Replacement Training Army.It is believed that the Party in general, andthe Storm Troop Organization (SA) and theNational Socialist Motor Corps (NSKK) in particular,have been charged with the part timetraining of these men who are to remain on theirjobs until a direct threat endangers their area.In such an emergency they will be called to theranks, come under the command of the army,and be issued weapons, brassards with the inscription"Deutscher Volksstumn Wehrmacht" andUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45 iidentification papers as members of the GermanArmed Forces. Their employment probably islimited to defensive fighting in trenches, woods,and streets, since their units are equipped withsmall automatic weapons, machine guns, and bazookasonly, but it is possible that light and mediummortars will be added later.It is difficult to determine definitely the tablesof organization for militia units as these will varygreatly in accordance with local conditions andthe manpower and weapons available, but indicationsfrom the front lines point toward thefollowing average tables of organization for thebasic militia unit, the Militia Battalion. (SeeFigures 164 to 167.)In some cases several militia battalions may becombined in a militia regiment.MILITIA(VOLKSSrURM) BATTALIONBN HO CO CO CO1COCO HO PLAT PLAT PLAT. .XPLAT,!i1PLAT HO SQD SQDSQDSQD |Figure 161.—Militia (Volkssturm)Battalion.11—96

I MARCH 1945 «*MNM*I*» I mr>i AOOinrrv TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDUNITc o «S "SS > »£ .2 •§ Sm u PMJ MJ PL, «u t en jBn Hq 1 2 - 1 2 2 2 2 4Co 1 4 14 83 38 13 33 9 9 9Co 1 4 14 83 38 13 33 9 9 9Co I 4 14 83 38 13 3l 9~ 9 9Co 1 4 14 83 38 13 33 9 9 9Total 1 : i 6 17 58 334 154* 54 136 36 36 361 With companies of maximum strength the Bn total may increase to 1-6-21-90-570 or 688 men and the firepower accordingly.Figure 165.—Militin (17nlk.wturm) Battalion, total strettgth 416-688.bUNIT S jj Si ' £ So JSS ^S > »J .2 •§U PkiJ «J d, «U fewCo Hq . . .... • 1 1 2 2 2 1 3Plat 1 4 27 12 4 10 3 3 3Plat 1 4 27 12 4 10 3 3 3Plat 1 4 27 12 4 10 3 3 3Total 1 1 4 14 83 38 13 33 9 9 9x With four Plats of four Sqds each the Co strength may increase to 1.5-22-142 and the fire power accordingly.Figure 166.—Militia iVolksst&m) Company, total stre?Jgth 102-170.UNIT b b %Plat Hq 1 1Sqd .. .. 1Sqd 1Sqd 1 8 3PvtCO 00 00inKn £.23 1 l3 1 3 i 1 13 1 3 i 1 151 3 i 1 1Total 1 1 4 27 12 4 10 3 3 31 With four Sqds per Plat the Plat strength may increase to 1-5-35 and the fire power accordingly.Figure 167.—Militia (Volkssturm) Platoon, total strength 3241.II—97

I MARCH 19451. GeneralSection VII. SERVICE TROOPSEvery German division includes in its organiccomponents the divisional services which vary instrength in accordance with the size and type ofthe division. The divisional services of all typesof divisions, however, are organized on the basisof the same standard pattern and include the followingcomponents:Divisional Supply Trodps (Nachschubtrup-Pen).Administrative Troops (Verwaltungstruppen).Medical Troops (Sanitiitstruppen).A Field Post Office (Feldpostamt).Motor Maintenance Troops (Kraftfahrparktruppen),varying in size in accordance with thedegree of motorization of the division.Veterinary Troops (Veteriniirtruppen). Onlyin divisions with horse transport.A Military Police Detachment (Feldgendarnzeyietrupp)which in some divisions is withdrawnfrom the divisional services and assigned to thedivisional headquarters.There is a trend in the German Armed Forcesto centralize all types of service units. It beganearly in 1944 in the armored division when servicecompanies were set up for each battalion oftank and Panzer Grenadier regiments and for thearmored reconnaissance battalion. Late in 1944Volks Grenadier divisions were formed with infantrybattalions having supply platoons insteadof the traditional battalion and company trains,and with divisional services combined into a divisionalsupply regiment. This was done as a partof the policy to facilitate a more even distributionof all types of supply with less personnel and tofree company commanders from any other thanoperational duties.For a compilation of the divisional services ofthe three most numerous types of divisions seeFigures 168 to 170.2. Supply TroopsThe supply and motor maintenance units ofthe German Army, originally combined undertransport troops, were divided later into two separatearms. The motor maintenance units weregrouped under the motor maintenance troops (seeparagraph below), while the transport and supplyunits were classified as supply troops. RailwayII—98UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451operating troops are an independent arm althoughthey work ‘in conjunction with the supply troops.The commander of the division rear services(Kowwnandeur dcr Divisiomrrachschubtruppen-Kodina), formerly known as Divisionsnachschubfiihrer-Dinafu),commands the divisional servicetroops.The light column (Leichtc Kolomze) found inmost types of infantry regiments, consists of 39wagons carrying all types of supplies except rations.It serves as a supply reserve for thesubordinate battalions.The trains (Trosse) are battalion and companysupply units. They consist of a combat train, arations train (a second rations train in the battalion),and a baggage train. The company baggagetrain and the second battalion rations trainare usually motorized. The second battalion rationstrain consists of one truck hauling suppliesfrom the division distribution point.The repair company (Instandestzungskonzpanie)repairs equipment and weapons except motorvehicles. Several units of this type may be foundin a division.3. Administrative TroopsAdministrative troops usually include a numberof civilian specialists (Beamte) in various positions.These are listed in the preceding tablesof organization as officers, but designated in footnotes,as officials.The rations supply office (Verpflegungsamt)supervises the requisitioning and supply of rationsfor troop units. It erects rations supply distributingpoints which are refilled regularly by thebakery and slaughter units and from which thetroop units obtain their rations.The slaughter platoon, found in all i nslaughters cattle which it preferably procureslocally. Existing installations are used wheneverpossible.The bakery company found in all inuses wherever possible, existing local installations.4. Medical TroopsOne or two medical companies, and one to threemotorized ambulance platoons are organic componentsof all divisions. Until 1943 most typesof divisions) included also a field hospital, butthese have been withdrawn to higher echelons and

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30451UNITCOOtfci OO 55Div Sup 14 62 366 294 36 5 26 60‘ 13 103 392Workshop Co 6 21 110 113 24 4 21 1 6Adm .. 10 34 193 216 14 3 8 3 3 1sMed Units .. 21 76 372 413 32 7 12 74 4 17 3 46Vet Co 4 19 133 130 24 2 6 8 2 11 1 105Fid Post Office 3 7 8 15 3 1 4Total .. SS 1 219 1,182 1,181 133 17 57 204 23 131 25 5431 Including 22 officials.Figure 168.—Division Services, Gewnan Iltfantry Division, 1944 Type, total strel~gtl 1,459.UNIT „ „ « S•3'3O £ H, SS(J KDiv Sup . .. 15 95 640 695 50 5 46 122 35Adm . ' 10 34 193 220 14 3 12 37 25Med Units 23 83 402 450 58 11 95 10Maint Units 12 48 279 309 30 14 60 10M P Det 1 25 7 19 10 5 2 5Fid Post Office 3 7 8 15 3 1 4Total 64? 1 292 175299 1,52 l77O88 1,70 165 13 86 323. 851 Including 18 officials.Figure 169.—Division Sewices, Army Arlnored Division, total strerlgtla 1,885.UNIT » » g » | JS ^ |I g I a I I $ 2 2 gjRegtl Hq 8 6 12 18 5 3 1 6 3 40120 Ton Clm (Mtz) 2 17 95 112 2 2 19 130 Ton Clm 2 12 80 92 2 1 42 100 530 Ton Clm 2 12 80 92 2 1 42 100 5Sup Plat 1 3 60 65 1 1 19 48 3Ord Co 3 . 18 67 83 3 1 5 1 10Maint Plat 2 g 50 58 2 1 6 1 4 •>Adm Co . 8 • 2 2 134 156 8 3 28 1 11 5Med Co 10 34 150 167 27 2 16 2 17 2 46 20Atnb Plat 1 5 34 40 21 2Vet Co 4 15 100 102 17 2 7 1 10 1 94 inFid Post Office .. 3 9 6 6 12 3Total '... 46 l 161 868 951 121 3 15 111 12 130 18 388 1031 Including eight officials.Figure lfO.—Supply Regiment, Volks Grenadier Division, total strength 1,675.11—99

I MARCH 1945are being allotted to .divisions in accordance withthe tactical requirements. For the procedure ofevacuation of wounded and the definition ofmedical units see Section V, paragraph 3.5. Field Post OfFiceThere is a field post office in every Germandivision ,acting as a branch post office of an armyof which the division is a part.6. Motor Maintenance TroopsThe supply and motor maintenance units of theGerman Army, which originally combined alltransport troops (Fah&uppen), were dividedinto two separate arms in the fall of 1942. Theransportation and supply units now are classihedas supply troops (see paragraph 2 above),while the motor maintenance units are groupedunder the motor maintenance troops. Their greatefficiency has been proved when servicing numerousmakes of motor vehicles taken from all occupiedcountries. Workshops are designated usuallyas workshop companies (Werkstattkompanien),or as mobile repair shops (Kruftwugenwerkstiitte).7. Veterinary TroopsThe great majority of German divisions usehorses as means of transportation and have a veterinarycompany which consists of a horse collectingplatoon, a horse hospital, and a fodderplatoon. Because of the importance which horsesstill play within the German Army, there is anelaborate system of veterinary units and horsehospitals in the field as well as in the Zone of theInterior.8. Military policeThe military police duties are divided betweenthe military police (Feldgendarmerie), whosemain task is the maintenance of traffic discipline,and guard troops (Wachtruppen), primarily concernedwith the guarding of vital military installationsin the field. The latter also take charge ofprisoners of war and escort them to the rearareas. Patrol duties and the maintenance of militarydiscipline are carried out both by army andSS patrols and the ,military police.The guard battalion is an independent battalionassigned to army groups and armies.UNCLASSIFIEDA military police battalion is found with eacharmy and consists of three or four military policecompanies.Military police detachments are organic in everyGerman division. They were originally a part ofthe divisional services, but may be found now frequentlywithin the division headquarters.9. Miscellaneous UnitsFor a list of all identified units of the servicetroops arm, see "Order of Battle of the GermanArmy," March 1945 edition.10. AbbreviationsAll abbreviations are according to TM 20-205and/or FM 21-30. It should be noted that thereare no official abbreviations for:BazookaPistolCorpsPoolFlame thrower Post OfficeGun • VehicleLightWorkshop% MediumThe abbreviation Sub-MG has been adoptedinstead of SMG to avoid confusion with SchweresMachines Gewelzr which means "Heavy MachineGun."The following list of abbreviations is used inconnection with the organization charts.AArmyA AAntiaircraftAA/AT Antiaircraft-AntitankAdm ses ...AdministrationAmbAmbulanceArmd C Armored CarArtyArtilleryAsgd -4ssignedATAntitankAtchd AttachedBar P,ln Barrage BalloonBclBicycleBnBattalionBrBridge13try. I3atteryCCombatC of S Chief of StaffCbnCarbineCG .........Commanding GeneralCHChaplainClmColumnCmlChemicalCoCompany

I MARCH 1945ComCommandComdt CommandantC Sch Combat SchoolCtCombat teamDecon DecontaminationDetDetachmentDivDivisionEchEchelonEngrEngineerFinFinanceFidFieldFiisFiiselier- Fwd Ech Forward EchelonGHQ General HeadquartersGpGroupGrenGrenadierGSGeneral StaffGun/How .... Gun-HowitzerHHorseH-Dr Horse-drawnH-Trk Half-trackHowHowitzerHqHeadquartersHv MG He.avy Machine GunHv Wpn Co.. . Heavy Weapons CompanyInclIncludingInfInfantry-1ntIntelligenceJAJudge AdvocateLMG Light Machine GunLn O Liaison OfficerMedMedicalMetMeteorologicalMG . Machine GunMortMortarMP ..... : ...Military policeMTMotor TransportMtMountainMtdMountedMtrMotorMtrcls MotorcyclesMtr-Dr Motor-drawnUNCLASSIFIED . E 30-451MtzMotorizedMunMunitionsNC0 .......Noncommissioned OfficerOffsOfficersOrdOrdnancePersPersonnelPlatPlatoonPrcht ParachutePvtsPrivatesPzPanzerPz. Gren Panzer GrenadierPz. Kpfzu Panzer K awzp fzvag en (Tank)R...RifleRadRadioRcnReconnaissanceRegtRegimentRegtl RegimentalRep1ReplacementRepro ReproductionRktRocketr ack Rear echelonSARSemiautomatic RifleSchSchoolSetSectionServServiceSigSignalSLSearchlightspSelf-propelledSpclSpecialistSp Stf Special StaffSqSquadSub-MG Sub-Machine GunsupSupplySurgSurgeonSurvSurveyTatTacticalTlrTrailerTnTrainTngTrainingTpTelephoneTrTroopVet.........,Veterinary11—101

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451CHAPTER IIIOTHER MILITARY AND AUXILIARY ORGANIZATIONSI. IntroductionSection I.SS AND POLICEAny description of organisation, mission, and structureof the SS cannot be understood unless one tries to conceiveit inwardly with one's blood and heart. It cannotbe explained why twe contain. so much strength thoughwe number so few.Heinrich Himmler.The SS, or Schutzstaflel, is the ProtectiveGuard of the National-Socialist Party (NSDAP).Officially an independent Gliederung (Branch) ofthe Party, led by Heinrich Himmler, it actuallyhas a status and importance far exceeding thoseof the other branches and even those of theParty its From its original function of guardingthe person of Party leaders and speakers, theSS developed even before the war, into a far-flungorganization to protect the entire Nazi movementagainst all internal enemies. More recently, it hasextended its influence and power into every conceivableaspect of German national life and hasa acquired a large measure of control overthe Army It It is more than a state within at ; it is o to both the Party and the government.The rise of the 55 1 has been gradual but unceasing.Because of its origin and its own experienceas an underground organization, it has alwaysunderstood how to combat systematically andunrelentingly any subversive activities in theReich and in all occupied areas. It was by extensionof its responsibility for internal political securitythat the S S first acquired control of theSecret State Police and later (in 1936) of the entireo f of Germany. Quite naturallytherefore, it was given the policing powers in mostof the countries occupied by Germany during thewar. It was also logical that the SS, as the elitecorps of the Party, should take part in the marchinto Austria and Czechoslovakia along with thetroops of the Army, and that it should furnishsmall contingents of trained men to fight in thePolish campaign in 1939. This led to the buildingup of the Wafen-SS, at first consisting of theequivalent of two or three divisions and finallygrowing to a substantial and favored branch ofthe armed forces of the nation. In 1943 the 55 1gained control of the powerful Ministry of the Interior,in which it had already constituted the mostimportant group in the form of the police. During1943 and 1944 the SS gained more and more influencein, the Army itself, taking over successivelycontrol of political indoctrination, of theintelligence services, and of the whole replacement,training, and material procurement system.Apart from these obvious acquisitions of powerand authority, the S S has steadily extended its influenceinto many branches of German life whichwould seem, on the surface, to have little or nothingto do with its original or derived mission.High-ranking officers of the S S now occupy controllingpositions in most of the central departmentsof the government, in regional and localadministration, in heavy industry, finance, andcommerce, and in cultural and charitable activities.Directly or indirectly the S S controls thetraining of youth in the Hitler Youth organization,the storm troops (SA), and most of theother Party organizations and activities.The character and purposes of the SS wouldnot be clear without reference to its mysticalworship of the German "race". This is exemplifiednot only by the physical requirements for becomingan S S man, but also by a vast’ programof procreation propaganda, resettlement of populations,eradication of elements considered raciallyundesirable, genealogical research, and welfare.Typical of the S S is its insistence that the abbreviationof its title always be printed or typed asthe runic symbol of victory and arbitrariness:theThe development ofSS power is intimatelyIll— l

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451REICHSFUHRER- VfHIMMLERMINISTER OF THE INTERIOR(REICH and PRUSSIA)CONSTITUTIONand LEGISLATIONCIVIL SERVICEand ADMINISTRATIONVETERINARY MATTERSCHIEF OF THE GERMANPOLICESECURITY POLICESECURITY SERVICE (SD)COUNTERINTELLIGENCE,AGENTS. SABOTAGECHIEF OF ARMY EQUIPMENTAND COMMANDER OF THEREPLACEMENT ARMYCONSCRIPTION ofARMED FORCESARMY TRAINING- ARMY REPLACEMENT SYSTEMPUBLIC HEALTH CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION ARMY PROCUREMENT andPOLICESUPPLYCOMMUNALADMdlSTRATlONSECRET STATE POLICE(GESTAPO!SELECTIONof OFFICERS and NCOsREICH COMMISSIONER FORSTRENGTHENING OFGERMANISMJSETTLEMENTREDISTRIBUTION of LANDand RESETTLEMENT ofGERMANS in GERMANY andANNEXED AREASFINANCECONFISCATION of PROPERTYand FINANCING ofSETTLEMENT in CONQUEREDAREASCENSUS and SURVEY FRONTIER POLICE COMMANDER OF ARMEDFORCES OF THE INTERIORSPORTS and ATHLETICSTHE GERMAN POLICEREINFORCED FONTIERGUARD SERVICEORDER POLICEPROTECTIVE POLICE,ADMINISTRATIVE POLICE,GiNDARMERY, COMMUNALPROTECTIVE POLICE, FIREPROTECTIVE POLICE, FIREFIGHTING SERVICE, TECHNICAIEMERGENCY CORPS, AIR RAIDPROTECTION, WATERWAYSPOLICE, URBAN-RURALAUXILIARY GUARDS.EMPLOYMENTOF VOLKSSTURMPRESIDENT PRESIDENT PARTY COMMISSIONER FOR PLENIPOTENTIARY GENERALSOCIETY "LEBENSBORN" | SOCIETY "DAS AHNENERBE" Al l RACIAL MATTERS FOR ADMINISTRATION1 1FURTHERING OF BrHRATEADVISER to HITLER1 FURTHERING OF FAMILY TRADITIONCORDINATOR of WARTIMEIN THE *• in RACIAL MATTERS A D I T I O N_LDEPARTMENT SUPERVISION OF NPEA and SECURITY SERVICE PERSONNEL offor REPATRIATION of HEIMSCHULEN ISD dor RF-++) VOLKSGRENAOIER UNITSRACIAL GERMANS IVOMIIPOLITICAL SCHOOLSI—BURO HEISSMEYER)GENERAL WAFFEN 44 DEATH'S-HEAD FORhbiTlONSFigure I.—Functions of the Reichsflhrer—5linked to the career of Heinrich Himmler. This offices represents not merely a pezsonal union ofseemingly unassuming and quiet-mannered man powers but the acquisition of successive fields forhas obtained one important post after another un- the extension and infiltration of SS influence. Ittil today more power is concentrated in his person is significant in this connection that in all his varithanin any other man except Hitler. Indeed, his ous capacities Plimmler always uses his originalpower is much more absolute than that of Hitler,title of Reichsfiihrer-SS (abbreviated RF-SS).since the latter's actions and decisions are neces-The S S is at once the basis and the instrument ofsarily influenced by various pressure groups withinthe Party, by consideration of public opinion,Himmler's strength.and by other outside forces.For this reason a description of the functionsWherever Himmler has secured a position, he of the RF-SS is the most effective way of indihastaken the SS with him. His plurality of cating the present position of the SS in Germany.III—2

I MARCH 19452. External Functions of the RF-SSAs shown in the accompanying chart (Figurel), the RF-SS holds eight separate offices besidesthose resulting directly from his position as commanderof the SS proper. They are:a. REICH AND PRUSSIAN MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR(Reichs- ztnd Preussischer 114inister des Innern). In thiscapacity, which he acquired in August 1943, Himmlercontrols a department for constitutional and legislativematters, the administration of the German civil service(Beanzentum), veterinary matters, and public health, thefederalized communal administration, census and survey,and the administration of sports and athletics. Thisministry also controls the federalized German police, ofwhich Himmler wasrthe chief long before he became theMinister of the Interior.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4551force operating in towns and cities with more than about 5,000inhabitants.Communal Protective Police (Schutz0X& der Gem&&n), aregular police force for towns too smfI to have the urban ProtectivePolice mentioned above.Gendarmery (Ge&wmerie), a regular police force for ruralcommunities.Administrative Police (Yerwaltzmgspolizei), for such routinefunctions as registration of residents, Inspection of buildings, andthe keeping of police records.Fire Protection Police (Feuevschl~t~~olizei), a federalizedcommunal fire-fighting organization with police status.Fire-Fighting Services (Feuerwehr~n), a federalized organ&tion of voluntary fire fighters, replacing former private societiesand associations.Air Raid Protection Police (Luftschut~polizei), responsible foraid and clearance measures durin air raids.Urban and Rural Auxiliary Euardsairaids. (St&- und Landwacht),auxiliary police organizations of part-time volunteers in urb&and rural areas.T.qchnical Emergency Corps (Technische Nothilfe—TN), whichprovides technically trained personnel for emergency work of al!kinds, especially in case of a breakdown of public services.c CHIEF OF ARMY EQUIPMENT AND COMMANDER OFTHE REPLACEMENT ARMY (Chef der Heerestistung %ndBefehlshaber des Ersatzheeres—Ch H R&t u.BdE).b. CHIEF OF THE GERMAN POLICE (Chef der DeutschPrtIn this function, which he acquired in July 1944, thePolizei—ChdDtP). In this office, which he has heldRF-SS controls the conscription of the Armed Forces,since June 1936, the RF-SS has succeeded in creatingthe Army training and replacement system, and Armya closely knit national police force fully in accord withprocurement and supply. He is responsible for the selectionand training of future officers and noncommissionedthe purposes of the S S . The principal measures bywhich this was accomplished were the federalizing ofofficers snd, in his capacity as commander of all forcesthe former state and local police organizations, the institutionof a personnel policy controlled by the SS,in the Zone of the Interior, he controls the Volkssturmand orders its employment.the extension of the scope and authority of the police as d. REICH COMMISSIONER FOR THE STRENGTHENING OFa whole to new fields, and the interweaving of the administrationGERMANISM (Reichskommissar fiir die Festigung desand functions of the Party Security ServDeutschen Volkstum—RKV). Since October 1939, whenice (Sicherhcitsdienst des Reichsfiihrers-SS—SD des he received this appointment, the RF-SS has been theRF-SS) with those of the Security Police (Sicherheitspo&et—Sipo).The two last-named organizations were of Germans in annexed areas. A vast organization wa,~highest authority on all’ matters concerning the settlingcombined under the Central Security Department created to deal with the redistribution of property which(Reichssicherheitshauptamt—RSHA ).fell to the Germans as spoils of war.The German police organization, as such, is divided e. PRESIDEKT OF THE SOCIETY "FOUNTAIN OF LIFE"into two categories, the Security Police and the Order (Verein "Lehensborn e.V."). Through this organization,Police (Ordaungspolizei—Orpo).which he founded in September 1936, the RF-SS(1) The Security Police has two branches: The takes active control of the numefous measures which theCriminal Investigation Police (Kriminalpolizei—Kripo) SS has devised in order to insure the "victory of birthsand the Secret State Police (Geheimp Stouts polizei— of good blood".Gestapo). Under the control of the RF-SS the functionsof the Criminal Investigation Police have underTAGE" (Yerein ‘ Dns Ahnenerbe"). This group dealsf. PRESIDENT OF THE SOCIETY "THE ANCESTRAL HERIgonemany changes, and it now constitutes a valuable with racial and genealogical matters and fosters interestally of the Secret State Police. The latter, as the politicalin family tradition and racial purity.branch of the police, has always led the fight against g. PARTY COMMISSIONER FOR ALL RACIAL MATTERSsubversive elements in Germany and served as the executive(Beauftragter der NSDAP fiir alle Volkstumsfragen).arm in the process of ridding Germany of"undesirable" elements. An adjunct of the Gestapo isthe Frontier Police (Grenzpolizei), which was greatlystrengthened in 1944 by attaching to it the ReinforcedIn this function, which is his only official one within theParty proper, the RF-SS acts as the chief adviser to theFiihrer on racial matters, and as the coordinator betweenthe Party and his own function as Reich CommissionerFrontier Guard Service (Verstiirkte Grenzaufsichtsdienst).for the Strtingthening of Germanism.The latter is properly a branch of the Reich h. PLENIPOTENTIARY GENERAL FOR ADMINISTRATIONMinistry of Finance and now serves the combined purposesof this ministry and of the political police. Toappointment went with that of Minister of the Interior,(Generalbevollmiichtigter fiir die Verwaltung). Thisgether, these organizations have the new and important the previous incumbent (Frick) having received it atmission of preventing the desertion of military personnel,6s well as the escape of foreign civilian workers tional administration problems.the beginning of the war, to coordinate all wartime naacross the borders of the Reich.(2) The Order Police includes the regular uniformed3. Internal Special Functions of the RF-SSpolice and has acquired control of a number of auxiliary In his capacity as commander of the S S proper,organizations which are not always concerned withHimmler has four special functions not directlystrictly police functions.Components of the Order Police are:connected with the organization and administrationof the S . S . They Protective Police (ScltutapoliacC—Schupo~, a regular policeare:III—3

I MARCH 1945a. The Department for the Repatriation of RadialGermans ( Vo,ksdezatsche-1 Mittelstelle—Vomi) dis a bureauwhich is characterized as a Main the (Hauptamt)because it comes directly under the nall y SinceOctober 1939 this department has carried out the farflungresettlement plans for "racial" polit i cal , thewestern borderlands of Russia. Hundreds of thousands' of such perSons have been transferred to the annexedareas of Poland.b. The Bureau Main Department ,thefiihrer Heissmiyer (Dienststelle Hauptamt SS-Obergruppenfiihrer Heissmeyer) has as its chief mission the si xtrol of the National Political Educational Institutes(Nationalpolitische Erziehungsanstalten — - andBoarding Schools (Heimschzhlen). The former cludeschools for selected pupils from all over Germany th eare supposed to attain a high scholastic record while o fjected to most severe indoctrination in Party o fHeimschztlen are designed for the children of soldiers orof civil service officials who cannot maintain a permanentresidence. These schools, in which political indoctrination is especially accentuated, have grown rapidly innumber to accommodate large numbers of children rendered homeless by air raids.c. The Security Service (Sicherheitsdienst des RF-SS—SD or SD des RF-SS) is nominally a branch of theGeneral SS but is controlled, under Himmler, hi ghCentral Security Office (Reichssicherheitshauptamt)along with the Security Police. It is officially the in• telligence service of the Party against internal enemies,while the Security Police (including the Gestapo) is theexecutive agent for combatting them. From gov ernmentmission the SD has constantly grown in matc hed in1944 absorbed the bulk of the Abwehr, the nance,organization of the Ar’med. Forces. Many of its memberswere until recently engaged in occupied areas, buttheir number inside Germany has greatly increased withthe shrinking of the areas still occupied. At the sametime their importance in Germany has developed steadilyand their preparations for the eventuality p ropercan be expected to be the most efficient and far reaching.d. With the formation of Volks Grenadier units in thelatter part of 1944 the RF-SS became responsible for thepersonnel of these units, acting through a new specialbranch of the Army Personnel Office (PA/P e r a1 isbelieved that such personnel are more or less interchangeable with the members of the Waffen-SS.4. SS Control of Public LifeAs impressive as the list of the functions ofthe RF-SS must appear, it is by no means morethan an indication of the power of the SS, whichhas enlarged its position and range of influencesteadily by an unobtrusive but thorough policyof infiltration. Dominating almost every branchof official and semi-official German life, are SShas become a super-government composed of aracially conscious "order" of men (and women)bound by a rigid set of rules, the foremost dithese being unswerving loyalty to one's immediatechief and unquestioning obedience. This strict111-4UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451discipline ensures the complete subservience tothe SS, even of those members who joined originallymerely as an expedient to be entitled to wearthe black uniform and to climb the ladder ofpolitical, economic, or even artistic success.A few statistics may serve to show to whatextent this most powerful body has permeatedthe Third Reich:Hitler's personal entourage includes at leastsix .S'.S' men.The Party Reich Directors (Reichsleiter) includeten SS men out of a total of 16. Most ofthe six non-.S'.S' members have suffered a losso£ power and prestige in the past two years. Tenof the 26 posts in the Reich Cabinet are held bySS men. Thirty-nine .S'.S' men with the rank ofcolonel or above hold other important posts inthe Reich Ministries.Most of the Reichsstatthalter, provincial presidents,state ministers, and secretaries and vicepresidentsof state governments are men whosehigh SS rank is not always the most publicizedfeature of their careers. In municipal affairs.numerous mayors are identified with the 5"6".The permeation of all branches and levels ofgovernment in Germany by officers of the S-S" ismatched on a nearly equal scale in industry, finance,commerce, cultural activities, and charitableorganizations.5. Organization of the SS •a. FUNCTIONAL ORGANIZATION. The .S'.S'proper is divided functionally into three maingroups:(1) The General SS (Allgemeine SS), composedof the ordinary part-time members of Gen-,eral .9.S 1 regiments (SS-Standarten), the full-timemembers (normally with the rank of major orabove) of General .S'.S' units and headquarters,and non-active members attached to units andheadquarters of the General 5*5. The GeneralS^ is not maintained by the state; its expendituresare borne by the Party and ultimately controlledby the Party Treasurer, who himself holdsthe rank of a full general of the SS.In certain occupied countries (e.g. Norway,Holland) organizations have been set up whichare modeled on the General .S'.S'. These are knownas Germanic SS (Germanische SS) and havetheir own central organization, ultimately subordinateto the RF-SS in Germany.(2) The Armed SS (Waffen-SS). This categorycomprises the full-time military organization

REICHSFUHRER—55HIMMLERHEADOUARTERS STAFF OF RF-tf(KOMMANDOSTAB RF-MIMAIN DEPARTMENT PERSONAL STAFFIHA PERSONLICHER STAB)1J1 1 1 1H M V, V, WCENTRAL DEPARTMENT MAIN OPERATIONAL DEPARTMENT MAIN ECONOMIC ADMINISTRATION MAIN RACE * SETTLEMENT MAIN DEPARTMENT FOR PERSONNEL MAIN LECAL DEPARTMENTIff HA) IH-FHAI DEPARTMENT CETSCTTLEMENT (H-PE>SONAL-HAI IKAtV-GERICHT)IW-WVHAI(M-Ru5HA)1 1 1 I— SUPPLY GROUP- ADMINISTRATION GROUPGENERAL ADMINISTRATION GROUP OPERATIONS, PERSONNEL AND FINANCE, LAW ANDADMINISTRATION OFFICE OFFICE FOR OFFICER LEGAl AFFAIRS OFFICE(Ag Al IVERWALTUNGSAMT) IAMT*HIAg A) (Ag A)PERSONNEL RECORDSIAMT FUR FUHRERPERSONALIEN)OFFICE FOR OJtGA NIZATION,RECRUITING AND REGISTRATION GROUP FOR TRAINING OFSUPPLY GROUP MARRIAGE OFFICEIALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR OFFICERSPERSONNE IGROUP — OFFICERS AND NCOs - - OF SD) -IAg Bl (HEIRATSAMTI DISCIPLINARY A lATTERS(Ag Bl IAg Bl IAMT IIIPROPAGANDA EDUCATION ANDINSPECTORATES OF BRANCHESPHYSICAL TRAINING GROUP — OF SERVICE—WORKS AND BUILDING GROUP RACIAL OFFICE OFFICE FOR POTENTIAL OFFICERS OFFICE FOR PARDONS, REPRIEVESIAg Cl-IRASSENAMTI IAMT FUR FUHRERNACHWUCHS) -AND EXECUTION OF SENTENCES(Ag Cl IAg Cl IAMT Illl- I— - - (VERBINDUMGS AMI)GERMANIC GROUP MEDICAL GROUP CONCENTRATION CAMPS GROUP SETTLEMENT OFFICELIAISON OF!IAg Dl (Ag Dl (Ag D) (SIEDLUNGSAMTI IAMT IV!EXECUTIVE STAFFISTABSFOHRUNG)VOLKSSTRUM—ECONOMIC ENTERPRISES GROUPIAg W)GOCOmoIALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR POTENTIALOFFICERS OF SDI1GENERAL** WAFFEN hh DEATH'S-HEADFORMATIONSFigure 2.—5.S High Command.

1 MARCH 1945of the S S together with their training and replacementt&its, schools, and installations. It isa specially regulated public instrument of theReich on the model of the Army and is now considereda component part of the Armed Forces.Its expenses are borne by the State.(3) The Death's-Head Formations (SS-Totenkopfverbiinde).These consist mainly of theguard units of concentration camps. Their developmentfrom the General SS is closely identifiedwith the work of the Gestapo. Their expensesare a responsibility of the State.b. HIGH COMMAND ORGANIZATION. The SSHigh Command is known as the Reichsfiihrung-SS and consists of the RF-SS, his staffs, and thechiefs of the Main Departments (Haupttimter)described below. These Main Departments administerthe internal affairs of the three functionalsubdivisions of the S S .(1) The Headquarters Staff of the RF-SS(Kommandostab RF-SS) is located at the FieldCommand Post of the RF-SS (FeldkommandostelleRF-SS) which is usually near Hitler'sheadquarters in the field (Fiihrerhauptquartier).(2) The Main Department Personal Staff(Hauptamt Persi i nlicher Stab—HA Pers. Stab)is a permanent installation at Himmler's rearheadquarters to assist him in the execution ofhis manifold tasks.(3) The SS Central Department (SS-Hauptamt—SS-HA)is responsible for miscellaneousover-all administrative and personnel matters.It is divided into the following five groups (Amtsgruppen—Ag):Group A handles general administration matter.Group B takes care of recruiting and registration ofall categories of S S personnel.Group C is responsible for propaganda, education, andphvsical training.Group D controls the Germanic SS (Gemzaniscke SS)including recruitment in cooperation with Group B.The Executive Staff of the German Volkssturm(Stabsfiihrw n g des Deutschen Volksstwms) has beenidentified in the SS Central Department and presumablyhandles the responsibilities of the RE-SS connected withthis national militia.(4) The SS Main Operational Department(SS-Fiihrungshauptamt—SS-FHA) concerns itselflargely with the Wafen-SS. It grew out ofthe former Operational Office in the S S CentralDepartment in 1940. Its long-time chief, HansJiittner, is now the deputy of the RF-SS in hiscapacity as Chief of Army Equipment and Commanderof the Replacement Army. This MainIH—6UNCLASSlFlkb TM-E 30-451Department contains the ‘following four groups:Group A controls operations, personnel, and supply.It includes the Headquarters OfiCes (KommcmdoGmfer)of the General SS and of. the Waflesl-SS.Group B is responsible for the selection and trainingof officers and noncommissioned officers.Group C consists of the inspectorates of the variousbranches of service.Group D is in charge of medical matters for theentire 55.(5) The SS Main Economic AdministrativeDepartment (SS- Wirtschaftsverwaltungshaup tamt—SS-WVHA) is responsible for fiscal matters,administration of S S property and concentrationcamps, and control of supply installations.It is divided into five groups as follows:Group A includes finance, law, and certain generaladministration matters.Group B is responsible for supply installations andprocurement and delivery of certain types of supplies forSS units and headquarters.Group C administers the works and buildings of theSS, including the construction of buildings.Group D administers all concentration camps.Group W manages the economic enterprises of theT5. (;6) The S S Main Race and Settlement Department(SS-Rasse- und -Siedlungshauptamt—FS-RuSHA) contains the following four offices4mter):Administration Office (Verzualtungsamf).Marriage Office (Zfeiratsamt) which rigidly controlsthe selection of suitable wives by SS men.Racial Office (Rassenamf), which selects future SSmen and handles the tasks of racial selection connectedwith the function of the RF-SS as Reich Commissionerfor the Strengthening of Germanism.Settlement Office (Siedlungsamt), which deals withthe settlement of discharged SS men, especially in theannexed eastern areas.The above offices of the Main Race and SettlementDepartment are further divided into MainBranches (Hauptabteilungen). One of these isthe Main Welfare Branch, which handles theproblems of welfare and pensions in close cooperationwith the 5"5" Main Welfare and PensionDepartment (SS-Hauptfiirsorge- und- Versorgungsamt)in the Reich Ministry of the Interior.(7) The S S Main Department for Personnel(SS-Persofitalhauptamt-—SS-Pers.HA) is the centralrecording office for all SS officers and potentialofficers, including those of the Security Service(SD). It is not itself responsible for promotionsand appointments. It is divided into twooffices (Amter) :

AltonaXZ OSTSEE «STETTIN WEICHSELOldenburgStettinBrombergStuttmrtBOHMEN - M AHRENAugsburg •MUNCHENMUnchenLinz DONAUEHSALZBITRO 1SalEburgALPENLANDWIELEGEND:SS-OBERABSCHNTTT: SPREESS-OBERABSCHNITT HQ CITY: BERLINSS-Abschnltt No.: H LSS-Abschnltt Hq Cits: BerlinFigure 3.-~SS regional organization.

I MARCH 1945The Office of Ofiicer Personnel Records (Amt fiir 'Fiiiwerpersonalien).The Office for Potential Officers (Amt fiir Fiihrel’nachwuchs).(8) The SS Main Legal Department (HauptamtSS-Gericht—HA SS-Gericht) is concernedwith the special jurisprudence which operateswithin the SS and police organization, It is dividedinto four offices (A’mter) : •Office I is the Legal Affairs Office.Office II is the Ofice for Organization, Personnel, andDisciplinary hfatters.Office III is the Office for Pardons, Reprieves, andthe Execution of Sentences.Office IV is a Liaison Office(Verbindungsamt).c. REGIONAL OKGANIZATION. (1) General.The basis of the regional organization of the SSis the district (0berabschnitt—Oa.). There are.seventeen of these districts in Germany properand each coincides exactly with a Wehrkreis(Army corps area). The S S districts are knownby geographical names, but it has become a convenientand growing custom to add to the namethe Roman numeral of the corresponding Wehrkreis.With two exceptions, the headquarters ofthe district is in the same city as that of theWehrkreis. In addition six districts have beenorganized in occupied countries and are knownby names according to their geographical location.One of these, named "Ukraine" was dissolvedearly in 1944.The control of a district is entrusted to aHigher SS and Police Commander (Hb’herer SSund Polizeiftihrer—HSSPf), ,who normally commandsboth the S S and police units and installationsin the district.Occupied areas which have not been organizedinto SS districts are also commanded by anHSSPf, whose functions are analogous to thoseof the HSSPf of a district.In certain areas a regional organization of theWafen-SS exists side by side with the generalregional organization of the SS and police. These.areas are controlled, for special purposes of theWafien-SS only, by territorial Commanders ofthe Waffen-SS (Befehlshaber der Waflen-SS—Bfh.d.W-SS).(2) Authority of the HSSPf. (a) Generalfunctions. The HSSPf is the representative ofthe RF-SS at any given military territorial headquarters,or, where they exist, at the headquartersof the Reich commissioners (Reichskommissare)for occupied areas. As such he is the official adviserin all SS and police matters to the regionalUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451representatives of the Reich government administeringany part of such an area.He is the commander of the 5"5" district if thearea under his jurisdiction is constituted as such.The HSSPf commands the S S and police unitsand installations in his area except those whichhave been subordinated to the OKH for opera.tions and those which are commanded by a terri.torial commander of the WaflcwSS.Operational commands have been assigned toan HSSPf under different circumstances and invarying degrees. Such commands have consistedof special staffs for combating partisans (SS undPolizci-l;ii~lrungsstab fiir Ba?2denbekiimpfung)and battle groups which were formed hastily fromthe forces normally commanded by the HSSPfwhen his area was invaded or threatened. Anumber of personalities have in this way graduated from assignment as HSSPf to that of thecommander of an S S corps.Various special offices are sometimes combinedwith that of the HSSPf in certain areas. Forexample, the ZZSSPf in Prague holds the position-of ,,Minister of State for Bohemia and Moravia(Staatsminister fiir B ohm en zutd Mi i lzrelz) andacts as the deputy to the Reich Protector of thisarea. The HSSPf in the Government Generalholds the position of State Secretary for SecurityMatters (Staatssckrettir des Siclaerlzeitswesens).With the increasing danger to Germany propernew responsibilities have been thrust upon theHSSPf, especially in the border areas. In somecases he has assumed active command of allunits of the auxiliary organizations of the Reichand of the Party, except those of the Todt Organization (0T), so far as they have been organizedfor defensive combat tasks. In case of an invasion of his area he has been ordered to attachhimself and all the units under him, includingthose of the S S and police, to the commander ofthe Wehrkreis and to act as his deputy for thelatter if necessary.The full title of an HSSPf may indicate theWehrkrcis (e.g. HSSPf Welzrkreis X), the geographicalname of the Obcrabschnitt (HSSFfNordsee), or its headquarters city (HSSPf Hamburg).In occupied or annexed areas the titlevaries. The following examples are given as illustrations: HSSPf beim Reichskommnissar fi&- diebesetsten niederlandischen Gebiets is also encounteredas HSSPf Nordzuest or a3 HSSPf denHaa& The HSSPf in Greece was normallydesignated HSSPf Griechenland.III—8

I MARCH 1945Each HSSPf is assisted by a Chief of Staff(Stabsfiihrer) in the execution of all his duties.The latter is also the Chief of Staff of the SSdistrict in those areas where the HSSPf is alsothe commander of such a district.(b) Organization of SS districts. In GreaterGermany (excluding Bohemia-Moravia and theGovernment General), the HSSPf has two separatestaffs for his two main functions. One staffassists him in the command and administrationof the SS, another in that of the police.The staff of the SS within the 55" district consistsof the following officers under the Chief ofStaff:Administrative Officer.Chief Medical Officer.Director of Training.Chief Personnel Officer.Chief Signal Officer.The Administrative Officer heads the AdministrativeOffice (Verwaltungsanlt), which operatesunder the control of the SS Main Economic AdministrativeDepartment and handles all mattersof finance and supply within the district.Each district is divided into two or more subdistricts(Abschnittc), each having its own headquarters.These sub-districts are distinguishedby Roman numerals. Their commanders areknown as Fiihrcr dcs SS-Abschnitts. The headquartersof the S S sub-districts are organizedon the same general lines as those of the district;both are closely parallel to the standardGerman staff organization for any military unitor headquarters, including the numbers and lettersused for the sections and sub-sections.Each of the districts inside Germany has aWaffen-SS recruiting center (Ergiimungsstelle)administered directly by the SS Central Department.It also has a section for racial and settlementmatters (Rasse- und Siedlungswesen), whichis under the supervision ,of the SS Main Raceand Settlement Department.The staff of the HSSPf for the command andadministration of the police includes the followingtwo leading police officers under the Chief ofStaff:Inspector of the Security Police and of theSecurity Service (Inspekteur der Sicherheitspolizeiund des Sicherheitsdienstes—IdSuSD,sometimes also given as Ids).Inspector of the Order Police (Inspekteur derOrdnungspolizei—IdO). This officer controlsthe commander of the Barrack Police (those ele-UNCLASSIFIEDT&E 30151S t af f Protective Police who live in barracks),who has the title of Commander of theProtective Police (Konmandcur der Schutzpolizci).These inspectors have complete administrativedepartments covering all aspects of police activilieswhich are assigned to their respectivebranches.Certain areas adjacent to Germany, particularlyAlsace, Lorraine, and Luxemburg, have beenincorporated into WeArkrcise while their civil administrationhas remained separate. For theseareas a dual nomenclature exists for the leadingmembers of the police staff of the HSSPf. Theyare referred to as Inspectors in the old part ofthe district and as Senior Commanders (Befehlshaber)of their respective branches for the anficer . The latter nomenclature coincideswith that of the corresponding officers in areasoutside the Reich proper as described below.The organization of SS districts outside GreaterGermany (namely Ost, Nordwest, Nord, Ost-Zatzd, and formerly Ukmine) is identical to thatinside Germany with the following exceptions:There is an economic section directly subordinateto the HSSPf. This is headed by an officerknown as SS-Wirtschaftcv and replaces the administrativeoffice in the SS district.he a d - of 5*.? districts do not exist.Instead, one or more S S and Police Commanders(SS und Polizeifiihrcr—SSPf) may exist. Theseare representatives of the HSSPf in all his functionsfor the sub-area which is assigned to them.A Waflccn-SS Recruiting Inspectorate (Ersatzinspektiondcr Waffen-SS) replaces the Wafelt-SS Recruiting Center.The leading officers on the staff of the HSSPffor the command and administration of the policehave the following titles and functions:Senior Commander of the Security Police andof the Security Service (Licfehlshaber der Sicherheitspolizeiund des Sicherheitsdiemtes—BdSuSDor BdS). He may control subordinate area commanders(Kovlrnandez~rc—KdSuSD or KdS).Senior Commander of the Order Police(Befehlshaber dcr Oudprungspolizei—BdO). Hemay control subordinate Commanders (KdO).These Senior Commanders have complete administrativedepartments covering all aspects ofpolice activities which are assigned to their respectivebranches.The above deviations in the organization ofIll—9

I MARCH 1945the police, but not those relating to the SS, alsoapply to the district Biihwzen-M iihren.(c) Orga&ation of ayeas whick are not SSdistricts. In occupied areas which are not constitutedas SS districts, the HSSPf retains hisdual function as commander of all SS and policeforces. There is considerably less emphasis onSS matters and normally no special staff forthe latter exists. The police functions take onadded significance because the IISSPf not onlyconcerns himself with the German police forcesbut also controls, in varying degrees, the nativepolice in the area. The nomenclature of thepolice officers coincides with that in S5 1 districtsoutside Greater Germany.In Italy several HSSPf's have been installed.They are subordinated to one Supreme SS andPolice Commander (Hiickstcr SS wtd Polizeifiihrer—Hti chst. SSPf). It is believed that thegeneral organization of the areas controlled bythese officers differs little from that of the HSSPfand subordinate SSPf's in other occupied areas.(3) Territorial comnaa~ldrrs bf tkc Waffcn-SS.Tn certain selected arcas the SS High Commandhas installed territorial commanders of theIVafl’cfi-SS (Befeklshabcr dcr Wa.ffcn-SS— Bfk.d.W-SS). These represent the regional echelonof the SS High Command for the Wa#cn-SSonly. They execute its directives and are incomplete command of all units of the Waffen-SSin their areas. The commander of the Wa#ell-SS shares with the HSSPf control of the staticinstallations of the Waflen-SS, but is otherwisecompletetly independent ‘of him. Such commandershave been identified in the Netherlands,in Bohemia and Moravia, in the area of the S^S 1district "Ostland", and in Hungary.The commander of the Waf’cn-SS may takeon operational assignments under the commandof the OKH.The staff organization of these commandersis comparable to that of a corps. The variousmembers of his staff represent the different offkcsof the High Command and the Inspectoratcs ofthe branches of service.(4) I.ist, of SS districts. The following is alist of the SS districts together with their headquartersand the corresponding Wekrkreise.Oa. Headquarters WehrkreisNordost Konigsberg IOstsee Stettin IISpree . Rerlin ITTElbe Dresden TVIll— IOUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Siidwest Stuttgart VWest Diisseldorf VISiid Munchen VISiidost Breslau VIIIFulda-Werra Arolsen IXXordsec Hamburg XMitte Braunschweig XIRhein-West- Wiesbaden XTImark-Main Niirnberg XIIIDonau Wein XVIIAlpenlantl Salzburg XVTIIWeichsel Danzig XXthe Posen XXIXordwest Den Haag (Netherlands)Nord Oslo ( Norway)Osl Krakau (leneralgouvernement1 >6hmen Prague Boh men undMiihrenMahrenOstland Riga (Ostland)(5) List of SS sub-districts. Each districtcomprises an average of two or three sub-districts(Abschnitte) distinguished by Roman numerals.The sub-districts are also colloquiallyreferred to by the names of the regions which theycomprise or by the location of their headquarters.Number Oa. HeadquartersI Siid Munchen11 Elbe Dresdeni c Spree BerlinTV Mitte HannoverV West DuisburgVI Siidost BreslauVTT Nordost KonigsbergVTII Donau EinzIX Main WiirzburgX Siidwest StuttgartXI Rhein-West - KoblenzmarkXII Spree Frankfurt/OdeiXIII Ostsee StettinXI V Nordsee OldenburgX V Xordsee Hamburg-AltonaXVI Mitte DessauXVII West MinisterXVIII Elbe Halle/SaaleXTX Siidwest KarlsruheXX Xordsee KielXXI Siidost HirschbergXXII Nordost Allenstein

1 MARCH 1945 mmXXIII Spree Berlin •XXIII Siidost OppelnXXIV West DortmundXXVI Weichsel ZoppotXXVI Fulda-Werra WeimarXXVII Main BayreuthXXVIII Siidwest KonstanzXXIX Rhein-West- Frankfurt/markMainXXXI Donau WienXXXII Siid AugsburgXXXIII Ostsee SchwcrinXXXIV Rhein-West- SaarbriickenmarkXXXV Alpenland GrazXXXVI Alpenland SalzburgXXXVl Bohmen- ReichenbergMahrenXXXVIII Bohmen- KarlsbadMahrenXXXIX Bohmen- BriinnMahrenxxxxWeichsel BrombergXXXX Weichsel ThornSXXXII Warthe Gnesenxxxxrn Warthe LitzniannstadtXXXXTV Xordost Gumbinnenxxxxv Siidwest Strassburg(6) SS regiments. The organization of the.S\S" in the echelons below the sub-districts is on aunit rather than a territorial basis, although eachunit controls a definite territory. Each sub-districtheadquarters controls two to four 5"5" infantryregiments (SS-Fuss-Standarten). After 5tr y of war these regiments are no no morethan skeleton cadres carrying on the tradition and,to a limited extent, the functions of the organizationuntil their members in the Armed Forces andWaffcn-SS are demobilized. Regiments are numberedconsecutively from 1 to 125.Each regiment is normally composed of threeactive battalions (Sturmbanne) and one reservebattalion (Reserve-Sturmbann). The active battalionsbear Roman numerals.Each active battalion consists of four companies(StUrine) and a medical detachment (Sanitatsstaffcl).One of the four companies mayserve locally as a guard company (Wachkompanic)and one as an emergency company (Alarm-Kompanic), while the remaining two are assignedto general duties.A gener al has two reserve companiesand a reserve medical detachment.UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451Recruiting battalions (Er~iin,-urlgs-Stunabarme)are reserve battalions which undergo 3months drilling prior to summary transfer to theWaffm-SS.Each company is divided into three or fourplatoons (Trupps), each composed of three sections(S charcn). The file (Rottc) is the smallestunit of the i"5".There are a number of specialist and technicalunits (Sor&rcinheiten) in the SS. Among themarc: cavalry regiments (SS-Reiterstawdarterl(R)); signal battalions (SS-Nachrichtclt-Stur~~zbannc(A ’ )); engineer battalions (SS-Pionier-Sfurrnba~l,re (Pi)); medical companies (SS-Sauitiits-Stiivrrrc (Sau. St.)j; motor transportcompanies (SS-Kraftfulw-Sti i rn2.e (K)); motorcyclecompanies (SS-Kradstiimc).Within each district there is also a supplementaryreserve formation (Starmr~abteilung), whichis organized into territorial sub-units (Bezirke).6. The Waffen-SSa. ORIGIN AND GROWTH. Ever since 1933 aromberg of the S S has been armed and trainedalong military lines and served on a full-timelcs~1 1 living in special barracks. These troopswere originally known as the SS-Vcvfiigzllzgstrzlppen(SS-VT), the name indicating that they wereheld at the disposition of Hitler for any purposewhatever. By 1939 four regiments (Standartelz)of these troops had been organized.The Vcrf iigfcngstruppcn took part in the occub-dis-of Austria and Czechoslovakia side by sidewith the troops of the Army. During the monthspreceding the outbreak of the Ivar they :‘;cre givenintensive military training and we’re formed intoregular military units which then took an activeza - in the Polish campaign. Elements of thean d Head Formations (Totcnkopfverbiinde)also took the field as military units.During the following winter and spring ther e e which had fought in Poland were exserveinto brigades and later into full divisions.This purely military branch of the SS was at firstknown as the Bmaff’nctc SS (literally "ArmedSS") and later as the H’aflcn-SS. The LeibstaudartcS’S ".ldolf IIitlrr" became the SS divisionof the same name ; the S tan dart e "Dcutschlzkom - togcthcr lvith the Austrian Standarte "DerFiilwc*r", formed the I7crfiiguugs Division, towhich a third regiment "LangcnIarck" was presentlyadded to form the division "Das Reich"; andthe Totenkopf units were formed into the "Totenkopf"Division. These three divisions were to beIII— II

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451the nucleus of the Wuj%z-SS in its rapid expansionwhich followed.The Wafien-SS is based on the tradition of theGeneral S S . It retained the strict racial selectionand the emphasis on political indoctrination of theS S . The reasons for its formation were as muchpolitical as they were a welcome opportunity toacquire for the SS the officer material which wasto prove. so valuable later on.With the intensification of the war the Waffen-SS became the proponent of the recruiting of"Nordic" peoples for military service in the interestof Germany. In 1940 the Standarten"Nordland" and "Westland" were created inorder to incorporate such "Germanic" volunteersinto the Waffcti-SS. They were combined withthe existing Standarte "Germania" to form the"Wikiq" Division.In the subsequent years the Wafen-SS proceededto form native "Legions" in most occupiedareas. These, in turn, were later converted intoWa,fen-SS brigades and divisions.A slackening in the principles of racial selectionoccurred only after the war took on much lessfavorable aspects. During 1943 and 1944 theSS turned more and more toward frantic recruitingof all available manpower in occupied areas.While its major effort was directed toward theincorporation of the "racial" Germans (Volksdlmtschc),a method was devised which permittedthe recruiting of foreigners of all nationalities ona grand scale, while retaining at least some sembl:znceof the original principles of "Nordic" SUperiority.Spreading foreigners thinly throughouttrustworthy established units soon provedinsufficient to digest the mass of recruits. Consequentlydivisions of foreigners were formedwhich received a sprinkling of regular Wafen-SScadres. Finally the necessity arose to complementthe officer corps of the WaffewSS with foreigners.Still very much concerned with the racial aspectsof its units, the Waflc11-SS developed a systemof nomenclature which dubs the unit as foreignby an addition to its name.Units containing a high percentage of "racial"Germans and "Germanic" volunteers (i.e. Scandinavians,Dutch, Flemings, Walloons, and Frenchmen),carry the designation "Frcitilligen-" aspart of their names, e.g. Il. SS-Freke~~l~gen-PanzergreFaadier-l%vivision "Nordland". Unitscontaining a preponderance of "non-Germanic"personnel, especially members of the Slavic andBaltic peoples, carry the designation "Wafen-"as part of their names, e.g. 15. Waffcrz-Grenadier-Division-SS (Lett. Nr. I). Officers of "non-Germanic" origin cannot become full-fledgedmembers of the SS officer corps. They are designatedas Wafen-Fiihrer der SS, and the individualrank is always given in the same manner, e.g.Waferz-U~ztersturrrrfiihrer.There is no doubt that this rapid expansion hassomewhat modified the character of the Wafien-SS as a political elite formation. h’evertheless,the crack divisions of this organization may stillbe expected to fight to the very end, especiallysince the individual soldier and especially the individualofficer have been made to feel personallyinvolved in tile endless series of war crimes, andstrong propaganda has convinced most that theirtreatment, either in captivity or after defeat, willcompare very unfavorably with that accordedother members of the armed forces.The Waffen-SS at present consists of at least31 divisions and three brigades, as well as a numberof independent smaller units. Of the divisionsseven are Pallzcr divisions. They form thestrongest and politically most reliable portion of;ihe < WaffcwSS. The balance consists of fivePanzer Grenadier divisions, five mountain divisions(of which at least one is believed to havebeen disbanded), seven infantry divisions, andtwo cavalry divisions. Three other divisions havebeen identified, but their type is not certain.About a third of the divisions are classified as%on-Germanic". Of the brigades at least one isof the Panzer Greuadicr type and its strength islittle less than that of a division.Of the 13 identified S S Corps five are Panzercorps, two mountain corps, four infantry corpsand two of uncertain type. At least one SSPanzer Army exists. It played a prominent partin the Ardennes counteroffensive in December1944.Among the divisions of the IC’affcr&S one isdesignated as the SS-Poliunci Division. This isthe only unit made up of members of the policewhich has been fully incorporated into the Waftfz-SS. It is not to be confused with the SS-PoZizei-Regimcntcr, which have remained part of thepolice and are described in a separate sectionbelow.b. RECRUITING, TRAINIKG, AND REPLACE~MENTIN THE rf’affrn-SS. (1) RrrruitiJlg. (a) Gelseral.In principle, no new members were acceptedfor the SS after 1933 except from selectedgraduates ,of the Hitler Youth. The creation ofIII—12

REICHSFUHRER-f42TOOIMAIN ECONOMICCENTRAL DEPAXTMENTMAIN OPERATIONAL DEPARTMENTMAIN DEPARTMENT FOR PERSONNELADMINISTRATION4* DEPARTMENT(HAUPTAMT-^ -HA) (FUHRUNGSHAUPTAMT-ff-FHAl h (PERSONAL HA) 4 f (MVHA)REPLACEMENT OF OFFICERSREPLACEMENT OF ECONOMIC ADMINISTRATION OFFICERSRECRUITING ANDREGISTRATION lAg B>INSPECTORATES OPERATIONS, MEDICAL GROUPIN 2 INFlAfl C)PERSONNELAND SUPPLY lAg A11OFFICER TRAININGGERMANIC GERMANIC I 3 RIDING IAMT XI)RECRUITING OFFICE HEADQUARTERS OFFICE “lDlNG AND *DMINIsT”*,,ONRECRUITING TRAINING SUPPLYANO DRIVING(AMT I)OF WAFFEN H DRIVING OFFICE OFFICE OFFICEOFFICE 1AMT II)OFFICEIAMT liltIN 4 ARTYNCO TRAINING(AMT II) (AMT VI (AMT VI)(AMT VII) IAMT XIII)(AMT XII)IN 5 ENGRIN 6 ARMORED TROOPSVETERINARYORDNANCERECRUITINGRECRUITING CENTERSREINFORCEMENTSBRANCHPERSONNELTRAINING IN y SIG NCO SCHOOLS TRAINING BRANCHBUNC HINSPECTORATESCAMPS(ABT Id) (ABT !•) I IABT IVI (ABT II) *ssIGNMENI 0 ,IN • ARMAMENTNORDOST 1 SDOOSTRAUMOFFICERSIN 9 SUPPLY SERVICESIABT lla)OSTSEE 11 OSTLANDPERSONNELPERSONNELSPRKIIIDANEMARNAND 12 MTZ TRSASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNMENTNORWEGEN IN 13 AAA VETERINARYPI”SoNNllELBEIVTROOPS ORDNANCE ASSIGNMENT OFNIEDERLANDESODWEST V (GRUPPE Cl TROOPS EM IABT lib)PLANDERNWEST VI WALLONIEN SPECIAL SERVICESUD VII FRANKREICH AND SPECIALISTSUDOST VIM TRAINING SCHOOLSFULDA-WERIA IX EDUCATION AND(Ag D)NOROSEE X RECRUITINGPHYSICAL TRAINING '* » ClMini XI COMMANDS ASSIGNMENT OFRHEIN-WISTMARK XH PERSONNELPOLITICAL PHYSICAL VOCATIONALMAINXIIIEDUCATION TRAINING SCHOOLS OF 3DONAUXVH•RANCH OFFICES[AMT I) IAMT III WAFFEN-SS GOALPENLAND XVIIICOOWEICH5ELXXTRAINING ANDCENTRAL SCHOOL FIELD UNITS OF IEADQUARTERS ANDWARTHEXXITRAINING FOR REPLACEMENT UNITSENLISTMENT SCHOOLS OF WAFFEN WAFFEN 4 *BOHMEN-MAHItEN B-M PHYSICIAL REGIONAL COMMANDSCENTERSCAMPSOF WAFFEN **TRAININGGERMANSFOREIGNERSRECRUITING TRAINING REPLACEMENTOFigure 4.—Control of SS recruiting, training, and replacement.

I MARCH 1945the Waffen-SS and its rapid growth have causedthe partial suspension of this rule, although servicein the Waflen-SS does not necessarily entailmembership in the General S S .(b) Pre-wur recruitment. Suitable SS canclidateswere singled out while still in the HitlerYouth. In particular boys who had proved themselves,often under SS leadership, in the HJ patrolservice (HJ-Strcifcndifwst) n-ere welcomedas future SS men. If the candidate satisfied SSrequirements with respect to political reliability,racial purity, and physique, he was accepted at theage of 18 as a candidate (BCZLW~I’P). On theoccasion of the annual Party Congress (Reichspnrfei)in September of the same year, he wasaccepted as an aspirant (11/wiirtcr), rvceivctl anSS certificate (SS-Aasccrcis), and \vas enrolledin the ranks of the SS.(c) PJ’autinze reckitrllcrlf. Recruitment andenrollment of new members for the SS have becomeof particular importance in vie\\- of thegreat expansion of the Wa#c/r-SS during - the war.The SS Central Department (SS-flauptamt) isresponsible for recruiting and registration ofGermans and of "Germanic" and "non-Germanic"foreigners for the Waflo~SS. It exercises suchfunctions for German and "Germanic" personnelthrough the Recruiting and Registration Group(Awztsgruppc B), and for "non-Germanic" foreignersthrough Group D—Germanic SS (inlet.+gmppc 0).The SS Main Operational Department ISSI;iihvltngslzazlptaI?zt—SS-I;Hrlj, which is responsiblefor the operational control of the Waffc/~SS, lays down the general policy on recruitingand notifies its special requirements from timelo time. The SS Central Department, however,remains responsible for the whole recruiting syt;tern of both the General SS and the WU#~N-S.S.Recruiting for the General SS, now almost ata standstill as a result of the war, is carried outthrough its own local units.Service in the JYn.flz:r~r-SS is, at least officially,voluntary. The Waflcrl-SS claims priority overall other branches of the Armed Forces in theseIection of recruits. To meet the high rate ofcasualties and the expansion of CVafcn-SS fielddivisions, service in the JJTo~~~II-SS uxs madecompulsory for all members of the General SSand voluntary transfer of personnel after beinginducted into any of the other branches of theArmed Forces was permitted. Since 1943 a greatamount of pressure has heen exerted on men-Ill—l4UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451bers of the Hitler Youth to "volunteer" for theWaffefz-SS. Still more recently. complete Army,Navy, and Air Force units were taken over bythe Wa.#cn-SS, given SS training, and incorporatedinto its field units.(d) Recruitment machinery icithin Germany.The enlistment drives of the JJ 7 a#err-SS withinGermany, at first occurring at irregular intervals,are now practically continuous, indicating thegreat need for rcplaccments. Tlrc SS-Standartc"Kurt &~gcr.s", through its various agencies isthe most successful propaganda machinery for theJVclflrr~-SS. Through its \var reporter battalioniKricgsbcrichtrv Abtcill/rzg) it l)ublicizcs the importantrole of the IVaflc,rl-SS in the Germanpress. Recruitment for the IVaf

I MARCH 1945than on the fighting value of these volunteers.No doubt for this reason the men were mostlyorganized in small independent national legions.In Scandinavia and the occupied countries ofthe West, the recruiting was undertaken largelyby the local Nazi and Quisling parties; in theBaltic states by the German controlled governments; and in the Balkans by the German authoritiesin agreement with the governments concernedWith the growing need for reinforcements, alarge element of compulsion entered into the recruitingcampaigns. At the same time the smalluneconomic legions were reorganized into regimentsand battalions, either to be incorporatedinto existing Waffcn-SS divisions or to form thebasis for new divisions and brigades. Early in1943 the German government, in exchange forpromises to deliver certain quantities of warequipment, obtained from the governments ofRumania, Hungary, and Slovakia their consentto an all-out recruiting drive for the Waffcn-SSamong the "racial" Germans domiciled in thosecountries. In effect, all able-bodied men whocould be considered to be of German origin, includingsome who could scarcely speak the Ianguage, were induced by various forms of socialand economic pressure to volunteer, and manymen already serving in the Armies of these threecountries were transferred to the Germans. Wd!over 100,000 men were obtained in this, mannerand were distributed among all the divisions ofthe Waffen-SS.The whole of this foreign recruiting organizationis controlled by the Germanic recruiting office(Gcrmanischcs Erganzungsamt—Amt II) inthe Germanic •.SW group (Amtsgruppe D—AgD). Orginally this recruiting organization consistedof a number of recruiting commands(Ersatzkommandos) established in the principalcities of the occupied countries. Subsequentlythese were reorganized as SS recruiting inspectorates(SS-Ersatzinspcktionen) responsible forrecruiting over a wide area, e.g. SS recruitinginspectorate Siidostraum at Vienna for the wholeof the Balkans. Such inspectorates control anumber of recruiting commands covering smallerareas, which again are subdivided into branchoffices (NcbcnstcUcn) ; finally, there are variousenlistment centers (Wcrbestcllen) under eachbranch office.(2) Training. (a) General. Propaganda onbehalf of the SS, political education, physic?.!training, pre-military and technical training, asUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451well as training within the SS, are the responsifighting the SS Central Department. However,the reason for the military training ofsmall units dcvol\-es entirely on the S.Main Operational Department.de r tak e n the S S aspirant in his first yearof service trained for the SA Defense TrainingBadge (SA-]V chrc.bzcichcn) and the ReichGerman Badge in l~ronze (hrorrxrlcs RriclrssportncernctlHe \vas then called up first for sixmonths of service in the Reich Labor Service, andthen for his io n of duty in the German Army.t two and a h e years. he returned to the5"5" to receive further intensive training and inporated Finally, on the ninth of Novemberflffo;-SS his return to civil life. hc was inductedinto the 6"5 as a full -S\S" man. The outbreak ofve r n the ment, of the Waf’ejz-SS interdel iver training schedule.(b) Propaganda aud political education. TheOffice fl~ c~-.S.\ Education (A?l?t WelfanschaulichcErziehung—Amt 1) in the Educationand w h 8 Training Group (A~jfsgutippr C—Ag - is responsible for propaganda and thel a n - of German personnel. This iscia l out i : i two \V:i\.S. In the first placethis many supervises the issuance of a number ofr e e publications, such as the JVa.~m-SSW t l ! handboo!; "Dicl rmff dir JT’ofcn-SS",the series of -S\S" educational booklets (SS-Schuof , a news magazine for SS and Police(SS-Informationsd'cnst), and an illustrated magan i za-: !nd articles for more generalo i - (SS-C~itlrc~ft). %ontlly, this ofin holds political education courses for SSofficers and enlisted personnel in ^5" trainingcamps (SS-Ausbild

I MAR&H 1945azine for each nationality in its own language andalso a ‘number of newspapers.(c) Physical apld preliw&ary trai&g. TheOffice for Physical Training (Anzt fiir Leibeserziehung—Anat11) in the Education and PhysicalTraining Group is charged with the responsihilityfor physical training of all branches of theSS. The SS instructors in athletics and physicalculture are trained at the S S Central School forPhysical Training (SS-Reichsschule fiir Leibesiibwzgelz),and special SS manuals on the subjectare issued. In addition the Office for PhysicalTraining has set up special physical trainingcamps for the Germanic SS outside the Reich.The SS has for some time taken a very activeinterest in the premilitary training programs cfthe Hitler Youth and other Party organizations.(cl) Technical training. As part of the generalprogram of training and preparation for theWaffen-SS, special SS Higher VocationalSchools (SS-Berujsoberschulen) have been setup under the control and direction of the Educationand Physical Training Group for givinghigher technical training to candidates for theWafien-SS. All German boys who are apprenticesor students in business, trade, or agricuIture,and are attending a trade or technical schoolmay apply for entry into such a school as officerapplicants of the Waflen-SS. The wartimecourse is limited to 1% years and is free to theselected candidates.The Vocational Schools of the Waj%z-SS{Berufsschulen dcr Wafien-SS) give similartraining, though of a lower standard.(e) Military training. The military trainingof the Wafen-SS is controlled entirely by the SSMain Operational Department, which exercisesthis function through three main agencies:The Training Branch (Abt 1 d) in the HeadquartersOffice of the Wafien-SS (Konznla~doanzt der Waflen-SS—Amt II) supervises andcoordinates the whole sphere of training in .theWuffen-SS. This branch is divided into a numberof sections, each of which is responsible fora certain type of training. Its mission includesclose cooperation with all other offices and inspectoratesconcerned with military training, liaisonwith the training agencies of the German Army,and issuance and control of all instructional material.It also registers and controls the trainingof future SS staff officers, providing courses fcrsupply officers (1 3-Lehrgiinge) and for intelligenceofficers (1 c-Lehrgiinge).Ill—l6UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451SThe S inspectorates (SS-Z~~s~cktioncn),which are combined into an inspectorate group(Atsfsgruppc C-—Ag C), are responsible for thetechnical and unit training within the variousbranches of service. There are ten such inspectorates, numbered in a brokei series from one to13. Each one is headed by an Inspector (Inspellteur), who is directly responsible to the Chiefof the SS Main Operational Department. It maycontrol experimental and demonstration units andstaffs, and it usually lvorks in close liaison withthe corresponding inspcctoratc in the OKH.The Training Group (A~fsgrttp/ B—-Ag U)is responsible for individual officer and noncommissioned officer training. It exercises thesefunctions through the Office for Officer Training(Amt Fii~zrevazlsbildung—Amt XI), which controls all officer candidate schools (SS-/unkerschulen.) and courses, and the Office for T\ioncommissioned Officer Training (Ant Unterfiihrerausbildung), which controls all nonconmissioned officer schools and courses.(f) Schools alld coIfI=cc.~. During 1943 ande1944 the Waflfrn-SS established schools andcourses for almost all branches of military affairsneeded by a complete and well balanced militaryorganization. ,4s a result, it is now thoroughlyequipped with schooling facilities of itsown, although certain highly specialized types ofpersonnel are still train& in special S S coursesat regular Army schools.The SS schools may bc tlivitled into four categories: special service schools. officer candidateschools, noncommissioned officer schools, andspecialist training establishments.Almost all the schools of the JT’nffcn-SS havecertain basic elements of organization in common,which are analogous to those of Army schools.They are headed by a commander who is assistedby a headquarters staff (Konrrrrnlldosfub). Under this they have instruction groups (Lehrgmp-Fen) of battalion status and inspectorates (Jnsjvkfiolw!) of company status.Special-service :;chools (JJ’clffr~zsCIzz~Ze~z) havethe function of providing specialized and advancedtraining for officers and enlisted personnelin their particular branch of service (@‘@engattzfng).The JJ’trffrr~SS has special-serviceschools for mountain infantry. cavalry, PanzerGwzadirrs, and Panzer troops, but not for ordinaryinfantry: this is explnincd by the fact thatall Waffc?z-SS field divisions except some ofthose which are composed principally of non

MARCH 1945German personnel are either Panzer, PanzerGrenadier, cavalry, or mountain divisions.The courses at the special-service schools mayhe divided into three main categories: reserveofficer candidate courses (Rese9veJunker-Lehrgtinge—RJL); preparatory courses (Vovbereitulzgs-Lehrgii9zge)for officer applicants (Fiihrer-Bezuerbcr—FR) and reserve officer applicants(Reserve-Fiihrer-Bczcvrbcr—RFB) ; and coursesfor technicians, which are found mainly at thespecial-service schools of the signal troops andartillery and which use special technical equipmentpeculiar to their respective arms.Most of the Wnffejt-SS special-service schoolshave demonstration regiments (Lehrregi9nenter)attached to them for demonstrating and instructingand also for experimenting with new weaponsand tactics.Officer candidate schools are discussed in theseparate section on the officer corps below.The two basic types of establishments for thetraining of noncommissioned officers for theWajjell-SS are the noncommissioned officerscl~ools and separate noncommissioned officercourses. The former are for professional noncommissionedofficers and the latter for reservenoncommissioned officers.The SS noncommissioned officer schools (SS-Ulzterfiihl-er-SchzIlclz), which train German and"Germanic" personnel, and the SS and foreignpersonnel noncotnmissioned officer schools (SSmdWaflcn-Unterfiihrer-Schulerl), which trainGerman and "non-Germanic" personnel, are organizedinto either one or two battalions, a battalionconsisting of a headquarters and four companies.Each company usually trains noncommissionedofficers for a different branch of service.On completing the course an SS noncommissionedofficer applicant (SS-Untrrfiihrrr-Bezucrber)is appointed S S noncommissioned officercandidate (SS-U9tterfi i hreY-A9mutirtcY) ; he maybecome a sergeant (SS-U9zterscharfiihrer) onlyafter demonstrating his abilities in a troop unit.Besides the courses for professional noncommissionedofficers held at the noncommissionedofficer schools, the Waffcn-SS conducts shorttermnoncommissioned officer courses (Untcrfiihrer-Lehrg&ge)for reserve noncommissionedofficers. These are usually held in the field divisionsduring quiet periods.Spe\cialist training establishments have the missionof training of officer technicians (TechnischeFiihrer der Sonderlaufbahnen) and particularlyUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.45Inoncommissioned officer technicians (Linterfiihrerder So9lderlaufbaluzen). Specialist trainingestablishments include the Motor TechnicalSchool of the Waflen-SS (Kraftfahrtech9zischeLehramtalt dcr Waffen-SS at Vienna, the OrdnanceTechnical School of the Waj%cn-SS (Waffentech9zischeLchranstalt dcr Waffen-SS) atDachau, riding and driving schools, motor transportsupply-troop schools, and a number of othertypes.(3) Replacement. Unlike the Army, theWaflcn-SS does not decentralize the control ofits replacement system to its regional headquartersin Germany. The entire replacement systemof the W’aflc9&S is administered centrally by theSS Main Operational Department. Replacementrequisitions from field units for ordinary personnelare sent through this dcpartmcnt direct tothe replacement units concerned. Those for of&cers go to the SS Main Department for Personnel(SS-Pcrsorr~rl EInuptarrrf), except that for allofficers in the economic administrative service theSS P\Tain Economic Administrative Department(SS-Wistschaft-Vrrze,altzlrrgs-Hauptallzt) is theresponsible replacement agency.The entire system of transferring and assigningWaRen-SS personnel to training and replacementunits, field units, schools, and headquarters is coutrolledby the reinforcement branch (Abt I e) inthe Headquarters Office of the TVaffrn-SS (Ko~x99zandoa9lrt drr Tt’ajfffrlz-SS—Amt II). Thisbranch works in close cooperation with variousother agencies regarding the transfer and assignmentof specialist ~,ersotinel. For example, theveterinary troops of the Wafle92-SS are supervisedby the Veterinary Branch (Abt IV) in theRiding and Driving O& e (Amt Reit- und -Fahrwssen—AmtVI), which also conducts their trainingand courses, while all ordnance troops arecontrolled by the Ordnance Branch (Abt II) inthe office for supply (Nachschubamt—Al7zt VII).Both these branches maintain personnel assignment sections for their respective specialist personnel.Medical personnel comes under the controlof the Administration Office (Anzt XIII) inthe Medical Group (Sauitiitmvsru der Waffen-SS-rlnztsgruptw D—Ag 0).c. OFFICER CORPS OF THE Wafleu-SS. (1)Gerzeral. The SS Main Department for Personttel(SS-Persollal - Mauptamt — SS - Pers HA)keeps a central card file on all officers of the SS.The original officer corps of the SS comprised anumber of different categories, mainly dependentIll-—17

I MARCH 1945upon the nature of their employment. The creationof the Wufmz-SS and its employment as apowerful military force necessitated the formationof a separate officer corps for the Wafer-SS. An officer may, and often does, have differentranks in the two corps.(2) Selection of iMospcctive officers. Theselection, registration, and training of prospectiveofficers for the Wa#e77-SS is the responsibility ofthe SS Main Operational Department, which exercisesthis function through the Office for OfficerTraining (fl77~t ~ iihrerausbildztll9—Alltt XZjin the Training Group (L4,mtsgrzcppe B). At thetime of induction the recruiting center reports officermaterial to this ofice. Every volunteer hasthe opportunity to enter the oficer career of theFVafl’c7t-SS, depending upon three qualifications,namely, his character as a German, his performanceas a National Socialist and a member ofthe SS, and his qualifications as a soldier an

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTME 30.451Waffelljlflaker-Sclzulen). After its completionthey return to their units and after a period of 2months are appointed Wa~elz-Ulztcrsturl?zfiilzrerby the RF-SS upon the recommendation of theirregimental commander.(4) Oficer cmdidafc COWSCS. Apart from theregular courses at the ofiicer-candidate schools describedabove, the R’aflcll-SS conducts the followingspecial officer-candidate courses:Courses for partly disahled SS officer candidates(I.chqii+zge fiir vrrselwtc SS-Jwkcr) heldat the officer-candidate schools.Special course for Panzer officer candidates(Pan~er-Ju~~kcr-So~~d~~rlcl~~~a~~~).(5) Otlzcr oficc~ fyainillg rstablislm~ents. TheTVaffclz-SS maintains medical and economic administrativeofficer training establishments withthe function of providing for and supervising themilitary education of prospective active medicaland economic administrative officers of the Waffc+Ss’during the period of their studies at universitiesand other institutions.(6) Specialist careers. All officer candidateschoosing a specialist career (Sonderlaufba.lzn)Inust have certain basic qualifications. Theymust have spent half a year .with a field unit andsuccessfully graduated from an officer candidateschool of the LVa~m-SS.The following are the various specialist careersIf the Waffm-SS:(a) Mrdical career. This includes:Physician (SS-Fiilwcr wd Arzt)Medical techniciau (SS-Fiihrer im Sanith’tstech.Dicmt)Dentist (SS-Fiihrcr wd Zaharzt)Pharmacist (SS-Fiilwcr und Apothcker)The Medical Academy of the Waffm-SS pro\-ides for the training of all officers in the medicalcareer. Besides their formal training studentsattend lectures and practical demonstrations atvarious universities.(1)) Vcfcrinary rarrcr. This includes:l’eterinary (SS-Fiihrer und Veterinh’r)\‘eterinary technician (SS-Fiihrcr inr Vrtrri/riivtrclm. Dicmt)Officers in the veterinary career receive theirspecialist training in the IHacksmith, School as wellas in the veterinary training and replacement unitof the Waffen-SS.(c) Adwinistrativc rawer. The Officer Schoolof the Economic Administrative Service of theSS gives lectures and provides practical applicationfor officers in the administrative career. Be-sides lectures at universities, the training includespractical experience and instruction at an administrativeoffice of the Waflcn-SS.(d) Ordlzawe tecllllician career. This includes:Ordnance supply officer (SS-Fiilzrer im Waffen-lrrld ,l~lrlliriolrsdirl/st)Ordnance officer technician (TrclmSS-FiihverJV)Engineering officer (Trchll.SS-Fiikrer WIng.)The Ordnance Technical School and the engineeringschools of the Ti'a~~c~l-SS provide for thespecialized training of these officers. They alsoattend lectures and 1cccivc practical applicationat technical institutions.(c) Motor -trrlrrriral caret-r. This includes:Motor officers (Ti~cl~~~isclrr SS-Fiihrer (K) I)Motor officers (‘Trclrnisclrr SS-Fiilwer (I()11)The Motor Technical School of the TJiafc?t-SSprovides for and supervises the training of theseofficers.(f) 0tlrcl- specialist careers of fhr Waffcll-SSinclude:Officer technician (sig) (Tccl~~~iscl~c SS-Fiihrcr (N))Judge advocate (SS-Fiilzrrr und Richter)Notary (SS-Fiihrc’r und Beurkundungsfiihrer)Water suppl!- officer (SS-Fiihrcr und W’elwgcologr)Bandmaster (SS-Fiihrcr und Musikfiihrer)The officers in thaw specialist careers, besidestheir instruction at technical schools and otherestal~lishnicnts of the 1I V trflcrl-.SS, receive specializedtraining at the special-service schools or specialisttraining SChCiOlS of the ]Vaffcn-SS.d. SUPPI.Y SYSRELR OF THE IFaffcn-SS. (1jGc~ml. Units of tile TT’rrfle~-SS operating underthe tactical control of the Army utilize theregular -4rniy sulq~ly channels for supplies ofrations, fuel. heavy equipment, and ammunition.In addition, however, tile SS maintains its ownsvstem of supply distinct from that of the ArmedI’orces and not subject to control or supervisionhy the latter. For this put-post a large networkof depots and stores hns been built up in Germany and in occupied territory.(2) Confyol. Ol)erntionall!- these depots andstores come under the control of the S S MainOperational Department, which is responsible forthe equipment and supply of SS units and establishmentswhen not under the tactical control of11—19

I MARCH 1945the Army. The S S Main Economic AdministrativeDepartment, on the other hand, is responsiblefor the detailed administration of these depots, orfor the general supervision of administrationwhere there is decentralization of its authority,e.g. to the economic official (SS-Wirtsclzufter)with a Higher SS and police commander in occupiedterritory. The actual responsibility for supplyis divided between the SS Main OperationalDepartment, which is responsible for initial equ$mentand the supply and maintenance of arms,ammunition, technical equipment, and transportvehicles, and the SS Main Econotnic AdministrativeDepartment, which is responsible for rations,clothing, personal equipment, coal, wood, andfodder.For certain types of heavy equipment whichare obtainable only from Army depots, agreemer,tis reached between the OKH and the SS MainOperational Department, which becomes responsiblefor the general supervision of stocks, maintenance,and repair once such equipment has beenhanded over to an SS unit.Although the SS and Police supply and administratidnsystem in wartime operates primarily forthe Waffen-SS and SS police units, its organizationand installations are also at the disposal ofthe General SS and the S S Death's-Head Formations.(3) Regional organization of suffly. The SSMain Economic Administrative Department controlsall regidnal supply depots. There is amarked tendency for SS depots and administrativeservices to be grouped around concentrationcamps, notably Dachau and Oranienburg. Tli i sarrangement centralized administrative matters,as the concentration camps come under the controlof the SS Main Economic AdministrativeDepartment, and the inmates of such camps providea cheap source of labor.At each SS district headquarters in Germanyproper there is an administrative office (Verwaltungsa’mt)which controls and supervises all sup.ply depots and installations within its area. Similarlyat the S S sub-district headquarters there isan administrative branch (Vemc,alt26~~gsabteilung)with the same functions. At the headquarters ofan SS garrison command (SS-Stalzdortbereich)there is an SS garrison administration headquart’ers(SS-Standortverwallung) dealing with suplilyand finance in its area and directly subordinateto the respective S S district and sub-district.In occupied territory, there is an economic sec-II’20UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451tion controlled by an official (SS-Wirtschufter)on the staff of an HSSPf. He is responsible forthe administration of all depots and supplies inhis region. Where field units of the Waflen-SSare likely fo operate in a particular area for a considerableperiod, special supply bases (Stiitzpunkte)are usually established at convenientpoints. These are small and temporary in character.(4) Clzan~zcls oj s~(/@y. All Wa#‘rn-SS unitsrequisition their supplies from the S S Main OperationalDepartment. which either makes the issueitself or instructs the SS Main liconomic AdministrativeDepartment to do so. The latter theneither dispatches the material direct to the unitfrom one of the central depots or from the factory,or arranges for it to be made available tothe unit at the nearest comcnient sub-depot.The main stocks cf supply are held in centralSS depots. These are of two kinds :Main supply depots (SS-Hauptwirtsclzafts-Zagrr-—ZIWL), containing miscellaneous typesof supplies.Special depots, including SS ordnance depots,motor transport supply depots and parks, signa.lequipment depots, medical equipment depots, andclothing depots.From these central depots, outlying sub-depotsare supplied. These may be either SS supplydepots (SS-~~rc~c~~sclzl~l~lagcr), mainly found nearthe borders of Germany and in occupied territory,or SS troop supply depots (SS-Truppenwirtsclzaftslag~r—TWLj,which hold stocks of clothing,light equipment, fuel, and other goods.At the time, when the supply lines on the EasternFront were too far cxt~ntled. SS supply serviceheadquarters (SS-A~trrhsclzlihkollzlllanda?2tz~ea) were established. Each of these was initself an important group of depots and administrativeofices. Although subordinate for administrativepurposes to the SS economic official withthe local HSSPf, it was the primary link betweenthe SS main departments and main depots in Germanyand the SS units and sub-depots in its ownarea. It served both as a distribution center anda supply base, and in its depots were held arnls,ammunition, motor transport equipment, capture1material, clothing, fuel, coal, wood, building material,and other goods. It was also empowered,subject to the approval of the S S economic of%cial with the HSSPF, to make contracts with orpurchases from private firms in its area.(5) Veterinary supply service. The Waff en

I MARCH 194555 i t s its own channel of supply for itscavalry and non-motorized units. Horses for theWaffen-SS are procured through SS remount depots(SS-Remonteiirnter), which were mainlyfound until recently in occupied territory. Thesedepots forward the horses to the S S rihing anddriving schools (SS-Reit-md-Falwschulen), fromwhere they either go to a unit direct or to an SSbase veterinary depot (SS-H&tzatpferdepark),which in turn forwards them to an SS veterinarydepot (SS-Pferdepark) in a forward area, usuallyattached to an SS corps. These corps will thenmake distribution among their divisions whichhave veterinary companies. Wounded horses,after treatment in the field, go to an SS veterinaryhospital (SS-Pferdelazarett) in a forwardarea an then SS an 55 base veterinary hospital(SS-Hcimafpferdelazarett) in Germany. Veterinaryequipment for Waffen-SS units can be obtainedfrom the SS Central Veterinary Park (SS-Hauptvrterintirpark) by way of one of the veterinaryparks in forward areas.(6) Movement of supplies. The transportationof SS supplies is coordinated by the trans.portation officer (Transportofizier—TO) in the55 Main Operational Department. He maintainsliaison both with other SS main departmentswhere necessary and also with the German railwayauthorities and the transportation authoritiesof the German Arms. Subordinate to him are anumber of regional transportation officers, foundin in those districts close to the German border.Other transportation officers are stationedat principal railway stations in Germany and inoccupied territory. At railway junctions particularly important for SS movement, SS reloadingstations (SS-Unzschlagstellen) are established.(7) Repair and maintenance of velzicles andcquipnzelt t . In forward areas, besides the repairand recovery sections at divisions, independentsections may operate at supply depots or at supplyservice headquarters. In Germany facilitiesfor repair exist at the appropriate SS central depotsand also at the SS Ordnance Testing Workshop(SS-Waffenamt-Priifungswcrksttitte) andthe SS Ordnance Works (SS-Ausriistungswerke).Extensive use is also madeof Armyrepair facilities.(8)’ Medical sewices. General supervisionover the medical services of the 55 is exercisedby two officers, the Chief SS and Police MedicalOfficer (Reichsarzt SS und Polizei), who is attachedto the Personal Staff RF-SS (Pers&ZichcrUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Stab RF-SS), and the Head of the SS MedicalGroup, who acts as inspector General of SSMedical Services.Actual administration is carried out by theMedical Group (Sanifiitswese~z der Waffen-SS—Anztsgruppe U) in the SS Main Operational Department,which controls SS hospitals and medicalservices in Germany and in occupied territoryas well as the medical units attached to 55 unitsin the field. It does not, however, automaticallyfollow that all 55 casualties are evacuatedthrough SS medical channels. Local circumstancesmay make it difficult o: inexpedient t,?use SS medical facilities, and it frequently happelt;that SS wounded are evacuated as far asbase hospitals in Germany entirely through regularArmy medical channels.A great number of SS medical institutions, SShospitals (SS-Laznreffcj, and SS convalescenthomes (SS-Gen~esungsheiww) have been identifiedboth in Germany and in occupied areas.e. E~~PI,~YMIXVIY OF THE Waflen-SS IIV TEIEFIELD.Hitler is nominally the Supreme Commanderof the Waffetz-SS. This command is exercisedonly through the RF-SS, and it has become verydoubtful of late whether Hitler has retained anypower to direct Himmler in this or any othercapacity.The field hcadquartcrs of the RI;-SS (Feldkol~mandostelleRF-SS) represents nominally thehighest echelon in the direction of the employmentof the LVaficn-SS. Since Himmler is notalways present at this headquarters, proper allowanceshould be made for the fact that the RF-SSwill decide in person about such employment, regardlessof his wheresljouts at the time. No unitof the W’afm-SS may be dissolved, under anycircumstances, by anybody but the RF-SS.For military operations, units of the Waffeft-SSare placed under command of the OKH. In thebeginning individual units were assigned to armygroups and armies as needed, although an effortwas made to give them independent tasks whereverpossible. Special emphasis was placed onthe propaganda value of their employment, andmany spectacular missions were assigned to them,although their military importance and difficultvwere often exaggerated. \Vith the progress of theRussian campaign these units became involved intougher combat assignments. Due to the strictselection of their personnel, not only from a politicalpoint of view but also from that of health,III-—2I

I MARCH 1945stamina, and stature, these units were in a positionto take full advantage of the strong propagandaefforts which the SS made in their behalf. Gaininga reputation as an elite force, divisions of theIT’aflerlz-SS began to control regular Army unitsengaged in the immediate vicinity. The next stepwas the formation of SS corps which, underOKH command, controlled SS divisions andbrigades. Soon certain S S corps held commandover a small group of S S units and a much largerproportion of regular Army units. Eventually,certain SS corps commanded Army units only.For a brief period, in 1943, an SS Army existedwhich held mainly administrative functions innorthern Italy. But in the autumn of 1944, whenthe Sixth Palzzer Army was formed, a large unitof the German Army was for the first time designatedas an SS unit. Previous to that event, SSgenerals had held Army commands under theOKH in a few instances during the defense ofNormandy ant! the withdrawal from France.The territorial commanders of the Wuflen-SS(Bcfehlslraher dcr W’afen-SS), who have beeninstalled in certain occupied and annexed areas,take charge of operations only in certain specialcases. For example, a coast defense sector (Kiistcnverteidigmgsabsclmitt)in the Netherlands wascommanded by such an officer under the CommandingGeneral in the Netherlands (LXXXVIIIArmy Cor!‘s). His command included trainingand replacement units of the Waffcn-SS, of theSS Police, and of the Air Force.Tn theory, the influence of the RF-SS ceaseswith the subordination of bf’n#~-SS units to theArmy. Tn effect, however, much evidence pointsto the fact that he retains the right to pass on thetype of employment which the Army may prescribe.The temporary relief of Rundstedt as commanderof the Western Front in 1944 is attributed, at least in part, to a conflict between himand the RF-SS resulting from discrepancies ofopinion as to the employment of the Waffen-SSin that theater.Units of the Wt.tffnt-SS have been employedin all theatres of the war, except in North Africaand in the original campaign in Norway. Fromthe small beginning of regimental units participatingin the Polish campaign, active employmentof w’afefz-SS units grew to at least two divisionsin the Western and Balkan drives of 1940 and1941. One division was engaged in Finland fromthe beginning of the Russian campaign. In RusUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451sia itself the number of Ll’n#clr-SS units engaget!grew from five divisions in 1942 to at least fourcorps and 13 tlivisions for the better part of1944. An SS brigade partici!,ated in the defenseof Corsica and was later committed as a divisionin the Italian thca:cr, whiles another appearet!there to assist in the internal tasks resulting fromthe Italian collapse. To this I\-ere added a newdivision and a new brigade in 1944. Two corpsand at least seven divisions fought at varioustimes against the partisans it1 Yugoslavia, andone division formed an important component ofthe occupation forces in Greece. Two Ilmfegz-SScorps and six divisions were employed in Normandyand participated in the withtlrawal fromFrance. On the Western I:ront one Army, atleast six corps, and a minimum of nine divisionswere opposing Allied forces at the beginning of1945. Two or three corps, nine divisions, and twobrigades formed the strength of the Il’nffc~l-SSin Hungary at that time.Corps units of the Wafm-SS, such as Panzw.heavy artillery, observation, projector, signal, reconnaissance,and antiaircraft battalions andsmaller units of the same and other types, maybe used as tactical stlpport for both wfl#filt-SSand Army units.Ever since the S S increased its power over theArmy so suddenly in July 1944, rumors have persistedthat individual members of the Wnffen-SSbecame attached to regular Army units, especia!!yin the low echelons, in order to increase the reliabilityof these troops. The fact that units of theWafcn-SS were used to prevent mass desertionsor withtlrawals contrary to ortlers is established.IJ’nffrll-SS personllc! forms the nucleus of theVolks Gwnadiw and probab!\- also the Volkssturmunits. To some extent personnel of the i7’aflfn?SS was exchanged with ,4rmy personnel, whilewhole contingents of Air Corps and Navy personnelwere repeatedly presset! into the service ofthe Wu,flcll-SS when it became urgently necessaryto reform badly mauled rVnffrll-.~S units.Another recent trend is the assumption of commandfmictions in the TVq,TwSS by high-rankingArmy officers. They appear \vith SS ranksequivalent to their former Army ranks. Althoughthis procetlure may I)e causet! merely by militaryexpediency. it is not likely that a high-rankingGerman officer would assume an .96" rank withoutcoming under the special tlisciplinary rules Ofthe SS and without having reconciled himself toits program, ideals, and plans for tile future.11122

I MARCH 1945UMCLASSl~lEDTM-E 30-4517. SS Police Unitsa. INTRODUCTION. Parts of the German OrderPolice (Ordnungspolizei—Orpo) have maintaineda strict military organization patternedafter that of the regular Army. Known as theBarrack Police (Kaser&~te PO/&~), a branchof the Protective Police (Scllufzpolizei—Schupo),they are quartered in large towns in Germany,usually in company strength. These units arecommanded in each locality by a Commander ofthe Protective Police (Komrrm~dczrr dcr Schtzpolisci),who receives his orders from the Inspectorof the Order Police (Z~~s~c~ktc~rr dcr Ordt~~fngspolizei),a member of the staff of theHSSPf in each district. Their function .is toact as a mobile reserve for the ordinary municipalpolice. They may be described as the linealdescendants of the old ‘ (green" police (Lmdes-PO/~,?&), a quasi-military body of men permittedto Germany by the Treaty of Versailles.For service abroad during the war these BarrackPolice have been formed into S S policeregiments (SS-PoZi~~i-R~gi~~zerlf~~) and SS-Police Battalions (SS-Polizei-BatailZone), rnestof them motorized, which are organized andequipped on a military basis but usually lackheavy weapons.The development of these units started withthe formation of centuries (HzcIzdertscl~ufte72) in1939, which soon developed into independent battalions.A battalion consists of about 5.50 men,organized into a headquarters and four companies,and equipped with rifles, machine guns,antitank guns, and armored cars. Battalions wereoriginally numbered in the series 1 to 32.5. Mostof them were reorganized into regiments in 1943and numbered in one consecutive series runningup to about 37. Most of these regiments appearsimply as SS-PoZi=ci-rcgilllclft (followedby its number), but at least one regiment is anSS-Polizci-Gebirgsjigcr-Rcyillzclzt (SS I’o1iceMountain Infantry Regiment).The ideology and general bearing of these unitsare similar to those of the Waflc~z-SS. They havegained a very similar reputation for their conduct,especially as occupation troops. These unitsare not part of the Waffc~z-SS, and they shouldnot be confused with the SS-PoliU”ei-Divisiorl, aU’affe,l-SS division composed of police personnel.I). RECRUITING, TRAINING. AKD REPLACEH1KRR. (1) Recruitiltg. Before the war candidatesfor the Protective Police had to meet veryhigh standards of health and physique, to bemembers of the S S or some other Party organization,and to pass a special aptitude test. Theexpansion of the S‘S police units during the warmade it necessary to relax these requirements.At the same lime an effort was made to recruitmen who had been discharged from the regularArmed Forces for one reason or another, andspecial privileges kvere offered them in the formof advanced noncommissioned officer ratings dependingon the number of years of previousservice.Later on the recruiting authorities for the S Spolice units, just like those for the Ct’aflen-SS,resorted more and more to the manpower of OCcupiedcountries, especially in Eastern and SoutheasternEurope. These men were first used inseparate units known as S~.hz~f,ol2lallllschaftcn ormilitia, chiefly for guard duties and small-scalecounter-partisan activities ; such units were thenincorporated into the SS police organization,sotnetimes forming entire regiments which werecalled police volunteer regiments~~illigclz-h’cgillce~lter).(Pohei-Frei(2) Traikllg. The police organization maintainsits own school system but frequently hasto use the school facilities of either the Army orthe Waflew-SS. All training activities are controlledand supervised by the Headquarters Office(Ir’ownmrldanf) of the Order Police in theMain department of the Order Police (Ha~ptumtOrdmmgspo1ixi). l’ersonnel after inductionreceive basic training in the special-serviceschools of the police (Poli,-ei-Cl’affenschzIlerl)and specialized training either at the specialisttraining establishments of the police or the specialisttraining schools of the Army or W’nffewSS.Noncommissioned officer and officer candidatescliools of the Police provide for the training ofnoncommissioned officer and officer material. Inaddition special noncommissionecl officer andofficer candidate courses are held at the specialserviceschools of the police.(3) l?Pplacclrlcrrt. The replacetnent system ofthe police is likewise the responsibility of theHeadquarters Office in the Main Department ofthe Order Police. This office includes a personneloffice, a reinforccmcnt branch, and an administrationand law office \\-hich performs the functionsof replacement ant1 assignment of personnelin a manner very similar to that of the correspondingoffices of the S S High Command,111—23

MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451The actual replacement units of the S S policeregiments are the special-service schools, whichwere formerly called instruction battalions (Lelzr-Bataillione). These units receive their personnelfrom the recruit assembly centers (Erfassungsdienststellen)of the Protective Police. Forofficers and specialist personnel, the responsiblereplacement units are the officer candidate schoolsand specialist training schools.c. OFFICER CORPS. All officers of the ProtectivePolice are recruited in wartime fromgraduates of the SS officer candidate schools(SS-Junkerschulen). They are then given specialpolice training at police officer schools. Allofficers now have dual rank in the S S and theProtective Police.d. SUPPLY. The S S police regiments havetheir own supply depots and their own channelsof supply. They receive such supplies from theMain Ordnance Depot of the Order Police(Hau~ptzeugawt der Ordnungspolizei) and fromthe police procurement depots (Polizei-Bcschaffu~lgstimtcr)as well as from the clothingdistribution centers of the police (Bekleidzmgsliefet-stellefader Polisei). For certain types ofsupply, however, they depend upon the supplydepots and installations of the Waflelz-SS orthose of the Army.e. EMPLOYMENT OF SS POLICE UNITS IN TIIEFIELD. The employment of police units for militarypurposes dates back to 1939, when a Riiacllctlngslaundertsclzaftdcr Polizei was engaged indirecting refugees who were evacuated from thewestern border areas. Their main mission wasto keep the roads clear for the columns of theArmed Forces. The expansion into battalionswas brought about in order to cope with thetype of guerrilla warfare which originated inRussia behind the lines of the swiftly advancingGerman forces. Numerous units employed heregained valuable experience which they put togood use in their later missions in Yugoslavia,Greece, Italy, and France. SS police units werealso stationed wherever large-scale constructionof defense works was in progress, e.g. at theAtlantic Wall and in the Mediterranean defensezone. At times SS police units joined with combattroops in the front lines, especially wheredefensive operations became urgent. In mostcases only elements of SS police regiments havebeen identified in one place. Battalions of thesame regiment have been found in different sectorsand even on different fronts.Xormally these units come under the regionalcommand of the HSSPf represented by the commanderof the Order Police. In certain areasspecial headquarters have been formed underthe HSSPf to carry out such tasks as the combatingof partisans. Sometimes SS police unitshave been placed under &\rrn y command formilitary operations, or they may be directly subordinateto a commander of the JVaffen-SSwho in turn comes under the .1rm)..Section II. .AUXILIARY ORGANIZATIONS1. introductionCertain militarized organizations have developedfrom independent or Party formations tofull-fledged partners of the Armed Forces. Inthe field, when they operate directly for theArmed 170rces, they are described as attached tothem (Welznjzachtgefolgc) ; but they also performmany supply, construction, policing, andtraining tasks of military importance when notactually associated with military units.2. Labor ServiceThe German Labor Service (Reiclzsarbeitsdienst—RAD) arose from a Party organization set upin 1931 and known ;is the NS-Arbrifsdicllst forthe purpose of easing unemployment. It grew inimportance with the rearmament of Gtarmany, anda law in 193.5 made scrvicc in the RAD, IIOW separatedfrom the Party and made into a State organization,compulsory for all young Germans.The strength of the RAD in 1939 is estimated at360,000 men; it is now considerably less. TheRAD is a Supreme Reich Authority I\-ith the samestatus as the Ministries. It has nevertheless maintainedits strong ties to the Party, documented bythe position of its chief, the Rrichsavbeitsf iilzrer,as a member of the High Command (Reichslritwg)of the Party.The mission of the RAD in peacetime consistedin the creation of jobs. the performance ofpublic works, the revival of interest in the dignityof manual labor, and above all the physical hardening,disciplining, and political indoctrination ofits members.The RAD has its own regional organizationbased on 40 Arbeitsgaue which contain numerousgroups (Gruppell) and detachments (Abteihgen).A detachment normally consists of about200 men,III—24

TN (and otherArmy SS Police auxiliary police) RAD OT NSKK Party-Oficials # SA and NSFK HIGren. SS-Mann Anwarter Anwarter Arbeitpmann Arbeiter Sturmmann Heifer Sturmmann## Hitlerj ungeOb. Gren. Sturmmann Vormann Vormann Obersturmmann Oberhelfer Ober sturm man n## RottenfuhrerGefr. Rotten fuhrer Unterwacht- Unterwacht- Obervormann Meister Rotten fuhrer Arbeitsleiter Rottenfiihrer Ober rotten fiihsermeistermeisterOb. Gefr. Rottwachtmeister liott wachtmei ster Hauptvormann Obermeister OberarbeitsleiterStabsgefr. Untertruppfiihrer HauptarheitsleitwUnt. Offz, Unterscharfiihrer Wachtmeister Wachtmeister Truppfiihrer Truppfiibrer Scharfuhrer Scbnrfiibrer KameradschaftsfiihrerUnt. Feldw. Scharfiihrer Oberwachtmeister Oberwachtmeister Ober scharfiihrer (Jberscharfiihrer OberkameradscbaftsfiibrerFeldw. Oberschar fuhrer Zugwachtmei ster Zugwachtmei ster Oberscharfiihrer Obertruppfiibrer Truppfiibrer Bereitschaftsleiter Truppfiibrer ScharfiihrerOb. Feldw. H a uptschar fuhrer Hauptwacht- Hauptwacht- Haupttruppfiihrer Obertruppfiihrer Oberbereit- Obertruppfiihrer 0herscb;~rfiibrermeister meister schaftslciterStabsfeldw. Sturmschar fuhrer Bereitschafts- Haupttruppfiihrer Hauptbereit- Haupttruppfiibrerwachtmeister ,schaftsleiterMeister Meister UnterfeldmeisterObermeisterLt . Untersturmfuhrer Leutnan Zugfuhrer Feklmeister Krontfiihrer Sturmfuhrer Einsatzleiter Sturmfiihrer GefolgschaftsflibrerOb. Lt. Obersturmfuhrer Oberleutnant Oberzugfiihrer Oberfeldmeister Oberfrontfuhrer Obersturmfuhrer Obereinsatzleiter Obersturmfuhrer ObergefolgscbaftsfiihrerHauptmann HauptsturmfuhrtT Hauptmann Bereitschafts- Oberstfeldmeister Hauptfrontfiilxer Haul’tsturmfdbrer Haupteinsatzleitrr H au pt stu rmf uh rer HauptgefolgscbaftsfiihrerfubrerMajor Sturmbannfuhrer Major Abteilungsfiihrer Arbeitsfuhrer Stabsfront fuhrer Staffelfuhrer Gemeinschafts- Sturmbannfiihrer StammflihrerleiterObst Lt. Obersturmbann- Oberstleutnant Oberabteilungs- Oberarbeitsfiihrer Oberstabsfront- Oberstaffel- Hauptgemein- Obersturmbann- Oberstammfiihrcrfuhrer fuhrer fiihrer fiihrer schaftsleiter fiihrerOberst Standartenfiihrer Oberst Landesfiihrer Oberstarbeits Oberstfrontfuhrer Standartenfiihrer Hauptabschnitts Standartenfiihrer BannfiihrerfuhrerfuhrerOber fiihrer< >herf iihrerHauptbereichsleiterOberf iibrerHauptbannfilhrerGen. Maj. Brigadefiihrer (jeneralmajor Generalarbeits Einsatzleiter Brigadefiibrcr Haulrtdienstlciter Brigadrftibrcr GebeitsfiihrerfuhrerGen. Lt. Gruppenfuhrer Generalleutnant (Chef der TN) Obergeneral- Einsatzaruulxn Gruppenfiihrer Hauptbefeblsleiter Gruppenfdbrer Obergebeitsfiibrer marbeitsfiihrer leiter ITGeneral Obergruppen- General Einsatzgruppen Obergruppenf tihrer Gnuleiter Obergruppenf iihrer Stabsf tihrerfiihrerleiter IGen. Obst. Oberstgruppen Generaloberst Reichsarbeits Chef der OT Korpsfiihrer Reichsleiter Stabschef der SA ReichsjugendfuhrerfuhrerfuhrerGen. Feldm.Reichsfiihrer-SS4P This is only a selection of the many Party ranks.# # SA-Sturmmann equals NSFK-Mann.SA-Obersturmmann equals NSFK-Sturmmann.Figwe 5.—Table of equizulmt mnks.o3COCO

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451The work done by the RAD was of substantialmilitary value even in peacetime. It helped tobuild fortifications and formed the nucleus of theconstruction battalions of the Army and Airl;orce at the outbreak of war. Such battalions,which were originally formed by the outright convcrsronof KAD groups, had an average strengthof 2,000 mc’n and consisted of four constructioncompanies and three construction columns. Theseunits prepared the way for the work of the engineersand did the pick and shovel work underthem. During the Polish campaign the work consistedof road and railway repair work and ofconstruction of airfields. In addition they broughtup supplies, collected and sorted captured equipment,and helped with the harvest. In December1939 the R/ID reverted to its original form andcontinued to carry out its wartime duties Lmderits own commanders and under RAD rules andadministration. l3y 1943 the RAD men were completelymilitarized. In addition to the shovel work,they were employed to lay minefields and manfortifications and were taught antitank and antiaircraftdefense. In 1944 such employment becametllore general \vhile conditions inside Germanynecessitated the use of the RAD to operate antiaircraftbatteries, fight fires, clear bomb damage, andbuild temporary quarters for the bombed-out.Knits remaining in the field or finding themselvesin German areas which became parts of thefighting front \\:cre often incorporated into theWclannaclat without further ado.3. Todt OrganizationThe Orpnisatio~z Todt (OT) was first formedby the late Dr. Todt in 1938 to build the westerntlefcnscs known in Germany as the Westwall. Inlvartime its Einsntzpuppezr (Work Groups) wereemployed as construction units in almost all defensiveconstruction works, especially those in France,Italy, and the Lowlands. The OT cooperatesclosely with private firms in its missions for theWclzr~~~l~t and employs increasing numbers offoreign laborers. Its liaison with the Artny ismaintained through the fortress engineer staffs(F~stungspiollicrsti~~~). The transport system ofthe OT is maintained by the NSE=IC (see below).The German personnel of the OT is armed inorder to be prepared for any surprise attack whileworking on the building site. Most of the men belongto age groups which are expected to havereceived military training during the last war,Kefresher courses are - held.

I MARCH 19456. VolkssturlFounded by Hitler in October 1944, this nationalmilitia organization represents an ultimate effortto mobilize all available manpower for employmentin total war. It includes all German men betuwnthe agcss of sixteen and sixty \vho are notin the Armed Forces and who are able to beararms. The members of the Volfissttrrnz are describedas soldiers for the duration of their employment,which is to take place locally wherevera given area is threatened. The Volkssturm hasthe mission of reinforcing the active strength ofthe Armed Forces and defending German soil tothe last. It is recruited under the auspices of theParty, whose formations join in providing itscadres and officers. The leadership in the Partyregions is assigned to the Gaulcitcr, the rifle trainingto the SA, and the automotive training to theNSKK. Beyond that all installations and institutionsof the Party serve to form and train the newunits. Himmler, as Commander of the ReplacementArmy, is responsible for the organization ofthe Volksstarmz and for ordering its mobilizationand employment in any particular area.Section III. OTHER PARTY ORGANIZATIONSCertain uniformed organizations of the Party inaddition to those described above may also be regardedas potential auxiliary units to the Germanmilitary forces. They have been encountered performingimportant functions of a quasi-militarynature in the occupied countries and will all, withoutexception, be called upon for either combat orsupporting duties in the defense of any part ofGermany proper under immediate military threat.The Sational-Socialist Party itself (Nationalsozialistiscl~cDcutsch Arbeitcrpartei—NSDAP)has an elaborate hierarchy of central, regional, andlocal headquarters with departments for all itsmanifold interests at all levels. Through this apparatusit is able to keep a close watch on all aspectsof German life and all the activities of thecitizens. Jis High Command (lic~ichslritt~~lg) ;~t~Iunich includes bureaus (A’rlztcr) which moreor Icss parallel the AIinistries of the national governmentin Berlin. The heads of the principalactivities are called Rciclasleitcr, of whom some16 now exist. These, together with the Gadcitcr\vho head the 43 Party regions (Gauc). constitutethe top leadership of the Party. Under them arevast numbers of Party functionaries known as po-UNCLASSIFIED TM.E 30.451litical leaders (Politischc Lritcr), who have theirown complicated system of ranks and uniformsand are well suited to organi&ng and guiding resistancewithin Germany.To train the corps of political leaders in Naziideology and methods the Party has established asystem of special schools. including four "castlesof the order" (O~dc~rshrgo~) for highly selectstudents and a large number of regional and districttraining "castles" (Gnu- and K&s-Schu-Izcngsbzirpw).When the Volkssturm was created in October1944, responsibility for recruiting and organizingit locally was vested in the Galrlcitcr. This is thefirst occasion on \\-hicb the J’nrty authorities assuch have bren entruslc.tl with a function which isprimarily military in nature.Besides its regular regional and functional subdivisionsthe Party includes four special branches(Gliedcrzlllgclz,)-the S.1, SS, NSKK, and HJ—and a number of affiliated formations iarzgcschlos-Sejlc 1 7crbiidc), each of \vhich is a self-containedorganization with its o\vn particular mission, regionalstructure, ranks, uniforms, and significanceto the war effort of thv nation. Since these havenot been discussed in the previous sections theyare dealt with briefly bclo\v.I. Storm Troops (Stmwrabteilungen SA)These are organized on a pattern similar to thatof the SS. The highest regional subdivision is theGrlbfipc, which is divided into Stadartcn, or regiments.As the oldest semi-military organizationof the Party, the S-1 is designed as the Party'sinstrument for tliv training and indoctrination ofits members and for supporting its domestic politicalaims in public. Rlcmbcrship in the Sil is~oluntq~. I.o as to createa "Brown Army" untlcr their personal leadcrship.At the same time thcsc leaders hoped to dcmanclstronger revolutionarv action by the Partyin keeping with the anti-capitalistic tendencies inherentin the SL-l, which has ahvays drawn itsmembers chiefly f.um the lo\\-er middle-class andthe lower bureaucracy. These tendencies wereforcibly destroyed in the purgcl of 1934, in whichHimmler pla!-cd a lcatling part. I-ram then onthe S S , previously an organization \\-ithin the SA,grew steadily in power and the SrZ sank into relativepolitical uiiiniportance. Since 1943 a rejuvenationof the SA has taken place, largely underthe auspices of the SS.Ill—27

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Since 1939 the SA has made a substantial contributionto the German war effort through itsassigned responsibility for military training precedingor following the period of regular militaryservice. It also trains those who were rejectedby the Armed Forces for physical reasons. In1944 the SA was entrusted with the task of teachingevery German marksmanship, and with theforming of the VoZk.&rnz in October 1944 theSA became responsible for its rifle training.The bulk of the pre-war members of the SAwere drawn intO the Army, whose 60th PanzerGrenadier Division is composed mainly of SAmen and carries the name "Feldherrnhalle" inhonor of the most elite peacetime regiment of theSA.2. National-Socialist Aviation Corps (NationalsozialistischesFliegerkorps—NSFK)This organization incorporated the existing associationsfor aviation into one Party-controlledorganization in April 1937. The mission of theNSFK consists in pre-military training of prospectivemembers of the Air Force, post-militarytraining of its reservists, and general furtheringof air-mindedness among the German people.Particularly outstanding have been its efforts inthe development of the use of gliders. Its regionalorganization, like that of the SA, is based onGruppen and Standarten. Membership is voluntaryand excludes simultaneous membership in theSS, SA, or NSKK.3. Hitler Youth (Hitler-Jugend-HJ)All German youths between the ages of 10 and18 belong to this organization of the Party, whichis charged with their thorough pre-military trainingand political indoctrination. Pre-militarytraining has been greatly expanded in the courseof this war. For this purpose about 300 Wehrertiichtigungslager(military fitness camps) wereinstalled, beginning in 1943. Participants in thesetraining courses were subsequently incorporatedinto the Armed Forces and especially into theWafen-SS, whose 12th Panzer Division bears thename "Hitler-Jugend". Graduates of the HJ becomeeligible for Party membership. They mayeither choose a career as Party functionaries(Politische Leiter) or may join the SS, SA,NSKK, or NSFK.Girls belong to a branch of the HJ known asthe League of German Girls (Bund Deutscheril4iidel—BDM) and join the Party Women's Or-III—28ganization (NS-Frazrcmchaff) upon reaching theage of 21.The HJ for boys is divided into the Hitler-Jugend proper (for boys from 14 to 18) and theDeutsches Jungvolk-—DJ, for boys from 10 to 14.Its regional organization is based on Gebiete,which are further divided into Banne, Stamme,Gefolgschaften, Scharcn, and Kamcradschaften.Units of the HJ have been committed to "waremployment" (Kriegscimatz), discharging suchduties as fire fighting and air raid protection.They have also been widely employed to help withthe harvest and as conductors, mail clerks, postmen,and street cleaners as well as for salvageactivities and collections for war charities. Since1943 most members of the /// have had to serveas antiaircraft auxiliaries (H J-Luftzcaffenhelferand HJ-Mari~~ehclfer), performing many functionsin the antiaircraft batteries, which relieveolder men for combat duty.Bazooka battalions. (Panzerschreckabteilungen)have recently been formed from HJ personnel.Close liaison between the HJ and both the ArmedForces and the WaflewSS is i by sof specially appointed liaison officers. The elite ofthe HJ is used in its i t s(Streifendicnst), which combines all the tasks ofa junior S S and police force. The members ofthis group are most unscrupdlous and are used asraiding squads and in In Poland theyformed pursuit detachments (Rollkommandos)serving under officers of the -S^ Death's-HeadFormations.Section IV.EMERGENCY DEFENSE OFGERMAN SOILDetailed plans exist for the rapid mobilizationof all the auxiliary organizations described in theabove paragraphs in case of the actual invasionof, or immediate military threat to, any part ofGermany proper. Elaborate administrative preparationshave been made for their operationalcontrol and chain of command in such an emergency.The commander of each corps area (Wehrkreis)has always been responsible for organizingthe emergency defense of his territory. Since,however, he normally controls only the static militaryforces and installations of the Armed Forcesproper, the Higher 5"S and Police Commander(HSSPf) has been designated to join him in caseof invasion and to take control of all the other

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451available manpower in the area which is organizedin a form suitable to aid in its defense. Heis not to be subordinated to the Wehrkreis commanderbut must cooperate with him and willdeputize for him if necessary. The only exceptionto this is the Todt Organization, whose units andinstallations pass directly to the control of theWelzrkreis commander in such an emergency.Under the HSSPf the Wehrkreis is divided,for emergency defense, into security zones (Sichcrzrrlgsbcrcicke),each headed by a commanderof the Protective Police (Sclzupo). In case of invasioneach such commander joins the ArmedForces commander (Wehr~~zaclztkonr~~zal?dant) inthe major garrison area which most nearly coincideswith the security zone. The Armed Forcescommander then acts, in collaboration with thesecurity zone commander, as "combat commander"(KallzpfkOllZI1zundu12t) of the area, a concept introducedin 1944 for commanders who take fullcharge of areas which are expected to become cutoff and which must be defended to the "last cartridge".The commander of the security zone willtake the place of the combat commander in casehe should become a casualty, unless there is anotherofficer senior to him in the area.The organizations which come under the controlof the Higher SS and Police Commander in emergencyinclude the Waffm-SS, Security Police,Protective Police, Rural Police, special employmentunits of the General SS (SS-z.b.Y.), specialemployment units of the SA (SA-z.b.V.), Urbanand Rural Auxiliary Guards, Fire-fighting Policeand Fire-fighting Services, Technical EmergencyCorps, German Labor Service, Postal and RailwaySecurity I:orccs, Industrial Emergency Units(Industrie-Alarmcinheiten), P1an t ProtectionService (It’crksrlzutz), the German Red Cross,and the Volkssturm.This arrangement for the emergency defenseof German soil is in sharp contrast to the establishedprerogatives of the Army in military mattersin that responsibility as well as actual controlof the defending forces is to be shared betweenthe proper territorial military authority and therepresentative of its principal rival, the SS.III—29

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451CHAPTER IVTACTICSSection I.I. Basic DoctrinesGENERAL TACTICAL DOCTRINESAn outstanding characteristic of the German nationis its fondness for everything connected withmilitarism. This is based not only on traditionalsentiment but also oil long-range and intense educationthat glorifies the military spirit. This givesthe German military leaders the essential foundationfor aggressive military operations.The Germans believe that only the offensive canachieve success on the field, particularly whencombined with the element of surprise. Germanmilitary literature, for the past century, has emphasizedthe need for aggressiveness in all militaryoperations.The Germans have been thoroughly aware ofthe psychological component in warfare and havedeveloped systematic terroriiation to a highdegree.At the same time they have placed considerabiereliance on novel and sensational weapons suchas the rna3.s use of armor, the robot bomb, andthe super-heavy tank. Their principal weaknessesin this regard have been their failure to integratethese new techniques with established arms andtactics—German field artillery, for example, didnot maintain pace with German armor—and theirdevotion to automatic .weapons at *the expense ofaccuracy.A highly trained officer corps and a thoroughlydisciplined army are the necessary elements toimplement this aggressive philosophy. Germantactical doctrines stress the responsibility and theinitiative of subordinates. The belief of formeryears that the German Army was inflexible andlacking in initiative has been completely destroyedin this war, in which aggressive and daring leadershiphas been responsible for many bold decisions.Yet, while the Germans have many excellent tacticians,they tend to repeat the same type ofmaneuvers, a fact which has been fully exploitedby Allied commanders.The German specialization in particular typesof warfare such as mountain, desert, winter, orthe attack on fortified positions, showed thoroughpreparation and ingenuity. At the same time theGermans had been quite willing to learn fromtheir opponents and on numerous occasions havecopied Allied tactics and weapons.2. Recent Tactical TrendsFrom the time when the German Army wasforced on the defensive by the Allied armies,German tactical doct:r;nes have undergone modificationssuch as renunciation (except in unstatedinstances) of air support, and the substitution' oflinear defense for elastic offensive defense.The primary goal of Germany today is to gaintime and to achieve victory in .a political sense,since the Germans are no longer capable of amilitary victory. Of necessity their military operationsnow supplement this effort and have becomea large-scale delaying action.3. Exercise of CommandThe U. S. and German doctrines applied in exerciseof the command ;:rc virtually identical. TheGermans stress the necessity of the staff in assistingthe commander to VI-aluate the situation andin preparing and di.;seminating orders to the lowerunits. They emphasize that the commandershould be well forward with his units not onlyfor , the purpose of f:tcilitating communication, butalso 1~2cause his presence has a salutary effect onthe troops.IV—I

I MARCH 1945Section II. RECONNAISSANCE1. Generala. PURPOSE. The purpose of reconnaissanceand the types of units employed to obtain informationare similar in the U. S. and the GermanArmies. German tactical principles of reconnaissance,however, diverge somewhat from thoseof the U. S. The Germans stress aggressiveness,attempt to obtain superiority in the area to bereconnoitered, and strive for continuous observationof the enemy. They believe in employingreconnaissance units in force as a rule. Theyexpect and are prepared to fight to obtain thedesired information. Often they assign supplementarytasks to their reconnaissance units, suchas sabotage behind enemy lines, harassment, orcounter-reconnaissance.b. TECHNIQUE. Only enough reconnaissancetroops are sent on a mission to assure superiorityin the area to be reconnoitered. Reserves are kepton hand to be committed when the reconnaissancemust be intensified, when the original force meetsstrong enemy opposition, or when the directionand area to be reconnoitered are changed. TheGermans encourage aggressive action againstenemy security forces. When their reconnaissanceunits meet superior enemy forces, theyfight a delaying action while other units attemptto flank the enemy.c. CLASSIFICATION. Reconnaissance is classifiedby the Germans as operational, tactical, andbattle reconnaissance—corresponding to the U. S.distant, close, and battle reconnaissance.2. Operational Reconnaissance (Operative Aufklarung)Operational reconnaissance, penetrating overa large area in great depth, provides the basis forstrategic planning and action. This type of reconnaissanceis intended to determine the locationand activities of enemy forces, particularly localitiesof rail concentrations, forward or rearwarddisplacements of personnel, loading or unloadingareas of army elements, the construction of fieldor permanent fortifications, and hostile air forceconcentrations. Identification of large enemy motorizedelements, especially on an open flank, isimportant. Operational reconnaissance is carriedout by the Air Force and by motorized units.Aerial photography units operate at altitudes of16,500 to 26,500 feet. Since missions assignedto operational air reconnaissance units are generiv—2UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451ally limited to the observation of important roadsand railroads, reconnaissance sectors and areasnormally are not assigned. The motorized unitsemployed for operational reconnaissance haveonly directions and objectives assigned.3. Tactical Reconnaissance (Taktische Aufklarung)a. PURPOSE. Tactical reconnaissance, carriedout in the area behind the operational reconnaissance,provides the basis for the commitment oftroops. Its mission embraces identification of theenemy's organization, disposition, strength, andantiaircraft defense; determination of the enemy'sreinforcement capabilities; and terrain reconnaissanceof advanced sectors. Air Force reconnaissanceunits and motorized and mounted reconnaissancebattalions are employed for tactical reconnaissance.Their direction and radius of employmentare based upon the results of the operationalreconnaissance.b. AIR RECONNAISSANCE. Tactical air reconnaissanceis normally made from altitudes of 6,500to 16,000 feet. As a rule, air reconnaissance unitsare assigned specific reconnaissance areas, theboundaries of which normally do not coincide withsectors assigned to ground units. Reconnaissanceplanes generally are employed singly.c. GROUND RECONNAISSANCE. Sectors of responsibilityare assigned to ground tactical reconnaissancebattalions. In order to make them independentor to facilitate .their change of direction,battalions may be assigned only reconnaissanceobjectices. In such instances, boundarylines separate adjacent units. The Germans avoidusing main roads as boundary lines, defining thesectors in such a way that main roads fall withinthe reconnaissance sectors. The width of a sectoris determined by the situation. the type andstrength of the reconnaissance battalion, the roadnet, and the terrain. In general, the width of asector assigned to a motorized reconnaissance battaliondoes not exceed 30 miles.d. ORDERS FOR TACTICAL RECONNAISSANCE.Orders issued to a reconnaissance battalion or itspatrols normally contain, in addition to the mission,the following:(1) Line of departure.(2) Information concerning adjacent reconnaissanceunits.(3) Sector boundaries or direction of operation.(4) Objectives.(5) Phase lines.

I MARCH 1945(6) Instructions for transmission of reports.(7) Location of immediate objecfives whoseattainment is to be reported.(8) Instructions regarding air-ground liaison.(9) Time of departure, route, and objective ofthe main force.e. TACTICAL RECONNAISSANCE PROCEDURES.When a motorized reconnaissance column expectscontact with the enemy, it advances by bounds.The length of bounds depends on the cover theterrain offers as well as on the road net. As thedistance from the enemy decreases, the boundsare shortened. The Germans utilize roads aslong as possible and usually use different routesfor the advance and the return.The reconnaissance battalion commander normallysends out patrols which advance by bounds.Their distance in front of the battalion dependson the situation, the terrain, and the range of thesignal equipment, but as a rule they are not morethan an hour's traveling distance (about 25 miles)ahead of the battalion. The battalion serves asthe reserve for the patrols and as an advancemessage center (Meldekopf), collecting the messagesand relaying them to the rear. Armored Ireconnaissance cars, armored half-tracks, or motorcyclescompose the motorized reconnaissancepatrols, whose exact composition depends on theirmission and on the situation. Motorcycles areused to fill in gaps and intervals, thereby thickeningthe reconnaissance net.When the proximity of the enemy does notpermit profitable employment of the motorizedreconnaissance battalion, it is withdrawn and themotorized elements of the divisional reconnaissancebattalion take over.Divisional reconnaissance battalions seldomoperate more than one day's march (18 miles)in front of the division, covering an area approximately6 miles wide.4. Battle Reconnaissance (Gefechtsaufklarung)a. GENERAL. Battle reconnaissance as a ruleis begun when the opposing forces begin to deploy.All troops participating in battle carry outbattle reconnaissance through patrols, artilleryobservation posts, observation battalions, and airreconnaissance units. The information obtainedon the organization and strength of the enemyprovides the basis for the conduct of the battle.b. ARMORED CAR PATROLS. The Panzer divisiondispatches armored reconnaissance unitsequipped with armored vehicles and numerous„ _ TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDautomatic weapons. The armored reconnaissanceunit is fast and has a wide radius of action.Armored car patrols normally are composed ofthree armored reconnaissance cars, one of whichis equipped with radio. An artillery observeroften accompanies the patrol so that in an emergencyfire can be brought down quickly. Thistype of patrol usually is organized for missionslasting one to two days. Tasks are defined clearly,and nothing is allowed to interfere with the patrol'smain objective. If enemy forces are met,action is avoided unless the force is so weak thatit can be destroyed without diverting the patrolfrom its main task. If enemy action is anticipated,the patrol is reinforced with self-propelledguns and occasionally with tanks. Engineers andmotorcyclists are often attached to the patrol tods . with road blocks and demolitions.While scouting a woods, a favorite Germanruse is to drive the leading car toward its edge,halt briefly to observe, and then drive off rapidly,hoping to draw fire that will disclose the enemypositions.At road blocks, the leading car opens fire. Iffire is not returned, men dismount and go forwardto attach tow ropes to the road block. Ifnecessary, the patrol dismounts'and proceeds withmachine guns to reconnoiter on foot.A patrol is never split up’, but in open countrydistances between cars may be as much as 200 to300 yards.c o NNAISSANCE BATTALION AND AIR RECONNAISSANCE. The German observation battalionlocates enemy artillery and heavy weapons positionsby sound and flash ranging and evaluatedaerial photographs. The Air Force assists in battlereconnaissance by observing the distributionof the enemy's forces, his artillery, bivouac andmovements, reserves, tank assemblies, and anyother special occurrences behind the front. Ingeneral, air battle reconnaissance is executedunder 6,000 feet.d. BATTLE RECONNAISSANCE PATROLS (Spihtrzrppea).The Germans send out reconnaissancepatrols, consisting of a noncommissioned officerand three or four men, to get such informationas the location of enemy positions and minefield;.They generally avoid contact and retreat whenenemy on.e. COMBAT PATROLS (Gefechtsspiihtruppen orStosstruppen). These consist of at least onenoncommissioned officer and eight men, but areusually much stronger. As a rule the combatIV—3

I MARCH i945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451patrol is commanded by a sergeant who has underhim 15 to 20 men, organized in two equal sections,each commanded by a section leader. Theseare raiding patrols, and their mission often includesbringing back prisoners of war. SinceAllied air supremacy has neutralized German airreconnaisance to a great extent, the Germans hareplaced increased importance on prisoners of war,especially officers, as a source of information onellcmy strength, dispositions, and intentions.Combat or other types of patrols are often sentout to test the' strength of enemy outposts. If anoutpost proves to be weakly held, the patrol attacks,occupies the position. and remains thereuntil relieved by troops from the rear. If thepatrol is strongly garrisoned, the patrol attemptsto return with a prisoner of war.f. SPECIAL PATROLS (spiihfruppen wit hesondermAzrfgnbcn). These vary in strength in accordancewith their special mission. Special patrolsare sent out to carry out such tasks asdemolitions, engaging of enemy patrols that havepenetrated German positions, and ambushingenemy supply columns.g. MISCELLANEOUS PATROLS. Engineer patrolsare employed to reconnoiter approaches to fortifiedareas, defiles, or rivers. Artillery patrols,usually consisting of an officer and a few mountedmen. reconnoiter routes of approach, obsrrvationposts, and firing positions.h. TERRAIN RECONNAISSANCE (G clii~ld eerkztndung).The Germans place great emphasis onterrain reconnaissance, realizing the influence terrainhas up011 the conduct of operations. >Iost oftheir usual reconnaissance missions include terrainreconnaissance tasks. Terrain may be soimportant at times as to require reconnaissanceby special units. Groutid and air reconnaissanceunits give special attention to the road net—itsdensity, condition, road blocks, mines, and demolitions—aswell as to the terrain itself, particularlytank country.i. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPORT. The Germansequip their ground battle-reconnaissance patrolswith machine pistols and one or two light machineguns that are used to cover the patrol's approachor withdrawal. Engineers often are attached toguide a patrol through German minefields and toclear a way through enemy wire or mines. Artillerysupport is given in the form of harassingfire put down just before the patrol reaches itsobjective. Sometimes the artillery ,fires into adjacentsectors to mislead the enemy as to theactual area to be reconnoitered. In other instances,artillery and mortars that have registeredduring the previous day shell during thenight the area to be reconnoitered. As soon asthe harrage is lifted, the patrol advances undercover of machineYgun fire from flanking positions.1. GeneralSection III.MARCHESThe formations and the ‘organizations of themarch column in day or night advances are thesame in the German Army as in the U. S. Armyand are governed by the same principles. For asmooth functioning of the march the Germansstress : systematic training and practice : attentionto physical welfare; care of vehicles and equipment; previous reconnaissance of routes; warningorders; and the issue of detailed march orders.2. Organization and Control of the March ColumnIn order to secure the march column againstenemy attacks, the Germans divide the column inthe same manner as U. S. doctrine prescribes,MainGernamely into Advance Guard (L’ovhut),Body (&OS). and Rear Guard (Nachl~ut).man equivalents for the C. S. trrms are:Advance GuardSpitze...............PointSpitzenkowpanic .. ;\ dvance partyVortruppSupportHaupttrupp .... ..............ReserveRear GuardNachspitzc.............RearpointNaclzspitzc~zko~~lpanic ......Rear partyNaclztrupp..............SupportHaupttrupp..............ReserveThe issue of orders for march ant1 traffic controlis the responsibility of the higher command.Movement by road of formations from battalionstrength upwards is carried out in the Zone ofthe Interior at the orders of the Army HighCommand (OKH) or a headquarters acting onthe orders of the Army High Command. In theTheater of War such movements. are controlledby Army Headquarters, which issues orders inaccordance with instructions from Army HighCommand or the Army Group. Movements inthe areas of military commanders of line-of-comIV

I MARCH 1945munication areas are controlled by orders of thecommanders of such areas.Orders for movement are issued to the formationsof fighting troops by the operations groupof headquarters; those to supply services andunits in the line-of-communication area emanatefrom the supply and administrative group.The Germans set up a well organized trafficcontrol service which is under the orders of theoperations group. All traffic control services usuallywear orange-red brassards, while the membersof the military police are distinguished by metalgorgets.The Germans allot to each front-line divisionits own road or sector of advance, usually markedby advance parties. General Headquarters or anyother troops directed simultaneously on the sanieroads, are subordinated to the division for theduration of the move. All-weather roads usuallyare allotted to motorized or armored divisions,while subsidiary roads are assigned to infantrydivisions.3. Conduct of the MarchWhen a German infantry division advancesalong several routes, an infantry element normallyforms the head of each main body. The commanderof the main body usually marches at ornear the head of the main body. The motorizedelements of the division, unless employed onreconnaissance or security missions, are organizedinto one or more motor echelons which follow themarch column by bounds, or move in a columnalong a separate road. Before the march begins,the division signal battalion lays a trunk telephoneline as far forward as the situation permits andextends this line while the march proceeds. Theleading signal unit usually marches with the supportof the advance guard and establishes telephonestations at important points. In a marchalong several roads the trunk line normally is laidalong the route of the division commander andhis staff. In addition to the construction of thetrunk line, the Germans stress radio communicationsto the rear and flanks, as well as the use ofmessengers mounted on horses, bicycles, ormotorcycles.4. Security of March ColumnsAs a rule the Germans allot motorized unitsfor the protection of the flanks and rear of marchcolumns. However, a smaller unit, such as a battalion,may advance without flank security detachments..UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45IThe Germans are very much concerned aboutantiaircraft protective measures and often marchin open columns (~;licgrrlllarschfiefc) ; an advancein deployed iormation (Fliegevmarschbreite)is seldom practical. Antiaircraft defenseis concentrated at important terrain features, suchas bridges, crossroads, and defiles. Because ofAllied air supremacy the Germans now instructtheir troops to conduct movements and the transportof supplies only at night, and without lights.They also order their troops to leave burned outvehicles standing on the road to attract fresh attacksby en~l~y aircraft.Section IV.OFFENSIVEI. GeneralThe fundamental principle of German offensivedoctrine is to encircle and destroy the enemy. Theobjective of the combined arms in attack is tobring the armored iol-ccs and the infantry intodecisive action against the enemy with sufficientfire power and shock. Superiority in force andfire power, the employment of armored forces, aswell as the surprise clement, play a great part inthe offensive.Coordination between the combined arms undera strong unified command is, the Germans emphasize,an absolute requisite to the success ofthese shock tactics. This has become more andmore true as the Allies have developed effectiveantitank weapons and have adopted deeper defenses,limiting the self-sufficiency of Germantanks. To counter these measures, the Germanshave increased the mobility and armor protectionof their motor-borne infantry, and have mounteda large proportion of both their direct and indirectheavy support weapons on self-propelledcarriages.In attempting thoroughly to paralyze the defenderup to the moment of the tank-infantry assault,the Germans realize that even the most formidableforces are ncvcr sufficient for overwhelmingsuperiority on the entire front. They thereforeselect a point of main elfort (SrhWer$u?lKt) fora breakthrough, allotting narro\v sectors of attack(Grf~cl~t~~trcifen) to the troops committed at thedecisive locality. There they also mass the bulkof their heavy weapons and reserves. The othersectors of the front are engaged by weaker, diversionaryforces. In selecting the point of main effort,the Germans consider weaknesses in theIV—5

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451enemy's defensive position; suitability of the terrain,especially for tanks and for cooperation ofall arms; approach routes; and possibilities forsupporting fire, especially artillery. Although theGermans select a point of main effort in all attacks,they usually also make plans for shiftingtheir main effort if they meet unexpected successelsewhere. To allow such shifts, sufficient reservesand a strong, unified command are organized.An attack on a narrow front, according to Ge;man doctrine, must have sufficient forces at itsdisposal to widen the penetration whild maintainingits impetus, and to protect the flanks of thepenetration. Once the attack is launched, it mustdrive straight to its objective, regardless of opposition.2. Types of Attacka. FLANK ATTACK (Flunkenangri~). TheGermans consider that the most effective attack isagainst the enemy's flank. The flank attack developseither from the approach march—sometimesthrough a turning movement—or from flankmarches. It attempts to surprise the enemy andpermit him no time for countermeasures. Sincemobility and the deception of the enemy at otherpositions are required, the flank attack is mostsuccessfully mounted from a distance; the troopmovements necessary for the maneuver can beexecuted in close proximity to the enemy onlywith unusually favorable terrain or at night. Attacksare launched on both flanks only when theGermans consider their forces clearly superior.b. ENVELOPMENT (Umfussungsangriff). Theenvelopment is a combination flank-and-frontalattack especially favored by the Germans. Theenvelopment may be directed on either or both theenemy's flanks, and is accompanied by a simultaneousfrontal attack to fix the enemy's forces.The deeper the envelopment goes into the enemy'sflanks, the greater becomes the danger of beingenveloped oneself. The Germans therefore emphasizethe necessity of strong reserves and organizationof the enveloping forces in depth. Successof the envelopment depends on the extent towhich the enemy is able to dispose his forces inthe threatened direction.c. ENCIRCLEMENT (Ehkreisung). An encirclement,the Germans think, is a particularlydecisive form of attack, but usually more difficultto execute than a flank attack or an envelopment.In an encirclement, the enemy is not attacked atIV—6all in front, or is attacked in front only by lightforces, while the main attacking force passes entirelyaround him, with the objective of maneuveringhim out of position. This requires extrememobility and deception.d. FRONTAL ATTACK (Froufnhgriff). TheGermans consider the frontal attack the most difficultof execution. It strikes the enemy at hisstrongest point, and therefore requires superiorityof men and materiel. A frontal attack should bemade only at a point where the infantry can breakthrough into favorable terrain in the depth of theenemy position. The frontage of the attack shouldbe wider than the actual area (Sclrwerpunkt)chosen for penetration, in order to tie down theenemy on the flanks of the breakthrough. Adequatereserves must be held ready to counter theemployment of the enemy's reserves.? W*G ••,> .rf •'-,"" *•*:*•••$!!&FRONTAL ATTACKFigure I.-—FormWING ATTACKuf ottcrck.ENCIRCLEMENTENVCLOPMENTFLANK ATTACKe. WING ATTACK (Fliigelaqrifj). An attackdirected at one or both of the enemy's wings has,the Germans teach, a better chance of successthan a central frontal attack, since only a part ofthe enemy's weapons are faced, and only one flank

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4SIof the attacking force or force% is exposed toenemy fire. Rending back one wing may give anopportunity for a flank attack, or for a single ordouble envelopment.f. PENETRATION (Einbruclz) AND BREAKTHROUGH (Durchbruch). These are not separateforms of attack, but rather the exploitation of asuccessful attack on the enemy's front, wing, orflank. The penetration destroys the continuity ofthe hostile front. The broader the penetration, thedeeper can the penetration wedge be driven.Strong reserves throw back enemy counterattacksagainst the flanks of the penetration. Germanunits are trained to exploit a penetration to themaximum so that it may develop into a completebreakthrough before hostile countermeasures canbe launched on an effective scale. The deeper theattacker penetrates, the more effectively can heenvelop and frustrate the attempts of the enemyto close his front again by withdrawal to the rear.The attacking forces attempt to reduce individualenemy positions by encircling and isolating them.The Germans do not consider a breakthroughsuccessful until they overcome the enemy's artillerypositions, which usually is the special taskof tanks. Reserve units roll up the enemy's frontfrom the newly created flanks.figure 2.—Breakthrough.The Germans often refer to this maneuver as"Keil und Kessel".3. Organization of the Attacka. ATTACK ORDER. The attack order (Angrifsbefehl)generally contains the objective ofthe attack, the disposition of the infantry, unitsectors and boundaries, disposition and supportmissions of the artillery, location of reserves, andthe time of attack. The order is not drawn up inaccordance with any stereotyped form, but as arule follows this pattern:(1) Estimate of the situation (disposition ofhostile and friendly troops).(2) Mission.(3) Assembly areas for the forward companies; objective; sector boundaries; orders forthe continuation of combat reconnaissance.(4) Instructions for the preparation of theheavy-weapons fire support, especially for massedfire.(5) Orders to the artillery for fire preparationand coordination.(6) Assembly areas for the reserves.(7) Time of attack.(8) Instructions for rear services (medicalservice and supplies).(9) Location of command posts.(10) Miscellaneous.b. SECTORS OF ATTACK. The width of a sectorassigned to an infantry unit in the attack dependson the unit's mission and battle strength,on terrain conditions, on the available fire supportof all arms, and on the probable strengthof enemy resistance. Normally the sector assignedto a platoon is between 165 and 220 yards. Acompany attack sector is about 330 to 550 yards.A battalion sector is 440 to 1,100 yards, whilea division sector may be 4,400 to 5,500 yards.These sectors also provide the boundaries forthe other arms, especially for the artillery in supportof the infantry, although the artillery mayutilize favorable observation positions in neighboringsectors. This also applies to the heavyinfantry weapons.For large units the sectors are determinedfrom the map; for smaller units, from the terrain.These sectors extend as deep into enemyterritory as the plan of battle may require. Asthe situation develops, changes are frequentlymade. Important points always lie within units'sectors, unless they are to be attacked by severalunits. The Germans do not consider it necessaryto occupy the whole width of the sector withtroops. Open flanks ordinarily are not bounded.c. FIRE PLAN. Fire superiority is achievedthrough coordination of the infantry and artilleryweapons. The basis for the fire plan (Feuer-IV—7

IMARCH 1945 UW,MSlFlEDTM-E 30-451

I MARCH 1945plan) is the regulation of the commitment of allweapons.The fire plan includes the following:(1) Assignment of combat missions.(2) Distribution of observation sectors andfields of fire for the infantry and the artillery.(3) An estimate of capabilities of the artilleryfor effective execution of the combat mission.(4) Orders for the commencement of fire andfire schedules.(5) Orders for the preparation for massedfire.(6) Instructions for ammunition supply.The Germans stress the coordination of flatand high trajectory weapons so that all deadspaces are covered by fire. Lack of signal equipment,however, often hinders the application ofthis principle.4. Conduct of the Attacka. GENERAL. Most of the German successesin the present war have been achieved witharmored formations. Years of secret trainingand equipping were devoted to the developmentof the Panzer division. The original GermanHitzkrieg tactics were based on the belief in theirresistible power of tank formations operating independentlywith the support of dive-bombers.Considerable modifications have taken place inthis theory over the past few years. At the presenttime, the offensive tactics of the Germans areless spectacularly bold than they were in 1939, butthe fundamental theory behind them has changedremarkably little, though in their armored tacticsthey stress more tank-infantry coordination Sinceunlimited air support is no longer at their command.The main weight of all major German attackssince 1939 was borne by the Pa.nzer division.Where infantry divisions have been employed,they were limited to local attacks on a comparativelyminor scale or to mopping up in rear ofthe Panzer divisions. The Germans never envisageda full-scale attack by infantry formationson fixed defenses. German tactics have been tooutflank or encircle the main area of the enemydefenses with tank formations and to have theinfantry roll up the defenses from the rear, orto break frontally through the enemy defenseswith massed tanks and develop the famous‘ Keilund Kessel" maneuver.The Germans learned at heavy cost the futilityof charging a hostile antitank defense with tankconcentrations and of engaging in tank-versus-UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451tank combat without having superiority in rangeand armament. They have learned that large formationsof tanks cannot achieve a breakthrough,opposed by an effective screen of antitank guns,without the assistance of other arms. Thereforeattention has to be given to the combined tacticsof tanks and Panzer Grmadicrs, the mechanizedor motorized infantry who accompany the tanks.Great emphasis in German offensive theoryis laid on the role of the artillery, but in practicethe artillery-support role has devolved to an everincreasingdegree on the tanks and assault guns.jevertheless, the principle that the supportingfire should be concentrated on a narrow frontagewhere the tanks and infantry are most likelyto achieve a breakthrough has been retained.The fact that a part of the enemy resistanceis likely to remain undisclosed until the attackhas already begun has caused the Germans permanentlyto decentralize a portion of the field artillery.This tendency has led to the emergenceand continual development of the assault guns,whose main function is the close support of infantryand tanks in the attack. Their armor andmobility allow them to operate much farther forwardthan the field artillery.The tendency to detach field artillery battalionsfrom their field artillery regiment remains strong.In fact, this tendency is so prevalent that aconcentration of massed artillery preceding anattack seldom is achieved, necessitating, as itdoes, a great degree of centralized control. TheGermans, however, replace the massed artilleryfire to a large extent with the fire of multi-barreledmortars and rocket projectors, though these latterhave not the accuracy of the former.The Germans make a clear distinction betweenan attack made from movement and an attackfrom a prepared position, which is the more commonof the two.b. ATTACK BY MECHANIZED AND MOTORIZEDFORCES. (1) The attack. In armored-forceoperations, the Germans stress the need for theconcentrated employment, at the decisive placeand time, of the entire combined command oftanks and other arms, less necessary reserves.The tanks constitute the striking force of such acommand and normally advance as the first echelonof the attack. Their primary mission is to breakthrough and attack the enemy artillery, ratherthan to seek out and destroy enemy tanks, whichcan be more effectively engaged by antitank units.The mission of the other arms is to assist theIV—9

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45I4th PLAT3rd WAVEFigure 4.—Gernton tank formation, battalion in "Blunt Lf’cdge".< 3r d WAVEIV—10Figure L —German tank formation, company in "Blunt Wedge".

I MARCH 194bUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45)tanks in their advance, and particularly to eliminateantitank weapons. The smallest combat unitin such a force of combined arms is the company.The basic formation for the tank platoon,company, and battalion are file, double file, wedge,and blunt wedge. The type of formation usedfor a specific task depends to a large extent onterrain conditions and the strength of enemyopposition. A German tank platoon normallyconsists of one command tank and two tanksquads of two tanks each.The tank regiment normally attacks in waves,in either of the following manners:The tank regiment is echeloned in depth, onetank battalion following the other. The regimentalcommander's location is between the twobattalions. This formation has the advantagesof a sufficiently wide front (about 1,100 yards),and close contact by the commander of his unitsin the conduct of the attack. The normal depthof such a formation is about 3,000 yards. This isthe usual form of the tank attack. When twotank battalions are attacking, one behind the other,it takes them about half an hour to pass theirown infantry.When the two-battalions-abreast formation isemployed, it is almost essential that another tankregiment form the following wave. This formationusually has the disadvantage of being toowide. The regimental commander cannot observehis units, and he has no units of his own behindhim which he can commit in a decisive moment.The attack normally proceeds in three waves.The first wave thrusts to the enemy's antitankdefense and artillery positions.The second wave provides covering fire for thefirst wave, and then attacks the enemy's infantrypositions, preceded, accompanied, or followed bypart of the Panzer Grenadiers, who dismount asclose as possible to the point where they mustengage the enemy. The objectives of the secondwave are the remaining antitank positions, positionsof heavy infantry-support weapons, and machine-gunemplacements which hold up the advanceof the infantry.The third wave, accompanied by the remainderof the Panzer Grenadiers, mops up.These three waves now often are telescopedinto two, the first wave speeding through theenemy's position as far as his gun positions, thesecond crushing the enemy's forward positionsin detail and mopping up the opposition not dealtwith by e lim- wave or which has revivedsince the first wave passed through.A typical attack formation of this type mightbe divided up among the Panzer division's unitsas follows: the first wave, on a frontage of about2,000 to 3,000 yards, might consist of one tankbattalion, two companies forward, supported onthe flanks by elements of the assault gun battalion.Close to the rear of the first wave usuallyfollow one or two Panzer Grenadier companiesin armored half-tracks. About 150 yards to therear of the first wave moves the second wave,formed of the second tank battalion in the sameformation, closely followed by the remainder ofthe armored Panzer Grenadiers, who are in turnfollowed at some distance by the motorized PanzerGrenadiers. The flanks are protected by antitankguns which normally operate by platoons,moving by bounds. The artillery forward observertravels in his armored vehicles with thefirst wave, while the artillery commander of thesupporting artillery units usually travels withthe tank commander. Assault guns normally alsoaccompany the second wave.The tanks help each other forward by fire andmovement, medium or heavy tanks taking uphull-down firing positions and giving coveringfire while the faster tanks advance to the nextcommanding feature. Then the latter give coveringfire to the former moving forward to theirnext bound.Once the first wave has reached the rear ofthe enemy's forward defenses, it pushes straighton to attack the enemy's artillery. As soon asthese positions have been neutralized, the tanksreform beyond the artillery positions and eitherprepare to exploit the attack or form an allrounddefensive position on suitable ground.The tank unit commander, as the leader ofthe strongest unit, is in most cases in commandof t combat team, and all the other participatingarms (Panzer Grcmdirrs, artillery, engineers,and antitank units) arc placed under him. Thema - realize that a strong and unified commandis an essential feature of any military opfantry.For certain missions, however, tankunits are attached to another arm, in which casethe tank commander is consulted before the finalplans for the operations are made.(2) Infantry-tank cooperation. When theenemy has well prepared positions with natural orconstructed tank obstacles, the German infantryattacks before the tanks and clears the way. TheIV—II

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451objective of the infantry is to penetrate into theenemy position and destroy enemy antitank weaponsto the limit of its strength and the fire powerof its own support weapons, augmented by additionalsupport and covering fire from the tanksand self-propelled weapons sited in their rear.Only after the destruction of the enemy antitankdefense can the tanks be employed on thebattle line to the fullest advantage.When the tank obstacles in front of the enemyposition already are destroyed, and no additionaltank obstacles are expected in the depth of theenemy's main defensive position, the infantrybreaks through simultaneously with the tank unit.The infantry attack is conducted in the same manneras it would be without the cooperation oftanks. Heavy infantry weapons are kept inreadiness to fire at possible newly discovered antitankpositions. Of particular importance is protectionof the open flanks by echeloning the flankunits and employing heavy weapons at the flanks.In most cases, the infantry follows the tanksclosely, taking advantage of the fire power andparalyzing effect of the tanks upon the enemy'sdefense. The Germans normally transport theinfantry to the line of departure on tanks ortroop-carrying vehicles in order to protect theinfantry and to increase its speed. The infantryleaves the vehicles at the last possible moment,and goes into action mainly with light automaticweapons.The tanks advance by bounds from cover tocover, reconnoitering the terrain ahead and providingprotective fire for the dismounted PanzerGrenadiers. The tanks do not slow their advanceto enable the infantry to keep continuous pacewith them, but advance alone and wait undercover until the infantry catches up with the advance.Terrain that does not offer sufficientcover is crossed with the greatest possible speed.The infantry attacks in small formations alsoby bounds under the fire cover of its own heavyweapons and of the tanks, staying away from individualtanks because they draw the strongestenemy fire.When a tank company attacks with infantry,there are normally two platoons on the line, oneplatoon back, and the fourth platoon in reserve.The interval between tanks is usually 100 to 120yards. The tank's machine guns usually engagellNFANTRY;IV—12Fzgure 6.—Attack against WC enemy pillbox.

I MARCH 1945infantry targets at about 1,000 yards range andunder, while the tank guns engage targets at 2,000to 2,500 yards.The coordination between tanks and PanzerGrenadiers moving into combat on armored halftracksis similar to the technique employed in apurely armored formation, since the armored halftracksare not only troop-carrying vehicles butalso combat vehicles. When the terrain is favorablefor tank warfare, the Panzer Grenadiers intheir armored half-tracks follow immediatelywith the second wave, after the first tank wavehas overrun the opponent's position. A deep andnarrow formation is employed. After the penetration,the main mission of the Panzer Grenadiersis to overcome the enemy positions whichsurvived the first wave.In attacking enemy pillboxes the Germans usecombat groups consisting of tanks, infantry, andUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45Iengineers, assisted by artillery. The normal compositionof a combat group attacking one bunkeris one platoon of tanks and one platoon of infantryreinforced by one squad of engineers.Before. the combat group is committed againstthe nemy pillbox, artillery fires high explosivesa smoke shells at the neighboring pillboxes toIsolate them, shells the terrain between pillboxes,and conducts counterbattery fire. Under the protectionof this fire, the combat group advancesclose to the pillbox while other infantry unitsattack the enemy in the terrain between the pillboxes.One tank squad covers the advances of theother tank squads and the infantry platoon bydirect fire against the pillbox, particularly againstthe observation and weapons' openings. The firsttank squad halts under cover whenever possibleand covers the advance of the second tank squad.THE ARTILLERY BARRAGE IS CONTINUOUSUNTIL THE TANKS REACH THESE POSITIONSLEGENDHIGH-EXPLOSIVE BARRAGESMOKE SHELL BARRAGEHIGH-EXPLOSIVE AND 1 2 0 THE ARTILiERY BARRAGE IS CONTINUOUSSMOKE SHELL BARRAGEUNTIL THE INFANTRY REACHES THESE POSITIONSFigure 7.—Artillery support during a tank attack.IV—13

MARCH 1945When the combat group reaches a barbed wireobstacle surrounding the pillbox, the two tanksquads have different missions. One tank squadremains in front of the pillbox, and its tanks aredriven into a position from which they can overlookthe terrain, and watch out for antitank gunsand machine gun emplacements, while the othertank squad (the pillbox tank squad) rolls acrossthe obstacle to enable the infantry and engineersto get close to the pillbox. The pillbox tanksquad then fires on the pillbox at close range.The infantry squad meanwhile takes the surroundingterrain and covers the engineers whoblast the entrance of the pillbox with TNT.(3) Artillery-tank coordination. Artillery supportis of decisive importance for the preparationand the successful conduct of a tank attack.A unified command for the entire artillery controlsthe artillery fire as long as the infantry andtank units are fighting on the same line. Whenthe tanks break through the enemy forward defenselines, the self-propelled artillery or anyother artillery battalion designated for the supportof the tank unit is placed under the commandof the tank unit commander.The Germans believe that the artillery firemust not check the momentum of the attack.Consequently the heaviest fire must fall wellahead of the tanks or outside their sector.The mission of the artillery preparation beforethe attack is to destroy, or at least to neutralize,the opponent's antitank defense in the area betweenthe line of contact and the regimental reserveline. Continuous counterbattery fire preventsthe enemy from shelling the tank assemblyarea and from breaking up the preparation ofthe tank attack.The artillery has the following missions beforethe tank attack:Counterbattery fire on enemy artillery locatedin positions which command the ground overwhich the tank attack is to be made.Concentrations on enemy tanks in assemblyareas.Harassing fire on all areas in which the antitankunits are located or suspected. Fire isheaviest on areas in which tanks cannot operatebut from which they can be engaged effectiveIy.Adjusting fire with high explosives on probableenemy observation posts commanding the sectorto be attacked. These observation posts areblinded with smoke as soon as the attack begins.Experience has taught the Germans that theIV—14UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451flanks of a tank attack are vulnerable. Thereforethey assign to the artillery and the rocketprojector units the task of protecting flanks bybarrages using high explosives and smoke shells.The artillery has the following missions duringthe tank attack:Counterbattery fire.Blinding enemy observation posts.As the attack progresses, engaging successivelines of antitank defense, especially areas to therear and flanks of the sector attacked.Screening the flanks of the attack with smokeand neutralizing the enemy's infantry and rearareas.Delaying the movement and deployment ofenemy reserves, particularly tanks.The Germans stress that this wide variety oftasks must not lead to the wholesale dispersal ofeffort. The main task of the artillery is at alltimes the destruction of the enemy's antitankweapons, tanks, and artillery.Liaison between artillery and tanks during theattack is established by the commanding officersand the artillery liaison group, which normallymoves with the first wave. Artillery forward observers,if possible in armored observation posts,ride with the most forward elements. A Germanfield expedient is for the tank unit to take alonga forward observer in one of its tanks. It oftenhappens that the tankman himself has to takeover the observation for the artillery. He himselfcan request artillery fire and shift concentrationswhen the situation requires such changes.Figure 10 represents a map with superimposedcoordinate system and artillery reference pointsused by tank commanders to help them in thistack.c. TH E INFANTRY DIVISION IN THE ATTACK.(1) General principles for employment. Germanteaching envisages infantry divisions beingemployed to make a penetration in the enemydefensive positions through which armored andmechanized formations can pass. During thecourse of this war, however, no major attack hasbeen carried out by infantry divisions without thesupport of Panzer divisions. In fact, more majorattacks have been carried out by Panzer divisions,with only a minimum of ordinary infantryelements. Infantry divisions have been emPloyedalmost entirely in a role of consolidation, followingup the armored and mechanized formations,systematically eliminating centers of resistanceby-passed by tdc latter, or csploiting the latter's

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IUNCLASSIFIEDFigure S.—Map with superimposed coordirrtrtc system and ctrti//rry rrfcrelkcc poirkIs used by tan& co?kmmdcrs.1IV—15

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 9.—Deploymeltt of a German infantry battalion Ylst stage).Figure IO.—Deploymelzt of a German infantry battulion (hd stage).

I MARCH 1945success by mopping up demoralized enemy defensesto the flanks of the armored breakthrough—inshort, consolidating and holding theground won by the mechanized formations.In view of the unspectacular role allotted tothe infantry division it is difficult to give informationabout other than minor infantry tactics, suchas attacks on a small scale.(2) Preparation for the attack. The methodof forming up for an infantry assault on a preparedposition is similar to that employed by thePanzer division. While the infantry is in assemblypositions, the artillery makes all preparationsfor the support of the attack. It drawsout hostile artillery fire and executes counterbatteryfire against known enemy batteries. Largetroop concentrations and especially-important targetsare' taken under fire at great ranges. Inorder not to betray their full strength and intentions,the Germans withhold a portion of theirbatteries from these missions. They also try todeceive the enemy as to their intentions by coveringother sectors simultaneously with fire. Whenpossible, preparation for an attack is avoidedduring the day in order to prevent Allied observation.Occasionally, to obtain a success by surprise,the Germans launch attacks without artillerypreparation. Surprise attacks also arelaunched under cover of darkness or fog.The, Germans normally occupy their line ofdeparture by means of infiltration in order toavoid losses. Their orders direct what actionshave to be taken when companies run into enemydefenses; when enemy fire is opened from theflank; when an enemy counterattack is launched;when objectives are reached; when companies appearto be getting dispersed; when part of a companypushes too far ahead of neighboring unitsor is held up.The heavy machine guns of the rearward companyand some of the mortars and heavy mortarsare assigned to deal with enemy flanking fire.The commander of the heavy company is normallyat the battalion headquarters, from whichhe can control the fire of the infantry heavy supportweapons.(3) Deployment. (a) First stage. The Germanscarry out deployment in two stages. Theycall the first stage Entfaltung or "shaking out",which is equivalent to the development of a marchcolumn according to U. S. procedure. In thefirst stage (Figzrre 9), an infantry regiment normallydeploys down to battalions, although theUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451procedure may go down to companies if a highstate of preparedness is necessary. Features ofthe first stage of deployment are as follows:Companies retain their combat vehicles untiltheir weapons and equipment arrive at the offcarrierposition, which is located as far forwardas the situation permits.The Germans often place only one companyforward, the main strength of the battalion beingkept under control of the battalion commanderas long as possible so that he may employ it inthe most advantageous direction for attack.If the condition of the terrain and enemy firecause a change of intervals between units, thenormal intervals are resumed as soon as possible.Support weapons are used to cover the "shakingout" phase of deployment and the subsequentadvance, the weapons being kept within the marchcolumn between the companies or behind the battalion.After the first stage of deployment has beencarried out, the leading elements of the battalionmay be ordered to seize important tacticalfeatures.When deploying by night or in woods, a carefulreconnaissance is made, routes are marked,and strong protection is placed forward. Interare units are shorter.After the first stage of deployment has beencompleted, the battalion commander marches withthe leading elements and normally will sendreconnaissance patrols ahead or reconnoiter theenemy position himself. The commanders ofsupport weapons accompany him, reconnoiteringfor firing positions.(b) Second stage. The second stage (Figure-IO>, called Entzuicklung (development), is deploymentin detail, which is the final action of thecompany extending itself down to platoons andsquads. Features of the second stage of deploymentare as follows:The companies deploy in depth as soon asthey come within range of artillery fire. Anadvance in columns of files is considered desirablebecause it affords a small target and the companyis easier to control, but before adoptingthis formation the danger of enfilade fire isweighed.If enemy fire and difficult terrain necessitatefurther deployment, the companies disperse indepth by sections. Reserves and support weaponsalso adopt open formations, but they remainIV—17

I MARCH 1945far enough behind to avoid coming under the firedirected at the leading elements.When the rifle companies are deployed, theyexploit all possible cover as they advance, employingcolumn-of-file formations with irregulardistances, The leading elements are not extendeduntil they are to engage in a fire fight.The elements that follow continue advancing infile.In determining when to deploy, the Germanstake into consideration additional physical strainplaced on men when they march cross-country.(4) Technique of attack. The infantry attackon prepared positions is made in the same sequenceas that of the Panzer division, namelypenetration, breakthrough, exploitation by the reserves.In the infantry attack, however, the firstphase is a series of local attacks by so-called assaultdetachments (Stosstrupps) with the aimof overcoming key points in the enemy defenses,so that wedges into the enemy's forward positionscan be established from which the attack can bedriven forward into the depth of the enemy position,or rolling up the positions on either flankof the wedge.Assault detachments normally are composed ofinfantry with engineers attached. A typical assaultdetachment consists of the following: oneofficer; obstacle clearing party, consisting oftwo to six men for each lane to be cleared,equipped with small arms, wire-cutters, and bangaloretorpedoes and other explosives ; embrasureblastingparty consisting of three or four menequipped with grenades and demolition or polecharges. This party may also include, though itmay work independently, a flame-thrower party,consisting normally of two men; covering parties,normally two or three parties of varying size fromthree men with one light machine gun to fullplatoons; smoke party consisting of two or threemen equipped with smoke candles or grenades;supply party, carrying reserves of equipment andammunition, their strength depending on the sizeof the assault detachment.Attacks most often are made at dawn, andare preceded normally by heavy artillery preparation,one purpose of which is to make shell holeswhich afford cover for the a:!vancing assault detachmentsas they move forward. When the latterreach the wire obstacles surrounding the enemyposition, Very signals are fired, calling for avaiIableartillery fire to be brought on the positionto seal it off from flanking positions. If, byIV—l8UNCLA'SSIFIEDTM-E 30-451reason of proximity of the assault detachment tothe artillery's danger zone, the former cannot beprotected by covering fire, the smoke party maylay a smoke screen. The obstacle-clearing partythen cuts one or more lanes through the wire,using wire cutters or bangalore torpedoes. Theembrasure-blasting party passes through and attacksthe embrasures. Flame throwers, if employed,are not intended by themselves to causethe surrender of the position, but to cover the advanceof the embrasure-blasting party with itsexplosive charges which are considered the decisiveweapon.Antitank guns may be used to give close supportto the embrasure-blasting party, being manhandledfrom cover to cover. They will attackthe embrasure, with armor-piercing ammunitionand also give protection against possible tanksupportedcounterattacks.It is probable that several such operationswill be in progress on any one sector at any onetime before an attack, in the first place to probefor weak spots, and in the second place to keepthe enemy in uncertainty as to the final point ofmain effort of the attack. German feint attackshave often been delivered in such strength or withsuch violence as to be indistinguishable from themain attack.Once a wedge has been firmly established inthe enemy positions, the second phase of the attackbegins. Troops so far held in their assemblyarea, or slowly making headway under cover ofthe artillery fire supporting the first phase of theattack, advance to cut the enemy position in twoand to roll up the positions flanking the wedge.Because the Germans anticipate enemy defensesorganized in depth, and because these areunlikely to be fully disclosed until after the beginningof the attack, they do not make detailedplans for close-support covering fire, which wouldbe hard to work out in advance, but tend to decentralizetheir support weapons and artillery forthe second phase of the assault, in which reinforcedbattalions, companies, or platoons fighttheir own way forward, independently of theirflanking units, until they have gained their finalobjective.Attack on lightly defended positions is moresimilar to the conduct of the attack by the Panzerdivision. The first phase is likely to be a deployedattack on a two-regiment front, the thirdregiment in reserve.The Germans believe that in the advance ex

I MARCH 1945tended formation of units is advantageous becauseit forces the enemy to scatter his fire.To counteract the overwhelming Allied superiorityin artillery and planes which frequentlyknock out the attack before it is under way, theGermans have been known to use the followingmethod. Small groups of less than platoon sizeinfiltrate mainly at night over a period of threeto four days into the hostile battle position or atleast well behind the advanced positions. Duringthe day the infiltrated groups conceal themselves,but if caught pass themselves off as ordinarypatrols to avoid raising suspicion. When theactual attack is launched these units try to givethe impression that the defender is surroundedand often cause great confusion.When the Germans go over from the attack tothe defense, even if only temporarily, they concentratethe supporting weapons around the commanderof the unit that is to be supported, sothat he can control the fire plan.(5) Infantry-assault gun coordination. Theassault guns are ,organized in assault gun battalionsand are under the control of the divisioncommander.The Germans regard their self-propelled assaultguns as decisive weapons to be employed particularlyat the point of main effort. In cooperationwith infantry they facilitate the penetrationand breakthrough. These weapons, the Germansbelieve, complement artillery fire by their abilityto follow the infantry right up to an objective.Their use for small actions before an attack -isforbidden so as .not to betray their presence.Surprise is sought by bringing them into positionby night and camouflaging their assembly area.Used primarily to neutralize enemy supportweapons at short ranges over open sights, assaultguns are preferably employed in concentrations;to employ them singly or in comparatively smallnumber is frowned upon by the Germans.German assault guns advance with or just behindthe infantry; they never go ahead of theinfantry. When an objective is reached, the assaultguns do not remain with the infantry whilethe position is being consolidated but retire about1,000 yards to await further assignment.In close combat the assault guns are ratherhelpless and therefore it is the task of the infantryto keep the enemy away from the assaultguns. Newly-organized assault-gun escort batterieshave the same task.(6) Artiller3f. The Germans employ their fieldUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451artillery in general support (L!llgcpm+ze Untrrstiitzulig)or in direct support (Unmittelbare UntL ’miit zung j , in the same manner as the U. S.Army. The Germans consider the battalion asthe firing unit. Splitting up an artillery battalioninto batteries and placing batteries under an infantrybattalion is the exception justified onlywhen the infantry battalion has an independentmission (for example, flank protection) or whenthe terrain does not permit unified fire control byartillery battalion commanders. Single commitmentof guns is against German tactical doctrine.Various recent reports, however, describe deviationsfrom the prescribed practice. Normally theGermans do not employ single field artillerypieces for direct fire, as, for instance, the Russiansdo. But much use is made - of roving guns(Arbeitsgeschiitz), and of guns firing from alternatepositions to make identification more difficult.Standing German orders call for the preparationof alternate firing positions, which, however,are used now only in cases of very he&ycounterbattery fire, as the gasoline shortage keepsall b a t - to a minimum. The Germans oftendesignate the number two piece as the rovinggun, and, unlike the other pieces, it normally isnot dug in. It frequently changes its position,which is about 250 to 300 yards from the rest ofthe battery.The German artillery often engages a targetfrom a lateral position. This deception, particularlyidentified with longer range weapons, isextended by employing another gun, often oflighter caliber, in a carefully coordinated attackon the same target. Flash simulators alsc increasethe difficulty of visual location ‘of activeguns.The first step to obtain infantry-artillery coweaponsis taken in the attack order and isassured by direct contact between the commanders,artillery liaison units (Artillerieverbindungs-Ko~~~z~ndo), and direct contact between artilleryobservers and infantry units.The Germans also employ forward observers(Vorgeschobene Beobachtcr), who have the sametask as their U;. S. counterpart.The signal equipment necessary for communicationbetween units, liaison units, and observersis only partly organic. The Germans keep mostof the signal equipment centralized in the divisionsignal battalion, which allots equipment asneeded ta sk. various units.In the attack the greater part of the artilleryIV—19

I MARCH 1945supports the main effort. The remainder of theartillery is assigned the , mission of flank protectionagainst possible enemy counterattacks.5. Meeting Engagement (Begegnungsgefecht)In the meeting engagement the Germans believethat the advantage lies with the side which SUCceedsfirst in making effective preparation for theattack ayd thereby deprives the enemy of his freedomof action. When both adversaries attackimmediately from march columns, the decisivefactors are the initiative of the junior officers andthe efficiency of the troops. The senior commanderquickly coordinates the functions of thevarious officers, while the advance guard securesfor him freedom of action and the opportunityfor a speedy deployment of his troops.6. PursuitU. S. and German tactical doctrines on pursuitare very much alike. Pursuit begins when theenemy is no longer able to maintain his positionand abandons the combat area with the bulk of hisforces. The object of the pursuit is the completeannihilation of the retreating or routed enemy.Effective pursuit requires great initiative fromcommanders of all echelons of command, whomust not hesitate to start pursuit immediately,even when their troops are exhausted. Theenemy must be given no time to pause to reorganizehis forces and reconstitute his defense.The pursuit is conducted on a broad front bymeans of fire and movement. When making fordistant objectives every effort is made to getaround the enemy's flanks and effect a surpriseattack in his rear. However, care must betaken that enemy attack on one's own flank doesnot cause deflection from the original direction.Fast-moving troops are used in the pursuit.These troops often are organized into pursuit oradvance sections. The infantry scatters theenemy and by-passes resisting enemy strongpoints,leaving their destruction to units following inthe rear. Part of the artillery places concentrationsat the avenues of retreat, while the remainderdisplaces forward in echelon, providingcontinuous support for the units in. front. TheGermans emphasize that a pursuit without thenecessary artillery support may lead to disaster.Assault guns travel well forward with the rapidlyadvancing infantry, their comparatively heavyarmament enabling them to crush quickly anddecisively any enemy forces attempting to makeIV—20UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451a stand. Combat aviation bombs routes of retreatand strafes the hostile forces in direct supportof the ground attack. Combat engineers repairdamaged roads, facilitating the continuousflow of supply and troops.Pursuit, after a successful breakthrough, isregarded by the Germans as a ideal s forthe Panzer division. Panzer Grenadiers in armoredhalf-tracks or in unarmored vehicles andtanks supplement each other in in theenemy. During the advance on roads, the tanksform the point. However, through wooded areasor larger villages the Pmrzw Grenadiers takeover the point. Tanks and Panzer Grenadiersstay close together so that either, according tothe situation, can be committed as soon as enemyresistance is encountered. Tanks are normallynot used in units of less than company strength.Section V.DEFENSIVEI. GeneralJn German doctrine the object of the defense(Vdrteidigung, or Abwehr) is to halt the hostileattack, or to gain time pending development of amore favorable situation for resumption of theoffensive. Thus German and U. S. doctrine areessentially the same: only the offensive leads todecisive successes.In the last two years German defensive operationshave become increasingly passive in nature.The Germans formerly placed the greatest stresson immediate and violent counterattacks as effectivemeans of destroying the attacking enemy.This required great mobility and large reserves.At present more emphasis is placed on the constructionof defensive positions, and counterattacksare frequently local in character. It is mostlikely that this passive type of defense is only anexpedient due to German shortages of mobileequipment and manpower.2. Organization for Defensea. GENERAL. The Germans attempt to break ahostile attack in front of the main line of resistance(Hauptkampflinie), at the forward limit ofthe battle position (Hauptkampffeld), or to forcethe enemy to abandon his attack.As in U. S. practice, the commander usuallydetermines from the map the main battlefield andassigns a general line as guide for the location ofthe main line of resistance, to ensure continuity

I MARCH 1945of the defensive position. Lower echelon commandersfix the main line of resistance on theground, since only on the terrain, after thoroughreconnaissance, can the details of the defense bedecided. A recent official German directive states,however, that reconnaissance must not delay theconstruction of defensive positions.Organization of the defensive position followsa conventional pattern and includes an advancedposition (Vorgeschobene Stellung), and an outpostposition (Gefechtsvorposten), both of whichusually are under immediate command of the areacommander. A reserve position may also be proander.The width and depth of a German defense areadepend upon the terrain and the proportionalstrength of friendly and hostile forces. In general,however, the width of a defensive sectorassigned to a unit is approximately twice thewidth of the sector when the same unit attacks.Normal sectors are: platoon, 220 to 550 yards;company, 440 to 1,100 yards; battalion, 880 to2,200 yards; regiment, 2,200 to 3,300 yards; division,6,600 to 11,000 yards.b. ADVANCED POSITION. The Germans organizethe advanced position 5,000 to 7,000 yardsin front of the main line of resistance, within therange of their medium artillery. A position isselected which will prevent seizure by the enemyof important terrain features, provide good observationpoints for friendly artillery, and, if possible,deceive the enemy as to the location of themain line of resistance. Troops manning thesepositions attempt to make the enemy deploy hisforces prematurely and, if possible, in the wrongdirection.The forces in the advanced position are usuallyreconnaissance detachments, which include machine-gun,armored-car, and antitank-gun units,the fire power and mobility of which make themsuitable for this type of employment. In generalthey occupy important features, such as railroads,river crossings, cross-roads, and commandingground. Forces in advanced positions are not expectedto hold at all cost; in the face of superiorenemy fire they retire along predetermined routesunder over of their medium artillery.c. OUTPOST POSITIONS. Outpost positions normallyare established 2,000 to 5,000 yards in frontof the main line of resistance. When the frontsare stabilized, the outpost position is the only positionforward of the main line of resistance. TheUNCLASSIFIED IM-E 30-451location, which depends upon the terrain, is alwayswithin range of friendly light artillery.German -outpost positions are occupied instrength varying from platoons to companies, dependingupon the mission, terrain, width of thethe and the number of troops available. Oftenthey are only weakly occupied as long as the advancedpositions are in front of them. Ordinarilyoutposts are established by infantry units drawnfrom the main battle position, supported by thefire of close-support weapons, such as mortarsand infantry guns. Antitank guns often are attachedto these outpost units to repel hostile armoredr o -units. The main weapon,however, is the light machine gun which opens fireat ranges of about 1,300 yards, while riflemencommence fire at about 850 yards.Firing positions are selected by the Germansto facilitate unobserved withdrawal of the outpoststo the main battle position when hostilepressure becomes too strong. Several alternatepositions are prepared for each weapon, and shiftsare made by day and night to make it difficultfor the opponent to detect and dislodge the outposttroops. Positions normally are selected atthe edges of woods, villages, hedgerows, or hills.A good field of fire is considered mandatory, andthe organization of firing positions is simple.Numerous dummy positions are constructed, includingknee-deep trenches filled with leaves tosimulate depth and occupancy. During the day,positions are manned by guards; at night, advancedlistening posts, particularly alert at duskand dawn, warn the troops of the enemy's approach.Small, prepared attacks with limited objectivesunder the protection of the outposts areutilized to interfere with the hostile preparationsand secure information.Withdrawal of the outposts is conducted soas not to hinder the fire of the main battle position.After the outposts are abandoned, they arelikely to be covered by carefully registered fireof heavy weapons in order to prevent their occupationby the enemy.d. MAIN LINE OF RESISTANCE. The Germansorganize their battle position in depth, with individualstrongpoints connected to form an uninterruptedbelt. The strongpoints, constructed forall-around defense, and surrounded by barbedwireobstacles and mine belts, contain one ormore heavy weapons supplemented by machineguns, mortars, and riflemen. The smallest strongpointis occupied by a reinforced squad. SquadIV—21

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IWIRE BOUNDARIES OF MINEFIELD -X-K-KELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED MINES QOPEN LANERCN LANE .AT MINEFIELDSECRET LANEAPER MINEFIELD oo o o oLISTENING POST(FIELD OF SCATTERED MINES • + »'%DUMMY MINEFIELD '' DETONATING POSTFiqure 11.—Typical layout of a reinforced battalion slrongpomt.DISTANCE BETWEEN WEAPONSOR DUGOUTS AT LEAST 5 1/2 YARDS+ 0 +IV—22Figure 12.—Typical layout of a rekforred squad stron,gpoist.

I MARCH 1945strongpoints normally are incorporated ‘into platoonstrongpoints, and the latter into companystrongpoints, etc.The Germans make the maximum use of reverseslopes in their defensive positions. Forward-slopepositions are usually avoided as theyare detected too early by the enemy and are likelyto be destroyed by massed fire. Since organizationof a position in woods requires much timeand labor, and strong occupation is requisite tocompensate for poor observation, the Germansalso avoid woods when time is short and laborscarce. Battle positions are laid out so thatwoods are neither in, nor directly in front or inrear of, defense installations. The Germans - believe,however, that when it is possible to establisha well prepared position in a woods, a positionso located offers the same advantages as areverse slope.When the Germans decide to construct defensivepositions on terrain divided by a stream, theyorganize bridgeheads on the bank on the hostileside where the terrain facilitates crossings. Wherethe river forms a re-entrant bend into enemy-heldterrain, a second position is constructed at thebase of the bend. On narrow rivers and creeks,the entire German main line of resistance is onthe hostile side of the river, and the stream becomesthe tank obstacle of the position. (Seeantimechanized defense.) When the friendlyside of the river consists of swampland, it is usedas an obstacle, and the hostile bank is not includedin the defense system.The Germans endeavor to provide all parts oftheir position with strong support from artilleryand heavy infantry weapons. A detailed fire planis prepared in advance by the infantry and coordinatedwith the artillery plan. Provision ismade for fire in front of the forward limit of thebattle position, which is partly protected by minefieldsand other obstacles. Alternate positions aredug so that support weapons may be shifted andfired rapidly. The mass of the artillery lays concentratedfire both close to and well in front ofthe main line of resistance, and is sited to coverthe spaces between the effective fire zones offront-line units.The Germans in general adhere to the principleof "effect before cover" in determining prioritiesfor constructing the various installations in a defenseposition. First they build combat trenches;erect infantry obstacles such as barbed-wirefences; and construct machine-gun positions,UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-45Idugouts, foxhoIes, and antitank positions. Theyclear fields of fire by careful cutting of underbrushbut try to avoid cutting down trees in orderto preserve concealment of the position. Theunderbrush is left in front of the position as faras 1 to 3 yards. They organize observation postsfor artillery and heavy infantry weapons, increasethe depth of the battle position, dig communicationtrenches and emplacements for the heavyinfantry weapons, and build command posts.Finally, they construct emplacements for the artillery,dig antitank ditches within the battle position,and build dummy positions.The Germans insist on thorough camouflage.Whenever practicable, trenches and wire obstaclesare placed along natural terrain lines such as rowsof brush or edges of fields. Trenches are dugzig-zag at obtuse angles, 330 to 660 yards long,depending on the terrain. Machine-guns are emplacedin trenches 1 to 3 yards in length. Toavoid silhouettes, the Germans heap more earthbehind the trenches than in front. Dugouts forriflemen and for machine-gun positions normallyprovide sufficient protection against enemy artilleryand mortar fire. Whenever possible, threelayers of logs and earth are used as cover.e. RESERVE POSITION. Occasionally a reserveposition is organized and troops in the main battleposition retire to it, but only under heavy pressure.This reserve position is constructed farenough to the rear to compel hostile artillery todisplace forward in order to bring it under fire.Motorized reserve units normally are kept therefor counterattacks which are planned in advance.f. ANTIMECHANIZED DEFENSE. In constructinga defensive position the Germans stress constructionof obstacles and antitank defenses. Ifpossible they select tank-proof terrain, and naturaltank obstacles, such as steep slopes, are improved.Very steep forward slopes are made at least 8yards deep, while uphill slopes are made 2 to 3yards high. Originally the Germans constructedantitank ditches well forward of the main lineof resistance, but experience taught them thatsuch ditches offered favorable jumping-off positionsfor hostile infantry and also revealed thelocation of the main line of resistance. At thepresent time, therefore, antitank ditches normallyare dug in the area between the main line of resistanceand the artillery positions. They arebuilt in an uninterrupted line to avoid leavingpassages that can be exploited by the enemy.All crossings essential to assure the maneuver-IV—23

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451IV—24Figure 13.—German company in a defensive position.

I MARCH 1945ability of friendly troop: are built, so that theycan be blown up on the shortest notice.The Germans are aware that obstacles of anykind are effective only when covered by fire fromvarious weapons. Consequently, there usuallyare trenches behind the antitank ditches fromwhich machine-gun and antitank-gun fire cancover the entire length of the tank obstacle.The Germans learned that dense minefields infront of their positions were an inadequate tankobstacle, because the enemy usually neutralizedthem by massed artillery fire or by concentratedair bombardment before launching a large-scaleattack. Now German minefields normally arelaid within the main battle position, and onlysingle mines are dispersed in pattern at wide intervalsin front of the main line of resistance.Particular stress is placed on the mining of roads.Routes of withdrawal which have to be left openare prepared for mining, and, if time does notpermit placing of actual mines, dummy mines areinstalled.The Germans employ many kinds of tank obstacles.They recently have used static flamethrowers dug into the ground. Usually sited in •pairs and in conjunction with other tank obstacles,they are fired by well concealed personnel as soonas hostile tanks come within range.German antitank guns are disposed in depth,with some well forward. They often are dug inand carefully concealed to prevent the enemyfrom discovering the location and strength of theantitank defenses prior to attack. In emplacingantitank guns, the Germans prefer positions inenfilade or on reverse slopes. They normally employtwo to three antitank guns in each position,protecting them from infantry attacks with lightmachine guns. Ranges at which the Germansopen fire upon hostile tanks vary according to thecaliber of the gun and its position. Althoughsingle antitank guns sometimes engage enemytanks at ranges up to 1,000 yards, main antitankdefenses usually hold their fire until the range isreduced to about 150 to 300 yards. The employmentof close-combat antitank teams supplementsthe antitank defense. When the hostile tank attackis repulsed, the antitank guns move to alternatepositions.The Germans emphasize that the use of smokecan be of great assistance in defeating enemy tankattacks. Smoke shells are fired into the attackingformation about one-third the distance back fromthe leading echelon. Thus the Germans avoidUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451blinding their own antitank gunners, and leadinghostile tanks not only are left without adequatesupport but are silhouetted against the smoke.The Germans also rely on the smoke being suckedinto the tanks and forcing the crews to dismount.3. Conduct of the DefenseGerman defense of a position, whether hastilyprepared or complete in all details, is conductedon the same principles. Unless they are compelledby manpower and materiel shortages to relyon the strength of their positions, the Germansprefer heavy concentrations of fire and powerful,coordinated counterattacks by mobile reserves ofall arms. They apply the principle of selectinga point of main effort (Schwcrpunkt) to the defenseas well as to the attack. This principlenecessarily is applied in reverse order in thedefensive, the main effort being made opposite thepoint where the enemy is making his main attack.German artillery attempts to disrupt a hostileattack before it reaches the defensive positions.The Germans state that it is invaluable to installobservation posts simultaneously in the main lineof resistance, in the advanced position, and in theimmediate vicinity of the gun position. Thusthey try to keep a hostile force constantly underobservation and fire even when it achieves apenetration. The artillery regiment commandercontrols the fire as long as possible, although requestsfor artillery barrages may be made by unitcommanders as low as platoon leaders. Capabilitiesof German heavy mortars, which like allother support weapons usually are sited on reverseslopes, are exploited, with a present trendtoward mortar-fire concentration.When a part of the battle position is lost, thearea is taken under artillery fire to annihilateenemy forces which have penetrated it. TheGermans normally organize reserve units, evenwhen only relatively few troops are available.Immediate local counterthrusts by infantry elementsand support weapons near the penetrationendeavor to hurl back the enemy before he hasan opportunity to establish himself. These smallcounterthrusts, which normally closely follow theartillery fire, preferably are directed at the flanksof the penetrations.When the enemy succeeds in making a largepenetration or breakthrough, the German higherechelon commander decides whether a generalcounterattack should be launched to restore theposition or whether the main battle positionIV—-25

I MARCH 1945should be reestablished farther to the rear. Thecounterattack is directed against the hostile flank,where possible, and is prepared thoroughly. Assemblyarea, time, objective, zone, artillery support,and employment of tanks, self-propelledartillery, assault guns, and air units are controlledby one commander.German antiaircraft defense, which is unable togive adequate protection everywhere because ofAllied air supremacy, is concentrated at importantpoints. The main mission of the light andmedium antiaircraft artillery is the protection ofroads. Accuracy of Allied air reconnaissancecompels the German antiaircraft artillery tochange positions from day to day, the changeoverbeing made during the night. The Germans alsoenforce a preliminary two-hour fire silence in thenew position to try to trap enemy fighter-bombers.Searchlights often are placed parallel to a protectedroad to prevent enemy aircraft from illuminatingthe road by flares. This is particularlyimportant since the Germans normally bring forwardtheir relief troops, rations, and ammunitionduring the night.4. Defense of TownsThe Germans regard towns and villages as excellentstrongpoints, particularly if the buildingsare of masonry. Towns also are regarded asexcellent antitank positions because of the considerableinfantry-artillery effort necessary toneutralize them.In defending a, town or village, the G&-manslocate their main line of resistance well withinthe built-up portion; the edges of the town, whichprovide easy targets for artillery fire, are believedto be too vulnerable. The main line of resistanceis laid out irregularly in order to develop flankingfire, and every effort is made to conceal its locationuntil the last possible moment. Minorstrongpoints are maintained forward of the line inorder to break up attacks and provide additionalflanking fire. Cul-de-sacs are organized and attemptsmade to trap attacking forces in them fordestruction by counterattacking mobile reserves.These reserves are kept in readiness withinthe town itself, but other reserve forces areheld outside the town to prevent hostile flankingmaneuvers.Both occupied and unoccupied buildings arebooby-trapped in organizing the defended positions.Entrances to buildings are blocked, and allIV—26UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451windows opened so as not to disclose those fromwhich fire is maintained. Kooms are darkened,and passages are cut in the walls between buildings.To avoid detection, the &man s fire fromthe middle of the rooms, and frequently changetheir positions, while communication is maintainedthrough cellars and over roofs. Machine gunsare sited low, usually in basements. to provide bettergrazing fire. Chimneys and cornices are usedas cover for men on roofs; tiles may be removedto provide loopholes. Searchlights are mountedto illuminate fields of fire; in their absence vehicleheadlights may be used as substitutes. Whenhouses collapse, the defense is carried on fromcellars, and rubble heaps of destroyed areas areorganized into strongpoints.Tanks are considered to be ineffective withina defended town, although the Germans have usedthem in static, dug-in positions at cross-roads andsquares. As a result of their experiences on theEastern Front, the Germans believe single tanksare too vulnerable to Moloto\- cocktails, magneticmines, and explosive charges;. When the Germansthemselves use these antitank weapons, theyemploy them from foxholes dug outside the perime&-of the town. Efforts arc made to destroyenemy tanks inimobilized by antitank action,either within or outside the town, in order to preventtheir recovery or use as artillery observationposts and machine-gun nests. Antipersonnelmines are interspersed in antitank minefields becausethe attacking infantry are considered thechief menace.Assault guns may provide direct defensive supportfire if attacking forces break through anddisorganize the German position. To secure theadded protection afforded by masonry walls, theGermans may locate assault guns or tanks withinbuildings and use them against hostile armoredvehicles and infantry. Counterattacks. supportedby assault guns or tanks, will not be withheld untilthe situation has become desperate; indeed, surprisecounterattacks may be launched at any time.For the defense of village strongpoints specialbattle commandants (Karnpfkolllrllalldanten) arcappointed. The battle commandant is usually thesenior officer and the tactical commander of allmilitary forces, emergency units, and civil organizationsin his area. He has the disciplinary powerof a regimental commander.In the case of fairly small villages, consolidationof the place itself is usually deemed sufficient.For Iarger localities an outer defense

Figure I4.—-Strotzgpoitlt warmed by arl i)lfuntrg battalion.3GOGO

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451system is constructed in addition to the innerdefenses.The inner defense system consists of a numberof concentric positions which are broken downinto perimeter positions, intermediate positions,and the inner ring position. The inner defensesystem is divided into sectors, each forming astrongpoint system in itself, with the strongpointsprotected by all-around antitank and infantry obstaclesand connected with each other by trenches.The perimeter ring .pasition is the most importantpart of the inner defenses and consists ofone or more continuous trench systems, each witha deep main battle zone. The forward edge oftenis beyond the outskirts of the village, unless thiscreates unfavorable conditions for the antitankdefense, in which case it is within the village itself.Artillery and heavy support weapons are employedas whole units in support of the perimeterring position, although single guns may be detachedfor the defense of strongpoints and roads.The nearer the fighting approaches the inner ring,the more likely it will be that the Germans willsplit up the support weapons units for close cooperationwith infantry assault groups.The outer defense system likewise consists ofa number of concentric positions, approximately4 to 6 miles apart, so as to force the enemy artilleryto displace to engage each one. For defenseof larger towns the Germans organize the outsidering about 125 to 18% miles beyond the outskirtswhenever feasible. Beyond this outsidedefense ring, about 2,200 yards forward, are theadvanced positions, with covering units stillfurther forward on main roads and railways.Patrols of all types, including motorized andcyclist patrols, give early warning of the enemy'sapproach and keep him under continuous observation.Non-military outposts, such as policesentries, party officials, and local farmers also areused for these duties.Sector boundaries for companies and battalionsare defined from the outside defense ring to thecenter of the town or village. Usually they donot coincide with vital main roads, which alwaysare defended by entire companies or battalions.Every strongpoint, defense block (combined adjacentbuildings), and sector has local reserves;mobile reserves, consisting of combat groups comprisedof infantry, tanks, assault and self-propelledguns, are employed for counterattacks of alarger scale.In addition to regular military units the Ger-mans employ emergency units, organized frompersonnel of Army, Navy, and Air Force in towndefense. Besides these regularly organized emergencyunits, improvised emergency units areformed from stragglers, remnants of formations,and units in process of reorganization. Utilizationof emergency units is only temporary. Theirmain tasks, of local nature, are protection of headquarters,supply points, airfields, etc., and garrisonservice in fortifications.5. Doctrine of Westwall SystemThe Germans consider economy of force thefundamental principle in planning zones of permanentfortifications. They originally built the Westwallas a protective barrier along the Frenchfrontier to permit commitment of maximumforces offensively in the East. Thus, in 1939,they were able to hold in the West with approximately20 divisions, while employing 40 to 50divisions against Poland.When Westwall construction ceased in 1940,German strategy in the West was offensive, envisioningan invasion of France by a wide envelopment,with the bulk of the German forces inthe ‘North, where the Westwall defenses wererelatively weak. The pivot of maneuver wassouth of the Moselle River, where the Westwalldefenses were strongest.The Germans never have discarded the principlethat offensive action is the best protection.When their armies were forced back to the Westwallin 1944, they used this defensive systemas a base for offensive operations in selectedareas, as in the Saar and the Eifel. Advantagealso was taken of this protected zone for the freelateral movement of troops; shelters were utilizedfor the cover and concealment of reserve forces,weapons, and supplies.German Westwall tactics are based on a stubborndefense of individual fortifications, localcounterattacks against areas of penetration, andcounterattack by general mobile reserves againstareas of deep penetration. German troops are notpermitted to develop a static-defense complexwhich might foster the idea that a position oncesurrounded is lost. Bunker garrisons are taughtto continue resistance even though surrounded,because their perseverance impedes the attackers'advance and facilitates counterattacks. Troopsare trained in the principle that the decision usuallyis achieved by the infantry in the open betweenbunkers. Organic heavy infantry weaponsand artillery are the backbone of German defenseIV—28

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451y%Wi !1 iFigure 15.—Antitank defense of an artillery battery firing position.IV—29

UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451IV—30Figure 16—Defense of u community.

I MARCH 1945in the Westwall, just as in mobile warfare. Reserveshabitually are left under cover until thetime for counterattack arrives.Surprise is always attempted. For example,bunkers and heavy weapons frequently are sitedon reverse slopes, not only for concealment andprotection in defilade, but also to open fire suddenlyupon the unwary attacker crossing the crestor moving around the nose of a hill. The attackerpenetrating the Westwall defense system mustbe prepared to cope with unexpected resistanceflaring up in his rear areas, surprise by accurateflanking and enfilade fire at short and mediumranges, sudden counterattacks by forces notknown to be in the areas, and counterattacks inincreasing strength as the penetration progresses.German doctrine prescribes that the intact portionof the defenses must continue the battle,regardless of the situation at the penetrated area,until the appropriate command orders a readjustmentof the line. Penetrations normally are dealtwith as follows: by mobile reserves which sealthem off f rontally; by counterattack or counteroffensivefrom protected flanks to threaten therear areas of the penetrating force; or by both, asin the Aachen area. At any rate, the Germanswill attempt to destroy the penetration before theattacker has reorganized and consolidated hisgains. Here again the principle of economy offorce is generally followed. German troops maybe taken from strongly protected and little threatenedareas in order to concentrate on adequatecounterattacking or counteroffensive force.Hence the attacker should have sufficient strengthto ward off strong countermeasures and at thesame time exploit the advantages gained by apenetration.Section VI.RETROGRADE MOVEMENTSI. Withdrawal from Action (Abbrechen des Gefechts)a. GENERAL. The Germans break off an engagementfor one or more of the following reasons: when it has served its purpose; when conditionsrequire the employment of the troops, orpart of them, on another front; when a continuationof the battle gives no promise of success; orwhen defeat is imminent.When an attack exhausts itself without attainingits objective, the Germans assume the defensiveas the first step in withdrawing from action.If the defense must be continued in a rearwardUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451position, the breaking of contact, the retirement,and the resumption of the defense are carefullyplanned beforehand. Positions in the rear areprepared for the reception of the troops, particularlyif they have been engaged in heavy fighting.The retirement is made in conjunction with thatof adjacent units, and stress is placed on maintainingthe cohesiveness of the retiring forces.By maintaining the usual fire of all arms, theGermans try to deceive their enemy as long aspossible as to the continued occupation in force oftheir original position.In view of the severe losses inflicted by Alliedplanes and armored forces on German troops duringdaylight disengagements, the Germans try toawait darkness before withdrawing from action.At night they break off combat on a wide frontand move back along routes as nearly perpendicularas possible to terrain features suitable forfighting delaying actions. When the situationforces them to withdraw during daylight, they doso by unit sectors, coordinating the movements ofadjacent units.b. ORDERS. The German company commanderfollows this outline in drafting his orders forbreaking off an engagement:General instructions. Rearward movement ofsupplies, ammunition-carrying vehicles, and equipment.Reconnaissance and marking of routes of withdrawal.Detailed instructions. Combat orders for thecovering forces (reconnaissance units, heavy supportweapons, medical personnel, infantry combatwagons, and infantry engineers).Type, time, and march order for the withdrawalof the rifle platoons and heavy weapons.Assembly areas.Location of the company commander.2. Retreat (R~ckztlg)a. GENERAL. Retreat is a forced retirementwhich is ordered by the Germans only when allpossibilities for success are exhausted. The objectiveis to place enough distance betweenfriendly and hostile forces to enable the formerto conduct an orderly withdrawal and to occupynew positions to the rear.b. COVERING FORCES. The German usually organizecovering forces from troops in closest contactwith the enemy—either whole tactical units orelements from several. These forces attempt tomake the enemy believe that the position is stillfully occupied. Engineers prepare additional ob-IV—3I

MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45lstacles, minefields, and booby traps forward ofand within the positions to be held. A portion ofthe artillery and heavy infantry weapons supportthe covering forces. They maintain as long aspossible their former fire activity to deceive theenemy, even when fulfilment of their missionmeans the loss of individual guns. The sectorassigned to a covering force is usually too wideto be under effective control of a single commander,but the actions of the various commandersare closely coordinated. Orders specify whetherthe covering forces are to remain in contact withthe hostile forces until they begin to advance, orto follow the main body after a specified interval.c. REAR GUARD (Nachhut). (1) As the distancefrom the enemy increases, the retiring troopsform march columns. Where possible, a division'sretirement takes place along two parallelroutes. The freshest troops available are used asrear guards. Since the rear guard cannot expectsupport from the retreating main body, it mustbe relatively strong. It is composed of infantryunits. Generally the divisional field artillery retireswith the main body, none being assigned tothe rear guard. Self-propelled and heavy infantry-supportguns, and even howitzers, are frequentlyattached to the rear guard. Tanks alsomay be assigned. A typical rear guard for eachroute in a division retirement is one infantry battalionto which are attached elements of the reconnaissanceunit, to protect the flanks, and of theengineer unit, to prepare demolitions.(2) The rear guard infantry battalion normallyemploys only one of its rifle companies onactive rear guard tasks. The three rifle companiesperform this function in turn as long as theirstrength remains approximately even. If the terraindemands it, two companies are employed ata time. Two or more antitank guns and halfof the self-propelled or heavy infantry guns allottedto the full rear guard support the rearmostrifle company or companies. When pressure becomestoo strong, the single rifle company is withdrawnthrough the two remaining rifle companieswhich are supported by the remainder of the attachedweapons. Variations of this leapfroggingprogress are repeated until darkness, when a generaldisengagement takes place and the originalformation is resumed.(3) Rear guards withdraw by bounds to selectedbut not prepared positions. The extent towhich positions eventually can be prepared dependson the proximity of the pursuing forces,IV—32the length of time each particular position is likelyto be held, and the decision of the individual companyand platoon commanders. During each stageof the retreat, the commander of the rear companycan order a withdrawal to the main rearguard position, but withdrawal from each mainrear guard position is ordered by the commanderof the main body. l:requently the speed of withdrawalis based on a time-distance schedule. Duringthe withdrawal from a certain town, rearguards were instructed to retire not more than3,000 yards a day.(4) Experience has shown that in certain typesof country a reinforced rear guard company generallycan hold up very superior forces on a frontas wide as three miles. In one instance of awithdrawal from a defensive position along a riverline, a German Panzer division, which had onePanzer Grenadier battalion and attached elementsas its rear guard, was covered by one rifle companyreinforced by a company of tanks, four infantryguns (including two self-propelled), anda battery of medium howitzers. The tanks weremainly used to cover the withdrawal of the rifleelements. On another occasion a similar rearparty had a number of heavy mortars attached.These covered the infantry withdrawal with thehelp of four tanks, which also carried the mortarsback to the next bound.(5) Particularly suited for rear guard tasks,because of its armor and high fire power, is thearmored reconnaissance battalion ol the Panzerdivision. When employing the armored reconnaissancebattalion in terrain that affords cover,the Germans site well camouflaged, armored halftracksin WOO&X! areas, flat reverse slopes, or highgrain fields, and open fire with all weapons atvery close range. The armored half-tracks thenpenetrate into the confused enemy and, after repulsinghim, retreat to previously organized alternatepositions.3. Delaying Actiona. BASIC PRINCIPLES. The Germans make adistinction between "delaying engagements" (HinhaltendesGrfecht) and "delaying action" (HinhaltenderWiderstand). A delaying engagement isprimarily the general plan of the higher commanderfor holding back the enemy. Delaying actionsare the measures taken by lower units to carryout the higher commander's plan.The purpose of delaying actions is to enablethe main German force to disengage itself frombattle, retire in order, and establish a new defen

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451sive position. Delaying actions therefore seek todeceive the enemy as to German strength, dispositions,and intentions; to prevent the enemy fromcommitting the main German forces; and to preventclose pursuit of the main forces by theenemy. These measures are accomplished by rearguards, special battle groups, and strongpoints, allof which are characterized by high automatic firepower, mobility, and economy in numericalstrength.Delaying actions are organized not in a maindefensive belt, but on lines of resistance (Widerstandslinien).The distance between such linesis great enough to prevent the enemy from engagingtwo of them from the same artillery position.He is compelled to displace and move up hisartillery to engage each line. These lines of resistanceare normally established along forwardslopes to facilitate disengagement and withdrawalunder cover. The delaying actions are fought forwardof the lines of resistance with mobile forces.Furthermore, battle outposts are organized forwardof each line.The main delaying weapons are machine guns,mortars, and self-propelled weapons. Tanks are,used in small groups.Maintenance of contact is a most conspicuousprinciple in the Germans' conduct of a withdrawaland delaying action. The size, composition, direction,and intention of the attacking enemy forceare observed at all times.b. CONDUCT OF THE DELAYING ACTION. Duringa delaying action, wide sectors are covered byartillery units widely deployed—guns are sited bysections if necessary—and by widely distributedinfantry-support weapons. The defense is thenfurther organized by establishing strongpointsmanned by small groups.The positions from which delaying actions arefought are characterized by very slight depth. ASa general rule, a unit is responsible for doublethe front normally allocated in defensive fighting.A company sector is 650 to 1,300 yards; a battalionsector 1,750 to 4,400 yards; a regimentalsector 4,400 to 6,600 yards; and a division sector1.3,OOO to 22,000 yards.In leaving a line of resistance, German coveringforces attempt to disengage by night. Ifthat is not possible, their actions are governed bythe following principle: the enemy is not allowedto come closer to them than they are fromtheir next line of resistance. The troops mustbe able to reach the new position before the enemyreaches the old one, or their losses will be excessive.The troops therefore do not retire in the faceof enemy patrols—every effort is made to destroysuch patrols—but only when the enemy mountsan attack. If it can be ascertained that the enemyis preparing for a massed attack, the Germansmake a timely withdrawal to avoid exposing thetroops to enemy artillery concentrations. Advanceelements employ smoke to enable them tomake a getaway in a critical situation. Riflemencover the disengagement of heavy weapons, whichmove back by bounds. Every opportunity istaken to make limited counterattacks in order toinflict casualties on an enemy who advancesrecklessly.Fire is opened at extreme ranges on an enemyadvancing for a major attack. Enemy reconnaissanceforces are allowed to approach, however,and then an effort is made to destroy them.Counterattacks on a large scale are avoided,except when the enemy threatens to penetrate theline of resistance. When that occurs, the Germanscounterattack with the main forces of therear guard and seek to restore the situation inorder that the program of staged withdrawal maybe continued. Local counterattacks are made forthe protection or retention of some feature essentialto the safe conduct of the main withdrawal,or to gain time for the preparation of the lineof resistance or phase line.The area between the lines of resistance iscalled the intermediate area (Zz&clzenfeZd). Explicitorders are given as to whether the intermediatearea is to be covered in one bound or isto be fought over. The latter necessity arisesespecially when the next line of resistance has notbeen fully prepared and time must be gained.Detachments must reach the line of resistanceearly enough to insure that all the main positionsare occupied in time.The supply of ammunition is carefully organized.A great deal of ammunition is requiredfor delaying actions because a few weapons ona broad front must do as much as or even morethan the normal number of guns in a defensiveposition. When ammunition is scarce, the Germansspecify, down to sections if necessary, thequantity of ammunition that may be used at eachposition. Every commander maintains a supplyof ammunition for emergencies.The Germans stress the importance of deceivingthe enemy by every means. Artillery andIV—33

1 MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45Iheavy weapons are moved continually to give animpression of greater strength. Dummy positionsand camouflage are also widely used.So that isolated groups may be adequately directed,signal communication receives special attention.In delaying actions in mountainous terrain, theGermans make greater use of their reconnaisanceand engineer units than of any other component.Reconnaisance units are almost continuously incontact with advance and flanking enemy elements,and participate in most rear-guard andbattle-group engagements.c. STRONGPOINTS IN DELAYING ACTION. TheGermans cover the rear guard's resistance orphase lines by a system of strongpoints or defendedlocalities. Just as it is a function of therear guards to prevent a pursuing force frommaking contact with the main body while it is onthe move, so it is the function of strongpoints toprevent the penetration of resistance or phase linesuntil the main body has withdrawn to its nextposition.In manning strongpoints, the Germans showthe same economy of force they show in formingrear guards. Typical fire power of a strongpointin close country is one or two self-propelled guns,two heavy mortars, and up to six machine guns.In open country, one self-propelled gun is normallyemployed, supplemented by three tanks anda small party of infantry with mortars and machineguns in armored half-tracks.Strongpoints generally are organized on thehedgehog principle. Provision is made for allaroundfire, but the strongpoints are not necessarilymutually self-supporting. They are normallylocated on commanding features, and sometimeson the forward edges of villages or hamletsif these dominate road or terrain bottlenecks. Inflat country, however, villages usually are not occupiedexcept by snipers, but positions are occupiedin the rear of the villages to engage enemyvanguards debauching from them. Weapons arenot dug in, and positions are frequently changed.Counterbattery fire thereby is rendered very difficultas there are no prepared positions to bespotted from the air. The Germans thus forcetheir enemy to launch a full-scale attack supportedby artillery to dislodge the garrison ofthe strongpoint, which normally withdraws justbefore the attack can materialize. Approaches tostrongpoints which cannot be covered by fire arefrequently mined. Extensive minefields are fre-IV—34quently laid at the heads of re-entrants in hillyterrain.d. BATTLE GROUPS IN DELAYING ACTION.Battle groups normally are organized for theexecution of some specific task in the withdrawal,such as a local counterattack or the defense ofsome particular feature whose retention is necessaryfor the security of the main withdrawal.Battle groups, which the Germans employ foroffensive and defensive as well as delaying missions,vary in size from a company or two, withattached close support weapons, to a regiment orseveral battalions reinforced with tanks, artillery,antiaircraft, engineer, and reconnaissance elements.In all cases the Germans seek to makethem as self-sufficient as possihle in comhat. Inactual practice, however, the composition of Germanbattle groups appears often to have beendictated less by the theory of what units shouldbe put together to form a self-sufficient comhatforce, than by the demands of an emergencysituation which commanders have been forced tomeet with the insufficient and normally disassociatedunits at their disposal.German hattle groups may he organized forshort, long, or changing missions. They areusually known by the name of their commander.e. DEMOLITIONS AND OBSTACLES. TO preventthe pursuing enemy columns from approachingclose enough to engage even their rear guard elements,the Gerinans continually employ demolitionsand obstacles of all kinds. The thoroughnesswith which ehgineer operations have beencarried out has increased steadily throughout thewar. Culverts and bridges are completely destroyed.Roads and all natural detours aremined, cratered, or blocked by felled trees; instreets and villages, streets are blocked by thewreckage of buildings. Vertical rail obstacles areplaced to obstruct main routes; mines often arelaid for 30 yards around the edge of the obstacle.Wooden box mines are used to a large extent asdemolition charges, and aerial bombs and artilleryshells are sometimes similarly employed.Frequently rear parties are committed to adelaying engagement in order to cover the preparationof demolitions immediately behind them.During static periods in the general withdrawal,when the Germans occupy their line of resistanceor phase line, engineer units prepare demolitionsi’n the rear. After the withdrawal, these demolitionsare covered by sniper fire, machine guns,and self-propelled weapons as long as possible.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4511. GeneralSection VII.MINEFIELDSThe Germans make extensive use of mines whichthey consider a most effective defensive weapon.Minefields are utilized chiefly to cover defensiveactions and retreats, although limited use is madeof them in offensive actions for flank protection.In a static situation the Germans regard minefieldsas an element of the front-line position,laid out according to an over-all mine plan developedin close conjunction with that for the fieldsof fire of all weapons. Within recent months,standard German doctrine for minefield locationhas been modified. ‘Instead of laying dense minefieldsin front of the main line of resistance, dispersedmines are laid there, while the minefieldsproper are sited within the main battle position.2. Surveying of MinefieldsThe Germans consider it necessary to survey thelocation of minefields and individual mines withinthe minefields. German engineers are instructedto choose reference points (Festpunkte or FP)for minefields which easily can be identified. Ata grade crossing, at the intersection of two improvedroads, at the edge of a village, or somesuch favorable location, this can be done withoutany difficulty. In some instances, however, theGermans are forced to use "guide wire" and auxiliaryfixed points (Vwmessungspunkte or VP).A type of auxiliary fixed point that has provedpracticable is the center of an equilateral trianglewith sides 1.5 to 25 feet long. The corner pointsand the fixed point itself may be stakes, rails, orconcrete or steel girders about 3 feet in length connectedwith barbed wire. Such a fixed point canbe reestablished easily because even heavy shellingwill rarely destroy more than one or two stakes.A minefield is limited by the four corner pointsAl, A Z , A s , and Aq. The corner points are markedclockwise, A, and A, forming the base line on theGerman side. The survey of the field refers toone or both points of the base line. Auxiliaryfixed points, called "mine stakes" (Minenpfiihle),are used if necessary. Fixed points may be referencepoints found on the map or auxiliary fixedpoints established by the troops. Distances aremeasured in meters; azimuth readings are takenon the German issue compass—divided into 6,400mils like the U. S. compass but read counterclockwise,and marked with the letters KZ(Kompasszuhl). The new-type compass called"march compass" has clockwise graduation and isindicated with the 1ettc.rs MKZ. The Germansuse the magnetic azimuth and always proceed intheir survey from the friendly toward the enemyside.The Germans believe that it is advantageous tolay a continuous chain of reference points 600 to900 feet apart, through a division sector. Thischain can be used to determine the location ofditches, trenches, obstacles, and pillboxes, as wellas minefields. Individual points are designatedwith Roman numerals, starting on the right flankf the division sector.3. Laying of Minefieldsa. PATTERNS. TO assure the greatest possibleeffect, minefields normally are laid out in definitepatterns. The Germans make an exception to thispractice, however, in sectors where they do notintend to undertake ol‘fensive actions. There theydisperse the mines irregularly in the areas betweendefensive positions,The main belts of a major antitank minefieldlaid in uniform pattern normally consist of antitankmines with a sprinkling of antipersonnelmines in the forward edge of the field. Bothtypes may be fitted with anti-lifting devices, andsome of the antipersonnel mines have trip wiresattached. In some instances, these mines areplaced in the intervals betwen the diagonal wiresof a double-apron fence, with trip wires fastenedto the diagonals.At i r angle mines are laid in theforward edge of antipersonnel minefields to preventarmored vehicles from detonating the mainbelt of antipersonnel mines. The forward edgesof minefields of all types often are sown withexplosive charges placed in wooden boxes fittedwith pressure fuzes. These act as both antitankand antipersonnel mines, and discourage the LISAof detectors to locate the mines.Forward of most regular fields, and particularlyin front of lanes, mines may be found widelyspaced or scattered at random in unmarkedgroups. Mines also are laid in spaces runningout at right angles from the forward edge of theminefield to damage vehicles moving along thefield in search of lanes.All pressure-type antitank and antipersonnelmines are laid in lines. For measuring distancesand spaces, the troops use a mine-measuring wire(Minennzcssdraht) which they themselves makeIV—a5

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451END RING CROSS BAR CUBE. $ • ! • » x X 0 ' XMINE MEASURING WIRE.' V7FI^{9,9.9 9, 9 , 9 , 9 , 9 , 9 . 9 , 9.- P, 9.9! 9 , 9 , 9 . 9, 9 , 9 , 9 . 9, 9RING 3RING 4BURIED T-MINES IT-MINE 42 OB T-MINE 431, WITH Z-METER SPACING BOTH LATERALLY AND IN DEPTH.RING 1n9-^—+- 9 , x . 9 , x . 9 , x , 9 i x t 9 OOQ RING1•Jn%•-S-. . I •• ^ .o

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451from old telephone wire. (See Figure 15.) The between fixed points, serves to lay out right anmine-measuringwire is 24 meters , (about 25 gles by staking out a triangle with sides of 6,yards) long, and every meter (3 feet 3 inches) 8, and 10 meters respectively. Spaces betweenis marked with a piece of wood. The rings on the mines are determined by reference to the marksends are about 5 inches in diameter. The meas- on wire; the four rings on one end are used touring wire, in addition to measuring the distance offset the rows.L_ H 9._ t __$._ 1 _Q__ H^^-Q._ t __$.8ooo RINGlt~JP , 9 x-9 , 9 y 9 , 9 y 9 " l P x 9 l - 9 x 9 , 9 X L>! 9 , 9 • 9 . 9 i 9 . 9 . 9 • 9 O RING SS-MINES WITH 2-METER SPACING BOTH LATERALLY AND IN DEPTH.mi- ->

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Type of MineHow LaidIntervalbetween MinesNumber ofRowsDensity per 1Meter of FrontT-Mine 35Buried4 m (4.4 yds)81216234234234T-Mine 42T-Mine 43Laid on surface4 m (4.4 ytls)81216Buried2 m (2.2 yds)46824481224612312R-Mine 43Buried orlaid on surfaceabout4 m (4.4 yds)V21S-Mine 35Buried4 m (4.4 yds)1232 m (2.2 yds)123Schii-Mine 42Buried1 m (1.1 yds)123Vi m (0.55 yd)24The density of a minefield depends upon theinterval between mines and the number of rows.The table above represents the density.Mine lanes are left open for patrols, and passagelanes for assault troops. For permanent patrolsnew lanes are made from time to time andthe old ones closed. A mine-free safety strip isprovided on the Germans' side.The Germans normally lay mine belts in individualsections 80 by 105 feet. The sections usuallyare staggered, and, for extensive mine belts,they are combined in units of three or four toform forward or reverse arrowheads, or echelons.Minefields arranged in echelon are surveyed byusing corner posts on the hostile side of intermediateminefields as survey points.The Germans emphasize that minefields mustbe covered by fire, although during a hasty withdrawalthey often do not follow this principle. Itis common for a regular minefield to have a listeningpost with two men at the rearward edge;about 70 or 80 yards farther to the rear thereusually is a covering party of four or five menarmed with one or two light machine guns.When the Germans are in hasty withdrawal,they usually lay a large number of small nuisanceminefields. These fields contain many differenttypes of mines, which often are unmarked andshow every evidence of hurried laying. The consequentlack of pattern uniformity makes theirdetection and clearance a laborious and dangeroustask. Though no consistency is noted in layoutand types of mines used in such fields, the Germansshow certain preferences in their choice ofsites for them.b. LOCATION. In general, mines are laid eitherclose to, or on, roads; on airfields and railways;and along telegraph routes. Surfaced portionsof roads usually are avoided by the hasty minelayer, but khaki-painted T-Mines sometimes areplaced on the surface at dips in the road, in thehope that drivers will be unable to check theirvehicles in time to avoid them. The Germans alsoplace mines along the shoulders of the road oppositenarrow places where drivers have to detourto pass, and at the entrances to defiles where theyhave to pull off the road to wait for vehiclesmoving in the opposite direction. Other placesusually sown with antitank mines are turnouts,sharp bends, the unsurfaced islands sometimesfound at crossroads, berms, and well worn wheelruts.c. CONCEALMENT. The Germans, with greatingenuity, attenqlt to make their tnines difficultIV—38

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451to detect. They bury them as much as 24 inchesbelow the surface where they explode only afterpassage of a number of vehicles has compactedthe earth cover sufficiently to operate the fuze.They put explosives in wooden boxes to preventthe effective operation of ordinary mine detectors,and mark tire prints in the earth on top of themine by drawing a detached axle and wheelsover it.The Germans also show considerable ingenuityin siting random antipersonnel mines on the lineof the hostile advance. Road demolitions areplentifully sown with S-Mines, and kilometerposts at points where vehicular drivers have todismount to read directions are similarly treated.S-Mines also are placed in ditches, often close toto the trip-wire peg of another mine.Nuisance fields on lines of communication generallyare closely spaced, occasionally so closelyas to cause sympathetic detonation. This is particularlypossible when mines are laid with theirpressure plates almost flush with the surface ofthe ground and only lightly covered with earth.German dummy minefields take various forms.In some cases a trip wire is laid to give the appearanceof a minefield perimeter wire, with theusual lanes, and the ground is disturbed at regularintervals. Scrap metal, often dispersed withreal mines, is placecl in shallow holes to causea heyi n in the mine detector. Dummy minesrface are wired in and connected with boobytraps.4. revent of MinefieldsThe Germans stress the marking of minefieldsand attempt to mark them in such a manner thatthey cannot be recognized by the enemy but caneasily be found by their own troops. Their methodsof marking minefields are not uniform. Thefront edge of a field often is unmarked and unwired;the rear edge seldom so. Some fields havebeen to unmarked, but because of manyaccidents caused by their own minefields, theGermans issued orders within recent monthsmaking proper marking obligatory.The following are typical examples of markingsby the Germans, the type used dependingon r - situation and terrain: corner-post markingstakes; double-apron fence on the enemy sideand a single trip wire on the friendly side, or thereverse; single knee-high wires; cattle fencing;empty mine crates; and signs.The length of marking stakes varies with theterrain. They are flattened on one side for alength of about 8 inches. The flat surface ispainted red, with the letter M (M&en) in black.GAPMINESMINE STAKEACTUAL MINEFIELD SIGNDUMMY MINEFIELD SIGNMINEFIELD GAP SIGNgyS'Kfflafg7T1 in en\tntmintOTHER TYPES OF SIGNS AT ACTUAL MINEFIELDSOTHER TYPES OF MINEFIELD GAP SIGNSFigure 19.—Minefield signs.IV—39

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45lMine Obstacle:Location: _ MiufiMine Plan:Restricted1891 74RealDiv EngrMiner:No. Types and IgnitersIZO S-A?ines u/tt/t. SMtttt?How laid:_MinePattern:-Erefi^WarningFence:_QDistinguishingEevrures:Map Reference: CapturedRussian. Map3 JUe 1942L37-6*) "ipate mine Iield was laid -~ ~~~ ~AY~____dote drawn_4-MnjLby Cpl_ StUtVf-r/dlate surveyed onJ^MgyJQVi with_JforcA _date checkedby LT. B!kale: 1:1000 Distribution:AIWAYS KING IMine Field Number of Mines Minefield A,B anJC f4m wide,24 4 lines wHft 4ttt interval and46 distance./20S-Minef&Gkefidd D /4mwide,2/SfocK Mines 7 fines each fae u/iM3Mtfffes witit tripIV—40Figure 20.—German mise plan.

IUNCLASSlF\EDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451MineMine Plan:578Bn Regt Dir EngrLocation: jf^^k. 9£^.^Q9S_J^^£^ Restricted /22Miner: No. Types and Igniters vtuowLIN0-(7_ Concealed c/i4r?0S jvitA /7 cfa/onq delay i

I MARCH 1945Such stakes are used only on the friendly edgesof minefields.Signs are painted in red and white on boardsor pieces of sheet metal, and fastened to t ostakes. The edges of minefields are marked withsigns showing horizontal stripes. Edges of lanesthrough the fields are shown by vertically dividedsigns with the white portion on the side of thelane, and the red portion on the side of the minefield(danger). The reverse side of the signs(the side toward the enemy) is painted olive drab.If red paint is not available, the Germans substituteblack-and-white signs. They are painted withthe following words:Millen—for minesGasse or Gassen—for mine lanesEntimint—for an area cleared of mines.Minefields are marked with vertical lettering,dummy minefields with slanting letters. This distinction,however, is supposed to be made knownonly to the German engineer troops because othertroops may divulge the location of dummy minefieldsby crossing them.5. Mine Plans, Sketches, and ReportsA German mine plan shows one or more fieldsin all necessary technical details. A German minemap, on the other hand, shows all mine obstacleswithin one front sector and their tactical significance,but without technical details.The Germans use a number of different formsfor their reports and sketches, although all arebased on the same principle. Figure 17 shows 9very commonly used form. The upper third ofthe mine map form provides space for writtenspecifications and a small situation sketch. Thrthedrawing is made on the blank space proiided.It is the engineers' responsibility to draw upmine maps, and to keep them up to date. Additionalremarks sometimes are placed on the backof the sheet.a. DETAILS OF MINE MAP. The German minemap usually shows the following details:(1) Name of the obstacle and designation ofthe unit which laid it.(2) Name of the area in which the obstacle islocated.(3) Grid reference and particulars of the mapsheet referred to.(4) Obstacle shown in the little sketch in red.(5) Date minefield was laid.(6) Name and rank of officer or noncommissionedofficer in charge of laying field.IV—42UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(7) Da)- of survey and instrument used (oldor new compass—German issue).(8) Name and rank of officer or noncommissionedofficer in charge of survey.b. MINE DATA IN MAP. The following dataare given on the mines :(1) Number, type and igniter. (Example:72 T-Mine with T-MZ. 42, booby-trapped.)(2) Whether or not the mines are dug in.(3) Number of rows, and number of minesper row.(4) Fence (Example warning fence onfriendly side.)(5) Special features (Example destroyedenemy tank in center, on enemy side.)c. MINEFIELD-TYPE IDENTIFICATION IN MAP.Colored lines drawn diagonally across the upperright-hand field of the mine map identify thetype of the minefield as follows:(1) A red diagonal line designates fields whichcannot be cleared because some or all mines arebooby-trapped.(2) A yellow diagonal line designates fieldswhich can be cleared by using data from minedocument.(3) A green diagonal line designates dummyminefields.(4) Mines taken up or o r markedin red.The number of the minefield plan and unitdesignation appears on the upper right-hand cornerof the sheet. Battalion, regiment, and divisionengineers make their notes in the space providedfor them.For S-Mines laid 50 meters (55 yards) fromthe German lines, a note is made in red letters:VORSICHT, NUR 50 METER ABSTAND!(Caution, only 50 meters distance!)In case electrical ignition is provided, a noteis made showing how the igniters will be disposedof, if the unit which has laid the minefield isrelieved.d. INFORMATION IN MINEFIELD DRAWING.The drawing of the minefield is made in theblank space on the lower part of the sheet. Thescale is from 1 :500 to 1:2,000 whenever possible.The following information is included:(1) Shape and size of minefield.(2) Pattern.(3) Location of booby-trapped mines.(4) Location of survey points with azimuthand distances.(5) Type and location of warning fence.

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDMine Sketch.Minefields laid on 17 May 1943 y130 S-MinesGO S"Mines in small wood4-0 S-Mines/with, pressure30 with pressure type igniter type igniters on and a long30 bvith trip wire ide tm road for about+50 yds.3O S'Mines with pressuretype igniters on and alongsideroad for about270 yds.Approx. 1000 yds.Hgure 22,—German mine sketch.S£t. Schmaltz

I MARCH 1945CONVENTIONAL SIGNS FOR MINE MAPSI+++•Terrain impassable for tanksAntitank ditch or obstacleAntitank mine fieldAntipersonnel mine field3 14 Mines per meter width of frontCONVENTIONAL SIGNS FOR MINEPLANS AND SKETCHES• 0 0 Antitank mines• » • « t m•« • « •»• I •• ••Index number to be used onlyif different types of mines are laidin the same field.0 o O Improvised antitank minesB B B S-Mines^1 B B Stock MinesI B B Schu-Mines 421 11 11 1 Improvised antipersonnel minesft ft ft Small hidden chargesft ft ft Large hidden chargesObservation minesBooby-trapped minesTaken-up or destroyedScattered mines,1 1 u 1 Deliberate mine field>_ • #]'[_ i ij Mines lying on the surface• i i| Mines below the surfaceMinefieldcleared or destroyed•V •\*Gaps through mine fieldsDummy mine fieldsBuilt-in hidden charqesSurvey points (VP) and Fix points (FE’)-w—w—w- Warninq fencesDirection of enemv attackUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451(6) Location of the front lin and c 5tions.(7) Neighboring minefields, nline lanes, terrainfeatures, special features.The Germans believe that it is not necessaryto mark on the minefield drawing the locationof every single mine, if a partial drawing is sufficient.The German mine plans contain the detailsymbols shown in Figure 18, while simpletactical signs are sufficient for minefield maps.The Germans complete their mine plans atcompany or battalion command posts, based onsketches and data compiled while the field isbeing laid out. They make five copies of all mineplans and distribute them as follows ‘ : One forengineer company lvhich is in charge of the minefield; two for division; one for army; one forcentral file in Dessau-Rosslau.Changes in the minefield are recorded on theback of the mine plan. After three changes anew mine plan is drawn.A mine sketch is a simplified mine plan usedto transmit information on a min&ld as rapidlyas possible. It is not drawn to scale, and is drawnwhenever the tactical situation, bad weather, orother circumstances prevent the preparation ofmine plans.Front-line troops receive from the engineersinstructions or sketches showing the approximatelocation and extent of the minefield. Thesesketches, as a rule, tie not contain details on typesof mines or igniters, pattern, and survey points.Engineer units in charge of minefields keeprecords of changes in minefields under their careand keep these records with their units, whilemine plans are turned over to the relieving units.e. MINE KEPORTX Armies generally designatecertain areas for fields of scattered mines. In thiscase mine reports take the place of mine plans.Normally, mine reports contain:(1) Number of the order authorizing scatteringof mines.(2) Designation of units scattrring the mines.(3) Name and number of field containing scatteredmines.(4) Map location of scattered minefield.(5) Number of mints scattcrctb, subdivided bytypes and igniters.(6) Number and type of booby-trapped mints.kind of booby trap.IV—44

I MARCH 1945Section VIM.I. Town and Street FightingSPECIAL OPERATIONSIn attacking a town or village, the Germansemploy flanking and encircling tactics. They attemptto cut off water, electricity, gas, and otherutilities. While carrying out the flanking maneuver,they pin down the defenders with heavy artilleryfire and aerial bombardment. When it isnecessary to make a direct assault, the Germansconcentrate all available heavy weapons, includingartillery and air units, on one target. They favoras targets for their massed fire the forward edgesof the community, especially detached groups ofbuildings and isolated houses. During the fireconcentration the infantry assembles and attacksthe objective immediately upon termination ofartillery fire. Tanks and assault guns accompanythe infantry, and with their fire immobilizeany new enemy forces which may appear. Theyalso support the infantry in sweeping away barricades,blasting passages through walls, andcrushing wire obstacles. Guns and mortars areused against concealed positions, and antitankguns cover side streets against possible flankingoperations. Machine guns engage snipers onrations.The immediate objective of the Germans is todivide the area occupied by the enemy. Theseareas then are isolated into as many smaller areasas possible, in order to deny the enemy freedomof movement.Another form of attack employed by the Germansis to drive through a community and establishgood positions beyond the town to block theretreat of the defender. Then they try to annihilatethe enemy within the community.The assaulting troops are divided into a numberof columns and make a series of coordinatedparallel attacks. Attacks from opposite directionsand conflicting angles are avoided, sincethey lead to confusion and to firing on friendlytroops. The columns are sub-divided into assaultand mop-up groups. Assault detachments of engineers,equipped with demolition equipment,flame throwers, and grenades, accompany the infantry.Where possible, the Germans blast holesthrough the walls of rows of buildings along theroute of advance in order to provide the infantrywith covered approaches. These passages affordprotection for bringing up supplies and evacuatingcasualties. Houses are cleared of defendersUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451by small-arms fire. Streets are avoided as muchas VIII . by the Germans who infiltrate simultaneouslythrough back yards and over roofs.They attempt to further the advance by seizinghigh buildings which offer dominating positionsand wide fields of fire.When compelled to advance through streets, theman e in u - files, one on each side ofthe thoroughfare. The left side is preferred asit is more advantageous for firing right-handedfrom doorways. Consideration is given to theproblem of fighting against defenders organizednot only in depth but in height. Consequentlyges men receive specific assignments to watchthe rooms, the various floors of buildings, andcellar windows. Side streets are immediatelyblocked, and at night searchlights are kept readyto illuminate roofs.As soon as a building is occupied, the Germansorganize it into a s?i-on~p~+nt. Windows andThey openings are cbn:iertetl into loopholes andembrasures, Ceiigrs and attics are occupied firstin an d for defense.Even buildings which have been completelyantitank are kept under constant observation toanking their reoccupation by the enemy. Fromo n buildings the Germans deliver continuofs.machine-gun and rifle fire with the object ofdenying the enemy the opportunity to occupyThes e positions.Underground corridors and sewers, which providearea s cover for defenders, are attackedwith determination. When immediate clearanceor movement. is not possible, the entrances areG e r - blasted, or guarded.Aware that their tanks and assault guns arevulnerable to attacks by tank-hunting units, theGermans assign infantry to protect them. Barricadesand obstacles arc cleared by infantry andengineers. All able-bodied civilians, regardlessor dinated are summoned to clear ‘the streets ofdebris.When a section of a town is occupied, the Germansclose up all side streets leading from theoccupied ault block all exits of houses, and thenen- a house-to-house search with details assignedto special tasks, such as mopping up roofs,in- basements, courtyards, and staircases.2. Attack on Fortified PositionsThe Germans realize the difficulty of attackinga strongly fortified enemy position and preparesuch an attack well in advance of the actual operation.Before attacking a large and intricatelyIV—45

1 MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451fortified position covering a large area—a classicalexample was the assault on the Belgian FortressEben Emael—the Germans attempt to secure,in addition to information obtained throughnormal reconnaissance, its exact plan by the employmentof agents and fifth columnists. Whentime permits, they construct a duplicate of thefortification on similar terrain well in the interiorof Germany, as they did with Eben Emael. Inbuilding such installations for intensive rehearsaltraining of specially-organized combat teams, theGermans spare neither labor nor expense. Thesespecial combat teams usually consist of combatengineers, reinforced by infantry, antitank, andchemical warfare units.The attack on the fortress usually is precededby an intensive dive-bomber bombardment andlong-range heavy-artillery fire. The purpose ofthese bombardments is to destroy obstacles andminefields, and to create bomb craters which notonly provide cover for assaulting troops but alsomay be converted into firing positions. Oftenparatroopers land in close proximity to the fortificationjust prior to the assault, immediately establishingradio communication with the combatteamheadquarters.The climactic phase of the operation is the assault.Its primary objective is to get the engineersforward to certain selected works. Duringthe approach, and until the engineers reach thefortifications, the artillery delivers fire of maximumintensity. Antitank guns lay direct fireagainst the embrasures, and chemical-warfareunits employ smoke to blind forts and adjacentsupporting works. The infantry covers the embrasureswith rifle and machine-gun fire andremains in readiness to move forward and consolidateany success the engineers may gain. Engineerscrawl forward, utilizing shell holes forcover. They. are equipped with hang grenades,blocks of TNT, and submachine guns. Somegroups use bangalore torpedoes, some polecharges,while still others are armed with heavyflame throwers. With TNT and pole charges,they attempt to demolish systematically the weakerworks, such as embrasures, ports, turrets,joints, and doors.3. Combat in WoodsWhen attacking in woods, the Germans usuallydivide the area into company sectors. The Germansstress constant reconnaissance to discoverthe most weakly manned enemy position. ThisIV—46reconnaissance is carried out. even though companystrength becomes tcmpor;lrily retlucctl. Rcconnaissancepatrol5 usually niove clockwise fromtheir original position. The company commanderreviews the reconnaissance reports in detail withhis platoon and section leads-1-s;.The company usually deploys in wedge formationwhen advancing. ln ortlcr to achieve surprise,the Germans often leave the roads andadvance cross-country.As soon as the point of the wedge of the companyis in sight of the enemy, the Germans creepforward to close-combat range, always keepingcontact with adjacent and supporting units. Thecompany then storms the enemy's position, usingthe greatest possible number of hand grenades,pole charges, and close-combat weapons. Theadvance elements attempt to break into the hostileposition as deeply as possible, the body of thewedge widening the pencration on both sides.The company commander then decides whether toroll up the enemy position on the more importantflank or to hold the ground until reinforcementsarrive before continuing the attack.Each platoon details at least one observer,armed with an automatic weapon, to neutralizeenemy treetop snipers. The (Germans believe thatbursts of fire. rather than single shots, are necessaryto deal effectively with such snipers.The Germans consider fighting in wooded areasas the primary task of riflernell and machine gunners,since the employment of heavy-supportweapons often is iml~0ssible. The Germans occasionallydismount heavy machine guns and usethem as light machine guns. Antitank guns ofsmall caliber and light infantry howitzers sometimesare brought forward manually, and whenindirect fire is not possible they engage targetsdirectly. Light mortars are employed individually.From Finnish troops, the Germans learned asuccessful method of using mortars in woods.The mortar observers, accompanied by a telephoneoperator, move with the advanced element.The line back to the mortar crew is exactly 200yards long. One man is detailed to see that theline does not get hung on the way and as far aspossible runs in a straight line. When the advancedelement contacts the enemy, the observerjudges the distance from himself to the targetand adds the 200 yards to the mortar range.Bracketing of fire for adjustment is consideredtoo dangerous because of the close proximity offriend and foe.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451When the Germans leave a woods or have tocross a large clearing within the wooded area,the troops work themselves close to the edge ofthe woods. Then all the men leave the woodssimultaneously, rushing at least 100 yards beforeseeking cover.4. Combat in Mountainsa. GENERAL. The German principles of combatin mountain areas correspond in general tothose employed on level terrain. The peculiaritiesof mountain terrain, such as limited routes,extreme weather conditions, and difficult communications,necessitate additional considerations inthe tactics employed. The greatest differencesoccur in the higher mountains, where the Germansutilize specially trained mountain troops,which include the renowned Tyrolean and Bavarianmountaineers.The Germans emphasize that all operationswill be of longer duration in mountainous countrythan in lowlands, and therefore make properallowance for the factors of time and space. Forevery 330 yards ascent or 550 yards descent theyadd 1 hour to the time estimate for covering agiven distance on the map. Movements, command,and supply in mountain areas representsources of difficulty, according to the Germans.b. TACTICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MOUNTAINWARFARE. The Germans divide their units intonumerous marching groups, which normally consistof a reinforced infantry company, an artillerybattery, and an engineer platoon. In thismanner the Germans counteract the danger ofambush, since each group is able to fight independently.The Germans locate their engineerunits well forward with the advance guard sothat they may assist in road repairs. The Germansrealize that small enemy forces can retardthe advance of a whole column and therefore theyhave single guns sited well forward. They alsoorganize stationary and mobile patrols for flankprotection.The skill and leadership of junior commandersare severely tested in mountain warfare, as forcesgenerally are split into small groups, the efficientcommand of which requires a high standard oftraining and discipline. Columns often are separatedby large areas and impassable country, andsince lateral communication is often very difficult,command of deployed units becomes much morecomplicated than over level terrain.Normally supplies arc organized in two echelons,the mou;ltain and valley echelon.The Germans make extensive use of high-trajectorytveapons in mountain fighting, althoughantitank g-uns and heavy machine guns are usedfor covering road blocks. The effectiveness ofthe mountain artillery tl~pentls on carefully selectedobservation posts \vhich are in communicationwith the single gun positions.Radio is the primary means of communication,since the laying of telephone wire is not consideredfeasible.c. ROU T E S , Attacks across mountainsare made to protect the flanks of the mainattack. to work around the enemy rear, or toprovide flanking fire for the main attack. TheGermans attempt to seize commanding heightsand mountain passes.The Germans select their assembly areas asclose to the enemy as possible to make possiblea short assault. Supporting weapons are attachedto companies, and where feasible, to platoons.In defense, the Germans organize their advancepositions on the for\vartl slope, while the mainbattle position with heavy-support weapons islocated on the reverse slope. The greater part ofa unit often is held in reserve. This necessitatesthe organization of rclativcly narrow sectors,which, however, results in an organization ofground favorable for counterattacks.5. Winter WarfareMany of the techniques of German winter warfarewere developed from those of the mountaintroops, which were adapted easily to conditionsof extreme cold.Ski patrols are the chief means of reconnaissancein snow-covered terrain. As a rule, thestrength of the patrol is a squad, reinforced byinfantry soldiers traincLt1 as engineers, artillerya l s o and a comtll~ulicatioll detachment. Ina n k to normal reconnaissance missions,patrols obtain information as to the depth of thesnow, load capacity of ice surfaces, and dangerof avalanches. These ski patrols normally blazetrails by marking trees or rocks and by erectingpoles or flags. Stakes are used to indicate theextremities of roads.Under winter conditions, German units keepsupport weapons and artillery well forward whileon the march. Their antitank weapons are distributedthroughout the entire column. SkiIV—47

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSZFIED TM-E 30-451Outpost with•Passage for patrols .'Jliver ice ^.controlled mines-Bunker for"*' .&p-mmmortar '•. * Corduroy road•-•sf->r ' ' '.Swamp —Hidden antipersonnelxEmbrasuredemplacementRoofedemplacementMachine-gunemplacementrj^ Emplaced’ heavyST machine gunEmplacedantitank gunMortarStone-roofedbunkerStone-roofed andstone-walled bunker, AntipersonnelFfZ.l minefield and gap) in minefieldCamouflage screenBunkers fori81-mm mortars%..ConcertinaA... "Figure 23.—-Typical Gernlan zvirder positiofz along a river ilt k’ardia.iobservation postfor infantry mortarsIV—48

I MARCH 1945troops are organized to guard the flanks. Sleighsare added for the transport of weaeons and supplies.The Germans assign to trail units the task ofcutting tracks for the formations that follow.The strength of the trail unit of a company isone or two squads; that of a battalion up to twoplatoons. In difficult terrain their strength maybe doubled. Trail units are divided into a numberof trail detachments consisting of six to tenmen, echeloned behind the first of the trail units.The march formation of ski troops is generallysingle file; usually parallel trails are used to reducethe length of the column.In winter warfare, attacks with limited objectivesare the rule. The Germans attempt whereverpossible to combine frontal and flank attacksunder conditions of extreme cold and snow.They employ support weapons as far forward aspracticable. Attacks often are made by skitroops; because of the difficulty of transportingartillery, ski troops frequently have to dispensewith artillery support. For this reason the Germansconsider it all the more necessary to concentrateheavy and light infantry weapons atpoints of main effort and to coordinate high andflat trajectory weapons. When pack howitzersare available, they can be dismantled and broughtforward on sledges. Assault guns can effectivelysupport ski troops in snow under 16 inches deep.They either accompany the attack as far as roadconditions allow or move into positions at effectiverange, not exceeding 3,500 yards, on speciallycleared paths away from roads. They occupytheir positions just before the attack. As a ruleattached assault guns are employed in platoonand company strength; single commitment isavoided. Tank units are attached only in exceptionalcircumstances.Organization of a defensive position in deepsnow or on frozen ground takes considerable time,for it is necessary to move weapons into position,lay out foot paths and roads, and build strongoutposts and strongpoints with all-around defense.Camouflage is particularly stressed under suchconditions. Since normal units used as reservesin deep snow have only limited mobility, the Germansemploy ski troops for reserves whereverpossible. These ski units are used for immediatecounterattacks which are directed, where possible,against the flank of the attacking enemy. TheGermans also use the ski troops as raiding partiesto harass the enemy's front and rear.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4516. Partisan Warfarea. GENERAL. In order to understand Germananti-partisan measures, it is necessary to discussbriefly the characteristics of Allied partisan organizationsand their fighting techniques. Thefollowing discussion is based entirely on officialGerman sources. The principles involved maybe accepted by the Germans and find their wayinto actual practice in the near future.b. TASKS OF PARTISAN WARFARE. The Germansconsider that the strategic mission of theAllied partisans was to inflict maximum injuryon the German Armies of Occupation. Meansemployed to accomplish this task were as follows:Raids on individual drivers, resting places,troop and supply trains, headquarters, airfields,and ammunition and supply dumps.Demolition of briclgcs, roads, and railwaytracks.sk i of wire communications and railwaysystems.Destruction of industrial installations andcrops.Terrorization of collaborators.Undermining the morale of locally recruitedauxiliary troops.c. ORGAICIZATION OF PARTISANS. (1) General.Allied partisan forces were organized partly priorto German occupation and partly during the occupationwhen dispersed army personnel andcivilians rallied around a common leader. TheGermans list the following elements as sourcesfor the recruitment of Allied partisan units:Remnants of Allied units which escaped destructionduring military operations.Individual stragglers.Smaller units or individual members of Alliedforces who infiltrated through the German lines.Allied parachutists.Escaped prisoners of war.Deserters from locally recruited auxiliary cervices.buil d volunteers.l-around civilians.WO~ICI~, who may lx employed either as combatantsor auxiliaries in the supply, medical, orsignal services.(2) Russian partisan zrnits. The Germansoutline the composition of Russian partisan unitsas follows:Diversion groups of three to tc’n men,Combat units of 75 to 100 men, divided intoIV—49

1 MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451two or three companies, each of two or threeplatoons.Battalions.Regiments, consisting of several battalions.Brigades of several hundred men.Units of several thousand men, of varyingcomposition and fighting value.Divisional headquarters in command of operationalgroups.Corps headquarters controlling a certain numberof brigades or regiments.Scouting and reconnaissance detachments.Higher intelligence headquarters.In addition the 'Russians had signal organizationsand special formations for demolition worksand bridging, mounted detachments, and in somecases even artillery and antitank guns. A specialground organization was set up to serve the airforces which supplied the partisans.(3) French fartisalz units. The compositionof the French partisan forces, according to theGermans, is:The squad consisted of four or five men.The platoon consisted of approximately 301e11.The company had approximately 100 men.A battalion consisted of three or four companies.(4) Wccrpons. The weapons of the partisansincluded rifles, light machine guns, light mortars,pistols, machine pistols, hancl grenades, explosivesand incendiary material. Battle units also hadheavy machine guns, heavy mortars, and guns.(5) Unif00n.r. Partisans had no standarduniform. They WOW civilian dress and the mostdiverse uniforms of their own and enemy forces.Stocks of uniforms were maintained by raidingGerman supply depots.(6) Ca9np.s. The partisans located their campingareas in inaccessible terrain such as denseforests, marshes, wooded mountains, and caves.The camps usually were fortified with field works,dugouts, tree platforms, and minefields. Normallya number of camps were set up in adjacentareas with alternate camp sites prepared. Thecamps were complete \vith dumps, slaughteringfacilities, bakeries, dressing stations, and weaponrepair shops. These camps were well guarded,the personnel of the guard being composed ofpartisans or of voluntecbrs from nearby co1llI1lunities.d. PARTISAN TACTICS. (1) Gcncral. HigherIV—50headquarters would issue directives of a generalnature, and the leader of the smaller detachmentswould determine the method of execution. Inaccordance with their strategic function, partisansalmost always avoided pitched battles. If trappedand forced to fight, they would follow differentcourses according to their strength. Large bandswould fight it out, whereas smaller units endeavoredto disperse by small groups, infiltratingthrough the lines of the attackers or disguisingthemselves as harmless and peaceful civilians.Defensively, partisans fought with determination,even ferocity, from behind well fortified andcamouflaged positions, allowing the attackers toapproach to close range, and then delivering concentratedsurprise fire. In Warsaw, Polish partisansfought in building areas for weeks withmuch skill, inflicting considerable losses on theGermans.(2) Fighting methods. The partisans carriedout guerrilla operations by conducting surpriseraids against headquarters, camps, and weapondepots of the occupation army or by ambushingmilitary transportation fadiliiies, columns, orc011v0ys.When raiding columns, the partisans constructedobstacles along the route and then destroyedthe first and last vehicle of the column. Railwaytrains were destroyed by exploding the roadbedor removing trackage. Troops tryirg to escapefrom trucks or trains were taken under fire. Beforean attack partisans usually destroyed all telephonecommunications.Partisan bands often changed their field ofoperations in order to carry out a given task, tosecure supplies, or to evade discovery and preventencirclement. Strict discipline on the march wasmaintained. Marches were generally at night, byroutes known only to the local population. Partisanbands have marched 40 to 45 miles daily.A common ruse was to give the appearance ofgreater strength by disseminating false informationconcerning partisan strength and armament.Partisans frequently used military uniforms ofthe occupation army for purposes of reconnaissanceand requisitioning.For successful operation the partisans neededsecret agents who could be found in almost everyvillage. The intelligence service of the partisans,of necessity, employed large numbers of womenand children. In addition to collecting information,they were used as messengers between variouspartisan groups. (Local civilian populations

I MARCH 1945usually were summoned to give assistance to thepartisans.)e. GERMAN ANTI-PARTISAN MEASURES. (1)General. The Germans divide the measures tobe adopted against partisans into offensive actionand passive defense measures. Both constitutespecialized types of activity, brought aljout by theJlarticular methods employed by the opponent.Since the partisans are inferior in armament,regular troops are inclined to underrate them andto act without due care and precaution. Accordingto German doctrine, dealing with partisansdemands increased vigilance, boldness, and agin in order to meet their extraordinarycunning and cruelty. In addition, the Germansconsidered that special training was necessary fortheir own troops in order to overcome difficulttypes of terrain such as woods, marshes. mountains,and built-up areas as well as for fightingat night or under winter conditions. Experiencetaught the Germans that the success of their antipartisanmeasures depended on proper coordinationbetween the German Armed Forces, SS,police, and the civil administration, ignoring,when necessary, territorial boundaries.(2) Offensive, action. The Germans centralizedthe command and control of their anti-partisanmeasures and made arrangements in regardto the fields oi responsibility between the supremecommand of the armed forces, the •S'.S"' Reichsfiihrerand the Chief of Police. While in 19421943 the responsibility for the organization anddirection of tnese measures rested with the supremecommand in operational areas and withthe SS Reichsfiihrer in the so-called Rcichskommissariat, the latter, upon acquiring increasedpowers, assumed complete responsibility.Subordinate to the SS R&lzsfiihrcr were theChief in Command of Anti-partisan Formations(Chef der Balldenkiilllpfvc,rbarrnc) and the seniorSS and police commanders, Lmcler whose commandArmy and Air Force units occasionally areattached.All German troops and, in emergency, civilianestablishments were prepared to engage partisans.The Germans employed the following army unitsin combat against partisans: divisions, independenttask forces, cavalry units, motorized units,armored trains, service troops, emergency units,and locally recruited units. In addition to theseorganizations, the Germans employed Navy andAir Force s as well as SS and police formations,including the security service (Sicherheits-UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451dicmt) and Secret Field Police (Gelz&c Fcldpolkri).The Germans emlhasizerl the equipping oftheir anti-J’artisan miits with easily transportableand quick-firing wtal)ons, such as small arms,machine pistols. automatic rifles, rifles with telescopicsights, light and heavy machine guns, lightand medium antitank guns, light infantry guns,light antiaircraft guns, and light flame throwers.Heavier artillery, antitank and antiaircaft guns,tanks, and armored cars, although they effectivelystrengthened the forces, could not be employed inall situations and terrain.Clothing and equipage were designed to enablethe unit to operate in all types of terrain andunder all weather conditions.The Germans realized the necessity of intensiveintelligence work for successful anti-partisanmeasures. Higher commanders kept situationmaps based on information concerning the partisanstransmitted by all headquarters and unitsof the armed forces, and by civilian establishments.Systematic observations were made bysecurity branches, such as the security service,the secret field police, and the military intelligence(Abwchr) ; information was disseminated andexchanged by adjacent establishments.To provide all the necessary data for the tacticalemployment of anti-partisan forces, the Germansconducted intensive reconnaissance precedingtheir operations. This was carried out by collaborators,by mobile J)atrols. or by reconnaissanceaircraft. Collaborators were the only means ofreconnaissance employed when the projected operationhad to he kept absolutely secret. Theinterrogation of prisoners was considered one ofthe &&at , of information. The Germanstherefore abandoned their original practice ofshooting captured partisans on the spot.When the Germans had adequate forces availablethey attempted to encircle and annihilate partisanunits. The planning for this operatiqn includedthe determination of the ground to be encircled,usually limited to the area actually knownto be held by partisans. The assembly area waswell removed from the areas to he encircled andwas occupied in SUCJI a manner that the offensiveintention was not disclosed. All forces takingpart in the operation moved from the assemblyarea so that they reached the encircling lines atthe same time. Lines were chosen which couldbe defended easily, such as lines of hills or forestpaths across the direction of the advance.IV—5I

I MARCH 1945The Germans normally kept sufficient local andmobile reserves armed with heavy support weapons.The consolidation of the encircling linewas considered decisive for the outcome of theoperation, because partisan fighting patrols testedthe German lines with the pbject of breaking outthrough weak spots. The consolidation of theencircling line followed the usual principles fordefense, such as disposing forward battle outposts,drawing up fire plans for light and heavysupport weapons, fortifying strongpoints for allarounddefense, and keeping mobile reserves inreadiness. The precise method by which the encircledpartisans were annihilated depended onthe forces the Germans had available, on the terrain,and on the reaction of the trapped unit.One method employed was the gradual compressingof the encircled pocket, possible only inrestricted areas, because in large areas the encirclingforces could not advance at the same rate,thus creating gaps through which partisans couldescape. Another method employed was to exertpressure from one side of the pocket while thetroops on the opposite side confined themselves todefense. This method was used when the partisansheld ground easy to defend, such as a rivercourse, a ridge of hills, or edges of woods. TheGermans also utilized powerful wedges and splitup the defense pocket into several smaller pocketswhich were mopped up separately. Anothermethod was to attack from the encircling line bystrong assault groups formed from reserves, incases where battle reconnaissance indicated thatthe partisans intended to defend their center position.When time and forces for an encirclement werenot available, the Germans attempted to defeatpartisan bands by surprise attacks, intending topursue and wipe out single detached groups.This method proved to be of value where a partisanformation had not been able to consolidateits position. The German actions therefore weredependent on the methods adopted by the partisans.When they committed their forces for battle,the German attack was carried out systematicallywith concentrated forces and fire. Whenthe partisans attempted to avoid contact, the Germanspursued them frontally, while other unitscarried out enveloping movements. When thepartisan formation dissolved, however, the Germanshad to undertake reconnaissance to locatetheir new assembly area before a new action couldbegin. The primary target in such actions wasIV—52UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451the leader of the partisans, ant1 the Germans USUallyplaced a premium on the head of the leaderto encourage his capture or death.The Germans employed large numbers of heavysupport weapons, tanks, assault guns, self-propelledantitank guns and heavy howitzers, whenfighting the partisans in communities, and concentratedall available heavy jvcapons against asingle objective. The tactics employed followedthe German combat methods for street fightingand combat in towns.The Germans also employed combat patrolsagainst the partisans, copying the latter's methodswith the object of harassing the bands and hinderingtheir assembly and suIq$-. sireas whichwere used regularly by the partisans for foodrequisitioning, or which they crossed on raids orsabotage expeditions, offered good opportunitiesfor the deployment of Gernlan combat patrols.These patrols consisted of hand-picked, tough,well trained "Partisan Hunters" of platoon tocompany strength. They oitcn wore civilianclothes or partisan uniforms.(3) Protection ~IZ~LISZITPS. Offensive anti-partisanoperations were supplemented by vigilantprotective measures designed to safeguard troops;road, rail, and waterway communications andtraffic; industrial, administrative, and signal installations; and growing crops and forest. preserves.The Germans designated the security of troopsas a command responsibility. As a rule the Germansdid not billet units of less then companystrength in lonely districts. All billets and campswere organized for all-arountl defense, and allguard rooms were made into strongpoints. Mapsshowing the local partisan situation were consultedbefore the march.To protect railway installations the Germansorganized special protection forces whose taskincluded patrolling in addition to the protection ofcommunication centers. Strongpoints were constructedinside all installations and often alongthe tracks.The Germans also organizctl special forces forthe protection of roads and waterways. Theseforces, "Sichcvzt~zgstvztppclz", were supplementedby military police detachments on the roads andwater police on the waterways.The ruthless methods employed by the Germansto maintain law and order are too wellknown to be discussed in this book. From thekilling of individual suspects to the wholesale

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45Islaughter of whole communities and the burningof villages there is one long line of Germanatrocities and brutality.f. GERMAN PREPARATION FOR PARTISAN I~'ARFARE. Beyond doubt the Germans prepared andare still preparing fanatical members of theNational Socialist Party, SS, and armed forcesfor partisan activities as the territory occupied bythe Allies increases. One of Heinrich Himmler'smain duties as commander-in-chief of the HomeArmy is supervising the establishment of partisanorganizations and stay-behind agents in areasabout to be occupied by the Allies. The Germanshave built up large stores of ammunition andsupplies, particularly in the mountainous areas ofthe country, and have established at various localitiestraining centers for future German SS Partisans.Women are included in this training program.As to the methods which the Germans aremost likely to employ, no definite information canbe revealed at this time. However, it is recommendedthat a study of the Allied partisan combatmethods be made to obtain an approximateconception of possible German partisan activities.7. Anti-Airborne OperationsThe Germans consider the use of mines andwire obstacles particularly effective against enemyairborne operations. They block landingfields and areas where landings might be madewith S-mines, stakes, ditches, piled earth, stone,and wood, nondescript vehicles without wheels,and other barricades. They also construct minefieldsand clun~n~y minefields.For the protection of important installationsagainst airborne attack, the Germans organize anall-around defense, giring particular attention tocovering avenues of approach with machine guns.Observation posts arc set up on high points, suchas church towers and terrain features to give earlywarning of hostile landings. Such posts are Iocatedalso in rear areas, and are especially importantin thinly populated localities, since wirecommunications are particular targets of enemyairborne troops. Special signals by church bells,drums, or bugles arc arranged for alarming theGerman mobile reserve units. These units, speciallyorganized for the task of counteracting enemyairborne invasions and partisan activitiesusually consist of motorized troops with machineguns and antitank guns mounted on their vehicles.Although the Germans consider it an error to delayin committing these units, they stress that careshould be used to avoid enemy deceptive maneuverssuch as the dropping of dummy parachutists.The Germans usually withhold rifle fire untildescc’nding 1)aracliutists are at close range, usingmachine-gun fire at greater distance. They believethat fire is most effective immediately uponthe landing of the hostile force, before a consolidationof position has been made. Enemy transportplanes are considered particularly good targetssince they must reduce speed just prior tothe jump of the troops.The Germans appreciate the importance of immediateaction against airborne troops and whenno alternative is possible they will commit inferiorforces to coiiilx~t the hostile aerial itivasion,hoping to delay the attack until reserves can bebrought up.IV—53

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDCHAPTER VFORTIFICATIONS AND DEFENSESSection I.I 0 Economy of ForceDOCTRINE OF FORTIFICATIONSThe Germans regard economy- of force as a funtlamcnlalprinciple in designing fortifications. Inconformity with this view, they employ defense\I-orks to permit a relatively smaller force to defenda line than otherwise would be required.German troops are taught that fortifications existnot for their personal safety but to enable them tofight more effectively, although fortified works,especially those of reinforced concrete, naturallymake for a lower casualty rate. The German dottrineof offensive warfare therefore is not affcctedby the construction of strong systems ofdefense. Such systems in fact may be consideredto be offensive rather than defensive in purpose,i t make it possible to concentrate a relativelylarge proportion of the field forces for actionat any given point. In September 1939, the1Yestwall (Siegfried Line) l enabled the Germansto hold their Western ITront with approximately20 divis’sm, while employing 30 to 50 divisionsagainst Poland. These latter troops, in turn,could be concentrated on the northern and southernparts of the Polish border for a double envelopmentof the Polish forces, since the vulnerabIecentral sector due east of Berlin was protected bythe so-called Oder Quadrilateral, a zone of permanentdefense works constructed between 1935 and1939. Again, in May 1930, the 1Vestwall playedan important role—this time in the envelopmentof the I J ine-—Pfor, while the Frenchborder was held with relatively weak forces, thehulk of the Wchvn~~l~t wheeled through Belgiumand Luxembourg.2. Organization of Defensesa. PRINCIPLE OF DEPTH. The Germans believethat a fortified line should consist of .small works1 The Germans do not employ the term "Siegfried Line".c>rganizctl in great tlrl)tli. This principle, em1)odictl in the \Vestwall. is tlircctly opposed to thatof the I:rcnch Jla>:inot 1*inc, I\-hich was a continuous\\-a11 of ni;ini:~:otI~ fort:; with little, if any,depth. The German itlra is that a fortified lineshould not be cn~l~loyetl to presc’nt an unt-iclclingfront to an attacker, but rather to act as a shockabsorber and gradually slow down the advance.Then, when the attack has lost its momentum,counterattacks can be launch~l to destroy thepenetration brfore the attacker has reorganizedand consolidated his gains. The importance theGermans attach to counterattack is shown by theiact that they keep their best assault troops for&is purpose and man the concrete positions withinferior soldiers. Jn ortlcr to impede the enemy'sadvance as much as possible and t:) facilitate thecounterattack, troops manning the fortificationsare taught to continue tixhting even though theirpositions arc overrun.b. ZONES OF DEFKXSK. The Germans achievedepth in a fortified line by constructing successivezones of defense. In a typical segment of theWestwall, there arc three independent zones fromfront to rear.(1) The Forward Zone (~P”orfcldzo~~) containsfield fortifications including trenches, barbec!wire entanglements, machine-gun emplacements,and observation posts.(2) The Alain Defense Zone (Grosskanzpf.~~rc*) comprises fortific,tl structures such as pillhox~s,casematrs ant1 sh~ltrrs, and antitank obstaclescovered by antitank guns. In addition, thiszone has iiitcrnicdiate areas, front and rear, in\\.hich isolated works arc IAaced at critical pointsalong iiatural avenues 0i enemy approach.(3) The Rear IDefense Zone (RiirhwiirtigcZunc) is much the saiii~ as i2). hut is not a.5strong.c. STRENGTH. It is the German practice to provi&the \\eakc.st terrain with ihe strongest andy |

MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451most numerous defense works arranged in thegreatest depth. But the defended zone is everywheremade as strong as the available resourcespermit, and no terrain is left entirely without theprotecting fire of some permanent defense works.d. SITING OF DEFES S Eand casemates in a fortified line are so spaced asto provide interlocking fields of fire between adjacentworks, yet they are not so close togetherthat hostile artillery fire which misses one structurewill hit another.In view of the German theory as to the purposeof fortifications, the principle of "effectbefore cover" is applicable; that is, a wide fieldof fire is considered more important in siting aposition than cover or concealment. When possible,pillboxes r,nd casemates may be sited to permitboth frontal and flanking fire. This is particularlyimportant since German doctrine directsthat fortified positions be held even after the defensiveline is overrun by the enemy. The fireplan of field artillery may be coordinated with thebelts of fire from the fortifications so that concentrationscan be laid on the areas where fire coveragefrom the fortifications is relatively weak.c. FIELD WORKS. In accordance with Germandoctrine, concrete and steel pillboxes, and casematesare supplemented by extensive field fortificationsto lend flexibility and mobility to the defense,to engage the enemy before he gets closeenough to assault the main works, and to facilitatecounterattack. Such field works are interspersedliberally throughout the Westwall and includeminefields, .obstacles, fire trenches for infantryweapons, and open emplacements for fieldartillery. Although open gun emplacements areintended to give supporting fire to pillboxes andcasemates, they also can cover dead areas betweenthe main works.f. SHELTER. The German practice is to provideall troops with adequate shelter against weatherand hostile fire. Concrete pillboxes and casematesoften have accommodations for the gun crews,and open field works have underground sheltersor dugouts adjacent to the firing positions. In afortified line, underground shelters are providedin the rear of the battle zone for the reserves whoare assigned to the counterattack. This is in accordancewith the German doctrine that reservesshould be committed as a unit, fresh, and withouthaving had to sustain casualties or endure thestrain of hostile aerial and artillery bombardmentwhile waiting to attack. Personnel shelters enablev—2the reserves to be kept close to the front SO theycan begin the counterattack with minimum delay,g. COMMTSICATIOSS. German fortified workscommonly are linked together \vith communicationtrenches to facilitate relief of personnel, ammunitionsupply, and the care and evacuation of thwounded.In so:::e cases a group of defense worksis connected b\- a s~3;tem of tunnels. Signal communicationis provided by telephone cables buriedin the earth, and often t&phonc~ communicatebetween the outside and the inside of a structure.Speaking tubes are installed in many of the worksin case of failure of the telephone system.Section II. CHARACTERISTICS OFFORTIFICATIONSI. Principles of DesignThe basic considerations in the design of GermanfortificatioI:s are fire cfic c t . and concealment.Fire effect has first priority; naturalconcealment is used as much as possible by blendingpositions with the surrounding terrain. Personneland supply shelters, in the constructionof which fire effect need not be taken into consideration,are completely below ground level, oras low as the water-table level permits. In orderto present as small a target as possible to highanglefire and bombing, emplacements, pillboxes,and casemates are built no larger than necessaryto permit crews to operate their guns,2. Constructiona. GESERAL. All permanent, fortress-typeworks and many field works are of concrete reinforcedwith steel. Some field works, however,are of masom-y, brick, or tinlber. Steel also isused in concrete structures for beams, turrets,cupolas, gull shields, machine-gun loopholes, anddoors. These installations arc prefabricated andare assigned code or motlel Iilimbers. The concreteI\-arks themselves arc tlesignated by typenumber and are constructed from plans preparedin the -\rmy Ord:lance Office.b. THICKNESS OF CONCRETE. The usual thicknessof concrete walls and roofs is 6 feet 6 inches(2 meter:;) ; smaller thicknesses are found as arule only in the small field works. In casematesthe minimum thickness of the walls and roof is 6feet 6 inches, and generally increases commensuratelywith i !ie caliber of the gt::i.

I MARCH 1945 UNCLFt~SI~i:rTM-E 30-45IFigure 1—German three-way reinforcing rods and wooden forms ready for pimnntj m concrete.c. REINFORCEMENT OF CONCRETE. Most Germanconcrete fortifications are reinforced withsteel lnrs running in three tlinicns;.xls t:~ formcubes of 10- or 12-inch sides. The diameter ofthe bars, which are hooked at both ends, variesirom 34 inch to vg inch, the most common sizeIwiiig J i iilch.The roof over the interior compartments inI:lost slructur

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451GROUND LEVELAM MAGAZINEAND ENTRANCEfigure 2.—Kitfgst(md.GROUND LEVELFigure 3.—Tobruk for 50-mm. mortar.THICKNESS OFTURRET 3 4"GROUND LEVEL,V—4I;igurc 4.-—Purt,-ersicllzclkg.

I MARCH 1945b. TOBRUK 58c. The most common type ofTobruk is designated 58c by the Germans (seeFigure 2). It also is called a Ringstand froma rail that runs around the inside of the neck.The rail provides a track for rotating a machinegunmount, thus giving the gun a 360-degreetraverse. This type of Tobruk hasan ammunitionchamber, which also serves as an undergroundentrance.c. MORTAR EMPLACEMENT. A Tobruk usedas a mortar emplacement, such as Type 61a (seeFigure 3), is larger than a Ringstand and hasa concrete base in the center of the pit for mountingthe mortar. This type also is combined withan ammunition magazine.d. Panzerstcllung. The German also haveused a Tobruk as a base for a tank turret, usuallytaken from a French Renault 35 (see Figure4). Such an installation, called a Pmzerstellung,has a turret armed with an antitank gun and a machinegun coaxially mounted. The turret is boltedto a circular metal plate, which is rotated by handon wheels around a track in the top of the pitaffording a 360-degree arc of fire.4. Pillboxes and Casematesa. CONSTRUCTION. (1) General. Althoughthe Germans have a number of types of pillboxesand casemates, most infantry and artillery weaponsare installed in open rather than closed emplacements.In accordance with German doctrine,pillboxes and casemates are supported by openfield works. Pillboxes may have wall and roofthicknesses of as little as 2 feet; indeed, some ofthe earliest examples built on the Westwall hadthicknesses of only 1 foot. This was increased,however, until all pillboxes had at least the standardthickness of 6 feet 6 inches. Casemates, whichhouse guns of large caliber, have at least thestandard thickness of 6 feet 6 inches. Pillboxesand casemates usually have a stepped embrasureto prevent bullets from richocheting into the gunopening. In addition, a steel gun shield mayclose the opening.(2) Type 630 pillbox. Figure 5 illustrates anewer type of pillbox for the light antitank gun,Type 630, which has 6 feet 6 inches of concretein the roof, front wall, and side walls; and 6 feet4 inches in the rear wall. A machine gun firingthrough a loophole in the rear provides close defense,and a loophole in the interior wall at theUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451foot of the s:airs has an opening for a machinegun to keep attackers from entering the pillbox.A Tobruk pit is built into the front wall as an observationor machine-gun post.(3) Loral tlrsigr1.7. Some pillboxes are found\rhich do not conform to standard types and areapparently of local design. The Germans oftenconstruct a pillbox by mounting a steel turret onan open emplacement, and many pillboxes alongthe French coast were built by mounting a tankturret over a pit in the sea wall.(4) Type 685 cascrnate. Figure 6 illustratesa typical German casemate, Type 685, for the210-mm or 128~mm antiaircraft guns. Most cascmatesare of this siml)le design, consisting of agun room with recesses for ammunition, but somemay provide quarters for the gun crew. Thewalls and roof of Type 685 are 11 feet 5 inches(3.5 meters) thick. The embrasure permits atraverse of 60 degrees and an elevation of 45 dearmedA number of similar casemates (Types683, ted. 686, 688, 689, 690, 692, and 694) havecmbrasures for a traverse of 90 degrees or 120degrees. Additional protection and camouflage areafforded by banking the sides and by covering thetop with a Z-foot 6-inch layer of earth.(5) Type 677 cascnlatc. The Germans oftensite a casemate to deliver flanking fire. For thispurpose, a wing wall is provided on the side towardthe enemy to shieltl the embrasure from hostilefire, as in T\pe 677 for g-cm gun (Figure 7).The length of this wing wall depends on localo penTl le casemate can be built tofire to the right flank by constructing the wing onthe opposite wall.b. CAISOUFLAGE. ‘I‘O camouflage pillboxes andcasemates, earth is bankctl over the sides and top,the entrance in the rear is coverctl by a flat-top,and a camouflage net may l)e hung in front of theembrasure while the gun is not in action. Ill thecase of small pillboxes, branches may be placedover the embrasure. The Germans also concealpillboxes and casemates by enclosing them inwooden structures resembling ordinary houses.The guns then are fired through false doors orwindows, or a section of the wall over the embrasureis made to drop out of the way. Pillboxesalso are built into the cellars of existingbuildings. German instructions to troops insistthat no cover or concealment should obstruct thefield of fire of the gun.V—5

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.45142'-7"- G'-G -13-6"- 19-11" 6-6"MACHINE-GUNL03PHOLE_T _ANTITANK GUNWITH STEEi SHIELDMACHINE-6UNLOOPHOLEV—6Figure S.—Typical pillbox, Type 630 for light anfitauk gm.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451GROUND LEVELDRAINAGEAPRON-70-9"RECESS FOR120 SHELLS 210-MMOR150 ROUNDS 128-MM AA\ \ AMMUNITIONGUN ROOMDIRECTION OF ENEMYRECE FOR120 CHARGES 210-MMOR150 ROUNDS 128-MM AAl'igitrc 6.—Typical cascmc'c, Type' 6S5.TRENCH TO ENTRANCEv—7

I MARCH I 945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-6 30-45IRECESSESEACH FOR100 ROUNDS OFAMMUNITIONk- 3l'-2l;igurr 7 .—Typical casematc, Type 677.V—8

I MARCH 1945UNCL.A33!? TM-E 30-451h'iaurc ,V. F.mplaciiui a mobile .tied pillbox. 1 u/un 9.~-(.it'nmin ni.'hi/,- .,•/,.,•/ pillbox.^^fS^K^^S^^^^^^^^^-f^^M:figure 10.—Interior of mobile sleel pillbox shozuiny liyitre H.—l'ie w Ihroimi •'.•,

MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4SIc. MOBILE STEEL PILLBOX. The Germans alsohave a mobile steel pillbox (Figures 8, 9, 10, 11)which is armed with a machine gun and mannedby two men. The pillbox is constructed in twosections, a top half and a bottom half welded provgether. The top half contains the aperture, armament,air vents, and entrance door. Thickness ofthe armor varies from 5 inches at the apcrturcto 2 inches at the sides and top. The bottom stairis only M inch thick, but is entirely below groundlevel when the pillbox is in place.The total weight of the pillbox without sheltment or ammunition is 6,955 pounds. The aperture,which is seen on the left side in the photograph,is divided into two parts: the lower partfor the gun barrel; the upper for sighting. Themachine gun has an arc of fire of approximately45 degrees. The aperture cover is operated manuallyfrom the interior of the pillbox. Entry athrough a door, 20 inches by 23 inches, in the backof the upper half. The door can be seen hangingopen on the right in the photograph. There aretwo openings in the top for periscopes, one overeach seat.A blower operated by a pedal provides ventilation.The ventilation holes on both sides of thepillbox also enable an. axle to be passed throughthe pillbox. \Vhecls are fitted to the ends of thisaxle and the pillbox can then be towed upsidedown. When installed for use, the sides and Twoare banked to blend with the surroundings.5. Sheltersa. PERSOSNCL SHELTERS. (1) Purposes. TheGermans stress the desirability of adequate shelterfor all troops. Persomlel shelters are built inthe rear of a fortified line to house the reservesand also in individual defense positions for andtroops who man the installation. Some personnelshelters have accommodation ear t h , or20 men, but it is the usual German practice tohouse no more than ten men in one shelter. Apersonnel shelter also may serve as a headquarters,a command post, a medical station, or a signalcenter. Types provided for these purposes aresimilar in design and differ mainly in size andnumber of interior compartments.(2) Type 621 shelter, One of the most commonpersonnel shelters (Type 621, for one infantrysection) is illustrated in Figure 12. It isconstructed of reinforced concrete, with Ge rmansard wall and roof thickness of 6 feet 6 inches(2 meters). It is entirely underground, with tionV—IOearth covering of 1 loot over the roof. Seventeensteel I-beams, 13 feet 2 inches long, support theceiling over the interior compartment. Steelplates resting on the bottom flanges of the I-beamsprovide an all-steel ceiling. Shorter I-beams supportthe ceiling over the doors and entrance stairs.A camouflage flat-top is stretched over the trenchin the rear, which gives access to the entrancestairs, to conceal it from air observation. Tosecure one side of the flat-top, a row of hooksis cast into the roof along the rear side of theshelter. A Tobruk pit is built o one f thewings in the rear for observation. Although theshelter accommodates only ten men, two entrancesare provided to enable the section to deploy rapidlywhen they are to man their positions nearbyor launch a counterattack. Each of the entrancestairs is covered by a machine gun firing througha loophole in the interior wall at the foot of thestairs. Both entrances converge into a gas lock,sealed by three steel doors each about 1 inch thick.All doors open out. To make thi c k . grenade-proof,the vertical shaft is continued below_the stovepipe and curved outward into the spaceused for the emergency exit. A grenade droppedinto the chimney thus will not enter the shelter butwill fall outside the sidewall and explode harmlessly.There are four ventilation shafts openinginto the rear wall between the entrance stairs.Two of these are dummies to mislead attackerswho try to introduce smoke into the ventilating.system to drive out the occupants. The bloweris driven by an electric motor, but the Germansusually make provision for manual operation aswell, in case of power failure. To communicatewith the interior of the shelter, there is a telephoneat the head of one of the entrance stairs,and both a telephone and a stairs , in theTobruk. A telephone cable, buried deep in theearth, leads to neighboring installations.(3) Modifications in design. Modificationsmay be made in the plans in order to adapt theshelter to the terrain; for example, the Tobrukmay be built into the other rear wing, or the emergencyexit may be installed in the opposite sidewall. Such changes are at the discretion of thelocal construction authorities. Some types of personnelshelters have a steel turret built into theroof for observation, and sometimes a machinegun is mounted in the Tobruk. However, theGermans insist that troops are not to fight fromshelters, but are to use them merely as protectionwhile not engaged in combat.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451TOBRUK PITFOR OBSERVATIONDOWNMACHINE-GUNLOOPHOLECOVERING STAIRS48'3"STEEL DOORSOPENING OUTMACHINE-GUNLOOPHOLECOVERING STAIRSGROUND LEVEL16'8"MACHINE-GUNLOOPHOLEFigure 12.—Typical personnel shelter, Type 621.V—II

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDTOBRUKPITENTRANCESTAIRS36 9DOUBLE STEELDOORS TO GUNCOMPARTMENTGROUNDSLEVELFigure 13.—Typicd antitad-gun shrlter, Type 619.RAMPv—12

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDMACHINE-GUNLOOPHOLE35'6MACHINE-GUNLOOPHOLEEYERGENCY EXIT•3 6'AA-GUNEMPLACEMENT5S".1I6'S"IV\ N•3'tMACHINE-GUNLOOPHOLEDIRECTION OF ENEMYFigure 14.—Typical emplacement and shelter, Type 1. 400.V—13

MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDMACHINE-GUNLOOPHOLEvb\CREWQUARTERS•

I MARCH 1945uNCI.A:TM-E 30-451b. .\NTn\\NK-crN SHKI.TERS,. The (lermansprovide a special shelter for antitank y'uns andihcir crews. Figure 13 shows a l_vpical antitank£\n\ shiclter, designated by the Germans as Type62'). Accommodation for the men is similar Inthat of other personnel shelters, hut there is aseparate compartment for the

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451c. COMBINED SHELTER AND EMPLACEMENT.I'igure 14 shows a personnel shelter, with an openemplacement on the roof, known as Type L 409("1," stands for Luftwaffe). This tyl)e will accommotlatenine men, ant1 its tl

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451the emplacement on the roof. For close defense,tllc,re arc two machine-gun loopl~ole~ covering the‘rc‘ar entrance: one in the exterior wall, and onein the interior wall at the foot of the stairs.'I ‘ llere arc quarters for t\vo officers and nine enlistedmen, but since this tloc3 not accommodateall the persomlel on duty at the ol)servation post,a personnel shelter for one section is built nearby.IGeld artillery observation posts in a permanenttlefense line are similar to personnel shelters, withtile addition of a steel cupola for the observer.7. ObstaclesThe German tactical use of obstacles differsfrom the U. S. Army in that they install themwithin the main battle positions. Obstacles arecovered by fire from concrete pillboxes and openemplacements. The Germans employ both fixedand nicnd~lc permanent ol~stacles, constructed forthe most part of steel, concrete, or both. Themost cninmnn types are tltisct-ihcd hclow.a. ANTITANK OBS'I AU.KS. (1) Dragon's teeth.A prominent f

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSlFlEDTM-E 30-451Figwe 20.—Road passing through Westwall dragon's /ccth. Note (right) r~p,-~c//r/~ for -IrtJriz,tt,/ul .~~~~~~l hrr-s ~11ic~rein be placed aeross the road as a block.V—18Figure 21.—Line of dragon's teeth of Westiwll.Note steel antitank barrier set at an anole m the road.

I MARCH 1945and rear, the Germans also use them singly asmovable blocks.(3) Cunrd-rail obstacle. Similar to the "FklllwtsC"’ is the curve-rail mtilank olxtnclc. \vhiclithe Germans used extensively along- the AYestwall.Ih e curved rail, which slopes upward to a steepangle at the rear, facts the c:wny, so tlmt tad snttcn3pling to clinil~ over the obstacle tip overlda\-al-d. It usually is iiiatlv in sections 6 feethigh. 3 feet witlc, and 10 feet lime.b. ROAD I {LOCKS. (1) Sled bars. A roadpassing through a barrier may be closed by horizc)nt;llstrvl l)ars al-r;lngctl succcssivelv higher iiirciiiforcctl concrete slots or Iy steel r-ails set uprightinto the road.(2) ?‘c~lrtrhrclra. TllC Gcrmnns also 1110C1 A R l ; r . l > - \ V l K L ( l | ; M . \ i l . U ( 1 ) A G e r double-aprou ti-nce is illustrated in Figure22. The fence is 4 t< 5 feet high, i 2 ) Knife rests.or dicfau.r de Inse, strung with barbed wire, canbe seen to the righ: ol the fence where the roadpasses through the oh-tacles. The Germans callknile rests "Spanish riders" and use them as roadblocks. German knife rests are about 4 feet highand have angle-iron or timb'T frames. (3) Concertinawire •' S-h'oIle i often is used bv the Germanseither in single-, double, or triple coils.Sometimes it is wired i• • concrete posts, fixed ontop of walls, and interwoven with double-apronfences or between coiiireie dragon's teeth. (4)The Germans also use an obstacle consisting ofIrip wires [Slolpcntra!:; i arranged about 30 feetin depth. The wire i- stiv:ched from 4 to 8inches above the ground on irregular rows ofwooden pickets. The iincrval between pickets inrows is 10 to 13 feet and between rows 7 to 10feet.bigure 22.—German double-apron barbed ivire. Note knife rcsls m the Inn l.-i/roiinil Crii/hti.v—19

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30151UNCLASSIFIEDCHAPTER VISUPPLY, EVACUATION, AND MOVEMENTSSection I.HIGHER ORGANIZATION OFSUPPLY1. Government Direction of ProductionEconomic production in Germany is highly centralizcdand under complete governmental control.The Ministry for Armament and War Production(Reichstninstcrium fur Rushing undKriegsprodulztion) under Albert Speer controlsproduction of war material and ammunition;the Xlinistry for Economic Affairs (Reichswirtschaftslllillisteriu111)controls all other industrialproduction; the Ministry for Food and Agriculture(IZciclzsllLilzistcri2111L fiir EmiihrungLaud~zuirtsclzaft) controls food production. Amongthem these three ministries control production ofthe supplies for the German Armed Forces and,within the limitations imposed upon Germany bythe insufficiency of her natural resources andthe effects of the Allied advances and bombings,they are able to gear the production to the needsof the war machine.2. Estimate of Needs and Placing of Orders.These are essentially General Staff functions,since they involve present and future operationsand capabilities. On the basis of High Conmanddirectives, the detailed estimates of thenumber or quantity of each article of supply arcworked out by the technical branches concerned;th y must be adjusted to the industrial, labor, andraw material potentialities of the nation.The three branches of the Armed Forces andthe Wajj-‘cn-SS establish their procurement policieson an interservice basis and coordinate theuse of railways, canals, and roads for militarxtraffic. In addition, for a number of particularI!critical items, the Armed Forces High Commandhas created special dcbpots which arc at ils esclusivcdisposal ( ~ rrfii!/Llllgsdc~otsj.Within the Armed Forces the lines of distinctionbetween the Armed Forces High Commandand the Army High Command are notalways clearly dra\\-n as far as procurement isconcerned. The Army being by far the largestbranch of service, the Army High Command(OKH) may in certain cases act for the ArmedForces High Command (0837). In addition,the Army procures a proportion of the materielused by the IVaficn-SS. The bulk of this materielis transferred to the lVa#el~-SS through Armychannels of supply and not through the systemof depots maintained by the SS High Command.mu!3. The ArmyThe Army High Command (OKH) has thedirect responsibility for a well functioning armysupply system. Its wartime supply functions aredivided into two tlistinct phases. The first phase,centering in the Zone of the Interior, is supervisctlby the Chief of Arm)' Equipment and Conmanderof the Replacement Army (Chef dcrNcercsriistzwg at/d IlcfclM~abcr dcs Ersatzl~ccrcs)who organizes the procurement of supplies; their storage in suitably placed depots, andope ration s home and field units. It ishis duty to interpret high command directives onan over-all t h e basis. He determines n-hatproportion of supplies is essential for USC bygarrison and training units, what amount canbe sent to the front, and which areas are in thebest position :o issue supplies. The second phase,the Field Army (I;rltlhccv) supply system, iscontrolled by the Chief of 1:ield Army Suppl>and Administration (Cclzcralquarti~nlzcistcr oriicn. Qu) ~410 administers the sending of requisitionsto depots established by the Chief of ArmyEquipment and the receipt, storage, and distributionof supplies in the field.VI—I

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Section II. SYSTEM OF SUPPLY WITHINGERMANYI. Production, Acceptance, and Distribution ofEquipment* and Ammunitiona. DESIGN AND DEVELOPNENT. This is primarilythe responsibility of the Army OrdnanceOffice (HeeYeSwaflCE~lu~lzt). In particular, itsWeapons and Equipment Manufacture Group(A~ntsgruppe fiir Industrielle Riistzc~~g) includesten sections dealing with the main categories ofequipment and known as armament sections oneto ten (Wu~enriistullgsabtcilungcll 1-10). TheOrdnance Office also has a Research Branch(Fovscl2.ulzgsabtaiZztllg) and a Development andTesting Branch (AmtsgvufiFe fiir EMwicklungmd Priifuxg). In addition, the Ordnance officercoordinates the activities of numerous army-ownedand semi-private research institutes and experimentalstations throughout the country. Sugges-Lions for design and development are also receivedfrom all the technical branches of the Army.b. ~‘RODUCTION. On the production side theMinistry for Armament and War Production has,through its regional Armament Inspcctorates, adecisive influence on the selection of firms, coordinationof armament orders with other b ylabor questions, and scheduling and supervisionof production.c. ACCEPTANCE. The testing of weapons,equipment, and ammunition, and their acceptanceat the armament factory is the responsibility ofthe Army Acceptance Organization (Hccvcsabnalz~~zewcse~z),which is a branch of the ArmyHigh Command/Army Ordnance Office (OK 11/Heereswa~cnuv&). There is one Acceptance Inspector(Abnahmeinspizie+zt) in each corps areawho acts through acceptance commissions locatedat the factories.d. DISTRIBUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND AMMUNITION TO ARM\- UNITS. lifter acceptance at thefactories, the flow of equipment and ammunitionto field and home units may take a number ofroutes:By way of equipment and ammunition depots.By way of equipment parks.Direct from the factory.Through SS depots.Through special L\rmed Forces High CommandIOKM’) depots.* The tel-m "ecluipment" refers to the group ot herterials handled by equipment depots and ectrlipment parks,in contrast to the individual equipment (Awriistung medMa~zws) and clothing handled hy clothing depots.vi—22. Main Army Equipment and Ammunition DepotOrganizationa. ORGANIZATION. The agencies responsiblefor most of the storage, issue, and repair of equipmentand for the storage, issue, and salvaging ofammunition belong to a separate branch of theArmy, the Ordnance Branch (I'ddzcugivrscn).The branch is headed by the Chief Army OrdnanceOfficer (Fchhcugmcislcr), who worksthrough his staff, the Ordnance Inspectorate(Fcldzcuginspcktioit) in the General Army Office(Allgcmcincs Hccrcsamt). .From the OrdnanceInspectorate the chain of command leads throughthree regional commands, called Ordnance Groups(Fcldzcuggruppcu), with headquarters in Berlin,Kassel, and Munich, to the Ordnance Headquarters(Feldzcugkomniaiidos) which are at the levelof the corps areas but not affiliated with the latter.There is one Ordnance Headquarters in eachcorps area, where it controls a varying number ofequipment and ammunition depots. The OrdnanceHeadquarters is the lowest controllingagency for the storage and issue of equipment andammunition, and it is important to note that belowthis level equipment and ammunition are handledby two separate types of depots. The OrdnanceHeadquarters is designated by the number of thecorps area. It and the depots it controls are not,however, part of the corps area organization, althoughthe auditing of their books is done by theCorps Area Administration.Tn addition to the Ordnance Headquarters designatedby the corps area numbers, there existan Ordnance Headquarters XXX, which is incharge of a great number of subterranean ammunitiondepots in central Germany, and a specialTank Ordnance Headquarters i Panzcr-Fcldzcugkommando),created in 1943 in order to centralizethe supply of all types of armored fightingvehicles and their spare parts throughout Germany.b. EQUIPMENT DEPOTS. Army Equipment Depots(Hecrcsscngihntcr or HZa) and ArmyBranch Equipment Depots (Hccrcsncbenzcugamtcror HNZa), controlled by the Ordnance Headquarters,handle weapons, tanks, tank spare parts,motor transport, assault boats, radio apparatus,anti-gas equipment, bridge materials, special clothing,concrete mixers, and manuals, as well as manyother articles. They do not furnish ammunition,fuel, rations, clothing (other than special types),medical and veterinary equipment, horses, or mosttypes of individual equipment.

I MARCH I94SUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451ARMYHIGHCOMMAND(OKH)MINISTRYMINISTRYFORFORARMAMENTECONOMICAND WARAFFAIRSPRODUCTIONARMEDFORCESHIGHCOMMAND(OKW)SSHIGHCOMMANDCHIEFOFARMYEQUIPMENTARMYORDNANCEOFFICEFACTORIESCHIEFARMYORDNANCEOFFICERCORPSAREAADMINISTRATIONAMMUNITIONANDEQUIPMENTDEPOTSEQUIPMENTPARKSOKWDEPOTSTRAININGANDGARRISONUNITSiIFIELDARMYUNITSADMINISTRATIVE RELATIONSHIPSPHYSICAL FLOW OF EQUIPMENT AND AMMUNITION'••iFigure l.—Supply of eqsifiment and ammunition.VI—3

I MARCH 1945Although the depots normally handle ma greatvariety of items, they sometimes t oparticular types. For example, air reconnaissancehas revealed large concentrations of motor transportat the Chemnitz HZu and large artillerystores at the Berlin-Spandau HZa. It is known,however, that these centers also hold large storesof equipment which cannot be s t o r e s\Yhen depots specialize in only one type of air .ment, they have their specialti-s incorporated intotheir names. This group includes the Army TankEquipment Depot (~iccrcspa~~zer~c~lganlt orIZPZa) at Magdeburg-Kijnigsborn; the ArmyBranch Tank Equipment Depots (Heerespanscrn&en~ew$inztcvor HPNZa) at Frankfurt an derOder, Natimburg, Bielefeld, Creslau, Oppeln,Kassel, Xltengrabow, and Olmiitz; the Army SignalEquipment Depot (Hcercsaez~ga~~zt~zac~~~i~~te~zor E-IZaNachr) at Berlin-Schiineberg; and theArmy Branch Signal Equipment Depot (Hcercsncbcnzeugamtnachrichtenor HNZaNachr) atTYien-Strebersdorf (l’ienna).In addition to their storage functions, the HZaand HNZa adjust and test newly arrived materir:lsand repair damaged equipment. Several ofthe HNZa are engaged almost entirely in repairfunctions, and most equipment rep a i rordnance. signal, and engineer equipment servicingsections for inspecting newly manufacturedequipment and repairing damaged equipment.Specialization in items repaired may occur: thusthe tank equipment depots repair tanks and armoredvehitiles which have been so ar - damacedcthat. they cannot be repaired in the field.The equipment depots are staffed by officersand noncommissioned officers of the OrdnanceBranch who control the workers, usually civiliansor soldiers serving a prison sentence.-~\n Army Equipment Depot is divided into twoparts: the storage depot (Lager) and the workshop(JJ’e~fistn/t). The storage depot is subdividedin departments (Be&kc), each of whichspecializes in one type of equipment. Dependingon the type of equipment handled, the workshopwill have separate sections like an arms Depot s(IVaffen-Wcrkstatt), an optical instrumentsc-orkshop (Optischc-Wcrksiatt), etc.The Army Equipment Branch Depot is ma nized along the same lines as the Army t i o n .Depot.Associated with equipment depots Ne uArmed Forces depots attached the sto r a g eUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451manufacturers. The main function of these isto facilitate transfer of vehicles from factoriesto equilment depots.As the number of HZa is relatively limited andas they are perhaps the largest supply depots withinGermany, they have been heavily bombed byAllied air forces. Despite much bombe d byHZa have shown great recuperative powers. th eimportance of many IlZa, however, has diminished,while that of the IINZa has increasedthrough the dispersion of incre a the s e dsupply centers.Fist of known Army Equipment Depots(branch depots not included) :Corps Area Installation LocationI HZa KiJnigsberg11 HZa (liistrowII HZa StettinIII HZa Berlin-SnandauIII UZaWuhr Berlin-SchoncbergIV HZa ChemnitzIV II Za XamnlmiKV HZa UlmVI HZa UnnaVII HZa FrcilassingVI [ HZ a InprolstadtVII HZa MiinchenVIII HZ.ii BreslauVIII HZa BricgVIII HZa KotzenauIX HZa KasselX HZa Hamburg-GlindcXI HZa HannoverXI HZa MagdeburgXI HPZa 1Iagdeburi:KonigsbornXII IlZa Mainz-KastclXIII IlZa AmbergXVII HZa WelsXVII HZa WienXVIII II Za Hall (inTirol)XVIII II Za SalzburgXX IlZa GraudcnzXXI 11 Za Poscnc. AMMUXITIOX DEPOTS. Army AmmunitionDepots (Hccresmunitionsanstaltcn or HMa) andArmy Ammunition Branch Depots (Hecresmunitionsnebcnanstaltcnor HMKa) are the main Germancenters for the storage and issue of ammunition.Frequently they concentrate upon particulartypes of ammunition; for example, the HMaat Miinsterlager, Celle, Dessau, Augsburg, andNeu Ulm are probably principal centers for thestorage of chemical warfare ammunition.Vi

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451I : igurc 2.—MCSCIIHS MAIS HOC II'MF.ST /'/-.7'OV • II/.A)I'liotarra/'lied early in J°43 after a bombing. Chief features are four very hir

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451In addition to storing and issuing ammunition,the HMa and I1;lINn participate in its productionby assembling and filling shells and by manufacturingfuzes and other accessories.Like the equipment depots, the ammunitiondepots are staffed by personnel of the OrdnanceBranch. Employees include civilians, soldiers,prisoners of war, and large numbers of foreignlaborers. An HMa usually has the following departments:AdministrationManufacture (filling and packing of shells)Shipping >Personnel administrationMotor poolBecause of the large number of well distributedammunition depots, many of them uncleground,Allied air attacks have not interfered materiallywith their functioning. Eut the increased numberof foreign laborers employed by these depots undoubtedlyhas lowered their productivity.d. AREA OF DISTRIBUTION. Generally a depotis allocated a definite geographical distributionarea. The depot may be the exclusive Germandistributor of a particular item, or it may bemerely the exclusive distributor within an allottedarea. Thus the Ulm HZa distributes types ofengineer equipment to all areas, while it issuesCzech small arms to less than half of the corpsareas. In addition, a depot may be assigned to aparticular army for the supply of, materiel replacementsand the repair of its damaged materiel.3. Corps Area Equipment Park Organizationa. GENERAL. The corps area parks complementthe equipment depots in the handling ofmotor transport, engineer equipment, and anti-gasequipment, and form the principal centers forthe distribution of horses, veterinary equipment,and medical equipment. Requisitions for repairsreach the parks from both home and field units.Primarily, a park is responsible for servicing itsallotted area; usually it also is charged with thesupply and maintenance of designated units of theField Army.b. MOTOR TRANSPORT PARKS. The Home MotorTransport Parks (Heimatkraftfahrparke orJ1KP) received damaged or impounded vehiclessuch as motorcycles, trucks, and staff cars, but donot handle tanks and armored vehicles, or anynewly manufactured,vehicles. There are severalsuch parks in each corps arca, controlled by theHome Motor Maintenance District Headquarters(Nci777ntl:r-nftfalrrbrcivk) of the corps area.Most of the vehicles repaired belong to theWchrmacht and the 5"5"; but vehicles from semimilitaryand civilian agencies are also repaired.The HKP vary widely as to the number of vchiclesrepaired daily and the average number held.At Berlin, where there are three HKP, each ma;,hold as many as 1,000 vehicles and repair 30daily. Most HKP, however, hold 60 to 100 vehiclesand have a daily repair average of probablyless than ten vehicles. Since many of the vehiclesreceived are damaged beyond repair and mustbe scrapped or cannibalized, the daily repair averagesare not as inefficient as may appear uponinitial glance.A typical HKP includes a reception pointwhere vehicle defects are inspected, a large numberof workshops, and final inspection pointswhere vehicles are either dispatched to units orsent back for further repair. Frequently thereare branch administrative offices (Zzeleigstellen)and workshops located as far as 40 miles from theMain Office (Hauptstelle). The number of HKI’in a corps area varies greatly: at one time CorpsArea VI was known to have nine HKP, whileCorps Area V had only four.'Supplies of spare parts and tires are procuredfrom Central Spare Parts Depots (Ze~fralcrsnt~tcillagcror ZE‘L) and Tire Depots (Reifelzlaser)which are controlled by the HKP, or directfrom factories.c. MEDICAL PARKS. The Berlin Main MedicalPark (Hauptsanitiitsjark) and the CorpsArea Medical Parks (Wehrkreissanitatsparkc)—one per corps area—receive all types of surgicalapparatus, drugs, bandages, and dispensing equipmentfrom factories and hold them for distributionto hospitals within their corps areas and toMedical Collecting Parks (Salnrnclsanitiits~arke).The latter are subsidiaries of the Corps AreaMedical Parks and serve as collecting points formedical supplies to the field forces. In certaincases the Main Medical Park and Corps AreaMedical Parks may deliver their supplies direct tothe field forces.The Main Medical Park in Berlin occupies aspecial position as it holds critical drugs and hospitalsupplies for distribution to Corps AreaMedical Parks and Medical Collecting Parks. Inaddition it tests newly developed pharmaceuticalpreparations and medical equipment and furnishesthe Corps Area Rledical Parks with "standard"samples of medical cqnipment. The Main MedicalPark is subordinate to the Chief Army MediVI—6

IMARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451cal Inspector, and the Corps Area Medical Parksare subordinate to the Corps Area Surgeons;there is thus no chain of command leading fromthe Main Medical Park to the Corps Area MedicalParks.There is also a group of Medical Booty CollectingPoints (Sanitiitsbcutcsam~I2ClsteIlc~z) thatare centers for the collection of captured medicalequipment. This is sorted and tested prior toshipment to the medical parks for distribution.Although the medical parks participate in therepair of damaged medical equipment, it is verylikely that much of the recovery work is done bythe manufacturers.d. VETERINARY PARKS. Veterinary suppliesare procured through veterinary parks. The ArmyMain Veterinary Park (Hccr~sl~auptz~ctcritlir’rpark)is directly subordinate to the VeterinaryInspector. It is the central procurement agencyfor veterinary equipment. Upon orders from theVeterinary Inspector the Army Main VeterinaryPark will supply the Home Veterinary Parks(I~rilrrat~,c,trritliirpal-fir) with veterinary cquipmenteither directly or by ordering it for theseparks from commercial manufacturers. Horseshoeingequipment is always ordered from civilianfactories.The Home Vctcrinary I’arks, numbering onein each corps arcn, and tbc Army Main VeterinaryT'ark receive veterinary equipment such as shoeingequipment and veterinary medicines from themanufacturers and issue it to units and horsehospitals, besides repairing and salvaging damagedveterinary equipment received from units.e. HOKSE PARKS. Young horses purchased bythe Army are sent to Army Remount Depots(Ilrrrcsrcllzo~ztciilIlfcr) for their maintenance andtraining until they are suited for field use. Theyare then delivered direct to corps arca ridingschools, to home units, or to Home Horse Parks(Fl~~irrrat~fcrdc~a~~k~) which forward horses toField Army units.As the occupied territories formerly furnishedmost of the horse replacements for the GermanArmy, their loss will greatly aggravate the alread!noticeable animal shortage at a time when theGerman Army is becoming increasingly depentlcnton horse transportation.i. OTHER PARKS. A sizeable number of HomeI

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Zen) which are believed to be centers to whichreinforcements requiring refitting are routed beforetheir departure for the front. In addition,rations depots may store and issue clothing forcertain areas.c. AREA OF DISTRIBUTION. The HBA issuesclothing and individual equipment to units withinits assigned territorial area. Many HLiA are alsoresponsible for the supply of particular armiesin the field; to facilitate the transfer of clothingto field units, issues may be made to Army ClothinpDunws and Branch Dumps which in turnissue clothing and in.dividual equipment to fieldtinits.5. Rations Supply Organizationa. GENERAL. The German Army depends forits transportation to a large extent on liorscdrawnvehicles; forage is therefore considered tobe of equal importance to human rations, and thesupply of both is handled by the same agencies.In the follolving tlcscription of the supply organizationthe term rations includes forage aswell.b. PROCUREMENT ^ND ADMINISTRATION. Theover-all planning of rations and the laying downof policies for the procurement &d organizationof supplies is done for all branches of the ArmedForces at the Rations and Procurement Group(Amtsgrztppc Vupflcgwzg zmd Bcschafuug) ofthe Army High Command/Administration Office(Ok’H /Nccrcsvc7~~~aZtul2gsalnt). At the sametime the Rations and Procurement Group directsthe supply of rations to the Field Army and to theReplacement Army. Regional control of supply isexercised by Section C (Snclzgcbiet C) of theCorps Area Administration.Although all rations depots procure a proportionof their supplies direct from local producers,they clraw most of them frdm the Higher Rationscommercial channels and only bread and foragewere procured from the Army bakeries andrations depots, in wartime the supply of rationsfrom Army depots has become the rule. To fulfilthis task, the Higher Rations Stores or EVMwere formed at the outbreak of war from manyof the already existent Army Rations Main Depots(Hccrcsz'crpflegungshauptiiwtcr) or (HVHA).The most important type of rations depot isthe EVM. The EVM control Army RationsMain Depots (HVHA) which in turn controlArmy Rations Depots (Hccrcnrrpflcgungsamteror HVA) and Army Garrison Rations Depots(H ecrcsstand ortvcnvaltung VcrpflcgungsabteihinionAlthough the number of such installationsin a corps area varies, one corps area isknown to have two EVM, three HVHA, nineHVA and at least 12 Army n in epots. There are probably 40 EVM in Germany,36 of which arc listed below.The echelon of the depot generally determinesits size and stock. Each EA r M is expected tomaintain stock sufficient for one month's rationsfor 300.000 men; this would amount to over10,000 tons of food. An IIVIIA retains foodreserves of perhaps 3,000 tons, while an HVAusually stocks several hundred tons. An EVMalmost invariably has a bakery and good railfacilities; lower echelon depots may lack bakeriesand may have only road connections.The rule as to size of depots is not inflexible.A large share of the stores normally retained bythe EVM may be divided among HVHA andHVA for additional protection from air raids andto facilitate the loading of rations trains. Inother instances, Army Garrison Rations Depotshandle more stores than HVHA or HVA of thesame corps area due to abnormal troop concentrationsin their particular garrison areas.Stores (Ersnt~~c~pfl~gll?~gnllagacirlc or EVnJ) While specialization is not typical of the rationsto which they are subordinate. In procuring rationsfor distribution, the EVX purchases foodfrom all parts of the corps area in which it islocated and arranges for the exchange of goodswith other corps areas. In many instances procurementof a particular rations component, suchas flour or fodder, may be delegated to one of thedepots subsidiary to the EVJI.C. RATIOXS DEPOTS. While in peacetime thetroops purchased their rations mostly throughVI—8depots, since both human and animal rations arefound in all typrs, a limitc~t of l HVHAand HVA tend to have concentrated stores of aparticular rations component. As an example,one HVHA, now captured, maintained a reserveof thousands of tons of oats in addition to itsstores of troop rations. In certain farming districtsFodder Collecting Points (Ranhfuttcrsammclstcllcn)specialize in the collection and storageof forage.

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IUNCLASSIFIEDIGHER RATIONSSTORE (EVM)LOCALPROCUREMENTARMY RATIONS 4- ^MAIN DEPOT (HVHA)IARMY GARRISONRATIONS DEPOTARMY RATIONSDEPOT (HVA)REGIONALDISTRlBUTlONDISTRIBUTION TOA PARTICULARFIELD ARMYPHYSICAL FLOW OF RATIONS •,Figure 3.—Supply of rations.VI—9

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451iList of knownCorps AreclIIIIIIIIIIIIVIVIVIVVVVIVIVIIVIIIVIIIVIIIIXIXIXXXXXIXIXIIXIIIXIIIXVIIXVIIXVIIIXXXXIB.u.MB.u.MHigher Rations Stores (1' LocationInstcrburgK6nigsbcrgLotzenStettinBerlinPotsdamDresdenHalleLeipzigTorgauAalcnUlmMindenMiinsterMiinchcnBreslauLiegnitzOppelnErfurtFrankfurt am MainKasselBremenHamburgRendsburgHannoverMagdeburgMainzBarnbergNtirnbcrgLinzWienGrazT)anzigPosenOlmiitzPragmate of the probable rations strength prepared bythe army 28 days in advance.Lower echelon depots may become involved inthe supply of the field armies in a number ofways:(1) When an HVA or /// 11A is delegated toassist the EVM in storage of field army rations.(2) When an HVHA is assigned the functionof procuring and storing a particular componentof the ration for the entire corps area.(3) When any of the depots located in thetheater of operations are turned over to a fieldarmy to be used as an Army Rations Depot(Annccverpflcgungslagcr).6. Fuels and Lubricants Supply Organizationa. GENERAL. Because of the critical conditionof German fuel supply, the collection and distributionof fuel have largely been retained by theMinistry of Economic Affairs through its CentralPetroleum Office. Both the Central PetroleumOffice and the Armed Forces High Commandexercise authority over the W1F0 ComnomicResearch Company), which is the organizationresponsible for the administration of depotssupplying fuel to the armed forces.b. PROCUREMENT. The Ministry of EconomicAffairs, in collaboration with the Armed ForcesHigh Command, establishes the proportional allotmentof fuel to the Armed Forces and to civilianusers. The refineries, producers, and importersthen are directed to ship supplies either to theWIFO Depots or to air force, naval or commercialstorage depots.c. TYPES OF DEPOTS. The main WIFO depotscontrolled by the Central Petroleum Officed. AREA OF DISTR~RUTION. The WIFO maintainedby the Army supply food and cia l toArmy, SS, and Air Force units present in theirlocalities. Naval units generally are pot s byNaval Rations Depots (~~l~rirlcvc~~flcg~~~~~~~~z-consistconsist of Main Strategic Depots (Zcntralhauptter).The process of local. supply is relatively lagcr), which are usually underground, and ofsimple, as units contact the nearest 1Iain depot Main Transit Depots (Zcntralumschlaglager),and thereafter automatically arc which to a which store supplies for transshipment. In additionto supplying the largest share of fuel receiveddepot for their supply of rations. If t io nfinds itself unable to provide full rations by allby army fuel depots, these depots handle a portionof the fuel used by the Air Force and Navy. Theunits in its area, it receives assistance o f otherMain Strategic Depots have storage capacitiesdepots in the corps area.ranging into hundreds of thousands of tons of oil.In addition to supplying local needs, the EVM For this reason the Allied air forces have bombedare the principal centers for the supply of them them with great consistency. The importance ofto the Field Army. Ordinarily, a group of the the Main Transit Depots has decreased since thebecomes responsible for the rations cuttin g a cutting off of Rumanian petroleum imports.particular army; then the EVM must make certainThe smaller 1VIFO depots, controlled by thethat the army has about 10 days' supply of Armed Forces High Command, consist of Armyrations on hand at all times, based upon an esti- High Command Fuel Supply Depots (OKHVI—IO

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Naclcsrhrrl~ta~~klagcr) and subsidiary Army I:uelsupply .Depots (Hcercs~~achschzrbtanklager).These depots are directed solely to the supply of.\rmy units. Very likely, commercial storage depotssituated in the Theater of Operations havebeen converted into LVIFO depots of this sort.Not controlled by JVIFO are the depots situatednear the producing plants (~Vlarschtanklageror Fuel Replacement Depots) which send fuelsupplies to the depots mentioned above as wellas direct to the Field Army.7. Waffen-SS Supply Organizationa. RELATION TO ARMY SUPPLY. While theWa-fen-S‘S is generally self-sufficient in its Zoneof the Interior supply, it depends upon the Chiefof Army Equipment for most of its tanks, selfpropelledguns, and other heavy equipment andfor the repair of many of its vehicles. Indeed,Waflm-SS units have a higher priority on heavyequipment than do army units. To what extentthe S S reciprocates by supplying army units hasnot been determined.b. S S DEPOTS. Of the SS depot centers;Oranienl~urg is the most important as it containsthe Main SS Equipment 1)epot (SS-Zcugamt),the SS Central Distribution Center (SS-Zcntral~~rlassu~zgsfclZc), the S S Signal Equipment Depot(SS-Nacllrichte~lzrz~gtr?~1t), and an SS MotorTransport Depot (SS-h7maftfahr.mugdepot).Other important SS depot centers are Berlin,Dachau, and Prague. Since the SS depots suppJythe other branches of the SS as well as the Waf-JcPSS with rations, clothing, and certain typtss ofequipment, they cannot be considered as purelymilitary depots.8. TransportationAll military transportation by rail or on inlandwaterways comes under the direction of the Chiefof Transportation (Chef des Tramportwesem)at the High Command of the Armed Forces(OKW). lie works through a chain of transportationheadquarters which arc usually subordinateto the Army but act for the whole of the;2rmed Forces. The activities of the transportationheadquarters cover the occupied territories aswell as Germany.The Transportation Headquarters (Transport-ways, The Transportation Headquarters are locatedat the seat of a Railway Directorate(Reiclzsbahndircktiorr) and control the area ofone or more Railway Directorates.The Transportation Headquarters are the basicunits through which all military agencies mustdeal if they require rail or water transportationfor units, freight, or casualties. The TransportationHeadquarters make the transportation facilitiesavailahle and issue orders as to how andwhen they arc to be used.The staff of the Transportation Headquartersis organiz

I MARCH 1945who are responsible for all matters of transportand supply. JVhen the Zb, acting in the name ofhis commander, issues supply directives, their exccutionusually falls to the following:(1) Arms and Equipment Section (W andWatG).(2) Intendance Section (IVa or I&enduntur),dealing with rations, clothing, and pay.(3) Medical Section (ZYb).(4) Veterinary Section (IY C).(5) Motor Transport Section (V).(6) Supply Troop Commander (Konz~m&eztrtlcr Nacllschlrbrl-2cppcw), commanding the organicor attached supply troops.b. STAFF OFFICERS AND DUTIES. The staffofficers concerned with supply in the Field Armyand their duties are as follows:(1) At Field Army headquarters, the Chiefof Field Army Supply and iidministration (Gejzc,rnZa~jav~ir,-lllrist‘,r) is directly responsible tothe Chief of Staff of the l*?eld Army and constantlyis kept informed of the supply situationof the various armies. One of his main functionsis forwarding the requirements of the armiesto the Chief of Army 1:quipment. He regulatesthe eyacuation of prisoners and wounded, andthe USC of communications in the theater of operations.Large stocks of materials, including capturedmaterials and mobile supply trains, areunder his control. Important repair centers arealso maintained under his control.(2) At army group headquarters, the Army(;roup Ib intervenes only. \\-hen a critical situationrequires action, since arnij P groups are not in thenormal chain of supply. _ ~ (Zrmally his most importantfunction is the supe;vision of securityunits which safeguard supplies in the communicationszones. Units attached to an army group aresupplied through the army in whose area they arelocated.(3) :\t army headquarters, the Army Ib(Obcvqzlarticrrlzcistcr) administers the collationand forwarding of requisifions, the receipt of suppliesfrom Zone of the Interior depots, the distributionof supplies to l$:er echelons, and themaintenance of import&t dumps and repaircenters.(4) At corps headquarters, the Corps Ib{Quarticrmcistcr), who always has been a link inthe chain of requisitioning, recently has been assigneda role in the chain of supply, although thelarger proportion of supplies Still pass direct fromarmy tlutnps to divisions. In'addition to handlingVI—12UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451the supply of organic corps troops, the Corps lbsupervises the distribution of supplies from corpsclumps to lo\\-cr echelons.(5) At division headquarters, the Division Ibmakes his requisition to the Corps 10 on the basisof requisitions and reports from the troop units.He controls the division services of supply andprovides a systematic suppl!. of reserves of allkinds for the troops. Like the Army Ib, he is inthe normal chain of supply.3. Requisitioning and Procurementa. REQ~-ISITIOXISG. (1) The normal channelof requisitioning is from trool) unils through regiment,division, and corps to army.(2) An army generally ~~1s requisitions forammunition, fuel, 111otor transport, horses,weapons, spare parts, and most other types ofequipment to the l:ieltl Army. \vhile requisitionsfor rations, clothing, medical cclttil)m~nt, and veterinaryequipment go direct tc~ home depots assignctlto the army. JYhilc Ihcc. arc the usualchannels, many variations arc kno\vn to occur.For instance, an ariily inay ~.rlltl a requisition forcertain special I\-capons a:ltl chemical \\-arfareequipment directly to the Chief of Army Equipment,or an army may send a rations requisitionto the ITield Army in addition to forwarding therequisition to a home depot.(3) Rcqnisitions arriving at the I+ld r1rmJusually are forwarded to the C‘hicf of Arm\Equipment, who passes them down to a designatedhome depot. In son:c cahcs. ho\\-v\-er, theField Army ma\ scntl requisitions directly to ahome depot \vithout routing tllcll~ through theChief of Army l*?luipment.(4) A requisition tllay bv filled at any !cvel b>theechelon which has the necessary supplies availablein its storage centers.b. PROCLXXEXT. Requisitioning is supplenientedby two methods of ficsld procurement: livingoff the land and the WC of captured materiel.(1) Living off the land may 1~ acconlplishecleither by local 1)urchasc or I)\. outrl,‘(rllt cc,nfiscntionof locd supplies. Such l”-~~~c~lurc seldom is sufficientto supply all the rec~uircmenls of units. Insome areas, nevertheless, it has consitlerably lesscnedthe German supply problem, as in Italy\vherc much food, clothing, ammunition, andequipment is locally procured.(2) The employment of captured materiel hasalways been a favored ljracticc in the GermanArmy. In the of?ensive beginning in December

1 MARCH 19451914, directed against the Americans holding theSt. Vith-Bastogne area, the Germans apbarentlyexpected to keep their tanks operating by the seizureof American fuel dumps. The German soldiersfrequently were clothed \\-ith Americanuniforms and operated with liberal amounts ofcaptured Czech, British, French, and Russian, aswell as American weapons and equipment.4. Principal Installationsa. REARWARD 01: RAILHEADS. (1) Collectingstations (Samnelbahnlztife). Shipments of lessthan a rail carload are sent to these stations andcombined into carloads and train shipments beforebeing routed to the railhead.(~2) F orwardijlg statiom (WeiteyZcitungstatiolzc/l).Rail shipments that are not unit-loadedfor one organization may be forwarded to thearmy through one of these stations.(3) Distributirzg statiom (Vcrteilcybalwh.iife).When a large number of units are dependent upona single railroad for their supply, a distributingstation may be set up to regulate the dispatch ofsupplies to the proper railhcad or unloading point;apparently the combined functions 6f the collecting,forwarding, and distributing stations approachthe functi0n.s of the U. S. regulatingstation.(4) Sz~pply collecting arm (Nachsclmbsawtnrclgcbictc).Reserves of ammunition, fuel, andrations are kept loaded in trains in these areassubject to disposition by the Chief of Field Armyidministration and Supply.(5) Field Arinv payks, bases, arid depots(Hccy~x Paykc, Stiitzpunktc, ztrrd La

I MARCH 1945(2) While this is the u:;ual ilou. of supplies, itmay he modified in a number of ways, most ofwhich are shown in Figure 2. Operational conditionsare the cause of most modifications of theusual system of distribution. Hence, if the armyand divisions are short of trucks or gasoline, columnsfrom units as low as companies may beforced to go as far as 20 miles to receive suppliesfrom army railheads and dumps; if the lowerechelons lack means of transportation, army supplycolumns may be used to bring supplies to thetroops; if Allictl strafing is expected, supplymovements may be limited to the hours of darkness; if units a,rc stationed in the near vicinityof army clumps, they may draw their suppliesdirect from the dumps.b. DISTRIBUTION OF RATIONS. Normallyhome rations depots ship supplies direct to ArmyRations Dumps (Ar~eeveupflcgzlllgsEager). Anumber of such dumps may be set up, each withstores of less than 100 tons. In some cases, theseclumps have been known to store small amountsof clothing, individual equipment, and officeequipment. As they are not permanent installations,they may move from time to time. Forwardarmy dumps sometimes are controlled bycorps and called Corps Rations Dumps (Kor#verpflrgu~~gslugrr) ; in such cases, the corpsdumps supply the division and corps troops, whilearmy duml~ supply units and individual detachmentsattached to army headquarters, and forma permanent organization for the support offuture military operations. Rations supply withinthe division is handled through a rations tlistributingpoint (Verpfiegut~gsnz~sgtrbcstcllr).Supplies are received at this point and are distributedto division units. Usually livestock issent to field butchery plato JnS for dressing, andflour to field bakeries for b- ead production.(1) A butchery platoon' can process the followingnumber of animals per day:40 beef cattle equal to 40,000 meat rations.80 pigs equal to 24,000 meat rations.240 sheep . a . * ..... 9 ..equal to 19,000 meat rations.(2) A field bakery company can produce between15,000 and 1’3,200 bread rations, accordingto the weather and the time of the year. Afterpassing through the rations supply points of thedivision units, the supplies finally reach fieldkitchens and troops. Field kitchens of two typesare found: large, with a capacity for supplying125 to 225 men; and small, with a capacity forsupplying 60 to 125 men.VI—14UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451c. DISTRIBUTION OF AMMUNITION. The homeammunition depots forward supplies to the ArmyAmmunition Dumps (Armccmunitionslager)which usually store from 3,000 to 6,000 tons.Any forward army dumps taken over by corps artcalledCorps Ammunition Dumps (Korpsmunitionslager).From these dumps, the ammunitionis taken to Division Ammunition DistributingPoints (nivisiollsaltsgabcstcllcn). One ormore well camouflaged distributing points are established,located out of the effective range ofAllied artillery and, if possil on J l c .tected from tank attacks. Ordinarily artillery ammunitionand infantry ammunition are handled bydifferent distributing points so as to facilitate theloadingand unloatling of sul)plics. In some cases-Division Ammunition Dumps (Divisioiismunitionslager)are set up in the division area, especiallyif the front lines have been stabilized. From!the divisions, ammunition is sent to infantry andartillery ammunition supply points maintained byregiments, battalions, and companies. As Germanregulations permit the setting up of temporaryammunition dumps at these points, smallireserves may be present only a few miles behind!the front lines.Unused ammunition, empty shell cases, packingcases,and faulty ammunition must be returnedby the troops to army dumps from where theyare sent to the home areas. The rapid return ofthis material is considered as important as ammunitionsuppl!..d. DISTRIBUTION OF FUFXS AND 1 .UBRICANTS.Fuel from home fuel depots or from Field Armymobile reserves is directed to the railheads. Sometimesthe fuel is kept loaded in tanker trains(Eisenbahntankstellen) near the railhead andtransferred from these directly to fuel columns,but preferably it is laid down in 20- and 200liter containers in Army Fuel Dumps (Armccbetriebesstofflager)forward of the railhead. Fromthese dumps the fuel is taken forward to DivisionFuel Distributing Points (Difisionsbctriebsstoffausgabcstellcn)or, in the case of some motorizedand armored divisions, to Division Fuel Dumps(Divisionsbetriebsstofflagcr). Fuel is forwardedfrom the division area to lower echelon supplypoints and to fuel points that are set aside for theuse of single vehicles (Tankstellen fur Einsclkraftfahrzeugc).The latter may also be suppliedfrom the arm\: fuel stores.e. DISTRIBUTION OF CLOTHING AND INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT. Stores are dispatched fromthe Zone of the Interior to the field rations dumps

HIM ! 1COLLECTINGPOINTSCOLLECTINGPOINTSBATTALIONOR COMPANYSOPPLYPOINTS•RATIONS'— •AMMUNITION-*QUIPMENT-TR00PS>A. GENERAL FLOW OF SUPPLIES* *.. I *COLLECTINGSTATIONFORWARDINGSTATIONFIELD ARMYPARKS, BASES,AND DEPOTSSUPPLYCOLLECTINGAREAI ARMYRAILHEADIf III I iCORPSRAILHEADDIVISIONRAILHEADB. VARIATIONS Of RAIL FLOWI II t 1 |i I'CORPS:RAILHEAD1 II I $ CO>COREGIMENTALPOINTS*. DIRECT SUPPLY TO TROOPSC. 'VARIATIONS'OF ROAD FLOWFigure 4.—Flow of supplies.m

I MARCH 1945and to field equipment parks and collecting points,from which the stores are distributed to units.f. DISTRIBUTION OF EQUIPMEST. (1) Equipmentis handled by parks of two different categories: the Herres, or Field Army type, and theArmee, or army type. Although performing functionsanalogous to those of the Zone of the InteriorHome (H&at) and Corps Area (Wrl~vkreis)Equipment Parks, the field parks have a numberof distinct characteristics. They are concernedonly with military vehicles. Furthermore, theyare dependent upon Zone of the Interior depots,parks, and factories for fifth echelon maintenance.Lastly, the field parks are responsible for thestorage of reserve equipment as well as the distributionof new and repaired equipment.(2) The most numerous Hecrcs type park isthe Field Army Motor Transport I’ark (Z~WW.Skruftfuhrparkor NeKP). Unlike the Home NotorTransport Park, the HcKP normally does allrepairs itself, without farming vehicles out toworkshops, with the already existing repair facilitieswhich it customarily takes over. Usually anumber of HcKP are established in each armygroup area. Each HEKP may hold a reserve ofabout 200 new vehicles in addition to vehiclesarriving from home equipment parks and depots,and damaged vehicles coming from Army MotorTransport Parks (Ar~~zcefiraftfahrparke orAKP). In conjunction with army parks, theHeKP establish and maintain gasoline stations atcertain selected points, usually along importantroads. h’ot ascertained are the functions of reportedMotor Transport Repair Parks (Kraftfahrillstalzdsct,-2tlzgsparkc)and 1YinterizationParks (Wi~ztcrlagcr) which may be specializedHcKP or HeKP branches.(3) Perhaps even more important than the FieldArmy Motor Transport Parks are the Field ArmyTank Parks or Bases (St~itzptmktc~). These presumablyare established on the basis of one perarmy group. Their importance is increased by thefact that armies do not ordinarily maintain fixedinstallations for the repair of tanks, althougharmies may have semi-permanent tank workshops.The tank bases are reception or controlcenters from which tanks are dispatched to workshopsin the near vicinity for repairs, or returnedto home depots and factories for fifth echelonmaintenance.(4) Also under Field Army control are SpareParts Depots (Ersatzteillagcr), Tire Depots(Reifcnlagw), Track Depots (Glcishcttcnluger),VI—46UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45!Tank Spare Parts Depots (rclrl=c,,-cr-.sat=tcilZagf7), r\rniored Car Spar” l’arts Depots (Parkserspaliwagcnersatcsteillagcr), and Tractor SpareParts Depots (Zw~~firaft~~a/agcncvsat~tc ~ iIlngcr). TheDepots furnish supplies to maintenance sections,workshop units, army parks, and Field Armyparks.(5) Army Parks (AY~JICE parkc) are primarilyfor repairs but they also arc supposedto maintain a reserve of between 5 and 10 percent of the arms and equipment of the army, andto forward equipment either directly or throughcollecting points to units. An army has the followingparks:(a) Infantry l’ark, ior infantry weaponsand trucks.(b) Artillery Park, for artillery weaponsand trucks.(c) Anti-gas I?luipm~nt I’Nli, for gasmasks, decontamination suits, anti-gas clothing,and smoke equipn~ent.(d) Engineer Stores l’ark, ior cnginccrmaterials.(e) Signal Park, ior radio and trlcphonematerials.(f) Motor Transport Park, for vehicles andspare parts.(g) Army Equipment Park, for harness,horse carts, cooks equipment, and gentral items.(17) JIedical Park, for medical equipment,(i) Veterinary Park, for veterinary equipment.(j) Horse Park, for riding and tlraft horses.(6) N’hen equipment is forwartlcd from armyto division, it passes either directly from the armyparks to Division Equipment Collecting Points(Divisions~criitcsan~~~zclstelle~t) or through anArmy Equipment Collecting Point (AralccgrriitcsalllI/zclstcNc)to the division. In turn thedivision directs the equipment to the supply pointsmaintained by its units. Equipment repaired byfield maintenance sections and works!lop unitsmay be returned directly or through any of thecollecting or supply points to the troops; becausethe procedure is greatly variant, Figure 6 picturesthis latter flow as only direct to the troops.6. Supply Movementa. RAILROAD SUPPLY TRAINS. (1) StmzdardsQpZy traim. German logistical manuals outlinethe use of standard rations, ammunition. and fuelsupply trains with a maximum net load of 450metric tons (or approximately 500 short tons) J

I MARCH 1945on a standard gauge (1 feet Sx inches) railway.The text-book theory has generally been followedout in practice, although in some cases li g htmore locomotives have been sighted pulling $ xusually long fuel trains, and in some areas standardrations trains seldom are used. Standardequipment supply trains, with great variations innet loading weights, also are employed. In to.itcases, however, equipment of all kinds is whichon the same train.(2) Ratiom supply trains (Verpflegzilzgsziige),with an average of 40 cars per train may t anksposed as follows:(a) Iron rations: 300,000 full and 300,ooOhalf iron rations, totalling 442 metric tons.(b) Full rations with fodder: 180,000 humanand 40,000 animal rations, amounting to 454metric tons. These may be loaded into threeparts, each containing 3 days' supplies for 20,ooOmen and 4,ooO animals.(c) Full human rations with no bread butonly baking materials: 300,000 rations, are ,450 metric tons.(d) Flour train (Mehlzzrg) : 833,000 rations,amounting to 450 metric tons.(e) Oat train (Hafrl-r/(l) : 90.000 rations.totaling 450 metric tons.(f) Animal trains (Viclxiigc) : 360 cattleweighing 180 metric tons, 1200 pigs weighing 120metric tons, or 1800 sheep weighing 72 metrictons.(3) A~lLmzfnition supply traills (dlzclzitiolzsziige),with an average of 30 cars per train, areof three types:(a) Unit-loaded trains, loaded according to theproportion of different types of ammunitionneeded by a particular division.(b) Caliber unit trains, in which each car isloaded with approximately 15 metric tons an dshort tons) of ammunition of a specific caliber.(c) Single caliber unit. trains. in \vhich all carsare loaded with ammunition of the same caliber.(4) Fuel supply trains (Brfrirhstofff-iige) oftwo types are used :(a) 20 gasoline tank cars, holding between 340cubic meters (around 89,800 gallons) i s 440cubic meters (around 116,200 gallons) of fuel.(b) 25 cars, holding gasoline in 200-liter (53gallon) and 20-liter (5-gallon) cans and carrying400 cubic meters (105,600 gallons) of consistingand five cars with oil, engine oil, gear oil, paraffin,and (in winter) anti-freeze barrels and cans.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(5) Horse snugly trains (Pf r vdrrsat:5ige)consist of 55 cars, each holding eight riding orlight draft horses per car or 440 horses per train;six heavy draft horses per car or 330 horses pertrain; or four very heavy horses per car or 220horses per train.(6) Signals and engineer construction materialstrains (Baustoffsiigc) average 40 cars, ofwhich 39 are open cars, with a net tonnage ofabout 820 metric tons (900 short tons).(7) Tank trains carrying up to 25 mediumtanks or up 10 S heavy tanks have also been re1)ortetl. The average number of cars per tanktrain is about 33, with widely varying net loads.(8) Mixed equipment trains are very frequentand may contain from 25 to 60 cars with a totalnet tonnage of up to 850 t ob. ROAD SUPPLY COLUMNS AND TRAINS. Thereare four typc~s of roa t l columns in theGerman Army:(1) Motorized columns (Kraftwagenkolonnen)are, in general, employed on good roads. Theycan cover up to 125 miles per day. They areorganized into very large, large, and small motortransport columns with a capacity of 120 metrictons, 60 tons, and 30 tons respectively for thetransportation of supplies other than fuel. Inaddition, mountain divisions may have a speciallo-ton capacity column. l?uel generally is transportedin motorized fuel columns of two types—heavy columns with a minimum load of 50cubic meters of fuel, and light columns with aminimum of 25 cubic meters. Motor transportcolumns are designated with reference to theiremployment as Field Army, army, corps, or divisionmotor truck columns.(2) Animal-drawn columns (Fahrkolonnen)normally have capacities of 30 or 17 metric tons,and mountain animal-drawn columns 15 metrictons. In general, they are equipped with oneteamwagons; in cavalry units two-team wagonsare used. According to German training instructions,well cared for and trained horses can cover12 to 15 miles per day and under favorable conditionsup to 20 miles, with a day of rest following.If oxen are cmploye tl , rate of movementis slower. The Germans have been relying moreand more upon animal-drawn columns for themovement of their supplies.(3) Pack trains (Tragtierkolonnen), generallyconsisting of 40 mules or horses each, usually areemployed in mountainous terrain. A pack traincan carry up to 5 tons, but its capacity and speedVI—17

I MARCH 1945are dependent on the trails and grade. Even inlevel country, pack trains usually march moreslowly than foot troops.(4) Mountain carrier units (Gebirgstriigerein-Ifeitol) consist of mountain carrier battalions andcompanies whose men are employed in terrainwhere not even pack animals can be used effectively.Each man can carry between 35 and 75pounds of materiel on his back.SUPPLY COLUMNS AND TRAINSCapacity Capacity(metric (shorttoll-s) tow)Very Large Motorized Column........ 120 132Large Motorized Column....,. ... GO 66Small Motorized Column 30 331,arge Animal-lha\vn Column._ . 30 33Small Animal-Drawn Column....... 17 18%Mountain Animal-Drawn Column 15 16%Mountain Motorized Column......... 10 11Pack Train 5 5y 2MinimumMini-Amount mum(cubic Amountmeters) (gallons)Large hlotorized Fuel Column....._. 50 13,200small Motorlzctl Fuel C o l u m n - 25 6,600C. SUPPLY ROADS. Whenever possible a supplyroad is designated for each self-contained unitsuch as a division. In general, the main route ofadvance of the unit is designated as its suppIyroad. This principal route may be called a Roll-Dalzn, or rolling road, to distinguish it from anysecondary supply roads. When the main suppIyroute is used for troop movements as well as forsupply purposes, it generally will be called aDuvcllga?tgssfrasse, or through road. Great importanceis attached to the upkeep of these routesand the placing of gasoline stations (Ta*tkstellen)at strategic points close by the routes.Section IV.I. Total RequirementsMAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTSa. VARIABLES INVOLVED. The determinationof the over-all requirements necessary to maintainGerman troops presents a number of difficulties.This is best shown by a review of theGerman supply expenditures in Russia in 1941.Armored divisions averaged some 30 tons dailywhen inactive and about 700 tons a day whenengaged in heavy fighting; infantry divisions re-VI—18UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451quired 80 tons a day -when inactive and some1,100 tons during a day of h~~\ry fighting. Whenengaged in defensive, mol)ping-up, or minor offensiveactivities, the divisiuns required suppliesin amounts somewhere between the two extremes.By far the most important variable in this campaignwas the amount of amnlunition expended;requirements of fuel and equipment also variedconsiderably, while rations and clothing consumptionremained relatively static. Expenditures dependedupon the nature of the action involved,the types of units eligaged, the zone of action,the season of the year, the amount of materielavailable for consumption, and the facility withwhich supply movements could be made.b. ESTIMATES OF TOTAL REQUIREMENTS.When the varial)les cvidcnt in the 1941 Russiancampaign have become relatively constant,as is the case at present, the German supply requirementscan be estimated with some degreeof accuracy. Under present contlitions the averagetotal supply requirements per (;crman soldierare estimated to vary as follo\vs :_To/al p01f11d.sCharacter of fightiiuj per maniu areaper dayInactivity 5-10Mopping-up 15-20I)efensive fighting (but not ajiain

IUNCLASSlFlEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451REPRESENTATIVE BREAKDOWN OF MAXIMUM RATION ALI,OWANCESIN GRAMS PER DAYItenzCowrponcnt Class nuty ClussRye breadFresh meat with bonesSoy beanHeadlessFresh vegetables and fruitsPotatoesI,egumesPudding powderSweetcncd condensed skim milkflourfishSaltOther seasonings ..................................SpicesFats and bread spreadsCoffeeSugarSupplementary allowancesTotal Maximum Ration in gramsTotal Maximum Ration in lbsRtrtio,l I Ration II Katiolt III Ratiou IV!a) 700 700 700 600(b) 136 107 90 56!b) 7 7 7 7(h) .. 30 30 30 30Cc) 250 250 250 250Cc) 310 320 320 320cc> 80 80 80 80((1) 20 20 20 20: ((!I 25 25 25 25(c) 15 1.i 1.5 15C c) 3 3 3 3(f) 1 1 1 1(g) 60 50 30 3.5(II) 9 9 9 9!i) 40 35 30 30. (1) 2 2 2 21,698 1,654 1,622 1,4833.74 3.64 3.57 3.26Wine (in summer) (quarts)..._.._.. (j) .026 .0X) .0x ,026Cigarettes (pieces) (k) 7 6 3 2nurses within Cerma!iy. Hospital cases may fallwithin any of these classes depending on theseriousness of the cases.The most important items of the componentclasses are as follows: (a) bread; (b) meats, soybean flour, cheese, fish, and eggs; (c) vegetables;(d) puddings and milk; (e) salt, mustard, vinegar,and other seasonings; (f) spices such aspepper, cinnamon, and cloves; (g) butter, lard,marmalades, fats, and bread spreads; (h) coffeeand tea; (i) sugar; (j) spirits and wines; (k)tobacco.Substitute issues may be made within a componentclass but not among different componentclasses. Thus the daily maximum allowance ofvegetables for a soldier is 60 grams* of driedvegetables, or 1200 grams of kidney beans, or 400grams of salted vegetables, or equivalent quantitiesof any of about 30 other substitutes. It is notpossible to predict which items will be served onany given day. The following chart, however, setsforth a likely breakdown of these maximumration allowances.1~. SPECIAL TYPES OF HUMAN RATIONS.(1) Mlwch mfim (Il~arsclzvcrpflegzcIzg). Themarch ration is a cold food ration issued for notmore than three or four consecutive days to units* In dealing with captured German documents, the;\merican soldier \vill invariably find the rations allow:mces computed in grams or kilograms. A gram equals.0353 ounce or .0022 pound. A kilogram (1000 grams)equals 35.3 ounces or 2.2 pounds.in transit either on carrier or hy foot. It consistsof approximately 700 grams of bread, 200grams of cold meat or chc~se, 60 grams of breadspreads, 9 grams of coti'ee (or 4 grams of tea),10 grams of sugar, and six cigarettes. Thus it hasa total weight of about 980 grams.(2) Iron ration (Eiscnw Portiofq). An ironration consists of 250 grams of biscuits, 200grams of cold meat, 1.50 of preserved vegetables,25 of coffee, and 25 of salt. Total weight is 650grams without packing and 825 grams with packing.An iron half-ration is composed of 250grams of biscuits and 200 grams of preservedmeat; thus its total weight is 450 grams withoutpacking and 535 grams with packing.(3) Combat Package iGrosskampfpiicken) andClose Combat Package (Nahkampfpticken). TheGermans have begun to use these types of .rationsfor troops engaged in combat. They includechocolate bars. fruit bars. candies. cigarettes, andpossibly Ijiscuits.c. ANIMAL K.~TIONS. An animal ration is theamount of food consumed by one horse, draftox, dog. or carrier pigeon for one clay. Thequantity of an animal ration allowance (Ratiolwsat e) depends on the type of animal, the area inwhich he is serving, and the content of the rationhe is being fed. Horses, for instance, are dividetlinto four groups: draft horses of the heaviestbreed, draft horses of heavy breed, saddle-horsesand light draft horses, and small horses. On theVI—19

I MARCH 1945Eastern front, draft horses of the heaviest breedreceive a maximum ration allowance of 5650grams of oats, 5300 grams of ha\-, and 5750grams of straw (including 1500 grams of beddingstraw). The allotments to other horse groupsare proportionately less. On fronts other thanthe JCastern l:ront, the allotments for all horsesare generally smaller. In addition, substitutes suchas preserved forage, barley, corn, etc., may changethe ration weight. If the horse is being fed aniron ration, he is given a single item such as oatsor hay or straw.d. RATIONS IN THE FIELD. I,ocal stores ohtainedby purchase or confiscation play a greaterpart in the s~lpply of rations in the field (Frldportionnzfor men and Feldratiottm for animals)than is the case for any other class of supply. Itis part of the German planning principle to liveoff the land as much as possible and to obtainonly the remaining requirements from stocks procuredthrough chamiels. The Germans fully ap1)rcciate the difficulty of employing such methodsduring periods of combat and do not count up011local stores during opera&c periods. Usually anormal reserve of about 10 days' rations for eachman of an army is maintained within the army.The rations consist of full and iron rations, althoughthe latter may he vaten only upon thereceipt of special orders.Rations carried in an army for each man:Full rntiom Iron rations1\Y:h tllc man... — 1 (half)On a combat vehicle — 1III the ficltl kitchc.n, . 1 1I n the unit ration train 2In fhc divisicn train. 1 —In the army dumpsand train a total of about 3Ordinarily there are two full and two ironhorse rations carried either on the horse or inunit supply columns. 0:hcr rations arc carriedby the army and the division.For staff planning purposes, the weights of rationsare computed by the Germans as follows:weigllt Il’righfType of Rntims itc grclllls in p02mlsHuman rations:Standard ration with packing. 1,500 3.3Iron ration with packing... 823 1.82Iron half-ration with packing 535 1.18Horse rations:Standard ration 10,000 22.Iron 031 I-ation ...._. . 5,000 11.Iron hay ration........ 5.000 11.Iron straw ration.... 2,500 5.5VI—20UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.4513. Fuels and LubricantsDistribution of fuel is calculated in the consumptionunit (Vr~br-altclrssat,-) which is theamount of fuel that will move’ each vehicle in aformation 100 kilometers or 62 miles. The allowanceof consump!ion units per formation issystema&lly replaced as it is expended. Undernormal conditions it was standard for Germanformations to maintain three consumption unitsat army dumps: in addition, arniorcxtl formationscarried four units, reconnaissance elements carriedsix and a half units, and all ot1lc.r formationscarried fi\-c units. I

I MARCH 1945men, with the guns, and as company an{1 battalionreserves, while less than one full unit of issueis retained as a division reserve in division columnsand dumps. The exact cluanti:y issued t:)each man is largely determined by the amountheld by the battalion and company as their rcserves.The following charts exemplify the unitsof issue found in infantry and artillery units ofan army.~1mmunition Issues (Rounds) for a J701ksGrenadier Division:ProbableArmyDiui- Rc~erz~Forward siou (Unit ofWeapon* Issue Reserve I.we)O-mln autotnatic pistol... 18 16 179-mm machine pistol. 690 512 GO17.92-mm macliine pistol. . 720 540 630 •7.92-mm rifle .... 99 75 877.92-mm rifle (for trool)sother tha11 infantrytrool)s) ........ 25 20 227.92-mm semi-auto rifle. 159 135 147Rifle grenatlc launcher... 75 70 707.52.mm L.!JG ....... 3450 2505 29777.92-mm LMG (for artyand AT troops) 1350 1020 11837.92-mm HvMG ...... 6300 4750 55258%mm bazooka 5 5 581-mm mortar 150 126 138l-70-mm mortar 150 90 12037-mm AA 1200 none** p k75-mm inf how 192 151 171ii-mm :\T (mtz)..... 150 100 125i5-mm AT (SF’) 255 — —105-mm gun how 225 126 1751%nlm how .,......... 150 60 105* Not included are 75-mm gun and flame thrower.** AA ammunition reserves are usually kept by armyand not by division.Units of Issue for Artillery Units:I VeaponNumber of Rounds37-mm AA 1,50075-mm AA 30088-mm AA 300105-mm qin .................. 125150-mm how 125150-mm gun 75210-mm li011 ............. 50c. AMMUNITION EXPENDITURE. The unit ofissue of ammunition is not to be confused withthe daily expenditure amount of ammunition.The latter does not arrive at any constant figure,hut varies with the type of action, the area offighting, and the other factors mc&oncd in paragraph1. By analogy with the reserve amountsUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451( : i otller exp~tlabl~ sq)plics, however, it is possiblethat three units of fire are judged by theGermans to 1~ suflicicnt to maintain an army fora period of roughly eight to ten days.Section V.EVACUATIONI. Maintenance and Repair of Equipmenta. GI:SEI:.\I.. I’crhaps the fundamental Germanprincil)le of rcI)air and maintenance is thatcquil~ment should be repaired as far forward asl)os5ible.Practically all the installations that deal withrepair and maintenance of equipment also participatein the flow of sulq)lies, 1~0th in transferriiqrepaired equipment back to units and in movingnewly manufactured equilniient to units (see SectionsII ant1 III). In the following paragraphs,therefore, they lvill 1~ trcntctl solely from thepoint of view of rearbvard flow.b. ?.[OTOR TRASSI~OIX. 1lnintcnance of an individualvehicle is the responsibility of the driverand the crew, hut for repairs it is sent to one ofa number of repair centers. TYhile the piocedurcthat determines which center shall undertake therepair has changed from time to time, it probablyis determined by two factors: the number ofworking hours; and the facilities needed to effectthe repair. Thus maintenance (Insta~zdsct~ungs)detachments and sections probably carry out repairsrequiring less than four working hours withthe tools at their disposal, while mobile field workshop(Wrrfisfatt) units cirry out repairs requiringless than 12 working hours. If the damage inflictedis too extensive for the facilities of themobile workshops, the vehicle is sent to an ArmyMotor Transport Park (JKP) or to a FieldArmy ;\Iotor Transport .Park (H&P). Thedifference of functions llctn-een these two types ofinstallations is not clear: it is likely, however, thatthe more difficult rcp;:ir j:J;s arc sent to theHcKP, nhile the /lZ

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451vehicles move directly to repair and maintenancecenters under their own power without passingthrough collecting points.MAINTENANCESECTIONFIELDWORKSHOPUNITVEHICLEDRIVERAND CREWTc. TANKS, .IKJIORED I'EHICLES, AND SELFI'ROPELLED \\7~~~'~~~. Jlinor repairs to armoredvehicles (including tanks, self-propelled weapons,and other armored vehicles) are made by unitmechanics and b!- mobile tanI;-workshop units.If the repairs cannot be completed in the divisionarea within three days, the vehicles may besent to semi-permanent army tank workshops orto Field ;\rmy Tank Parks or Bases. \1’hen armoredvehicles are so badly tlnmagetl that theycamlot be repaired in the field, they are cannibalizedor forwarded to tank equipment depotsor factories in the home area. In the latter casethe vehicles are no longer under Field Army controland are not returned to the units to whichthey were originally assigned.Armored vehicles are repaired on the spot ifpossible. Otherwise they are moved rearwardunder their own power. Tank transporters areused only when long movements are contemplatedor when vehicles cannot move under their own~)owcr.ARMYMOTORTRANSPORTPARK [AKP]FIELD ARMYMOTORTRANSPORTPARK [HeKP]cl. OTHER EQUIPMENT AND CLOTHING. Alltypes of equipment including weapons, signalcquipmcnt. bicycles, and clothing are repairedwithin the division area if possible. If the equipment(other than clothing and individual equipment)requires more specialized attention, it isforwarded either directly or through equipmentcollecting points or workshop units to one of thearmy parks. Equipment which cannot be repairedin the field is directed to a home equipment park,depot, or factory. Damaged clothing and individualequipment generally pass from collectingpoints direct to home clothing depots and dumps.l:igure 6, which is largely compiled from Germanschematics, should be examined for other detailsof the German repair methods,HOME MOTOR TRANSPORTPARK [HKP]Figure A —Motor vehicle repair altd nraiutrnancc.2. Evacuation of InstallationsWith the narrowing of the Zone of the Interior,the Germans have been faced with the problemof what to do with depots that were formerlypart of the Zone of the Interior system of supply.Variant courses adopted have been the c’onversionof the installation into a field installation, theevacuation of the depot to the new Zone of theInterior, and the operation of the depot as thoughit were still within the Zone of the Interior.VI—22

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451DIVISIONEQUIPMENTCOLLECTINGPOINTARMYEQUIPMENTCOLLECTINGPOINTARMYEQUIPMENTPARKHOME CLOTHINGDUMP OR DEPOTMAINTENANCESECTION1DIVISIONWORKSHOPUNITARMYWORKSHOPUNITHOME EQUIPMENTDEPOT, PARK, ORFACTORYFigure 6.—Repair of equipment and clothirhg.3. Evacuation of Woundeda. GENERAL. The German system for theevacuation of casualties is based upon an immetliate sorting of the woundctl so that soldiers whoare not seriously injuretl can be returned to theirunits as quickly as possible, and those who areseverely wounded can receive medical care withmaximum speed. Under combat conditions theaccomplishment of these ends in many cases willcause deviations from the normal system. A goodexample of this was shown in the early part ofthe Russian campaign when the great distancesbetween the combat zone and the Zone of theInterior forced the Germans to use a chain ofCasualty Collecting Points to control and expeditethe rear\\-ard movement of sick and wounded.Now that the combat zone has moved into Germany proper, deviations of an integrating natureshould be anticipated.b. CHANNELS OF ~VACIJATION. (1) Casualtiesunable to walk are carried from the battlefieldby battalion stretcher bearers, while those stillcapable of walkin,v are directed to the BattalionAid Station (IIc~.‘~~I~(~~C~~.~~,II~ICS~) which is locatedas close to the front line as is practicable. TheBattalion Aid Station gives first aid in emergencycases. As quickly as movements can be made, itpasses the woundctl to the Regimental Aid Station(T~trpprll~‘r~bo~ld~laf,-), which is generallysome 200 to 500 yards to the rear of the frontline. At this station the wounded receive firstaid and arc sorted into ambulatory cases andstretcher cases. Stretcher cases are carried bylitter to an Ambulance I>oading Post (F~7’ngcwlzalfc/datz)for rearwarc1 movement, while ambulatorycases are instructed to make their way rearwardon foot.(2) Usually the stretcher cases are sent to a,Main Dressing Station (Hauptvcrbnndplatz) Iwhereas the lvalking \vounded move to a CollectingPoint for the Slightly Wounded (Leichtver~~,llrrdctclrsa/nnzcl~latc). The latter two installalions,both controlled by the regimental medicalofficer, sometimes operate as a combined unit, andin practically all cases are located reasonably closeto each other. Their functions are as follows:The Main Dressing Station attends the seriouscases. It contains a surgical unit which performsamputations, applies tlrcssings and splints, checkshemorrhages, gives blood transfusions, and administerssedatives and prcventatire injections.After treatment the casualties are evacuated furtherrearward.VI—23

I MARCH 1945U~!CLASSIFlED TM-E 30-451The Collecting Point for the Slightly Woundedadministers to casualties whose treatment requiresonly a few days. TVhen the treatment is completed,the men are returned to combat. If, however,a case has taken a more serious turn, thewounded soldier is evacuated rearward.(3) From the regimental area casualties maybetaken to any of the various types of hospitals(Lu~arctfc) found in the field or at home. CasualtyCollecting Points (K~,alzhcllstrlrrlrl~~~~~~~~cJ~)usually are set up along the line of evacuation tofacilitate the grouping of casualtics and their distributionto the rear. These points are generalIyestablished at railheads and other traffic centersby ambulance units. They do not handle casualtieswhose condition will not permit movement.Mobile Field Hospitals (Fcldlaanvcftc) serve asway stations for casualties who cannot h:, movetlthrough the Casualty Collecting Points. Theymay be operated either bp an army or bj a tlivision.Wherercr possible, the I%M Hospital isset up in availab!e permanent buildings. It isequipped to handle any casualty and has a capacityof 200 beds.(4) Casualties who arc physically able to beevacuated after treatment at the Main DressingStation or the Field Hospital are moved either directly,or via the Casualty Collecting Points, to aBase Hospital (Krirgslnzarcft) or sometimes to aGeneral Hospital (ZZc,jrrz~cIa,nnrctt).Base Hospitals arc large and relatively permanentinstallations which may be established by anarmy or the Field Army well to the rear of thecombat zone. These hospitals are of two types:General Base Hospitals (Krirgslnxl-rffc) . withnormal accommodations for 500 cases, for casualtieswho require up to tight weeks' treatment bcforebeing discharged and for those who requirea period of convalcsccncc before moved to RcserveHospitals; and Base Hospitals for MinorVI—24c. TRANSPORTMIOK FACIIXYIES. Hospitaltrains (Laxrr~ftcii~yr) can carry between 358 and356 lying cases or 920 sitting cases.Standard German ambulances transport fourlying cases, or two lying and four sitting cases,or eight sitting cases.Horse-drawn vehicles, trucks, and hospitalplanes also may be used in evacuating thewounded.Cases (Lrichtk~alfkenfi~~e~~~a~~~effc), with accommodationsfor 1,000 patients, for casualtieswho need up to four weeks of treatment or convalescenceprior to discharge.General Hospitals are permanent installationslocated inside Germany and are supervised by theChief of Army Equipment; they are dealt with atlength in Chapter I.(5) A man may be pronomiced fit for duty byany hospital. If he is in a forward hospital. hcwill he returned to his unit. If he is in a GeneralHospital for more than eight weeks, he Lvill l)ereturned to the Replacement Army for reassignment.4. Evacuation of Horsesa. CHANNELS OF EVACUATION. Sick and~oundctl horses arc marched by foot from thel~attleficld to n Horse Dresbing Station (Pferdrvcrba.~dplafz),where emergency cases are treated.They then are marched or transported in horsetransport columns to a station set up by the DiyisionVeterinary Company (I/c,fr~illiirkonlpallic).This station can be established within a minimumof six hours and can treat 150 cases. If the horsesrequire further trcatmcnt, they arc moved byhorse transport colum~x to the Army HorseHospital (Arlrlrcpfcrtlcltr,~~~~~f) or to the FieldArmy Horse llospital (~lcc,r-c,s~fcrdclrr~u~ef~).Such field hospitals can be established within aminimum of 12 hours and can handle 500 sickhorses. Horse Collecting Points (Pfcrdcsn~rrrrrl@St,-) are formed generally to expedite the evacuationof horses to the rear. Normally there isan Army Horse Collecting Point (.Il-~!rcpfcl,dcsammclplatz),intermediate between division andarmy, ant1 a Division Horse Collectii:g Point(Divisior~spfr,.ti~scllllifi('l~lut,") at division. Evacuatedhorses may be moved either directly orthrough thcsc collecting points to the rear. Horseswhich require special surgical operations andthose not likely to bc fit again for army cse aremoved by rail from the field hospitals to theZone of the Interior Home Horse Hospitals(Hei~~zatpfcrdelazarcttc).b. TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES. Horse transporttrains (Pferdcfmnsport,-iigc) are composedof 55 cars, each carrying six sick or lvoundedhorses, or a total of 350 horses per train. Thestandard horse transport road column can move40 sick or wounded horses about 90 miles in oneclay.5. Evacuation of Prisoners of WarGuard detai!s tlralvn from the military policeor from the combat unit itself take prisoners tothe Division Prisoner of 1i7ar Collecting Point(Divisio~~sgefa~~gc,Irl~sa~~~l~clsfcllc). The Prisonersof ‘\ZJar are next moved to the Army Pris

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED fM-E 30.451oner of JYar Collecting Point (nrllzcegcfali.~cllcll- have found it c!esirablc to use troc,p trains of a.~a~~~~~~rlsfcZZc), the guard details being drawn from ~~n;0nablv cnnstal:t cc:nlposilion. The standardmilitary police, combat troops, or guard units.The Prisoners of 11’ar are lastly transferred fromthe jurisdiction of the Field Army to the ReplacementArmy Command. This is accomplished whenthe Prisoners of War are moved by rail to oneof the Prisoner of LVar Camps J\-ithin Germany.Officers are incarcerated in Officer Prisoner ofWar Camps (Ofisie&grl- or Oflag) ; enlistedmen are confined in Enlisted Men's Prisoner ofWar Camps (Manrlschafts-Stalllnzlager or Stalag)Section VI.1. IntroductionTROOP MOVEMENTSJn movements of entire bodies of troops with theirequipment, the space occupied, rather than thetotal weight, is the important factor. A \-cry largeproportion of the space is taken up by personnel,horses, and organic equipment; daily maintenancerequirements that accompany the troops occupymuch less space.2. Rail Transportation2. MAIN ~IILITARY ROUTES. German railwaysgenerally are used jointly for military and civiliantraffic, although military trains arc given priority.I’erhaps the only instances of railways designatedsolely for military uses arc’ found in tlic combatzone, either on already existent railways or onrailwa!-s constructctl by the Army.Sormally double-track stantlard-gauge (4'Syz")i-nil\\-ays have a daily capacity of 30 military trainsin each direction, while single-track standartlgaugerailn-ays can move 10 trains a day in eachdirection. Air damage can materially decreasethese capacity figures.b. STANDARD TROOP TRAINS. The Germanstrains found in the I~alkans, Ital;,-, and Korwa!are composetl of t’e\\-er cars than the base types inGermany, Tknmark, and the Setherlands whichare described below. All types are tlcsigned as faras possible to carry a self-contained unit such asa company or a battalion. Sonstandard trains2lw may bc used for troop mowiwuts.K-trains i Krnftfnlr~,-iigc or motor vehicletrains) aver-a

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM. E3(M5Ic. ENTRAINMENT AND DETRAINMENT. Trooptrains generally are formed at railroad stations.The speed with which entraining can be accomplishedvaries according to the number of unitsbeing loaded, the number of stations used, thefacilities available at the stations, and the importanceattached to speedy loading. Dcljending onthese conditions, loading of a single train can beaccomplished within 2 to 12 hours. I f all the unittrains can be loaded simultaneously at the cntrainingstations, an entire division can bc loaded withinthat time. In practice, however, the time takento assemble trains and troops and the limited numberof entraining stations jl-ill materially increasethe loading time of divisions.It is estimated that a troop train can be undloaded in about half the time taken to load. Detrainnientof infantry units may occur far forward,while armored units usually are detrainedin rear areas. •d. SPEED OF MOVEMENTS. The average o fman movement appears to average from 150 moto200 milts per day for long movements within(ieriiiany, and about 60 miles daily in arcas nearthe combat zone.C. TRAIN REQUIREMENTS. At present the piedber of trains required to transport an infantry thevision is about 35 to 40. An armored divisionneeds about twice that number. If a G e rma nof divisions are being moved, additional trainswill be necessary for corps and army units.(2) The average speeds of march columns inmiles per hour are as follows :Infantry (long marches) 3Infantry (short marches) 4Mounted troops 6Cyclists 8Motorcycles and cars 22Trucks 22Trucks with trailers 16Half-track vehicles 16Tanks 12c. MARCH DISTANCES. The infantry divisionnormally can march about 20 miles in a day;under adverse weather or road conditions the rateof march may fall to 10 miles a day. The motorizeddivision can maintain an average daily marchof between 90 and 150 miles ; the armored divisionfrom 60 to 90 miles a day. In the near vicinityof the combat zone, road movements withoutmotor transport average 10 to 15 miles a day,while movements by motor transport approximate30 miles a day.d. ROAD SPACES. While the road spaces occupiedby divisions on the march are not constant,the road spaces of individual units may prove ofsome value. The following examples are fromGerman sources and do not indicate the intervalsmaintained between elements:3. Road Transportationa. MAIN MILITARY ROUTES. Certain roadshave been selected by the High Command to forma system of through routes (Durchgangstra.~sct~)for military traffic in Germany ant1 occupietlareas. For the most part the through routes comprisethe national highways and Aufohahnclt. InDenmark, howcsvcr, the through routes more frequentlycoIlsis of secondary road5 tllan mail1arteries. Through routes generally run eithercast and west or north and south. When supplyor troop movements are to be m’ade over theseroads, all civilian traffic is diverted to other roads.b. MARCFI SPEEDS. (1) The average speedsof division marches in miles per hour are asfollows:By da?!By XigktInfantry &vision . 3 3Motorizetl division 16 10Armoretl division 12 7VI—26INFANTRY DIVISION(at 5 kilometers or approximately3 miles per hour.)YardsMetersInf Ri-Kt (each of ihree) 6.234 5,700Ren Rn 3,116 2,850AT lin 2,734 2.500Arty Rest 7.382 6,750Sig lin 3,193 2,920l-'.ngr Rn 2,570 2,350Div Scrv 4,155 3,800Div Hq 1,553 1,420Total Inf Div (approx.; withoutintervals between elements)43,405 39,690Total converted to miles 24.7

I MARCH 1945ARMORED DIVISION(at 20 kilometers or approximately12 miles per hour.)YardsMetersTank Regt 21,325 19,500Ps ie@ Regt (each of two). 13,14.i 12,020Ps . . ........... 9,154 8,370AT Bn 3,838 ,3.510Ps . . . ......... 14,458 13,220Ps . . .............. 3,761 3,440Ps , . ........ 6,365 5,820])iv Serv 11,702 10,700DivHq 1,444 1,320Others 5,468 5,000Total Armd Div {approx.;without intervals betweenelements) 103,806 94,920Total converted to miles 59.0If distances between the individual units areincluded, the average length of the infantry divisionwould bc about 30 miles (at 3 miles perhour), of the armored division 70 miles (at 12miles per hour), and of the motorized division 80miles (at 16 miles per hour),4. Sea Transportationa. GENERAL. In the sea movements referredto in the following text, the basic shipping measurementis the gross registered ton (G/T), whichis 100 cubic feet of the entire enclosed space ofa ship.The Germans USC‘ all tj-1”s of cargo and passengervessels for the transportation of troops.Generally the depth of water'of the embarkationand debarkation ports determines the size of shipto be used. Thus many of the Baltic ports arelimited to cargo ships up to 2,000 G/T. Cargobetween Norway and Germany, on the other hand,ordinarily can be carried on much larger vessels.The average speed of a ship is estimated at 200nautical miles per day, although fast ships maqaverage much more.UNCLASSIFIEDb. LOADING AND UNLOADING TIMES. Thetime r~cluir~tl for the loatling of a vcsscl varicsswith a number c~f factors, such as the size of’ thevessel, the plan of the \-esst.1, the port facilities,and the efficiency with \vhich loading is conducted.The follo\ving a\‘eragc loading times arc basedupon German cstimatcs. They apply for loadingduring day and night; considerable tlclays, ho~vever,may occur on account of adverse \veatherconditions.Clnss~fimtioitLoading Time100 men 8 minutes.100 horses (led over a ramp) . 1 hour.100 horses (lifted by cranes) ._.. 6 hours.100 light motor vclli~lc~ (liftctlby cranes)6 hours.Supplies sufficient to 1~~1 a 2,000G/T vc~scl ...... 10 hours.c. TONNACK REQUIREMENTS. Among otherfactors, the amount of tonnage required to transporttroops depends upon the type of unit beingtransported, the efficiency of loading, the typesof ships uscd,~ ant1 the amount of nonmilitarystowage transported. Flylice the following figuresgive only a general inclication of the amount ofspace which is occupied by items \\-hen efficicntl)loaded.Classifin~lionEsti~~uxtrd G/Trequireme.fzt1 man 21 hich .................. 81 light motcjr vehicle ............ 101 hip ........................201 heavy field g u n . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Ger m ans .........,.......... 25It is likely that an infantry tlivision requires between50,000 and 70,000 gross registered tons forits movement. or a mean average of five or sixgross registered tons per man. If loading is inefficientor if light loatling is used, the G/T requirementsper man will rise considerably. Thusin short movtm~nts such as ferry crossing, asniucli as 15 g-ross registered tons per man andequipment ha\re been employed.VI—27

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451CHAPTER VIIWEAPONS1. GeneralSection I.INTRODUCTIONBefore and (luring the first years of the presentwar it was the policy of the Ciernian armv to usethe smallest variety of weapons consistent withmeeting operational requirements, while emphasiswas maintained on developing weapons with ahigh degree of fighting efficiency. Recent developmentsin warfare, however, particularly in thelast year, gradually have forced the Germans toadopt the opposite policy of experimentation withmany innovations in weapon design.2. Recent TrendsWithin the last 12 months distinct trends in thedevelopment of German weapons have hecomeapparent.a. TANKS AND TANK DESTROYERS. First, therehas been a tendency for tanks and tank destroyersto become armed and armored more heavilyat the expense to some extent of mobility andmaneuverability. This is compensated for by theability to open effective fire at very long ranges.h. INFANTRY ANTITANK WEAPONS. Second,there has been a striking increase in the ability ofthe German infantry to combat Allied tanks. Thishas been accomplished by the development andconstant improvement of close-range grenade androcket launchers employing the hollow-chargeprinciple.c. ROCKET WEAPONS. Third, German experimentswhich began before the war have materializedinto a comparatively wide range of rocketweapons used to supplement orthodox artillery.These experiments with rockets are being continued,and improvements in range and accuracymay be expected. Tn the event of the outbreak ofchemical warfare, rocket weapons will assume agreater significance than at present. The Germanrecoilless gun (originally developed as an airbornegun) comes close to combining the lightness andmobility ot the rocket wapon with the range andaccuracy of the standard Ivpc of howitzer.d. ARTILLERY. There have been some belatedattempts on the part ol ihe Germans at improvertlt in thc.ir standard artillery, hit 110 basic redesignappears contemplated at present.Section II. SMALL ARMS1. Generalth ( .lrc n trends in ;VI-nian small arms havebeen i t icrcasc in pro(lnctiorl of semiautomaticand fully automatic weapons and an increase inthe rate of tire of machine guns. I>uring 19-M.additional dose-quarter antitank weapons havebee11 inclutlcd :tmoiig German small arms.2. Pistolsa. GENERAL. The two standard pistols now inuse in the German Armv are the I-uger, whichwas used in the last war. and a more modernweapon, the \\ alther; neither German weaponhas the shock effect of the I . S. M1911 or MVJ\ 1Al (‘olt .35. The Alau~r I)i.5tol is seldom ellcountered.I'itjurc l.—Lugcr1'isti'lr CV. cuhber 9 nun.b. LLT.ER PISTOL (Pistole 08). (1) Generaldcscvi~tiou. This is a semiautomatic, recoil-operatedpistol with a loggle-|ninl breech action (!'/

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4511).‘ Thc~ safety is located on the left rear sitlcof the body. The pistol is set on "safe" when"(;~~sicllrrt" is sho\ving. Thcrc is also a longertnotlel of this pistol, provision beittg tttadc ott therear sitlc of the grip for a stock altnc1llllellt.Construction is ahttost itlerilicxl with the standardttiotl~l cxc~pt thal the barrel is lotigcr, and a leafrear sight graduatetl up to SO0 meters is attached.(2) Chaructcristics.Calitwr 9 mm (actually 0.347 inch).Length of barrel........ 4x inches.Weight2 pounds.FeedS-routid grip niagazinc.(3) Anzntu~itio~. The Luger pislol tit-c~s thestandard German 9-inin Parabeilum ammunition.holster, which is in the shapi oi a hollow stock.The sal el v is ai the left rear above the triggerguard. The weapon is led ammunilion from a10-round fixed magazine niseried forward of the(rigger guard. I \\ enly-rnund magazines are usedwhen the weapon I- employed a> a carbine.(2) Characteristics.Caliber 9 mm i actually 0.347 inch).Length \\jtltouL 4toc l , 1 2 inches.Length with slock25 I j inches.Weight without slock. .2 pounds 8 ounces.Feed10- or 20-round magazine.(3) Am~I~uuifion. Static!;i~-cl 9-mm ammunitionis used.3. Signal Pistolsa. LK;UT SIC.NAL PISTOL ( Lcuchtpistolc).This is the standard German signal l)ihtol; it is26.7-mm caliber, has a smooth bore, and fires aseries of colored signal cartridges, as \\-~11 as a\\-histling cartridge I Z-‘l‘c.if~ci/i,clri~, ~ used as a gaswarning six-ital.Figure 2.—L1'clltlwr I’istolc 38, ctrlibcr 9 1t tc. WALTHER PTSTOT. (Pistole 38). (1) Generaldescription. The Walther weapon is a semiautomaticpistol with a gril) magazine fcctl. 1t ihrecoil-operated, the breech mechani::m slitlit:gto the rear after each rou has been te d Thepistol may bv carried loaded with the hammer uttcocked; thti first shot may be fired by a doubleactionmechanism. The safety is a catch on theleft-hand side of the body.(2) Characteristics.Caliber....9 mm (actually 0.347 inch).Length of barrel............ 43A inches.Weight, loaded.....2 pounds 5 ounces.Feed.......... .&round grip magazine.(3) Anbvttt~zitio~z. German or Eritish 9-1 1Parabellum atnmunition may be used in thisweapon.(1. MAVSER PRSROR.. (1) Gc~~rrnl drscriptiojl.The Mauser can be used as a semiautomaticpistol or as a carbine when attached to its woodenVII—2luiiure 3.—Kainfl j-istule (grenade and signalpistol).b. MODIFIED SICXAI. 1'I-TOL I Kampfpistole).The Germans have modified llie I.cuchlpistole byrifling the bore and providing a small sigh1 to product-the h'ainpfpistole i/•/

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451barreled shotguns. This may be set so either oneor both of the barrels will fire when the triggerisb o t h standard signal cartridges arefired.and a folding stock is attached above the pistolgrip. The liner and the folding stock' enable thispistol to fire a hollow-charge grenade as a closequarterweapon against tanks (J'iiJ. 5). Withthe steel liner removed this pistol Lvill fire thestandard signal cartridges firccl from the Lcttclitfistolr.4. Machine PistolsV'ujurc 4.—Sturmpistolc (modified light signal pistol).I'tt/ttyc 5.—Sturmpistolc (modified light signal pistol>.d. GRENADE AND SIGNAL PISTOL I Sturmpistolc).This weapon consists basically of thestandard Lciicht pistole to which a loose steel lineris fitted (Pigs. 4 and 5). This liner is rilledand fitted with a base, which prevents firing astandard round through the liner. A combinedfront and rear sight is clamped around the barrel,a. M.P. (MASCIITXKNI'ISTOLF.) 40. (1) Generaldescription. This biowback-operated machinepistol (/'/ developed from theM.P. 38, an earlier modrl designed for issue toparachute troops and still used. Distinctive featuresof both weapons are the folding stock andall metal and plastic construction. The safetyrecess at the rear of the eocking-liandle stop ismarked "S". To set the weapon on "safe", theoperating handle is pulled back as far as it willgo and then pushed upward into the safety notch.On later models, a safelv stud is located on thecocking handle. The magazine is inserted in a\crlical position on the underside of the receiver.The \\-e;lpoii has a 1Wnletcr ( IC9 J.nrds) fixcylrear sight and a 200-meter (210 yards) foltlingrim- siglit.( 2) Characteristics.Caliber.... ‘1 9 mm iactually 0.317 inch).Length, over-all33) _> inches."Weight without magazine 9 pounds.Feed32-round magazine.Rate of tire(cyclic j .... . S O rouilcls per minulv.(practical).... 1SO roun(ls phi- nlillutv.1'iyurc 0.—M.P. 40, caliber '•> nun, slio-wiiuj magazine.VII—3

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451f-'igiire 7.—M.P. 43/1, caliber 7.92 mm, sluneing magazine in place for jinn,/.Figure S.—M.I'. 44, (modified M.P. 43), caliber 7.92 mm, icith grenade launcher attached.(3) .lu~~~~wziti~~~. This weapon sLIW the (2) Charaeleristics.standard 9-rain Parabellum ammunition.Caliber7.2 mm (0.312 inch).b. MODEL 43/1 MACHINE PISTOL {M.P. Length37 inches.[Maschinen pistole) 13/1). (1) General desuiptiorr.Weight11 pounds.This gas-op-atd nlacl~inc l)i>tol (Fig. Feed35- to 38-round magazine.7) is constructed almost clltircly of 1ll~.tal htallll) Muzzle velocity. . . .2.200 feet per second.iilgs aid cm be striplml only to a limited degree.Although provision is made for 1~0th singI?-shot (3) Ammunition. A special type of short rifleant1 automatic fix, hrski of mm-c than fiverountls are li0t ~-ecc,~:lnietltletl, ailtl the pistol iscaliber ammunition is used m tins machine pistol.c. M.P. I MASC;; IXF.X PISTOI.F. I 44. This weaponIjest used as a single-shot \I-capoIl. ‘l’liis n-c~~~pon is the .1/./'. 7." 7 slightlv modified to accommodatehas not proved vcrv successful because it is impossiblethe standard ri lie grenade launcherto repair in the field and because of its cup (Schiessbccher). The barrel is machinedpoor firing characteristics. 7’1~~~ stainpings iormingthe gas q-linc:er ;ntd htly cx5ings al-e llld~ Ofthin material and are very easily damaged. Theweapon is fed by a curved magazine below thereceiver and has a11 SOO-meter (S76 yards) leafr

I MARCH 19455. Rifles and Automatic Riflesa. MODEL 98 RIFLE AXD CARBINE (Gczvclir 98and Karabincr 98). (1) Gcllrral dcscriptiou.The standard Clerman rilles am1 car-1~inr.s are allof the same basic bolt-opcmted Alauser design(Fiy.c. 9 and IO), but may bc di\-itlcd into threedistinct tj.pes. These are the rifle Alode 9S(GELVJZY 98) which is 49% inches long and h;lsthe sling fitted undcrncath ; the long barrel carbineAlode 9s b (Kauabirwr 98 b) n-hich is approximatclythe same l

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure IO.—Gczwelzr 41, mlihcr 7.92 mm semiautomatic rifle.Figure Il.—Fallschirnljiigcryeweltr 42, raliber 7.92 mm automatic rijkd. MODEL 42 AUTOMATIC RIFLE (Fallschirmji igcrgcttvllr 42). (1) Gcmral description. Althoughthe German nomenclature indicates thatthis rifle (Fig. 11) is intended to be an automaticweapon for use by parachute troops, it also canbe used as a light machine gun or a machine carbine.The weapon is designed more like a lightmachine gun than a rifle. It is gas-operated, fittedwith a permanently attached folding bipod, andcan be fired automatically or single shot. A compensatoris attached to the muzzle, and provisionis made for the attachment of a telescopic sight.A bayonet also is attached. The magazine is heldin a h&izontal position on the left of the receiver.The aperture rear sight is graduated from 100 to1,200 meters (109 to 1,310 yards). The safety islocated on the left side above the pistol grip, andthe lever for selecting automatic or single-shot fireis placed above and to the rear of the trigger. AVII—6later model of this iveapon, slightly heavier andmore solidly constructed, has tllc biped closer tothe muzzle,(2) Cllavactcristics.Caliber.......... 7.92 mm (0.312 inch).Length with bayonet ...... 43% inches.Weight9 pounds2O-round magazinta.Fee d( 3 ) il~~~mu~ifio~z. Stnntlartl 7.92-mm a~nnlunitionis used in this \vcapon.e. MODEL 43 SEAIIACTOMATIC RIFLE (Karczbimr43).i 1) (;cJlcroZ drscrip/iorz. This ~vc’apon,originally 1,nown as the Gi’,ick’li~ 43, is a semiautomaticrifle and \\-a~ tl~v~lopcd from theGc~el~ 41. The trigger and l)olt mechanisms arcthe same as those used on tile (;cx~~‘/~Y 41, lmt thepiston and gas q+ntIt~r are of different design.The piston group is located 011 top cJf the barrel

UNCLAîFliDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451instead of concentrically. The rifle may be loadedby inserting either a fully loaded magazine or twocartridge clips into an empty magazine from thetop. The leaf rear sight is graduated from 100to 1,250 meters (109 to 1,365 yards).(2) Characteristics.CaliberLength, over-allWeight7.92 mm (0.312 inch).45 inches.lO pounds.(3) Ammunition. Standard 7.92-mm ammunitionis used in this weapon.6. Machine Gunsa. ~~ODEI, 34 MACHINE GUN (M.G. 31). (1)General dcscriptio~z. This weapon (Pigs. 12 and13) was the original standard German dual-purposemachine gun and is still used, although ithas been replaced largely by the N.G. 42. (M.G.is the German abbreviation for Maschinengemhr,which means "machine gun".) It may be used ona bipod, on single oi dual AA mounts, or mountedon a tripod as a heavy machine gun. It still isused as the subsidiary armament of all Germantanks. It is operated by short recoil, assisted bymuzzle blast, and has a standard Solothurn-typebreech mechanism. The gun has R leaf rear sightgraduated from 200 to 2,000 meters (219 to 2.190yards j , an A A ring sight, and an optical sightfor use with the tripod mount. It is fed either bySO-round metallic-link belts, which may be connectedtogether, or by drums. The weapon is aircooledby a perforated barrel jacket.(2) Characteristics.Caliber7.92 mm (0.312 inch).Length, over-all48 inches.Weight with bipod 26% pounds.m r eight with tripod42 pounds.FeedBelt or drum.Rate of fire(cyclic) .....900 rounds per minute.(practical)......As LMG 100 to 120rounds per minute.AS 13~ MG 300rounds per minute.Effective rang

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451F i g u r e 1 3 . — M . G . 34, caliber 7.92 m m , on tripod m o u n t its licit: y m.:cliiiie : /unFigure 14.—61.G. 42, cc~libcr 7.YL IJ~IIL, OIL hipod mozf~~f.b. MODEL 42 AIXCHINE GUN (M.G. 42). (1)General description. This is the latest type ofGerman machine gun known and in most caseshas replaced the JI.G. 34 as a standard dual-purposeweapon (I:ig. I?). Like the d1.G. 34, itmay be used on a fixed bipod, a tripod mount, or anantiaircraft mount. The square barrel casing makesthis machine gun unsuitable as a tank weapon.The main features of the weapon arc the extensiveuse ol lmssings in its construction, a greatI!increased rate of lire, and a i|u:ck barrel changefeature necessitated l>v the high rate of lire whichcauses the gull to livat t-apitll\. The weapon isfundamentally similar to the M.G. 3/ and has thesaiiic’ short recoil action. It Ii.,- no provision iorsing-le-~liol liw. ho\\-c,\cr.(2) C‘l/ct/~ctc.i,~r-i.\.fI~-s.CaliberLength, over-al!Weigh)Rate of lire(cyclic )( l )ractic;l l ) .ElfceliYe raiiL'e.7.'L' n i O..>12 inch ).... .49 inches.. 2.

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IP igfire 15.—4 1 6.1.5, c-trlilwr 7.92 mm, uircrrzft llltrchine pry trdnptcd for grozfrrd me.C. LIOI)R-L 15 MACHINE GUN (?d.G. 15). (1)Gcncral rlrscri~tio~z. Although primarily intendedas an aircraft machine gun, the 111.G. 15 has beenadopted as a ground \~ealmn (I;i,q. 1.5). using a11adapter, which clips arcuntl the barrel for attachingthe stantlard biped, and a butt exknsion.It is a light weapon and has short recoil action,firing automatic only.(2) Clrnructcristics.Caliber..........7.92 mm (0.312 inch).Lenglh, over-all 42 inches. 1'igitre Id.—M.G. 151/20, a JU-nim aircraft machine gun.IVeight15 pounds 12 ounces.Feed75-round sadtlle magazine.cliaiigeal~lc barrels ; tliiY is not the case, allhoughRate of firethe gulls are vrry similar iii construction.(cyclic).....1,000 rounds per minute. (2) Cllrrvclcic,ri.stic-s.(pr::ctical) ....300 rounds per minute. Caliber....2 0 mm (0.787 inch).Length, OWI-=a!! ........... 69$4 inches.(3) illlz,lllllllitioll. The standard 7.92-mm rim- Weight 92>y> pounds.less ammunition is used in this machine gun.Fetd .... IXsint~grsting metallic-link belt.tl. MOTEL 151/10 ~IACIIINE GUN (M.G. kite of fire ROO rcmltls per minute.1.51/20). (1) General cicmiption. Although Jluzzle volocity i 1II

I MARCH 194511MOuitiTM-E 30-451now obsolete. Next followed the 20-mm Solo- tank grenntle launchers in prcii rencc to riiles, andthurn, which was issued in two models: one single the only relic of tlu^c four ihn.K'K is the Gvanatshot,and the other both single shot and automatic. bi'ichsc, which is a Panzcrhiu hsc ? l) modified toThe tendency during 1944 has been to adopt anti- fire rifle grenades In mi a nil' launcher cup.I—Figure 17.—Panzerbiichse 39, a 792-mm antitank rifle4VII—10figure 18.—Granatbikhse 39, a 7,92-mm antitank rifle modified for launching rifle •nrnades.

I MARCH 1945 hULfio>i TM-E 30-451tFigure 19.—Faiistpatrone 2 (Panzerjatist), 44-mm recoilless antitank grenade launcher,showing luunchilly tube and grcrudc.b. RECOILLESS ANTITANK GRENADE LAUNCHEC—Pawcrfaz~~t. This is a series of antitankgrenade launchers each bearing the name Pawcrfazutbut each having a &&rent number afterthe name.i1) Pamrfaust 30(a) Gcmral Description. This weapon, alsoknown as the Faust/xztrouc 2, w:e the first of thefour models of recoilless antitank grcnatle dischargersto be produced. It is designed for useagainst armor at ranges of about 30 yartls, atwhich range a penetration of just over 200 mmis obtained.The weapon consists of a steel launching tube,containing a percussion fit-cd l~rol~~llctlt char,q~. Ahollow-charge antitank grenade is fit-et1 from thetube.The Jvcapon is fired from the skmding, kneelingor prone positions, aim being taken owr the verticalsight and the forward entl of the bomb.(b) Charactrristics.Uiatnctcr of tube 13A in&s .Over-all length41 inches.\Teight ............... 11 pountls.(c) ifllzlllllliiti0/2. The grcnatlc is providedlvith spring steel fins I\-hich ;~re \\raplwl aroutttlthe tail for loading and which arc releas~~l as theprojectile leaves the tube and stabilize the bombduring fight.(2) Ptrux~r/aztst Klein 30This \\-capon, also known as the Fausfpafrolzc 1or (;~cfclior, is a smaller version of the I’axcrfawst30 and has a dificrcntly shaped projectilehc:d. The system of operation is the sameand the range is again about 30 yards. X penelrationof 140 mm is claimed for this projectile.(3) Pair,-rrfazist 60This 1;tunchcr is similar in appeatxttce to tltePumr!‘trlf.st .:o. A redesigned firing mechanismhas been fitted and al>o a new sight, whichhas ap~rturcs for 30, 60 and SU n~~tcrs.The tube of tltis weapon is sliglttl>- thicker thanthat of the Panzcrfaust 30 at~d the \veight hasbeen increawtl to 13~2 111~.The pettctration ligttr~ of 200 mm for the Pn~tx~ftrusl30 will apl~lv equally well to this weapon,(4) Ptzll2~‘~/u1fSf 100This is the latest c~f the Panzcrfaust wries ofantitank lauiicli~rs to be encountered. 111 alqxaraticeit is similar to the Panzcrfaust 611, t!loughslightly increased in size and performance. Al)cnctr;ctic,n tigure of LOO mm is claimed for thisweapon, which is sighted up to 1.50 tnc~tcrs.c. KOCL

IUNCLASSIFi:.!IMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IFigure 20.—Raketcnpanzerbikhsc 54, an m titnuk rocket lmc,l~-ll~~r.an effective range of 120 meters (130 yards) for elevation by a spade hand grip and m:lnunlly trathisweapon.vcrsctl on a traversing slitlc. The I\-ealmn has a(2) Characteristics. front sight and an adjustable rear sixlit mountedCaliber 88 mm (3.5 inches). on the bnrrcl. The rc’ar sight is gr;ltluatctl fromLeng-th, mm-all .5 feet 4> < inches. 180 to 700 meters i 1^5 to 7(o yards). This mayExternal diameter 3.7 inches. mean that the weapon can be used in an antiper-Weight 20>4 pounds. sonnel role as a mortar at long ranges.Maximum range......_....132 yards.(2) C‘iltri.clc-fc~ri.sfics.(3) R~~zmzwitio~~. The projectile is a /“-poundhollow-charge r-ockctt containing a propellant ii1Caliber.......... S S n i m 1'3.5 inches).the tail tube. The rocket is cquilqml lvith a noseLength, over-all '* feet 2 inches.fuzc and a circular tail fin. It nieasurcs 2 fwt ly4Weight 270 pounds ( approximately).inches in length.\\Ytlth of carriage,. 3 icvt 312 inches.li

I MARCH 1945I. GeneralSection III. MORTARSThe &~-mans began the war with two principalmortars: the .50-mm and 81-mm pieces as companyand battalion weapons, respectively. Theyfound, however, that these weapons did not matchthe mortar fire power of their enemies, particularI\,that of the Russians. Two principal measureswere taken in an effort to correct this deficiency.A short Sl-mm mortar was developed for use asa light weapon to supplement the SO-mm piece. Acopy of the Russian 120-mm mortar, which farsurpassed the performance of any Gcrmnn mortar,was adopted.higtirc 22.—5 cm Irichtt~r Gmnutemuerfer 36.2. Light Mortarsa. 50-uM MORTAR (5 cm l.eichtcr Granatcnw,crfcr36). (1) Gellcral description. This isa muzzle-loaded, trigger-fired weapon used solelyfor high angle fire. Elevation is adjusted by anelevating arm attached to the baseplate and supportingthe tube, with provision for both coarseand fine adjustment. Traverse of about 15 degreesin either direction is controlled by a traversingarc of conventional design. Two cross-lr\,elingo n e on on each side of the baseplate,are used for initial laying and to steady thr mortarduring firing."1UpJC!fqSyF;- 1 0 TM-E 30-45 1i2) C‘llnvclif[.risfic.s.C‘alilj~r ..........50 mm (1.97 inches).Total xveight31 pounds.Maximum traverse 34°.Elevation ........... 43” to 90”.Maximum range.570 yards.IVeight of shell2.2 pounds.Rate of fire. . . 12 to 20 rounds per minute.I .A) ~lmi~~u~fifio~. This \veapon fires an HEshell \veighing 2.2 pounds, including 4.5 ounces ofTS T explosive filling.11. XLU\R ,~ ~ TOMATIC A~~RTAR (5 cm AlasclLiliL~rl!/unllnt~i~crf~,~).(1) Gcncra2 description. ThisI)o\\-“r-“I’C.rateCl automatic mortar is almost twiceas long as the standard 50-mm weapon. Sixroundclips are manually loaded into a rack on theleft i s each round is fed onto the breechblock,the tuhc slides tlolvn over the shell andlocks, releasing the firing pin. The feeding, locking,and firing niechan~snis are electrically operated.The mortar has been found only in specialconcrete turrets in fixed tlcfensive systems. Theseemplacements, bc~low groun(l except for the roofof the turret, incorpor;ltc ammunition storage,lpowc’r plant, ammunition hoist, and living quartersfor the crew.12) .,lllinlzllrifioll. S1:mtlard 50-mm amm’unitionis fired and a rang

I MARCH 1945UNCLA3G;F;:J TM-E 30.451Fipr,, 23.--8 cm schwercr (;rallc]tc.,lri’c’rfrr (81-mm mortar) in artion.Figure r e24.-a CPM schererGratzatenw,c’rfer 34 or 31-11!m ~~or~VII—-14

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDrM. E]0 . 45l(3) Ammunition. The HE shell contains 1.1pounds of TNT, and the smoke shell contains 1pound of sulphur trioxide. Jn addition to thestandard smoke and H E ammunition, anothershell kno~vtt as the "bouncing bomb" \vas usedwith this mot-tar to provide air burst, but provedunsuccessful. This projectile weighed the sameas the standard HE shell but contained only 0.8pound of TNT.(2) Clzaructcristics.Caliber.........81.4 mm (3.19 inches).Total weight62 pounds.Maximum traverse 10°.Elevation 47° to 88°.Maximum range1,200 yards.13) Amllilolitiou. ‘I‘hls weapon fires the sameammunition as the stantlard 81-mm mortar, butonly three incrtments fiiav I)c uwd, giving a maximumrange of l.LOO yartis lvitlt HE.4. Heavy Mortarsa. 105-,T,T SMOKE MORTAR (10 cm Nebeliverfer35). ilj General description. This isan cnlarg~t lwwion of IIIL. st;lntlard 81-mm mortar.lssu~tl originally to c~h~itical \varfare troops,it was intt’n&(l prim:lril\~ for firing smoke andchemical shells. although HI'", shells now areissued. In appearance 111~ mortar is almost identicalwith the 81-mm mortar,(2) ClzaracfcGstirs.Caliber....105 mm (4.13 inches).Total weight.............231 pounds.Maximum traverse 13°.Elevation 45° to 80°.Maximum range.........3,300 yards.(with four incrc,mctits)1Veight of shell ..........16 pounds.(3) Am1?2ullitioll. Both H E and smoke shellsweigh 16 pountis. The I 1I < shell contains 3.75pounds nf TNT.Figure 25.—8 cm Kurzer Granaienwerfer 42 or short81-tnm.b. SHORT 81-MM MORTAR (8 cm Kurzer Granatenwerfer42). (1) General description. Thisweapon represents an attempt to combine the hittingpower of a medium mortar with the mobilityand lightness of a smaller weapon, such as the 50mm mortar. It is a reduced version of the standard81-mm mortar with modified elevating andtraversing gears. The cross-leveling mechanismis similar to that used in the U. S. 81-mm mortarM-l.II. CHEMICAL MORTAR (10 ctn Nebclwcrfcr40). (1) Gcucval dcscriptiotl. This is a smoothbore,breech-loaded weapon transported on a carrtagefrom which it can be f~retl. The mortar isof monobloc construction. The unusual breechmechanism is so designed that the movement ofthe operating linntlle catt\c’s the rvar of the mot-tatto ride over the breechblock, which is secured tothe frnmc. A 1I)ulTer cylill(lcr is located internall!on each sitlc of the frantic. the buffer pistons beingattached to the sides of the. breechblock. The carr~agcis constructed of .ILY1 tttlittg and providctlwith clc\atilig and traversing gears and a sighingarrang~titcttl.(2) Chavactc74stics.Caliber.......105 mm (4.13 inchesj.Total L\eight ............1,708 pounds.Maximum traverse 14°.VII4 5

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451U~jCLAr;;iF;EDFigwe 26—10 cm hrcbclwrfcr 40,Elevation I :.......... 4.5’ to Sj’.Maximum range (MIC shell) . .6,780 yards.\Veight of ME s h e l l . . . 10.1 p0~Illds.13) iluznlu~qifio/~. This mortar fires both 11md smoke projectiles. The smoke shell C-CigllS0.5 pound more than the HlC shell.VII—-16e. 105-MM EFXKI) Dr.Fi.xsK MORTAR (10 cmI.cichtc llauhilcr Turin i. I j (irncra! description.This mortar is incorpi irated in undergrounddefensive systems. 'I he ninrtar itself is located inthe upper compartment of a large cylindrical emplacementami is ciimpleieK ••nclnî-d except for a

IMARCH 1945UNCLASS;; IEOsniall firing aperture covcred by a steel shutter.‘Ilie lower conipartnient is wet1 for storing ammunitionand housing the crc’\v. i\mmunition iscarried up to the nior:k~r on a con\-c’yor belt and islllallually loaded. The nlortnr is a smooth-bow,breech-loatlctl weapon, fitted with a setxiautoinaticl)rwch ni~chnnisni, horizontal sliding brccchblock,and h\-tlro])neuiiiatic recoil system. The mortartulw is held in a cratlle which may be raised andlockctl into firing poGtion. The trn\-ersing nlechnnisniis arrang~~l so that turning the traversinghantlle rotates the entiw fiyliting coni~srtnient.Is‘irc normally is controlled electrically from anckcr\-ation lwst, but also cat1 be Contro11~~d b \means of a periscope in the fighting conqw-Went.(2) Characteristics. lktnils of the characteristicsof this \veapon arc lacking. Limits of elevationare 45 degrees to 90 degrees.(3) rfnunz~~zifio~~. ~Irnniunition fired is thesame as tliat used with the 10.5nini smoke niort;lr(~\‘~l~~kwfw 40) but nith difierent charg

i MARCH 1945porting arm. Two insulated electrical contactplates are located above the supporting arm andarc connected internally to a contact tube runningto the upper end of the spigot to contact the electricprimer of the propelling charge.(2) Cllaractcvistics.Diameter of spigot..........,3.5 inches.Total \\-ei:ght205 pounds.Total traverse 5 °.Elevation 45° to 80°.. Maximum range 766 yards.(three increments)Weight of shell.....,........46 ~OUIIC~S.(3) Anz~~zwzition. This mortar fires HE orsmoke projectiles. The H E shell contains 15poumls of amatol explosive. Reports indicatr ammunitionknown as the "harpoon projectile" isUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451also used. This shell is said to t a o andgrapnel with which to clear nll ll cso r ofcharges.f. 380-MM HEAVY SPIGOT MORTAR (38 cmSchwcrer Laduntjsx^crjer). ( 1 i General description.Xo details of this weapon arc available, itsexistence having been established from identificationof a 380-mm 111-', spigot shell. This mortar isprobably an enlarged version of the 200-mmweapon.(2) Cliartrrt~,l.isfit-.Diameter of spigotWeight of shell6.25 inches.331 pounds.(3) Ammunition, l'oth III-, and smoke ammunitionare fired by this mortar. The III", shellbursting charqc \\,cx ig -11sVII—-l8

MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451I. GeneralSection IV. ARTILLERYa. DEVET.OIWIW~. The Gct1-mans, coniparativ~l~speaking, neglcctetl their artillery during the Carl)stages of the war and since have been compelledto give increased thought to it. The German conceptof modern war in 1939 was that of the Illitzkvirgor “1,ightning JVar", in which armor andthe dive bomber jointly were to dominate thebattlefield. The enemy was to be softened up b !bombing and smashed by the tanks, and artiller\scarcely had more than a subsidiary role. TheB’litzkricg was successful against inadequatelyequipped armies, but the gradual recovery of Germany'senemies and the complete bankruptcy ofthe "Lightning War" theory have compelled theGermans to attempt a refurbishing of their artillerydoctrine.1). DIVISION ARTILLERY. The division artiller)weapons with \vhich Gumany started the \var\vere all of the "18" class (10 cm Ir,. /:.I/. 18, 10cm K. IS, 15 cm s. I,.!!. 115’j, and all these gunsare still standard. Vari~111,s r,sl~ to be contemplated atpresent.2. Infantry Gunsa. 75-3 1 11 LIGHT IKF~\ITTRY GUN (7.5 CIM le. I.G. 18). (1) Gcnrral tlt~scviption. The 7.5 c~ta lc.I. G. 18 is an infantry close-support weapon firingin both lower and upper registers. It has a boxtypemount on ptt~um:ttic-tired disk wheels, and isfitted I\-ith a shield. A modification, the Ic. Gcb.I. G. 18, has ~vootlen-~llol;ed wheels, a split tubulartrail, and no shiclcl ; this Torsion has Similarperformance and is used by airborne troops. 130thmodels have an unu~u;~l tulI(‘. ~~iica~tl in a slipperblock. Operation of the, breech mechanism causesthe rear of the tube to riê c,lcai- of the block forloading.Figure 29.—7.5 cm le. I.G. 18 (75-mm light iafantg guni in al-tfou.VII—19

1 MARCH 1945(2) Characteristics.Caliber .....75 mm (2.95 inches).Length of tulx ..34.75 inches.LZ’cigllt in xtion .,880 pounds.Maximum I-anpc .. 3.000 1:ir(ls.Muzzle vclority .,725 feet per sc~cont!.Traverse 12°.Elevation .. - —10” to + 73’.TractionMotor- or horse-drawn.Mountain version,..Six pack loatls.(heaviest 165 poun(l.).(3) Ammunition. HE an d hollow-chargerounds are .fired by this gun. The UK rounds\I-dgh 13.2 ant1 12.13 pountls.b. 75-MM INFANTRY GUN (7.5 cm le. I. (;. 3T 1.(1) General description. The 7.5 cm le. I. G. 37,formerly called 7.5 cw Pak 37, consists of a 75mm tube, 21 calibers long, on the 3.7 CIJ~ Pakn10Ll11t. The gun has a four-baf& muzzle brakewhich is square in cross section.(2) Chur-nctwistics.Caliber ..75 mm (A ’ ,5 incllcs).Length ol tu l ) c . 5 feet 1.95 inc-llcz.\Veight in action....1,124 poun(ls.Maximum rally (\\ith trails tlrq in 3 Feet toincreaue clc\ation).. .5,030 yartl xMuzzle velocity.1,165 feet SKI- second.Traverse...... LJ I KI~Y 60”.Elevation .. 22” 30'.Traction ........ Horsc- or motor-drawn.UNCLASSIFIED(3) . I mntuiutioii. III. and i n illnw -charge projectilesare fired. Thev are identical in those usedwith the 7.5 on le. /.(/. IS. The hollow-chargeprojectile will penetrate 75 nun (2.95 inches) at30 tlcgrces from norlilaI.c. 150-MM HEAVY IXFANTKY Grx \15 cm S.I. G. 33). i 1) General description. The 15 ons. I. G. 33 is a standard infantry weapon, whichcan he used for high- or low-angle tirca. The tubeis monobloc. with a horizontal sliding breechblockand cartridge case obturation.. The piece ismounted on a iwo-wheeled carnage with a boxtrail. Kccenlly this gun has ln-cn issued with astick bomb used against wn\ . ; ml minetields.( 2 | Characteristics.Caliber150 1111:1 (5.'»meheO.Length of tube 5 feet, 4.57 inclii -.Weight in action 3,360 pound-.Maximum range (I IE) .5,140 \ards.Muz/lc \T1OCKV 7tS~ Id 1 ]>IT srcnlid.Traverse '. 11' 15'I Elevation 0 io 7.iTraction II'T M T in< >i' >i --drawn.(3) . Imnutiii/ioii. llh. and smoke projectilesare fired, in addition to a stick bomb. Projectileweights are: 111-., 84 pounds; smoke, 85 pounds;ant1 stick l~~i~il~, 197 pmti~l~.Figure 30.—15 cm s. I.G. 33 (150-ltim heavy infantry gun) shoienni box trailVII—20

IUMCLASS nr0MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 31.—7.5 cm Geb. G. 36 (75wm ~l~ouutabc kowitzcr) with perforated ~.yllrrrlvi~.cll IIIIC.~C brake.3. Mountain Gunsa. 75-MM MOUNTAIN HOWITZER (7.5 cm Geb.G.36). (1) Gcucral description. The 7.5 C/J/ Grill.c;. 36 is the standard German lkhtu moullt;lillhowitzer. The n~o~~obloc tube map be fitted will1either a baffled or a perforated cylindrical muzzlebrake. Coth the buiTcr and recuperator arc bcI(~the tube. The breachblock is a horizontal slidingtype, and the mount has split-box trails, solidrubber tires, but no shield. The howitzer may bequickly broken down into 11 pack loads, theheaviest of which are the tube (249 pounds), andthe cradle and recoil system (250 pounds).(2 j Cllcl,.irctrl-i.ctii..cCaliber. 75 nun (Z.')5 inches).Length of tube .5i I I') itlcllc-cigllt in articn l , . 1 ,(>5.Muzzle velocity. . . . . I..ir8 Icel jicr second.TraverseElevation. -S to -f 70".Traction ' I torse-drawn, :ledgesor pack.(3) .-frr~r~~~~r~itio/r. I I I < and hollowcharge projectilesarc tiretl. Tht 11 ; projcctilcs weigh 12.6pounds, and 12.81 pounds. The hollow-chargeprojcctilc neighs 0.75 ~muiicls.Figure 32.—10.5 cm Gcb. H. 40 (105run wouutaiu lzox~itz,~Y) zcilli doublc-hifflc nmzde brake.VII—21

I MARCH 1945 UNCL.A : . I I I I L. U TM-E 30-451b. 105-~ ~ MOUNTAIN HOM.ITZER (10.5 CMGeb. H. 40). ‘(1) General description. Thisweapon is the latest German mountain artillerypiece to appear. It is fitted with a double-bafflemuzzle brake with wide side flanges, and has ahorizontal sliding breechblock and cartridge caseobturation. The split-trail carriage is mounted onlight alloy wheels. For transport the weapon isdisassembled into nine loads, the heaviest of whichis the barrel and muzzle brake (551 pounds).(2) Characteristics.Caliber .........,...105 mm (4.14 inches).Length of tube........11 feet, 3.4 inches (includinghretch ringand muzzle brake).\Veight in action.....3,660 pounds.Maximum range 13,810 yards.Muzzle velocity 1,870 feet per second.Traverse........... * .. 50” 40'.Ele\-ation - 4” 47' to C- 70”.TractionUsually carried hyhorse-drawn cart.(3) A#zt~m?~itiolf. The 10.5 cllt Geb. H. 40fires semi-fixed Ill- by constructing the carriagelargely of light alloys, and the gun may bc droppedby parachute in t\vo \vickrsr cclnl;liners. The thinhorizontal sliding breechblock is hand-ol)erated.A Venturi tube extends from the rear of thebreech which is boretl to allcI\\’ g:is~> to escape.Light metal disk-type wheel> are fitted to themount.VIl—22Figure 33.-7.5 cllz L.G. 40 (75~mm airborn.e recoilless gm) showing hrcccl

I MARCH 1945 UNCLAS::FILD TM-E 30-451Figure 34.—10.5 cm L.G. 40 (105-mm airborne recoilless gun) in traveling position.(2) Characteristics. 10.5 cm I-. G. 10. formerly known as the.Caliber 75 mm (2.95 inches). 10.5 cm L. G. 2 GKp.,10. like the 7 .5 cm L. G. 40, hasLength of tube includa jet at the rear ior the escape of part of the propcllentgases instead of a recoil system. There ising breech ring andjet45.28 inches.no brecchblock. The firing nlechanism is operatedWeight in action 321 pounds.Maximum range (HE) .8,900 yards (estimated).from thy toi) of the breech ring and the strikerMuzzle velocity (HE). 1,238 feet per second. hits n I)ritlic’r in the ,i(l~ of Ihe cartridge. ATraverse with elevationmoclificntic~n of tliis \\~‘;L~IIIII, the 10.5 cln L. G.—15° to + 42° 30° right and left.40/2, also existsTraverse with elevation—15° to + 20° 360° right and left.Elevation with traverse(2) C‘litrrac-frrisiics.of 360°—15° to + 20°.Caliber105 mm (4.14 inches).Elevation with traverseLength of tube, includof 30°, right and left.—15° to -f 42°.ing jet() feet. 3 inches.TractionAirborne.Weight in action 855 pounds.Maximum range 8.694 yards.(3) Ammunition. HE, APCBC, and hollow Muzzle velocity (T-11:) . 1.009 Ic.et ~wr second.Traverse80°.charge projectiles are fired. Projectile weightsElevation—15° to + 40° 3(T.are: HE, 12 pounds, APCBC, 15 pounds; hollowcharge, 10.13 pounds. TheTractionAirborne.hollow-chargeprojectile will penetrate 50 mm at 30 degrees fromnormal.b. 105-MM AIRBORNE RECOILLESS GUN (10.5cm L. G. 40). (I) General descriptinn. The(3) rlnZIILiflzitioll. HE and hollow-chargeprojectiles arc’ firctl. The IMW of the cartridgecase has a circular bak~~li~c disk which is destroyed\vhcn the gun fires. 1’~)j

I MARCH 1945c. 105-MM AIRBORNE RECOILLESS GUV (10.5cm L. C;. 42). (1) Gcwcral dcscripfio/t. ‘I‘10.5 an L. G. 42, formerly l;noUx as the I,. (;. 2Xlt, differs from the 10.5 an L. G. 40 in that ithas a horizontal sliding breechblock bored for thepassage of gases to the rear. The mount is matlcof fairly hea\-y tubing, and is designed for rapiddismantling and reassembly. Coth air and packtransport are possible. A variation, known as10.5 cm L. G. 32/l, differs in UGght il,l’Jl~,wu~~~ls). It USC’S the mmc rmge t::blcs.12) Cllavncfrrisfics.c,AI’11xr .......105 mm (3.14 inches).Length of tu l l e ... 6 feet, 0.28 inch (it~ludingjet).~ TM-E 30-451Weight in action 1,21/ ;- • 11n• 1 -.\laximum range (HP:) .S,OV-i J,,171.!bIuzzle velocity l,O’N I t per second.Traverse360” at elevations up to12’ ; 71” 15' at ,levationsover 12°.Elevation15° to 42° 35'.TractionAirbol-ne or pack.i3) r2wnxnifiOn. This ~nqon fires HE, hol-Ion-charge, sxnolie, ant1 TIK incendiary projcctilVs.The projectile wqight- arc’: 111-', 32.58 pountlS:l~~lluw charge, 26.62 and 27.17 1”~1111~12: Snloke.32.36 pounds, and HK incendiary, 33.52 pounds.Figure 35.—Right front view (top) 10.5 on le. F.H. 18 (M), the standard divisional field artillery howitzer with nntr.debralic, left recw aicw (bottom).VIl—24

I MARCH 1945 UNCUT TM-E 30-451Figure 36.—10.5 cm le. F.ll. IS (105-nim field howitzer), the standard divisional field artillery howitzer.5. Field and Medium Artillerya. 75-MM FIELD (ii N 38 (7.5 cm Feld Kanone38). (1) Gr~lcrtrl drscriptiou. This gut1 is Oicon\-cnlional design, with a scminutotnntic horizontalsliding breechblock. X slotted cylindricalmuzzle brake is fitted lo the niotiol~loc lul)c. ‘l‘h\-drol)ileuiiiatic recuperator is above the tube,ant1 the hydraulic buffer below. Equilibratorsare spring type. The carriage has split trails ofri\.ctctl box construction and artillery wheels.(2) C‘lrurncfcristics.C;dil)er ....... i . 5 mm (2.(/S inrlws).Ixtq:th of tu l x . . 9 feet, 3% inches.\\‘eight in action..3,136 pounds.Maximum range. . IL.570 yards.Muzzle velocity 1,985 feet per second.Traversv 50^.Klevation '. .—5° to -)- 45°.1~action .... Trxtor.(3) .hnmunition. Two types of HI', shell andone Itollow-charge shell are fired. The HI: sltell~\veigh 12.S.S pounds and 13.88 pounds, and tlthello\\--charge, 10.07 pounds.b. 105-MM FIELD IIOWITZER (10.5 cm LeichteFeld Ilaubitze IS). (1) Gc~rcral dcscriptiojl.This is the standard divisional field artillery howitzerdeveloped during the last \vat-. It 11as atiytlropneumatic recoil system and a heav!..siml)l\- designed breech mechnnistn with a horizottWsliding block and cartridge case obkrxliott.The first modification of the original motlel aI)pearcd in 1911 when a muzzle brake of cotlv~lltionaldesign was fitted to permit a new longrangecharge to be fired, increasing the range by1SO0 J3rtls. This \.c.t..yiott is l~tio\\n as the Zc. 1;.Il. IS (.1/j. 1:~ 19-M a second tttotlification had all~~tre(I, the 1~ : I;. II. lS/‘JO. The tube of the Zc.I;. II. 18 C-11) was mounted on the carriagealr-eatlx in large scale production for the 7.5 Pak-10 t 7’5mm :ZT gu~i). Ey tnodifying the elevatingant1 firing mechanisnts, the rate of fire wasiticrcnsctl, and a more &icient muzzle bralie decreasedthe recoil load. The 10.5 cm le. F. II.18 (M) and the 1~. I:. I/. 18;10 at-e ballisticallyidentical and have the same firing tables.i 2 ) Clniraclerislics i of W.5 cm le F. II. 18/40).Caliber105 mm (4.14 inches).Length of tubefeet, ^.2^2 inches(incluillng Ill-ct-ch Iand mu/zle braki )Weight in action .4,320 pounds.Maximum range. . . 13,480 yards.Muzzle \ el

IUNCLA'MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 37.—15 cm s. F.H. 18 (150-mm medium howitzer) in firing position.Figure 38.—15 cms. F.H. 18 (150-mm medium howitzer) in traveling /•oj'i/ir..K. 18, the standard medium gun. Th(* tuh" im-ln.-.).ated breech, with horizontal sliding block, has Length of tnl.c 14 ut •. ?.\ in>-in-,.continuous-pull firing mechanism and cartritlge \\‘ci:glit in action ;‘ i il lll~l... ,. „ .... ,. . Maximum ranyv 14.630 \anls.case obturation. Spring equilibrators arc fitted. , r . . . 6 . -,,-•' ,1 b x^fuzzlc wli.city l./d.i n | per -icotid.The carriagc has split-box trails, and double-disk, (with charge 8)solid rubber-tired wheels. A new model of this Traverse 60°.weapon, called the 15 cm s. F. H. 18/40, is fitted Elevation i ' M-' t 45°.with a muzzle brake. The same ammunition is Traction il..rs, •„-uanur-dnnvn.fired at higher muzzle velocity, 1,952 feet per set- (3) ~‘~l,liJllfJriiic)i?. 11 1 -C. all~~-~~~~t~ c AT', andond, increasing maximum range to 16,511 yards. smoke projectiles are fired. Projectiles weighAn s. F. H. 42, a further modification, has also 95.7 po”“‘l~. The ‘I‘ll< ~ charge consists ofbeen reported.eight incr~~mt~llts.VII—24

"*..«*"'•,* ., '• - "'i... * r iFuture 39.—s. 10 cm K. IS (105-IIUII medium (/nil) in f.riwjFigure 40.—J, 10 tin K. IS (105-mm medium nun) zeitli tube in trareliiui position.(1. 105-MM MEDITM (ir.V is. W cm K. IS).(1) General description. The 10 cm K. 18 is thestandard nxdiuni gun. It has a mou111 interchangeablewith that of thy 2.5 CM s. F. H. 18. Thehrcech is hantl-operntccl, with horizontal slidinghlocl~ and cartridge cnsc ohturntion.Maximum ranyo..Muzzle M'locityTnver-cElevationTraction._'D.S5l> y:irtls.2.740 feet per second.6fl°— T 30' to + 45°.Horê- or motor-drawn.( 3) himnwit'wn. I IK. Al\ and APCBC proiectilesan- fired. Projectile weights are: HE,(2) Characteristics.33.0 pounds. Al', 31.2D pounds; Al LBL, J4.O>5Caliber105 mm (4.14 inches).pounds. I hree char S es. small, medium, and large,Length of tube 17 feet 11.28 inches.Weight in action 11,424 pounds. are used.VII—27

IUNCLASSlFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Fiprre 41.—15 cnl K. 18 (150~vwz heavy !JUJI) 111 trtred~ngpositione. 150-MM GUN (15 cm K. 18). (1) (;rmmldescription. The 15 cm K. IS has the characteristicfeatures of German "18" class held artillerydesign, including the r~cul~cratm- abo\~~ ant1 thebuffer below the tube. A cartridge case accoI11plislws obturntion, ant1 the usual horizollt;~l Jiclinpbreechblock is nm~ually opcratcd. JIVO h!-tlrwpneumatic quilibrators arc boltc(l to thv tub)Length of tube..27 feet 0.84 inch.Weight in action..13.44 ton3.(without platform)VIl—28Maxiimmi range 27.040 \,irds.Muzzle velocity 2>3 - i per second.Traverse on wheel-... .(id'.Traverse on platform. .3(>0 .Klcvation - 4 in • 45'.Traction Motor drawn.(,•> I Ammunition. The gun fires IIP streamline,anti-concrete, hcllii-,\I‘. and A I' ~)~-oicx?ilvs.Projectile weights are: 1 IV.( 4.6 and 99.25pounds; anti-concrete,c >5.7 pounds: semi-AP99.25 pounds: A P. 0’),35 po~wl..g. 170-MM GUN [ 17 cm K. in Morscr l.a(ettc).(1) General description. The 17 an K. in Mrs.Laf. is a long-range, mobile gun mounted on the21 cm Morscr 18 (2lWiii11i ho\\ilzc,r) c;lrri;lgv. Tthas a built-ul) tube., antI a separate recoil nlechanismfor the upper carriage, which also moves inrecoil. The breech mechanism is operated manually.The gun has a horizontal sliding block andcartridge case obturation. In .pile \ its weight,the gun can be put into and taken out of actionvery rapidly. A tiring plnllurm i. lowered byjacks, and the wheels are rai.ed fur firing. Oneman. with a trail sI)ik. can tr:Ivc’i-3: the gun 360tlcgrees around this platform.(2) Cllornf1i’ris/icx.Caliber.Ii 0 mm (0.79 niches).Length of tulit . .2$ feel .v6 indie-.Weight in :tctiot1 .. iO . . .19.04 h.n..Maximum range . .A2 ,i/0 \ards.(H K \trc:tmlincJIu7zlc \.etocit! . 3 . 035 . .3.035 m i per second.(HI < streamline)

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451Figure 42.—17 cm K. in Mrs. Laf. (170-mm gun mounted on 210-mm howitzer carriage).Traverse (on traversingarc) 16°.Elevation 70° (Actually limited to 50°by a stop).(3) Ammunition. HE streamline, HEBCstreamline, and AP projectiles are fired. The HEprojectile weighs 138 pounds, and the HEBC, 148pounds.h. 210-MM HOWITZER (21 cm Morser 18}. (1)General description. The 21 cm Morser 18 is thestandard heavy howitzer. The piece recoils in acradle trunnioned to an upper carriage. Thisupper carriage also moves in recoil along a lowercarriage. The breech mechanism is operatedmanually, and has a 111Irizontal slitling block withcast ’ case obturation. ln action, a firing platforms top) . on jacks and the wheels areraisctl; the roar of tht. trail is supported by atraversing path. When traveling', a two-wheeledtrailer is attached to at~tl yulqorts the trail, whilea sel)arxlc tra\-elitlg carriage supports the tube.(2) Characteristics.CaliberLength of tubeWeight i" action.Maximum rauêMuzzle velocity210 mm (8.27 inches).21 fert 4.37 inches.Vi,74() pounds.IS,300 yards.\,XS4 feet per second.VII—29

IUNLYXIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451IFigure G —21 cm Mrs. 18 (210~w?z howitzer) with fubc elevated.Traverse...... . 16”.concthc prnjcctilc~ ;kre fircll. ;L \\dl as a fin-Elevation .......... 70”. stabilizctl, allti-c.tI1lcrc.tt. stick I IJIII~J. ‘file H E pro-TractionMotor-drawn. J - ectik ^ . ^ 24 poundSi .,,„, the atlti-concrete(3) ~41~~nzz~mXa~z, HE strenmline and anti- projectile 2o8 pounds.VII—30

I MARCH 1945U~!/C[TM-E 30-451figure 44.-2.8 cm s. Pz. H 41 (28/ 20-nun tufcred-hnre antitank nun).6. Antitank Artillerya. 28/20-NM I\NTITASK GUN (2.8 cm s. Pz. B31). (1) Gcticral dr,sc7ipfior!. This first Gerlichhigh velocity tapered-hot-v antitank gun appearedin 1941. The n~onobloc tube has a semi-F iquvc 45.—Airborne -version of 2.8 cm s. Pz. B. 41(28/20-mm tapcred-bore antitank gun).automatic breech I\-ilh hot-izotltal 5litliqq-~~ctig~~block, and is fitted with a muzzle l)ralie. An airborneversion exists which consists of an identicaltube on a light alloy cradle anal two-wheeled tulmlar n~mnt. This \.ersion weighs 260 pounds.(2) Characteristics.Caliber (initial)..28 m m (1.1 inches),(emergent).... 20 mm (0.78 inch).Length of tube 5 feet 7.62 inches.XVeipht in action...501 pour&.Muzzle velocity 4.6(10 feet per second.Traverse

I MARCH 1945•'Cirri• : ! ! . . )TM-E 30-451i; iaure 46.-3.7 cm I'ak (37-mm antitank gun), 5 em I'ak i.V (50-mm antitank gun), and 7.5 cm I'ak 40 (73-mmantitank gun) (front to rear).ammunition is -I9 mm (1.93 inches). The stickbomb will penetrate about 6 inches of homogcneousplate. The range at which a moving targetmay be hit does not exceed 150 yards.c. 42/28-~&L ANTITANK GUN (3.2 cm le. Pah!l). (1) General description. The 4.2 cuz Ic.F’ak 41 is the second of the tapered-bore nntitankgun series. The monobloc tube is long withobvious external as well as internal taper, and hasno muzzle brake. The horizontal sliding breechblockis hand-operated. The mount is identicalwith that of the 3.7 cwz Pak, but with a doubleupper shield. A second shield, $ { s -inch thick, isrivctetl to the standard shield, with an interveningspaceof approximately 1 ^ inches.Figure 47,-4.2 cm le. Pak 41 (42/28-mm tapered-bore(2) Characteristics. antitank gun) shoeing front >l double shield.Caliber (initial) 42 mm (1.65 inches). ^ ^ ^ mcchanis m is s,, lliaul omatlC wfth ahorizontal sliding block. Solid rubber tires are\2’eight in adim ,,990 poun(l kfitted, and the shield consists of two 4-mm armorhIuzzlc velocity.. -! ,I00 irc1 ]xr sccontl. plates about 1 inch apart.Traverse 44°.Klcvation- 8° to + 32°.(2) Characteristics.Method of traction Motor-drawn. ^ ^ |)f ui)^ ]f) fo (, )(,It) Ammunition. HK and AP (Tungsten Weight in action 2.01cMii7-/1[-vi-locitv ( \! '4(1) ^94n cl iier second,carbide core) I-ountls are fired. Projectile weightsMuzzle velocity (AT) . .2./4D octpei second.;Lre: HE, 0.i6 pouml, and AI’, 0.69 pound. I\t ^ ^ velocily (1IK).i.80o Vet per second.700 yards this weapon, firing AP ammunition, Traverse 65°.will penetrate 68 mm (2.88 inches) of armor at Elevation 48 n.--27".30 degrees from normal. Traction ] lall-i racked iracn,..d. 50-MM ANTITANK GUN (5 cm Pak 38). (1) (3) Ammunition. Projectile weights are: AP,General description. This gun, introduced in 4.56 pounds ; AP 40. 2.025 pminds ; and TIE. 3.941941 to replace the 3.7 cm Pak, is mounted on a pounds. Penetration, firing AP ammunition, is 56split-trail carriage of conventional design. ‘1‘ mm (2.2 inches) i armor at 1.000 yards at 30monobloc tube is fitted with a muzzle brake, and degrees from normal.VII—32

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 48.—7.5 cm Pak 41 (75/55-mm tapcred-borc antitank nun).Figure 49. -7.5 cm I'ak 97/3S (75-min antitank yun) leith Sololhuni inuzdc brake.e. 75-.MM A N T I T A N K (lux (7.5 cm Pak 10).(1) General description. The 7.5 cm Pak 40 issimilar in appearance to the 5 cm Pak 38. Themonobloc tube is fitted with a double-baffle muzzlebrake, and the breech mechanism is semiautomaticwith a horizontal sliding block. The carriage, withtubular split trail, has solid-rubber-tired wheelsand torsion liar suspension and may bc to\vetl atabout 25 miles an hour. The shield consists oftwo 4-mm armor plates spaced about 1 inch apart.(2) Characteristics.Caliber75 mm (2.05 inches).Length of Kibe 11 feet 4 inches.Weight in action 3,136 pounds.Muzzle velocity (AP40) .3,250 feet per second.Muzzle velocity(APCBC)Muzzle velocity.Muzzle velocitycharge )TraverseKlevationTraction-'.530 feet per second.(I I K) . I.NOU feet per second.(hollow1.47') feet per second.? .? ' in •- 22°,Motor-drawn.i .i) Ammunition. \\ eights of projectiles firedfrom this gun are: l{E, 12.M pounds; APCBC, 15pountls; ‘11' shot, 9.12.5 ~WLIIHI~; hollo\v charge,0.07 p~‘Lllltls; and smoke 13.7 pounds. With;IPCI!C aniniuiiition, peIlctration of homogeneousarmor is IO.! mm (4.O.Z inches) at 30 degreesfrom normal, at 1,000 \-a~-(1s.VII—33

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 50.—7.62 cm Pak 36 (r) (3-inch antitank gun).f. 75/55-MM ANTITANK Grx (7.5 cm Pak 41 ).(1) Gcrrcrcd dcscriptiol?. vl‘his \v;L’; the thirdtapcretl-box antitank gun to be introtlucctl. Ithas a muzzle brake, and a semiautomatic' verticalsliding bred~hlocl~. A cylintlrical cradle, coveringthe rear half of the tube, is attached to the shieldby a spherical universal joint.(2) Chaunctrristics.Caliber75 mm (2.95 inches).(initial)Caliber55 mm (2.17 inches).(emcrjicnt)Length of tulw .....13 feet 7.375 inches.Wcigllt in action....3,136 po~ntls.Muzzle yclocity .....3,936 feet per second.(estimated)Traverse 60°.Elevation —10° to + 18°.TractionMotor-drawn.(~3) /IlllJlllillitiOIi. LZI' and HE projectiles arefired Thy ;\I' projectile xveighs 5.68 po~~~(ls, ofwhich 2.01 pounds is tungsten carbide core. TheAP projectile will penetrate 130 mm (5.12 inches)of liomog~~i~~~~~s arinor plate at 30 &pees fromnormal at 1.000 yards.g. 75-MM ANTITANK GUN (7.5 cm Pak97/38). (.2 mm (3 inches).Length of tube 12 i, i !

I MARCH 1945i. 3-INCH ANTITANK GUN (7.62 cm Pak 39).(1) General description. This 3-inch antitankgun is a modified version of the Russian field gun7.62 cm F.K. 297 (r). The chamher is bored out,and a 7.62 Pak 36 muzzle brake is fitted. Thebreech mechanism is semiautomatic with a verticalsliding block. The mount has box-type trails andpneumatic tires.(2) Characteristics.Caliber76.2 mm (3 inches).Length of tube 11 feet S inches.Weight in action 3,360 pounds.Muzzle velocity 2,230 feet per second.Traverse 57°.Elevation ^6° to + 45°.TractionMotor-drawn.(3) Ammunition. This gun fires the sameammunition as the 7.62 cm Pak 36 (r), but hassomewhat lower performance.j . 88-MM ANTITANK GUN (8.8 cm Pak 43).(1) General description. The 8.8 cm Pak 43 isan electrically fired, semiautomatic gun on a twobogiecruciform mount. It may be fired from itswheels if the direction of fire is within 30 degreesof the longitudinal girders, but must be fired withits platform on the ground when used in an artilleryrole. its platfor n l the top of thetil is l 5 cr y inches high. An automaticfiring cut-out restricts elevation when firingover the legs to 12 degrees on early mounts and 16degrees on later mounts. The 8.8 cm Pak 43 isballistically identical with the 8.8 cm Pak 43/41.(2) Characteristics.Caliber88 mm (3.45 inches).Length of tube 21 feet 7.25 inches.Weight in action 8,000 pounds.UNO AS c if 3U l^" ' TM-E 30-451Muzzle velocity CHI t 2,460 feet per second.Muzzle velocityCAPC'BO3.2SO feet per second.Muzzle velocity ( A P4O ) .3.7(15 feet per second.Traverse i',(l .Elevation 8 to -|- 40°.TractionTractor.(3) illl?lrllrrliticJ/i. \\ c,i,qiit of projectiles firetlfrom this gun are: III!. 20.08 pounds; Al'CBC,22 pounds, and 22.36 pi mud.--; Al' 40, 16 pounds ;Hollow charge. 16.8 pounds. At 1,500 yards, theAPCBC and AP 40 projectiles will penetrate approximately130 111 i .lZ inches) of homogeneousarmor plate al 30 degrees from normal.k. 88-MM ANTITANK Grx uS.S cm Pak 43/41).(1) General description. This 88-mm gun, 71same long, is mounted on an orthodox tn-owheeledcarriage. The It,gs of the split trail archinged to a base which also mounts the upper carriage.The \\-li~A, on stub axles, are sprung independently.The gun has a four-point supportwhen firing. A muzzle brake is lilted, and thebreech mechanism is semiautomatic with a horizontalslicliug blc~li.(2) Cf2n~o~-lL.)-isii(..s.th e ........ o0 pounds.Muzzle velocity (AI'40 I .3.705 feet per second.Muzzle velocity(AI'C'BC)1280 feet per second.Muzzle velocity ( II H ) . 2.4o:i I eet per second.Muzzle velocity (hollowcharge)1 ,%.S feet per second.Traverse5i>'.Elevation 5" to + 38".TractionMotor-drawn.Figure 51.—8.8 cm Pak 43 (88-mm antitank gun) on a cruciform mount.VII—35

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 52.—8.8 cm Pak 43/41 (88-mm antitank gun).(3) AnzlnuJzitiolz. Projectile weights are : HE, (1~) Clfr2Yr2C~c~ri.stic.s.20.68 pounds; APCBC, 22.36 pounds, and 22 Caliber 20 mm (o./ inch).pounds; AI-’ 40, 16 pounds; hollowpounds,charge. 16.8 Length of tube 56.0 Indus.pounds. At 1,500 yards, the ;,\PCBChollowcharge.and AI’16.8 40 Weight in action 11.064 l~~lllI1~l~.1, • , 1 on Effective ceiling 3,?()0 int.projectiles will penetrate approximately 130 mm Maximum horizontal(5.12 inches) of homogeneous armor plate at 30 rang e 5230 \; U .degrees from normal.Rate 0i iirt~: practicnl. .;._‘30110 rounds [

\'\\S1 MARCH 1945 U i I \ “, TM-E 30-451Figure 53.—Z cm Flak 30 @O-mm antiaircraft gzcn) on half-track.Figure 54.—2 cm Flak 35 (JO-mm a,rti’zircraft HUH).VII—37

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45)• ; - *>• f >•n. - r"1 *;;*: ;'^«^ll:; ;^-.^ •"'Figure 55.—2 cm Flak38 in firiini position.i 1))CaliberClan,-nclrlis1ic.s.Length of tubeWeight in actionEffective ceiling20 mm ( 0.79 inch).56.6 indies.896 pounds3,500 fe.-l.Maximum horizontalrange .......5,230 yards.Rale of fire: practical. .ISO U> 220 rounds perminute.luzzle velocity (HE3 .2.050 i i c 1per Muzzle velocity (AP) . .2,625 l\ct per second.Muzzle velocity (AP40) .3.250 fci t per second.Traverse 360°.Elevation — 20° t.. !- 90°.TractionMotor-drawn, RR, SP.Antiaircraft sights: Flakz-isiir SS,Lincalvisier 21, Sclvwcbckrcisvisicr 30/38.•1 ' \. ~*TFigure 56.—2 cm Gcb. Flak 38 (20~mm mowtaiu anhaircraftgun).VII—38-1(c) Ammunition.Weights 0i l)rojectiles firedby this gun are : TIE, 4.2 ouncrs ; AP, 5.2 ounces ;- °and A P 40 3 6- - ounces.

I MARCH 1945(3) 20-nm Four-Barrclcd jlufiaircraft &IL(2 cm Flakvicrling 38). (a) Gcrlmrl dcscl-iption.The 2 cm Flakvicl-hg 35 consistb of four 2 CIFlak 38's on a triangular-l)aw mount with threeleveling jacks. iIluzzlc lxvpontlcranct~ is counleractedby an equilibrator b:)lic tl the mount,(b) Charactcristirs.Caliber ..............20 mm (0.79 inch).Length of tube 56.6 inches.Weight in action 1.68 Ions.Effective ceiling 3,500 feet.Maximum horizontalrange5,230 yards.Rate of iire: practical. il)O to 8CO I-cwlds perminute.hiuzzlc velocity (1iJX) .2,950 feet per second.Muzzle velocity (XI’) . .2,02j feet Iwr second.Muzzle velocity (:\1140) .3,&O fwt per second.TM-E 30-451Traverse300°.Elevation ..._.. —IO” to + 100”.l-iption . .... \ lolor-drawn, SP, orstatic.Antiaircrait si:

t MARCH 1945TM-E 30-451Figure 58.—3.7 cnt Flak 36 (37-mm antiaircraft pm) mutwtcd on half-track.

I MARCH 1945UNCL:3:F;EDTM-E 30-451Flak is It is mounted on a triangular platforlon three adjustable leveling feet. Piece and mountare carried on a two-wheeled trailer. 'Weight inaction is 1.71 tons. The 3.7 cm Flak 37 consistsof a normal 3.7 cm Flak 18 mounted on a modifiedcarriage. Ballistically, it is identical with 3.7cm Flak 18 and 36.(b) Characteristics.Caliber37 mm (1,45 inches).Length of tube 10 feet 8.75 inches.Weight in action 1.93 tons.Effective ceiling 5,000 feet.Maximum horizontalrange7,200 yards.Rate of fire: practical. .80 rounds per minute.Muzzle velocity 2,690 feet per second.Traverse 360°.Elevation —5° to + 85°.TractionMotor-drawn.Antiaircraft sights: Flakvisicr 33,Flakvisier 37 (for Flak 37), Sclnvebedornvisicr.(5) 37-mm Antiaircraft Gun (3.7 cm Flak43). (a) General description. 1M10ugh thisgun does not differ externally from the 3.7 cm Flak18, 36, and 37, it has a completely different, fullyautomatic, gas-operated action. The gun is fed byeight-round clips on a fixed loading tray in theleft side. Using a fixed firing pin, it fires on theforward movement of the bolt. Of low build, the3.7 cm Flak 43 has a pedestal mount with a shield.A twin version known as the Flakzwilliiig exists,with one gun mounted above the other, The gunsmay be fired together or independently. In actionthe twin version weighs 3.08 tons.(b) Characteristics.Caliber37 mm (1.45 inches).Length of tube 9 feet 8.16 inches.Weight in action 1.37 tons.Effective ceiling 5,000 feet (approximate).Maximum horizontalrange7,200 yards(approximate).Rate of fire : practical... 150 rounds per minute,theoretical.250 rounds per minute.Muzzle velocity 2,750 feet per second.Traverse 360°.Elevation —6° to + 90°.TractionStatic emplacement, mobilemount, or SP.Antiaircraft sights: Flakvisier 43,S clneebcdornvisicr.(c) Ammunition. HE-tracer, HE-incendiarytracer,AP-IIE, IIE-incendiary, and HE projectiles.(6) 50-mm Antiaircraft Gun (5 cm Flak41). (a) General description. The 5 cm Flak41 is similar to the 3.7 cm I;lak 36. It is gas-ol,rrated,and is fired by the forward movement of thebreech mechanism. ( lips of live rounds are feeliroln the IL,it. The mount is a triangular platfoml\I-ith t\vo hhor-t outi-i~~vr\ for\\-artl.(b) Characteristics.modi - ..50 mm (1.97 inches).Weight in action.. 3 . 1 . ? ton?.Effective ceiling 10,000 feet.Maximum honzi>m;ilrange14,760 yards.Rate of fire: praciic.il. . 13(1 rounds per minute.Muzzle velocity 2,755 leet per second.Traverse360'.Elevation --10° to -|- 90°.Traction4-wheel trailer, motordrawn.Antiaircraft sight : l : hikvisicr •! I.(cj 1Irlr/il~~/iitio/l. I'r[~jr~.tilr \\-eights are: IIE,4.8 pounds; HE-iinviidiary-tracer, 4.8 pounds;l’ , - 1 -H po”n’ls.(7) Miscellaneous. The following antiaircraftautomatic weapons possessed by the Germansin limited numbers may be encouiiterctl occasioiwll~:2 cm Flak 2S Ocrlikon type.•/ cm Flak 2$Rofors type.4.7 cm Flak Manufactured for the~:~cilslovakinn Armybv the Skoda works.ol,rr S —3.7 cm Fink 18 (37-mm antiaircraft gun)being prepared for firing.VII—41

ISIMP! * ' ^ ' C ^ iMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451I" " " :n Flak 36 (88-mm antiaircraft gun) in firing position.Figure 61 —8.8 cw Flak 36 (88-mm antiaircraft guu) ilk trwchig pUSitiOlk.c. IIEAVY ANTIAIRCRAFT GUNS. (1) 88+m section liner, or of a loose 1 parrel fitting into aAntiaircraft Gun (5.8 cm Flak 18, 36, and 37). jacket. i\ semiautomatic, hori/mital sliding-wedge(a) Ccucral tlrscriptio% The SS-mm gun was breechblock is used. The mount has two outrigproducedfirst in 1934 as the standard mobile anti- gers to sleatly the gun for l;l.ill, (Ic~tlicr than dircctl)aircraft gun. The tube consists of either an outer front or rear. The 8.8 cm link 36 differs fromtube with an inner locking tube and a loose three- the Fl& 18 only ill having a slightly differentVII—42

I MARCH 1945nlount, \\-hilt the 8.S cuz Flak 37 is identical withthe I;lall 36 escel~t for a slightlv tliffcrcnt clat:lIransmiGon s!5tein.(1)) Clltr~acl:l,istics.Calilm .............._ 3 mm i 3.46 illchcs).Length of tul , c ...15 feet 5 in,.h,s,Weight in action. 3.19 tolli.1Insirnum ceiling.... 3- 3,500 fed.laximum 1101-i7c~nt:ilrsngc16,200 >Wil,.Rate of fire: practical. I 5 to 20 roun~ls permini:tc.?bluzzlc velocity (1117) .2,690 feet per secontl.hluzxlc \c.locity (;1P). .2.600 feet per sccontl.Traverse 360°.Elevation .......... —3” to + 85”.Traction ............. I lotor-drawn.(c) .•Inimuiritioii. 1 'rojectile weights are : Til".,20 pounds; AT, 21 pounds.(2) SQ-III/IIif JIliuircraft GUIZ (8.8 cm F/trk4I). (a) Geizual tlC,scription. The S.S cm Flak41 is designed for use against air, grountl. and seatargets. Although uwally fired froin the platforin.it may be firetl from its wheels, with thv sick mvnbersof the platform extended. The lmcch lla~ ahokmta l sliding-wedge block, and the gun ha5an automatic raniii~er. An electric firing mechanisniis cmployetl.(b) Cl~nrflrfrvistics.Cnlilwr ...88 mm (3.46 itlcheq).Ixngth of tu l x ..21 feet 5.75 inches.\\-cigllt in action..8.85 lon5.1lasim::m ceiling.. 10,X0 icctUNQl”?;~; F J TM-E 30-451Maximum horizontalrange21,580 yards.Kate of fire: practical. .20 rounds per minute.Muzzle velocity (1 IT.) .3.280 feet per second.Tr:>vcrse ...... 360”.Elevation —3' to -f- 90°.TractionMotor-drawn (12-tonhalf-track, Set. Kfz. .

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451figure 63.—105-mm Flak 38 (105-mm antiaircraft gun), top view showing elevating and traversing mechanism onright side of gun; bottom view showing left side with drill round in fuze setter tray.Rate ol fire: lxactical. 10 to 13 rounds jierminute.Muzzle velocity 2,890 feet per second.Traverse 360°.Klevation —3° to + 85°.TractionMotor-drawn, static,or RR.(c) ifIllrJlunitio?a. HE (time fuzc), HE (percussionfuze), and APCCC projectiles are fired.The HE time fuzed projectile weighs 33.2 pounds.(4) 12Sh~z Antiaircraft Gun (la.8 cm Flak40). (a) Grneval dcscriptiorl. The 12.8 CIFlak looks like the 10.5 cm Flak. The breechblockslides horizontally to the right, and incorporatesan electric firing mechanism. The recoil systernis conventional, \vith hydropneumatic recuperatorabove the tube, and buffer below. Hydropneumaticequilibrators are used. Elevation 57traverse are either manual or powered. Fuse settingis by director control, and loading is Thi stated by a power rammer incorporating two an dzontal rubber rollers at the entrance to the bore.The gun may be statically emplaced, r o l e .on a mobile mount, or mounted on a a car.A twin-barreled version ot ihis gun also exists,but it is produced only tor a -tatic role.(b) C‘iial~ucti.)-isiir.s.Caliber128 mm i 5.1)4 inches).Length of tube 25 feel 8.5 inehes.Weight in action :mobile version 18.75 ton-.static version 14.34 ton-.Maximum ceiling 48,555 leet.Maximum horizontalrange22.''10 yard-.Rate of fire: practical.. 12 rounds per minute.Muzzle velocity (HE) .2.8SO feet per second.Traverse 360 \Elevation —3 to • |- 88°.TractionRR. motor-drawn, orstatic.(c) Ammunition. Projectile weights are: HE,57 pounds ; and APC, 58.13 pounds.(5) 150-mm Antiaircraft Gun (15 cm Flak).This large caliber gun exists m limited quantities,and apparently is manned by navy personnel.Its use is confined to Germany proper in a staticrole.d. AA FIRF. CONTROL, I 1 j .lutomatic weafVII—44

I MARCH 1945UNCLXXED 30 - 45 IFigure 64.—12.8 cm Flak 40 (128~mm autinircraft gun) on static mount.Figure 65.—12,8 cm Flak 40 (128-mm antiaircraft gun) on railu-ax nwunt.VII-45

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451ens. (a) General. Antiaircraft fire control forautomatic weapons is accomplished through theuse of various types of on-carriage sights, rangingfrom the simple manually operated Li~~xlvisicr(linear sight) through various mechanical typesand the complica~etl, electrical Flakvisicr. Rangemust be wt into some of the simpler sights, andthis is obtainctl either through estinlaGon orthrough the use of a one-mctcr base range finder.Tracer observation also is used for fire control.(b) Ihcalzdsirr (I,ilrcar siylit) 21. This is asimple, atljustablc t!-pe of speed ring sight, usedas an alternate for the more complicatetl sights designedfor use on the 20-111111 antiaircrait guns.Range, course, and speed of target, angle of diveor climb, and supcrelevation are set in throughmanual manipulation of the sight.(c) Flakvisicr (.Intiaircm/t siqllt) 3.5. Thisis a mirror sight \vith a computer mechanism opcratingon the course ant1 speetl, sl~unt-plane-linl~ageprinciple. It tlclxn~ls on accurate setting oftarget range, coiirsc, and spc’cd. It can engagelevel-flying, climbing, or diving targets. It normallyis used on tlw 2 cuz Fluk 30, 1~; also maybe found on the 2 CHIC Flak 38 and 2 cm Flakvicrlingin place of the clectricnl Flakvisicr 38 nud 40.(d) Flakvisicv 38 and 30. The Iilakz?sicr 38is an electrically opcratcd, range-rate sight whichcomputes l;\teral and \-ertical leads plus wperele\.ntion. The azimuth rate xx1 clc\xtion rate aremeasured through tachomctcr generators coupledto the gun's traversing ant1 elevating gcai-s. Slantrange is introduced as a battery voltage, modifietlby a rheostat, calibrat~tl in hundrctls of meters.In tracking, the retitles oi the sight heat1 are displacedby the battery yoltagc and tachomct~r gcncraters-oltagc in such a mamxr that the gun istrained automatically on tlw future position. Theuse of electric current eliminates mechanical timelag. This si;;ht is us~tl normally with the 2 CJFlak 38. The Flakvisirr 40, which is used withthe 2 cm Flakz~icdiy, differs from the Flakvisict35 only in minor details of construction. The princil)leof operation is the same.(e) Flakvisirr 33. T_‘sed with the 3.7 cw Flak78 ant1 36. this si:,:ht is similar in operating principlesto the Flakvisier 35.(i) I;lahhiL,r 37 (13). This Flakvisier is amechanical computing sight used \vith the 3.7 cmFlak 37. When used with the 3.7 CM Flak 33, itis known as I-lakvisicv 43. Computation for dcflcctionsis based upon the angular rates of quadrantelevation and azimuth. Ranges arc estimatedVII—46or obtained from a .-eparale source, and are setinto the sight bv hand. A clock-work motor tlri\-vsthree disc and \vliecl mechanisms which lx.rformthe multiplications necessarv in the computationof deflections. Uni-direetional drives from the elevatingand traversing mechanisms rewind theclock motor. In operation, the necessary deflectionis obtained by mechanically oli'setting thecross hairs of the reticle of a one-power telescope.Provision is incorporated for L‘(~i~l-c~~.tiolls ior superelevationand temperature c~l~~il~;es. Tlw siglltis of cclmpact box-slqx~l cc~i~~t~-u~.tion, alq)roximately10 inches 1)y 9 iii&e bv 4 ’ J illclie< in sizeand 23 pounds in \vcight. It ii. fi:tc,tl to the sightbar of the gun b!- a suspension bracket alltl lug.(g) Schzvcbcdorni'isicr. This is a relativelysinq)le antiaircr;ift bLh;cll;t rcceiitlv developed foralternate use on the 3.7 cm Flak 37 and 43. Thesight \\-orkS on the linear principle. ‘1‘argc.t s;l)cctl,tlirt,ction. and angle of clilllb or dive are set intotlie sigl;t lll~lilU~lll\~.(h) Sclizêbekrcisvisier 30 ; 38, This is a recenttype ot r:lali\-elJ >iiiil~lc. l)i\-ot(.(l ring sightdesigned for u.;e \\-ith the 2 cm I : !ak \\-~xl)o~ls. Itsuse’ is becoiiiin~g more and more frequent ox thelater models of 2 cm Flak in lieu of the more complicatedcl~xtrical Flakvisier 38 and JO.ii) I:ltrk:isicr 41. This is a completely automatic,tachometric clock-work, range-rale sightemploved with the 5 cm Flak 41. ()perated bv oneman, range is introduced and angular velocitiesare calculated in such manner that superelevationant1 vertical ant1 lateral dcilections are alqJliet1automatically. The principle of operation is thesame as that of the Flakvisier 'S and 40.(2) Heavy antiaircraft gnus. ;i) l\ommandogeriit3d. ( 1 I This instrument is the earlieststandard (lennan linear speed antiaircraft director,providing continuous daia for the engagementof aerial targets by heavv antiaircraft guns.It eliiplo~-5 a i~ic~cli:~llic;~l b.ol~iticlli of the antiaircraftproblem, and has facilities for making necesml-ylmllistic correctic1ll5 to gun data. T11e instrumentis mounted on a four-wheel trailer for transport.( 7) ‘I‘hc tlircctor 112s a main pedestal \vith threeleveling feet and two suspension arnls by which itis raisetl and securc,tl to front a1lt1 rc’ar bogies fortransport. Tlie main l~~lest;il supports a castingcarrying the clirectcx iwchani-1115 ant1 supportingbrackets on xvhich a stereoscopic, four-nwtcr rangefinder rests TVhen the director iy ~mplaccd foraction.

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 66.—Kotnmandogcrdt 36 (antiuircraft gun director) in operating position.Figure 6/‘.—Kol~~lr~arldogc~r i it 36 (n/itiuivcrtrft gun director)without r~r~ge firder.VII—47

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 68.—Kolrl~~andogeriit 40 (antiaircraft gun director) in trailer for trading,zcithoul range finder.(3) Firing data determined by the director(firing azimuth, quadrant elevation, and fuze)arc transmitted electrically to appropriate dials onthe guns.(b) Iv changingthe ballistic cams. The Kommandoijeriit 41 is aKommandogeriit 40 fitted with cams for the S.Scm Hnk -/I, the nomenclature apparently being aconvenient way of tlistingui~llillg its use for thispurpose.(c) k’ollllrlalltJoiii!t’.c!/c~~;ji 3?. This is an oldertype of anliaircrnit director used only ior auxiliarypurposes. It o~~crat~s mi the angular-ratemethod of data computation. The four-meter baserange finder usetl with tllis iil,~tru~nellt is mountedseparately, and gun tlata provided bv (he tlircctornormally are transmitted to 111~. guns hy telephone.(d) Range finders. Four-tnc.tcr base stcreoscopicrange finders furnish Ant range for theantiaircraft dircctclr5. l\ange Kinder 31 is usedwith the Komimwdoycriil 3? and is separately

I MARCH 1945UNCLASS!;T.DTM-E 30-451Figure 69.—Kolrll,rtmlldohilf~~ger~t 35 (atctiaircraft gzmdirector) zticd as ati auxiliary.emplaced. Range 1:inders 36 and 40 are used withIiorll.rlzandogcrit 36 and Komma~ldogcriit 30, respectively.Range Finders 36 and 40 are mountedin brackets on the directors.(c) Fire control radar. Several types ofradar, l~nown as Flakmcssgcriit, are used by Germanantiaircraft artillery to furnish basic antiaircraftgun data to the directors. As ratlar is afairly recent development, the directors have beenmodified to receive this basic data.(f) I;lakzcl?l~~crtcgcriit Ma/& 41, 42, and 43(Flak Comwtcr Malsi). This is a plotting instrumentused to convert antiaircraft fire control datareceived from a distant source into basic data suitablefor use by individual batteries. It is repot-ledthat the latest type can deal with displacements upto 5 miles, and is more accurate than the twoearlier models.c. SEARC~TLIGIITS. (1) 150-cm (60 imhcs)Srarclzliglzt 34 and 37. (a) The standard antiair-craft searchlight is 150 cm (60 inches) indiameter, and is equipped with azimuth and elevationreceiver dials for receiving initial locatordata. Normally hand controlled, later versions ofthe 150-cm searchlight also are equipped with remotecontrol gear.(b) The high-current-density arc lamp is selfregulatingand is fitted in an inverted position.The light is 9*30 million candle power and has arange, in favorable weather, of 8,800 yards at aheight of 13.000 to 16.500 feet. The searchlightcan be moved in azimuth through 360 degrees,and in elevation from —12 degrees through thevertical to —12 degrees on the other side. Currentis supplied by a separate 24-kilowatt generatordriven by an eight-cylinder internal combustionengine.(c) For visual searching, a "dark search equipment"(Dunkelsucliiieriit 77) is used. This consistsof a pair of binoculars (having a few degreesof lateral and \ertical movement) mountedon the searchlight. In operation, the searchlightand optical equipment are laid initially by locationdata furnished from a separate source.id) Sound locators are of the ring-trumpettvpe which work on the binaural principle, withprovision for calculation of and correction for"sound lag". They also are equipped with electricaldata transmitters for passing azimuth andelevation data to the receivers on the searchlight.(e) Antiaircraft tire-control radar equipmentis also used to furnish data for searchlights. Flakconverter equipment known as Flakumwertegeratis used as an aid to the radar equipment and permitsthree searchlights at a distance from theradar to be supplied simultaneously with correctedazimuth and elevation.(2) 200-cm (80 incites) Searchlight 40. Manyof the searchlight units are equipped at least partiallywith these larger searchlights. Althoughmethods of location of initial data are similar inprinciple to those employed for the 150-cm searchlights,these larger 200-cm searchlights usually areequipped with necessary apparatus for remotecontrol. For visual searching, a "Flak layingequipment" (Flakrichtegcriit) is used, consistingof a pair of binoculars mounted on a controlpillar. This light is reported to be 2,430 millioncandle power with a range effectiveness 60 percent over that of the standard 150-cm searchlight.(3) 60-cm (24 inches) Searchlight, (a) Theequipment consists "i a 60-cm searchlight and anVU—49

I MARCH 194~ôinrrTM-E 304j1S-kilowatt generator, and was designed for usewithout a sountl loca;c!r ncainst lo\\--ilying aerialtargets. The searchlight is controlled manuallyin azimuth and elevation by a layer seated on theequipment. Ko separate location equipment isused. ThP beam can 1~ cxposcd ant1 coverctl by ashutter of venetian-blind type. This s~xrchlightusually will be found in the vicinity of autolllatic\veapo11s.(11) The lligh-currelit-tleiisity arc lamp is selfwgulatingand is fitted in an invcrtctl position.The light is 135 million cantllcpowel- and has arange under fa\.oral)lc \\-rather conditions of 5,700yards at a height of 5.000 feet. ‘Cliith bwm dispersedthe range is 3,500 yards.(4) Misccllo~tro~~s. (a) In addition to theabove, there are a few 1SO-cm w:lrchlights employcdon a special quxlruple mount. TheseniouIlts, carryilifi four scarchli~hts, arc ecluil)lxwith remote control gear.(b) A few obsolct~ 1lo-cm ('43 inches) s~arcl:lights, and a few French 200-cm and 240-cl11 (90inches) xxrcllli$ts, also ma}' be found Ftill inactive use.f. BARRACK BALLOONS. TWO main types ofbarrage balloons are cmploved by the (iermans foradded protection of vital in-tallalions against lowflyingaircr;kit. ‘1‘11e >tandard barrage b;d10011,which is reported to have a hydrogen gas capacityof 200 cul)Ic meters I 7.002 ~xl)i~ iwt). usually isfIowii at an altitude of 0.000 or 5,000 feet. Asmaller barrage balloon, reported to have a gascapacity of 77 cubic meters I 2,71 8 cubic feet), iscapable of use at altitudes under 2,000 feet. Alarge type of German barrage balloon capable ofbring 1101~11 at altitutl

I MARCH 1945TM-E 30-451Figure 71.-42 cm Gamma Mrs. (16.5-inch gun) bcuuj tested.VII—4I

kCaliberLengthfTubeWeightin action(tons)MaximumRange(yards)M a(f/s)TraverseElevationTypeShellWeight(ibs.)Remarks21 cm K. 38 8.3" 38'(55 cals)21 cm K. 39 8.3" 31' 3.6"(415 cals)24 cm H. 39 9.4" 21'11"(28 cals)28 36,000 2,970 16’ 50” HE 26537.2: 32,800 2,625 360° 45” HESAPAPAC30.2~ 19,700 1,970 360” 70” HEs”i\“P24 cm K. 3 9.4" .59.3( 41,010 3,248 HE 33124 cm K. 18 9.4" 43' 1 V 59.36 40,460 3,182 6” 56” HE 334(55 cals)I28 cm H.L/ lZ 11" 11” 55.3: 11,370 1,148 360.a HE 770(12 cals)28 cm Kst. H. 11" 40.88 12,470 1,243 360° HE 77035.5 cm Ml 14" 82.6: 21,870 1,870 HEAC42 cm Gamma Mrs. 16.5" 22'(16 cals)54 cm Karl Mrs. 21.25" 17' 8.5"(10 cals)61.5 cm Karl Mrs. 24.21" 16'2"(8 cals)27836582715.41 15,530 1,483 45” 66” AC 2,249132 13,0001HE131 6.2001HE70°(?) APAF ’ 3,310HETO”(?)APHE4,400Box trail: mounted on platform containingrecoil system. Transported in two loads.Platform mounted. Carriage in three partson four-wheeled limber. Models K. 39/40and K. 39/41 exist; performance and detailssimilar.Platform mounted. Improved Model 24 cmH. 39/40 with similar performance exists.Carriage in five sections.Carriage in five sections. Box trail plusplatform. Fires pre-rifled shell.Platform semi-static. Obsolete.Platform static. Obsolete.Carriage in seven sections. Also fires ACfin stabilized stick bomb.Semi-static platform.Obsolete.S. P. tracked carriage. Known as "Thor".Carriage as for 54 cm Karl Mrs. Known as"Thor".;GOSO? Unconfirmed. 1 Anti-fortification.Figure 72.AGet’ma t t heavy gtws.mz

CaliberLenthofTubeWeightin action(tons)Range (yards)Max.Min.MV(f/s)TraverseElevationAmmunitionTypeW’eight(lbs.)Remarks15 cm K. (E)5.9'19' 8"(40 cals)8425,000?12,3602,800360°?HEAC95Top carriage traversingmount w’ith outrigger.railway17 cm K. (E)6.7"22'4"(40 cals)88.4829,200?14,7702,870360°?HEBC138Same as above.20.3 cm K. (E)8"39' 4"(59 cals)95.240,000?3,040?45"? HE,APStar247(APICar traverse. Usually fired fromturntable. Carriage does not recoil.21 cm K. I2 (E)8.3"135'7"?(196 cals)373?126,800? 49,2305,330?HEBC236Fires pre-rifled shell.24 cm Th. Br. K. (E)24 cm Th. K. (E)9.4"9.4"27'5"(35 cals)31'4"(40 cals)104.16105.2822,200?29,000?10,94014,9902,210?2,670?1°1°360 O125°25°?HEBCHEBC328328Railway mount, car traverse.tRailway mount, car traverse. Carriagedoes not recoil. Usually firedfrom turntable.28 cm Kz. Br. K. (E)11 "36'8"(40 cals)13032,300?15,6452,690?HEBCAP529Same as above.28 cm Lg. Br. K. (E)11"41'3"(45 cals)135.540,500?18,3802,820?HEBC626Same as above. A SO calibers longversion, 28 cm s Br. K. (E), hasestimated range of 40,500 (?) yds.,a min. range of 18,380 yds. A 28cm Bruno NK. (E) also exists.28 cm K.5 (E) 11" 69' 8"(76 cals)24167,90067,900,900360 O150°HEBC551Shell splined instead of having drivingbands. Double recoil system,turntable. Fires rocket assistedshell.iO.6 cm K. (E) Adolf 16"49,2002,657I.4452,2711,32338 cm K. (E) Siegfried 15" 64' .5"(52 cals)316?60,9002,60013,445360"H E1,7641,091Projectile fitted with three drivingbands. Double recoil system, turntable.80 cm Gustav Geschiitz 31.5" 94' 9"(36 cals)1,34451,400AC16,540Also known as "Dora."T" (?) Unconfirmed.1 On turntable.Figure 73.—German railway gurus.o

I MARCH 1945U I 'i >., LTM-E 30-451Figure 74.-35.5 cm M.I. (14-inch howitzer) briny anplaccd.VII—54Vuiure 75.—15 cm K. (li) ' 150-uini rditei/v nuns) in

MARCH 1945- • \J ! Th4.E 30-451Figure 76.—150-mm railway guns being em placed.VII—55

I hIARCH 1945 Tlv1-E 30-451Figure 77.—A large railway gun firing.VII—56' uiure 7ti.—.{ ta

I MARCH I945Section V.I. GeneralSELF-PROPELLED ARTILLERYa. ~HRI:L.OI’L\IENT. German self-propelled artilleryhas now tlcvelopctl to a point whrre tllereis scarcely any artillery piece up to ant1 inclutling150-mm calilxr which has not appeared onat lcnst one self-pi-opelled clmssis. Some of thesrhave 1xw1 expel-imental, lmt others have heenstantlartlizetl ant1 have appcaretl in lnrgr nmil~ers.1). T’RODI;C.TION JTM110R)S. Self-lxmpcllcd artilleryhas lmn produced ii, three different ways.T?rst, there are the gtm-chxsis cotnl~iiiationswhich have been designed and engineered carefull!-to fill 3 partitular role. Tllcsc were protluccdin qunntity l)y m:Ljor arninment factoriesin Gel-ninny aid mist in large nuiiil,ers. ‘I‘75mm ant1 105niiii assault guns are esamplcsof this tyl)c. Secon:l, tlicrc arc’ the standard pn sfitted on standard tank chassis. Conversion hasbeen carried out in accortlnt~cc with well-ciigineereddesigns at consitleral~lc csl)cnsc of timeaid sldl. .\nirmg these are the 10.5 cm le. I;. II.IS/2 on the GK: If (li'espe) and the 15 cms. F. If. 18/1 on the Gi,\ III IT [Hummel).Third, there is a large class of self-~~ropellctl gunsproduced by fieltl coii\w-sion. carrirtl out in unitor lease \V(ll~liSll(O~)S, ant1 requiring little skill, time,or material. A2n csanil~le c~i this is the 15 Cis. I. c;. 33 mounted on the chassis of ther2. I‘pfw. 1.c. TACTICAL USES. German self-l~ropellctl artillcryn,:iy Ix tlivitlctl into four ty1wi from a; \ TM-6 30-451tactical point pi ~i~-\v, !.i:t ibe lint of tlcniarcationoften is not clear, a- many self-propelled artilleryl)irws Il;ive dual lm-vMons. ‘l‘hese typesarc: cl()SC~-SIIIqwt ;11-1111~~1-\-, including assaultguns; field and medium artillery; tank destroyers;and antiaircraft artillerx(1) Close-support ami assault puns. The developmentof close-support and assault guns wasbegun about l ( '4O. As-auh guns are designed forthe close support of infantry, and normally consistof a gun of limited traverse on an armoredself-propelled chassis carrying heavy frontal armor.‘I‘hty :11-e iucliiud to be slower and lessmaneuvcrable than tank- but are suited particularlywell for attacks "ii CI~~~,~I~ infantry heavyweapons and main points ol resistance.(2) field and medium sell-propelled artillery.Field and medium self-propelled artillery was introducedfirst about the middle of 1942. Bothtypes of llc,\\.itzers I in.5 em. Ir I;. II. IS and15 cm s. /-'. //. J8) \ision artillery nowmay be found on sell-propelled chassis.i.^) Self-propelled ,;:;liianl- j/uus. The firstself-propelled antitank gun was the 4.7 cmI'ak. II) mounte d o n 111 ilien i 1 ( >41 ) obsolescentchassis of the I'a. Kpf:e. I h. Antitank guns nowform the numerically largest class of self-propelledartillery weapon.-.(4) Scli-propcllcil caiidircmit artillery. Selfpropelledantiaircraft artillery actually was developedbefore any attenip: was made to apply thisprinciple to other tvp. - of weapons, but so farno serious effort has b--. ; n made to mount anti-Figure 79.—7.5 cw Stu. K.40.VII—57

I MARCH 1945aircraft guns larger than 37-mm on motor-drivencarriages.d. GUN AND CHASSIS MODIFICATIONS. Gunswith the exception of assault. guns,. are mountednormally on their self-propelled carriages withoutany major alteration. Assault guns usuallyare fitted with electric firing devices and modifiedrecoil systems. The chassis, however, particularlyin cases where they are those of existing tanks,have undergone considerable modification. Notonly have the superstructures been altered, but insome cases the engine has been moved from therear to a central position to enable the gun crewto stand on the floor of the hull to serve the gun.2. Close Support and Assault Gunsa. ~S-MM ASSAULT GUN ON PZ. Kpfw. IIICHASSIS (St% G. 111 fiir 7.5 Cm stu. K. 40(L/48)). (1) General. The 7.5 cnz Stu. K.40 (L/48) is the latest assault gun to be mountedon the chassis of the Pz. Kpfw. III. The 7.5 cuzKw. K. (L/24) and the 7.5 cm Stu. K. 40(L/43), which previously were mounted on thischassis, now have been superseded and are tendingto go out of service. The 7.5 CM Kw.K.(L/24) also has been mounted on an armoredhalf-tracked vehicle and on the modified eightwheeledarmored car. The 7.5 CW~ Stu. K. 40(L/48) has an antitank role, as well as its antipersonnelrole as a close-support weapon. It firesboth high explosive and armor-piercing ammunition.(2) Spccifirations.GeneralNomenclature ........ Stw. G. III fiir 7.5 cmSk K. 40 (L/48).Type of carriage......Stu. G. III, Sd. Kfz.142/l.Length over-all,Including gun 22 feet 5% inches.Excluding gun 17 feet 9 % inches.Width over-all .....9 feet 8 inches.Height over-all . : . ....7 feet.Weight ........26.35 short tons.Crew ............4 men.GunType _.............. i.S cm Stu. K. 40 (i/48).Muzzle velocity APCBC 2,300 feet persecond.Elevation—6” to + 17”.TraverselO” each way.Muzzle brake Yes.Buffer ............Hydraulic.RecuperatorHydropneumatic.VIi—58UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Ammunition:Types fired APCBC IIE HC AP40 SmokeRounds carried... 22 77 5Muzzle velocity...2,300 1,800 1,475 3,248 1,771(feet per second)Projectile weight. 15 12.7 11 9 13.7(pounds)CarriageSuspension:Number of bogies... .6.Type of bogies Small ruhhcr tired.Number of returnrollers .......... .Track, length _..9 feet 2% inches.Track, width 8 feet 2 % inches.Width of link._... l 1 foot 3 ; i inches.Hull armor:Front81 mm at 52°.Sides .... 31 mm vertical.Rear ......... . . . .Belly20 mm.Frghting compartment armor:Front53 to 71 mm at 15°.Sides ...........30 mm vertical.PowerEngine:Type .......... 1 Iaybach HI, 120 TRM.Cylinders ..V-12 at 60”.FuelGasoline.LocationRear.Horsepower . 2 9 5 at 3,000 r-pm.Transmission .. Synchromcsh,6 for\\-artl, 1 reverse.Drive .........Front sprocket.PcrformanccTrenclr crossing.8 feet 6 incites.Fording ..2 feel 9 inches.Step ...2 feet.Gradient ......... .Maximum speed..20 miles per hour..4rmamentType One M.G. 34.LocationCarried.RemarksPenetration of homogeneous armor at 30”,APCBC projectile:500 yards 84 mm.1,000 yards 72 mm.b. 75-MM ASSAULT-ANTITANK GUN ON Czech38 (t) TAN K CHASSIS 7.5 cm Zc. Stu. G. 38 (t).(1) General. The gun mounted on this carriage,the 7.5 cwz Pak 39 (L/48), has the same ballisticcharacteristics and is very similar to the 7.5 cmStu. K. 40 (L/48). Despite the difference in nomenclaturethe guns are employed in exactly the

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure SO.—7.5 cm Assault dm (Stu. C. 7.5 cm K.).*v5*36**.^îî^Sî'iftTS?^Fii»(r

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451same way in both antitank and assault roles. The7.5 cm Pak 39 (L/48) is mounted low in a thick,sloping front plate. Previous guns mounted onthis chassis, the 7.5 cm Pak 40 and the 7.62 cmPak 36 (Y), were fitted in a high superstructurewhich gave poor protection to the crew. In thiscase, however, the armor layout has been completelyredesigned, and the vehicle has takenon the aspect of an assault gun. (See Paragraph6 of this section for other vehicles on which the7.5 cm Pak 40 and 7.62 cm Pak 36 (Y) havebeen mounted.)(2) Specifications.General ,Nomenclature7.5 cm le. Stu. G. 38 (t).Type of carriage Pz. Jag. 38 (t).Length over-all:Including gun 20 feet 7 inches.Excluding gun 15 feet 11 inches.Width over-all.... :... .8 feet 7 % inches.Height6 feet 10% inches.Weight17.65 tons.Crew .........4 . .GunType ................7.5 cm Pak 39 (L/48).Muzzle velocity APCBC 2,300 feet persecond.Elevation 4 ” to + 20”.Traverse..,........... lO” each way.Muzzle brake No.BufferHydraulic.RecuperatorHydropneumatic.Ammunition:Types fired APCBC HE HC Ap 40 SnlokeRounds carried. 41Muzzle velocity. .2,300 1,800 1,475 3,248 1,771(feet per second)Projectile weight. 15 12.7 11 9 13.7(pounds)CarriageSuspension:Number of bogies... .4.Type of bogies Christie.Number of returnrollers 1.Track, length 12 feet 10% inches.Track, width 6 feet 10% inches.Width of link l foot l g inches.Hull armorFront60 mm at 60°.Sides ........20 mm at 15”.Rear20 mm at 15°.Belly10 mm horizontal.Fighting compartmentarmor:FrontSidesVII—6060 mm at 60°.20 mm at 40°.PowerEngine:TypeCzech EP4.Cylinders ....Six, in-line.FuelGasoline.LocationRear.Horsepower..... .TransmissionPreselective5 forward, 1 reverse.DriveFront sprocket.PerformanceFording ,.............2 feet 11J4 inches.Radius of action 124 miles.Maximum speed 23 miles per hour.ArmamentType One M.G. 34.Location .............Superstructure roof.Ammunition carried... .600 rounds.RemarksPenetration of homogeneous armor at 30°,APCBC projectile500 yards...84 .1,000 yards...72 .c. 75-MM ASSAULT-ANTITANK GUN ON PS.- Kpfw. IV CHASSIS (PZ. Jiig. IV fiir 7.5 cm Pak39 (L/48)). (1) General. In this case the7.5 cm Pak 39 (L/48), has been mounted on amodified PC. Kpfw. IV chassis. It again is anassault gun in form, with a dual mission: antitankand anti-personnel.(2) Specifications.GeneralNomenclature Panzer Jagcr IV fur 7.5 cmPak 39 (L/48).Type of carriage.. Panzer Jagcr .Length over-all:Excluding gun....18 . . 2 .18Width over-all 10 feet 4 inches.Height over-all...6 . . 5 inches.Weight ........... . . . .27Crew4 men.GunType 7.5 C, , L 39 I’ukMuzzle velocity..APCBC 2,300 feet persecond.Elevation —8° to + 22°.Traverse12° left, 10° right.Muzzle brake No.Buffer ........ . . .RecuperatorHydropneumatic.Ammunition:Types fired APCBC HE HC AP 40 SmokeRounds carried... 79Muzzle velocity. .2,300 1,800 1,475 3,248 1,771(feet per second)Projectile weight. 15 12.7 11 9 13.7(pounds)

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIED.Figure 82.-7.5 cm Pak 40 on Ps. Kpfw. 3H (t) Chassis.Figure 83.-7.5 cnt Pak 40 on Pz. Kpfw. II Chassis.VII—61

UNCLASSIFl:I MARCH i945 TM-E 30-451l'lyurc iVV.--~.62 on 1'akCarriageSuspension:Numl~cr of I)o.gies. . . .S.Type ol bogies Small rubber tired.NunltleI-r , i returnrollers 4.Track. length 11 feet 6 i~lchv\.Track. ititlth 7 feet 11 iilctw\k?dtll of link l foot 3 incllv>.Hull armor :Front 60 mm :tt 15 ’ .Sitlcs ..............30 mm vvl-tid.Rear22 mm at 12°.Top20 mm.Belly12 mm.Fightillg compartmentarmor:l;rontGO mm at 50’.Sides30 mm at 30”.PowerEngine:TypeMaybach HL 120 TR11.Cylinders \--12 at 60”.FuelGasolillc.I~ocationReu.Horsepower 295 at 3,000 rl)m.TransmissionManual s~~l~~h~-ot~~c~sh,sliding (IoL: tylx’, 6forwartl, 1 rcvcrse.DriveFront sprocket.PerformanceTrench crossing 9 feet.Fording3 feet.Radius of action 160 miles.Step .................2 . 2 6 Icct AGrdicnt30”.hIaximum

I MARCH 1945Elevation -—S° to + 1.;“.Tra\cl-se ........ 10” each \\-a?.Muzzle brake....No t enrolmterctl.Iluffcr ....... Hydr:~ulic.Reculx‘rator ....... Hydroplle~un:itic.Ammunition:Types fired APCBC HE Al'4()1luzzlc I-elocity ... 3,06S 2.300 .w4(feet per second)I’rojcctil~~ weight... . 15 12.7 IO.7(pounds)Rounds carried..Total of 55 romltls.CarriageS11spensio11 :Number of bogies. . S .Type of bogies Small r111)bcr tirul.Kumber oi rcturt~nrllers ...4.Track, length.,,11 feet 6 incllcs.Track. Jvidth 7 feet 11 inchv~L\‘idth of link..... l 1 foot 3 iwhcs.Hull al-mor:Front .............% I 80 mm at 45”.Sides ...........___.30 mm vertical.Rear .......20 mm. 10' unil~~-cii lBelly10 to 20 mm.Fi,qhtin,g compartmentarmor:Front . 8 0 mm at SO”Sides 4' i nun ,ii 30 \Top20 mm.TM-E 30-451Engine :TypeMayhaeh HL 120 TRM.Cylinders V-12 al 60 n .FuelGasoline.LocationRear.I lorsi-power 295 al 3.000 rptn.TransmissionManual, synchromesh,sliding dog I>J’C;6 i0r\vad. I reverie.I )rive..............Front sprocket.Pet-r

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 86.~-10.5 Cl,, Stfl. ii. 42.e. 105M M ASSAVLT HOUTTZER ON PZ. Kpfw.III CHASSIS (Stu. G. III fiir 10.5 cm Stu. H.42). (1) G~~tcraZ. This close-support weaponhas the usual characteristics of the assault gunsmentioned in previous paragraphs, but is confinedto a purely antipersonnel role and does not firearmor-piercing ammunition. Like most Germanhowitzers, however, it is supplied with hollowchargeammunition to give it some anti-armorperformance.(2) Specificntio~zs.GeneralNomenclature ........ Ctu. G. III fiir 10.5 cutSfu. IT. 42.Type of carriage..... Sfzk. G. III, Sd. Kfz142/2.Length over-all:Tncluding gun..2 0 feet 2 inches.Excluding gun,..17 feet 9 inches.Width over-all....9 feet 8 inches.Height over-all.....6 feet 5 inches.Weight .......... 25.8 short tons.Crew -,...............4 men.VIl—64Type 10.? ,m C/ii. il. 4-7.Muzzle velocity HE 1,540 feet persecond.Maximum rallx :c..8,530 Lartl ~Elevation ........... . P O” 10Traverse10° each way.Muzzle brake...Yes.Buffer .. JT ytlraulic.RecuperatorHydro] mctinialic.Ammunition :Types fired., 1II; 11c: SmokeMuzzle rclocit) -.. l,SU)(feet lwr s~con~l)Projectile weight 3L0 25,‘) 32.4(pountls)Rounds carried Total of 3d rounds.Carring

I MARCH 1945Track, width 8 feet 2 % inches.\Vidth of link 1 foot 3 i j inches.Hull armor:Front 50 mm at 5’“.S’I(1es30 mm vertical.Rear 50 mm. 'Belly30 mm.Fighting compartmentarmor :Front 80 mm at 10”.Sides30 mm vertical.PowerEngine:Type kIay1xd1 III. 1’0.CylindersI7-12.FuelGasolinc.LocationRear.Horscpolvcr 295 at 3,000 rpm.Transmission Synchromesll ; 6 forwartl,1 rcversc.DriveFront sprocket.PerformanceTrench crossing 8 iect 6 inches.Fording2 feet 9 inches.Radius of action......,105 miles.Step2 icet.Gradient 27”.Maximum speed 25 miles per hour.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E30- 4513. Field and Medium Self-Propelled Artillerya. WASP (?l'cspc), lo..? cm lc. I;. H. (IS/.?OS TH E ]\]ODIF1KD 1'z. Kpf'K'. 11 CHASSIS. (1)Grrrcr-~71. The \\yasp is tlw niod coiiinlo~~ selfpropc.lledversion of the standard German lightfielcl ho\\ilzc>r, lci.3 cm lc. 1'. fi. 1s. \“\.ith amaximum elevation of 4.2 dqx~5, it has on11slightly lws maximum range thxi the fieltlmountedI-u-don. Otlwr modified versions of the10.5 cm lc. 1'. 11. 7(V may be found mounted onthe I‘rcnch "Jm-rnine" c~hassis, the IJotchkiss 39tank chassis, and the Pz. fi,bj:il. II I> chassis.(2) .s~c~c~ific~tr/ii~rrs.ralNomenclatureI! Y.v/v.Type'of carriage .Vrc. // (Wcspc), Sd.Kfrj. 121.Length over-all:E.uclutling gun.1 5 Ccct 9 inclws.Width ox-cl--all ...7 feet 3 % inclles.Heigllt over-all... i 7 icet 10% inchw.\Vcight _...12.33 tons.Crew5 men.% • * • • *Fi,91we U - — Wa.rp (10.5 cm lc. I2.H. 1X/2 ou 1':. Kpfw. II).VII—65

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIED - E3 °- 451V'ujurc 89.—15 cm Stu. If. 43 on /'.;•. Kpj'w. IV ClmssisfHntiiunbiir).VII—66Figure 90.—15 cm Heavy Infantry Howitzer (s.I.G. 33) on I'z. Kffiv: II Chassis

I MARCH 1945GunType10.5 cm le. F. H. 18/Z.Muzzle velocity HE 1,772 feet per second.Maximum range 13,500 yards.Elevation —S° to + 42”.Traverse10" each way.Muzzle brake Yes.Buffer . H y d r a u l i c .RecuperatorHydropneumatic.Ammunition:Types fired HE ‘HC SmokeRounds carried 22 8Muzzle velocity 1,772 (supercharge)(feet per second)Projectile weight 32.6 25.9 32.4(pounds)CarriageSuspension:Number of bogiewheels 5.Type of bogie wheels.large.Number of returnrollers 3.Track, length 7 feet 10% inches.Track, width 6 feet 2 inches.Width of link 11M inches.Hull armor:Front30 mm.Sides20 mm.Fighting compartmentarmor:Front10 mm.Sides10 mm.PowerEngine:TypeMaybach HL 62 TR.Cylinders 6.FuelGasoline.Horsepower 140.Transmission Synchromesh; 6 forward,one reverse.D r i v e . F r o n t sprocket.PerformanceTrench crossing 6 feet.Fording ..............3 feet.Radius of action 127 miles.Stepl foot.Gradient30°.Maximum speed 25 miles per hour.b. GRIZZLY BEAR (Brusmbh’r) or Stu. Pz. 43(15 cm Stu. H. 43 (L/12) oa Pz, Kpfw. I!*CHASSIS). (1) General. This is essentially aclose-support weapon and mounts a very shortbarreledhowitzer in a high, armored superstructure.The 150-mm infantry gun (s. I. G. 33)performs a similar role on its various self-propelledmountings: the chassis of Pz, Kpfw. II?,Pz. Kpfw. II, and the Czech 38 (t). The GrizzlyUNCLASSIFIEDBear gives much better protection to the crew thanany of these,(2) Specificatiom-.GeneralNomenclature Rrzrvmbiir or Stu. PZ 43.Type of carriage S!II. G. IV, Sd. Kfc. 166.Length over-all:Including gun 19 feet 4 inches.Excluding gun 19 feet 4 inches.Width over-all 9 feet 8 inches.Height over-all.......8 feet 2 inches.‘eight30.4 tons.Crew ................. . men.GunType15 cm Stu. H. 43 (L/12).Muzzle velocity HE 790 feet per second.Maximum range HE 5,000 yards(approximately).Elevation : —8.5” to + 30”.TraverseS” each M‘ay.Muzzle brake No.Ammunition:Types fired HE HC SmokrMuzzle velocity 790 902 780(feet per second)Projectile weight 83.6 55 85.7(pounds)rtment carried Total of 38 rounds.CarriageSuspension:Number of bogiewheels 8.Type of bogie wheels. Small rubber tired.Number of returnrollers 4.Track, length 11 feet 6 inches.Track, width 8 feet 1 inch.Hull armor:Front45 plus 50 mmarmor at 1.5”.Sides30 mm vertical.Rear20 mm.Fighting compartmentarmor:Front 101 mm at 38°.Sides 50 mm at 18°.Roof 22 mm at 82°.PowerEngine:TypeMaybach HL 120 TRM.Cylindersv-12.Fuel • Gasoline.Horsepower .......,295 at 3,000 rpm.TransmissionSynchromesh; 6 forward,1 reverse.DriveFront sprocket.VII—67

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45IFigure 91.45 cm s.F.H. 18 on hybrid PB. Kpfw. III/IV Chassis (Hw~zwl).VII—68

I MARCH 1945PerformanceTrench crossing 9 feet.Fording ...........3 feet.Radius of action .130 miles.Step2 feet 6 inches.Gradient 30°.Maximum speed...25 miles per hour.ArmamentType ................One d1.G‘. 34, ball mount.LocationLeft of main armament.C. BUMBLE BE (~Zf172d) 15 C?lZ S. I;.II. 18 /lON GZW. II IIV. (1) Gcncral. This self-propelledmedium howitzer employs a h$% l chassismade up of the suspension of the Ps. Kpficl. II’and various components of I’,-. k’pficf. 111. Thisgun has the same mission in its self-propclletl versionas in its fieltl version. The 15 cm S. I;. II. 1.7,ai1 older medium howitzer (obsolete on its fieltlmount), may he fount1 in the same role, niountctlon the French "Lorraine" chassis.(2) S~ccificatimsGeneral .Nomenclature Hummel.Type elf carriage Gw. III/IV, Sd. k-f:. 165.Length over-all:Including g u n . 2 1 feet 3% inches.Excluding gun.2 0 feet 4:/8 inches.Width over-all...9 feet 8% inches.Height over-all.9 feet 7.; 1 inches.WeightCrewUNCLASSIFIED25.2 tons.6 men.GunType 15 cm s.F.f1. 18/1.Weight2.07 tons (barrel andbreech).hfuzzle velocity 11E 1.70.5 feet per second.l\laximum range HE charge eight 14.57Jyards.Elevation 0° to 39°.Traver5c16” each way.Muzzle brake........No.1:ufferHydraulic (under tube).RecuperatorHydropneumatic (overtube),Ammunition :Types fil-cd ... HE HC SmokeThi s carried..... 12 Ghluzzlc 1clarity .. 1.705Projcctilc weight.. 9.5.9 86l-I-iageSuspension:Suml)cr of hogiewheels 8.Type of l& e whrel~. Small rubber tired.Number of returnrollers 4.Track, length 11 feet 6 incllcs.Track, width 7 feet lO~/~ iii&es.Width of link l foot 3 in&es.Hull armor:Front.... .. 3 0 mm at 22”.Sides.2C mm vertical.Rear .20 mm at 9°.Figure 92.—-15 cm Howitzer (s.F.H. 13) 01% French Lorrailte Chassis.VIl—69

I MARCH 1945TopBellyFighting compartmentarmor:FrontSidesTOPEngine:TypeCylindersFuelLocationHorsepowerTransmissionDrive17 mm horizontal.17 mm horizontal.I0 mm at 37°.lO mm at 16°.10 mm at 12”.PowerMaybach HL 120 TRM.v-12.Gasoline.Center.295 at 3,000 rpm.Synchromesh ; 6 forward,1 reverse.Front sprocket.PerformanceTrench crossing 9 feet.Fording2 feet 7% inches.Radius of action......,160 miles.Step2 feet 6 inches.Gradient30”.Maximum specrd 2j miles per hour.4. Tank Destroyersa. RHINOCEROS (Nashont), FORMERLY HORNET (Hornisse), 8.8 cm Pak 43/1 ON THE GW.III/IV. (1) Gcfzcral. This is one of the versionsof the S.S CIFZ Pnk 43, the latest 88-mmantitank gun, mounted on the hybrid chassis ofthe Pz. Kpfw. III and IT/. The vehicle's silhouetteis very high and the armor protectiongiven to the crew by the thin-skinned superstructureis very poor. ‘The gun, however, is able toengage tanks ,at very long ranges.(2), Specifications.GeneralNomenclature Nashorn.Type of carriage :. .... G*Lu. III/IV, Sd. Kfz. 164.Length over-all:Including gun 27 tcct 8 : A’ inches.Excluding gun 20 feet 4>/8 inches.Width over-all 9 fe& 8% inches.Height over-all 9 feet 7$j inches.Weight27 tons.Crew5 men.GunType8.8 cwt Pak 43/l (L/71).Muzzle velocity APCBC 3,280 feet persecond.Elevation—5” to + 20”.Traverse15” each way.Muzzle brake Yes.BufferHydraulic.RecuperatorHydropneumatic.VII—70UNCLASSIFIEDLZmmunition:Types fired .... ; IPC K HIZ HC AP 40Muzzle velocit ,.....3,280 2,100 1.968 3.705(feet per second)Projectile weight ....22.4 20.7 14.x 16(pounds)Rounds carried Total of 48 ( l iCarriageSuspension :Jumber ot- boglcs. .. 8.Type of bogies ...Small rubber tired.Number of returnrollers 4.Track, length ..... ll feet 6 inches.Track, width 7 feet 11 inches.Width of link 1 fix it 3 inches.Hull armor :Front30 mm at 12°.Sides20 mm vertical.Rear22 mm.Top17 mm.Belly17 mm.Fighting compartmentarmor :Front10 mm at 30°.Sides : 10 mm at 16°.1 'owerEngine:Type ........ I I L 120 TRM.Cylinders ......... \ ‘-12.FuelGasoline.LocutionCenter.Horsepower ....295 ;LI 3.000 r-pm.TransmissionMaybach syncllromesh;6 i

MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED33-451Figuw 93.~-8.8 cln PaIs 43/lou Ps Jag. II I/W(Rlair~occvos)t:_«„:Figure 94.—8.8 cm Stu, K.43/1ful because it IS ponderous and difficult tomaneuver.(2) Specificntion.r.GeneralNomenclature ........ Ele~arzI.Type of carriage ... P . z. Jag. Tiger P, Sd. Kfz.184.Length over-all:Including gun 26 feet 10 inches.Excluding gun ..23 feet 4 inches.Wi~lth over-all . I1 fret 3 incheson Tiger I' Oiii.c.n'.v I Elephant).Hclght owr-all . O t ’ret IO inches‘eight . 7 3 short tons.Crew6 men.Type1.

I MARCH 1945Buffer ...............Hydraulic.Recuperator..........Hydropneumatic.Ammunition:Types fired ......APCBC HE HC AP 40Rounds carried 20 70Muzzle velocity ....3,280 2,460 1,968 3,705(feet per second)Projectile weight .. .22.4 20.7 16.8 16(pounds)CarriageSuspension:Number of bogiewheels ..... h, in pairs.Type of bogie wheels. Large.Number of returnrollers ........None.Hull armor:Front..............200 mm at 32”.Sides ............. SO mm vertical.Rear ........80 mm vertical.Top ..............30 mm horizontal.Belly ..........20 mm horizontal.Fighting compartmentarmor:Front .......170 mm 31 30".Sides ......90 mm at 30”.1’owcrEngines:Type ........... T\vo Maybach HL 120TRhfs.Location ..........Center.Horsepower ......,590.Transmission .......Electric drive.Drive ................Rear sprocket.I’crformanccFording2 feet 4 inches.Radius of action ....62 tnilcs.Gradient ............. 30”.Maximum speed ..12.5 milts per hour.RemarksPenetration of homogeneous armor at 30”,APCBC projectile:500 yards 184 mm.1,000 xards lh9 mm.c. Jagd.pantllcr, 8.8 cm Pak 13/3 OR 43/4(L/71) ON THE PANTHER CHASSIS. (1) Gmeral.This tank destroyer is intended for engay;ing armored targets at long ranges from stationarypositions. A single, heavy, sloping plate protectsthe front of both hull and superstructure.The gun is mounted centrally in this plate, givingthe vehicle the appearance of an assault gun, withthe gun rather- high.(2) Specifications.GeneraiNomenclature Jagdpanthcr.VII—72UNCLASSIFIEDUTM-E J0-45IType of carriage ..... p.7. J;i!/. I’tr~~llwr, .Vtl.Kfc. 173.Length over-ail:Includittg cttn .. 3? fcc.1 4 inches.Excluding gun ....22 irc.t 9 incllcs.Width over-all ...10 feet 9 Icr tHeight over-all .. S 8 Feet 3 inches.\$‘cight .... 51.15 Jtort tons.Crew5 men.GunT?.PC ._............... S.A’ an I 'ale 43/3 or 43/-f(I./,-i1.~lttzzlc \clocity .... :\l ’(‘l : ( 3.2X) fret persecond.F:levation ....—X” ,I, -I- 1-l”.Travcrw _.....13' each way.luzzle brake ..Yes.Bttffer ...... I fydt-aulic.Recuperator ......... H?clr,,llttctttnatic.;\mmunition :Types firul M'CT.CHE I1C A1’40Rounds cart-iet l 2 8 29Muzzle wlocity .. 3.280 2,4hO 1,00x 3.x5(feet per sccotltl)Projectile weight.... 2 . ?.4 20.7 16.8 16(pounds)CarriageSuspenhion :Number of boqics..8.Type oi bogies.. Douhlc.Number of returnrollers 1.Track. lcqgt l t . 1 3 fcc,t 5 % inches.Track, \\itlth ..8 feet 772 inches.\Vidtlt of link.. ? 2 fret 2 inches.Hull armot- :Front 80 mm at 55°.Sides30 mm vertical.Rear 40 mm at 30°.Fighting compartmentarmc:Front80 mm at 55°.Sides45 mm at 30°.Powerl

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451. * \Figwe 95.—- & S cm Pak 43/3 on Panther Chussis (Jugdputltlwr).Armament Ammunition :Type One MXi. 34, ball mount. Type< fired A PC APCBC HELocation Glacis plate. hluzzle velocity . Z . S O! ) 3,020 2,886Remarks(feet Icr sccontl)Projectile \+eigll l . 5X.1 62.5 57Penetration of homogeneous armor at 30°,(pounds)APCBC projectile:Rounds carried Total of 40 rounds.500 yards 184-mm.1,000 yards 169 mm.( ‘miage(1. Jagdtigcr, 12.8 cm Pak 44 (L/55) ON THE Torsion J>ar Suspen-Pa. Jiig. Tiqrr RLODEL 13. (1) Gcncr-nl. The sion :12.8 cm Pak 44 (L/55) is the largest caliber anti- Number of bogietank gun the Germans have produced so far. 1twheels 9.Type of hosir ~vhrcl~. TUin.is only found in a self-propelled version, mountedNumber of returnon the P.z. Jiig Ti~qcr Model B, which is an adapta- rollers None.tion of the King Tiger chassis. The superstruc- Track. Icngt l ~ I3 feet 4 inches.ture in which the gun is mounted, is very heavily Track, 1 1 itlth . O 9 icct. 2 inches.armored. The J&tiger supersedes the 12.8 cucM’idtll of link ._ ’ 2 icct 8 % inches.K. 40 mounted on a hybrid chassis, which was Hull armor:cmploq-ed in Russia and will probably not be en- Front 150 mm at 50°.countered in the future. Sides 80 mm vertical.Rear 80 mm at 30°.(2) Specifications. Fighting compartmentGeneral armor :Nomenclature lagdtigcr. Front 250 mm al 15°.Type of carriage 1's. Jag. Tiger Model B, Sides 80 mm at 25°.Sd. Kfz. 1S6. Rear 80 mm at 10°.Length over-all:Including gun 32 feet 2 inches.1 'owerExcluding gun 23 feet 10 inches. tnginr:Width over-all 11 feet 9}4 inches.Height over-all 9 feet 3 inches.Txpr .. 1I aybach HL 230 1’30.Weight77.2 short tons.C?-lindrrs ..V-12.Crew 6 men. Fuel Gasoline.LocationRear.(amHorsepower...,595 at 2,600 rpm.Type 12.8 cm Pak 44 (L/55). Transmission ....Preselector, hydraulicMuzzle velocity APCBC 3,020 feet per operation; 8 forward,second.4 reverse.Muzzle brake Yes. Drive ..............Front sprocket.l—73

MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM. E »MS.Figure 96.—12.8 cm KM on Hybrid Chassis (l J s. Kpfv. Ill, IV, VI).I’erform~nceFording .........5 feet 9 inches.Radius of action .... . .lOhGradient ....... 3S°Maximum :pecd 26 miles per hour..Zrmamcnt. Mounted One M.G.34.CarriedOne M.G.42.RcmarlisPenetration ol homogeneous armor at 30” :APC APCBC530 yards ...... I72 mm 212 mm.1,000 yards 148 mm 200 mm.5. Self-Propelled Antiaircraft Gunsa. GENERAL. The growth of Allied air powerand the decline of the Lzlft~affr have forced theGermans to devise self-propelled antiaircraft guilsto defend transport columns from low-level airattack.b. Flakpames. Light antiaircraft guns of ZOmmor 37-mm caliber mounted on half-trackedv&i&s have bwn in existence for sc c tiol l butVII—74the appwtxnce of the so-call~tl FlnfipaWcr orantiaircraft tanks is a new development. Theseconsist csscntia;ly of a tank lvith turret removedand replaced by a light antiaircraft gun protectedby an armored shield. The following types ofFlalzpa~~~cv have heen identified so far:(1) The 2 CUL Flak 35 mounted on the chassisof the Czech 38 (t) tank.(2) The 3.7 cm Flak 43 mounted on the Pz.Kpfw. IV chassis.(3) The 2 C~II, Fiakvicrluuj 38 (four-barreledantiaircraft automatic canno11) mounted on thePz. Kpfzv. IV chassis with a thin eight-sidedshield.c. HALF-TRACK CARRIAGES. The 15-mm or20-mm M. G. 151, a standard aircraft machinegun, has been recently mounted on the 3-ton,lightly armored. half-tracked vehicle, Sd. Kfz.251/21, in a triple mounting with maximum elevationof 49”. The maximum cyclic rate of firefor the three guns is 2,100 rounds per minute.(Details of antiaircraft weapons are given inscctioll TVj

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4516. List of Self-Propelled Artillerya. CLOSE SUPPORT AND ASSAULT SELF-PROPELLED ARTILLERY.Gun7.5 cm Kw.K. (L/24)7.5 cm Kw.K. (L/24)7.5 cm Kw.K. (L/21)7.5 cm Kw.K. (L/24)7.5 cm Stit.K. 40 (I./43)7.5 cm Stit.K. 40 (L/48)7.5 cm Stu.K. 40 (L/4S)7.5 cm Stu.K. 42 (L/70)CarriagePs. Kpfw. III chassis (Sd.Kfz. 142)Half-track (Sd. Kfz.251/90)8-wheeled armoured car(Sd. Kfz. 233)Half-track (Sd. Kfz. 10)Pz. Kpfw. Ill chassis (Sd.Kfz. 142)Pz. Kpfw. Ill chassis (Sd.A"/.::. 142)Pz. Kpfw. IV chassisPz. Kpfw. IV chassis (Sd.Kfz. 162)h. FIELD AND MEDIUM SELF-PROPELLED AR-TILLERY.10.5 cm Stu.H. 42 (L/28)15 cm s.l.G. 33 (I./12)15 cm s.l.G. 33 (L/12)15 cm s.l.G. 33/1 (L/12)15 cm Stit. H. 43 (L/12)10.5 cm le.F.H. 18/210.5 cm le.F.H. 18/410.5 cm le.F.H. 1810.5 cm le.F.H. 18/115 cm s.F.II. 1315 cm s.F.I I. 18/1Pz. Kpfw III chassis (Sd.Kfz. 142)Pz. Kpfw. I B chassis(Sd. Kfz. 101)Pz. Kpfw. 11 chassis (Sd.Kfs. 121)Gw. 38 (Sd. Kfz. 138/1)Pz. Kpfw. IV chassis (Sd.Kfz. 166)(Ja\ II (Sd. Kfz. 124)Lorraine (French) chassisPz. Kpfw. II. 39 chassisPs. Kpfw. IV B chassisLorraine (French) chassisGw. 111/IV (Sd. Kfz. 165)Gun7.5 cm Pak 39 L/487.5 cm Pak 407.5 cm Pak 407.5 cm. Pak 407.5 cm Kw.K*7.5 cm Pak 40/17.5 cm Pak 407.5 cm Pak 407.5 cm Pak 407.5 cm Pak 39 (L/4S)~. cm Pa/: 36 (I,)*7.62 cm Pflk 36 (Y)-61 cm Pak 36 (Y)7.62 cm Pak 36 (r)7.62 cm Pak 36 (r)7) cm I’afc 36 (r)c - /,2 cm F.K. fr)8.8 c Pak 4.311 (J./ii)8.8 cm Pak 43/3 nr /',;/.•43/48.8 cm Sfit.K. 13/1 (L/711or Pak 43/2 (L/71)12.8 cm K.40fz. Jdg 38 (t)CarriagePz. Kpfii’. II chassisI’z. J;ig. II (Sd. Kf,-. 131)Ps. Jiig. II (,-IllSf. D/E)(.\‘d. Kj.?. 132)IT;ilF-tl-ad; (.Cd. Kf,-. 251/9)Pz. Jlu,. 1.r. .C. (Sd. Kfz.13.i)TruckSclmcitlcr Kegresse ArmoredCar chassis (modif&l)Hotchkiss H. 39 tankchassisPo~r.r~~rjLigcr IV (Sd. Kfz.l(2)FIxIr-track (.Ccl. Kfz. 6)I’:. Kpfii’. 38 (t) chassisPz. .laa. 3S /.Cd. Ii/,z. 1 3 :)Pz. Kpfw. II clni;sisPz. Jag. I-( (.\‘ti. Kf:. 131)Pz. Jiig. IJ Arrsf. D/E(\‘d. Kj.:. 132)I’:. Iii;/. II Ausf. D/E‘tl. IiI i ’. 132)Pz. Jiig. III/IV (Sd. Kfi.I’::. lipfit*. T’nnthcr chassis(Sd. Kfz. 173)T’i!i~.r (Pi chassis (Sd.Kfz. 182)I lyhrid chassis12.8 cm Pak 44 (L/55) iij,,r II chassisc. TAN K DESTROYERS.GunCarriage2.8 cm Pak 41* Half-track (Sd. Kfs. 250)3.7 cm Pak* Half-I rack (Sd. Kfz. 251)3.7 cm Pak* Renault "Chenillette"(French) armoredcarrier4.7 cm Pak (t)* Pz. Kpfw. I chassis4.7 cm Pak (t)* Pz. Jag. 14.7 cm Pak (t)* Renault R.3S (French)tank chassis5 cm Kw.K. 39/1** 8-wheeIed armored car(Sd. Kfz. 234)7.5 cm Pak 40 Pz. Kpfw. 38 (t) chassis7.5 cm Pak 40/3 Ps. Jag 38 (Sd. Kfz.138)d. SELF-PROPELLED ANTIAIRCRAFT GUNS.2 cm Flak 30 or 3S*2 cm Flak 3S*2 cm Flaki'icrlnig 3S*3.7 cm Flak IS or 36*5 cm Flak 41*M.G. 151/15 or M.G.151/20 FlakdnUiiuj2 cm Flak 383.7 cm Flak 432 cm Flakvicrling 38Haif-irack (Sd. Kfz. 10)Hxli-:I-ack (Sd. Sfz. 70)* Obsolete** Sea "Armored Cars" for descriptionHal M rack (.Ctl. I

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451.:-*• ,Figure 97.—Ps. Kpfw. I, Model A.(2) Specifica.tiowSpecification N:umbrr Sil. Ki 101.(Commander's hlode1M»d.;A I', ( '••miiniiulcr'sWeight in action (tons) 5.88 6.44 6.44Crew 2 men 2 men 3 menArmor, Hull front 13 mm 13 mm M mmHull sides IS mm 15 urn 15 mmFront glacis plate .. 8 mm 8 mm 20 mmSuperstructureSides 1.1 mm 13 mm 15 mmTurret front .. . 15 mm 15 mmTurret sides ... 13 mm 13 mmArmament Two Two OneM.c. n MX',. !S ( .111; M.C. .?/DimensionsLength (ieel) 13 14 14\Vitlth (lcc~t) 6.75 6.75 6.75Height (feet) 5.58 5.73 6.75Cleru2ncc (illclics) 9.75 10 1Road speed (miles pvr hour) 12 15-16 15-16Range on roads (miles) 112 87 87VII—76* Sd. Kjs. is tile German abbreviation for Sunderkraftfalir,:eui/, meaning special mutur vehicle.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451I. GeneralSection VI. ARMORED VEHICLESThe story of German armored vehicle developmentis concerned principally with tanks, lvhichhave undergone considerable change since the beginningof the war. German tanks have shown,in the ccourse of 5 years of war, a gradual changefrom the Blitzkrieg concept of battle to greateremphasis on defensive, or at least offensive-defensive,operations for which the latest Germantank, the King Tiger, heavily armed and armoredbut relatively slow and unmaneuverable, issuitable.German tank development began in 1934, ostensiblyat the same time as the rest of the rearmamentprogram, but thcrc is no doubt that considerablethought and experimentation had been de\otctl to the subject before then. By 1939 theGermans had evolved four types of tanks: the Pz.Iipfx.f 1 I II III, and IV, with xvhich the Blitzkuicgcampaigns \\-ere conducted. There is evidencethat larger tanks $vere being developed in1939, and specimens of \vhat are assumed to havebeen a 1’~. Kpfw. V and a Pz. Kpfw. VI in anexperimental stage were employed in the invasionof Xor\vay. These, however, must have provedunsatisfactory, since they were dropped, and thepresent PC. Rpf~l. Y (Panther) and Pz. Kpfw.VI (Tigerj have no connection with them.~Ieamvhile, the I-‘z. Kpfw. I and II graduallybecnmc obsolescent, first being relegated to reconnaissanceroles and then finally disappearing in1913 from the Table of Equipment of the Pa~zcvregimeilt. The heavier tanks, Pun. Kpj+cl. IIIand II’, \vhich had proven satisfactory under fire,were modified to meet new conditions bv thickerarmor and more effective guns.In 1942, the I’:. Kpfw. VI, or Tiger, appearedin Russia, and later in Africa. The Tiger wasdesigned in the direct German tradition, andsnnply xl-as armed more heavily and armoretlmore thickly than its predecessors. It appearctlout of its proper ortler in the line of succession,for the Pz. Kpfiu. Y, or Panther, did not appearuntil nearly a year later. The Panther was somewhatof a surprise, since it marked a departurefrom the conventional lines of German design,and in the arrangement of its armor showedstrong signs of Russian influence. Its great sucxPz. Kpfw. is the German abbreviation for I’an.xrkampfwagen,meaning armored fighting vehicle or tank.cess in combat undoubtedly gave rise to the decisionto redesign the Tiger, which to some extenthad fallen short of expectations. The new versionis the ~ocn~~s~~~rr or King Tiger.2. Obsolete Tanksa. GEKERAL. The I’_n. Kpfw. I, Pz. Kpfw. II,and J’z. Kpfw. III, although obsolete, are discussedhere since thcv still may be met occasionallyin the field.b. LIGHT TANK (PZ. Kpfw. I). (1) General.This was the first tank to be standardized by theGermans, and th

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451I'iiiurc 98.—Pz. Kpfw. IIDimensions, Lcngtb was a .?7-111111 gun. The P,-. Kp[~l. III now is ob(feet) . 1 4 . 7 5 14.83 solcte and rarely wcounterctl. The excellent hullWidth (fcet) _..7.33 8.25 and suq)ension have been utilized as the carriageHeight (feet) ... .6.48 6.33for self-propelled guns, and it is in this form thatGround ClC:iGWCC(inrhes) ..... I3 16 (;lpprc)si- the vehicle remains in production. The Pz. Kpf:cl.mate) Ill has been encountered armed with the short 7.5Engine ........ h-qlinder • 6-C~liIItkr cm Kw.K. (the original armament of the Pz.In-line In-lint Zip/;ct. I[‘), anti also as a commander's vehicle,133 HP 176 HI’;~s a llamc-thro\ving tZlllli. as a \I-I-wker tank, aS an(;asoline GasolineRoad speed (milts armored ammunition carrier, a~icl as an armoredper hour) .. I5 40 obscryation post.Range 011 roads(miles) 118 155 (2) S~c,c-i/it-ntiorl.Models I and MSuspension : Alotlrl F: 5 hogie wlleels each side : Specification number ...Sd. Kf.:. 141/1.quarter-cllilllic 1cLf springing. Front driw Weight in action 24.6 ton-sprocket, rear idler.(approximately).Model L: 5 axles, torsion bar suspension; intcr- Crew 5 men.leaved bogie wheels. Front drive sprocket, rear ~lrnmor. I~riml nose plate..SO mm.idler. C,lnci\ Illate _..25 mm.Driver's front plate 50 antI 20 mm ,spacedd. MEDIUHI TANK (PZ. Kpfw. 111). (1) Gcu- armor.cral. This tank has appeared in many models but Hull sides 30 mm.has retained basic characteristics throughout. The Rear plate< ... SO 50 mm.Turret front 57 mm.latest models to appear are armed with the long-Turret sides 10 mm.barreled 5 cm Kw.K. 39 (L/60), which in 1942 Armament (coasinll:displaced the shorter 5 cm Kw.K. (L/32). The mounted in turret) . . .One 5 CU‘ Kw.K. 39original main armament, discarded late in 1940,with one M.G.34VII—78

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDFigw W.—-Pz. K~fw 11 1In hullOne M.G.34.Dimensions, Length.. . .17 feet 8 inches.Width9 feet 9 inches.Height .......... 8 feet 3 inches.Gun overhang... 1 ioot 3 inches.(approximately).Ground clearance .. 1 foot 2 inches.Performance, Maximumspeed ..............35 miles per hour(approximately).Road speed ......, 252 miles per hour.Cross-country speed. 10 to 15 miles per hour.Range on roads ... I02 miles.Range cross-country. .59 miles.Trench crossing....8 feet 6 inches.Step2 feet.Gradient ......... 30”.Fording2 feet 9 inches.Engine, Type Maybach HL 120 TRM.FuelGasoline.BHP296 HP at 3,000 rpm.Transmission: SSG77 Maybach synchromeshgear box, sliding dog type, manual control.Six forward speeds, one reverse.Suspension: Six small rubber-tired bogie wheelson each side. Torsion-bar suspension.3. Medium Tanksa. Pz. Kpfw. IV. (1) General. Of the fourtank types with which the Germans started thewar, only the Pz. Kpfw. IV survives in service,although its role has been changed and it nowcarries a main armament which resembles the originalgun only in caliber. It was armed originallywith a short-barreled 75mm gun (7 3 cw Kw.K.(L/Z11) and a machine gun mounted coaxially inthe turret. In later models a hull machine gunwas added. L\‘ith this short, lotv-velocity gun thetank \vas primarily a close-support weapon. In1942 it \vas r-c-armetl with a long-barreled, highvelocityg-un, the 7.5 C//I Kw.K. 40 (L/43), andthus changed its role from a close-support vehicleto a fighting tank and (lisplaced the Pz. Kpfw. IIIas the main armament of the Panzer regiment. Atthe prcscnt time the I',-. Kpfzer. ZV is only a stopgapfor the Panther. If enough Panther tanksbecome available, the tlisappearance of the Pz.KPfw. II mny be exp~~cted.The latest version oi this tank to appear is theModel H, \\-hich t1iflt.rs from the Model G, ofwhich details arc givc,n, only in its 75mm gunbeing 48 calibers long illstead of 43. There is nochange in the ballistic ~.ll:tr-acteristics.This tank also has ;~lq~~~-cd in a commander'smodel, as an obser\.ation-I)ost tank, as an ammunitiontnlik. and as an nrmor~tl antiaircraftvehicle. Thr hull ant1 susl)~nsion also have beenemplo\.etl for self-propelled guns.C2 ) S‘~c,ciiiccltiolls.Slodcl GSpecification number ...S(i. h’j.7. 161/l.(.\Iodel H is.Cd. Kfz. X1/2).Weight in action ...26 tons.Crew5 men.VIl—79

I MARCH 1945.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 100.—-1’s. Kffz-nchl-omesh, sliding-dogtype ; six forwart ~pcetls, 0IIc re\‘c*-sc.Steering: Epiqz l ic clutch III-akc mccllanism.Suspension: Four I)ogic aswnl~lic~. each carryingt\vo rulJwr-tirctl bogk11 hrels. Quarterellipticspringing.4. Heavy Tanksa. P:. l

UNCLASSlFEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 101.—Vs. Kpfw. "Vanlhcr".Fiptre _lOZ.—Pz Kpf-UJ. "Tiger".VII—8I

,I MARCH 1945The Panther first was met in action on theRussian front in the summer of 1943. Originallydesignated PB. Kpfw. Y, its nickname, Panther,was, adopted as its official nomenclature in February1944. The latest version to appear is theModel G. The principal reasons for the successof the Panther are its relatively high speed,maneuverability, dangerous armament, and goodprotection.Variants of the Panther tank which have beenidentified are the commander's version, thewrecker tank (Bergepanther), and the self-propelledgun Jagdpalztlzer, which consists of the 8.8cm Pak 43/3 or 4 on the Panther chassis.(2) Specifications.Model GSpecification number .. .Sd. Kfz.171.Weight in action50 short tons(approximately).Crew ........_......5 men.Armor,Front glacis plate _.. .80 mm at 55”.*Front nose plate....60 mm at 35”.Rear plate 40 mm at 30”.(undercut)Hull sides40 mm vertical.Superstructure sides. .50 mm at 30”.Turret front 110 mm at 10°.Turret . ......45 mm at 25”.Turret rear 45 mm at 28°.Armament (coaxiallymounted in turret) .One i.5 CJU Kri8.K.13(L/70) and one M.C.34.In hull One M.G. 34.* All angle measurements given are from vertical.UNCLASSIFIEDDimensions, Len& .. ? l fee: 1I'L inches,(excluding gun)Width _.._..10 feet 9 ^ inches.Height ......9 ic,et 1 inches.Gun overhang . O o icct 5 incllcs.Ground clearance .... 1 foot 7 'A inches.Performance,Trench crossinc r. : o icct.S t e p . . . . . . 3 Ecet.Gradient 30°.Fording6 feet ( Some submeriiblcto 13 feet).Road speed ......20 miles {,cr hour.Crozs-country speed. .15 milt; IK’T hour.Maximum speed.35 milts per honr.Range on roads .. I24 miles.Range cross-country. .62 milt-.TM-E 30-451Engine, Type ....... Maybacll HL 230 P30.Cylinders .......V-12FuelGasoline.Fuel capacity .,193 gallons.Fuel consumption (per100 miles)On roads .... 139 gallons.Cross-country .. .298 gallons.BHP ............ 6!N HP at 3.000 rpm.Capacity .........23 liters (1.103 cubicinches).Transmission : Maybach synchromrsh sliding-dogtype; manually- operated, xi\-ing seven forwardspeeds, O:IC reverse.Suspension : l

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-t 3.0-45Ioriginally the Pz. Kpfw. VI, first was encounteredby the Russians in the last half of 1942, and bythe Western Allies in Tunisia early in 1943. It'scolloquial name, Tiger, was adopted officially inFebruary 1944. The current versioa is Model E.Unlike the Panther, the Tiger is designed onfamiliar German lines, but all the dimensions arcincreased. The main armament is the 8.8 cnzKw.K. 36, which is essentially the 8.8 cm Flak 36adapted for turret mounting. The mounting ofsuch a heavy gun has raised considerable problemsof rigidity, and consequently the hull is constructedof large plates entirely welded together.The superstructure is made up in one unit, andwelded to the hull. The turrent wall is made froma single large piece of armor, 82 mm thick, bentinto a horseshoe shape. Further, all the armorplates are interlocked, in addition to being welded.The armor of the Tiger, at the time of its appearance,was the thickest ever to be fitted on anyGerman tank, the front vertical plate being 102mm thick and the hull sides 62 mm.The suspension, which employs interleaved,Christie-type bogie wheels with a very wide- track,is reasonably simple and is an effective solutionof the suspension problem for such a large andheavy vehicle.The Tiger engine requires very skilled drivingand maintenance to get the best performance, andin the hands of insufficiently trained crews mechanicaltroubles are apt to appear. This characteristichas been the ‘ tank's principal disadvantage.(2) Spccificntiom.Model ESpecification number. . .Cd. Kf.7. IS1Weight in action..... 6X5 sllort tons.Crew .......5 men.Armor, Front nose plate102 mm at 30”.Front glacis plate.. . .62 mn~ at 80”.Lower nose plate....62 mm at 60”.Driver's front plate. , 102 mm at 10”.Hull sides _.....62 mm vertical.Superstructure sides. .82 mm vertical.Rear plate...... S2 mm at 20”(undcrcut).Turret front ... I00 mm at 0” to 11”.Turret sides and rear.82 mm vertical.Armament (cuaxiallym&ted in turret) .One x.8 cm Kiv.KJbCL/%). OIW dI.G.34In hull ........,.One 14.G.34.Dimensions, Length ...20 feet 8% inches,(excluding gun)Width with wide combattrack ... I2 feet 3 inchesWidth with narrowtransport track .... 10 feet 4 inches.Height ..........9 feet 41/s inches.Gun overhang . 7 feet % inch.Ground clearam{ , 1 foot 5 inches.‘criorrnance,Trench crossing JO 10 fret.Step .. * .2 feet 6 inches.Gradient .... 30”.Fording ... Suhmersihle to 13 feet.Jioad spce t l 1 5 I S milts per hour.Cros?-country speed .5 to 10 miles per hour.Maximum spcct l.25 milts per hour.!Zangc trn roatls . 8 7 miles.liangv croci-country.53 milts.Engine,. Type Mayhach HL 230 1’45.Cylintlers .... \ --12.BH I ’....,690 HI’ at 3,000 rpm.FuelGasoline.Fuel capacity . 1 5 0 gallons(al~~)roximatel~).Transniiusion: Alayl,ach-Olvar presclective gearbox,hydraulicnll~ operated with eight for\vard speeds and four rt’ver’;e.Suspension: Front tlri\-ing sprocket and rearidler. Eight Ioacl-carrying axles eacll withthree large ho:iv wheels. Rogie wheels areinterleaved. Torsion-bar suspension, one torsionbar per axlec. 1’2. ZCpfw. TIGER, MODEL B (KING TIGER).( 1) G~~ercrl. This tank is a development of theTiger along the lines of the Panther and with anew main armament, the 8.8 cm Kw.K. 43(L/71). The armor is as thick as that of theTiger—in some parts thicker—and the improveddesign and the slope given to the majority of theplates (as in the Panther) give the tank vastlyimproved protection.The King Tiger is a tank designed essentiallyfor defensive warfare or for breaking throughstrong lines of defense. It is unsuitable for rapidmaneuver and highly tnobile warfare because ofits great weight and low speed. To accommodatethe gun the turret has been made unusually longin proportion to the total length of the tank. When“buttoned up" the tank is extremely blind, andthis is one of its weakest points.Since the King Tiger first appeared in August1944 in Normandy, modifications have been madein the turret to eliminate the excessive plate-bendinginvolved in the original construction. TheKing Tiger virtually is invulnerable to frontal attack,but the flanks, which are less well protected,can be penetrated by Allied antitank weapor i s’ atmost normal combat ranges.VIl—83

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDtM-E 30-451VI!—84105.-Pz. Kpfw. "Tiger ’ , Model B (Sd. Kf z . 182)

I MARCH 1945(2) Specifications.Model BSpecification number.. .Sd. Kfz. lS2Weight in action 75 tons.Crew ..........5 men.ArmorFront glacis plate....150 mm at 50".Lower nose plate . ...100 mm at 50°.Hull sides 80 mm vertical.Superstructure sides. .80 mm at 20”.Rear plate ......... SO mm at 25”.Turret front ...... I80 mm at 10".Turret sides and rear.SO mm at 20”.Armament (co&allymounted in turret) .. .Onc 8.8 cw Kx,.K.J3(L/i]) u1tl One Jf.G.3#.In hull ........... Onc .ll.C.3-/.Dimensions, Length ...23 feet 10 inches.(excluding gun)Width11 feet 11% inches.Height ..........._. lO feet 2 inches.Gun overhang 8 feet 10 inches.Ground clearance,Front1 foot 7 inches.Rear1 foot 8 inks.Performance,Road speed 24 miles per hour.Cross-countryspeed ............9 to 10 miles per hour.Maximum speed 26 miles per hour.Range on roads....,106 miks.Range cross-country.74 miles.Engine, Type Rfaybach HI, 230 P30.Cylinders v-12.Fuel229 gallons.UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.451Fuel consumption(per 100 miles)On roads ...,213 gallons.Cross-countq ..300 gallonsBHP ...........,590 HP at 2,600 rpm.Transmission: Mayhach-Olvar preselector typegcarhox. hydraulically operated; eight forwardspeeds, fcur reverse.Suspension : Kinc loatl-carrying aslcs each side,each carrying twin over-lapping bogie m-heels.Single torsion-bar suspension. Front drivings2rockc! rear idler.5. Armored Carsa. GENERAL. TWO inain t\,pes of armored carsstill arc in USC’ in the German Army; the lightfour-\vhwlctl, and heavy eight-wheeled vehicles.Thcsc have persisted almost without modificationtl~rou~hout the course of tlw war, and are vehiclesentirely satisfactory in their role. A series of six\vhecletl armqred cat-s \\-hich existed before theoutbreak of \\-ar qqtr~ntly \\-a~ unsatisfactory orredundant, for this type ne\-er has been met inaction.b. FOITR-L\~IIEELED AR>IORED CAR (LeicherPanzers pit hwag en 2 cm). (1) General. In additionto the normal four-nheeled armored car,which is armctl with a 20-mm automatic cannonand an N.C. 34, there is a model (Sd. Kfz. 221)mounting a machine gun only, and a radio vehicle(Sd. KJ,-. 223), also mounting one machine gunand having a rectangular, overhead, folding, frameaerial.Figure 106.—Four-wheeled armored car (.Sd. Kfz. 222).VII—85

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45ISd. Kft. 231Sd. Kft. 232Sd. Kfz. 263VII—86Figure 107.—Eight-wheeled armored vehicles.

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM - E30-4 5 1(2) Specificatio+ls.Specification number.. .Sd. Kfz. 222.Weight in action 5.25 tons.Crew3 men.Dimensions, Length... .I5 feet 7 inches.Width ,.....6 feet 3% inches.Height5 feet 11% inches.Ground clearance ... fji inches.Armor8 mm.Armament ...........One 2 cm Kiv.K. .?0 or38 and one 7.92 11X.G.3J roaxiallymounted.c. EIGHT-WEIEEI.ED ARMORELI CAR (SclzwererPanzerspZihwagen 8 Rad). (1) General. Theeight-wheeled armored car has appeared in a varietyof subsidiary roles. In addition to the principalversion (Sd. Kfz. 231) ) there are two radiovehicles (Sd. Kfz. 232 and 263), an armored carmounting the 7.5 cm Kw.K. 38 and having noturret, and the eight-wheeled armored car mountinga 5 cna Kw.K. 39 in a turret (Sd. Kfz.234/2). The radio vehicles have large, rectangular,folding, frame aerials.(2) Specificatiom.Specification numher. . .Sd. Kfz.231.Weight in action.....8.35 tons.Crew4 men.Dimensions, Length.... 19 feet 1 inch.Width7 feet 3 inches.Height7 feet 10 inches.Ground clearance ... 12 inches.Armor, Turret front. .I5 mm.Turret sides and rear.8 mm.Superstructure front. 18 mm,Superstructure sides..8 mm.Hull front nose plate. 18 mm.Hull sides ....... S to 10 mm.Tail plate ..10 mm.Armament(he 2 CHL Kw.K.30 or 38ant1 one 7.92-mm ilf.C.34(oaxially mounted.Enginr ... . 8 cylinders155 BHI(;aro1inr.Road sllt ‘ c t l..51 mi1t.s per hourCross-country ,speed ... 19 miles per hour.Range on roads:...165 to 190 miles.Range cro.s-country ..110 miles.Suspcn$ion .....8 single wheels.(8-n-heel drive).l’erformancc,Trench crossing. 3 5 feet.Step .......... I 1 foot 7 inches.Fording2 feet.Maximum grade . . . .27”.cl. HALF-TRACKED ARMORED CAR (LE. Schtz.Ps.it’!/. 2 C/U). (1) GL~J~FYUI. This half-trackedxnioretl car is armed with 20-mm automatic cannonant1 macliine g-un in a turret.(2) Spccificafiotrs.Specification number. . . Sd. Kfz 250/9.Weight in action 6.5 tons.Crew ............3 men.Dimensions, Length .. 15 feetWidthG feet 4% inches.Speed ......... - IO miles per hour.Figwe 108.—Armored 3-ton half-tracked vehicle mounting 2 cm Flak 36.VIl—87

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4516. Armored Personnel CarriersA great variety of vehicles of the armored personnel-carriertype are in use in the GermanArmy. Two types of chassis have been used forthese: the l-ton half-tracked prime mover (Sd.Kf.2. 10) and the 3-ton half-tracked prime mover(Sd. Kfz. 11). These vehicles are armoredonly lightly (5 to 15 mm) and the plates aresloped like those on the armored cars. Therehas been a recent tendency to mount artilleq(antiaircraft or antitank) up to 37-mm caliberin these vehicles. The following are examples ofthese vehicles:On the l-ton half-trackedchassis:Light Armored TroopCarrier .Stl. Kfz. 250.Light Armored Ammunition Carrier... Sd. Kfz. 252.Light Armored OP. \‘ (I. Kfc. 2.53.On the 3-ton half-tracked chassis:Medium ArmoretlTroop Carrier.. 5 -d. Kfz. 251.Armored Flamethrower Vt+icle . .Sd. Kfz. 251/l&Self - propelled Anti tank Gun ..3.7 cm Pnlz.Self - propelled Anti aircraft Gun ...,..2 cm Flak 36.I. GeneralSection VII. ROCKET WEAPONSa. DEVELOPMENT. German rocket weaponshave undergone considerable development sincetheir first appearance in combat in 1941, after experimentsover a period of several years. Thereare now about a dozen standard projectors, inaddition to a number of non-standard weaponswhich either are of a specialized design or havenot yet reached a stage of development warrantinglarge-scale production. The Germans introducedrocket projectors for laying heavy concentrationsof smoke and for massed fire on area targets. Becausethe projectors are comparatively light, theyare far more mobile than field artillery weaponsfiring projectiles of similar weights. However,the rocket projectors do not have the accuracy ofartinery.b. TYPES OF ROCKET WEAPONS. The morecommon types of German rocket weapons are the150-mm six-barreled projector (1.5 an Nebel-VII—88zwvfer 41), the 210-mm five-barreled projector(21 cm i\'rbclzt~~i-f~-r d.?), ant1 the ZSO-mm and320-mn1 projector (2S/32 cm Ncbchvcrfcr 41) )all mountc.(l on t\\-o-n-llcelttl tired carriages, andthe 1SO-mm ten-barreled projector (15 cm Pa.n-crzverfer42) ) mounted on an armored half-track.2. Field Projectorsa. I.%-NM ROCMR IAUNCIIER (15 cm Nebeliwrfcr41). (1) Gmrl-al dC~sfription. This isthe original lul)e-t)-l)e equipnIc%nt and consists Of:;is tubes mounted on a sinq)lv tivo-lvhceled carriagewith a split trail. It is l)rovidcd with elevatin,oand traversing gears ant1 has an electrical firingcontact at the breech end of each barrel. Thesecontacts I~ad to a junction box on the upper righthandside of the barrel asscml)ly. To prevent theweapon from being over-turnc,tl by ljlast, the barrelsare fired separately in fixctl order (1, 4, 6,2, 3, .5), all six rountls being discharged in 10seconds. To escape the blast, the firer lies in a slittrench ahout 15 yards to the flank and operatesthe weapon by means of an c.lcctric:tl switch connectetlto the junction box. Since the crew mustseek shelter clur-ing firing, it requires about $0secontls to load and fire a scrims of six rounds. Asingle tube projector known as the Do-Geriit whichfires the same ammunition is used by airbornetroops.(2) Cl~arcctcl.istic-s.Caliber1i0 mm (5.9 inches).Length of barrels............51 inches.Weight................. I,195 pounds.Traverse 30°.Elevation 44°.Maximum Range (HI-) 7,330yards.Maximum Range (Smoke).. .7,550 yards.Weight of Rocket (HE)....,75.3 pounds.‘IZieight of Rocket ( Snloke)... .78 pounds.J’elocity ,....,..... 1,120 feet per second.(3) r2~~~~~~1~itio~~. This projector fires HE andsmoke projectiles, and there is some evidence thatchemical rOCliCts also exist for this weapon.b. 210-HFLA RKOCKET LAUNCHER (21 cm Ncbclz~wfe~42). (1) Ct-xcral description. This is afive-barreled projector on the lines of the 1.5 cmNcbeIzurrfcr 41, with similar carriage and electricalfiring system. Removable internal raiIs arenow supplied for this weapon to permit firing the150-mm rockets.

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCL~'~SS;[~EDfeFigure 109.—15 cm Nebelwerfer 41.VII—89

l t JU-4JIFipwe llO.-21 cm Ncbchvcrfcr 42.VII—90Figure Ill.—--The Panzerwerfer 42 fires the saw rockets as thz 1.5 cm L’vre6elaLzrfer 41.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIED^111 Characteristics.Caliber........210 mm (8.27inches).Length of barrels 4 feet 3% inches.Taximum range8,600 yards.‘eight of rocket245 pounds,I 3) T I w The projector fires an HEprojectile with a ZS-pound bursting charge.c. 1.30-X31 SELF-PKOI'ELI.ED PROJECTOR (15 cmPanzcrzverfcr 42). (1) Gmcral tlrscription. TheGermans have mounted this ten-barreled rocketprojector on the rear of a lightly armored halftrackedvehicle with a Maul tier suspension. Twohorizontal rows of five barrels are mounted on aturntable with a SGO-degree tra\,ersc. The \veapotlis fued electrically by a gunner who sits in thebody of the :v~liiclc immetliatcly Inflow the platform,his head protected by a shallow cupola. Itis probable that the rate of fire of this weapon ishigher than that of the Ncbehvcrfcr 41, sincethe crew remains behind armor near the weaponand can reload in less time.(2) Characterisfics.Caliber150 mm (5.9 inches).Traverse 360°.Maximum elevation 45°.hfasimum range7,330 yards.Vehicle ncight7.1 tons.Vehicle road speul 25 miles per hour.(3) rlmin2/)litioll. The ammunition 1s the sameas that firul 1jy the I.5 cm Ncbclwcrfer 41.d. WOODKX l\.\c K I.AIXCHER (28/32 cmSfJm1erc.s ll'lri~f~~cr~iit NJ. iI) General description.This is tltc originnl frame-type rocket projcctorand consists oi a simple wooden frameupon which the I)rojectil

I MARCH 1945 "NCLASSIFIEBr-?dM-E 30-451Figure l/3.—The Wurfrahnzes 10 is here shown iu actiosz. Four wooderl rorkef-carrying uatrs are iu pllrcr on the&&irs on the side of the half-track. The last of the four rockets has just Dceu/ir~,d.Empty crates lie at the right.VIl—92

UNCLASSlFlEDI MARCti 1945 TM-E 30-451114—U. S. soldiers impect a capturrd 28/.?2 cm Ncbelwerfer 41. The weapon is lixrded. butt electrical leads areklot connected to the bases of the rocket motors. Sole the box (sho-wu open) which prolecU the sight.(2) iirrrrrxf~itiorr. Both high explosive 280-nmiand incendiary 320-mm rockets can be fired fromthis frame.High explosive 280-mm rocket.1)esignatim. .... 2S c/ri TITurfkiir/w Spr.I\larking ...,........Pink band.\\7eight ...,.,.. 154.5 pounds.I

I MARCH IV46UNCLASSlFlEDTM-E 30-451(2) Arn~~~~ition. The same projectiles arefired as from the Schweres Wurfgeriit.g. MOBILE LAIJNCHEB (28/32 cm Nebelwerfcr41). (1) Geizeyal descrififinjz. This mobile versionof the SCIKU~ J YC~ ll’yf~~~riif consists of a frameworlcdesignct! to hold six projectiles mountet!upon a two-wheelet! carriage. The trail is detachedafter the carriage has been towed into position,and the launcher is laid like an artillerypiece. The standard electrical firing mechanism isused.(2) Anz~u~~ifio~r. The projectiles fired are thestandard 280-mm (HE) and 320-mm incendiaryrockets.h. 300-MM MOBILE LAUNCHER (30 cm Nebel-TCpe+cY 42). (I) Grlrcrnl tlrscripfiolz. Similar tothe 28/32 cm. Nebelwrrfcr, 41, this six-frame projectorlaunches the largest of the German highex!Aosiverockets.(2) Aumwifiorl. The 300~mm rocket is betterstreamlined than the 280-mm or 320~mm projectiles,has a higher ratio of propellcnt weight tototal weight, and as a result has a much longerrange.High explosive 300-mnl roc!ICYI-the layer. The wholeassembly mav be traversed either about a forkedcenter pi\-ot or by moving tlie carriage itself,which is light ~~ou~~h to 1~ n~mhantlled. Thelimits of elevation are 4 &~I,-ees alit1 55 degrees.The rockcts are fired hv percussion through amulti!)le firing !)in nlecliaiii,~lli at tlie i-car of eachrow of projectors. Each row is COCl

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFHiuTM-E 36.461c. SO-MM ROCKET (8 cm Rake tcu Sprepzggramfc).This high explosive rocket is providedwith studs on the side for projection, which indicatethat it possibly is used both as a ground andaircraft rocket. It is unrotated and is stnbilizrtlin flight by tail fins. The rocket ~~cighs 15.2pounds, and the maximum ground range is c..-timatctlat 6,300 yards.tl. 240-NEAR ROCKET PROJECTOR. The existenceof this projector has been inferred from the useof a 240-mm rocket bomb. Details are not known.Section VIII.I. Hand GrenadesGRENADESa. IIICH EXPLOSIVE STICK GRENADE (Sfidhandgranate24). (1) General description. Thisgrenade consists of a hollow I\-ooden handle anda thin sheet mctnl head containing the burstingcharge. A double length of cord connects a porcelainbead at the lower end of the hnndl~ to a frictionigniter and dctoiiator nsscml~ly screwed onthe head of the grenatle. The wooden handle isclosed at its lo\~cr end by a metal screw cap. Afragnicl~tntion slccvc is somctinlts used with thisgrenade to improve the antipersonnel effect. Thisis a metal collar spilt longitudiiially so it can beclipped around the head of the qenatlc. Thrsurface of the sleev: may IX citlier smooth ordivided 11y serrations to assist fragmentation.Figwe 116.—Stiell~alzdgrallate 24, HE Stick Grenade.(2) Cliavnctc~isti~s.Tcight of grenade.... 1.36 pounds.‘eight of hurstilqcharge .............0.365 pound.Type of hurstin~ charge.TNT.Length over-all . I4 inchrs.Iktonator ..._.. Stallciartl Gerrnatl No. 8.Igniter delay 4 to S seconds.IgtliterB.Z.ZJ(3) Opc?~afioIz. To arm the grenade, unscrewthe metal cap at the lower end of the handle andpull the porcelain bead. This initiates the frictionigniter and the grenade will function at the endof the 3- to S-second delay.b. HIC,H EXPLOSIVE STICK GRESADE (Stiethnrldpwsate43j. (1) Gl~~lc?-al description. Thisis a motlifietl form of the Stielhandgranate 24. Ithas the same thin sheet metal head, but has asolid handle. A blue-capped pull igniter and detonatoras~ml)l~ SC‘IY~~ into the top of the grenadehead. IIJce the ~Iodel 24, this grenade isused with a smooth or serrated fragmentationsleeve.(2) ~~f~JJ'CICf~‘l.iStiCS.Total ncipht ._....1 pound 6 ounces.\Vcight Of lll1rstin::charge ...... i 7 ou*~ccs.Igniter .. - ...... l i.%.f.Eikgr.Detonator ..... So. 8.Fuze delay 4'/, -econds.(3) Opcratiolt. To arm the grenade unscrewand pull the blue metal cap on the top of the explosivehead. This initiates the 4%-second delay.C. WOOI)EN TMI’ROVISE~) HAICD GRENADE (Bel?elfsllaJldgrallate-Hole).(1) General descripfro/r.This is an offmsive-type grenade constructedentirely of wood. It consists of a cylindricalwooden head screwed on a hollow woodenhandle. The head is hored to a depth of 4%incht5, and spc.cimens oi this grenade have beenfound to contain half a Bohr-patrone (standard100-gram (3.527 ounces) demolition cartridge).The extra sl’ace is filled by a wooden plug. Afuze and rlctonator assembly is located in theforward end of the handle with the detonatorinserted into the center of the Bolwpatronc. Apull igniter is attached by cord to a button in therecess under the metal cal) at the lower end of thehandle. Thc~ grenad

I MARCtl r945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451the grenade is ready for USC. To use the grenaderemove the metal cap on the lower end of thehandle, pull the button attached to the friction igniterand throw. This grenade is designed to produkeblast effect and may be used by troops ad\-ancing in the open.d. CONCRETE IMPROVISED HAND GRENADE (Bchclfsha?zdgvallatr-nrioll)(1) Gcncml drsrription.This grenade is an offensive type grenadeGmilar to the wooden improvised hand grenade,except the grenade head is made of concrete insteadof wood and a full lOO-gram Bolzrpatrmcis used as an explosive charge.(2) Characteristics.IgniterB.Z.4.5Sck.Detonator ..........No. 8.Figure 117.—I:‘ihnlldgrallatc 39 HE Egg Grmade(left, older; right, latrr zwsion).e. HIGH EXPLOSIVE HAED GRENADE (Eihandgvanatr39). (1) Gcmral dcsrription. This isan egg-shaped hand grenade constructed of thinsheet metal with high explosive bursting charge.This grenade and the Sticll~andgral~atr 24 at-e thestandard German hand grenades and are usedmost. The cxplosivc charge is initiated by a tlctonatorand a friction igniter. The wire loop ofthe friction igniter is connected by a short cordto a blue metal cap screwed on the top of thegrenade body. A model of this grenade containingchloracetophenone also exists. It may be recognizedby a mellow ring painted around the grenadeand four pear-shaped projections on thelower half of the body. It contains a 112-gram(3.95 ounces) TNT bursting charge and a smallaluminum capsule containing 5 grams (0.176ounce) of chloracetophenone.(2) Clzaractcvistics.Weight of grenade... .8 ounces.Weight of burstingcharge .......... -I 4 ounces.Detonator ...........No. 8.IgniterB.Z.f.Eihgr.Fuze delay....,.......4 to 5 seconds.(3) Operation. Unscrew the blue metal capVII—96and pull the ignite:-. The pcnade will cxplndcafter a delay nf 4 to ; sccoii~f. SMOKE STICK GRHNADI- IXchclliandgranale39). (1) General description. This grenadec;m be distinguished from the liigh ~,sl~:osivc~ stickgrenade (Stielhandgi anate) by three grooves inthe handle, which serve as recognition featuresin the dark, and by a white land painted aroundthe center of the handle and an interrupted whiteband around the head, with the lettering''Xb. Hgr. 39", also in white. The head is madeof thin metal and contains a Tilling ol zinc-hexachlorethane.Instead of the detonator used in thehigh explosive grenade, an ignition tube is used.This is \-m-y silnilar in appearance to tllct So. 8tletonator, hut may be distinguished by the closedend which is painted green. The smoke generatedin the head escapes through 1111lw around the halldleso&ct. h pull igniter is Iocatc~l insid

I MARCH 1945there is a threaded socket for the igniter assembly.Three holes allow the smoke to escape. A standardGerman pull igniter is screwed into the top.The igniter has a brass body and a steel ringattached to the top. The grenade is marked"Nb. Eiligr. 42" in white and has three shortwhite bands stencilled around the body. A labelnear the base warns that the fumes can be dangerousin an enclosed space.(2) Clzaractcristics.Length over-all ...5.3 iwhes.Diameter over-all ...1.96 inches.Body length........4.1 incheq.Body diameter .......1.7 iilcllrs.igniter ..............Zd. .SC~III. .~IK. 99.(3) Opcmtiox Pull the ring on the igniterbefore throwing the grenade.j . GLASS SMOKE GREXADE (Blrlldk&prr III).(1) Gcwral drscriptiou. This grenade consistsof a sealed glass bulb in a hexagonal carton ofcorrugated cardboard. The glass is shaped like asomewhat elongated electric light bulb and isabout the same size, but of thicker glass. Thebulb contains 260 grams (9.17 ounces) of titaniumtetrachloride. This grenade is intended foruse against the crews of pillboxcs and vehicles.(2) Operation.. The grenade is carried in thecardboard container and when required for use itcan be withdrawn by a tape attached to the lidof the box; the lid is cemented to the neck ofthe bulb. Remove the lid and throw the grenadeagainst the target. When the bulb bursts, thymixture will give off a dense smoke.k. GLASS SMOKE GRENADE (Rlr~ldkiirpcv 2II).(1) General description. The glass bulb of thisgrenade contains 2.50 grams (S.Sl75 ounces) ofa yello\\-ish liquid. The bulb is scalctl at the neckwith a sulphur plug xvhich also holds in positiona glass tube, orientated along the axis of the bulb.This tube contains 25 grams (0.882 nmcej ofa calcium chloride solution. The smoke liquidconsists of titanium tetrachloride with silicon tetrachlorideadded to lower its freezing point. Thecalcium chloride is used to lower the freezingpoint of the water which is included to increasethe effectiveness of the smoke under conditionsof low humidity.(2) Operation. Throw the grenade at the targetin the same way as the Model IH. A noticeon the side of the container, which holds fourUNCLASSlFlED TM-E 30-45IFigure 11

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSlFlEDTM-E 30.451m. HOLLOW-CHARGE STICKY GRENADE. Thetapering steel body of this grenade contains thehollow-charge. A flat sticky pad at the nose iscovered by a press-on lid with a small handle. Atapering fuze ntlapter terminating in a socket,threadtd internally to receive an igniter, is attachedto the base cf the grenade. The ignitersocket is closed tluring transit by a black plasticplug. Specimens of t!le igniter alid detonator havenot been rcccived, but it is bclievecl that 3 No. Sdetonator is used in combination with a standard4%-second egg grenade igniter. It is not clearwhether it is necessary to place the grenade onthe tank or whether it may be thrown from shortranges.uf ^^2. Rifle Grenadesa. HIGH EXPLOSIVE RIFLE GRENADE (Gm~rhrSprenggranatr). (1) General drscviptio~~. Thisis a high explosive grenade which may 1~ ejthcrfired from the standard rifle discharger cup(Sclzicssbcclrcr) or thrown as a hand grenade.The projectile has a steel body containing a burstingcharge, a base incorporating a flash pcllct anddelay train, and a point detonating iuze. The IXLWis rifled to conform with the rifling of the dischargercup and fitted \I-ith a screwetl-in baskplug in which there is a flash hole communicatingto a 6%~second tlelay flash pellet.(2) Characteristics.Length over-all..5.5 inches.Diameter1.17 inches.Teight of grenatl c..9 ounces.Weight of hurstin~charge ...... .I.1 r)mIces.Type of bursting cllarge. Penthrite-I\‘ax.DetonatorSimilar to No. 8 butslightly larger andperforated.Maximum range..... .X5 )ardb.(3) Opevatiok (a) As rifle gremde. U’henthe grenade is fired from the launcher it will heinitiated normally by the point detonating fuzv,which consists of a striker, primer. and detonatorassembly of conventional design. Should the pin tdetonating fuze fail to operate, a flash pellet inthe base will ignite a friction composition in thelower end of the projectile body. This will inturn ignite a 4% -second delay pellet which theninitiates the detonator in the bursting charge.(b) As hand grenade. A short cord locatedinternally hctween the top of the h e and theVII—98I'ujurc 119.—Geuchr Sfreiuiiinuuile. Ill: Rifle Greuadc.lower end of the body connects a friction wirebelow the 4 J/-second delay pellet to a washerresting freely in the base. When the grenade isto be thrown by hand, the base is unscrewed andthe washer 1~ill~~l. ‘l‘liis ol)c3-:ltcs tlic friction igniterand sets off the delay train. The grenatle isthrown and functions at the. I,IKI Iii 4 ) ; seconds.(4) Modifications. Modifications to this grenadehave appeared. The pull igniter is sometimesomitted, permitting the grenade to be fired fromthe launcher lmt it cannot IK III~IIIVI~. The srlfdestroyingtlcvicca is sometimes omitted. All"all-ways" fuzc is sometimes fitted iil5te;t(l of thestandard point tlctonating iu/~. sc,tting of? thecharge no matter \vhich way the grenade strikes.b. HICIT EXPLOSIVE Kin r GRENADE WTTTTINCREASED KANCE [Gcicchr Sprenggranatc mil(~rsfcigcrfcr lic-ic-l/:~5~ifi-'). Tlii~ is a later model0t the standard rifle :rcna(lc. ~l‘lw sclf-tlestroyingdevice has been eliminated and it is fired by a newpropelling cartridge. It is claimed that the maximumrange has been increased to 711 yards. Thegrenades may be identified by the box label[Gcwchr Sprenggranatc mil u'esteigerter Reichweitc),by the unperforated base I)late and fixedrifle base, or by the propcllill~ cartridge with itsbright yellow bullet.c. ANTITANK RULE GRENADE (Gcewelrr Pancerqrana.tr30). (1 i General description. This

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(2) L haractcristics.\\ eight *........ / . 13 M ounces (approximately),Length owr-all ... 7 ~nchv (approximately),Wright (if hurdlingchargeMaximum accuraUrange\\ _• unce>.101) \ art Is.Figure 120.—Geivehr Paucergranate, Antitank RifleGrenade.is a rifle grenade incorporating the hollow-chargeprinciple. It is fired from the 30-mm rifled dischargercup (S’cl~irsshrcl2cr) which can be attachedto most types of German rifles. The bodyof the grenade is in two parts. The forward sectionis made of steel and contains the burstingcharge I\-ith the holk~\v chnrgc cone, closed by alight metal cap. The rear portion is made of lightaluminum alloy and contains the fuze and explodersystem. A pre-rifled rotating band is locatednear the base of the grenade. The propellantis contained in z 7.92-mm blank cartridge,crimped at the mouth.(2) Characteristic;.Total weightLength over-allWeight of burstingchargeMaximum accuraterange8.8 ounces.6.4 inches.1.75 ounces.100 yards.d. LARGE ANTITANK RIFLE GRENADE (GrossGewehv Panzergranute 40). (1) General dcscription.This is similar to the Gewehr Panzergranate30 except that the front portion is enlargedto accommodate a greater bursting charge.The propellant is contained in a standard 7.92-mmcartridge with a wooden bullet.Figure 121.—dross Gnceln- I'anzergranale, Large AntitmkRifle Grenade.e. 46-MM HoLi.ow-i IIAR

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451(2) Chavactcristics.’eight .............15% ounces (npproximatelg).Length over-all.......7.7 in&s.Length of stem....,...4 inches.Xfaximum tliameter ofhead ..... l . S 1.8 inches.Diameter ol stem 1.-7 inches.Type of burstingcharge ...... II I)S-TNT .‘cight of burstingcharge ......4.8 o~mccs.(3) PcrfomIllc~. Static test indicates thatthe penetration at long ranges is npproximatel\00 mm of homogeneous armor. At short range(approximately 18 feet) the penetration was 21wm. A YG- i n c h mild steel plate, spaced 11 inchesFigure 123.- S.S. Geicehr l'anzev

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30.45Ig. HOLT.OW-CHARGE RIFLE GRENADI;. Thislate type hollow-charge rifle grenade is similarin appearance to the SS. Gcivchr Panzergranatc61. It differs, however, in having an impact capthat is approximately hemispherical and unpainted.The grenade is 9.61 iiichcs l01ig ant1 it.< grvatestdiameter is 2.4 inches. The base is rifled forliring iroll the standard grenatle launcher.r " • • •"• • ' • iL : _ : JFigure 124.—Gcwehr Fellschirmleuchtgranate, ParachuteStar Rifle Grenade.h. ILLUMINATING PARACHUTE RIFLE GRENADE (Gcwelirfallschinnlcuclitf/ranatc). (1) General~~scriptiorl. This illunlinatin~ parachutegrenade has a cylindrical steel l~otly. .it the frontis a conical cap with rountl till, and at th(l rear abase rifled to engage llie rifling in the standardgrenade lnunchc~r. l\.ithin the hotly is a tlvlaypellet, an ection charge, and a container holdingthe parachute, rigging. :und. star flnrcx. This containerincorl)ol-ates a second tIclay pcllct. and asecond ejection char~c~ for the parachute ant1fl The ,qrenade i5 fired 1)~. a cnrtritl~e caserontainiiig 1.5 gi-aim (0.05 miicv) of lmq)~lliiigcharge. The cartridge is closed hy a wooden bullet.(2) Characteristics.1 )iamcter 1.18 indies.Length6.88 inches.Weight9.9 ounces.(3) l l ’ hen the grcnadc is fired,the flash from the propellent gases ignites thedelay pt,llct in the l~~sc of the grenade. After 6%seconds an ejection charge exl3lotles and ejectsthe container holding the l)arachu!c ant1 star.a a second delay pcllct in the contai:lcris initiated. Two sccontls later. thy parac!uteejc.ction charge is set off and the parachuteand star arc csjectvd.i. PHOI'AGANDA RIFIX GRENADR (GcrcrhrI'ropagandagranatc). (1) General description.This grenade. which weighs S omces when filled,is fired from thus standard ln~mcl~cl-. The grcnadclmtly is a cvlindrical steel tuhc, closed by 3 loosefittinghall&tic cap. The propaganda leaflets arc’enclosed in two semi-cylindrical steel coverswithin thv body and rest on a cup-shaped platform.The tail element, with the usual pre-rifledr] r ujure 12?.—Gneehr Propngandagranate, PropagandaRifle Grenade.base, contains the cjcctitlg charge and 3 delaytrain. The 1)rol)ell:ult i5 c-ontnincd in the usualtype of I~lamk cartridge, distinguished by a redband.(2) opciYzfiolI. The delay train is ignited bythe flash iron1 the lmq~ellatlt ant1 detonates thecjectilig charge. The platform, leaflets, leafletcovers, and ballistic cap are ejected during flight.The nlaximum range is approxin~atcly 500 yards.Figure 126.—Gezi'ehr Granatpatrouc, Rifle SpigotGrenade.j. HIGH KXPLOPIVK ANTITANK HOLLOWCHARGE RIFLE GREXADE (Gcivehr Granatpatrone311) (I) General description. This grenade consibtsof a streamlined bill-shaped body, closed infront l)y a Jig-htl!. coI~\~c’s closing disc of aluminuni.a i\) fitted with a spigott>-pc lamchvr and using blank cartridges with\lootlen I~ullets. The hllrstinp charge is cast cyclonitcKIS \vith h~~mis1~I~c~ricnl cavity in the head.This cavit>- ha.5 an aluminum liner.(2) rlrcll-trc-c~,~isfic-.s.T-ength over-all ').3 inches (approximately ).Maximum diameter. .. .2.4 inches.Imgth of l d ~ . i . 15 itlches.(3) Opl’ratiou. When the grenade is fired,the propellent gases sll;lttcr the wooden bulletand shear a saict\, pin by forcing forward acutting iiien~l~~r. In tile armed position, thestriker- is withheld from the tletonator by a creepspring and initiates thr grenade when it hits or-rifled a target.VII—IOI

I MARCH 19453. Grenades for Smooth Bore Signal Pistol(Leuchtpistole)a. HIGH EXPLOSIVE PROJECTILE FOR SIGNALPISTOL (Wwfkiirpcr 361, Lczlclztpistole). Thisprojectile consists of the normal egg hand grenadewith a stem screwed on in place of the powdertrain time fuzc. The stem contains a powdertrain fuze (with a delay of approximately 4 %sccontls) with a No. S detonator at the upper end.In the lower end the projectile carries the cartridge(propellcnt charge with percussion cap)which cxpcls the grenade and sets off the timefuze. The projectile is secured to the stem by Rsplit pin and ring which must be withdrawn beforethe projectile is loaded into the signal pistol.The projectile is then armed. A removable linermust be inserted in the tube of the signal pistolbefore firing this grenade. The liner is insertedfrom the breech end and held in place by a projectingstud engagin,‘7 with the upper surface ofthe breech. (See Section II for a description ofsignal pistols.)Figure 12/“.—l~l’~~~flzorpcr 361, Lcuchf pisfolc, modifiedegg grrundr fov sigmi pistol.Figwc 128.—TVllrfgrallntpatrone 326, Lruchtpistole,111 C projectile for sigrrtrl pisfvi.b. HIGH EXPLOSIVE PROJECTILE FOR SIGNALPISTOL (Wurfgranatpatrone 326, Lcztrlzfpistolc).(1) Griwrnl tlcscriptiolz. This projectile, whichis painted !.ellow, has the appearance of a smallmortar shell. It is attached to a signal cartridgecase by crimping. The head is hollow and containsa fixed needle which is separated from a pelletcontaining the detonator assembly and a 7-gram(0.247 ounce) TNT bursting charge by a creepspring.“I i—IO2UNCLASSIFIED TM.E 30-451(2) Operation. A pin inserted through thetail of the bomb pushes two metal balls into agroove and thus prevents the pellet r. t movingforward against the ne c tl l e .jectile is automatically n r i il v tl , sin celeft behind. On impact the pellet is thrown forwardonto the needle.c. HOLLOW CHARGE GRENADE FOR SIGNALPISTOL (Panzcriîtrfko'rpcr 12. Leuchtpistole).(1) General description. This grenade is firedup to a maximum range of 75 yards from theLeuchtpistole. using the reinforcing sleeve, stock,and combined from and rear sight. The grenadehas a pear-shaped head containing the hollowcharge and is fitted with an impact cap. Thegrenade tapers to form a tail tube with preriflingfor screwing into the reinforcing sleeve.A thinner tube, containing the propellant, percussioncap, and a shearing and propelling bolt, isinserted into the end of the tail tube.(2) Characteristics.Weight of grenade 1 pound 5 ounces.Diameter of head 2.4 niches.Diameter of tail tube. .0.875 inch.Length of grenade 8.5d inches.(3) Operation. The complete grenade isloaded into the pistol from the muzzle end. Thepropellent tube fits freely into the bore until thepre-rifled hand meets the muzzle of the reinforcingsleeve, when the grenade must be screwedinto the rifling. On firing, the propellent gasesdrive the propelling and shearing bolt forward.This bolt breaks a shear pin in the front end ofthe propelling tube and discharges the grenade.The graze fuze in the tail tube is armed by setbackas the grenade leaves the pistol.d. SMOKE EGG GRENADE (X cbclcihatidgranale42/11). This grenade reportedly can be firedfrom the Leuchtpistole. No details are available,however. It seems probable that the Nebeleigranate42 has been modified for firing from thesignal pistol, using the reinforcing sleeve, in thesame way as the Ilihaiidgranate 39 was modifiedto produce the Wurfkorpcr 361 L.P.e. TIME FUZED HIGH EXPLOSIVE ROUND FORSIGNAL PISTOL ( S prcnggranat patrone, LeuchtpistoleMit Z.Z.). This is a new type of signalpistol ammunition designed for shooting fromtanks or equivalent cover. The round consistsof a heavy cased high explosive projectile with a1-second time fuze in the base and a varnishedsteel cartridge case. Packing cases for thesegrenades bear the following inscription: "Ach

I MARCH 1945tung! nur aus Panzer oder gleichzvertiger Dcckenvcrfcuern. Brennzcit I Sek." ("Danger! Only tobe fired from tanks or equivalent cover. Time ofburning 1 second.")4. Grenades for Modified Rifled Grenade andSignal Pistola. HIGH EXPLOSIVE GRENADE (Sprcngpatroncfiir Kampfpistole). This round consists of a diecastaluminum cartridge case into which the projectileis fitted. A percussion cap and propellantare in the base of the cartridge case. Ten holesin a plate above the propellent charge lead thegases to the base of the projectile. The projectilehas a rifled aluminum body containing two burstingcharges of penthrite wax and a point detonatingfuze which is armed as the projectile leavesthe muzzle of the pistol. The projectile may berecognized by the letters "Spr. Z." stencilled onthe base.b. SMOKE GRENADE (Ncbclpatrone fiir Kampf pistolc). (1) General description. Externallythis projectile is similar to the high explosiveprojectile. Internally it contains a smoke generator.It is fitted with a point detonating fuze siniilarto th e in the high explosive projectile,except that there is a charge of gunpowder inplace of the detonator below the flash cap.(2) Operation. The projectile functions onfiir KoFigure 129.—Spreng pair one Fiir Kampf pistole,HE Grenade for Kampf pistole.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Dcck w The internal charge of gunpowtlcr isignited by the flash cap and blown-s off the nose.Xt thcb same time the smoke generator is ignited.The smoke generator is projected a considerabledistance from the point cji impact.c. ORANGE SMOKE GRICNADE (Drutpcrtrollr fii/,Kampf pistole). (1) General description. Externallythis projectile iy similar lo the h’chclfiatrow,rxcq)t tltnt it 1~s no nest’ fuzz. Thehead is paral~olic. The :reii;ttlc is filled with anorange smoke conipositic),l. In a cmtral cavit!.are four stt-atitls oi cluicl,-match connected to agunpowder l)cllrt iii the cc~ntcr- of the projectilebase. The stitc)ke jets at the lme are cm-eredwith a thick patI of co~~~lm~s~tl palm which isburst by the smoke Im~sttre. "/)c,zrt. Z." is stettcilledon the base.(2) O/wmtiou. \1’hcii the projectile leavesthe cartridge casv. the gunpowder pellet is ignitedand, after a delay, the quick-match ignites and inturn ignites the smoke misturr.d. PARACHUTE FI.ARI:S (Fall.~cl~i~i~iir~tcht~atrourfib Kar~i pistole). (1) Gmc,ral dcscr-iptioll.I

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Section IX.OTHER WEAPONSI. Remote Controlled Demolition Vehiclesa. GENERAL. Three main types of remote cuntrolleddemolition vehicles in use by the Gumanarmy have been identified. These are thr Goliathwhich is line controllctl, the B-IV controlled i sradio, and the N.S,.Zi.-Sprijlyr~ which has notbeen encountered in the field. These vehicleshave Bern unsuccessful in action; they u.;uallyhave been stopped by small arms fire.b. GOLIATII. (1) Gmcral drsc~i~tio~~. Thisvehicle has been producctl in two models; onedriven by a gasoline engine ; the other by a11 clcctricmotor. The two models have roughly thesame external appearance and rcseml) l eversions of the type of tanks us~(l during the warof 1914-1918. The Goliath's hull is divided intothree compartments by transvcrsr bulkheatls. Theexplosive charge is carried in the frant compartment;the Wginv (in the gasoline driven vcrsion)and control gear are in the center, and thedrum carrying the coiled calde is in thv rearcompartment. In the electrically dri\-en motl~l,a battery and motor are cnrricd in S~O~ISO~IS onboth sides. I-Iingcd steel covers gi\-c accc’ss tothe cable compartment and the cnginc space’. Thevehicle is driven by front sprockets. There arefour bogie n-heels, mountccl on lcl-er arms withsimple coil springing, and a rear idler. A I \jockey wheel is mounted between the drivingsprocket and the first bogie wheel on each side.(2) Spcrifirafiolzs.Length................. 5 S icct 3 itlchcs.Height ..........2 icet.Width2 feet 10 inches.Total weight800 pounds (approximate!>).Weight of explosivecharge ......_.....200 11011i: ( l s;lt~l~).Speed5 to 12 miles per hour.I’owcr plant:Gasoline engine ?IIotlcl .2-cylin~lcr, Z-c>clc in-linemgine with chain (II-i \Electric motor Model... Two 12-volt Bosch startermotors gcarctl to drivingsprockets.(3) Oprmtiosz,. The Goliath is transportetlto the front line on a two-wheeled trailer. Afterit has been unloaded from the trailer and startedtoward its target it is controlled through thethree-core cable, about 2,000 feet long, which unwindsfrom the rear and is connected to theVII—lo4(Jp%Ltor's control lxmcl. It1 the electrically driventype, this control is clirc,cl t

I MARCH 1945UNcLASS\F\EDTM-E 30451Figure 130.—Demolition Chavge (Bl Goliath). Top, front e~iczc~; below 1 ccar Gew.VII—105

I MARCH 1945l : hjurc 131.—Radio Controlled Demolition Vehicle(I?-IV).(2) Specifications.Length9 feet o]/> inches.Height ........3 ix t IO]/< inchey.LVidth ...........__.....3 icet 7 incllcs.Total weight ..2.25 tons.LVeight of cxpl0iii.echarge ....... i,(ll pouI”l~.Armor thickness ..5 to 8 mm.Kcmote control range . .-7,200 yar(ls (r\pproximatclJ-) .AIanually controlled range:On roads 149 miles.Cross-country ........87 miles.2. Armored Trainsa. GENERAI.. At the outset of the Polish andIktch campaigns, Guman armored trains actuallpr~~~lctlthe main forces and scizctl and hcltl keyrailroad stations or bridges. IVOW recently theGermans mac!e extensive USC of armorvtl trains,particularly in Ikstcrn Europe. Their main functionhas been to patrol and keep open railroadsin areas of partisan and guerrilla operations, andtheir usefulness has been confined largely to operationsagainst enemies who lack heavy weapons.Armored trains are under the direct control ofthe General Staff and are allotted to army groups.Each train carries a train commandant, who isusually also the infantry commander; an artillerycommander; and a technical officer, responsiblefor the operation of the train itself.b. COMPOSITION. The following details appl!to a typical armored train with the nomenclatureEpz.Bp. 42:VII—IO6UNCLASSIF\ED TM - E30.451Composition. InntiinentTwo armored gun trucks. . Karh, mie JO nn le.l'.H.137 to 41.5 ton.) ' i i .'I' /' I .Two armored antiaireraitgun truck- Kach. • :ie 20-inm . as illustrated bythe use of the MX,.15 as a light machine gun andthe ilI.G.151‘1.5 and M.G.151'20 as triple. si,lipropcllcd.;Intiaircrait \\-ealxxls. isrc* SK1i011 II,Small Arms, for details on use of aircraft machineguns in ground roles.)1~. 7.92-MM MACHINE Grx fM.G.15). (1)General tl~~scri~~iorl. This W:I thv stalltlard, riflecaliber,free gu~i until sul~~~-~~~lecl by the .II.G.81. It also is used by the infantry, with bipodant1 shoulder rest. Thv tlrsi~ll is Solothurn. Thegun fires only automatically.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(2) Characteristics.Caliber7.92 mm (0.312 inch).Length over-all 42 inches.Weight (without mount). 15.75 pounds.OperationRecoil and residual gaspressure from muzzleblaM.Feed75-round saddle magazine.CockingManual.FiringPercussion.Rate of fire1,000 rounds per minute.Muzzle ve'ocity :AP Incendiary 3,000 feet per second.c. 7.92-MM MACHINE GUN (M.G. 17). (1)General description. This is the fixed gun versionof the M.G.15. Jt fires only automatically- Xondisintegrating,scctionally disintegrating", andfull-disintegrating ammunition belts are used withthe gun.(2) Characteristics.Caliber7.92 mm (0.312 inch).Length over-all 47.7 inches.Weight (with controlmechanism)27.69 pounds.OperationRecoil and residual gaspressure from muzzleblast.FeedMetal link belt.CockingPneumatic, electrical controlwith mechanical interruptionfor synchronizedfiring.Rate of fire:Unsynchronized 1,100 rounds per minute.synchronized ...... I , 100 rorlntls per minute..Muzzle velocity:AP Incendiary 3,000 feet per second.d. 7.92-MM MACHINE GUN (M.G.81). (1)General description. This gun has superseded theHI.G.15 as the standard, rifle caliber, free gun.The high rate of fire of this gun, which is automaticonly, precludes its use as a ground weapon.(2) Characteristics.Caliber7.92 mm (0.312 inch).Length over-all 35 inches.Weight13.88 pounds.OperationRecoil and residual gaspressure from muzzleblast.FeedDisintegrating metal linkbelt.CockingCable with finger pull atrear.FiringPercussion.Rate of fire 1,200 to 1,500 rounds perminute.e. 13-MM MACHINE GUN (M.G.I31). (1)General description. This gun is compact andvery light. Since it is electrically fired, thereis no tiring pin. and tire interruption or s)~ilchronizationare facilitated greath. The gun fires only;lutl,iliaric:tll\( 2 ) ( haractcnslics.CaliberLength over-allWeightOperationFeedCockingFiring13 mm (0.512 inch.)40 inches.40 pounds.Recoil and residual gasl:reswre fr-om mll7zteblast.Disintegrating metal linkbelt.Manual.Fleet ric.Rate ot lire 9110 re.mills per minute.Muzzle \ eli 'div :111". Tracer and liu. i diaryTracer . .2,370 leet per second.(3) - linmunition. Tin- gun fires tracer, highexplosive tracer, high explosive illc~ntli;lry tracer,and armor-piercing tracer projectiles.f. 15-MM MACHINE GUN IM.G. 151/15). (1)General description. This Mauser-designed gunis percussion fired bv solenoid control and iscocked chvtl-ic:~lly. It is Ix~si:ally identical iiile\ \ .itll thy Jl.G.l.51‘20. This gtm, \vliichtires only automatically, has been triple mountedon a half-tracked vehicle and employed in a selfpropelledantiaircraft role.(2) c1iam”I~~ri.s/;f.s.Caliber15 mm (0.591 inch).Length over-all 75.5 inches.Weight (including electrical control) S4 pounds.OperationRecoil.FeedI întegrating metal linkbell.CockingF.lcctrical.FiringI Vrcu-sion (electrical sol1noi11, tlwlu:~ll~ operatedtrigger).Rate of fire :With AP750 rounds per minute.With lib'.OKI) rounds per minute..Muzzle \ eloeity :AP Tracer2.715 feet per second.(3) .-Immitnition. I Ins gun hres tracer, armorpicrcmgtracer, and high explosive incendiarytracer.g. 20-MM MACHINE GI N IM'.G.151/20). (1)General description. This is the 20-mni versionof the Mauser M.G.Iil tlcbiign. It is onlyslightly different from the 15-mm gun. Barrelsof the 15-mm and 20-mm models are not interchxngeal~le.This ~LUI also is issued in an electricallyfired version, with a spring-loaded con1x-t itist(wl of n fit-in: I)in. Two types of groundVII—107

I MARCH 1945TM-E 30-451mounts exist for the JI.G. l.51/20, and there isa self-propelled antiaircraft version on a halftrack.(2) Characteristics.Caliber .......20 mm (0.791 inch).Length over-all ......69.75 inches.Weight (including electricalcontrol) ..93.5 pounds.OperationRecoil.FeedDisintegrating metal linkbelt.Cocking ....,.......Electrical.Firing ............. * ...Percussion (electrical solenoid,manually operatedtrigger).Rate c, f:Unsynchronized ...... AI’, 800 round< per minute.HE, 750 rounds Iwr minute.Muzzle velocity:HE Incendiary....... 2.650 feet per second.AP Incendiary an(lAPHE ............2,300 feet per secontl.(3) Awlr~twitiolz. Projectiles fired in this guninclude high explosive, incendinrq- tracer, armorpiercingincendiary, armor-picrcitlg high explosive,and high explosive incendiary.h. 20-MM MACIIINE GUN (Orrlikmz F.F. andF.F.M.). (1) Gc~lc~~al dcscviption. This is theGerman air force version of the standard Oerlikondesign. It is chambered to fit the short German20-mm round, and the recoiling parts have beenredesigned accordingly. The M.G.F.F. is a fixedgun. The ill.G.F.F.3I.,~ a later version, is mechanicallyidentical, but may have a cooling cowlingand hand firing device for use as a free gun.Both models fire only automatically.(2) Chavizcfcuistics.Caliber20 mm (0.791 inch).Length over-all ....52.75 inches.Weight:Pneumatic cocking . .60 pounds.Hand cocking ..55.75 pounds.Operation1:ecoi1.Feed60-round drum, 20-rounddrum, or 15round clip.Cocking:Fixed gun ..........Pneumatic, electrical control.Free gun .......Manual.Firing ........ Pcrcussion.Rate of fire (operation) ,100 rounds per minute.Muzzle velocity ,,.,..,,.1,900 feet per second.(3) rlrur~ul~itiorz. Ball tract’r, high csplosivr.high explosi\-e tracer, high r\l)kJ a ivctracer, and armor piercing - are firedfrom this gun.i. 30-MM MACHINE GUN (Mk.101). (1)General description. This heavy machine gun isof Rheinmctall Bii r sig Tt may be firedsingle shot or autonlatical!y. ‘I‘\\-0 htxavy coiledsprings around the barrel are necessary to checkrecoil. This 30-mm machine gun is being repl;1ctdby the Model 10s.(2 ) CharacteristicsCaliber^0 mm ( 1.18 inches).Length over-all 9n inches.WeightW4 pounds.OperationRecoil.Feed10-round box magazine.CockingPneumatic.FiringI Vrcu--Mon, electrical solenoidoperated.Rate of fire (estimated) . .400 rounds per minute.j . 30-MM MACHINE Grx < Mk. 10S). (1)General description. The Model 108 is the latest30-mm machine gun to be employed in aircraftand is replacing the Model 101.(2) CI2nl-trc-tc-l,i.sfic.s.CaliberLength over-allWeightOperationFeedCockingFiring30 mm ( 1.18 inches).3 feet 6 inches.J'o pounds.1'lmvback.60-round disintegrating linkbelt.Conipn -sed air.Electrical (sear is actuatedby compressed air).Rate of fire 500 rounds per minute.Muzzle velocity 1,650 feet per second.(3) Ammunition. The high explosive tracerprojectile fired from tllis gun ~1 1 11ounces. Incendiary tracer projectiles are alsofired,k. 21-CM ROCKET. Single engine Germanfighters carry t\vo of these t h e wenginN1 fighters carry four. The projectiles,42.44 inches long and weighing 248 pounds, areprojected from open end tubes 50.31 inches long.The rockets are fired by electricity. The launchingtubes may be jettisoned by electrical detonatorcharges.VII—lo8

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45ICHAPTER VIIIUNCLASSIFIEDEQUIPMENT1. GeneralSection I.INTRODUCTIONCurrent equipment of the German Armed Forcesis generally good, despite more than five yearsof war. Although some German equipmentdoes not reach Allied standards, in the majorityof categories it has been found to be as good as,or better than, comparable U. S. items.2. DesignMuch German equipment differs radically in designfrom Allied counterparts. This does notmean that the functioning of the equipment is inany way inferior; the solution of the problem hasbeen approached from another angle.3. ShortagesAlthough acute material shortages sometimesforce the employment of substitutes, redesignedGerman equipment seldom shows impaired Wficiency.This is attributable to careful, meticulousplanning, and to the production of a surprisinglyversatile industry which is controlled completelyby the state.Section II. AUTOMOTIVE EQUIPMENTI. GeneralIn general, German military automotive cquipmentconsists of adaptations of civilian types, andthese in most cases do not reach the high standardof American or British vehicles either inreliability or performance. The German branchesof Ford and General Motors appear to have beenincapable of reproducing their prototypes withunimpaired efficiency. With half-tracked primemoversand l)~rso~l~icl-carri~l-s, however, the Germanshave excelled: in this class they have producedvchiclcs which ha\-e given excellent serjlictand \vhicli are uiirivaled for cross-countryperformance.2. German Carsa. T,IGIIT ARMY C‘AR (VdkYiwQge?z). (1)Grr~cl-al. This four-scat vehicle was developedfmll the f~llllOUs "hJl)le'S Car", Which in factncvvr canle into the h~ultls of the German people.The military version has a touring body with afolding top instc.ad of tbr civilian sedan typebody. The Volk.sri~a~j~~r~, thcs German equivalentof the American "Jeep", is inferior in every wayexcept in the comfort of its svating accommodations.(2) Chassis. The chassis consists of a central,welded-steel tube bifurcating at the rear tosupport the engine ant1 transmission. The steelfloor on both sitlrs 0i the central member providcsthe means of sul)l)orting the body. Thefront axle consists of steel tubes which housethe t\vo torsion bars of tbc suspension. Thebody is of sheet steel.(3) Pouw. The ~nginc, mounted at the rear,develops 24.5 brake hoI-sel)owcr at 3,300 revolutionsper minute. Its capacity is 985 cubic centimetersC60 cul)ic incllc%h). It is air-cooled andhas four cylinckrs, borizc~ntally opposed in pairs.Tbc gasoline tank is below the instrument panelin front of tbc right beat. Tier? are four forwardspeeds, and one ’r~v~‘rsc. The maximumsl~~d in high gear is al~out 50 miles per hour.The I’oll~s~~gc~ is a four-wheeled vehicle withtwo-wheel drive.(3) Alrz~I~ibio~ z&sial ~ An amphibious version,known as the Srhwhnmzvagen or lc.P.Kw.k’.Zs, has an cngiue of 4ightly increased capacity(1,131 cubic centimeters or 69 cubic inches).The crankshaft is extended to the rear of theVIII—I

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNClASSiFIEDVigure 1.—Small personnel carrier,VIII—2

I MARCH 1945 o/l-E 30-45IUNCLASSIFIEDFigure 2— Amphibious 1'olkswai/eii, Schiiiiiirahotly and cngagcs with the propeller-shaft hyIll~‘aIIs of a dog clutch. Wh~i traveling OVC~land,the propeller and shaft fold over thv backof the vehicle. The body, which reseml~les acivilian sports car, is of thin welded sheet tttvt:tl.b. STANDARD CHASSIS I FOR LIGHT ARMYCAR. (1) Ck7s.sis. This chassis is of normaltype, with a frame of rectangular section, side,and cross members and lztcing to sttlq)ort tl icngitie, transmission. and body. The hood is1ling-cd down the ccttter and fastcnt~tl on eachsitle by two clips. This chassis is used for thefour-scat light car (Kfz. 1) and for a varietyof radio and other spc’cial put-loose vehicles.(2) Erl~ims. The engine is mounted at thefront and may be any of the following types:(a) Hanomag 2-Litn- (122 ruhic illr1rr.s) T~lpr20 B. This is a water-cooled, four-cylittilcrO.H.V. gasoline engine with dry sump lubric;ttioti.It generates SO brake horsq)owcr at 3.500revolutions pet- minute. \l’:ttcr putiil~, fan. antIdynamo are driven 1tY one \--belt from the catiishaft.(b) BMW. Z-Liter (122 czhic inrhrs) T~lpc325. This engine is a water-cooled, six-cylinder(in-line) O.H.V. gasoline engine with dry sumplubrication, generating 45 brake horsepower at4,000 revolutions per minute.(c) Stoewcr Types R W0 W and AW 2.These are both water-cooled, four-cylinder O.H.V.gasoline engines with dry sump lubrication. TheR 180 W is a I.750 EulGc cc~ntimrter (106.75cubic inches) model generating 43 brake horse1x)wvr at 3.600 rcv1lltttic)ns per minute, and theAW 2 is a 2-liter (122 cubic ittchcs) engine givingSO IX-akc hors~q~l\\-c’r at the same speed.(3) PO’ii ’ i’l’ Thr power (rain is geared to allfour The\, c l ticle a1.s~~ has four-wheelsteering, but the rear wheel steering mechanismtitay lx lOCli?tl. The gears givcx five forwardsl)~~& ant1 one ryv(‘rir. ~Iaxiniuiii speed is SOtnilvs I)er hour. Tgt~itiott is 11y a 12-I-olt batteryant1 coil. The tttaitt gasolittc) tank (13.25 gallons)is tttc~tttit~d at the rr;Lt, ant1 the reserve tank (2.4~~allotis) is in the engine compartment.c. STANDARD CHASSIS I TYPE 40 FOR LIGHTARMY CAR. This chassis, used for light staffcars ant1 various special purpose vehicles, is practicallythe satnc as the Standard Chassis I, buthas front I\-heel stc

UNCLASSFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Fi,qwc .?.—Medium personnel carrier.cars and specialized vehicles, is X-shaped andsupports the engine at the front. The frontwheels are independently sprung by two parallel,semi-elliptic springs crossing the front of thevehicle. The rear wheel suspension is by coilsprings. The engine is fitted beneath the hood,which is of normal type.(2) E:zginc. The engine is the water-cooled,four-cylinder, 1,700 cubic centimeters (103.7cubic inches) Mercedes Benz Type M 136. Thisis a side-valve, gasoline engine with an IA-shapedcylinder head, with the camshaft and valve gearon the right side. The engine develops about 38brake horsepower at 3,400 revolutions per minute.The fuel tank, located in the engine compartment,contains 11.5 gallons.e. STANDARD CHASSIS FOR MEDIUA~ CAR. (1)Chassis. This is a conventional chassis used forstaff cars, radio vehicles, and other specializedtypes and consisting of two parallel side membersand various cross members and brackets.The engine is fitted at the front, and the wheelsare sprung independently by two coil springswith double-action, hydraulic shock absorbersVIII-4The spare wheels arc carrictl one on each sideof the chassis on stub axles to prevent bellyingwhen traveling over rough ground.(2) E~zgimx The engine may be either oftwo types: Horch I--8 T>.pe 001 (a watercooled,3.5liter (213.5 chic inches) gasolineengine developing 82 I)rake horst~power at 3,600revolutions per minute), or an ()p~l straight-six(a xvater-cooled, 3.6 liter (210.6 cubic inches)O.H.V. gasoline engine tlr\.c*loping 68 brakehorsepower at 2.800 revolutions per minute).There are two gasoline tanks. The main tank,holding 18.7 gallons, is susp~~~~l~~l in the centerof the chassis frame.. and the rcst’rve tank holding10.8 gallons. is at the rrar. The main gearbox has four forward speetl~ and one reverse,with an auxiliary gtsar box giving t\vo ratios: normaland cross-countr\.. All for~r ~vhecls are drivingwheels.f. STAND.~RD CHASSIS 11 I‘OR HEAVY CAR.(1) Clznssis. There arr actually three knownmodels of this chassis, all bcillg similar in generalappearance. Model EGa has stub axles carryingthe spare wheels to assist in crossing roughground, and four-wheel steering. The steering

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IFigure 4.—Medium Half-tracked prime mover (8.tou).mechanism for the rear wheels can be locked.Model EGb has front wheel steering only.Model EGd has no anti-bellying support axles.The body usually fitted is a four-door touringtype of clumsy appearance. The vehicle is usedfor a variety of purposes, including an artilleryprime mover for light guns.(2) Ewgine. The engine is the Ford 3.6~liter(219.6 cubic inches) V-8, developing 78 brakehorsepower at 3,600 revolutions per minute. Thisis a side-valve model with L-type cylinder heads.There are five forward speeds and one reverse.The main (14.5 gallons) and subsidiary (17 gallons)gasoline tanks are supported within thechassis frame.3. German Trucksa. OPEL "BLITZ" 3-TON TRUCK TYPE 3.6-36 S.(1) Clltrssis. This vehicle, employed principallyas a general purpose truck, has a variety of specializedbodies. There are actually three models:the 3.6-36 S, the original Chevrolet-type commercialvehicle; the 3.6-36 S (army model),which is modified to meet army specifications ; andthe 3.647 which is intended primarily for coachesand has a lengthened chassis. The vehicle has anormal rectangular type chassis, supporting theengine at the front.(2) Pmcw The engine is a water-cooled,straight-six O.H.V. gasoline unit of 3.6 liters(219.6 cubic inchr,s) capacity, developing about68 brake horsq,owcr. ‘1’11~ gasoline tank (21.6gallons) is situated uutl

UNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IL :VIII—6Figure 5.—22-ton tank transport trailer.

I MARCH 1945springs, each of which has a two-way shock absorber.(2) Power, The Diesel engine is ‘a four-cylinder,O.H.V., water-cooled model of about 5liters (30.5 cubic inches) capacity. The gear-boxgives four forward speeds and one reverse. Thereis an auxiliary gear box for selecting road orcross-country gear ratio. The driving -pobvcr iscarried to only two of the four wheels. Similarvehicles of Mercedes Benz manufacture also existup to the IO-ton class. Some of the smaller onesmay be found with gasoline engines, but in all thelarger sizes only Diesels arc used.e. BI;SS~XC-NAG. 4%-TON DIESEL TRUCK.This is a conventional type of truck which performssatisfactorily under test. At the governedspeed of 1,740 revolutions per minute, 93 brakehorsepower was developed. Over a 1OO-mileroad circuit with heavy traffic, the vehicle averaged21.1 miles per hour, and the fuel consumptionaveraged 8.72 miles per gallon. The vehicle,during the test, carried a load of 6% tons withoutany difficult)-.f. HEAVY WHEELED PRIME MOVER RadschlcppcrOst. (1) Description. This is a heavyprime mover with four large wheels, intended foruse on the Russian front. This vehicle shouldnot be confused with the Rrz~~/v~zsclrlrpprv Ost, afully-tracked prime lnover also intcndcd for useon the Russian front.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(2j Spccificufims.Length20 feet.Width~ feet 4 inches.H e i g h t . . . . . . IO feet.\\llcels (steel) ....II T our, 4 feet 10 inches illdiameter.EngineA-cylintlcr, ill-line, air~r~letl, 00 horsepower.Fuel(.asoline.Cajjacitv .. I) .024 cubic centimeters.(307. 40 cllhic inches.)(I\ith 2.cylmtlcr, air(.uolcd, 12 horselwwrausillar~ starter engine),Ikive .............._.1 \~hwl, \vitll locking &Iiercntial.GearsI'ive forward, one reverse.Speed, road miles per hour (average).LVeight unloatlc tl.. l ‘) ' tons.Useful load4.5 tons.Trailed load5.6 tons.N’inch cal,acit> 5 i ) 5. 6 tons.g. HALF-TRA(.KED PRIME MOVERS AICD PERSONNKI. CARRIIXS. These vehicles form the mostsuccessful sericbs produced by the Germans, andhave multifarious UCS. i;igure 00 gives briefcomparative details of ~:K+. I%~~ dates given incolumn 3 refer to the presumed date of introduction.In the same colut~m. thv initial letters inthe manufacturer's tyl)c. arc the initials of theoriginal manufacturer. Thus DB stands forDaimler Benz, Bn for I:i&ng N.h.G., HL forHansa-Lloyd (Rorglvartl). D for I)~llag, H forHanomag, and F for Faino. The original manufacturermay 1i0t be the exclusive maker of aparticular type of vehicle,. for certain types maybe manufactured bj. ~vcral lirms,VIIL—7

ICOMPARATIVE TABLE OF VARIOUS TYPES OF GERMAN HALF-TRACKED VEHICLES.Zg.Kw. TYPESd. Kfz.No.Manufacturer'stypeMay bach EnginetypeGearbox typeBraking systemSuspensionClutch1 ton 10 D7(1938/9)NL 38 TRKMorHL 42 TRKMMaybach pre-selective semiautomaticSRG 102128H.ATE Hydraulic foot brakes. Hydraulicsteering brakes. Handbrake worksmechanically on the steering brakes.Full torsion-bar. (Idler not sprung,but fitted with shear-bolt safetydevice).Fichtel and SachsMecano typePF 220 K.1 ton 10 D7(1940)as aboveMaybach VariorexVG102128Has aboveas aboveas aboveLight armored carrieron Zg.Kw. i-tonchassis.250252253D7p(1940)HL 42 TRKMas aboveas aboveNote: One pair of oogies less thanon Zg.Kw. 1-ton (Sa,Kfz. 10).as above3 ton 11 kl6(1938)NL 38 TUKRorHL 42 TUKRMNormal 4-speed type withauxiliary gearbox.Mechanical hand and steering brakes.Mechanical servo-assisted i'ootbrake.Full torsion-bar. (Idler not sprung,bu: fitted,with ohear-bolt sa'etyd-vice).Mchtel and SachsMecano type PF 220.Medium armored carrieron Zg.Kw. 3ton chassis.251 kl6p(1938)NL 38 TUKRRMorHL 42 TUKRRMas above/ as aboveas aboveas above 251 kl6p(1940)HL 42 TUKRRMas aboveas aboveas above 251 H kl6p(1940)5 ton 6 BNL7(1936)NL 38 TUKRRMorHL 42 TUKRRMNL 38Spezial.as aboveZahnradfobrik A~hon gearboxtype G.45 V. (“onsynchromesh).as aboveMechanical steering brake?. Boschpneumatic hand and footorakes.Bogies with leaf-springing in pairs.Idler sprung with 2 short torsion-bars,fixed in center of tube.Fichtel and SachsMecano typePF 220 K.as above5COCO5 ton 6 BNLSDRL8(1938/39)NL 38 TUKorNL 38 TUKRMMechanical hand and steering brakes.Bosch pneumatic footbrake.Full torsion bar. (Idler not sprung,but fitted with shear-bolt safetydevice).as aboveFootnote at end of table.

JOoCOMPARATIVE TABLE OF VARIOUS TYPES OF GERMAN HALF-TRACKED VEHICLES.—ContinuedZg.Kw. typeSd. Kfz.No.Manufacturer'stureMaybach EnginetypeGearbox typeBraking systemSuspensionClutch5 ton6BN 9(ca. 1940)HL 54 TUKRMBosch pneumatic foot brake. ATEhydraulic steering-brakes. Mechanicalhandbrake.as aboveas above8 ton7KM m 8(1935)HL 52 TUZahnradjabnk ZG 55.Mechanical steering and hand-brakes.to n pneumatz foot-brakes.Bogies with leaf-springing in pairs.(Spiral springing on idler).-8 ton7KMm 11HLm 11, (ca. 1939)HL 62 TUK"Non-synchronized".han d and and steering brakes.Bosch pneumatic foot brake.Bogies with leaf-springing in pairs.(Torsion-bar springing on idler).N&x This model was being madeup to 1942. but some later modelshave full torsion-bar suspension.Mecano type K 230 K.12 ton8DBs 8(1938)DSO/8Bosch pneumatic foot brake. (Mechanicalsteering brakes).Bogies with leaf-springing in pairs.Torsion-bar springing on idler.Mecano type LA 80 H.12 ton8DB 9(1939)HL 85TUKRM.Bosch pneumatic foot brakes. ATEhydraulic steering brakes.as above12 ton18 ton89DB 10(1939/40)F-2(1938)HL 85 TUKRMHL 98 TUKZahnradfabrik Type G 65VL23O.Mechanical hand-brake. Bosch pneumaticfoot-brake. Hydraulic steeringbrakes.Mechanical hand and steering brakes.to n pneumatic foot brake.Full torsion-bar. (Idler not sprung.but fitted with shear-bolt safety. device).as aboveMecano LA 65/80 B.Meccano LA 65/80.3COCO18 ton9F-3(1939)HL 108 TUKRMas aboveas aboveas aboveMecano LA 80.Figure 60.Im

I MARCH 1945Section III. ARTILLERY FIRE CONTROLEQUIPMENTUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451I. On-Carriage Fire Control Equipmenta. GESI

) • • ' )::' *" ' " ') • • •GERMAN TAXI< AND ARMORED CAR SIGHTS—TURRET SIGHTING TELESCOPESBiiTYPEUSED ONT.Z.F.2 and 2X.T.Z.F. 30.Pz.K#jw.I. Models A and B.4.wheeled armored car.Sd.Kfz.222 and semi-trackedA L . Sd.Kjz. 250/9.T.Z.F.4. Pe.Kfijw. II Models R to C.T.Z.F.4/36and 4/38.Pz.Kfifw.II Model F.T.Z.B. 5~.T.Z.F. 5~.(Vorl).Pz.Kf~jw. III Models A to D.Pz.Kpfw. III Model E, etc.(See Remarks).5 cm.T.Z.F. 5b. Pz.Kpfw. III with 7.5 cm.Kw.K. Models J to N.Pn.Kpfw. IV Models B to F.T.Z.F.56/36.T.Z.F. 5d.T.Z.F. 5.T.Z.F. 5fPz.Kpjw. IV. Models B to F.Pz.K$fw. III. Models F and J.Ps.Kpfw. III Models L and M.Pz.Kpjw. IV Models F2 to II.(Vorl)rGUSS AND AMMUNITION7.92 mm MG 13.2 cm h’7u.K. 38.7.92 mm M.G 3 %2 cm Kw.K. 30.7.92 mm M.G. 34.2 cm Kw.K. 30.7.92 mm M.G. 34./3.7 cm Kw.K. (AP and HE).7.92 mm M.G. 34.5 LM Kw.K (.AP and HE).7.92 mm M.G. 3/r.7.5 cm Kw.K.7.92 mm M.G. 3 6 .7.5 cm Kw.K.7.92 mm M.G. 30.5 cm Kw.K. (APC and HE)7.92 mm M.G. 3/r.5 cm Kw.K 39 AP or APCHE7.92 mm M.G. 3 / r.7.5

GERMAN TANK AND ARMORED CAR SIGHTS—TURRET SIGHTING TELESCOPES—ContinuedTYPE USED ON GUNS AND AMMUNITIONT.Z.F. 5f. f. Pz.Kpjw. IV Models G to K. 7.5 cm Kw.K. 40 APCBCHEAP407.92 mm M.C. 34.RangeScales(Meters)300040001500(SeeRemarks)Magnification(X)Field(Degrees)Overalllength(less eyeguard)(inches)Weight(pounds)ExitPupildistance(mm.)EntrancePupildiameter(mm.)REMARKS2. 4 25 32 26 5. 8 13.9 Monocular.The HE scale serves for the machine gun also.T&F. 6.S-wheeled armored car andPe. sp. wg. II(Luchs)Sd. Kjz. 123.2 cm Kw K. 30 and 38, and7.92 mm M.G. 3b.1200 2. 4 22 28.4 21 5 12 Monocular.T.Z.F. 6/38.2 cm Kw.K. 38 and7.92 mm M.G. 3b.1200 2. 5 25 Little known about this telescope but knowndimensions agree with those for theT.Z.F.6. Monocular.T.Z.F. 9b. Pz.Kpjw. Tiger Model E. 8.8 cm Kw.K. 36.7.92 mm M.G. 3b.T.Z.F. 9d. Ps.Kpjw. Tiger Model B. 8.8 cm Kw.K. 43 APCBCH E7.92 mm M.G. 34.4000120030005000(SeeRemarks)2. 4 26 32.5 37 6 15 Binocular. Adjustable interocular distance.Monocular.The HE scale is believed to serve for themachine gun also.T.Z.F. f2. Pz.Kpjw. Panther Model D. 7.5 cm Kw.K. 42 APCBC(Z./70) HEAP40.7.92 mm M.G. 34.300040002000(SeeRemarks)T.Z.F. 120. Pz.Kpjw. Panther Models A and G. As above. 300040002000(SeeRemarks)2. 5 29 45.1 63.88 6. 2 15 Binocular. Light and dark filters fitted. TheHE scale serves for the machine gun also.2.551915HULL MACHINE GUN TELESCOPES44.5 44 6.23.1Monocular, dual magnification.

I MARCH 1945lowering the line of sight. The elevation scaleis graduated in hundreds, from 100 mils to 500mils, with 300 as normal. The micrometer isgraduated in single mils numbered in tens.(e) Eyepiece. This is at the end of an armand can be turned in any direction. The recticlewhich may be illuminated has an interrupted verticalline with an inverted "V" for elevation.Late models of the M.32 as well as M.32 Ksights have a horizontal scale added to the reticle.(f) Characteristics, M.32 and M.32 K.Power4 x.Field of view10°.Diameter of exit pupil.. I.8 inches.Overall length ......6.25 inches.Weight ...5 pounds.Figure Il.—Panoramic Telescope M16/18.UNCLASSIFIED(3) Panoramic Sight M. 16/18. (a) Des&ptiolz.The M.16/18 sight differs from the M.32as follows:It has no slipping scales.JYhen the azimuth scale is set at zero, tE.e rotatinghead forms an angle of 90 degrees with theeye piece.A cross-level vial :~sembly is secured to theshank. It is adjusted by turning an eccentricplug.(b) Clraractcrisfics.Power4 x.Field.of view10°.I)iameter of csit pupil. . . 1.5 inches.Lcn~th Owr-all . 0 .. ? 5 inches.Weight .............. 3 pounds 5 ouuces.c. ANTITAKK GUNS. (1) Gemral. All Germanantitank-gun sight mounts have facilities for applyingrange, and most have a means for applyinglateral deflection. Characteristics of varioussights are:(a) 2 cm S.Pz. B41. Open sights "U" andacorn. Graduations for range, but no mechanicalarrangement for applying deflection. Telescopesight fits into a trigger housing on sight mount.(b) 5 an Pak 38. The sight incorporates lateraldeflection gear ant1 means for adjusting lineand elevation. Range tlr-urn is graduated to 2,400meters (HE) and 1,400 meters (AI’).(c) 7.5 CM Pak 40. As for 5 cm Pak 38 butgraduated to 2,800 mils (HE) and 1,400 mils(API.(d) 7.611 cm Pak 36 (I,). Rocking bar reciproeating; range indicator graduated to 6,000 meters(APCBC) and.2,000 meters (AP 40). Elevationindicator graduated in meters for three types ofprojectiles and in mils up to 800.(e) 7.5/5..5 cm Pak

UNCLASSIFIEDI M.~,kCti IV45 TM-E 30-451Figure 12.~Sight 11101412ts. (Ixft) ITor 10.5 cm Howitzer on Pa. Kpfzv. III chassis (Stu. IIJ) (h’i!/ll/) /%r 7.5 cm Pok40 on Czech (381) loll/: clitr.s.sis.~i!we 13.—si{lht mmrts. (Lrft) For 75/55 mm Pak 41 Gull. (Right) I;OY 8.8 cm IBilk 43/41 Gz(.Figwe 14—Sight ww~~ts (Left) For 7.5 cm (Stat. K40) Pz. Kpfu: HI chassis. (Right) For 7.5 CM oil 1’:. Kpfzv,Ill R./O rotary cupola.12) Zidfcw~oIz~, Z.F. 35/II S.v.o.4 This is conical retitles. Thv anglr ~‘rom conical to verthesight now used with all antitank guns. It has tical reticle is 4 inilb. giving a maximum lay-off oion2 main graduation \vith three secondary gradua- 24 niils on each side. The field of view is 8 clrtionson each side, and a vertical line between the grres, and nqnitication thrrr*- fc11~1.VIII—l4

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451(3) AitshUisrichtmittd 3S. This is the sightused for illt1ircc.t 1;~)~iiq 0i alltit;tiik guns. It consistsof a tangent elevation drum, bwring ring,and telescopic sight \\Iill lo-tlcgr~be field of viewand 3-1xn~~r rn~igliilic;c~ic,ll. ‘fhe tangent elevationdrum is graduated in mi zero to 1,300 mils byhundreds, and the bearing scale from zero to 6,400mils in IiuntlwtlS. 1k1111 hove micronieter atljustmentsfor zero to 100 mils.d. SELF-I'KOI'EU.ED ARTILI.KRV. Most Germanseli-propellvtl assault and antitank guns of 75 111or ii~oi-e calil)er u e the S'jl. %.I ; . series of directlayingtelescopes. J'.xeepting the Sjl. Z.T. 5, on the8.8 cm Pak '13/3 (/...••/"/) on Pz. Jag. Panther,they are mounted on a Ziele'uirichtung 37 (Z.E.37) sight bracket. This >igllt l)i-acid has crosslevellingdeflection and range adjustments. Since1042 panormiic sigll l b issued for self-l)ropelledartillery ha\,e been reduced to one for each tLVOguns.e. TANK AXD ARMORKD CAR SIGHTS. (1) Genc~.(il.Ck~riiian talik and armored car sights are ofarticlllate(l stationary evepiece tyl)e, \vitli verticallylllc)\-ing reticlch. They are tor direct laying,anal coiiSist of t\vo mam parts: 0l)jective tulx alldreticle box, which move11C’\viLh the gun : ant1 the cycpiecettll)e. ml-i-viiig The range control, \Vhich remainsstationary. ( I kt:iils of tank aid armoredcar sigllts are given m Figure 9.)(2) Range scales. Range scales (including anallo~~niice i0r jump) consist of a series of smallcircles ah~ut the CI~III(XI ;lsis, gr:ltluatetl in hundredsof meters, and numbered every 200 meters.Thaw for various 1j1.1jjectilcs are mari d accordingly.Iia~igrs are read against a fixctl translucentpoiiitvr at the top of the field of view.(3) Rrtirlc markings. Reticle markings consistof a l;ii-ge cc.iit~:~l triallglc. or inverted V, withthree smaller trianglcas on each sitle at 4-lnil intervals.The ccntu ap’x is the nrmnal aiming point.Zeroing linol)s for line ("Seile") ant1 elevation{"Jliilie") and reticle illumination are provided.The ol)tic;ll and mechanical joint is a dust proof,water-tight prism svMcm, usually limited to —20degrees depression and 1 ~30 degrees elevation.(4) }faehtiie-gun sights. Machine-gun sightson tanks and armored cars are fixed in gimbal orball mounts, with the optical axis offset so thatthe line of sight is C.IOX~ to the machine gull whenI : i~/lci.~’ 15.—Sic/lit mmf1It.~. (Top) For 7.5 rw Flowitzevịt passes through the ball. Tlic reticle has no(Center) lor 10.5 cm LFH 18 Howitzer. (Bottom) For range or deflection settings. Zeroing adjustments15 cm SIC 33 Ho~i\‘itxr. are provided, liu\\~c,vei-, 3~ \vell as illumination.VIII—15

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figwe 16.—AiGrg Circle, Kkr31, with case artd illwr~inc~fir~g uppurrlhsWI— I6Figure 17.—Gumer'sqzladrallt.2. Off-Carriage Fire Control Equipmenta. GENERAL. Like their other optical instruments,G~rninn off-carriage fire control equipmentis superior in design and workmanship. Most instrumentswhich are quite similar to our owncould be uwtl t+fecIively 1)~ A\llictl troops.b. Winkelmcsscr 35 (IF.M. 35), GUNNER'SQUADRANT. (I) (;c~licral. ‘I‘liis gunner's quadrantis sinlple and well ccm>tl-llcted. The framecontains an elevation arc with a scale graduatedin ten-mil units from zero to 1,000 mils in blacknumerals, and from 600 to 1,600 mils in red.The quadrant arm carries a spirit level and isprovided with coarse‘ and fin3 iiu-hcs.Width0.94 inch.Length4.63 inches.c. Richtkrcis 31 (Rkr. 31 \. AIMING CIRCLE.(1) General. Material, workmanship, and designof the Rbr. 31 are excelht. and no expensehas been spared in its pro(luctioll. It is con

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IFigure 18.—70 on Range Finder with adjusting lath and carrximistrutted in three major parts: the periscope, thetelescope, and the angle-of-site mechanism. \\:henassembled, these can be mounted on the spindleof a tripod. The instrument can be uwd to mcasurevertical and horizontal angles: by using themagnetic ncetlle, magnetic bearings can be taken.1Vhen disassembled, part of the instrument canbe used for plane table work.(2) Description. The periscope is fitted tothe aiming circle by means of a tlov~tailed slitlc.Its function is merely to raise the line of sight.It has no magnifying power. The telescolw hasan adjustable focussing eyepiece, with a levelingbubble on top. A lighting attachment is provitltdon the left side. To the left of the telescope is aspherical level by which the head can be leveled.The angle-of-sight mechanism can be rotatedthrough a total of 1,400 mils, the horizontal being300 mils. The smallest graduation is 1 mil.The traversing mechanism is graduated in milsiron xro to i~.-N)o. A i|iiick rcslense mechanism isprovitletl.The ~ril~~l is adjustable in height and has atra\-erring nie~lianisn~. A spindle projecting fromthy traversing 1~~1 forties thra support for the aimingcircle. Two riilg, in xvliich the spindle ismounted eccentrically CC~ntrol its wrtical position,and by rotating these rings the spherical levelcan lx Ccnlc~l-cYl.d. KAXGI: FrxnKKs. (1) General. In general.(ierman range finders are of the stereoscopictylw. 1111t a 70-cm base coincidence range finder,though no lollg(~- in l~ro~lwtion ~ is still in use.Rangy fintlcr- are known 1IO c,sist in the followingsizes :70-cm Ime.l-lll,~l< r hw .1.5.tthtcr basr.4-III~-lcr baw.6-meter base.lo-rnt1I’r has?.12mcter base.VIII—-17

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451Figure IS).—4-meter Range l : indcr, Model Em 4m R40.VIII—I8Figure 20.—Range Finder, 1.5 metcr-Basc. (Top) Assembled vine. (Bottom) Assembled ready for use.

ll_wI MARCH 1945TM-E 30451r Entfer(2) 70-cm Range Finders 14 a&?' 3~nungsmesser 14 and 34).(a) General. The 70-cm (27.56 inches) coincidencerange finder is used by German machine-gunand mortar units, and by airbornetroops for obtaining the ranges of ground targets.It also is used with the M.G.34 for antiaircraftfire. For adjustment an artificial infinity is used.There is no adapter for mounting on a tripod.(b) Characteristics.Base length70 cm (27.56 inches).Magnification11 x.Range219 to 10,930 yards.Weight of Range finder.. 10 pounds.Weight of case complete. .4.5 pounds.(3) l-Meter (39.37 inches) Stereoscopic RangeFinders. (a) GeneraZ. These portable l-meterbase range finders are used largely by light antiaircraftunits manning 20-mm and 37-mm guns.(b) Characteristics.Em.R. 1 m. Em.R.36 1 m.Base length ....39.37 inches 39.37 inches.Magnification .. 7.8 x6 x.Range 275 to 8,740 yards.545 to 10,930yards.Weight 9.9 pounds I6 pounds.(4) 1.5-Meter (59.06 inches) StereoscopicRarlge Fkder (Em R.l.5 VIJZ). (a)General. Thisrange finder is provided with a tripod and is onlyused against fixed targets.(b) Characteristics.Base length ;.. .59.06 inches.Magnification .......... * 11 x.Range435 to 21,860 yards.Weight20.9 pounds.Weight of tripod 39.6 pounds.(5) B-Meter (157.48 in&es) Range Finder(Ern:R. 4 m). (a) General. This is the standardinstrument for use with heavy antiaircraftguns. It may be employed either as an independentrange finder, or incorporated into an antiaircraftdirector. As a range finder it is served bya crew of four: rangetaker, layer for line, layerfor elevation, and reader.(b) Characteristics.RangeWeightfrom 2,200 feet..420 pounds.(6) 6-, lo-, and 1ZMeter Range Finders.These instruments are used for range measurementfor seacoast artillery.Section IV.SIGNAL EQUIPMENT. I. Constructional Featuresa. GENERAL. TWO features stand out in theconstruction of Germany Army communicationsequipment: the unit cohstruction methods employedand the material from which the units aremade.b. UNIT CONSTRUCTION METHODS. Practicallyevery piece of radio equipment is constructed inuhits, which are secured to panels and to eachother, electrical connections being made by plugand socket strips or by screwing tags or solderingwires to a terminal strip. In most cases thispermits quick dismantling for servicing and repair.c. MATERIALS USED (1) General. The metalfrom which radio sets are made is almost universallyan alloy of about 90 per cent magnesium ;8 pep cent aluminum; and 2 per cent zinc, copper,and other metals. Each unit consists of a diecastingof this alloy. Not onli is the main subchassiscast, but also the screening plates, bosses,and recesses for mounting components. The castingsare accurately made, requiring little machining,thus establishing excellent mechanical rigidityand improved electrical performance.(2) Tuning condensers. Main tuning condensersare made from the standard alloy. Bothrotors and stators are machined from a blockcasting. Thus, there can be no deterioration inperformance due to corrosion between individualplates and their mountin&(3) Insulation. Extensive use is made ofceramic materials for insulating; they are usedfor tag strips, tube holders, tube bases, coilformers, and almost universally as the mainbearing for ganged condensers. Where coilformers are not made from ceramics, porcelainor pressed bakelised paper is used.(4) Condensers. Trimmer condensers areusually either small, air-spaced ones, or of thesilvered ceramic-disc . type (Philips), which areused to some extent in British and Americanequipment. Small, fixed condensers are the tubularceramic type or flat mica type in a bakeliteshroud. Except in older versions of the 100W.S., mica is used sparingly. Larger condensersare paper-dielectric Mansbridge type. No colorcoding is used, the values being printed on thecondenser in mF, pF, or centimeters.VIII—-19

I MARCH 1945(5) Resisto7s. Resistors are usually of thenoninductive carbon type, although a few wirewoundones are employed purely for direct currentpurposes, such as voltage dividers. No colorcoding is used, the values being printed on theresistor in ohms.(6) Coils. Low frequency coils and chokesare wound with single-strand, enamel-insulatedwire, or with silk-covered liztendralzt wire. Highfrequency coils usually are wound with bare copperor copper strip. Alternatively, the coilformer has a helical groove in which a thin layerof copper is deposited, apparently by electrolysis.The inductance of most high frequency coils canbe varied within small limits by adjustment of aco-axial iron dust core, or copper ring. Intermediatefrequency transformers not only haveiron dust cores, but are in many cases completelyenclosed in an iron dust shrouding.(7) Tubes. German radio receivers of moderndesign have only one type of tube throughout,usually a pentode. These tubes are not alwaysused in an orthodox fashion-—for instance a pentodemay be used as a diode=but the methodconsiderably facilitates the supply of spares.2. Power SuppliesPower supplies vary according to the purposefor which the piece of equipment is used. Vehiclesets employ separate rotary converters drivenfrom the U-volt vehicle storage batteries. Theseconverters are of heavy rugged construction,and therefore remain serviceable for long periodswithout attention. Ground stations employ storagebatteries and dry batteries, pedal operatedgenerators, or small gasoline electric sets. Packsets employ storage batteries with dry batteriesor synchronous vibrators.3. Simplificationa. CONDENSERS. Great pains are taken to makethe working of the sets as simple and reliableas possible. Tuning condensers are driven througha chain of precision gearing, using fiber andspring-loaded metallic wheels to remove backlash.b. DIALS. The dials are of a large size, withcalibration spaced over 300 degrees or more.They are accurately marked out, permitting thefrequency to be set to very close limits withoutthe use of a wavemeter. Most dials are markedwith one or more check points, allowing initialcalibration to be accurately set or checked bymeans of an external or internal crystal oscilla-VIII—20UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451tor or by means of an internal "glow crystal"(leuchtquarz).c. NUMBERING. AS an aid to both constructionand servicing, each component in a set has anumber, and in many cases the wiring is numberedalso. Any two points bearing the samenumber are directly connected.4. Armored Vehicle Radio Setsa. GENERAL. Complete sets in armored vehiclesinclude transmitter, receiver, power units,and accessories, referred to by the designationFu., followed by a number. An exception is thevoice transmitting set Fu. Spr.f. used in selfpropelledfield and medium artillery vehicles andcertain armored cars. This set has no Fu. number.Transmitters and receivers individually arereferred to by a description and a letter, suchas 10 watt transmitter "c".b. RADIO SETS USED. The following tabulationshows what complete radio sets are likelyto be installed in various types of armored andself-propelled artillery vehicles. Details on thesesets will be found in the accompanying tables.VehicleRadioC;ommander's tank Fu.8 and Fu.5; or Fu.7and Fu.5.Fighting tanks, all types..Fu.S and Fu.2; or Fu.5only.Assault guns .._.........Fu.5 and Fu.2; or Fu.5(in armored formations) only.A&ored OP vehicles.. .Fu.8 and Fu.4; or Fu.8,(artillery)Fu.4, and Fu.Spr.f.Assault guns (artillery.. .Fu.8, Fu.16, and FU S S; orFu.16 and Fu.15; orFu.16 only.Self-propelled antitankguns ................Fu.8 and Fu.5; or Fu.5(light and mediumchassis)Self-propelled antitankgunsonly.Fu.8 and Fu.5; or Fu.7(heavy chassis) and Fu.5; or Fu.5 and Fu.2.Antitank-assault guns ...Fu.8 and Fu.5; or Fu.5only.Lynx (reconnaissance). .Fu.12 and Fu.Spr.f. orFt4.Spr.f. only.Antiaircraft tanks Fu.S or Fw.2 only.(Flak panzer)Self-propelled heavy infantrygunFu.16 only.Wasp and Bumble Bee.. .Fu.Spr.f. only.Armored cars (except... .Fu.Spr.f. only,eight-wheeled vehicle)and semi-tracked vehicles with armament.Armored carsEight-wheeled armoredcarFu.lZ and Fu..Spr.f.Fu.12 and Fu.Spr.f. orFu.Spr.f. only.

,1 MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 21.—Short Ji'ave Receiver Kz,:F..a.Figure 22,—Radio TFuG. kVIII—2I

I MARCH 1945TM-E 30.451•H1'iyurc 24.—Transmitter 15 ll'.S.L.b.VIII—22

MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451UNCLASSlFlEDFigure 25.—Transmitter r //'..V.Vttl—23

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451i'iyurc 2(>,- -iel(h\-ysliirl;cr with hatlery , ,/.\vVIII—24Figure 27.—Transmitter 100 II'

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451figure 2S.—Attenuator Meter I)ui>ip[nun>iess, ,- .W.Figure29.—/-e!dfcntsehreil>er.1—25

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45II : iijurc 30.—Transmitter/Receiver (Tum.l-ii. hi) with case for battery and u ••.••>•;';,•!•/.• i. . " VIII—26I-ujure 31.—Dynamo tor U5al. IKjure 32.—I ; IA\J empUi // telephone.

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSlf\EDTM-E 30-451Fiptrc 33.—lo-Liiie sa,ifi-l2lwnd.J : iyurc 34.—Teleprinter termutal unit. 3.~ ] . — '//•(> / . •;"vr lrc\]iic)ie\ unit.VIII—27

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451Figure 3f>.—"Spinil-1-tuir" field U • 'e!:-. I i41 //, I'iiiure 3S. / 'ir, re ::er V..V2a.VIII—28

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451r.v', • LEGEND't. CONNECTOR ASS~B~Y** FfXEO CONNECTOR - LOADING COIL ASS3 TERMINAL SECTION- " " II4 LOADfNG COIL CASE-0" /' 10•S. !TfM If3 f,V POSlTfON ON LOADING COfL CASEIt. SCREW CONNECTOR7 T’WO LOADING COILS IN POSITION ON SUPPORT WfTiJ CEM-ER COPPER M/EL5v. MOUlDtD FOUH5A TfON - REAR VIEW - SNOWING YOULDED GROOYfSS. R&?UER GASKET/0.C0UPLCV'ujurc 39.—'•Spiral-Tour" field tclcfh.me oihlr itnassrinhi,I~'igwi~ JO.--301I'_. 5. (1.VIIl—29

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 4-1.—Field telephone central (10 lines).VIII—-30Fitjitrc -/_',—Vibrator power supply Ell'.E. l-i,litre /.-.' If.tll. v V. 'i.l.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451/• i( jure 4 L- - /' or tress cmcri/t'iwy (>~itn ^mfigure 45.—Receiver (Jkic. E.c. Transmitter /'•' ll'.^.e.VIII—31

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451I'iynrc 46.—Lcitmiusalischlitss Kustrn Hue terminal etjuipVIII—32Fujnrc47.—Two-man pack Trans/'Receiver (Turn /'n

NUMBERSPECIFICATIONS OFTYPECATHODE TYPEAND RATINGVACUUM TUBES USED INUSE ANDAPPLICATIONPlateVoltage*MaximumGridVoltage*MaximumGERMAN ARMYScreenVoltage•MaximumPlateCurrentat PlateVoltageIndicatedScreenCurrentat ScreenVoltageIndicatedSIGNAL EQUIPMENTC.T. VOLTS. AMP. VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS M A M A OHMS umhos u WATT’ WATTS OHMS uufdsHateResistanceTransconductanceAmplificationFactorLoadoutputAllowablePlateDissipationAllowableScreenDissipationMaximumGrid-PlateCapacity2IAB2 TelefunkenAB2 Valvo4D1 LoeweDuo-DiodeReceiverTubeiod e4A.C.0.65 H.F. RectifierAC2 TelefunkenAC2 TelefAC2 TungsramTriodeReceiverTubeiod e4A.C.0.65 Audio and H.F. TubeOscillatorL.F. Amplifier250* -5. 5 6 12,000 2,500 30 2.0 1.7AF3 TelefunkenAF3 ValvoAF3 Tungsram4H2 LoeweVariablef uPentodeReceiv erTubeInd.4A.C. 0.65Variable mu H.F.iable250*250*-3-5 51001008.0151.2M10M1,80022,200 2.0 0.003AF7 Telefunken Pentode H.F. Tube 300* -2 100 3 20M 2,100 4,000 1.0 0.003AF7 ValvoAF7 TungsramReceiver Ind. 4A.C.0.65 Audio FrequencyAmplifier (ResistanceCoupling) - 0.94H1 Loewe Tube Audio TubeAL4 TelefunkenAL4 Telef4EI LoeweAZ1 TelefunkenAZ1 TelefTAZI TungsramA21 PhillipsVG5OO7 HogesDAF11Pentode Ind. 4A.C.Duo-DiodeRectifierTubeVariablemuPentodeDiode1.75 Output Pentode 250 -6 250 36 5 50,000 9,500 9 7.0004 l Full WaveRectifier1.2D.C. 0.05Variable muPentodeLow FrequencyAmplifierH.F. RectifierMaximum A.C. Input 500 Volts per Wave300 Volts per Plate150* 0 120 0.29~Maximum D.C,ate-- 60 M A100 M A,9 M 0. 6oCO•nmDCH11Trioderriode1.4D.C. 0.075OscillatorConvertorVariable mu=r DDD11 DuplexTriode1.2D.C. 0.1Output Tube 120150* -4.56perPlate14,000Figure 48.

SPECIFICATIONS OF VACUUM TUBES USED IN GERMAN ARMY SIGNAL EQUIPMENT—ContinuedI Plate Screen Maxi-Plate Grid Screen Current Current Allow- Allow- mumNUMBER TYPE CATHODE TYPE USE AND Voltage Voltage Voltage at Plate at Screen Plate Trans- Allow- able able Load Grid-AND RATING APPLICATION *Maxi- •Maxi- *Maxi- Voltage Voltage Resist- con- fication Plate Screen Output Platemum mum mum Indi- Indi- ance ductance cation Dissi- Dissi- .Cacatedcated pation pation pacityC.T. VOLTS AMP. VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS M A M A OHMS umhos u WATTS WATTS OHMS uufdsDFllG407 TungsramVariable 1.4 0.025 H.F. Tube ISO* 0 120 1M 700 105muPentode D.C. 120 -3. 5 10M 7Refer to RE074H406D ValveScreenRESQ94 Telefunken Tetrode 4 4M 700 280 0.02Receiver Dir. D.C. 0.062 H.F. Tube 200* .-2 80 45406 Tungsram TungHLZ/O.5aBallast TubeLDl Triode H.F. TubeLD2 Triode H.F. Tube(Trans-I.F. Stagesmitting)LG 1 Diode H.F. TubeLSSO Pentode H.F. Tube 2,100(Transmitting)RE074 Telefunken Triode Dir. 4 0.06 Audio and H.F. Tube 150* -9 3.5 11,000 900 10 4G407 Tungsram Receiver D.C. Low Frequency AmplifierH406 Valve Tube (Transformer Coupling)RE084 Telefunken Triode Dir. 4 Audio Tube 150* — 4 4 10,000 1.500 15 4.5LD408 Tungsram Receiver D.C. 0.08 Low Frequency AmplifierA408 ValveTubeRE084K Triode Dir. 4 R E 08 Audio Tube 120 11,000 1,200 13.5 3Low Frequency Amplifier(Transformer Coupling)RE134 Telefunken Triode Dir. 4 0.15 Output Triode 250 -17 . 12 2,000 3 12,000IA14 Tungsram Output D.C. 12*L413 ValveTubeREN904 Telefunken Triode Ind. 4 1.0 Audio and H.F. Tube 150* -9 3.5 11,000 904 10 1.5 2AG495 Tungsram Receiver A.C. Low Frequency AmplifierA4110 ValveTubeLA203 LoeweFigure 48 ontinlced).

SPECIFICATIONS OF VACUUM TUBES USED IN GERMAN ARMY SIGNAL EQUIPMENT—ContinuedNUMBER TYPE CATHODE TYPEAND RATINGUSE ANDAPPLICATIONPlateVoltage*MaximumGridVoltage*MaximumScreenVoltage•MaximumPlateCurrentat PlateVoltageIndicatedScreenCurrentat ScreenVoltageIndicatedC.T. VOLTS AMP. VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS M A M AOHMSumhosPlateResistanceTransconductanceAmqlificationFactoruAllowablePlateDissipationNATT!AllowableLoadScreen IutputDissioationNATT! 3HMSMaximumGrid-PlateCapacityuufds*RENS1264 TelefunkenAS4120 TungsramH4111D ValvoScreenTetrodeReceiverInd. 4A.C.1.0 Audio and H.F. TubeLow Frequency Amplifier(Resistance Coupling)200* -2 100 345 M2,0009001.00.006RES094Refer to H406DRES164 TelefunkenPP416 Tungsram L416DValvo LAP513 LoewePentode Dir. 4D.C.0.15 Output Tube 250 -11.5 80 12 1.960,00014,000310.000RGN2004 TelefunkenPV420O TungstramG2004 ValvoVG3512 Hoges1561 Philips VG420SatorDuo-Diode Dir. 4 2.0 Full Wave Rectifier Maxim um A.C. input 300 Volts Per Plate —Maximu m D.C.Output160 M.: \RL2P3 Telefunken Pentode Dir.1.9D.C. 0.28 H.F. Tube Oscillator 200* 150*75,0001,000752.00.1RL 2. 4P2RL2T2 Telefunken Triode Dir. 1.9 0.30 150*RL2.4T1RL 12P10RL 12T15RL12P3S TelefunkenPentode(Transmitting)12.65,0002,400122.018.5czo5COtoRS241V 3.8RS242E(71RS337 TelefunkenPentode(Transmitting)12Figure 48 (Continued).

E I 2:SPECIFICATIONS OF VACUUM TUBES USED IN GERMAN ARMY SIGNAL EQUIPMENT—ContinuedNUMBER TYPE CATHODE TYPEAND RATINGC.T.VOLTS AMP.USE ANDAPPLICATIONPlateVoltage*MaximumVOLTSGridVoltage*MaximumVOLTSScreenVoltage*MaximumVOLTSPlateCurrentat PlateVoltageIndicatedM AScreenCurrentnt CurrentVoltageIndicatedM AVOLTSumhosPlateResistanceTransconductanceAmplificationficationuAllowablePlateDissipationAllowableScreenDissipationLoadOutputWATTS WATTS OHMSMaximumGrid-PlateCapacityuufdsRVZP700 Teletunken Pentode Dir. 1.9 0.09 Audio and H.F. Tube ShortWave Tube200* 120* 1. 2M 900 850 1.00.01RVZPSOO Teleiunken Pentode Dir. 1.9 0.18 Audio and H.F. Tube 200* 150* 1M 900 800 1.50.01RV2. 4P700RVlZP2000 Telefunkcn Pentode Ind. 12.6 0.065 Audio and H.F. Tube ShortWave "Universal" ReceivingOutput PentodeRVlZP4000 Telefunken Peutode Ind. 12.6 0. 2 Audio and H.F. Tube "Universal"Receiving220* 140* 1.5M 1,500 2,000 1.0200* 125* 1.8M 2,300 4,000 1.50.0050.004STV280/80STV150/40ZVoltage Regulator0Figure 48 (Continued).GOS2rn

POWER SUPPLIES FOR GERMAN RADIO SETSINPUT OUTPUT ITYPE OFEQUIPMENTEXACT NAMEEXACT NAMEMENTPLATENO.FromVoltsConsumptionAmperesWatts*RevolutionsperminuteHigh voltageVolts Amperes Watts VoltsLow voltageAmperes(max)Watts*USED WITH (GERMANSETS)U. 1500 3-phase motor38O y22oA17.3309,100 2,9003,0001,0000.80.82.4008002 .4403721,000801000 w .1500 w .s .s .U. 100 orU. 100aU. 80aU. 30U. 30b33/40 3,000 1,000 0.24 240 12 7.3 87.6 loo w . s .35 420 2,600 800/-300 0.3/0.005 240 0 w. s. a16.5 195 3,200 330 0.35 115 12 33 39.6 30 W. S./24b-12012 144 4,000 400 0.175 70 30 w. s. aDynamotorsU. 20aU. 20a2U. 20a3II. 20aIS12-volt storagebattery1210 120 2,800 370 0.16 60 12 2.75 3320 w. s. c20 W. S. d12 W. S. bU. 15a14.6 175 5,500 320 0.19 60 4.8 2.6 12.515 W. S. E. a15 W. S. E. bU. 10 andV. lOalV. 5al6.7 80 3,500 350 0.115 4010 w. s. c10W. S. h7.5 90 4,000 330 0.140 46 5 1.2 6 5 W. S./24b-104E. U. al, a2, a3S. E. U. a2.35.22.i624,0008.0001303000.0260.070213.41212U. Kw. E. d. U. Kw. E. eRadiotelephone sets a. d. fGOGOVibrator unitsEWbEW c2-volt storagebattery2 1.513120.010 120.75 1.5 Torn. E. bEW d12-volt storage(Consumption fig- batteryures include re- EW eceiver, low-volt. < age) 2.4-volt storageEWfbattery122.42.5 3012100 0.0140.0240.0101 42.41 2.41.52.00.63.04.01.44Lw. E. aKw. E. a15 W. S. E.(Receiver only)Footnotes at end of table.Figure 49.

fry ' •POWER SUPPLIES FOR GERMAN RADIO SETS—Continuedu>09TYPE OFEQUIPMENTEXACT NAMEPLATE NOMENCLATUREFromINPUTOUTPUTConsumption Revo- High voltage Low voltageEutionsPerVolts Amperes watts* minuteVolts Amperes Watts Volts Amperes(“lax)watts*USED WITH (GERMANSETS)T5t65 330 0.140 46 5 1.265 W. S./24b-104.Pedal generatorsT15tFoot drivenSE%9AT20 t7020 W. S. c20 W. S. dHeavy engine generatorset a.4.stroke gasoline engine,4 cyl, 26 hp.Gasoline/oil............... . 1,500 220 220380 23 15kva3-phase a-c1,500 and 1,000 watt transmittersand workshop machines.Light engine generatorset ClOO.1,ooo a-c 300 12.89 0 100 W. S.Engine generatorsets(H. G. N. 100)Light engine generatorset c30(H. G.N.20~x1)Light enghie generatorset c20(H. G. N. 20a).Z-stroke gasoline engine,1 cyl, 1.8 hp.1-N pints per hour (oil/gasoline 3,000 350 0.3 105 IS 7l/25)105 Special sound ranging equipment.Engine generatorsetF(WG3000)4.stroke gasoline engine,2 cyl. 9 hp.Gasoline/oil........... . 1,500 220 a-c 13.6 3,000Engine generatorset (WG570a).Charging set C(LG650).P-stroke gasoline engine,1 cyl, 1.8 hp.1% pints per hour (oil/gasoline 3.oool/25).2.6 572IS/SO 15/1065 10650Storage battery charging withcharging board C.Engine generatorcharging setsCharging set D(LG3000).Charging set E(LG800).Engine generator(GG400).2-stroke gasoline engine1 cyl. 6.5 hp.l-stroke gasoline engine,1 cyl. 1.8 hp.2-stroke gasoline wgine. 1 cyl 0.9 hp.Sxpints per hour (oil/gasoline) . . 2,000 65 461% pints per hour (oil/gasoline 3,000 15 531/25)13A pints per hour (oil/gasoline 4.800 12 33.51/25) 16 253.ooa800400Storage battery charging (storagebattery charging vehicle (Kfz.42).Float charging of radio storagebattery while set is working(with charging board C).5Engine generator(GG600).12 25-5015.5600Footnotes at end of table.Figure 49 (Coathued)

POWER SUPPLIES FOR GERMAN RADIO SETS—ContinuedTYPE OFEQUIPMENTHand charging setsFromVoltsINPUTConsumptionAmperesWatts*High voltageOUTPUTVolts Amperes Watts VoltsLow voltageAmperes(madwatts*USED WUZTJ GERMANSETS)HLSa Hand driven 82 4 4 16 Charging 2- and 2.4-v&storage batteriesradioCharging rectifiers(with metal rcctification)T506bt 10/9/7/s 10 560TZOOtA-c mains110/12.5155/2203.6/3.22.6/1.812/2416/483.5 200T48t l/0.9/0.7/0.5 1 48Storage battery charging..Transmitter rectifiers(with metalrectification)T 15OOt 3.phase a-c mains 220/380 22/12.7 440/1.ooo/3,000 d-cT/lOOfT5/10/20/3otA-c mainsIlO/lSS/2208.8/7.86.3/4.43.2/2.82.3/1.61.0003302/0.5/0.9 4,100 24 36 864 1000 w . s.1500 w . s.0.30.3300100125127.51.21.590618100 w. s.5.. lo-. 20-, and JO-wattmittersEXACT NAMEPLATE NOMENTPLATENO-Revo-Eutiorperminutetrans-Receiver rectifierN A611n/1.50220/240lo o 0.045 4.5 2-2.4 2.5-8 4 Long- and short-wave receivers12 B 150 15 *150 15 *120Lead-acid storagebatteries12 B 10512 B 10012B6012 B 754B25Charged by enginegenerator chargisets or chargirectifiers1241063.5*10S*100*60*75*251241063.5$180120‘72*14For vehicle or radio useObsolete radio storage batteryCOCO2B38 8 *38 8 *16 For pack wireless sets•r-2B 19Footnotes at end of table.22 *19Figure 49 (Continued)22 *4 For modulated-light speech equipmentIT1

I2POWER SUPPLIES FOR GERMAN RADIO SETS—ContinuedINPUTOUTPUTTYPE OFEQUIPMENTEXACT NAME-PLATE NO-MENCLATUREFromConsumption Revo-High voltage Low voltage USED WITH (GERMANlutionsSETS)perVolts Amperes Watts* min- Volts Amperes Watts Volts Amperes Watts*ute(max)4.8 NC 10 4.8 3.5 *104.8 2.5 *124.8 NC 5 1.5 *5t *5 For pack vnreless sets, field tele-Charged by enginephony sets, RDF and intergeneratorchargingNickel-cadmium 2.4 NC 5812 *S8 12 *30 cept setssets or chargingstorage batteries.rectifiers2.4 NC 28 2.4 6 *28 / 2.4 6 *152.4 NC 20 2 *2O 2 *5B batteries90-volt 90 2 Pack wireless sets and receiversDIN/VDE 1600 0.021130-volt 30 0.5 Long and medium wave RDF setsGOField cells wet cell 1.5 0.3 *0.5 Field telephones and switchboardsEL 1.5 KZF 30 -n*For watts column, items marked with an asterisk (*) indicate ampere hours, and are for batteries only. ^Letter T designates German word "TRAGFAHIGKEIT," meaning carrying capacity.Figure 49 (Con:i:mrd)S

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-fc 30-451EquipmentNo.PARTICULARS OF RADIO EQtiiPMENT USED IN GERMANPAR TICULARS SELF-PROPELLED ARTILLERYAND ARMORED HALF-TRACKED VEHICLES,Designation of setsFrequencyrange(kilocycles)AerialRangeKilometers (Miles)Key VoiceFu. 1 Pack receive! "b " (Torn.E.b.) 100-6970 Receiver only.•RemarksFu. 2 Ultra short wave receiver "e" 27200-33300 Receiver only.(Ukw.E.e)Fu. 3 Ultra short wave receiver "dl" 42100-47800 Receiver only.(UKw.E.dl)Fu. 5 Medium wave receiver "c" 835-3000 Receiver only.(MW.E.c)Fu. 5 10 watt transmitter (10 W.S.c.)Ultra short wave receiver "e" 27200-33300 2-Meter Rod (Stationary) 6(3.7) 4(2.5)(UKw.E.e) (On the move) 4(2.5) 2(1.3) This is the standard tankequipment.Fu. 6 20 Watt transmitter (20 W.S.c) 27200-33300 2-Meter Rod (Stationary) 10(6.2) 8(5)Ultra short wave receiver "e" (On the move) 8(5) d(3.7) This equipment may(UKw.E.e)sometimes be found inCommander's tanks insteadof Fu. 5, whereextra range is required.The 20-watt transmitter* *c’ * 1s no longerissued.Fu. 7 20 watt transmitter (20 W.S.d) 2-Meter Rod 50(31) 50(31) This is standard groundaircooperation equipment.Ultra short wave receiver "dl" 42100-47800(UKw.E.dl)Fu. 8 30 watt transmitter "a" 1120-3000 Roof aerial (Stationary) 50(31) 15(9.3) With 8-meter winch mast(JO W.S.a) (On the move) 40(24.8) 10(6.2) and star aerial theMedium wave receiver "c" 835-3000 range increased to ap(Mw.E.c)proximately 93 miles(key). 31 miles (voice).Fu. 11 100 watt transmitter (100 W.S.) 200-1200 Roof aerial (Stationary) 80(49.6) 20(12.4) With 9-meter winch mast(On the move) 50(31) 10(6.2) and umbrella aerialPack receiver "b" (Torn.E.b) 100-6970 range can be increasedt0 apPrOximately 124miles (key). 43 miles(voice).Fu. 12 80 watt transmitter (SO W.S.a) 1120-3000 Roof aerial (Stationary) 80(49.6) 25(15.5) With 8-meter winch mastand star aerial range isMedium wave receiver "c" 835-3000 aPprOXimately 124(Mw.E.c)eiver (key). 43 miles(voice)Fu. 13 20 watt transmitter (20 W.S.c) 27200-33300 2-Meter Rod (Stationary) 10(6.2) 8(5) Fu. 13 is the same as Fu 6.(On the move) 8(5) (3.7) extra receiver "c". Seeremarks under Fu. 6.Fu. 15 Ultra short wave receiver "h" 23000-24950 Receiver only.(UKw.E.h)Fu. 16 10 watt transmitter "h" 2-Meter Rod w.E.h) 2(1.3) .h) equipment is similar(10 W.S.K) to ” 5 with differer.tfrequency range.Ultra short wave receiver "h" 23000-24950(UKw.E.h)Fu. 17 Pack set (transmitter/receiver) "h" 23000-24950 Rod 6(3.7) 2}^ (1.5) Voice only portable set,(Torn. Fu. h)ooo -24950 in the vehicle.Fu. 19 15 watt transmitter/receiver "a" 3000-7500 Roof aerial Range given as 19 miles(15 W.S.E.a) (key), 16 miles (voice),but these figures probablyonly hold goodwhen using rod aerialfixed at top of highmast (7 meters) (stationary).Fu.Sfir.f. Transmitter/receiver Fusprech. "f" 19997.5-21472.5 1.4 or 2 Meter Rod Joice only. Equipment(Stationary) — 5(3.1) includes loud smaker.(On the move) (1.3)Figure SO.VIII—41

UNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF GERMAN ARMY LINE COMMUNICATIONEQUIPMENT INCLUDING FIELD TELEPHONES AND SWITCHBOARDSNOMENCLATUREDIMENSIONSAND WEIGHTDESCRIPTIONREMARKSField Telephone 33l d 5”~11”x4”—-12 lbsThis general purpose telephone for local batteryoperation only, with magneto system for calling, isequipped with magneto system. Provision is madefor extra plug in headphones and testing of line andbell circuits, and two jacks connected in parallelwith line circuit for connection as exchange. It canbe connected to a post office exchange by a specialadaptor. The power supply is l.S volts; either inertor dry cells may be used.The instrument case is a bakelitemoulding approximately 0.2 inchthick. The lid has a self lockingfastener which is pressed to open.The shoulder strap has a hookon it from which the telephonehead set can be hung if requiredoperation of the instrument isconventional.The German WallTelephone forField Emplacements.15"x7^"x5H"A telephone of extremely sturdy construction andused apparently where moisture and vibration areexcessive. These telephones are local battery operated,mounted on concrete walls, and interconnectedthrough ducts.The telephone is of heavy waterproof constructionand the handset is connected to the main assemblyby a heavy rubber-covered waterproof cord. Thereceiver is covered with a rubber earpiece. Both themain assembly case aad the handset frame coverplate is fastened by. means of 4 bolts with triangularshaped heads recessed in each corner of the face.This case plate is attached to the body by chainsto prevent its falling off when loosened.The ringing generator of this set isthe same type as that employedin the field telephone 33; maybe employed by Allied troops inlocations where its qualities aredesirable.Endverslarker(f. Feldfnnsiwccher33)(Terminal Amplifierfor Field Telephone33)r w~7~ ~ x4~‘”A.C. Setr~"~6~~x3~” Battery SetAC powered unit: This is an audio-frequency amplifieremploying one triode tube, type RE 084. Thereceiver circuit of the field telephone 33 is openedand the incoming signal is fed to the grid of theamplifier. The amplified signal is returned to theearphone receiver. Power is supplied through atransformer, having high and low voltage windingsfor plate andfilamentsupplies. The plate supply isrectified (half-wave) by rectifier GLo and the filamentsupply by a full wave rectifier GLi.Battery operated unit: The principle of operation isvery nearly the same.This piece of equipment is anaudio-frequency amplifier toincrease the range operationof field telephone 33. Theymay be either powered by ACor by batteries. These sets areemployed in place of, or inconjunction with field repeaters.When using the AC set,the handset of the field telephone33 is used, but with thebattery set there is alreadyone provided.Line InterceptReceiver LE. 35.17j / ~“x13~“x11” - —78 lbs.Provision for tapping to several telephone or telegraphlines and monitoring any one required. NoContact need be made as a loop brought to withina foot of the line may be sufficient. The equipmentcan be used to pick up earth currents between twoearthed lines.The amplifier consists of a three-stage resistance capacitycoupled circuit using three pentodes, all RV2PSOO's. The amplifier has a gain of 72 db.Threefillersare incorporated in the set:(a) Storsieb: a specialfilterfor alternating the oddharmonics of 50 cycles where main interferencereduces intelligibility,(b) A band-pass filter normally in circuit,(c) Additional filter sections which reduce theband filter to 400 c/s-22OO c/s.A portable line intercept amplifier,complete with batteries; may beeither manpack or vehicle.IO-Line Exchange1*x14 % 6”—20 lbs.The exchange will take up to 10 single or double linecircuits. In case of mixed circuits (double andsingle lines to exchange) where the double lines arenumerically superior, the single wire circuits shouldbe connected via a cordless transformer, or viceversa if single lines preponderate.Subscribers lines may be connected either direct tothe terminals 1 a.b. to 10 a.b. on top of the exchangeor through a connection rack; or via 30-wayplug and line system to a line terminal unit.The exchange is roughly comparablewith the British 10-lineU.C. switchboard, although it issmaller and more compact.Figure 51.VMI--42

UNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF GERMAN ARMY LINE COMMUNICATIONEQUIPMENT INCLUDING FIELD TELEPHONES AND SWITCHBOARDS—ContinuedNOMENCLATUREDIMENSIONSAND WEIGHTDESCRIPTIONREMARKSGerman 10 LineCordless Exchange(Exact GermanNomenclatureunknown)This set was designed for common battery operation,the l’ I H”x7~“-- being marked negative and positive,c h an ge used for local hattety operation.It accommodates 9 lines besides operator's phone andc lature only two conversations at one time.Provision for night alarm circuit has also been made.Toggle switches for cross connection of the subscribersare utilized in conjunction with line drops whichare located about the keys. May be paralleled withsimilar type of exchange.Is well made, easy to use and maintain,but has the disadvantage ofbeing unable to accommodatemore than two calls at one time,though ideal for conference calls.Small telephoneelephoneBox (Verntittlungskastchen)One line switchboard unit with an attachable visualindicator used with other such units to serve fromtwo xc han g e telephone subscribers.The set is well built and sturdy.Its simplicity and portabilityare outstanding characteristics.sBecause of its weight and size obviouslycould only be used infixed installations. Is veryKleine to the OB 37 with theexception of two principle differencesin circuit.The small fortressswitchboard OB36(Kleine Festungsvermittiung)48 ff x39"x8 ff —The switchboard is extremely heavy and housed in afort r es s brackets are provided at the back ofthe box OB fastening the switchboard on a wall.Can accommodate 30 lines and 12 interconnectionsare possible.Provision has been made for connecting ten of the 30lines on the OB 36 to common battery trunks.(Lines 21 to 30 being fitted with a 4 mfd condenser).Large Field Switchboardfor 60 linesThis is made up of three types of standard sectionsSw i in tch- until desired size is reached.Is ine s for local battery operation with groundreturn or metallic circuit. By adding a commercialadapter, connections may be established with civilexchanges using C.B. or automatic dial system. Ismade up of 4 sections: (1) assembly "A" includingplug cord holders and conference jack panel, (2)answering jack panel unit (ten jacks). (3) confrrencecall panel, (4) adapter for use with automaticdial exchange.Figure 51 (Continued).With the use of multiple jack fieldthis board can be built up to 300lines. Knowing this, whether theterm 60-line switchboard is a gpliable as a separate piece ofequipment is a matter for furtherconsideration.VIM—43

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF GERMAN ARMY LINE COMMUNICATIONSEQUIPMENT INCLUDING SWITCHBOARDS AND KINDRED EQUIPMENTNOMENCLATUREDIMENSIONSAND WEIGHTDESCRIPTIONREMARKS10-300 Line Switchboard)perating Unit9W"x13"xZlM"—S2 lbs.0 Line Unit4x"xi3"x 7" —11 lbs.0 Line Unit15~ % 13"x 7" —37 lbs.00 Line UnitlS~"x13"x 7" —31 lbs.50 Line UnitlS~"x13"x 7" —27 lbs.Gurcbing UnitZ$$"x13"x 7" — 5 lbs.Xaling Unit7" ~13 % 7” —12 lbs.superimposing Unit’7x"x13"x 7 —21 lbs.The apparatus consists of several units built up toform the whole exchange: the operating unit, 10line answering unit, 50-line answering unit, 100line multiple unit, GO-line multiple unit, 10-jackbunching unit, dialing unit, and superimposingunit.Line connections are made at the rear of each unitby a 30-way connector with a 30-pin plug at eachend.rhe drop-flap indicators are automatically restoredwhen the associated jack has a plug inserted. Anight alarm is also provided.Very neat, light and compact,probably used in line ofcommunication formations.Teleprinter Terminal UnitIncorporating SingleChannel V.F. Equipment.(Springschrcibanschlussgeral!4"x21"~9~"—93 lbs.The terminal unit and teleprinter are operated from110-220 volts AC (total consumption 150 watts).Provides for single and double current working(simplex or duplex) and remote control operation.(VF working.) Intercommunication between teleprinterand similar equipment over a , or radiolink.Used in line of communicationcompanies.Teleprinter Terminal UnitIncorporating SingleChannel V. F. Equipment.(SBringschreibanschlussgeral‘)24"~21"~94~"—96 Ibs.This is for simple working only and operates on thesame type of power supply as above.Both types can be workedwith American and Britishteleprinter with the inclusionof their respective T.T.Units. For line of communicationpurposes.Telewriter Tbs/24a-32‘7~“xlS~"x9~"-—57 lbs.Sendsfigures1 to 9 and 0, the characters +, T h e ?,and the 26 letters of the alphabet. Works directlyinto a telephone tine. Field telephone can beplugged in for speech working. A 900-cycles filtercan be switched in to reduce interference. Whenthe interference is too great, 900/c/s morse codecan be sent and received on headphones. 12-ptsocket on panel is for connection to radio setthrough an intermediate unit. Tube system 90Cc/s sender oscillator—Ret amplifier—Ret rectifierspeed control. All tubes are type RV12P400.Power supply 12-volt storage battery to motorcoupled to dynamo for H.T. for tube.The mechanism of the set issimple but precision made,and the keyboard is continentaltype.Telewriter Tbs/T 36 L.O.(Tape Teleprinter)Pernschreiber!O"x16M"x12"—63 %lbs.Ihe receiving and transmitting mechanisms are similarto those in the American Teletype machinedescribed in detail in the Teletype Manual No. 11.All cables are permanently attached to the teleprinter.Schematic and wiring diagrams will befound mounted on the meter base plate.Associated equipment T.T.U.,e.g. (Springschreibarschussgerat).Speech ScramblerYK III b.17"X13"X9’(approx.)—70 lbs.These are used to provide two-way security on awire or radio-telephone circuit. It is powered by a2-volt storage battery and one, 90-volt dry battery.The set is compactly built and is very sturdyin construction. The individual circuit componentsare separated according to their functions andcompletely scr-eened. 3RV2P800 are used. Two ofthese are used as audio amplifiers, one on each sideof the two-way circuit. The other is used as a2000-cycle audio-oscillator. If not required thscrambler circuit may be switched on and the inputand output circuits directly connected.Use for security purposes overtelephone lines. Is portableand can be carried by 1man.Figure 52.VIII—44

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IDETAILED DESCRIPTION OF GERMAN ARMY LINE COMMUNICATIONSEQUIPMENT INCLUDING SWITCHBOARDS AND KINDRED EQUIPMENT—ContinuedNOMENCLATUREronschreiberModels b and blDIMENSIONSAND WEIGHTDESCRIPTIONREMARKSth e with the exception of one employing a High speed recording apparatus.schreiber speed control system are identical.They are b l physically into two sub units The Germans have designedknown respectively as the Lanfwerke and the and manufactured a seriesVerstarker. It offers the facility of recording an of magnetic tape recorders.o n on a magnetic ribbon. During the recordingprocess, the quality and ware of the signal models known: they are:There are in existence 2 otherimpressed on the tape may be monitored. Provisionhas also been made for playback and for rea spring-driven recorder forthe Tonschreiber c which iswinding and wiping thetape used. This recording rough field use; and thetape is made of paper; one side of it has been coveredwith a coating of material having high magstudio type device.AEG Type K4. which is anetic properties.The apparatus was designed to he supplied from ACmains. DC cannot be used. While the voltage mayvary from 110 to 250 volts the permissable frequencyvariation is not known.German Teleprinter SWBD(T39)Vermittlungsschrank21 ff xX8^rf x8M # —50 lbs.This teletypewriter switchboard is housed in a metalcabinet with folding tubular legs. It has four pairsof 39 ) for handling simultaneous complete cirlungss c hran k for terminating one to tenteletypewriters. The construction is rugged andwill withstand considerable abuse, although it isnot moisture proof; the wiring is neat and sturdy.The answering and calling cords are each coiled onan individual wound reel. This method of storingexcess cord lengths is same as that employed onthe German ZO-line, local battery telephoneswitchboard.Line of communication companies.German SWBD. 20 line.German Rdaiskasten T39.Teletype Repeater.Leitungsabschlusskasten(Line Terminal Equipment)Figure 52 (Continued)VW—45

IPERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIO SETS 2USED IN THE GERMAN ARMY GROUND FORCESNOMEN- FREQUENCY TYPE OF CIRCUIT AND TUBES POWER POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKSCLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL (a) Send OUTPUT CONSUMPTION AERIAL ANDa. Send RANGE IN (b) Receive (watts) (a) Send WEIGHTb. Receive MILES (b) Receivec. CrystalTransceiver a. 3-5 C.W. 25 a. MO-PA .65-C.W. a. 2-volt storage battery 12-ft. (max.) rod 18"xl5H"x8 / ' Short range com- This set is identicalTorn.Fu.bl b. 3-6.7 R/T 10 RV2 P8OO-RL2P3 .35-R/T. b. 130-volt H.T. dry bat- or 50-ft. hori- —43 lbs. munication by with the Torn. Fu.b. RF-M-LO-IF-DET-AF tery. zontal wire and all arms except f. except for fre6RV2 P800 counterpoise. infantry. quency rang! ofsender.Transceiver a. 33.8-38 C.W.:9 a. MO-B-PA-MOD to PA 1 a. 2-volt storage battery 6-ft. rod (section- CommunicationTorn.Fu.aZ. b. 33.8-38 R/T :4 grid 2,RV2P8000-RLZT and 130-volt H.T. dry al) or wire on —37 lbs. from infantry(Mod is rec. AF Tube). battery. masts. regt. (brigade)b. RF-M-LO-IF-REAC: b. to battalion,DET-AF 6RV2 P800 • and from battalionto corps.Transceiver a. 4.5-6.7 Same as for Torn.Fu.bl. CommunicationsTorn.Fu.f. n. from field artillery troops totheir observaition posts.Transceiver a. 3-5 C.W.: 60 a. MO-PA (2 tubes in paral- 15-C.W. Pedal generator-, or 12-volt Inverted L, 40-ft. For fire control inSE 469A. A. R/T ~20 lel) RS242-RE084. 7-R/T. storage battery and dy- long, 10-f thigh —44 lbs. artillery units-b. RF-Fc-2,IF-DET-AF namotor. (6-volt battery with two 20-ft.4,RESO94-,2 REO84. and 150-volt H.T. bat- counterpoisetery for receiver only). cables.Transceiver a. 90-110 R/T : 3/4 a. MO-PA .15 a. Storage battery type 2.4 32"-vertical rod; 14"xl3K"x7" Short range pa- This set is a modernFeldfu.6. b. 90-110 b. KF-DET-AF (Super- b. NC28 driving an inter- later models —28 lbs. trol set, used pack set. The tubes 5regenerative) . nal vibrato pack. have laminated by infantry in used are of small C ORV2.4 P7OO-RL2.4T1-RL2. steel tape. forward areas. dimensions and4P2. the whole set iscompactly constructed.TheFeldfu c, is a similarset covering adifferent frequencyrange.They are distinguishedby a colorcode, the "b" havming red markingsand th« "c' v green.Fyigure 53.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIO SETSUSED IN THE GERMAN ARMY GROUND FORCES—ContinuedNOMEN- FREQUENCY TYPE OF CIRCUIT AND TUBES POWER POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKSCLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL (a) Send ' OUTPUT CONSUMPTION AERIAL AN Da. Send RANGE IN (b) Receive (watts) (a) Send WEIGHTb. Receive MILES (b) Receivec. CrystalTransceiver a. 24.1-25 R/T-2 a. MO (Rec osc)-PA (Rec 8 a. 12-volt storage battery 6x-ft. rod con- Il"x8"x6" Inter-communi-Fusprech a. a. output (Grid MOD (Rec t o necte d vi a —15 lbs. cation between1st AF) to PA. b. dynamotor SEUa. feeder. armored recon-b M-OSC-2,IF-DET-2,AF- 12 volts @ .5 amps. naissance carsI1Transceiver a. M.C.W. a. MO-Anode Modulator 40-60 m/W. a. 2-volt storage battery, Saw tooth reflect- 13%"x8w"x8$ a " For quasi opticalSEC2T b.454-508 R/T 12S. DS310 (acorn) RL2T2. and two 90-volt H.T. ive aerial. —24 lbs. point to pointb. Quench-DET-AF dry batteries, tapped at working. NotRL2T2-DS31O (acorn) 9, 60, 90, 130, and 180 known whichRV2P80O. volts, troops “se it.b.Transceiver a. 2.5-3.5 C.W.:15 a. MO-PA. a. 2.4-voit storage battery On move whip 15"xl3"x7" As a pack set on This set is provided•Torn.Fu.g. b. 2.5-3.5 R/T : 8 2.RL24P3. and built in vibrator. aerial S-ft. long the move or as with "Break" inb. RF-FC-IF-DET-AF b. with loading a ground sta- working.5,RV2,4P70O/coil at base. tion.Transceiver a. 28-33 4-ft. rod. BY troops sup- Main features dis-Feldfu.f. b. 28-33 Same as for Feldfu b. porting ar- tinguishing thismored fighting set from the Feldvehicles.jab. are:(1) tuning is continuous,not in fixedchannels; (2) acrialbase is tilted sothat aerial is 40 °out of vertical; (3)a large white spot.Transceiver a. 120-156 R/T 11 .15 watts a. 2-volt storage battery. Rod: short, 2 ft.; 14"xl3"x4%" By infantry. The name of this set GOFeldfu.al. b. 120-156 type2B19. long, 6 ft. —26% lbs. is also abbreviated GOb.. and 90-volt H.T. batteryto Fusp al.Transceiver a. 19.9975- R/T: 2 Same as for Fusprech.a. 4'7"-vertical rod. Intercommunica- This set is practi-Fusprech.f. 21.4725. tion between cally ident~cal withh. s?lf-propelled the Fusprech.a. exgans.cept that the Fusprech.o.has a re-CelYer fire control.TransceiverFtisprech.d.a. 23.11-24.01a.^ Transceiver b. 1.5-2.3 C.W.: IS Same as for Torn.Fu.bl. For artillery obyTorn.Fu.c. b. 1.5-2.3 R/T : 7 ' and Fu.f. servation.I$w-e 53 (Continued).

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR GERMAN GROUND RADIO TRANSMITTERSNOMEN FREQUENCY TYPES OF CIRCUIT AND POWER POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKSCLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL TUBES OUTPUT CONSUMPTION AERIAL AND WEIGHTa. Send RANGE IN (a) Send (watts)(a) Sendb. Receive MILES (b) Receive( t R&ivec. CrystalTransmitter a. .95-3.15 C.W.: 36 a. MO-PA 5-7 a. Pedal generator. Storage Horizontal wire. Regimental and Divi- A general medium5WS/2&b-104 R/T : 10 2, RS 241 battery and dynamotor vehicular rod. —52 lbs. sional nets may be frequenc y lowU.S. A.L., or gasoline mo- Counterpoise employed for vehic power transmitter.tor generator. 3.8 Volts 50 ft. long. ular or ground use.@4 1.2 amps. 300-330 volt® . 14 amps.2:I1Transmitter a. 27.2-33.3 M.C.W.:4 a. MO-MOD-PA 6. 5 a. 12-volt storage battery 6?+ft. rod on 7%"xlZM"x7" Armored vehicles. This is similar to the10W.S.C. R/T :2K RL12, P.55-RV12, (10 Max.) and dynamo U-10AL 12 move. Mast —22 Ibs. , Generally tank J0W.S.b. but forP.4000-RV 12.P.volts Q 2 amps. 350 volts sections andunits. Usually in calibration and fre35 . @ 100 m/a. gear provided Commander's tank. quency range IOW.for ground S.b. frequenc yuse. range is 23-24.95imcs.Transmitter a. 1-3 C.W. a. MO-PA 8 (Can be a. Pedal generator, engine 66.ft. "L" type 20*xl2*xll* Regimental command8W.S. R/ T 2, Rl 12 TI5 reduced generator or 12 volt star- or 33-ft. T 48% lbs. and reconnaissancet o a age battery and dynamo- type. nets.power) tor. 12 volts @ 1.25amps.350 volts @ 75 m/a.Transmitter a. 27.2-33.3 M.C.W. -3 a. MO-D-MOD-P! 20 a. 12.volt storage battery *$+ft.— cif%-ft. 19"xS~"xlO" Tank formations gen- A similar set is the2OW.S.C. R/T -2 (PA-Push pull) and dynamotor U-ZOA. whip type. —30 Ibs. erally. 2OW.S.d. but which5, RL 12 TIS U-2OA2 or U-2OA3. 12 has a frequencyvolts @ 2.75 amps. 370 range of 42.1-47.8.volts @ 130 m/a.Transmitter a. 25-27 R/ T 20 a. 12-volt storage buttery 8-ft. vertical rod By sound ranges in Very similar to ?O.W.20W.SM. to dynamotor U-2OA3. via feeder. —35 lhs. artillery units. S.C. except for modulntorcontrol andindicator.Transmitter a. 3-6 C.W.: SOAKS 25. R/T : 15a. MO-D-MOD-P! 25(P&Push pull).5 RL 12 TI5.a. Engine driven or pedaldriven generator. 12.5volts @ 2.5 amps. 350volts @ 250 m/a.33-ft. wire onone 33-ft.mast with 4.33-ft. counterpoise.17~"XL2"X14~~"—60 lbs.In infantry divisionsand artillery regiments.o3COCOr FigureTransmitter a. 1.1-3.01 C.W.: 5030W.S.O. (3 Bands) R/T :16a. MO-MOD-PA (2 30tubes in parallel)(Mod: 2 tubes inparallel) 2 RL12.P 35-2, RV 12P.2OOO1.RL12TI5.a. 12 volt storage batteryto dynamotor U-30 b.54.Vehicular rodor roof antennae.Openwire antennae.19"19N"x9~~—42 lbs.Small signal units andsignal troops in armoredcorps.Medium powered fieldtransmitter. Thisset is identical withthe 8OW.S.a. as regardsits circuit.o

iPERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR GERMAN GROUND RADIO TRANSMITTERS—--continuedINOMEN FREQLIENCY rYPES OF CIRCUIT AND POWER POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKSiCLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL TUBES OUTPUT CON$J~~TION AERIAL AND WEIGHTa. Send

JOOiPERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR GERMAN GROUND RADIO TRANSMITTERS—continuedNOMENCLATUREFREQUENCYRANGE (mcs)a. Sendb. Receivec. CrystalTYPES OFSIGNALRANGE INMILESCIRCUIT ANDTUBES(a) Send(b) ReceivePOWEROUTPUT(watts)POWER SUPPLY ANDCONSUMPTION(a) Send(b) ReceiveTYPE OFAERIALDIMENSIONSAND WEIGHTALLOCATIONREMARKSTransmitter~5ooW S.a.a. O.l-66(4 Bands)C.W. : 725M.C.W.: 725R/T : 18-34Ca. As for 1000 W.S.b. Except thatP.A. tubes areRS 239.1.500a. Dynamotor to V-1500AC line or M.G. gas engineset.80.ft. mast with6 or 12.ft.spoke "urnbrellas."5'2"x3'3"~6 a/"—1430 Ibs.For communicationbetween corpsground headquarters.and army staff.A d-stage transmitterfor installation in^ motor cars and• fixed stations. It is* divided into several‘com*o”e”ts forspeedy removal assemblyand replacement.Transmitter 60W(Jamming)a. 18.75-61.25C.W.Freq. Mod.a. MO/D-PA(Freq. Mod.) 3.FE06/40-(EL 2)60AC single pllase, 50 cycle.110 volts.2O"xl2M"xl2K"A special type oftransmitter designedfor j amming,Transmitter 600H.(S.W. Jamming)a.(a)1775-17.85(b)lS. l-15.35(c)11.7-11.9(d)9.5-9.7(e) 7. 2-7.3(f)6.-6.2M.C.W.Freq. Mod.a. MO / D-(Freq.MOD/PA) 2.PE 06/40-PB3/10006,004a. AC three phase, 50 cycle,180/200 volts.75"x27"~27"—880 Ibs.This special S.W.jamming apparatu:is made in 6 mod&corresponding tothe 6 models asshown in column 2.Each band has avariable frequency.Figure 54 (Contirkued).m

IMARCH 1945 UNCLASS\FlEDTM-E 30-451PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS FOR RADIO TRANSMITTERS USED ASGERMAN ARMY MESSAGE CARRIER EQUIPMENTNomenclatureorDesigOngtionNo mof:hannelsFrequencyRangeKcs.CarrierFreq;nciesKcs.RingingFreqquencyMax. LineAttenuation..b . and Nepern2mm C.OpenWireianges (Kmand Miles)3 mm CuOpen WireFieldCable(I-K)T.f. a 1 3.4-8.2 5. 8 sOO/20 4.O np. 400 K”l. 520 Km. 25-60 Km.34.76 db. 250 Miles 325 Miles l&37 MilesT.f. b 1. 1 3.5-7.5 5. 5 500 3.6 np. 400 Km. 500 Ktn. 25-50 Km.31.28 db. 250 Miles 325 Miles 16-31 MilesT.f. b 2. 1 9.0-13.0 11.0 500 3.6 np. 320 Km. 400 Km. 15-30 Km.31.28 db. 200 Miles 250 Miles 9-19 MilesT.f. b 3. 1 16.5-20.5 18.5 500 3.6 np. 220 Km. 280 Km.31.28 db. 137 Miles 175 MilesT.f. b 4. 1 22.0-26.0 24.0 500 3.6 np. 160 Km. 200 Km.31.28 db. 100 Miles 12.5 MilesE. 1. Same as for T.f. a.E. 2. 1 3.4-8.2 5. 8 SOO/ZO 2.0 np. 230 Km. 290 Km. l(t30 Km.17.38 db. 144 Miles 181 Miles 6-19 MilesE. 3. 1 3.7-10.0 6.4; 10.3. 500 3.75 np 350 Km. 4.50 Km. 18-45 Km.32.49 db. 219 Miles 281 Miles 11-28 MilesT. 1. 3 6.6-28.2 6.3; 9.4; 12.9 500/40 4.0 np. 270 Km. 350 Km.20.7; 24.4;28.5 34.76db. 169 Miles 219 MilesT. 3 3 8.8-30.4 7.7: 10.9; 14.3 500/20 4.0 np. 270 Km. 350 Km.19.8; 23.7; 27.7 34.76db. 169 Miles 219 MilesT.f.R. (Rundf) 1 34.M2.8 42.8(Broadcasting)MEK 8. 6.0-60.0 6:9:12:15:18 4.0 np. 2.50 Km.21:27:36:39: 34.76db. 156 Miles42:45:48:515457LINE EQUIPMENT—German Carrier Equipment (Army and Commercial)The German carrier equipment, both commercial and army is listed above. It is similar to the America” in design, channel frequencies, and “seDiagrams (not shown here) authenticate this, and show that the carrier practice in line and repeater set “p are practically identical.Within the German army the most common sets for field “se are the Tragerfrequensgmat a (Tf.0.) and the Tragerfrequemgemt b (T.f.6). includingbl. b2, b3, and b4. Other sets in “se by the Germans are: Mehrfach (MEK) MC. MK, Tl, T3, El, EZ, and E3; the MG and MEK carrier Systemsare apparently more recent additions.The "L" and "U" carrier systems for cable. are used by the German PO. The "L" system is installed on lightly loaded cable, and the "U" oc- non-loaded cable. The German broadcasting carrier system is the Tragerfrequenzgnat Rundfunk (TfR’-—"Carries Broadcasting,"Differentiation is made with multiple Tf (carrier) systems between single channel systems (transmission channels for EW a”d WE traffic lie directlynext to one another, as in the case of Sets T.f.a. and T.f.h.) and UOUP systems (the channels for each carrier direction are adjacent and the>form therefore, two separate groups. e.g. sets MEDK and MG).Abbreviations and Nomenclature:—a. Carries Equipment:—•(1) T.f. (a or b), Tragerfrequenzgevat. Carrier Frequency Set.(2) MEK.. Mehrfaach-Einzelkanal. Multiple Channel.(3) T.f,R., Trogerfrequenz Rundfunk. Carrier Frequency Broadcasting.(4) E (1, 2, 3); T (1. 3); MG; M (1-7); MK EK; L; U:-—Meanings not known.On the chart above, kilometers are converted to miles and nepers (standard German power level ““it) to d&b&.1 neper equals. 8.6858 decibels.1 decibel equals. 0.11513 nepera.' Figure 55.VIII—52

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS FOR RADIO TRANSMITTERS USED ASGERMAN ARMY MESSAGE CARRIER EQUIPMENT—ContinuedNomenclatureorDesignationNo.No.ChannelsFrequencyRangeKcs.CarrierFrequenciesKc.RingingFrequencyMax. LineAttenuation,db. and Nepers2mm C.te nWire3anges (Kn1.and Miles)3 mm CuOpen WireFieldCable(FFK)MGM 1M 2 (M3)M 4 (M5)M 6 (M7)MK (K 1)MK (K 2)MEFEKErickson(12 Kanal)L-(Kabel-System)DRPU-(Kabelsystem)DRP15. 48-156 "> 00/20 4.0 np. 100 Km.34.76db.62 Miles3 5.8-38.44 5.2-39.73 12.2-29.74 8.7-43.7 •5 57.6-142.4 60:68:76:84:92: 4.0 np.108:116:124: 34.76db.132:1405 . 53.6-138.4 56:64:72:80:88 4.0 np.104:112:120: 34.76 db.128:136:;. 10.3-57.6 10:20:30:40:5015:25:35:45:55l 41.5-54.5 44:52.12 49.3-154.41 3.3-5.8 612 12.3-60.0Figure 55 (Co&ued).VIII—53

NOMENCLATUREReceiverFu.HE.c.ReceiverK.w.E.a.FREQUENCYRANGE (mcs)a. Sendd. Receivec. Crystalb. 3.0-25.8(4 bands)b. .9&10.2PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR GERMAN INTERCEPT,TYPESOFSIGNALC.W.M.C.W.R/TC.W.R/TGENERAL PURPOSE, AND SPECIAL PURPOSE RADIO RECEIVERSCIRCUIT AND TUBES(a) Send(b) Receiveb. 2,tiF- M-LO-3,IF-DET-OBFO-AF10. RV 2P800b. ZRF-M-LOJ,1F- D ET-BFO-AVC-AF.11, RV 2PBCtOPOWER SUPPLY ANDCONSUMPTION(a) Send(b) Receiveb. 2-v& storage battery and9Qvolt H.T. dry battery.2-volts @ 1.7 amps.90-volts @ 12 m/a.b. Z-volt storage battery and90-&t H.T. dry battery, orConverter unit EU.dt or mainunit NA6.TYPE OFAERIALDIMENSIONSANDWEIGHT18"xl4"xlO»—56 lbs.27"xlOM*Jtl3M"—91 lbs.ALLOCATIONIntercept service. Monitoringfor security.For stationary or semimobileservices.All arms.REMARKSIt is very difficult to service.Is one of a series of fourintercept receivers.I1ReceiverUKw.E.f.b. 42-48M.C.W.R/Tb. RF-FC-IF-DET-AF.5. RV2-4P700b. 2.4-volt storage battery forinternal H.T. vibrator.6^-ft. vertical rodwhen used as packset.14*xl2K"x6H*—17 lbs.The associated sender is the20 W.S.d. When used alonethe aerial base and rod aremounted on top of the case.RecekerTerm Eb.b. .096-7.095(8 bands)C.W.M.C.W.R/Tb. 2. RF-DET-AF.4, RV 2P800b. 2-volt storage battery and9Cwolt H.T. battery, or 12volt storage battery and vibratorunit E.W.c.2-v&s @ 0.75 amps.12-volts @ 1 amp.9H"xl4M"x8M"—29 lbs.General purpose receiver.ReceiverL.M.W.H.E./24b316b. .075-3.333(5 bands)C.W.M.C.W.R/Tb. RF-M-LO-IF-DET-AF.(RF-M-IF-RF?? 094)(LO-DET-AF RE 084K)b. 4.8~volt storage battery; four30-volt or 9cl-volt plus one 30volt H.T. batteries.4.8~volt @ .45 amps.100 volt @ 18 m/a.Open wire and counterpoise.18^*xl5K"x9*'—44 lbs.Intercept receiver.This set is an old design andis being replaced by interceptreceivers Fu.H.E.a.and b.ReceiverFu.H.E.d.b. 25 60(4 bands)C.W.M.C.W.R/Tb. 2. RF-M-LO-3.1F-DET-BFO2,AF All RV2 P800b. 2.volt storage battery and90-&t H.T. dry battery.(2.4volt storage battery maybe used after internal adjustmentto set.)15-ft. open wire onsectional mastsand counterpoise.18"xl4"xl0"—56 lbs.Intercept receiver forU.H.F. signals.This receiver is similar inevery respect to the Fu.H.E.c. except in frequencyrange and number oftubes.ReceiverWR1P.b. .15-15.5M.C.W.R/Tb. FC-2,IF-DET/AF-Driver Class 'B' OutputDCH 25-2,DF25-DAC25DC25-DDD25 DF26b. AC or DC mains supply 9Ch250. Volts (voltage need notbe known), or two . drycells ENL DIN VDE. 1210plus 9o-volt A.T. batteryfrom mains 0.25 amps.—57 lbs.For broadcast reception.With the aid of a microphoneit can be used fororal transmission of orders.Can be used as a microphoneamplifier.ReceiverUKW.E.e.b. 27.2-33.3M.C.W.R/Tb. RF-M-LO-I. IF-DET-AF7 RV 12 P4000.1. 12-volt storage battery todynamotor EUa2.634-ft. vertical rod.12H"x8"x7"—22 lbs.Communication throughouta tank battalion.Figure 56.

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR GERMAN INTERCEPT,GENERAL PURPOSE, AND SPECIAL PURPOSE RADIO RECEIVERS—Continued2:oINOMENCLATUREFREQUENCYRANGE (mcs)a. Sendb. ReceiveC. CrystalTYPES CIRCUIT AND TUBES POWER SUPPLY AND TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATIONOF (a) Send CONSUMPTION AERIAL ANDSIGNAL (b) Receive (a) Send WEIGHT(b) ReceiveREMARKSReceiverM.W.E.c.b. .835-3C.W. b. RF-M-LO-Z, IF-BFO/ b. la-volt storage battery tc Open wire or roof lZ%"x8"r7” Communication receivelM.C.W. Calibrator DET-AF (2 dynamotor EUa.1. 2. or 3. aerial. 24 lbs. for medium wavebandR/T tubes in push pull) 12-volts 0 45 amperes.ALL RV12 P200ReceiverFv.H.E.u.b. .5-25(5 bands)C.W. b. 1 9-tuhe superhetrodyne. b. As for Fu.H.E.c. 17"X1.3~~"XlO Intercept services.M.C.W.—56 lbs.R/TVery similar to Fu.H.E.c.but for frequency rangeand circuit.ReceiverL.W.E.e.b. .072-1.525(5 bands)C.W. b. RF-M-LO-Z, > b. Z-volt storage battery and 27"x1.3W"xlO~ Long range communica.R/T IF-DET-BFO-AF 90-volt dry H.T. battery 01 —87 lbs. tion at army and com8, RV2 P 800 convertor unit E.U.O, or mand hq.. mains unit NA 6. /iimilar in construction toK.W.E.a. except that theK.W.E.a.has fewer stagesand no A.V.C.ReceiverSpez.445b.b. .1-6.7C.W. b. RF-REG DET-2.AF b. 4.8~volt nickel-iron storage Lo&g wire or rod. 18"x14"~8%" General purpose receiver.R/T 4, REO 74 battery and 90-volt H.T. dry —55 lbs.battery.ReceiverUKW.E.dt.b. 42.1-47.8M.C.W. b. RF-M-LO-J. b. Dynamotor E.U.a.2 or 130. 6 $ +ft. rod connected lS~"xlO"x8" By signal and armoredR/T IF-2nd DET-AVC-AF vo!t dry H.T. batteries and via feeder. —19 Ibs. troops for ground-air9 RV12 P2000 l&volt storage battery. cooperatiopJery accessible for servicing.ReceiverUKW.E.h.b. 23-24.95M.C.W. b. RF-M-LO-2, IF-DET-AF b. 12.volt storage battery to 6%ft. rod. 1LZ%“"x8"x6~" -4rmored troops in carsR/T 7, RV12 P4000 dynamotor E.U.a. 1. 2, or 3. 22 % Ibs. and assault guns.model G.Jery similar to the U.KM’.e. except for frequencyrange.Receiver D/FGroundL.M.W.P./240-315.b. .075-3.333(5 bands)C.W. b. RF-M-LO-IF-DET-BFO- b. 4.8~volt storage battery (NC- Goniometer loops, !l"x14~"x8~" Used by subsection of in-M.C.W. AF 2,RES094,-RE084K- IO); four 30-volt or one go- about 1 square mr- —51 lbs. tercept company.R/T RES094,-2,RE084K volt PIUS one 30-volt H.T. ter each. and auxrespectively. dry battery. iliary aerial (l-me4 2 %volts @I .45 amps. ter rod or 3-meter100~volts 0 18 m/a.horizontal wire).The circuit is the same as theinterceptreceiver L. Mw.HE/Z46-316.Receiver(RadioControlledTank) SetB4Fu.E6.b. 24.6c. CrystalR/ T b. FC-IF-IF,AVC, b. Dynamotor with ll-volt stor- 4-ft. flexible rod. 7.1'xlO.6"x3.1" For radio controlled tankDET-AF-AF age battery. In conjunction with anECH 11-EF 13-EBF 11-2,audio filler unit .whichEF12.is not listed here.I01Figure 56 (Continued).

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIOS ANDEMERGENCY TRANSMITTERS USED IN GERMAN AIRCRAFT2TOoiNOMEN FRECLATURE QUENCYRANGE (mcs)a. Sendb : Receivec. CrystalTYPES OF CIRCUIT AND POWER POWER SUPPLY TYPE OFSIGNAL TUBES OUTPUT AN D AERIAL .RANGE IN (a) Send (watts) CONSUMPTIONMILES(b) Receive(a) Send(b) ReceiveDIMENSIONSANDWEIGHTa. Sendb. ReceiveALLOCATIONREMARKSTransmitter-ReceiverFU.G3.(Airborne)a. .3-.6 andb. 3- 6C.W. a. 3.RS31-3.R2074 100 (High) a. Air driven generator 30th fixed and trailingM.C.W. & l.R.2134. 20(Low) (Low)R/Tb. Two 90-volt batteries.one 4volt EdisonBomber aircraft; foundin some but not allspecimens of the followingtypes of aircraft:Ju 52, FW 58,HE 114, DO 11, 13,& 17 E & F; AR 66,A R 96, W 33 and 34.Similar sets Fu.G3 A.and Fu.G3 A U.Both the above sets arestill in use in transportaircraft, flying boats.and second-line obsolescentaircraft generally.Transmitter-ReceiverFu.G7,7a, 76.(Airborne)a. 2.5-3.75b.a. C.W./RT -15 a. 2. REN 904,- 20 a. Dynamotor U44/24. +e d antennae in fightb.M.C.W. R/T 2. RENS 1664 b . er aircraft: In diveb. 5, RENS 1264. bombers a trailingantennae manuallyreeled./a. 14"x9"x8"—20 lbs.b. 14"x9"x8"—25 lbs.In fighter aircraft anddive bombers. Priorto 1943,7A was fittedin ME 109, ME 109F,FW 190. It is stillfitted in JU 87 andHS 129.Was replaced by Fu.G16Z. Is still used.however, in twin seateraircraft particularlythe JU 87.Transmitter-ReceiverFu.Gt.(Airborne)Transmitter-ReceiverFaGlO.(Airborne)a. S.W. 3-6:L.W.b. .3-.6a. As forFu.Gtb.a. (L.W:C.W.) a. 9, RS 242 20 (S.W.) a. Dynamotor (LJ5) Common T and R.(SW:CW.R/T)1 b. 4, NF 2 and 40 (L.W.) b. Dynamotor (U6) Fixed or trailing anb.(C.W.M.C.W., 3NF3 tennae may be used.R/T)a. C.W.-R/T. a. 6, RL 12P35-25. 40 (SW.) a. Dynamotor U-lo/S Both fixed and trailing.300-500 RV12 P2000 70 (L.W.) b. Dynamotor U-lo/E Aerial tuning units.b. b. AAAG-2 and AAAG3 are provided.a. 9"x85i"x8"—16K lbs.b. 7Ji"x8M"x8"—16 lbs.Air-to-air-to ground(intercommunication).Current equipment forall first line multipleengine aircraft.Intended originally forbomber aircraft butwas superseded byFu.GlO.o5—COCOTransmitter-ReceiverFu.Gl6.(Airborne)a. 38-42.5b.a. R/T. 20-100 a. 2. RL12P35- 10 a. Dynamotor U-17 ‘ixed single wire 6'11”b. ll,RVlZ PZOOO b. long20 ground level b.100 in the aira. 15"x8~"~8"—26:/z lbs.All bombers. Air-to-airand ground liaison.Is fitted in large aircraftin addition to theFu.GlO. The designwas taken from theFu.G17.Figure 3.m9

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIOS ANDEMERGENCY TRANSMITTERS USED IN GERMAN AIRCRAFT—ContinuedTOONOMENCLATUREFREQUENCYRANGE (mcs)a. Sendb. Receivec. CrystalTYPES OFSIGNALRANGE INMILESCIRCUIT ANDTUBES(a) Send(b) ReceivePOWEROUTPUT(watts)POWER SUPPLYANDCONSUMPTION(a) Send(b) ReceiveTYPE OFAERIALDIMENSIONSANDWEIGHTa. Sendb. ReceiveALLOCATIONREMARKSTransmitter-ReceiverFu.G16Z,ZE.(Airborne)a.b. As forFu.G16a. M.C.W.b. R/T.20 ground level100 in the aira. 2, RL 12P351. 2, RL 12P3 59, RV 12PZOOO innavigational aidequipment.As above a. Dynamotor U-17M.Fixed single wire 6'11"long. Matching unitsAAG16-2 and AAG16-3 permit use ofleading edge of thetail fin as antennae8" single loop is usedfor D/ F homing.a. 15"x8J4"x8" Used in all single seaterlighters.Also' incorporates D/ Fhoming apparatus.Transmitter-ReceiverFu.G1717B and Z.(Airborne)a. 42.1-47.9a.a. M.C.W.b. R/T.30 at ground level185 in the aira. 2 RL 12P35,13.RV12 P2000T.As above a. Dynamotor U-17M.Vertical rod about 39"long terminating inmatching unitAAG7.In twin seater, closesupporting aircraft.Air-to-air-to groundliaison.Fu.Gl7 was the originaldesign from whichFu.Gl6 was copied..Fu.G 72 is used alternativelywith D/ Fhoming apparatus.Transmitter-ReceiverFu.Gl andG2.(Airborne)Transmitter-ReceiverFu.G6, 6A(Airborne)Interrogation and command.Air-to-air-toground.Transmitter-ReceiverFu.GlO K-l(Airborne)a.a..6-1.667 a. C.W.a. .R/T.a. 5.3-10a.C.W.a. R/T.b. M.C.W.-R/T.a. 3, RS-31G3.R2074b. 1 R 2134a. 2, RL 12P35-11RL 12P35-11b.20-100 a. Air driven generatorb. BatteriesAs for Fu.G710 a. Dynamotor U-17"b.Fixed.For bombers.Single wire 6'H" long. Command liaison set. mooCOCOFigure 57 (Continued).I

IPERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF TWO-WAY RADIOS ANDEMERGENCY TRANSMITTERS USED IN GERMAN AIRCRAFT—ContinuedNOMENCLATUREFREQUENCYXANGE (mcs)a. Sendb : Receivec. CrystalTYPES OF CIRCUIT AND POWER POWER SUPPLY TYPE OF 1IMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKSSIGNAL TUBES OUTPUT AND AERIAL ANDRANGE IN (a) Send (watts)MILES(b) ReceiveCONSUMPTION(a) Send(b) ReceiveWEIGHTa. Sendb. ReceiveTransmitter-ReceiverFuGlOK-i(Airborne)1. 6-123.Command and liaisonset. Used in smallaircraft.Transmitter-ReceiverFu.GlO K-.(Airborne)1. O-13b.Voice communicationair-to-air-to ground.Transmitter-ReceiverFU.GZi.(.4irborne)Transmitter-ReceiverFu.GZ.5 a.TransmitterNS2.("Notsender")(2~ 26)Transmitter' NS4.("Notsender")a. .3-.9b.a. 152.2-161b. 123-128a. 0.5.a. 53.5-61.Ca. M.C.W.-R/T. a. 3.RS 241 10 Communication (genb.l.RES094 eral) for flying boats2, RES074 and seaplanes.b.a. L550 440 1. Dynamotor 14’ Stub. common t< 14%8"x8”b. 6. RV12P2000. b. Trans.-Receiver. —33 Ibs.2,LDl.(Antennae tuningunit AAG25a).C.W.: a. ALSN-REt3A. 8 a. Hand generator Steel antennae wire 23! LL”XLO”X7~" Emergency transmitte3ar 3arried loose in aircraft.M.C.W.: feet long with groun< —15 lbs. for dinghy use. Forerunner of N.S.I.250 at sea. wire and sende120 overland raised by box kite ohydrogen filled balloon. 5C.W. at 200 feet to a. 2, LS 1 and LS2 1-2 a. 11 midget storage Strip of copper plats 6M'x6Ji'x3' Emergency transmitter Replaces the N.S.Z.air craft 9. at 1000 cells—3 used in par- steel tape 3'5’ h i —3% lbs. for dinghy use. Standard equipmentfeet is 14. 40,000 allel for 2-volt fila- and 1' in diamete on all twin engine andfeet 40. ment, 8 used in series tapering to 3/16’ a larger aircraft.parallel for S-volt end.vibrator supply.COCOFigure 57 (Continued).rn

PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS AND SPECIFICATIONS OF RADIO EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN GERMANAIRCRAFT FOR DIRECTION FINDING, BLIND LANDING, BLIND BOMBING AND HEIGHT FINDING•paONOMEN- FREQUENCY TYPE OF CIRCUIT AND TUBES POWER POWER SUPPLY TYPE OF DIMENSIONS ALLOCATION REMARKSCLATURE RANGE (mcs) SIGNAL (a) Send OUTPUT & CONSUMPTION AERIAL A L WEIGHTa. Send RANGE IN (b) Receive (watts (a) Sendb. Receive MILES (bj Receivec. CrystalD/F Receiver b.0.25-0.4 C.W. b. 8 Tube superhetrodyne b. Dynamotor U-8 Fixed loop 13" long b. ll"x9~"x6" Homing receiverPeil: 4. ' M.C.W. 8 RV 12 P200 and aircraft bat- and 3%" in diam- —22% Ibs. used in singleR:T 150 tery. eter, carries 13 seater fighters(approx.) turns of Lit2 wire prior to introcrosswoundinduction ofseries. FUG 16Z.D/F Receiver b. .165-1 C.W. b. 6 Tube superhetrodyne b. Dynamotor U-8 Oval loop with pow- 24"xlO"x8" D/F and homing A pre-war commercial set.Petl: 5. M.C.W. 6NF 2 and , aircraft bat- der Ironb. cone: —24 lbs. receiver in twinR/T 250 tery. 8 turns of Litz engine andi wire connected in larger aircraftseries.for above purpose.D/F Receiver b. .15-1.2 C.W. b. 6 Tube superhetrodyne b. Dynamotor U-l1.4 Oval loop: sense b. 9%“xSx"s iI , [Jsed in bombers. One of the few GermanPeil: 6 M.C.W. 6 RV 12 P2000 antenna is metal —20 Ibs. May be used sets that uses crystals.R/T paint on loop as a separatehousing.receiver inFUG IO.D/F Receiver b. .15-1.2 C.W. b. Dynamotor U-11.4 Same as abov;.Peil: 7.M.C.W.R/TSavigation b. 28.5-35 R./T 250 b. 2NF2 TRF b. Dynamotor U-8 39.ft. vertical rod. Carried loose in aircraft COReceiverfor blind landings.FU 1 EB1.Navigation b. 30-33.3 3. 7 Tube superhet: b. Dynamotor U-8 39.ft. vertical rod. For blind landings.Receiver7RV12 P4000FU m.i o iCOIFi&re 58.mwo

II-:, . 7 Tube superhetrodyne20 RV12 P4000, . DynamotorTwo vertical yi Bomber aircraft.wave rods instreamlined housing.A special blind bombingdevice operating on threemain beams: one forpilot and two for observers.(Believed to be obsolete.)YGeriit(withFUG f7.E andFUG 28A.a.b. 42.1-47.9M.C.W.R/TR/T 2.50k. 2 RL P35.-13,RV12b. P400010 L. Dynamotor U-17Vertical rod aboveand retractableantennae belowfuselage.Bomber aircraft.A later development thanthe X-Ger&t employingOne instead of threebeams.Radio-AltimeterFUGIOI-RMARadio AltimetersFUG 103.a. 351-389b. (OperatingFrequency)370a. 3703.F.M.C.W.0 150 meters100-1500 metersa. 1. LD 2.1. RV 12 P2001b. 1. LVS-6. RV12 P2001-a. Dynamotor U-101b.Two separate %wave dipoles horizontallypolarized: one each fortransmitter andreceiver.Multi-enginedaircraft forheight finding.An improvement on FUG101 and 101A. Does notinterfere with other wirelessequipment on board.COfigure 58 (C‘oi~liud).

GERMAN CABLES1Description Conductor Strands InsulationMaterialOutsideDiameter‘Two-conductor. cable with black rubber 0.024-inch solid copper. Rubber type. 0.115-inchjacket applied over one white and one(singleblackrubber-insulated conductor. conductor) .Estimated WeightTalking (Lbs. perRange Talking(Mls.) 1,000 Feet)Dry. 16.3;wet, 10.1.TensileStrength(Lbs.)InsulationsulationResistanceD-C ResistanceSingleConductorper 1,000FeetAttenuationat1,000 CPS.db. perMile20.5 275 High. 25.9 Dry, 1.84;wet, 2.97.Twisted-pair field wire, each conductor of 6, 0.013-inch steel; Rubber type. 0.128-inch. LO.3 (Zwire 12.9 400 Very high. 12.9 2.91which has a black braid over a white 2, 0.013-inch co$per; metallicrubber insulation. 1, O.Ml-inch copper. circuit).Single-conductor field wire with a stiff red 8, O.OlS-inch steel; Polyvinyl, 0.135-inch. 400 Very high. 11.6synthetic insulation over 8 steel and 1 1, 0.028-inch copper. Chloridecopper strands.type.Single-conductor ii&Id wire with a wax 8, 0.015-inch steel; Rubber type. 0.128-inch. 3.5 (Z-wire 11.8 400 Very high. 16.9 3.53impregnated cotton braid over a black 1, 0.028-inch copper. metallicrubber insulation. The conductor con- circuit).sisting of 8 steel, and 1 copper, strands.Single-conductor field wire with a stiff red 8, 0.015-inch steel; Polyvinyl, 0.130-inch. I.9 (Zwire 9.2 High. 51.4 6.12synthetic insulation and a conductor con 1, 0.02%inch alum- Chloride metallicsisting of 8 steel and 1 aluminum strands. inum. type. circuit).Single-conductor assault wire with a yellow 7, 0.016-inch alum- Polyvinyl, 0.055-inch. 2.5 83.5synthetic insulation over a conductor con-Chloridesisting of 7 aluminum strands.type.Single-conductor assault wire with a cotton 6, 0.00%inch steel; Cellophane 0.425inch. >ry, 25.6; 127 510 3.52 Dry, 1.17;braid over a blue cellophane insulation. 1, O.OlO-inch copper. ppe wet, 25.6 wet, 1.17.The conductor has 6 steel and 1 copper material. (notstrands.loaded).Voicefrequency.Long range field cable having four ru!)ber 19, 0.0125-inch copper. :ubber typeinsulated conductors spirally twisted aboutinsulationa rubber-covered synthetic core. Over thisand jacket.quad is placed a tinsel shielding tape anda black rubber jacket.IO&conductor cable composed’ of 12 tinned 12 copper 0.875-inch. 525copper strands. Insulation of cotton coveredwith impregnated cotton tape andrubber outer jacket.Figure 59.I• o

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT USED IN THE GERMAN ARMYFOR TESTING RADIO SETSNOMENCLATUREDIMENSIONSAND WEIGHTDESCRIPTIONREMARKSWavemeter Fremes 0.yj"x14 W O"-46lbs.Frequency range: —30 kcs —30 mcs in 20 switched bands.Facilities: will emit modulated or unmodulated signal.(Loose or tight coupling to receiver.)Circuit as receiver: RF-oscillating detector—2AF RES094. RE134W: RE. 134Circuit as sender: oscillator—anode modulator.Power supply: 4-volt storage battery. 3-volt grid bias,ISO-volt H.T. batteries.The outstanding feature in theconstruction of the wavemeteris the massive turretfor waveband switching,which takes up most of thespace inside the case.Frequency TesterF. firuf. dl.Field Test Set 18(Das Feldmesskaslchen)Attenuation Meter.—39(Dam~fungsmesser39)German Tube Checker(RohrcnPruf.watRPG4)—29 lbs.6.3"x4.7 % 2.9”—2% Ibs.13Ji"xlO)i'i9K"—16»xl5»x9'—30 lbs.Frequency range —120 —156 me (26 fixed frequencies).Power supply: storage battery 2 N/9 and one 90-voltH.T. Battery.Afieldtest set similar to the U. S. army's EE65.Is capable of measuring the amplification (in nepers) of 2and 4 wire repeaters and the attenuation at 300 cyclesover any type of line. Can measure crosstalk attenuationbetween the lines.Is powered with 90-volt H.T. battery and a 2-volt 2B19storage battery.Will test all European and a small number of Americantubes. It may be used as a milliammeter, ohmeter, andcapacity meter. Can only be used for DC voltages andcurrents.For frequency calibration offixed sets within its range.A general purpose field TestSet.Used in conjunction with telephonerepeaters in testingand adjusting input andoutput levels.German Exploring CoilThis apparatus can be used to locate grounds, shorts,crosses and wet spo^s in cables. (However, it will notlocate "opens" in cable pairs.)German FrequencyTest Set F.prufg. f.—25 lbs.Crystal controlled oscillator fundamental output frequencyof 26 mcs.Power supply: 2.4-volt storage battery for vibrator, onetube RL2 4T1.Consumption: 2.42 @ 6 amperes.Figure 60.Afieldpack servicing and calibrationunit for the Fddfu.b and u nVIII—62

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Section V. ENGINEER EQUIPMENT1. Instrumentsa. GENERAL. In general the instruments usrdin the field by the engineers of the GermanArmy are identical with our own, particularlytheir transits, theodolites, and surveyor's levels.The main differences occur in compasses and gapmeasuringinstruments.b. GERMAN FIELD COMPASS (Marschkompass).(1) Description. The German field compass isa black, pocket-sized instrument. The housingis of aluminum-like metal. A brass outer ringis attached with a carrying handle. A hinged,linear, centimeter scale unfolds from the base ofthe compass housing. The letters MKZ(KZ)are marked on the body of the compass.(2) Operation. The swinging of the magneticneedle can be stopped by pressing the damperbutton. When the destination is visible, openthe cover and raise the mirror half way, so themagnetic needle can be seen clearly. Sight thepoint through the rear V sight and the frontaperture at the base of the mirror. Hold steadyuntil the point is in line with the eye, then withthe free hand turn the azimuth circle until themagnetic needle falls on the magnetic declinationmark. Read the azimuth from the dial. TheGerman compass is numbered counter-clockwise,and the graduations are in mils. To simplifycompass reading, the dial has been abbreviatedso the last two zeros have been omitted; thus,6,000 mils is shown as 60. The markings fordirections are the. same as our own, with theexception of East which is marked "0" forOst. The adjustments for magnetic declinationare marked directly on the azimuth dial; twoluminous dots indicate 150 mils. East and’ West.c. NEW TYPE FIELD COMPASS (Marschkompass"A"). It is now known that a new typecompass is in use in the German Army. Thiscompass is numbered clockwise in mils.d. GAP-MEASURING INSTRUMENT. This is asimple device to measure the width of streamsand similar gaps. It is designed on the principleof similar right-angled triangles and consistsof two parts: a fixed mirror and a measuringmirror.2. German Demolition Equipmenta. SAFETY FUZE BLASTING CAP AND ACCESSORIES (Sprengkapsel No. 8). (1) Description.This blasting cap is similar to the U. S. andBritish types. It is designed to fit over thesafety fuze and be initiated by it. The initiator ofthe cap consists of lead azide and lead styphnate.(2) Characteristics.Length2.36 inches.Diameter ........., 028 inch.Packing ..........15 in wooden box.(3) Eakelite Holder (Ziinderhiilter). Thisholder serves the double purpose of connectingthe cap and fuze and permitting the cap to bescrewed into the charge. It consists of a tubewhich covers the junction of the cap and fuze,and is enclosed in a bakelite cover. At one endof this cover is an externally threaded sleeve;the other end is covered by a bakelite cap witha central hole for passage of the fuze.(4) Blasting Cap Igniter Sef (Sprengkapselziinder).This is a prepared set with a cap ina bakelite holder, with a 3- to 6-foot safety fuzeattached, and a safety fuze igniter. This providesa convenient short-delay demolition igniter.b. SAFETY FUZE (Zeitziindschnur). The blackpowder train of this fuze is enclosed in strandsof jute-like fibre and white cotton-like fibre alternately,the whole being covered with a bituminouspaint, over which goes the black rubber outercovering. This safety fuze burns in air or underwater at the rate of approximately 2 feet a minute.It can be initiated in the same way as U. S. andBritish safety fuzes.c. ELECTRIC BLASTING CAPS. (1) Gliihziinder28. This consists of a cap, with twin leads ofcopper or iron, and a wire bridge. The wholefits into a standard bakelite cap holder. The copperleads have a resistance of 2 ohms; iron, 3ohms.(2) Delay Electric Blasting Cap (Gliihztindermnit Verzb’gerung). These electric caps, whichfire with a delay of 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10 secondsafter electrical initiation, are similar to ordinaryelectric caps except that there is a pyrotechnicdelay pellet between the wire bridge and thecap proper. These caps have the number ofseconds delay marked on a disc attached to theleads.(3) Spark Gap Electric Blasting Cap (Spaltziinder).In these caps, the wire bridge has beenreplaced by a spark gap.d. INSTANTANEOUS FUZE (Knallziindschur).This fuze has a soft, pliable, green, outer coveringwith a waterproof varnish finish, surrounding anexplosive core. It will detonate under water,initiated by a cap, but the ends must be waterproofed.Vlll—63

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451c. 100~GR4M CARTRIIZE fBolrrpntv01lc 28).There are two types of this cartridge; one inwaxed paper, and one in compressed paper. Bothcartridges may be marked Bohr-Pcrfr. 28, identifyingthe cartridge, and h'p.02 or Grf.SS, identifyingthe explosive as TKT or picric acid.f. 200-GRAM SIAR (Sprc~r~gkorrpcr 38j. Thisslab is provitlvd in two fornls: in waxed papalandin a bakelite cast’. The waxed paper slabmay contain Gther TNT or picric acid. Pressedpicric acid is contained in the casing of t\vo bakelitemouldings. The bakelite slab actually weighs250 grams or S$ ounces.g. L-KR1T~OC,~431 (2.2 POUNDS) SLAB (Sprettgbiiclzsc23). (1) Ur.s~~i~iio~z. This slab may bemade either of TS T or picric acid, in a prc’ssureresistingzinc containrr which permits it to beused at any depth of water. There are threesockets for standard caps and holders, or igniters•—one on each face of the slab, excluding thebase. Each socket is covered \vith a paper discmarked Sprengbiichse 24 and either Fp.02(TKT) or GYJ.SS (picric acid).(2) Charactcrisiir-5.U’eight ........._.._....2.2 poLlntls.Length7.9 illchcs.Width2.9 inches.Thickness2.2 inches.h. 3-KILOGRAM (6.6 L’ORIXMJ 51.~~3 ((;ddtrLaduug 3 I\r!g.). (1) Drsc-ription. This slab, ina zinc container with a carrying handle at oneend, has either three or five sockets for standardcaps and holders or igniters. The container isl)ressur~-resistillg. and the slab may be used underany depth of water. This slab is often usedwith igniters for improvised mints. It is marked3 Kg. 011 the side.(2) Cl~arnrtc7Tsfir.~.Weight . i ,. 6 pounds.Height ..............7.7 inches.Width6.S inches.Thickness3 indies.i. 3-KILOCRAJ P.AI.L CHARGE. (1) Dcsrrij~tim.The sl)hcrical I~otly of the charge is constructedin t\\-o hemispherical sections of prcswdmild steel, seamed together by a rolled joint. Thesecuring lugs arc wcltled to the top half of thebody, and to them are attach4 the two ends ofa canvas carrying strap. The charge has thestandaru threaded igniter socket and is marked3 Kg.VIII—64(2) Clzaractevistics.’eight of explosiveDiameterFilling. pounds.6.25 inches.Amatol.j . HOLLOW DEMOLITION CTR.\RCE (400 GRAMSOR 14 KXCI:S) . This char-ge is a cup-shaped,a!uminum case, painted ficltl gray, with the standardthrcatlcd cap socket in the top. A platv isrvcessetl into tht, baste. ‘I% cc.ntral part of thisl:late forms a hwlisph~1-ical ~311 surroundingthe ho110~ sp w in tlw lm~ of the charge. Themain filling is l,~nthrit~.k. 12.5-KILOGRAM HOLLOW CHARGE (Hohlla~!HI~cJ). (1) I)c~s~-r-i~tio~l. This charge is designedto I)last holt5 in steel plate< in pcrmancnt fortificationsor for special tasks. It is cwlosed in asheet iron cover with a carrying handle. In thelease of the chargt is a henlisl,hericnl cavity, andin the top is a standard thrraded cap socket.This charge is usuall\- part of the equipment ofairborne troq)s.(2) Clfm7rctcristic.s.Outside diameter 11 inches.LIiameter of cavity . inches.Weight28 pounds.Filling _.....,,...,,_....TNT.1. 13.5-KILOGRAM HOLLOW CHARGE (HohUacII&tlg).(1) DCSCY~~~;OU. This hollow chargerests on three telescol)ic logs. which ensure proper"stand-off". The charge is l)rovitled with a pelletcontained in a standard detonator socket.(2) Clla~nc-tc~l~isfic~.s.Outside diameter 13 T j inches.Diameter of cavity 9'4 inches.Weight of charge 30 pounds.Filling (RDX-TXT) ....21 pounds.Figure 61.—Hohlladung 12.5-kg Demolition Charge.m. 50-KILOGRAM HOLLOW CHARGE (Hohlladw$g).(1) Desr.riptior2. I;or convenience in

MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451transport, this charge is made iri two parts. Thelower part, which is provided with a separatecarrying handle, contains a hemispherical cavity.The upper part contains both an explosive chargeand a standard cap socket. This charge is partof the equipment of airborne troops.(2) Characteristics.Outside diameterDiameter of cavity20 inches.8 inches.Height of cavity ..4 ill&YM’eight of charge 110 ~~~untls.Filling .......... ‘l -ST.n. HOLLOW RING CTIARGF.S (Hohlringladitng).(1) Dc.~cript,olf. ‘I‘llVsV charge,s, used principallyfor the clcstt-uctiotl of gun barrels, containTST, in a thin annular nletal casing which isslipped over the gun l~~i-r~al x1(1 iircd by a cap.There is an annular, hollow space of semi-ciru&rcross swtion on the inside of the ring, designedto iiicr

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIEDFigwe 64.—Barlgalurc torpedo.for one and a length of safety fuze and matchfor the other. Other sections carry a cap fittedto the end of the tube. When assembling sections,the free end of the fuze at the socket endof one section is tied to the cap at the spigotend of the next section.p. GERMAN FIELD EXPLODERS. (1) Explotlor1942, six-barrcllrd (Ncbclecvrfcy>. This exploderis 6 inches high and has two sockets inthe core. One socket is for winding, and theother for a seven-pin plug providing six circuitswith a common central return. On the outsideof each of the six outer plug holes are six numberedwindows which glow in turn as their circuitis completed. The exploder thus can firesix circuits rapidly, one after another; the operatorcan see the glow lamps recording the firingin succession. Since this exploder has a lowcapacity, with 20 detonators the maximum mmherit will handle, its use for demolitions is rcstricted.(2) Small Exploder 1940 (Gliihziindapparat40). This explotlcr forms part of the portahlcdemolition kit (Ziindgeriit 40). It is 5.3 incheshigh and has an oval-shaped top, mounting thefiring terminals and the winding socket. It willfire through 90 ohms external resistance, and thegenerator is turned directly by the handle in thewinding socket. 0n1y when the maximum currentis generated is the circuit closed; for firing,the handle must be turned as fast as possibleto the "stop". The exploder has an internal resistanceof 30 ohms and generates a current of1 ampere at 80 volts. Before using the exploder,it must be tested with a special neon test tube,which not only tests the exploder but also excitesthe magnetism in the generator.VIII—66Figure 65.—Exploder -13 (6-barreled).

IMARCH 1945UNCLASSIt\tUTM-E 30-451Figure 66.—Exploder 39 (Gliikiirldapparat 39).(3) Field Exploder 7939 /Gliilciindapparat39). This exploder is Ijacked in a leather carryingcase. It fires through a maximum resistanceof 300 ohms and has an internal resistance of40 ohms. The winding key is kept in the carryingcase, which also holds the test resistance, a sparespring, and a screw driver. On the top of theexploder are the winding- socket, the spring socket,and the spring terminals.(4) Field Exploder 1937 (Gliihziindapparat37). This exploder generates 300 volts and firesthrough a maximum resistance of 300 ohms. Theinternal resistance is 43 ohms. The exploder hasa winding key kept in the carrying case, whichalso holds the test resistance. On top of theexploder is a winding socket marked Aufziehcltand a firing socket mark~tl Ziindm. The firingterminals are on an insulated step below the levelof the cover. The spring driving the generatorcannot be released unless it has been fully wound.To use the exploder, \vintl the spring clockwiseuntil the "stop" is rcacl1t.d. To fire, turn thesocket marked "Ziindcn" with the key.I;igurc 67.~Exploder 37 (Gliill,-iiildappar(It 37).VIII—67

UNCLASSlFlED1 MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451l-igurc 6H.—lixpludcr l(i (CA\\hzi\ndappural JO).(5) Field Exploder 1026. This exploderweighs 14.5 pounds and is packed in a leatherCast. The c~s~)lotl~~r is of the low tension tlyw(hot wire as opposed to spark) with an internalresistance of 45 ohms. Maximum resistancethrough ~vhich it \I-ill fi~-(, is 2.5.5 011111~.q. PORTABLE DKMOLITIOX KIT 1940. Thisis a pack containing everything needed to firecharges electrically. It weighs 51 pounds, andcan I)e carried by a handle or by shoulder strapson the back. It contains a small exploder (1940)and neon test tul,c~, a coiitiiluit\~ tester (g-danometer)(1926). 40 electric detonators, twosl~ools of sin,q]r cable and two tlrullls of tloul,lecable, metal sleeve for crimping over electricaljoints, a notched pocket knife, crimpers, and insdatingtap’.testing the small Exploder I 1 Mn. I: w part of theportable Demolition Kit 1’140.t. MAONHTJC DEMOLITION ( IIAI«;E ANTITANK(Panccrluimlntinc). This fliar^c is sphericaland completely covered by piv-M d cardboard. 1 hiscardboard casing, held in sli;ipe by two metalbands, extends 4 inches bel"\v the base ot theexplosive. I'rimarilv designed as a demolitioncharge, it also can be used against tanks. Theexplosive filler is 1 pound 12 ounces of cycloniteand TXT. The booster consists of two pellets ofcyclonite and wax in which there is a lilting for astandard igniter ol the />'/ type.r. CONTIXITTY TKST (GALVANOMETER) 1926.This tester not only tests continuity but alsomeasures resistance ol circuits and detonators.It contains an ohmeter. resistance, and battery(1.5 vdt5). The battery is housed in a cylinder4.7 inch high with the ohmeter 01, top. AdjustingscrC’IVS for setting the olm~3cr needle tozero and infinity are midway between the testingtcrmin;k A Iuilt-iii resistanw ]m)tvcts ci~]~sfrom bciiig initiated while being tcstccl for wtitinuity.s. TEST R~XWAK-~T ASD SI T ON IAMPS. Theresistnncc is for tvstiilg the 1:ield l

ll-l>I MARCH 1945u. GERMAN ANTITANK MAGNETIC HOLLOW(‘IL.\I.~llo\v head and a 7> 5 second delay has been introduced.3. Booby Trapsa. ;\IA’I’I3~IAI.. ‘I% follouing standard materialshave heen used in (iennan booby traps:Tellermines.S-Mines.CAM'.I. Mines.Improvised wooden mints.Prepared charges.Mortar bombs.Hand grenades.Italian B.4 mines.Italian h;i~id grenades.French antitank mines.I~ritish (;.S;. InilJeb 111;s. IT, I\‘, and 17.I’,ritiyli gun cottoii sl:ilJs.British aircraft bombs.b. METHODS OE SETTING. The booby traps ares

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 70.—Mine Detector (IVien 41).VIII—70Figure 71.- Mine Detector (Frankfurt 42).

I MARCH 1945sible after removal of the front panel. The poleis in three sections. The search coil is housed ina bakelite moulding.(2) Employment. The circuit is adjustc.d forzero balance. A tone is produced in the earphonesby proximity of a metal object.e. OTHER MINE DETECTORS. Other mine detectorsin general use are:Pentagrid tube type.M.S.F. 1007.Frankfurt 42.Pram Mine Detector.Wiesbaden Mine Detector.UNCCASSIF\EDTM-E 30-4515. Antipersonnel Minesa. I 35. lc sc-riptioll. This antipersonnelmine may be operated by direct pressureon an in in the head, or by a pull onn or more i l-e s attacllrtl to pull igniters.The mine may also be fired electrically. The pressureigniter, S.Mi.Z.35, functions under a weightof about 15 pounds. When set with trip n-ircs,pull igniters ZZ.35 or Zu.ZZ.35 are used, with atwo- or three-way adapter screwed on the mine inplace of the transit cap. The mine is cylindricalwith a c o v c‘r, For transport threeare carried in a wooden box or watertight pressedmetal case. In the space between the outer caseand inner cylinder of each mine there are approximately360 steel balls, mild steel rods in shortlengths, or small pieces of scrap steel. These constitutethe loading of the mine. The base platehas a recess to hold the propcllent charge. Thecentral steel tube is threaded externally to takethe adapters or igniters, and internally to takeany standard German igniter or electric detonatorfor deliberate firing. At its lower end, the tubepasses through the base plate and is securrtl by aunion. Inside the main steel tube is another shorttube, containing a delay element (about A]/> seconds).There have been cases where the delayholder has been replaced by a detonator, causingthe mine to explode without jumping-. E1uall~spaced in the base plate are holes leading into thebottom of the three detonator tubes and containingshort-delay elements. When the igniter functions,the delay pellet provides a short delay beforeigniting the propellent charge in the baseof the mine. The burning of this charge projectsthe main elements of the mine into the air. Simultaneously,the powder delays in the bottom of thedetonator tubes are ignited and explode the minesome 3 to 5 feet above the ground.Ju/urc 71.—S-Mine with )' Adapter and Z.Z.35 Igniter.Figure 73.—S-Mine with S.Mi.Z.35Igniter.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451&. >I'it/ure 74.—Jerrican booby-trapped to S-Mine.(2) Ciftrl-u(-r(,/,i.~ric-.s.Height (lev igniter) . . . . 5 inches.Diameter. . .J inches.Weight. . .9 pountl~.’eight of filling :Poured TNT . . . . .14 OLU~CC”;.Powdered TNT .. . 8 ounces.(3) Pc?+w?lm-c~. The delay lwtwett firingthe igniter and the ejection of the mine variesaccording to age and condition of the mine. Holyever,tests have shomm an averag-e of 3.9 seconds.The delay Iwt\\-em the ejection oi tlte mine andthe detonation also varies; tests have shown thatit averages 0.6 second.(4) ~vCfttl’Ulixt;0l2. Anti-handlingdevices firstare neutt-alkd. Then uncover the mine, identify,and neutralize the igniters.(5) Ihuwi~l~/. A-Iftet- neutralizing. cut thetrip \vires of the pull igniters. Lnscrcw the ignitersand unscrew the plugs from the thrw holesin the cover and remove the detonator 1)~ tut-ttittgthe mine over.11. S-MINE 44. (1) Dcscriptioll. The S-Mine43 is all antipersonnel Inine of the lmuntlittg typesimilar to the S-mine 35. The igniter well is to-Ivat-d one side of the cover plate, and the heightat which the ntine explotles is controllctl by aninternal pull-igniter arrangement. The igniter isthe coml)inalion push-and-pull type, and its ncutralizationdemantls extreme care. The employmentof this mine is the same as for the S-mine35. The lethal range is 22 yards, and the casualt>range 110 yards.(2) Oprr-aliorl. Tlie igtiitc r initiates the 4 ' _•second delay pellet tiring tin • propellant. whichtltro\\-s the mine upward. \\ 5 en the coiled wireis fully cxtcn~lc~l it 1111115Ils .tr i.'lease pin from theigniter, cxplotlittg the mine.c. Sch it-Mine 12. ill- / '•:seriNion. TheSchii-minc 12 with the Z. .Z.. L_' igniter is an ea>y.handy obstacle to cmplov again st mtantrv, cavalrv .and light vehicles. In >mall-sc: lie obstacles, it conveniently can be substituted for the S-mine 3.">.In almost all minefields it can I" Uêd III (.(lilititi~~tionwith Tellermincs. The i inue consists ot acasing ol impregnated plvwooi i, or hardened compressed hhrous cardboard. ]i•ainted dull black" ;one 1928 pattern demolition el large weighing 200grxitis or i cmice~, and one %% /2 pull igniterwith Xo. 8 detonator. The l. 'ial weight is 11pounds. The igniter is prcpai ( d i< >v uê by tinscrewingthe safety cap and iiwerlmg the detonator(open end to open end i I he pin i> lt~~ldin position by the spring loai led striker.(2) Lifting and A citlrah::!* A tier locatingthe mine, search for and neuli - iii/.e any anli-haudlingdevices, then lift the h .'; without exertuif/any pressure. See whether tin pin oi the igniteris still seated hrinlv m the sir iker. If ibis is thecase the mine may 1~ Iiil~i. a Her delermimngthat tliet-e are no ;ctiIiLliili~tg device^. Mines onwhich pressure has been exert ed and the pin disturbed from its tt01-ttlal lIo~ili ion should be destroyedin place.d. WOODEN ANTII'I.KSOX N MIXF. 431I).(1) Ilc~srr-iption. III its opi •i-.uion ibis mine,with an impregnated wood In. Nc i\ . 1. \ ery similarto the standard German Schn ;nine 12. Th e lid,hinged to the back of the ho. !\ . is lined with ametal operating flange at the I :1 .nt. This tl;litS~c,in the armed position, rests on •• \\ o w i lodeii dowelsand is .secured by a safety pin The center of theIl:q y is slotted to clear the . ••]•:- i 'f the igniter.but two small tongues rest m I iit 11)~ ot I he ixniterpin. The igniter. Z.Z.I "'. is screwed into azinc socket. The main filling •s east TXT. withpressed TXT around the deton. : : or soeket.(2) CJiaracteristics.LengthS 1 • in*Width'"•-. ii.•Height open .4 1 j mHeight ckwl’eight 0i fillin:. i:. i i. ! , ill/ O ,,’(31 Opcwflior~. ‘l. ; :'l red by jifosureon the lid. The metal flange w ill lii M shear thedowels and then push out tII(jlil Pin. thitis relea.MiigVIII—72

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figwr 75.—Schii-Miwthe striker. The operating load is apprmimatcly75 ~poun’ls.(4) 7‘0 Ncutralkc. The same as for theSchit-minc 42.c’. \\‘OODEN MINE 42(N). (1) Dcsrriptio~r.The body is made of impregnated wood, with azinc socket in the top to take a detonator and-. . ,, , i I, i - ,igiiitcr. .bm~ss the top is a shaped block of wooddrilletl to allow the igniter to he screwed don-non the top of the body. The igniter is the standwith%.%.42 l,~~iiitzr.ad U.%.:.i. The main filling is cast TIiT withpressed TXT primu-.(2) Characteristics.Lengt h,;• , i]K. hcs _l\ldth .......... (I’ m 1 illCl1~~.Over-all height ~?

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451lHyurc 76.—Glass Mine 43 with (a) Hcbeteunder hjmter, and (b) Ihtck li/m/.-r.cover board over the head of the igniter. Withoutthe cover board, the mine is practically insensibleto blast, but the probability of operating the mineis reduced consitlerahly. The functioning load ofthe igniter fitted to this mine is 75 pounds. Itappears that the igniter is being manufacturedwith a weaker spring for use in this mine. sincethe pressure required to function a standardD.Z.3.5 is 130 to 165 pounds.i. AKTIPERSONNEL PRESSURE MINE (TTALIAN). (1) Drscviption. This mine consists ofa rectangular Ix&elite box, with a lvedge-shaped,hinged lid, containing a TKT charge held in placeby a projection and surrounded on the remainingthree sides by deeply grooved fragmentationplates. The igniter mechanism consists of a metaltube which contains a spring-loaded striker, fittedwith an actuating pin and a cocking ring. Theouter end of the striker tube is secured againstthe wall of the has by a flangc~. Tile striker assemblyslips into the side of the mine, in a recesscut out to receive it. A corresponding slot in thelid enables the mine to be completely closed whenthe igniter is not cocked.(2) Cllarclrtcri.stic.s.Length of boxWidth of boxDeptli of boxLength of chargeWidth of chargeDepth of char~cWeight of charge.. T . X i l li 111i.2.5d indies.1.5 indie-;.J.d indies.1.97 indies.1. 18 1.18 indies.5,'i ounces.(3) Method of ~r.~r,i,r,~/. To arm the minethe igniter is cocked by pulling wit the ring andinserting the actuating pin. The detonator isthen inserted in the striker tube and secured bylocking the ring. The whole ;~~~enll)ly is insertedin the box, the detonator fitting into a recess inVIII—74

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(he explosive charge. Finnlly, the lid is gentlyclosed until it rests on the actuating pin.(4) . \ slight l~r~ssure on the lidwill cause lx dl push out the pin and release thestriker.(5) To Neutralize. Avoid all pressure 011 thelid of the mine. Search for and neutralize anyanti-handling devices. IAift the lid clear of theactuating pin. Insert a wire or nail in the safety.pin hole and lift out the Stl-iliel- asscmldy. Unrthe ing ring and remove the detonator,g. ANTIPERSONNEL (;T.GS IIIXE 33. (1) Dcscription.his antipersonnel mine is made almostentirely of glass. It is armed with the cheniicaligniter or with the Hebelzundcr. The bottomof the glass container is recessed to hold a Sprengkorper28. On top of the mine rests a glass shearplate, and, on top of that, a thick glass pressureplate.(2) Operation. A pressure of 20 to 25 pountlsbreaks the thin shear plate and applies pressureon the lever of the Hcbelziinder, thus firing theigniter and exploding the mine.(3) To Neutralize. If the mine is fitted witha Ilebchiinder, remove the turn glass plates, iiiserlsafety pin, and unscrew thr igliitvr. Then removethe detonator. If it is fitted with a chemicaligniter, unscrew the igniter by gripping it as lowas possihlc. Do not grip the corrugated portionwhich crushes vaSil\-.h. GERMAN ANTIPERSONNEL "POT MINE".(1) I)c~.sr/-iplior?. A crush igniter is screwed intothe top of the cylin(irl(31 I)otly of this mine bymeans of an adapter. The pressed steel body containsan esl)losive lilling CJi a~qmminiately 1ounces of powdered picric acitl.(2) Opri-,lfiOl/. A moderate ~mssure on thetop of the ignitw explodes the Ininr.(3) To n’c~lltrtrliz~~. L~iiscrew tile igniter,grasping it as low a> l)os~il)le. If tlic detonatorclots not conic out with the igniter, remove it byturning tlw mine up>ide down. If it does notthen drop oul, LIIISCI’C\V the xlaptcr ant1 removethe tlctonatcir. The total weight of the mine is1.2;/1 ounces.i. MODIFIED Schii-Minc. (1) 11c’SCl.ipti0l2.This modified Schii-wiuc may lx usetl with the2.Z.35 igniter. 7%~ 1x1~gc lit1 has a sloping frontthrough which the igniter I)luiig:er licxtl lx-otrudes.(2) opcYaliorr. 1’1-~‘i~ui-e on the lid causes thesloping fl-trnt to push mi the actuating pin. Thispulls out the l)lutlgcr of the igniter, causing it ‘to61-r. A hole is bored in the lid directly above thesafety pin of the igniter. A cord attached to theriiig of the satety pill is used to tll-aw the pinout through the hole to ;Lrnl tile nlille.VIII—75

I MARCH 19456. Antitank Minesa. GENERAL. The Germans use about 40 typesof antitank mines, but the four types of 7‘ellwminesare used nlost extensively.II. TELLERMIKE 4S (1LUSR1~00~1). (1) llcsc~~ijtioxIn place of the usual cover. this minehas a mushroom head prc‘ssure plate which scre\vsinto the igniter socket. Two thrcatletl sockets areprovided for subsitliary anti-lifting igniters. onein the side of the mine ant1 the other in tht. base.The positions of thrse two sockets vary. althoughthey always have been found on a tliametvr ofthe mine.(2) Charactcvistics.Diameter over-all 12.5 inches.Depth of body ........2.6 inches.Maximum height of mine.3.5 inches.IIiameter of mubhroomhead ..............7.5 inches.I)epth of mushroom head.1 inch.Total w-eight of mine ..17 pountls 5 ounces.c. TELLERMINE 1942 (T.Mi.4I?) (I) IIrscriptioiz.This mine consists of a cylintlrical. pressedsteelbody, containing a central detonator pocketwhich is surrountletl by a priming c)-lintler of acomposition resembling penthrite. Two pull ig-UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451niter sockets are provided, one in the side ot themine 4 inches from the carrying handle, :nl tliother in the base 2 inches from the center of themine. These sockets are screwed mto the bodyof the mine and waterproofed 1>\ rubber washers.A cylindrical cavity on the lop of the mine C‘OI~tainsthe pressure-plate a^sembh. This pressureplate carries a rubber wa>her or aluminum strip,which is secured to it by a >Uvl ring ^pot-weldedto the plate and forming a seal where it passesunder the lower edge of the flanged ring. Astrong spring provides the reM-Iance which mustbe overcome to depress the pre — ure plate. A central,threaded socket serves tor the m>ertion ofthe igniter assembly, T.Mi.Z.42' 1? I. cmiMsting ofa spring-loaded striker retained bv a >hear pm.The detonator resembles that u>ed m the Tellermine35. but it screws into the 'toilv ot the mine.(2) Clfnvarfrrisficx.Diameter of base . .12 ; : iillII

I MARCH 1945TM-E 30-451Figwc 7S.-—Tellermine 42.Figure 79.—Tellm~~i~~~ 35 (st~rl)VN—77

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(3) Fzmctiohzq. The mine functions whena minimum pressure of 495 pounds on the pressureplate causes the hexagonal cap to descendon the head of the plunger and shear the pinwhich retains the striker in the body of the igniter.cl. TELLERMINE 35 (STFXL) (T.Afi.3.5 Sfnld).This mine, 12yL idles in diameter, weighs 21pounds. Paintctl a mat gray, it is markedT.Mi.S 31 T Vii. 242 on the top in white paint;SA’8 12 42A, on the top in black paint; andTI’O 42, stamped On the top. In this model thepressure plate Lvhich extends over the cntirc mineis fluted, probably to prevent sand from blowingoff when the mine is buried. In the center ofthe pressure plate is a threatletl socket, closed b>a screwed plug \\:ith a milled head. This socketwill take the standard TXi. 2.35 igniter, but themine can also be used Lvith the igniter nsselnbly Ofthe Tellermine 42. The subsidiary igniter socketsare located on the bottom and side of the mine.e. TELCEKI\IISI~ 35 (T.Mi.35). (1) I)rscvi~tion.This is a circular mine with a Hat base andslightly convex cover. A strong spiral spring insidethe mine holds the cover against the turnedinflange of a skirt screwed to the outside of themain body. The central hole for the main igniterFigure SO.— Tellermine35 ii r i7/i anli-lil liin/ de'i'ices.(T.:ZIi.Z.3.5 or T.,lIi.Z.I2 ) il provided with a rul)her \\-asher to niakc a close joint with the body.When the T.Mi.Z.I2 is used, a steel plug mustbe placed in the central well. Two holes for adtlitionaligniters are provided. The central tube,I\-hich takrs the c.xl,lotl~r >~.~c,IIJ. c-ontains thedetonator, above which are two metal collars.:ibove thesr is a rubber ring. capable of compressionto make the assembly watertight. Theigniter scrc\vs into the cover cI the mine, so thatVIII—78Figure SI.—Trllemiur 35.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45the lmver face of the igniter presses hard againstthe rubber ring. One collar is a retaining coll;trfor the detonator; the other is an adjusting 01positioning collar for the igniter. The igniter isscrewed into the correct pusition by a special tool,and \vhen positioned it is secured by a sniall grubpassing through the collar. If this collar has beenrtmoved, it cannot be replaced correctly unlessthe special tool is available. Iimxrect positioningmakes the mint either too sluggish or too stmsitive.(2) Clrnmctc&firs.Diameter12.6 inches.Weight of mine 19.2 pounds.Weight of filling 11 pounds.Type of filling TNT.(3) Fz~nctiouiwg. The mine functions T\hcn thepressure on the covc2~ coml~r~2is~s the mint slxing.causing the hotly of the igniter to descend aidshear the pin holding the striker. I’ressurr uf 17.3to 400 pounds will explode the mine.(3) To nrutralix. ISxatninc the sides ant1bottom of the mine for anti-handling ignitcirs.Identify the ignitus ant1 neutralize. Iiemovc themain igniter from tlic mine, nimipulate the safetydevice, aiid inmietliately replace the igniter.f. TEI L IXMINE 20 I T. .lli. 29). (1) Dcsc~iption.This mine was the first of the Tellermineseries and was thought to have become obsolete,but it has been fount1 in 1:rance since D-Day. Itconsists of a cvlintlric-al hotly the lid of xvhichis provided with three sockets for the receptionof three Z.L).%. ZY ld-pul l igniters. These igniters,according to a C;~~iian tlocunxmt, are to beset at the heavy lm’bsure setting (marked S or1.25 kg.). Three atltlitional sockets, two in thesi(le and one in the base provide means of attachinganti-handling igniters.(2) CI~nu7rfcrisfic-.~DiameterHeightWeight.eigh t (Ii liliitic‘ypc of tilllllg . .Firing pressure .... 10 inches.. . .2.7 inches.. ht . 13.2 pmmtls..10 pounds...TXT.. . . 100-275 pounds.(3) Neutralization. Search for ant1 neutralizeanti-handling devices. Gnscrrw the three igniters.The mine . now safc~.g. IA. I’:. .\NTITA\I< GUISE. (1) Ilescviption.‘fliis is 3 circular mine with flat top and bottom,enclosed in two s:l~ic~r-.~ll;l~~ctl covers. In thecrnter of the tol) is a small cover plate securetlby bayonet catclics 1111~Ic’r \\Ilicli is a safety screxv.Figure 82—Tcllenuiu(, 29.Vni—79

IUNCLASSlFlEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure H3.-—L. I'. Z.hfinc.which when ~cr~\\-~tl tightI!, clockwise closes the Il. Topf 1RLRRC. (1) fhweriplinu. Tll? mineentry to the detonator. Abo ~ the blasting cap l)o(ly is a hollow cylindrical III-~. 0i 1jl:it on luie side, and unscrewedup, mine is safe.screw the primer plug.Th ev111— 40Figure 84.—Rkgelmine 43 (I

TM-E 30-45I5VJ INPRESSURE PLATEI SHEAR GROOVEGLASS FILLER CAPBOOBY TRAP WELtTOP VIEWGLASS FUZEASSEMBLY PLUGCARRYING HANDLEBOTl’OM VlEWFigure 85.—Topf .lli,le.((1) Rcniove thr igniter. Jvith fiw staiidai-(1 igt~it~~ scxkt.ts, one on top,(c) Unscrw protective detonator p&t . two on one side, and one at each end. Holes in(f) Remove the detonator and replace the the box correspond with tllv sockets on top andprotcctivc pocket 011 the ig-nittar.on thy sitlv, ~nal~liiig igiiitvrs to Ix inserted fromoutside and fitted as anti-Iwldlin~ dwices.i. Rirgcl. ANTITANK MINE (R. Mi. 1.3). (1‘i Z.Z. 42 igniters are inserted in the end socketsDesmiption. The mine consists of an wcawtl and their pins rest OII ~hcmltl~m at each end ofexplosive charge and of an outer box in two the tray am1 arv covered by ~\vivrl clips. Thelmrts, li(l and tray. The charge is provided chargr is supported in the, tray by two sh mVIII—8I

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451wires. For transport, two safety bars are insertedwhich take the weight of the charge offthe shear wires. \Vhen the safety bars are withdrawn,spring-loaded shutters close the holes.These shutters can be opened by pushing a pcncilor large nail through a hole in the base of thetray.The lid rests on the charge, and the ends ofthe shear wires arc led up over the lid and windlassedtogether to keep it on.(2) Charnrtcristirs.Length .........31.5 inches.Width ............ 3,;; inches.Height ............. 3% inches.Weight of mine 20.5 pounds.M’eight of explosive.. .8.8 pounds.Kature of explosive... .Amatol SO/SO.(3) Fwzrtio~hzg. Pressure on the lid of themine shears the shear wires and the pins of the2.2 42 igniters are pushed out, thus setting offthe mine.(4) Nez~fralixtion. Search for and neutralizeany anti-handling tlrviccs. ‘I‘ui-ii the mine on itsside and hy pushing a 1~~31 w nail through thehole in the base mist, the shutters covering thesafety bar holes. Insert safety -1)x-s. Cut shearwires and rcmovc litl. 01~1 swivel clips and,having seen that the loins of tltc. Z.Z. J2 ignitersarc resting on the shoultlcrs and not l)cncath, takeout the charge case. I~nscrew tllc, %.%. -/2 igniters.EOTE: The charge: case C;LII Ix inserted withone 2.2. J2 ig-niter pi11 reversctl and beneath theshoulders. In this ca>c the char-ge case must heslid out by lifting the tind in \\llich the Z.Z. ‘12igniter is usctl nornially.j . FRENCH LIGHT ANTITANK MINT.. (1) Description.The mine hotly consists of a recta-lgularsteel body filled with 5% pounds of HE.In the top of the mine are two ixtritcr pockets, oneat either end. The body is CWVI-cd with a slip-onrectangular cover the top of which is corrugated.There is a square hole in eit1x.r end of the cover?-;•• . .• i . V. i VIII—82Figure A'6.—French light antitank mine.

I MARCH 1945through which passes a safety Ijar which is I-C’moved when the mine is laid.(2) Actio?z. A pressure of from 300 poun~lsto 500 pounds in the lid C~LISCS it to descend onthe igniters, exploding the mine.(3) Chavactcristics.Length9V 2 inches.Width5y 2 inches.Height4;% inches.U’eight .... 14% pounds.(4) To ucutrnlix:(a) Search for and ncutralizc~ any anti-handlingdevices.(11) I

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451ANTITANK MINES IN USE BY THE GERMANSNAMELength(Inches)Width(Inches;Height Weight Igniter Firing(Inches) (Pounds) load REMARKS:Pounds)Tellermine 35.12.5(diam.)3.2 2 T.Mi.Z. 175 Fltted for anti-handling devices.35 400orT.Mi.Z.42Tellermine 35 (steel).12.5(diam.).5 20 T.Mt.Z. 12.5 Fitted for anti-handling devices.35or400T.Mi.Z.42Tellermine 42.12.3(diam.)4 20 T.Mi.Z. 250 Fitted for anti-handling devices.42 400Tellermine 43 (Mushroom).12.5(diam.)4 20 T.Mi.Z. 440 Fitted for anti-handling devices.600Tellermine 29.10(diam.)2.7 13.2 Z.D.Z. 10 Three igniters used.•29 275L. PZ. AT Mine.10.25(diam.).25 9 Five Paratroop mine.specialpressureigniters.Topf Mine.12.5(diam.).5 21.-775 Chemical 330 Non-metallic mine.Nonmetallic.Riegel Mine (R.Mi.43).32.7543.5 3. 5 ZZ.42 400 Fitted for three external igniters foranti handling.Wooden Box Mine (42).Hol.zmrne 42.(42(424H 12 ZZ.42 200Wooden Box Mine V.B.I.Holzmtne V.B.1.12124 12 ZZ.42 200Heavy Wooden AT Mine.1715.7510.5 37 DZ.35 200 Fitted for anti-handlmg devices.Panzer Schnellmine.Type A._20.75135 13 ZZ.42 Locally produced improvised mine.(approx.)Type B.20.75135 13 Buckbpprox.) igniter.Imprcvised Aluminum Mine.12.5(diam.). 5 14 to 16% DZ.35 130or 390T.Mi.Z.41C.V.P. f AT & Apers. Mine(Hungarian)10(diam.)3 8 60French Light AT Mine.9.55.55.5 4. 5 Rod 35 420Rod 36 500Dutch AT Mine T. 40.11(diam.)3.5 13 2 Pressure 100 Oval section.ballreleasetype.AT Mine Type N. (Norwegian).15.755-55 10 Pressure ?Belgian Heavy AT Type HA.98.758.75 33 Shear 400Pin andStriker.Figure 88.Y!!!—84

I MARCH 1945?. Ignitersa. PULL IGNITERS. (1) Bakelite Z.Z.IZ'IZi; & “”ziinder 42). The pin, the striker, and the actuatingspring of this igniter are steel. The body andthe collar are plastic mouldings, and the capholder is brass. Between the lower end of thesp;ring and the striker head are a metal washerand a felt washer which act as a guiding gland.The over-all length is 3% e, inches, and the diameteris yz inch.(2) Zugzilnder 35 (2.2.35). (a) Descriptiolz.This igniter is used with trip wires to operateS-mines, improvised m&es, and booby traps.The heavy antitank mines have this igniter as abooby trap against lifting the lid, and it also isused as an extra igniter in Tellermines and as themain igniter in the drifting mine. The brassbody of the igniter contains a sliding cylinder, acompressing spring, the striker, and the strikerspring. In the unarmed position, the safety pinis prevented from falling out by a nut on the endof the pin and by a spring clip. When the nut isremoved prior to arming, the clip still holds thepin in place until it is pulled away by a cord. (b) Operation. In the armed position thestriker is held only by two small totters, whichproject into the groove behind the head of thestriker. When the sliding cylinder is pulled upabout 3/ /16mch,. the totters are freed and moveoutwards, releasing the striker. The pull requiredto fire the igniter is 9 to 13 pounds.(c) To neutralize. The igniter is made safeby pushing a small nail through the hole in thestriker. The trip wire then may be cut.(d) To disqm. When the igniter is fitted intoa mine or charge, unscrew the igniter with thenail in place and remove the detonator.(3) Zug-und Zerschneideziinder 35 (Zu.2.2.35). (a) Description. This igniter is usedchiefly in places where tension wires are easilyconcealed. It functions in two .ways—either bypull on a wire or by cutting .the wire. In bothcases it is set by securely fastening a wire throughthe hole in the head of the movable cylinder. Thebody of the igniter contains a movable cylinder,a striker spring, and the striker. The striker isheld in position by two totters. The movable cylinderslides inside a sleeve fitted in the end ofthe main housing. This sleeve has two slotsthrough which the safety pin passes. These slotsallow for adjustment of the igniter when settingthe charge. -When the igniter is to be armed, theTM-E 30-451wire is attached to the cylinder and given enoughtension to hold the safety pin near the center ofthe slot. This ensures kasy withdrawal of thesafety pin after the charge or mine has been laid.Before withdrawal of the pin the nut is removedfrom the end of it.(b) Operation. When properly armed the igniterwill function if the tension wire is pulledor cut.(c) To neutralize. If the safety pin has beenremoved, and the tension wire is intact, push asmall nail through the safety-pin hole, and, afterdetermining that there is no igniter on the otherend of the wire, the wire may be cut.b. PRESSURE IGNITERS. (1) Druckziinder 3.5(OZ.35 Type A). (a) Description. This is amechanically-acting, push igniter, designed for usewith improvised mines and booby traps. It is alsothe main igniter of the heavy antitank mine. Itconsists of an aluminum body and a plungerwhich carries the 1ya-inch pressure head. Theplunger is held away from the cap by a strongspring. Within the plunger is a recess for thestriker and spring. Two steel balls rest partlyin two holes in the plunger and retain the strikerin the cocked position. When in the safe position,the plunger is prevented from moving by a safetypin.(b) Operation. After withdrawal of the safetypin the igniter is fired by pressure on the head,which depresses the plunger until the steel ballsare free to escape into the space in the guide. Thestriker then is released and fires the cap. Apressure of 130 to 160 pounds (corresponding toa depression of about J/J inch) is sufficient to firethe igniter.(c) To neutralize. Push a nail into the safetypin hole and secure it in place to prevent its fallingout.(d) To disarm. After neutralizing the igniter,unscrew it from the charge and remove thedetonator.(2) Druckziinder 35 (OZ.35 Type B).(a) Description. This igniter functions exactlythe same way as type A, though its constructiondiffers in a few minor details. The body is madeof unpainted brass, and the diameter of the pressurehead is 1 inch. The retaining steel balls arereplaced by two small totters, placed below thehead of the striker. The cap is located in thebase plug.(b) Operation. After withdrawal of the safetypin, the igniter is fired by pressure on the head.V!ll—8s

I MARCH 1945When the plunger is depressed about y$ inch,the two small totters escape from the ainto the space below. The striker then is releasedand fires the cap. The pressure required in Insidecases is as low as 50 pounds.(c) To neutralize. Same as for Type A.(d) To disarm. Same as for Type A.(3) S-Minekinder 35 (S.Mi.Z.35). (a) Description.This igniter is used to initiate norS-mine when set as a pressure operated screwe dThe body of the igniter is made of aluminum whiholds a pressure spring, plunger, striker, anstriker spring. A central part of the body acts asa distance piece and guide for the plunger. i asteel antennae, 1% inches long, are i s tothe head of the plunger. This hollow downtakes the striker, which is held in position tainingits spring by two steel balls. The balls are shouldpartly in two holes in the plunger and partly strika groove in the striker. The safety pin te mpttained in its hole by a spring-loaded and th enut. When the safety pin is withdrawn, o f mineis armed.(b) Operation. Pressure on the antennaecauses the plunger to descend, and after movingapproximately 0.2 inch the steel balls fall awayreleasing the striker. The firing pressure is approximately15 pound s .(c) To neutralize. Push a nail into the safetypin hole. Care must be taken in handling essigniter as a slight steady pressure may cause itto function.(4) Tellerwainenzihder 42 (T.Mi.Z.42). Thisigniter consists of a simple steel striker plat eagainst the pressure of a steel spring by a shearwire. The striker is in a steel casing. A percussioncap is at the base of the casing. The pressurenecessary on the head of the striker is approximately400 pounds.(5) Tellernzineneiinder 43 (T.Mi.Z.43). devDescription. The chief feature of this igniter,which can be used in Tellermines 35, 35 (steel),42, and 43, is that once it has been placed in themine and armed it cannot be removed withoutexploding the mine. The head of the T.Mi.Z.43is approximately y4 inch higher than that of theT.Mi.Z.42. The upper shear pin is g inch abovethe body of the igniter. The outer l i on thearming shear pins can be seen on the sides of theigniter body, either y z inch or % inch below thetop of the igniter body. The igniter consists of abody into which is pressed a cap retainer. Insideis a pressure sleeve, which protrudes above theUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451casing. The upper part of the sleeve is fitted witha strong shear pin, and the lower part is connectedto the igniter body by a weak brass arming wire.Inside the pressure sleeve is a plain tubular strikerguide containing the striker, held in place by tworetaining balls.(b) Operation. The igniter is inserted in thenormal manner, and the top of the mine isscrewed on. This depresses the pressure sleeve,which in turn shears the weak arming pins withan audible snap. The anti-lifting device of theigniter now is armed. The igniter can be set offin either of two ways. When the pressure plateis crushed or pressur e sleeve is platedown until the strong shear pin is cut. The retainingballs escape into the recess above theshoulder of the sleeve, freeing the spring-loadedstriker which fires the percussion cap. Any attemptto unscrew the pressure plate or cap ofthe mine will cause it to explode. Under pressureof the spring the sleeve follows any upward movementof the plate or cap and after about % inchupward travel the balls escape below the sleeve,again releasing the striker.(c) Disarming. Since there is no way to determinewhether a Tellermine is armed with thisigniter, no pressure t or screw hi s shouldbe removed from caps mines. They should belifted and destroyed. However, should it be necessaryto determine i tbe of nec - wind arope or tracing tape counter-clockwise around thepressure plate or screw cap four complete times.Then pull from a safe distance to unscrew theplate or cap.(6) T.Mi.Z.35. (a) Description. This pressureigniter has only been found in Tellermines.The brass body contains a floating striker assembly.The striker head is striker to fit a s jection on the spindle. This is a secondary safety device to keep the weight of the striker off theshear pin until the. igniter is armed. A whitemark with the word Sicker (safe) above it, anda red mark with the word Scharf (armed) aboveit are inscribed on the head of the igniter. Whenthe screw head is turned so the red spot movesfrom the safe to the armed position, the projectionmoves clear of the striker head.(b) Operation. In the min the lower e ofthe guide compresses the ring situated above theadjusting collar. Pressure on the cover of themine moves the body of the igniter down againstthe rubber on the collar and so exerts a force onVIII—86

MARCH 1945TM-E JO-451B.Z. 24 B.Z. 39 NB.B.Z. 38 B.Z. 39 B.Z. FXP. B.Z 4.5 Feld Sehlag Reisszun-Mod - SEC. Ruhr. der.B.Z.E.i.?---•• 3Reibzikder West. ZDSCHN ANZ. 29. ZDSCHN ANZ. 39. B.Z.Figure 89.—Friction Igniters.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Z.Z. 35. Z.u.Z.Z. 35. Z.u.Z.Z. 35 Mod. Z.Z. 42.Figure 90.—?di 1plitrr.sT.MIZ. 35.Hebekiinder.Figure PI.— Presswr Igniters.VIII—88

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4~1D.Z. 35(A). D.Z 35(B). Fred A.T.T.MLZ. 42. T.Mi.Z. 43 S.Mi.Z. 35.Figwr 91 (Continued).VIII—89

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451top of the striker, shearing the pin. The strikerthen moves under the pressure of the spring.(c) To neutralize. If the mines have beensubjected to blast, unscrew the igniter gently.Hold the igniter clear of the mine with the cappointing away. Turn the red spot on the screwhead from Sclzarf to Siclzer. Fix the claw attachedto the wire, or a similar improvisation, intothe slotted end of the safety bolt, and press thesafety bolt home. Replace the igniter in the mine,screwing it in hand tight. If the mines are knownto be in good condition, turn the red spot fromScharf to Siclzer, using a coin, not a screwdriver.Fix the claw attached to the wire into the slottedend of the safety bolt and press the bolt home.striker spring, percussion cap, detonator holder,and detonator.(b) Operation. The clockwork mechanism iswound. A weight of at least 10 pounds is placedon the plunger. The safety bar is released, permittingthe clockwork mechanism to function for\Yi minutes with a loud buzzing sound, withdrawingthe internal sound, wi th d r aw armed.(c) To neutralize. Once this device is armedit cannot be neutralized.(2) Tilt Igniter, Ki.Z.43 (Kippsiinder 43).(a) Description. The tilt igniter is designed tofire whenever the tilt rod is moved in any direction.This tilt rod is on top of the igniter, whichcontains a sliding pressure piece, pressure spring,hollow striker, striker spring, and two retainingballs. The detonator assembly includes percussioncap and detonator. An extension rod, 24^4inches long, is connected by pushing the sleeve"\i r the tilt rod.Figure 92.—Pressure Release Device I /Itc. OTHER IGNITERS. (1) Pressure ReleaseDevice, E.Z.44 (Entlastungsziilzdcr 44). (a) Description.This device is intended primarily forbooby-trapping Tellermines. Any attempt to removethe mine permits a plunger to rise, settingoff an S-ounce charge of TNT-PETN. A movingof 10 pounds is sufficient to hold the devicemothe armed position, and a built-in insid etime-delay protects the person setting it from piecmature detonation. The device is housed in asteel body crimped at the base. The w i l lmechanism fills one-half of r e duce s whilethe explosive occupies the remaining space. t ooperating mechanism includes the pressure releaseassembly, including plunger, plunger Thi sand striker retaining arm; the clockwork mechanism; and the firing assembly, including b eVIII—90Figure 93.—Tellcrmine zvith Tilt Igniter attached.(b) Operation. The igniter is armed by removingthe safety pin. When the tilt rod ismoved in any direction, the tilt-rod base is tiltedinside the igniter body, depressing the pressurepiece, thus freeing the striker. A lateral pressureof 15 to 23 pounds on the end of the tilt barwill fire the igniter. Use of the extension rodreduces the pressure needed to explode the igniterto 1J-2 pounds.(3) S-Mine Igniter 44. (a) Description.This igniter is a combination push-and-pull type,with the standard German igniter thread. It canbe used in mines and charges other than the S.Mi.

I MARCH 1945 •UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 94.—Clockwork Long-delay Igniter (J-l'cder 504).44. The steel case of the igniter contains a springloadedstriker above a percussion cap and detonatorsocket. The striker protrudes through thetop of the igniter. Two flat, winged, actuatingpieces are held together at the top by a safetypin. Holes in these pieces serve for the attachmentof trip wires.(b) Operation. The igniter is armed after thesafety pin is withdrawn. A pressure of 21pounds on the wings of the actuating pieces, oran outward pull of 14 pounds on the trip wires,opens the winged actuating pieces sufficiently torelease the striker and fire the percussion cap.(c) To neutralise. This igniter requires extremecare in neutralization. In place the igniteris completely covered, leaving only the wings exposed.Carefully locate the wings and removeenough earth to insert a safety pin or nail throughthe pin holes. If trouble is encountered in insertingthe pin or nail, the mine is dangerousand should be destroyed in place. Unscrew theigniter, lift the mine, and remove the detonator.(4) above long delay igniter (J-Feder504). s triker is a clockwork mechanismni t er . be set to function at any desired delayfrom 10 h e l d 21 days. It is used for specialdemolitions.(5) Crztslt Type Cilr>wical C IBu~k" Igniter.(a) peration. This igniter is a chemical,i stype, consisting of a thin metaldrum, with circumferential grooves to reduce itsresistance to vertical pressure. It contains a glassactuat ing filled with acid, surrounded by ath e powdered, flash composition. It weighs 1ounce.(b) alization. A moderate pressure on topof ove red , crushes the metal drum and theloc a t e inside it. The acid pours into thesaf t e y and a flash results, setting offdetonator and mine.VIII—9!

I MARCH 19458. Bridging Equipmenta. GENERAL. (1) Development. Apart fromthe introduction of a 60-ton type in the armoreddivision bridging column, German bridging equipmenthas undergone few important changes sincethe beginning of the war. Standard types are notnumerous; particular emphasis is placed upon theconstruction of improvised bridges at the earliestpossible stage of a river crossing.(2) B&@g operations. The initial stage ofan assault crossing is carried out by storm boats.These may be supplemented by pneumatic boatssupplied in three sizes. Once a bridgehead hasbeen established, pneumatic boats play an importantpart, either in ferrying personnel and stores,or in construction of rafts and light bridges.The superstructure for these light bridges consistsof standard timber members carried readyfor construction. Ready made timber bridgesfor crossing dry gaps also are carried, and someengineer units carry a light box girder andponton equipment known as bridging equipment"D". In the third stage of a river crossing,when the bridge is required for normal traffi: ofapproximately 24 tons, bridges from the divisionalbridging column are used. Of these, there aretwo types: bridging equipment "B", a pontontrestle bridge; and bridging equipment "K", abox girde; bridge supported on pontons and trestles.A third type, bridging equipment "J", designedto accommodate the heavier German tanks,replaces the "K" equipment in armored divisions.(3j Heavy bridges. Heavier semi-permanentbridges includes the L.Z. bridge, a sectionalized,through-girder type which is launched from aroller bed; the Herbert, with a girder superstructuresupported on large sectionalized pontons, andthe "S" equipment, used for heavy traffic overwide rivers and consisting of a double-way superstructureon sectionalized pontons similar to thoseof the Herbert. Railway bridges are representedby the Roth-Wagner, Krupp, and Ungaw bridges.b. BOATS USED IN RAFTING AND BRIDGING.(1) Small pnemaatic boat.Length............... < 4 feet 10 inches.Beam over-all 3 feet 9 inches.Weight ............ I16 pounds.Capacity ............ ;3 armed men or 660pounds.(2) Pneumatic boat assault bridge. Thisbridge can be built ,in any lengths in a currentVIII—92UNCLASSIFIEDUTM-E 30-451!up to 2yb knots and will carry infantry in singlefile.Weight of superstructure—L?.8 pounds perfoot.Total weight of bridge—23.7 pounds per foot (3) Medium p~zeumhic boat. (a) Description.These pneumatic boats can be used as supportsfor the standard German 2>$-ton, 4%-ton, and9-ton rafts. The 2j/-ton raft consists of two;boats; the 4%-ton raft has four boats in the formof two pairs in tandem, and the g-ton raft hasthree pairs in tandem,(b) Characteristics.Length over-all ......18 feet.Beam over-all 6 feet 1 inch.Weight330 pounds.Crew7 men.Capacity, not includingcrew1.35 tons.(4) Motor boat. (a) Description. Thiscraft is used primarily for pushing and towingrafts and bridge sections in bridging operations.It also can be used for river reconnaissance andbarge towing. It is transported on a specialtwo-wheel trailer, which is provided with gearso the' boat can be launched and recovered directfrom the trailer. The motor boat is a broadbeamedcraft constructed of steel plates withcopper-nickel rivets.(b) Characteristics.Length over-all 23 feet.Beam over-all 6 feet 7 inches.Depth amidships......4 feet.Draught, fully laden. . .2 feet (approximately).Weight of boat unloaded..........2 tons (approximately).Capacity, when nottowingSpeed, towing tension1.4 tons 5% knots.Speed, towing tension1,900 pounds ......7 knots.Capacity of fuel tank..33 gallons.6 men, including crew,or 1.7 tons evenly distributedon floor boards.Maximum running timeon full tank 6 hours (appro&mately..(c) Etzgine. The boat is driven by a sixcylinder,Maybach-type, S5, water-cooled, gasolineengine.Horsepower80 at 1,400 rpm.Total engine capacity.. .7 liters (427 cubic inches)(approximately).Maximum permissiblerevolutions in stillwater e ,,..,,...,....1,400 rpm.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(d) Trailer. The two-wheel trailer includeschassis, extensible tipping slipway, travelingcradles, winch, and hoisting cable. It has thefollowing characteristics:Weight, unloaded..... 2% tons.Length over-all.......24 feet 9 inches.Length with boat.....28 feet 6 inches.Length extended 32 feet 4 inches.Width over-all 6 feet 7 inches.Length of hoistingcable49 feet 3 inches.Working party 6 men.(5) Storm bout. (a) Description. This boat,when in operation, is carried and launched byeight men, while four men are required to carryand install the motor. The boat is steered bypivoting the motor on the bracket which attachesit to the stern. The helmsman stands in thestern gripping two handles at the front of themotor.(b) Characteristics.Length19 feet 9 inches.BeamS feet 2 inches.Depth amidships 2 feet 1 inch.Weight475 pounds.MaterialWood.Crew2 men.Capacity7 men in addition to crew.Maximum speed, loaded. IS to 16 knots.Transport3 boats with motors onspecial trailer.(c) Engine. This is a "mechanical oar" propulsionunit: a propeller attached to a long shaftrunning through a casing bolted to the engine.The propeller revolves several feet behind theboat.Length13 feet 6 inches.Width2 feet 9 inches.Height2 feet.Weight (without oiland fuel)..... = _ , ,375 pounds.Weight (with oil andfuel) .........412 pounds.BHP 30.Cylinders4, horizontally opposed.Running time on fulltank ............. ls hours.Propeller a . ........3 blade, IO:& inches indiameter.(6) Large pneumatic boat. This is the largestof the three standard pneumatic boats and isgenerally used singly.Length over-all 26 feet.Beam over-all 9 feet 9 inches.Weight637 pounds.Maximum buoyancy. 13.5 tons.c. PONTON AND TRESTLE BRIDGES. (1)Training ponton bridge. (a) Description. Thereis little evidence of this equipment being usedoperationally; it is thought to be kept for training.There are two types of light ponton andtrestle bridges: one with half pontdns havinga load capacity of 4 tons, and the other withdouble-ponton piers having a load capacity of5% tons. The decking used for this bridge alsois used in bridging and rafting with pneumaticboats.(b) Characteristics.Half ponton:LengthBeam12 feet.5 feet.Depth2 feet 6 inches.Superstructure:Timber with decking.20 feet by 2 feet.Track width........8 feet.Bay length 20 feet.(2) Pontolz and trestle bridge (Czech). Thisequipment consists of steel half pontons andcenter sections. Two types of bridges are built.(a) Roadways built on piers of one half pontonand one center section, with a capacity of S.2tons and the following characteristics.Pier length:Half ponton 16 feet.Center section 8 feet.he s.•....4 feet 6 inches.Track width 8 feet.Bay length21 feet.(b) Roadway built on piers of two half pontonsand one center section, with a capacity 16.5tpns and the following characteristics:Track width 8 feet.Bay length21 feet.Complete pier:i n ..4 feet 6 inches.Length ..40 feet.VIII— 93

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451UNCLASSIFIED(3) Light ponton and trestle equipnaent(Brtickengeriit C). The three following typesof bridges can be built with this equipment.Detail Type 1 . Type 2 Type 3Type of bridge Footway on half pontons. Bridge of two pier raft. Bridge of three pier raft.Capacity Single file. 4.5 tons. S.9 tons.Floating unit Timber of aluminum non-revers- Two half pontons clipped together to make pier.ible half pontons.Unit length 12 feet 9 inches (approximately). 25 feet 6 inches (approximately).Unit beam 4 feet 6 inches (approximately). 4 feet 6 inches (approximately).Superstructure Single. decking strips. Four decking strips.Track width 2 feet 1% inches. 8 feet 6 inches.Bay length 22 feet 11% inches. 22 feet \V/ 2 inches.(4) Mediuwt ponton and trestle equipment(Brtickengeriit T).Detail Type 1How used Bridge with road bearers span-Type 2As in Type 1 but with anType 3A three-pier raft.ning from center of one ponton extra ponton in center ofto center of next ponton. span.Capacity 4.5 tons. 11 tons. 10 tons.Floating unit Timber reversible ponton with As for Type 1.distinct bow and stern.Length 29 feet 6 inches. Same as Type 1.Beam 5 feet 11 inches. Same as Type 1.Superstructure Timber decking on six timber Timber decking on nine timber road bearers.road bearers.Track width 8 feet 6 inches. Same as Type 1.Bay length 22 feet 1 % inches. Same as Type 1.(5) Heavy polzton and trestle equipment(BrUckengerZt B). This is the standard. combatequipment of the German Army.Detail Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4Type of bridge Roadway spanning from center of pontonTwo Two pier rafts Two pier raftscenter of ponton. Whole ponton piers. half pontons. whole pontons.Capacity 4.5 tons. 10 tons. 10 tons. 20 tons.Floating unitsNon-reversible steel or alloy pontons with upswept bows.Length 49 feet 11 inches. 24 feet ^ inches. 49 feet 11 inches.Beam 5 feet 9 inches. 5 feet 9 inches.Superstructure Steel 1 section road bearers with single timber decking. 12 road bearers withdouble decking anddouble raft connectors.Track widthAll types: 8 feet 6 inches.Bay lengthAll types: 20 feet 9 inches.Capacity ofDivisionalBridge Column 400 to 430 feet. 250 feet. 250 feet. 170 feet.VIII—94

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 95.—.Snlall p~zezrw~ntic boat.Figure 94.—Track bvidgr apzd ?JfEdiJfJJt pnemnatic boat.VIM—95

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45IFigure 97,—K Bridge.Figure 98.—L.Z. Bridge.VIII—96

I MARCH 1945(6) I.ight timber bridges otz fixrd snpporfs.(a) Folding single span foot Oridgcs. Thisc~uilmu~t Is made up of two single mcinbers,hinged together, and consisting each of t\vo 3inch round timber roadbearcrs supporting threecross bearers to which are wired two planks (9foot 10 inches by 10 inches by 3yz inches. Thisbridge is trussed by means of a timber strut ashort distance off center and a system of ties. Thetotal Icngth of the bridge is 19 fevt S inches.(I,) Light tvaclscd hidgc. This is a lighttracked timber bridge, constructed in t\\-o loadrating-s: 6 tons and 9.5 tons. It gcncraIl>- issqq~ortctl by simple framed trcstlcs, hut if floatingsupports are nwtled the large pncuniatic l)oatis usctl. The following tables give tlw crosssrctions of the roatlbearvrs for \rarying sl)ansand loatls:SpanBridge 33 frrt 16 fwt 6 inches 20 fretG-ton 7 x 7 inclles Ss 7 inchc< 9 s S incllcs.95ton Sx8inches 945x S inches 10% s 9 % inches.(7) 27-Ton heavy tracked bl-idye. (a) Dcscriptio/r.This bridge is a variation of the lightUNCLASSIFIEDU l L n^ TM-E 30-45Itracked bridge, with a capacity of 27 tons. itconsists of t\vo ba!-s and a 5l)an of 29 feet 6incht5. A single hem framed trestle is usedas a central sulq)ort.(b) Components.Bri(l:gc -‘cat, :Lengthl.i feel.WidthiI ili~~l7~5.Depth,S inches.Ramps .Length;feet.Width4 feel 9 inches.Roadbenrcr^ :Length1-1 feet 9 inches.Width7 inches.Depth') j inches.T1-ack icclioll:Length4 feet 11 inches.Width u\er-all ! feet 9 inches.Useful width 4 feet 3 inches.Trestle:Capill alidGro~in~liill :LengthI .i ird.Width7 inches.Lkpth ...... S :; iwlies.Figure 99.—Hcrbcrt Brid.qc.VIII—97

I MARCH 1945d. FIXED TIRIDGES. (1) SllKll /110X girder(Briickcngcriit K). This equipment is capable ofcarrying heavy vehicles and light tanks overshort gaps. It is eswntially an assault bridgeand can span gaps of 31 feet 6 inches, 47 feet3 inches, or 63 feet with box girders alone. Thebridge always is built with three girders andhas a carrying capacity of 27 tons. ‘I‘rrstlrsand pontons are supplied to span wet or dry gallswith a series of bridges;.(2) Light srrtiollal bridgr (Lcirlltr ZBriickc). This is a through bridge with a timberroadway, approximately 12 feet wide, slunglwtween two main girders of brawd steel pawls8 feet 2 inches long and 7 feet 10 inches high.The normal bridge cannot span a gal> grcatc.rthan 147 feet 6 inches, and is rated over thisand all lesser spans at 33 tons for tanks. 1\-ithspecial underslung bracing the span may 1~ increasedto 172 fert without altering its rating.(3) Hcrhcr-t Bridge. This bridge is sometimescalled the "Italian Meccano Bridge". Itis through-girtkr type with a lo-foot clear roatlway.Each girder is constructed of stwl latticepyramids, made of angle iron and channel struts.The decking is of 6-inch timber plank. The Germanclassification of this bridge is 18 tons owr82 feet. This bridge also may be used in conjunctionwith trestles or pontons.e. HEAVY BRIDGING EQIJIPNEKT. J 42 audJ 43 I

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH ,945 TM-E 30-451Figwc lOl.—Electric chtriii-.w7~t.d. GERMAN PORTARLE POUTR SAWS. (1) Li,qllt e. ~I.KI.RTC GL,.XIR.\'IORS AK'D ~T.ECTRTCpozvr sa w . (a) Drsrriptio~. The main com- POWER TOOLS. (1) /;;('/t/ ~plU~7fi?lg Wt. (a)ponents are the gasoline motor with its gearing, IIt-sc.r.iptjoll. ‘I‘liis field generating set is used bythe clutch, saw blade, and saw chain. The saw Gcrnlan arnly en~i~iw1rs in mobile workshops forblade can be turned through 90 degrees for power drivrii tools. It i5 alw used for charghcorizontalor vcrticnl cutting and is locked in ing storage batteries.position by a lever.())) Characteristics.(b) Characteristics. n^na.i,.,, Uaschina.sat: 220/380.Weight including fuel.. Ill pounds. Weight -.07 poundsEffcctiue length of \~c i l!ht~I Ol Ol-. . .,3172c\,”Ilrrll~T,llln~ls. 2 str.lic.bIadc. •. 3 feet 3 inches. Type of yen,nitnr \C.Revolutions per minute.2,600. -i--, . ,, , t-Speed of cutting chain.21 Feet per srcontl.YldlSI\ilo\\;itt>....(A._'211.‘330.Fuel consumption 1:; to 2yi pints per hour.(2) Heavy pozver satv. (a) Description. (2) German elective two-speed drill. ThisThis is sinlilar to the light lower saw. It is too niachinc is uwtl for boring holes in the collheavyfor hand use and is In-ovided with three struc.tiou of illll~l-o\.iw(l l)ri(lgcs. The drill noradjustal)lelegs and a large l,ogie for whcvling mally uses its o\\.n detachable mounting hut, forinto I>osition. The saw lk~tle can he swivelltd boring UYMII~. it may be held by hand. The drillabout the axis of the chain drive \zheel, as well as consists of a 50-cycle AC motor, consuming 800vertically of horizontally.watts, fitted with a Morse talwr sleew and a(b) Characteristics. t\\-o-spwl g:c’ar box giving 200 to 400 revolu\ITcight inclutling fuel..I72 pounds.tions Iwr niinutc.Effective length of f. (-IL

I MARCH 1945l)ack stays. For pile-driving from la d the framcTheis mounted on four wheels. These wheels arereplaced by bealllS when pile-driving is carrictlt\yeeon from a raft. A two-drum, hand winch servesto raise and lo\ver the pile driver. The followingcan be operatd on the frame :(b) Characfcrisfics.Three-piece Ilnntloperatedmollkey 430 foot pounds.Comp”~S”l aIr piletlrivcr ........360 foot pounds.Com~~r~5scd air piletlri\cr .......... 1,340 foot pc"lllds.lXe

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IFigure 101.—Electric chain-saiv.d. GERMAN PORTABLE POWER SAWS. (\) Light e. ELKCTRIC GE M RATORS AND ET.ECTRICpower sa71’. (a) Dcsrvipfioll. The main cotu- POWER TO0L.S. (1) l : ield generating set.. (a)ponents are the gasoline tnotor with its gearing, 1Ic.vvipfiorr. This field generating set is used bythe clutch, saw blade, and saw chain. The saw Gertiian arniy ctigincc~t-i in mol~ile norkshn~~s forblade can be turned through 90 degrees for power drivctl tools. h is also used for charg‘or or vcrticnl cutting and is locked in ing storage 1)attcries.position bv+ a lever.(1)) Clrrrr- crc- f~, i , i . c /i~..~.(b) Characteristics. De^na.i,,,, M^hinauat; 220/380.Lf’eight including fuel.. 111 poun~l~. WY^ht =,1)7 poundsEffective length of Molm. _, o ]JM(]i . ri ,blade 3 feet 3 inches. ^ - , . ,•ptnf e. J vpe i ucneratnr. . ,\( .Revolutions per minute.2,600. T.:, , ,„ . . . . ' , , Kilowatts (•.Speed of cutting chain.21 Feet per second. y j , "DMiflFuel consumption Vy\ to 2j/£ pints per hour.(2) HeUVy PoZCvY saw. (a) Drscriplio7r. (2) German electric two-speed drill. ThisThis is sinlilar to the light l)owet- saw. It is too macliinc is tiwl ior boring boles in the cotiheavyfor hand use and is ~~rovitled with thrw str-uction of inil~ro\~i.i, 11l)ri(l,q~~s. The drill noradjustablelegs and a large bogie for whwlin~ mally uses it< own detachable mounting but, forinto ~2osition. The saw blade can be swivelkd bar-in2 woo(1. it may be held bv hand. The drillabout the axis of the chain drive wheel, as well as consists of a .iO-c&Iv .\C ‘tn&r. consuming 800vertically of horizontally.watts, fiitc,tl \vith n llorx~ t:tlwr sleeve and a(11) Chmcfrristirs. two-speed gear box y:i\,ittg 200 to 400 revolli-Weight inclutling fuel.. 172 pounds.tions per niinritc~.Effective length of tion s P E R 1 )I(I \.IRS. (1) Field Pi/cblade3 feet 3 inches. ,-, . . r- -,i\-m , , n •. ,• T-I •Revolutions per minute.2,300.' vm 0"" e lh? -< i] Thls»"P*°n-Re v o lutions perminute. 2.3 00. per second.Fuel consumption ȯf cuttingchain.23. .2% to 3 pints per hour.equipnwnt consists of a guide mast with a doubleblock at thy tq. sqq~)t-ted on a base by twoVIII—99

UNCLASSIFIED1 MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451figure 103.—Tube leelt set -;eilh iicce.ssorics.(2) German Tube Well 1937 Pattern, withAccessories "A" and "B". This tube well is asuction pump capal)le of lifting \vntcr from adepth of 26 feet. Accessory "A" extends thetlq)th to alm~t 33 feet. ~~\cccssor-\- "I’,” ],erlllit,~the pump to be used for pumping surface water.h. MARKINGS OF CYLINDERS OK INDUSTRIALGASES. The Germans always stamp the type ofgzts their cylintlers conlain into the metal it pounds). These tools aresimilar m design but I he internal parts are not interchangeable,l'olh of these rock drills can beused by attaching American standard air lineswith the universal coupling used on the Germandrills.(2) German F.M.I. Air Compressor, (a)r.iujiite. This is a foiir-cvlinder gasoline enginewith magneto ignition. I he horsepower rating isvIII— lol

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure lOI.—F.M.A. Air Comprrssor.27 at 950 rc.volutions per minute. The main pressure is presumed lo be approximately 90shaft is connected to the compressor by a single pounds per square inch. The :Lir tank is of undiscclutch with a rotating collar and a manual usual design. It canGsts of t111.ve short sectionsengaging lever. There are two water pun~ps, one of steel tubing welded into a "V" sllalw withattached to the engine and one to the compressor, the open ends sealctl off. ‘I‘lli- air tank is used(b) cofll,).es.w. ‘I‘hc compressor is a two- as the hasc for momlillg thI.I I~~IIV :~ntl comvylintler,single-stage mechanism. The operating pressor.VIII—i02

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451I. GeneralSection VI.CHEMICAL WARFAREEQUIPMENTThe German military organization is thoroughlyprepared for chetnical warfare. Germany'schemical industry is highly developed; ccluiptncntand stocks of war gases in storage and pro(luctionare atnple, and adccluate well trained pwsonnelare available. Offensively or defensively,the German Army is in a position to \\-age chemicalwarfare at any time. Unusual activity in rcsearchand manufacture has taken place in (;crmanchemical plants since the beginning of thewar, and from time to titne movements of wargases from one area to another have been reported.Military depots at-e believed to be ampI>stocked with gas shells of all calibers. Constructionof anti-gas shelters in German cities, issw ofgas masks to civilians, and a constant examinationand replacement of gas mask canisters have beenregularly carried out.2. Defensive Equipmenta. GAS ~\IASKS. (1) (;wxd. liosr Gp;.mangas masks are of tlw snout type, in whtch thecanister is connected directly to the facepiece.T~pcs Gill 30 and GM 38 arv in general ttse. andin addition to the standard masks there are severalsl)ecial types. Gc~m;~Ily, (;erman gas masks providegood protectiotl against tlte common wargases. and fair l)rotc.c.tion against such gases asarsine. h~tlr-ocyntiic acid. and cyanogen chloride.The (;ernt:ms aLo have three types of gas masksfor horws and one fur dogs.(2) Gas i7fnd, GM 30. The faccpicce is offour-layer, field gray tabric, \vith a suede leatherfitting band, a IAtllc~i- chili sulq)ort, and plasticeyepieces. The hwtl liarnc+ has seven pointsof attachment. There is 2 cotton strap for suspendingthe mask from the neck in an alert position.Some GM 30 facepieces are fitted with anatlaptcr for n~icrol~ltc~tre.Figure 106.—German II. II mid FF 42 Canisters (largeris I he II: 42).Figure l&5.-—Germas gas mask, GM 30.Canisters normally used with this mask are theEE 41 and the EE 12. The EE II canister isdrun-shal)cYl and painted green. It measures2s inches by 4J4 inches in diameter and weighs11.9 ounces. 1t is Iwing replacrtl by the FE 42,the canister of which is the newest and most efficientof the scrvicr, catlistcrs. Extcrnnlly, it issimilar to the FE Il. but is larger and heavier,measuring 3)s inchc, high 1)~ 455 inches in diameter,and weighing 10.3 OUI~C~~S.The stantlarcl carric~r is a corrugated cylindricalmetal case with a hinged cover and cotton carrierstraps. It is paintctl drab, field gray, or bluegl-a!.Parachutists :IW provided \vith a padded,canvas, satchel-type carrier. having a snap fastenerat the top and a zipper along one side.(3) Gas wask, GM 38. This mask began replacingthe Gdl 30 in 1938. It is similar in de-VIII—103

I MARCH 1945Figure 107.—German gas mask, GM 38.Figure 10S.—German optical gas mask.VIII—104TM-E 30-45Isign, but tllr'^Vt^M^ ifiaVTrM) t" synthetic rubberhas a rubber fitting band and a simpler head harnesswith only -fiw ~wints of attachment. Thesame canisters and carrier are used with thismask as with the CM SO.(4) Gas mask, cavalry. The facepiece is ofconventional (jerman construction, similar in mostrespects to that of the GM SO. It has a hose-tubeassembly, approximately 17 inchi s long, tor connectingcanister to faccpieee. The brownish-graycanister has a generally elliptical cross-section,and measures 8'/> inches high bv 4 7 s inches by2 J,', inches. Its weight is 27.7 ounces. The tacepiececarrier is lightweight duck, and measures20 inches long by 8 inches wide at the upper end.Its sides are tapered to a width oi about 3 inchestltrougltout the O-iltc-h IUIW portion. The callistc~lcarrier, of dark brown saddle leather, tits snuglyover the canister and is attached io the lower endof the facq)iecc carrier.(5) Gas mask, optical. The facepiece, madeof leather, has round, glass eyepieces, held mplace by screw-type adapters. The interpupillarydistances of eyepieces may be varied by meansof an adjustable screw. A hose-lube connects thefacepiece to the canister which is carried overIhe shoultlcr. In the !rit cltwk oi the iawpiuxis an adaptw for a microphone. Stalttlat-tl catiistel.s,as \vell as carbon monoxide canisters, mayhe ttwl with this fncrpiece. Thv cat-riet- is a rectangularmetal 1,0x.(6) Gas mask, oxygen breathing set. This isa self-contained, oxygen-breathing apparatus, effectivefor somewhat over an hour. The facepiuxis of the ttsttal scl-vice type. The carrkr isa metal knapsack, designed to rest on the user'sback. It contains an alkali canister, an oxygenlmttlc. a mivc, and n l)rwtliitig l q with twobreathing tubes, an "in'' and an "out". Themechanism operates automatically on breathing.The apparatus is designed tor use in cellars, dugouts,gull turrets. ant1 ship lioltl- in tlte presenceof high coiicet7tt-ations of toxic y:;15. such as carbonmonoxide.(7) Plastic emergency breathing dez'ice. Thisis an emergency breathing device enabling acanister to be used without a facepiece. Madeof either trattsparettt or yellow plastic, it cottsistsof a circular piece to \vhich at-(’ :~ttncltd a tulxfor mouthpiece ant1 a T-hat- for cltin rest. Thecircular piew is tltn7ded ititmtall\~ to wcvivcstandard (kmnan cani,qters. A nose clip is at

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451tachecl lo the circular piece by a cord, which alsomay serve to hold the device in an alert position.Apparently intended for protection against rapidlyacting gases in sudden concentration, it can beput into use in less than 5 seconds. Its existencemay partly explain why the German soldier issupposed to carry a spare canister.(8) Gas mash, combat engineers. This is aleather helmet, with a leather drop curtain fittedwith eyepieces. The curtain normally is rolledup, but it may be dropped quickly over the faceand held in place by a tape tied around the backof the head and neck. Flat filters cover the noseand mouth, possibly to provide limited, but speedy,protection against transient high gas concentrations.The face also would be protected againstincendiary or corrosive materials.(9) Gas mask, hcadzvoitnd. Designed for menwith headwounds, this is a hood made of sheetrubber, with one oval window large enough to seeout of with both eyes. It is provided with inletand outlet valves and a fitting to receive thestandard canisters. The carrier is a metal case.(10) Gas mask, carbon monoxide. The Germanshave several types of special canisters whichprovide very good protection against carbonmonoxide. These canisters are attached to thenormal facepieces by means of long hose-tubes.The canisters normally are larger and heavierthan the standard canisters. An example is theCO PB 38 canister, measuring 11 inches highby 5 inches in diameter and weighing 5.2 pounds.(11) Gas mask, horse, (a) Model 38. Thisis a black rubber facepiece which fits over thenostrils and upper jaw. The bottom of the facepieceis reinforced to provide a biting pad. OnFigure 109.—German CO FB 38 Canister for protectionagainst carbon monoxide.ligitre III).- dcnihin linrse gas mask, I'l-'E 41 .l-'igure 111.- rfca,i gas mask 41.each side ot the facepuve is a canister, and onthe front is an outlet valve. Wa r the to]) of eachside, in the rear of the taeepiece, are two heavymetal buckles for attaching the head harness.The canister, drum-shaped and painted green,measures approximately 2.1 inches high by 5inches in diameter.(b) Mode! II. This consists of a pair of hollowcones with large sleis near the apex, eachwith an outlet valve m ilie base and a threadedside opening into winch a flat canister is screwed.The cones are placed up 'he nostrils of the horseand held in place by a harness over the head.(c) Damp mask. Model 11. This consists of alarge paper-fabric bag with padded lip and bitingpad to fit over the upper jaw. Before it is used,the mask must be impregnated with a special saltsolution.(12) Gas Mask 41, dcti. The facepiece, of ablack, rubber-like compound, i> made in foursizes. It has circular evepieces. a valve assemblyin the nose, and a cani-ter on each side. Thehead harness consists of a throat strap, a fastenerstrap, and four head straps. The valve assemblyconsists of an air inlet knob and an outlet valve.The canister of thin green-painted metal, is 2inches high bv 3'4 inches in diameter. The carrieris a brown canvas haversack with a shoulderslinsr.VIII—105

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451b. PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. (1) Ge~raZ. Fortroops there are the impermeable light and heavyprotective suits and several types of protectivecapes. No impregnated clothing has been reported.There are leggings and protective coversfor horses, and leggings and gas clothing for dogs.(2) Light protective suit. This suit consistingof boots, shorts, gloves, and a neck cover, is madeof a fabric coated with a synthetic rubber(opanol). Components of the normal suit varyin color from grayish-green to dark blue-gray,with light tan or khaki for tropical use. Bootsare rubber soled. The gloves are of either elbowor shoulder length. In some cases shorts have abib in front. When deemed necessary, an extrapair of shorts may be used to protect the upperpart of the body. The suit is carried in a small Figure 112.—Glozvs, Gervmrz hrw:,y protcctizle ciothiug.case of the same material.(3) Heavy protective sz&t. This comprises ajacket with hood, pants of the over-all type,gloves, and boots. Jacket and pants are made offabric coated on both sides with gray rubber.Boots of knee length, are of heavy black rubber.Gloves are of gray or black molded rubber.(4) Protertive sheet. This rectangular sheetis approximately 78 inches long and 48 incheswide. It may be made of paper, opanol-coatedfabric, or nylon.(5) Eyeshields. Made of celluloid-type material,these consist of four separate sections sewedtogether to form an eyeshield with side panels.The eyeshield—two amber or green and twocolorless—are carried in a green fabric case.Figure 113.—Pants, German heavy protective clothing.(6) HoYse COVCY. Made of an impermeableopanol-coated fabric, black inside and tan outside,this cover is in two halves, one for the rightside and one for the left. Each half is rectangular,62 inches long and 45 inches wide. On thefront end is a sleeve-like projection of doublethickness to fit over the leg. The cover is designedto protect the underbelly parts of the horse.(7) Horse legging. Sleeve-like in shape, ofgray or green rubberized fabric, it is made in twosizes to fit front and hind legs.(8) Horse goggles. These comprise a pair ofplastic eyepieces trimmed with leather, held togetherby an adjustable cloth strap, with anothercloth strap attached to the outside of each eyepiece.A red line on one eyepiece, and a blueline on the other, apparently are to mark theright and left eyepieces.Figure 114.—Jacket, German heavy protective clothing.VIII—-106

IUNCLXXIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45ILIGHT BULK CONTAMINATION VEHICLE MEDIUM BULK CONTAMINATION VEHICLE(Sd. Kfz. lO/3) (Sd. Kfz. ll/3 )LIGHT DECONTAMINATION VEHICLE MEDIUM DECONTAMINATION VEHICLE( Sd. Kfz. IO/Z ) ( Sd. Kfz.l1/2)VEHICLE FOR DECONTAMINATION OF CLOTHING VEHICLE FOR DECONTAMINATION OF PERSONNEL(Kfz. 93) ( Kfz. 92 )SMOKE VEHICLE ( Sd. Kfz. I I/l ) GAS-DETECTION VEHICLE ( Sd. Kfz. IO/l)Figure 115.—Decontamination vehicles.VIII—-107

I MARCH 1945(9) Gas ClotlGg 41 for dogs. This consistsof a hood and suit, to which are sewccl rubhcrfootcovcrs. Suit and hood are tnatk of thin, fieltlgray,impregnatrtl fabric. The suit. made inthree sizes, is carried inside the faccpicce of theclog gas mask.(10) Dog Ixggiilg 41. Th s is made nf ruhl~erin only one size ant1 consists of foot ant1 leg par’s,fitted with fastctting straljs.c. DECOXL~A\ILN.\I‘ION. (1) Rpiplirrrlf. (a)Mobile decontamination plant. This plant for thed~cotitnminatioti of clothing and cquil)tttent maytake the form of motor trucks motitititig a watertubeboiler for the rapid generation of StcCttll, aa steam chatnl)~r. and n drying chatnher.(b) Vehicle for dcc-oIrfarrli7lafiorr of pcrsoliirc~l.A six-wheeled tnotor vehicle fitted n-it11 a largebox hotly which contains hathing facilitiw for1SO men per hour. Complctcl\- eqtii1)lwd, itwciglis &out 0 tons.(c) Vehicle for decontamination of clothing.A six-wheeled vehicle iittetl with a l:trgV cl0sctlbody which is equipped with a boiler, fans, andwater tanks. Completely equipped, it \v+$isal)out 9.7 tons.(d) Light decontamination vehicle. This open,semi-tracked, 1-ton motor j-chicle, equipped witha tlistt-ilwting hol)pc’r on the war, cat-rirs al)Otlt1,675 pttnds of bulk decontaminant and 16 cl?contamination canisters (22 1~ottnds) for ttw l)yhand.(e) Filter- for tircorrfnlrli2latinlz of wntcr. Theapl)aratus consists of b-0 lztrts : tlic filter l)ropcrand a tank containing water for clcatiitig thefilter. Both arc of shwt it-on co\-cwtl with cwant~l.The filter pro1)er is a tall, c~~lintlrical tank fillctlwith activate(l chnrcoal.(f) Decontamination plozv. This is a large,fish-hook-shaped, ditching plow, mounted on atwo-wheeled carriage \vith lui~tttiiatic tires. Overalllength is 11 Fert 6 inches ; OVCI--all width is 6fwt 1 inch. The lkw produces a furrow 20inches witk.(g) Decontamination pump. This is a metalstirrup p~ttiip, approxitiiatcl~ 23 inches it7 length,with almtt 9 inches of ruhl~er hose.(h) I)ccolzttrllfirlnlioil cauisfrl-s. These canistersconsist of metal cylintlers, 6.7 inches highhy 3.3 inches in diatiwtu, and a qtt:idratigularmetal or carcll)oartl container, 14.6 inches high hy8.2 inches title. Each has a pcrforatc~tl scrcctiin the top for sprinlding the contents, normallyI.osatititi, on a contaminated surface.VIII—108UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451(2) Dccontaminants. (a) Losantin. Thishigh quality, 5tat)iliz~(l. while bleach powder isused for decontamination uf standard blister@SCS. It is l~~kcd in :trrl (Ii-unis of 5.5 ant1 110po~ltids capacity.(h) Decontaminant 40. ‘I‘llis is a :IGne whiteor pale cream powder, packed in steel drumsholding 132 pound.-. K>pec:ally designed fornitrogen mustards, it is also a powerful decontaminantfor all blister ga>es.(c) Deconlaminant X. A powdered or flakedwhite solid, supplied in wooden boxes of 175l~oti~i~ls callncity. tltis is a substitute for I)ecotltaminant40, which is difficult and expensive toproduce.(dj Weapon decontamination agent. This individualissue is a small bottle of liquid agent in adark brown, bakelite container. It is used forthe decontamination of small arms and individualequiptii~tit.(e) Weapon decontaminating agent set. Thisis a company issue. It consists ot two bottles ofliquid in a cat-tll~oai-tl container 14 inches liigliby 4.7 inches in diameter. The red-capped bottlecontains the decontaminating agent, and the blackcappedbottle contains a sub-lance to counteractthe corrosion caused by the agml.(f) Horse decontamination canister. A quadrangularcardboard box. with a perforated screenat one end, type 40 holds about 20 ounces of decontaminant.It is intended for a team of horses;t!-pc 41 which lioltls only .ill(0tt 10 ot~ticc’s isdesigned for an individual horse. The canisteris cat-rid in the horse gas-ma>k carrier.(g) Dog decontamination canister 42. This isa quadrangular cardboard box holding about 10ounces of decontaminant.d. PROTKCTIVK AI'.KNTS. I 1) I.osantin. Tentablets of Losantin are issued m p!a-,tie boxes formI'u/ure 1 In.- -Cicninin alkiihnc r\v sak\

1 MARCH 1945UNCLASSiFIEDTM-E 30-451i- .1*£5" k ftl-ujurc 117.—German weapons decontaminating set, individual issue.1-if/ure 118.—German zecapons decontamiiialiii,/ a

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451decontamination of the skin. Adhesive stripsof different colors indicate the year of manufacture.The issue is four boxes to a soldier, butreports state that it is being replaced by ProtectiveOintment 41.(2) Protective Ointment 41. This is issued inbottles, with six swabs in an orange bakelite container,for decontamination of the skin.(3) Alkalitw cyc salve. This is a creamywhite salve in either a metal foil tube or a whitejar. It is used for the treatment of eyes contaminatedwith blister gases.(4) Inhalant awpoules alld swabs. Five inhalantampoules and six swabs are packed in ain a metal holder and five tyljc.5 of testing tul)cin a metal carrier.(6) Carhnn wono.~-ide dcfccfor srf. (a) drlrtype. This consists of a field gray, wooden box,containing an air pump, 32 tlctyctor tubes, a tubeholder, and accessories.(b) Corrrr1:crc-ic7l fypC.. L~entially, this consistsof an air pun i and clctcctor tubes in a metalcylintlrical carrier. Though a . \\7i~n air containingcarbon motioxitl~ is dr;t\\-n through a tubefrom either set, the contents 0i the tulx changescolor.(7) Gas detector equipment set. This consistsof a metal carrier containing an air pttinp, a fiwtlctector tubes of each t!.l>c’, ar5ine cl

I MARCH 1945I;igure 122.—German gas detector alzd sawplillg kit.built pump, with a handle on one end and an adjustablespray nozzle on the other.(10) Gas dctrctor a,ld snrupliw~ kit. Thisaluminum chest contains six sample bottles, foursmall detector canisters, \I-ar gas \varning cards,spray detector paper, and accessories.(11) Detector paint. This paint contains a(Iye which changes color in contact with certainlicluid war gases. It is used to malie smears onsurfaces for detection of war gas spray.(12) Gas drtcrtor fov fortifications. A metalcase contains an electric motor, air pumps, sixpairs of metal and glass detector tubes, seatingsfor the tubes, and necessary connections for drawingair through all of the tubes at the same time.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30.451(13) ITi& Inhnrc~tor~. This laboratory includesequipment for testing for war gases, inaddition to necessary equipment for accomplishingits main function of food and drug analysis.(14) Gas detection vehicle. This is an open,semi-tracked, l-ton vehicle uwtl for carrying gasdetection personnel and their equipment.f. MISCELLANEOUS. (1) E‘rrr p1zrg.s. Thesearc square tnl)lets 0i callow wax, paclied six in amctnl box. ior protc*clion of men with damagedear dr-urns.(2) rlrfti-tliu1 disc- This occurs in sets oftwo. The disc. 2.3 inches in diameter, has oneside coated with g

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451h'ignrc 124.—Gas warningflagset.(6) Gas alarm dwicc. This is a whistlingcartridge which is fired from a signal pistol. Itrises ahu t 50 feet, giving off either a whitish orgreen light and eniitting a high-pitched whistleaudihlc for ahout 400 yards.(7) Aufi-yn.s pathay ~~r~~tcriaZ. This strongpaper, imprc~gnatctl with a tar-like substance, isprc‘paretl in rolls, approximately 4 feet witlc and55 yards long. Tt is stated to bc of sufficientstrength to allow 200 men to cross a contaminatedarca iii safety.(8) Gas warning flag set. This is a pistolshapedcast’ containing 20 I,-shaped iron rods. 20warning flags (~~cllow with black skull and crossctlbones imprinted), and a roll of yellow markingt;lpC./•igure 125.—Set of German collective protectors.VIII—112(9) Collf~c.tizlc~ pr~t~~c‘tor. Tl~is is installed inair raid shelters and other fixed installations. Itconsists of a pump, eithc,r cl~~.Iric;Llly or handdriven, a nidianical canider, a chemical cmistu,and necessary connc~ctions for tlrn\ving outsi(leair through the canisters.(10) Gas protective case fur j~i(/c’c)~l.s. This isa case of four cumlurtmcll:s, each with a11 inlettube and filter,3. War Sasesa. (IEXEKAI.. German war gases, generallyspeaking, have rctaiiiul thi,ir \\'rld War 1 clnssification.However, "crosses" arc believed to havebeen superseded by the terms "rings" or "bands 'for purposes of nomenclature. I he appearanceof the FE 12 canister suggests that the Germansare aware of the I~ot~llti;llitir- of hytlroc\-anicacid (XC), cyanogt~n chloride i CK ) and al-sine(SAA). Tests show that this c:lllistcr affortls fairprotection against these g;iws. I‘lw Ckrm;ms areknown to favor the coml)it~atic~ll of gasps. Thus,a vesicant toxic smoke is a combination of "blue"and "yellow ’ '-l)antl gasps. and the nature of thechemical filling would be indicated by two bandsof the correspontling cc~lors. "(;rcu1" ant1 "yrllow"bands would indicate a cllckill~ gas withvcsicant proputies. A double "yellow"' handwoultl indicate a v~sicalit gas of enhanced persistence.

I MARCH 1945 itO TM. E 30 . 45lb. NITROGEN MUSTARDS. In addition to themore or less standard agents. thcrc is tlocumcIItarycvitllmce to show that the Humans possess aot l orlcss gas tlcxignatcd as "Green Band I."Tt is only one of several gases with likr charncteristicsthat may bc refcrrd to as "nitrogen niustards."Gcwrally slwakin,g, the nitrogen mustards arc’either licpitls or low-melting solitls, l’ale vcllo\to colorless, ant1 are practically otlorl~~~s. ?hi1volatility varies, some Ix~iiig 1~5s volatile thanmustard gas and some iiicire vcrlxtilc. They awfairly rrxtlily hydrolyzed by water, but the prowluctsof such hydrolysis are toxic.Nitrogen m;~startl gas has a low freezing point.ant1 might, thcwfore, 1~ us d for high-altitutlcbombing or spray (if thickend). It may he thrwor four times as vo:atilc as mustard gas andtherefore less persistwt.trations are possible, it is more dangerous as a gas,though not so powerful in its vesicant elicct. Ttuwuld require special stabilization if us d in hotclimates.The principal danger from the nitrngen mustadslivs in the fact that their vapors are noteasily tlctectd by snidl. Munitions >vhich containthysc gases and have a high 1)ursting charqa(20 to 30 IW- cult IIT-) are iIltlistinguishnl)le iron,H E on detonation. Under such conditions, reliancemust I)e plawtl on thy usual U. S. ddectolmethods : that is, tlctcctor paint or paper and thevapor tktector kit, ;11-9.Nitrogw mustartl is likely to lx usctl to achiersurprise hy being includctl in a normal HE bon-I~wdmcnt in ortler to capture key positions. Tt isalso possible that this gas would be usul as 3spray from airplanes. or in aerial l)on~lxi.Common name German nameblister gases (Vesicants)—"Yellow Cross"Mustard (H)Lost; Seiif; GctbkrcuzLewisite (L)Gclbkreuc 11 ( 'i)Etliyldichlorarsinc (ED) . .Dick; Gelbkreuz IIINitrogen Mustard (HN) . .Stickstofflost1 liphoSKi'iie ( 1)1') K-Stojj; Persia!];Uniiikren.: I. //(‘hlurpicr-111 ( I'S) K/ i lpClllorinc (Cl).... L ‘ /lici~(There liaw hccn ir(‘cpld wfcrcnccs to misturcbof thv>c, choliin~ gaws. )Vomiting gases fSleruutators)—"Blue Cross"hipheiiylchlorarsine (DA).. Clark I; BhmkrcusI 'ipheiivlrvanarsinr (1H ')... Clark II; Cyan Clark- Adamsite ( I )M ) IK M. AdamsitTear gases •' I.nerimutors)—"White Cross"("hloracetnphenone 11 .V)T-StoffBromhenzykyanide i IJJJC)T-Stoff(Neither of these gases was used by the Gerniansin the. last LV;II-. Thev relied upon a nuniherof bromine conilx~~~~ici~, \I-liich are less powerfulthan the t\vo wl)~tanw~ lihtctl. It is thought thatSince higher coiicc’~~ - Germany attaches little importance to tear gasesalonc~. lxit the possible use of other gasc’s camouflagedby tear gases 111ust not IK ov~rlookcd.j4. Ground Weaponsa. GKNF.RAL. The Germans have a large numl)vrof ~v~apoiis capable of firing cliuiiical \\-arfarcmutiitions—~Lilis, tiio1-tar5, lionitzus. ant1 projcctors—withvarying calilxrs aii~l ever-increasingtvIx5.I). GYSS. No less than 12 guns of 7.5mmcaliber, including a self-propelled model, firesmoke shells. The limitations ot gas shells forartillerv are clearly recognized by the Germans.Although thus far tin German gas shells havebeen captured, reports indicate that for sometiliie the\- have been building up cstc,lisi\-e stocksof gas-filled shells, 105-mm and 150-mm beingthe favored calibers. Smoke shells for severaltylci of 105-null gu115. i\vo 0i which are selfpropelled,are known. Smoke shells weighing(Alixturcs of mustard gas and Txwisitc ma\be used in cold weather to reduce the freezingpoint. A SO-per cent niisturc of mustartl andLewisite is called Winterlost. The mustard gasis likely to be an improvement over that of \\~orltli\;ar I; it is probably more persistent, possil)l~more vesicant, and more difficult to decontaminate.)Choking cases (hung Irritants)—"Green Cross"Phosgene (CG) D-Stoff; GriinkratzFigure 12(i.—75-mm sm.-ke (•••oiectile for tank gun.VIII—I13

UNCLASSIFIEDI t#RC H 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 127.—15 cnt Nrhclwerfer 41 being loaded.SMOKE PROJECTILES FIRED P,Y GERMAN WEAPONSSmoke Shell Weapon hiring the Munition Color Markiiuis ,n\d Ke8 Cl>L H’gr. 34 h’b. 8 cm Mortar (S. Gr. W. 34). Red body. Nb. in white.8 cm Wgr. 38 Blm. Blue band.P.lcct, hluc smoke ilrr target indication.10 cm Wgr. 35 Nb. 10 cm Smoke Mortar (Nb. l\ T . 3.5). Brick red or olive yncn; Nl> in white.*IO cm If’gr. 40 Nb. A-b. 14’. 40. lirick rul or 0lif.e ,crc

I MARCH 1945approximately 86 pounds are provided for 150mm self-propelled guns, known as the "GrizzlyBear" and the "Bumble Bee". There are alsosmoke and incendiary shells for the 150-mmheavy infantry gun.c. MORTARS. The basic weapon of Germanchen1ical warfare troops is the 105mm mortar,two models of which are known. In addition tothe 81-mm mortar, the Germans have a 12-cmmortar that is identical with the Finnish 12-cmmortar made by Tampella. They also havecopied the Russian 12-cm mortar. Revolutionaryin design are the 20-cm and 3%cm spigot mortars.While these mortars are primarily intended forthe destruction of obstacles, minefields, and gunemplacements, smoke shells arc provided andthere is apparently no reason why gas or incendiaryfillings could not be substituted for HE.d. HOWITZERS. Smoke shells are provided fortlvo types of light field howitzers of 105-mmcaliber and three types of 150-111111 heavy fieldhowitzers. Projectiles weighing 80 pounds filled\vith blister and choking gases, for the heavyfield howitzers are reported.e. PROJECTORS. TWO general types of rocketprojectors have n1ade their appearance during thecurrent war: the Xrbclwerfry (literally, smokeprojector) and the Schzrcres TW~fg~riit (heavythrowing apparatus). For details of these weaponssee Section YII of Chapter VII.f. SMOKE GENERATORS. (1) C;cllcl-al. Smokegenerators are often referred to as "thermo-genTM-E 30-45Ierators" due to the iact that they produce smoke11y the "hot" process, namely, by the combustionof the smoke niaterials. They may be stationary,thrown by hand or rifle, or hy dischargers mountcdon tanks. Also. they may be fastened on floatsor buoys for amphibious operations.(2) S11rokr Calltllr 39 (L%r21.K.39). Thissmoke generator consists of a metal can, 5v~inches high by 3; / inches in diameter, providedwith 1101~s in the t(q) for smoke emission. Itweighs approximately 4% pounds and is paintedgreen, with t\vo \vllite bands around the body.The Berger-type anloke mixture, consisting oftwo parts of zinc (lust to three parts of hexachlorcthanc,is fired by a pull type igniter andburns from 4 to 7 nlirlut~s.(3) Smoke Cylinder (Rauchrohr). Designedprimarily for WC against tanks, this munitionconsists of a cylinder 10 inches long with a diameterof 1 inch. It contains 7% ounces of a smokemixture composed of zinc. magnesium, and hexachlorcthane.Its total weight is 11 ounces. Ignitedby a pull type igniter. it burns 3 to 4 minutes,emitting a dark gray smoke.(1) Long-Burning Smoke Generator (Langekcrxr112, ,VO.h*L 42). This long burning smokegenerator is a green. cylindrical metal container\vith an over-all height of 19 inches and a diamrterof 6:;; inches. It contains approximately 36p0t”‘ds of a smoke iiiixturc’ consisting of zinc,zinc (or ammoniulll) chloride, and hexachlore-Figure 129.—28/32‘ cm Schwcres Wurjgwiit 41 cv~pltrccd for laur~chi~~~g ilwc~slrlicwy roclzcts.VIII—I15

. f-.r-.tr • ••I MARCH 1945 UNCLAD'TM-E 30-451rc ISO.—Smoke awdlcs: Nb.K.39B. Nb.K.SJoil, and .V'• /Vthnnc. Its total weight vx-its from 35 to 39p01111ds. The ignition is electrical m- 1)~ mm115of a pull wire. ‘L‘l1e g:-c~nerator 1,11r11s 15 to 30minutes, emitting a whitish gray smoke sufficientto provide a screen 200 yards wide, 400 to 500yards long and 40 yards dee]) under favorablecolitlition.(-5) French smoke floats, (ierman K-boafsare reported to have used French 132-poundsmolie ilo;lts ccmsiitiilfi of a container, filled withIkqe r Alist~ii-c, a flotation device, a lid. and anigniter. The emission priotl is 4 lo 5 millutes.t«*•»,h'it/urc 13!.--Smoke cylinders, Rauchrolire Xh. 39. lu/urc 132. - German .\'J;; 'i'n i/; .aid > ylmder.VIII—I16

I MARCH 1945TM-E 30-451g. SMOKE GENERATOR PROJECTORS FOR ARMORED VEHICLES. The Pz.Kpfic.III and Pz.Kpfzi'.FI are provided with smoke generator projectors(dischargers), which are mounted on eachside of the turret. They consist of three cylindricaltubes, 6 inches in length by 3.7 inches in diameter,mounted on a bracket one above the other at afixed elevation of 45 degrees, but slightly splayedto give a lateral spread to the generators.A'b.K.39 smoke generators are fired from insidethe turret. Panther and Tiger Model B tanksare fitted with smoke generator tliscliaycrsmounted i ii the right rear top of the lurr~t,at an angle of 60 degrees to the turret roof.They are mounted in a circular ring in such amanner that they may be traversed through 3 inches long by ?>¥%inches in diameter, is fitted with a breechblock.The firing mechanism is operated by a triggerfrom within the tank, projecting the Xb.k.39smoke generators.h. SMOKE SPRAYERS. Smoke sprayers (Ncbclzcrstihibcr)disseminate a liquid smoke-producingmaterial by the apl)lication of conil~rcswdair. The smoke liquid, generally chlorsulfomcacid, is atomized or dispersed as minute particleswhich vaporize and quickly condense again asvery hue droplets by absorption of water vaporfrom the atmosphere. The process is "cold" asdistinct from the "hot" prowss of the smokegenerator. The Germans haw a variety of smokesprayers for diverse uses: stationary, portable,mounted on vehicles or tanks, carried on boardship or aircraft, and floating on buoys.i. GRENADES. Ncbelhandgranatc 39 and 41 aresmoke hand grenades containing a hcxachlorethanemixture. They are of similar design.Both are painted grven and are distinguished bythe inscription Nb. Hgr. 39 (or 41) in white,with a white broken line beneath the lettering.The Germans have two types of glass hantl grenades,known as Blcndkorpcr III and Blendkorpcr2H, charged with a mixture of titanium tetracbloride(FM) and silicon tetrachloride. Theyalso have incendiary frangible hand grenades ofthe Molotov-coektail type, consisting of a pintglass bottle filled with a mixture of benzene andcreosote oil. This type is intended primarily foruse against tanks.j . GAS MINES. The German gas mines arereferred to as spray canisters (Spruhbiichsc).They are used by the ground forces for contaminatingground, roadblocks, buildings, or in-Injure 133.—/:

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 135.—Fmllgible smobc grenades, IJlcndbiirpcv ?I{.for forcing the fuel out of the container, a projectingtube with a nozzle at its end, and an ignitingsystem to set the jet of fuel aflame. Theprinciple types developed by the Germans are asfollows:(1) Flame thrower, portable, Model 3.5. Thisis the type with which Germany started thepresent war. It is a modified version of the 1918model. Both fuel and compressed nitrogen containersare housed in one cylinder. The nitrogenis used for propulsion of the fuel, which is ignitedat the nozzle by a jet of hydrogen flame. Bothejection and ignition of the fuel are controlled bythe same trigger placed on the top of the gun. Itcan fire ten one-second bursts as far as 30 yards.Weighing 79 pounds it is too heavy for a singleman in action.(2) Flam thro-wev, portable, ATode 40. Thisis a "lifebuoy-type" flame thrower, weighingVIII—I18onlp 47 pounds. Hmvever. thtt decrease in weighthas been accomplished by a one-third reductionin fuel, as compared with t11e Model 35. Therange is unaltered.(3) Flame tllrozcw, poYtal~I~-, ~Jodcl Il. Thisconsists of two cylinders, one for fuel and theother for compressed nitrc~gc>n. The completeapparatus weighs 35 to 40 ~~ound1;. Ignition isby hydrogen, Lvhich flows over an electricallyheated wire at the nozzle, \vhczre it is lighted andin turn sets the oil afire. F~I-ing is by the "hot"method : the oil is ignited each time the triggeris pulled: thus, the target can llot be first sprayedwith oil and then set afire. Five blasts can befired, producing a flame of 700 to 800 degreescentigrade.(4) Flalrze thvnxw, ~OI-tnl~lc. 3Jodel 42. Inappearance it is ,sinlilnr to Alo(lcl 41, but is slightlyshorter and differing in one essential point:

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-45Ithe ignition system. The hot-spot hydrogen jetignition system of the older model has beei replacedby the cartridge system. This consists ofa cartridge magazine in which there are ten rimless,blank, 9-mm pistol cartridges, loaded, fired,and ejected in automatic succession at each pullof the trigger. Since the fuel ejection and thefiring mechanisms are operated by the same triggerthe result is the "hot-firing", wherein priordrenching of the target with oil is impossible.The jet of the fuel is set afire at the instant itleaves the nozzle. The apparatus weighs about30 pounds empty and up to 40 pounds full. Itholds approximately 7% gallons of fuel, a blackoil smelling like creosote. The fuel ejection isby compressed nitrogen gas under a pressure of441 po~mds per square inch. There is no reducingvalve on the nitrogen line. The oil is sufficientfor 5 to 6 blasts, each lasting 3 seconds,reaching a range of 25 to 35 yards.(5) Pal-a-Flame Throeaw (Einstoss Flmlmrt~werfer).This is another variety of the portableflame thrower. It is the standard one used bythe paratroops and also is used to a great extentby the SS. It weighs 23% pounds. The fuel isthe usual black liquid used in other Germanflame throwers. It is fired from the shoulder,throws a flame 38 yards long, lasting 2 to 3 seconds.It is said to possess a constant, steadypressure producing an even flame. Also, it isclaimed that it can be aimed accurately.(6) Trailer flame throzew~. This is a flamethrower that bears a resemblance to a "field gun",since it is mom~ted on a chassis and is towed bya motor vehicle. Fitted on the frame is a boxshapedsheet metal body which contains the fueltank, the pump, and the engine. The fuel tankis 4 feet 111% inches by 1 foot 9% inches, andholds 40 gallons of creosote oil. The pump is agasoline engine-driven, centrifugal pump. Theflame gun is mounted on a spigot on top of thefuel tank to facilitate traversing; the gun itself iscarried on trunnions to permit elevating and depressing.It can be traversed 45 tlcgrces eachway and elevated between +3 0 degrees and —10degrees. The Cue1 is ignited by an electric sparkand the flame will last 24 seconds at a range of45 to 50 yards, using 1.46 gallons of fuel per second.It has an over-all length of 7 feet 11 inchesand weighs 900 pounds. When operating itmakes a noise which can be heard easily at adistance of 300 yards.(1) Flame thrower fin a,~niorctl car (halfhfk)(Sd Kfc 251.) ‘l‘wo flame throwers aremounted on the rear oi an ordinary 3-ton halftrackarmored vehicle, but are controlled from thefront seat nest to the tlri\-cr. The flame throwersma\- be traversed 160 tlcgrccs. Length of hoseis 11 yards. The tank holds 185 gallons of theusriZ Y 7Zrman flame thro\ver-fuel. A centrifugalprimp propels fuel \vitli a consumption rate of 2gallons per sccontl. TIRE fuel is sufficient for 80bursts of 1 to 2 secontl.~ each at a range of 40to 50 \-artls. The weapon is fired by an electrogasolinesystem.(8) Flame thrower on Pancerjdger 38 Chassis.(Ir. PC. Jijg. .;A Chassis) The flame thrower ismounted offside on the iront of the self-propelledPanscr j i igu 38. The iuc~l cal)ncity is 154 gallons.with a consumption ratr of 1.X gallons per second.Fuel release is controlled by hand through a 14mm nozzle. The range i:, 55 to 66 yards.m. STATIOXARY FLAME THROWERS. (1) GEWcral. These are called .Ihwehr Fla~i~rncnzcvrferby the C&malls, a nomc.nclaturc that implies thedefensive nature of the \v~al)oiis. They are alsoknown as static flame t1lrcnver.s. emplacecl flamethrowers, iougasse flank throwers. and flamethrower mines. The latter nallle is probably dueto the fact that they arc I)uried directly behindminefields or are tlisper~ed among the mines to"thicken up" the clef~nse and fired by remotecontrol. Usually they are emplaced behind wireentanglements facing in tllr direction of probableattack to cover road blc~.ks. landing beaches, harborwalls. and to act ah mo\-able obstacles at agap in tkiense lvalls;. ‘l‘licy are 1)uried at intervalsof 12 to 30 yards, \\cl1 cauiouflaged, leavingonly the horizontal nni/~l~ llrojecting above theground. Groups of t~~~plac~tl flame throwers arecontrolled from a centl-al 1)oint. usually a smallpillbox, and arc operated either by remote electriccontrol or by trip-wire ii1c.ch:inism.(2) Emplaced flame thrower (Alnvehrflammenz^crfer42). (a) Cencral. This apparatusconsists of iut~l c0iitaillc.r. flame tube, and propellentcotitain~r. Nt~t5~ar~~ accessories are slowburning po\v~l~r l)rol)ellailt, cl&ric squibs, wire,storage batter-y. and fuel. It has an over-allheight of 2 feet 6 in&e>,(1)) Furl rontairw. The fuel container is acylindrical tank 21 in~hc~s high and 11va inchesin diameter. It has irony carrying handles, and acapacity of 8 gallons. ‘l‘he fuel is a black viscidliquid smelling like coal tar. It is a mixture ofVIII—II9

UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 136.—Germanpitch and light. nictlium, ant1 heavy oils. It isa little- thicker than the usual flame-thrower oil.l’hc fuel ta d lx~ltls 7.7 gallons.(c) Flame tube. The flame tnhe is a 2-inchn:t.tal pile rising vertidly and centrally fmmmar the lmttom of the i11c1 container; aitcr pssingthrough the top it cumes ant1 exten(ls horizontallya tlist:lncc of 30 inclics. ‘I’his girts theapparatus a :otal hciglit of 30 inches.((1) Plv,JvlImf rollltrilrrl-. This is a cylinder10 inches high by 2^g inches in di;tnlcter. It containsslmv-lmrning po&cr. an ignition squih. andfiring n-ircs. T& propellent pmulcr is titherblack powder or a mixture of nitrocellulose anddiethylene glycol &nitrate. The pressure pro-VIII—120static flaDiethrower.duced by the explosion of ilic propelling chargeejects the itlc~l.(e) Performance. Both electrical squibs firesimultaneously into the pre>>ure chamber. Oneignites the propellent powder which generatespressure to force the fuel out through the flametube: the other ignites the fuel as it passes outof the 110zz1c. ‘I‘l>c~rc is an igIlitioii colll]x)sitionof aluminum and barium nitrate at the nozzle.The flame, 5 yards wide and ,1 yards high, lastsl/-j seconds. The range is .•>() yards.n. FLAMK-TIIROWER TANKS. (]) General.These are tanks in which tlame throwers aremounted. The flame thrower and its accessories,the fuel tanks, projecting hose, gas cylinders,pump, engiiws, ant1 ignition svstcm are all so

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451Figure 137.—Pa. Kpfw. Ill, Model L, flamethrowing tank.housed in the turret that the vehicles preserve theexternal appearance of ordinary tanks. Theyhave undergone several modifications and someare obsolescent.(2) Flame-Thrower Tank Pz. Kpfw. II (F)(Sd. Kfs. 122). This tank has two flame throwingprojectors, each mounted in a small turretwell forward on the track guards but operatedelectrically from panels in the turret. The turretshave a traverse of 180 degrees, elevation of20 degrees, and depression of 10 degrees.Seventy gallons of fuel are kept in two tanksmounted externally on the track guards. Thefuel tanks are protected by shields. Fuel is projectedby compressed nitrogen. It is sufficientfor 80 shots of 2 to 3 seconds duration at a rangeof 35 yards. Ignition is by acetylene flame.(3) Flamc-Throwcr Tank Ps.Kpfiu.III, ModelL. A flame thrower in the turret replaces thenormal 50-mm gun (5 cm Kw.K.39), which itresembles outwardly. Traverse is 360 degrees, andelevation is from —10 degrees to -j-20 degrees.The fuel is a black, sticky oil smelling of creosoteand is sufficient for 70 to 80 shots of 2 to 3seconds duration. The range is 55 to 65 yards.The fuel, 225 gallons, is carried in tanks mountedinside the right and left side.5. Aerial Weaponsa. CHEMICAL BOMBS. (1) 10-Kilogram (22pounds) Fragmentation Bomb (GC 10). This isa toxic smoke and high explosive bomb. It containsan at-senic filling, identified by the Germanswith a blue cross.(2) SU-Kilo:p~arll (1iii porrlltls) dzrstard GasBard (GC SO). Tllis I~~tnb has a highly sensitiveimpact fuze, \vith vither a small burstingcharge for ground cont;~ll~inatio~l or a large burstingcharge for antipersolrll~l effect.(3) 250-Kilogram (5% pounds) Mustard GasBomb (KC 2.50 GE). ‘I‘liis l~oiiii~ has a time fuzewhich is set to function about 330 feet above theground. The bomb will contaminate an area ofabout 6.000 squ:m yartl ~ It is possible that theGermans have gas I~oml~~ of larger caliber. A"green cross" (/CC 500) I)omb has been reportedwith a choking-gas filling.b. SMOKE BO>IB~. (1) K C 50 Smoke Bomb.This I~omh has a fi~ltl gr:~\r body with white nose.It may have four white, vertical stripes or t\vowhite bands painted OH the body. Its over-alllength is 2 feet 7 inches.(2) XC SO II T C. ‘Hiis bonh is for use onwater. It has a field grav or silver body withyellow nose. Four ycli(I\\‘ vertical stripes mayappear on the Lilly. It ii. 3 icet 7 inches longand 7% inches in tlial1rcstc.r. The filling is aRergcr Rlisture or hes;~clilcl~-eth;tne.(3) n’C 2.50 S. l’hi~ bomb is similar to theFlam. C 250. Tt is pailltc

I MARCH 1945418 pin& . The filling is chlorsttlionic acid a11sulphurtrioxide.c. INCENDIARY BO~SS. (1) I-Kilogram simi lSpecimens of this bomb may bear tlcsignntionsBl El, Bl El Z, and Bl El ZB. All typesweigh about 2.75 pounds each. The hotly is paintetlaluminum or grcrn. The diameter is 2 inches,and over-all length 13 s inches. T ile is0.44 pounds of thermite.(2) 2-KilqmvrI Tourb. This Imm l~ h asignation 122 E7 Z and weighs al)out 4J/ pounds.The body color is aluminum or light gwvn. 4. 5filling inclutlcs T,UT or amatol in atltlition to tlv0mite. The diameter is 2 inches, and \ veightlength is 20.7 inches.(3) Oil I7zrclldiary Bomb (Il?YWd C 50 A).This homb weighs 99 pounds. It o perat in ggray, with red under the tail, a red band erruldctlthe body, and a yellow stripe on the tail cone.The body diameter is 8 inches, and the over-alllength 43.2 itlchcs. The filling is 15 1 (3.3gallons) of a mixture of 81) per cenl l)enzWe, 10per cent i-ul)hvr, and 4 per cent l~hosl~horus. I.has a bursting charge of picric acid.(4) I~zcrntliary Bomb C SO Il. This is identicalin marking, dimensions, and body color Tviththe c 50 A. Ho\vewr, it is roll ing whitephosphorus, and this is indicated by a ant 1bottle painted on the bomb.(5) Flam. C 2.50. This bomb weighs 2 .pounds. It is painted green with a red nose,two blue tail rings, and t\vo red bad;.‘ Thediameter of the hotly is 2 inches, and larg elength is 64% inches. It contains 16 gallons ofoil, hveiglling 110 pounds, coniposed of cl-ut l ealuminum, magnesiulll powder, ant1 wootlmealpetroleunligniting Inixturc. The 1)urs;ting Chl-gCis 2.6 pounds of picric acid and TXT.(6) F/am. C 2.50 B and Flalrl. C Z.50 c‘. Thesel~oml)s are i(lentical \\ith the I;la~r~. C 2.70 exceptmarkings. The type B and C bonll)s arc pailltetlClark l)lue or gray and hart two red bands encirclingthe body.(7) Brand C 250 A. This bomb is paintedficltl gray xl-ith a red undertail. It measures 14Vjinches in diameter and 64% inches in length.The filling, 15.8 gallons, is a mixture of 87.7 percent petroleum solvent, 11.7 per cent polystyrene,and 0.5 per cent phosphorus. The burstingcharge is picric acid.(8) Flam. C. 500 C. Tllis. bomb is painted blueor gray and weighs 440 to 460 1~~~1~~1s.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451d. SPRAY TANKS. All German aircraft smokesprayers. S 100, S 125, S 2iH), and .V 300, aresimilar in construction. They make use of asmoke acid mixture and are operated by gas pressure.The sprayer is a cylindrical apparatushousing an acid container, a small cylinder or bottleof compressed air, air lines with valve, andemission pipe, and nozzle. It is carried externallyon the aircraft and can he jettisoned at will.The smoke acid is ejected bv compressed air at45 pounds per square inch. It may be filled totwo levels. When charged at low level, it has aweight of 551 pounds: charged at high level itweighs 827 pounds, holding 4S2 and 758 poundsrespectively. The tiring is done electrically byoperating a magnetic valve. Kmission may beinterrupted and re-started at will.Section VII. FIELD RANGES ANDCOOKING EQUIPMENT1. General\ arious types of field ranges and other cookingequipment are issued to units of the GermanArmy. The most important of these include:rolling field kitchens, field ranges, tireless cookers,and cooking outfit, 15.2. Rolling Field Kitchensa. GENERAL. Horse-drawn rolling field kitchensare issued to non-mechanized units. Thelarge rolling field kitchen will serve 125 to 225men; the small rolling field kitchen, 50 to 125men. Smaller units do not receive field kitchensbut get either tireless cookers or cooking outfits,15.I3S.—The roUinij field kitchen readyforVIII—122

I MARCH 1945UNCLAS2"."1ED TM-E 30-451Figure 139.—German field bakery.Figure 140.—German duwjh mixer.‘All— l23

I MARCH ,945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451Figure 141.—Small field range mounted in truck.1~. LIHCREK AND TRAILER. The rolling fieldkitchen consists of two parts: the detachablelimber and the trailer, on which the field rangeis mounted. It is drawn either by two or fourhorses. The limber, on which the driver andcook may ride only during rapid marches, is usedto transport most of the supplies, including theextra iron rations which are carried for emergencyuse only. After the kitchen has been setup, the limber may be used alone to get additionalsupplies. Under some circumstances the rollingfield kitchen without the limber is issued to motorizedunits, and additional supplies are carried inthe light truck used to move the kitchen.c. COOKING UTENSILS. (1) Range. Therange itself, mounted on the trailer, can burneither coal, coke, briquettes, or wood. The followingis considered the normal issue of fuel:Large SwalIBriquettesor Woodor Briquettesand WoodVIII—124......Field Kitchen187 pounds82 pounds77 pounds48 poundsField Kitchen66 pounds29 pounds33 pounds13 poundsFigure 142.—Large field range mounted in truck.The range normally is used as a fireless cooker,especially when underway. I'ires are built in thefire boxes, but as soon as steam starts to escapefrom the safety valve to e s cape andallowed to go out. This practice both saves fueland prevents revealing the unit's position by thesmoke.(2) Stew kettle. The main part of the rangeis a large stew kettle, a kind of double boilerwhich has a second slightly larger shell aroundthe food kettle. A special liquid between theinner and outer kettles keeps the heat evenlydistributed and prevents burning. The doubleshell cover is provi t a lct l Theactual capacity of the kettle of the large range is200 liters (53 gallons), and its cooking capacityis 175 liters (46 gallons). The small range holds125 liters (33 gallons) and can cook about 110liters (29 gallons) a bou t 110 meat,or vegetablrs at one time.(3) Coffee kettle. The cnfTee kettle has a singleshell but a double cover with a safety valve.Ninety liters (24 gallons) of coffee can be pre

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451pared at one time in the large range, and 60 liters(16 gallons) in the small one. There is a faucetto draw off the coffee. There is also a broilerin some of the ranges. All have a separate firebox, but use the same chimney.(4) Food containers. After the food hasbeen prepared, it may be transported forward ininsulated food containers, six of which are providedwith each large rolling field kitchen, fourwith each small one. These containers hold 12liters (about \2y 2 quarts) and weigh about 18pounds. They consist of an inner and an outercontainer with air space between them to act asinsulation. Special carrying harnesses may bea t to the rings at the four corners of theback.3. Field RangesField ranges are provided for motorized units.These consist of the same type ranges as usedwith the rolling field kitchen mounted on a standin the back of a truck. The supplies which acathe r e are packed in a special chest.4. Fireless CookersEither large or small fireless cookers may beprovided for units of less than 60 men. Thelarge fireless cooker outfit, which weighs 77pounds, has an insert kettle of 25 liters capacity,\vhile the small one, \vcighing 53 pounds, has apot of 15 liters capacity. A cooking fork,butcher's knife, and ladle, as well as a coffeesieve complete the outfit.5. Cooking Outfit, I5This 29-pound cooking nutfit is issued to groupssmaller than those using the fireless cooker.It consists of three nesting pots of 9, 10,and 12 liters (2 to 2 > 1 gallons) capacity, with aladle, 10 plates, and 10 combination fork-spoons.6. Bakery Equipmenta. BAKE OVEN TRAILER. The German fieldbake oven consists of a trailer with draw-hearthtype ovens, heated by the steam-pipe principle.Seven trailers are issued per bakery company.b. DOUGH MIXER. The German dough mixer,mounted on a single axle trailer, is operated bya gasoline engine. TWO are authorized perLaker)- company.VIII—125

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451CHAPTER IXUNCLASSIFIEDUNIFORMS, INSIGNIA, ANDINDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENTI. GeneralSection I. ARMY UNIFORMSa. PREWAR DEVELOPMENTS. In peacetime theGerman Army provided its personnel with botha service and a field unifom. The service uniformis an extremely gaudy form of dress. Its purposewas to promote enlistments, and to induce soldiersto vie for the various embellishments awarded forskills, service, and rank. The field uniform wasdesigned to retain these advantages as far as possible,while at the same time providing a practicalfield uniform. Its designers bore in mindconsiderations of comfort (fit, warmth in coldweather, coolness in hot weather, body ventilation),utility (adequate pockets, and support forindividual equipment, arms, grenades, and ammunition),and security (relative inconspicuousnessin different seasons and in different types of terrain).Because of anticipated strategic andproduction conditions, economic factors had greatinfluence on the field uniform. In particular, thenecessity of stockpiling wool and cotton againstprobable wartime shortages caused the Germansto mix about 30 per cent of rayon with the woolof the uniform cloth. So carefully was this materialprepared that the resultant uniforms sufferedlittle actual loss of thermal efficiency andwearing quality.Armored and mountain troops were providedwith special uniforms, while special clothing itemswere furnished personnel engaged in variousother special tasks or on duty in unusual weatherconditions. Nevertheless, prior to 1939, there wasa remarkable degree of standardization in GermanArmy uniforms, and an equally remarkableemphasis upon retention of traditional featuresand appurtenances designed to improve individualmorale and to cultivate arm and unit esprit dccorps.b. WARTIME DEVELOPMENTS. The prolongationof the war into 1942 resulted in a need forsimplification of the field uniform, and in theuse 0i 3 poortr quality. clotll. lly the winter of1943-44, the average \XIO~ content Of the fieldnera l cloth had sui~li to al)proximately 50 pere with some unifol-ins dropping- as low as 40per cent. The wool itsc.lf leas of low quality becauseit had been re-worked. These recent fielduniforms present a shoddy appearance even whenie r s they also have very poor thermal insulafor and when wet lack strength. The press ofeconomic conditions resulted in the introductionpos - Srptcmber 1944 of an entirely new fielduniform—the Model 1944. This uniform will replacethat designed in 1936 as stocks of the latterare c o l d The new field uniform is designedto entila - resources and to permit productionby r unskilled labor.As the quality of the uniform has decreased,the nes s High Comand has sought to bolsterter - by exploiting to the utmost the esteemand effect inherent in badges, awards, decorations,and arm bands, as well as marks of specialunits, rank, and specialty. (&man troops haveprizc~tl these various s!~~lbols so highly that theyrmans wear them on the field of battle, eventhough personal security is comln-omised by nulma - of protective coloration. by permittingthe suf - out of key or expert personnel byan d observers and snipers, or by facilitatingthe operations of Allied intelligence. Indeed, suchhas ded the disregard ior security on the partof i t e m s ofliccrs and men that theyhave worn silver instcatl of dull gray insigniaweather the former Ilns been procurable.Further recent tlcvelopments include the provisionof additional special uniforms required bythe development of specialized troops and thetures of campaigning under unforeseen conditionsof extreme heat and cold. The service uniformhas been confined to officers already owningthem, officer candidate battalions, higher staffsin the rear, permanent parties of service schools,and TIME personnel.IX—I

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4512. Service Uniforma. GENERAL. Whereas many armies have bothdress and service uniforms, in the German Armythe service coat (Wafle~ock) and trousers serveas the basis for the following varieties of dress:(1) Gesellschaftamug. This is the dress uniform,which in turn is divided into g~osscn (ceremonial)and kleine (ordinary) Gesellsclzafta~img.Long trousers and high black shoes always areworn with this type of uniform. Officers maywear white jackets during appropriate seasons.(2) Azlsgrhaxug. This is a type of uniformwhich might be termed "walking-out dress". Inthe peacetime Army, it was a most important uniform,since it gave noncommissioned officers andenlisted men an opportunity to display themselveswhile on pass. It includes service cap, servicecoat, long piped trousers, high black shoes, andblack belt with saber (for senior noncommissionedofficers) or decorative bayonet (for junior noncommissionedofficers and men). Decorations andawards may be worn, together with a colored tasselon the sword or bayonet. For officers and seniornoncommissioned officers, this tassel indicatesrank; for others, it indicates by its colorthe wearer's unit within the regiment.(3) Meldearlmg. This uniform, much like"walking-out dress", is worn on minor occasions.(4) Dienstaxxig. This is the service dressproper, worn when attending classes, on duty inan office, or performing other duties not callingfor the field uniform.(5) Paradeawug. This uniform is similar to"walking-out dress", but resembles the field uniformin that steel helmet, boots, and (for enlistedmen) cartridge pouches are worn.b. SERVICE COAT. The service coat (Plate I),which forms the basis for all these uniforms, ishighly decorative. The same basic formfitting coatFigure I.—Army national emblem, worn on the rightbreast of the field aud service coat alzd on the frolzt ofcaps. The eagle is silver or gray, on a dark green background.The background is black for the black uniform.Navy personvael wear a similar gold eagle.IX—2is used for all ranks. The base color is the warm.field green known to the Germans as "field gray"(feldgrau). Collar and cuffs are covered \vith adark bluish-green imitation velvet, which also appearsas the base for any sleeve insignia that maybe worn. The front edge of the eight-button coatopening, the lower edge of the collar, and the upperpart of the cuffs are piped in the color of thewearer's arm. Fancy silver patches with buttonsare worn on the cuffs. These patches, togetherwith the collar patches, are each mounted on avelvet base dyed in the color of arm. Noncommissionedofficers wear silver braid on the upperedge of collar and cuffs, and around the shoulderstraps. They therefore present an even gaudierappearance than commissioned officers. Officersand noncommissioned officers of the Reichswehrmay wear Rcich.wehr coats \vith proper insigniaas service dress (Plate II). These coats also areworn sometimes in the field. Though service coatsare of wool, officers may have cotton ones privatelytailored for summer wear.c. SERVICE TROUSERS. The service trousers orbreeches made of bluish-gray wool cloth, arepiped along the sides in the color of arm. Onboth sides of this piping General Staff and generalofficers add a broad stripe in the proper color.Officers may wear service breeches in the field.d. SERVICE CAP. The service cap is similarto the U. S. Army service cap, but is upswept togive the wearer the appearance of height. Thevisor is black, with a silvercorded chin strap forofficers, and a black leather strap for noncommissionedofficers and men. The cap band is of dark,bluish-green imitation velvet (blue-gray forSonderfiilzrer), piped top and bottom in the colorof arms. Piping also appears around the crownof the cap. The cap cover is field-gray. The nationalemblem (an eagle, stylized differently forthe different Armed Forces and Party organizations),and below it the national colors (black,white, and red) surrounded by oak leaves, areworn on the cap front. Officers often wear servicecaps in the field.3. Field UniformSince anticipated economic conditions precludedthe provision of both service and field uniformsfor all German Army personnel, the GermanArmy field uniform was designed to perform thedual purpose of field and service uniform. Ittherefore retains as many of the morale-raisingfeatures of the service uniform as possible. In

IMARCH 1945 NCLASS1F1E0TM-E 30-451wartime, the field uniform is worn in combat andon all occasions except those that call for a fatigueor work uniform. As the war has progressed, thenumber of embellishments worn on the field uniformhas tended to increase, except where economicconditions have interfered. The field uniformincludes the following components (someof which have undergone changes during the waras noted) :a. HEADGEAR. (1) Steel lzehet. The presentsteel helmet, M1935, is used by all branchesof the German Armed forces, although someWorld War I helmets as well as Czech and Italianhelmets still are in use. The M1935 is asmaller and lighter version of the World War IGerman helmet, from which it can be differcntiatedby the absence of facepiece lugs whichcharacterized the old helmet. It comes in fivebasic sizes, which weigh from 1.8 to 2.7 pounds.Two ventilation holes are furnished at the sides.The suspension consists of an adjustable, leatherpadded,spring-aluminum band, secured at thesides and rear of the helmet by three cotterkeys. The chin strap is leather. Prior to the war,the national colors were worn on the right sideof the helmet and the national emblem on the leftside. These emblems are no longer worn.(2) Old-style field cap. The old-style fieldcap (Plate I) is of field-gray wool-rayon cloth. Itis cut similarly to the U. S. WAC garrison (oversea)cap, except that the turn-up is scallopeddownward in front. This scallop is provided sothat the eyes are left uncovered when the turnupis lowered to protect the neck and ears. Thefront of the cap is decorated with the nationalemblem and the national colors. An inverted "V"in the color of arm at one time enclosed the nationalcolors. Officers wear silver braid aroundthe top of the crown and along the edge of thescallop (Plate II). The cap is designed to be wornunder the steel helmet.(3) Ml942 field cap. The Ml942 cap is anearly type of field cap, tried out in 1936, and reissuedin 1942 as a new type. It resembles the oldstylefield cap, except that the turn-up is buttonedin front (Plate III). The turn-up flaps may bebuttoned across the chin.(4) Ml943 field cap (Einlzeitsmiitze). In 1943a visored wool-rayon cap was introduced (PlateIII) for all types of troops. Like the mountaincap and Ml942 field cap, the turn-up may be usedto protect the ears and back of the neck, with thebuttoned flaps securing across the chin. The turn-Figure Z.—Field Cap M1942. The vzozuztaipz cap and theField Cup ;211943 ~rlny bc worn with the tzm-down butfomdacross the chief. The toque is shown worn undertll crap.t h e 3.—Believed to be the Ml944 Field Unifornzcoat. The material incorjoratcs a large amount of rayon.IX—3

I MARCH 1945lJNCLASS\F\EDTM-E 30-451Figure 4.—1,otrst t)lpc of field ziltifomr trousers withbuilt-in cloth belt, known as Rundbundhosen. The beltbuckle show~f is that of the IVaffen-SS.u1) feature is uiiliantl~ ant1 inc,lic,cti\-t,, evvi1 if tlw\vinter moo1 tcqur i- worn underneath the cap.Sational cinl~lem ant1 col~~~-s are worn as on theother types of cal).(5) 7‘oquc. A wool-rayon knit toq~ic is issuedto protect the hcxl and neck in cold wcathcr.It may be worn under the cap or helmet (Figure2). This toclue is not a balaclava helmet, butconsists of an unshaped sleeve with neck and fact'ol)enings.b. BODY CLOTH INC. il ) L'nal. The coat:( Fcldbluse) has appeared in >everal models.(a) Prewar coat. The prewar coat was designedto be as handsome as possible, while at thesame time providing a comfortable, practical, fieldcoat affording maximum security and utility.Four pleated patch pockets are provided, with aninner pocket :~long the lower part 0i the rightfront fap for the first-aid kit. The grav-painted,stamped metal buttons are quickly removable, andare standartl for all Armed Force uniiorms. ‘I‘5leel.c ends are split >o that they may lie buttonedfairly snugly around the wrist. The collar is I)uiltlike the collar of a I - . S. ship-t. escq)t tllxt it isstiff and is \\.orn \vitliout a tiv. I -liti 1943 the coatcollar was protected by a sweat band ( Krat/enb'uide)which buttoned to the inside of the collar.The coat collar \ws tlc,,ig~l~~l to IK worn closed,although the collar hooks and top coat buttonmight be freed in the field. Support for personalequipment is furnished by two adjustable metalbelt holders in both front and rear. These coatswere furnished with dark, bhii>h-green, imitationvelvet collars and shoulder straps. Similar materialwas tised as a backing for the national emblemworn on the right breast (often mistaken for ana\iator's \vings), and for chevrons and specialtybadgw.Officers' pi-ew;Lr field coat- are similar 10 tlioscfor iioncommissionecl oflict~rs and men, vscvpt thatcuffs are worn. Officers, however, may wear theissue coat v-ith proper insignia. (;t,llrl-al officcrs\vear goltl buttons and a gold national cnlblem.Chaplains' coats always have been tlistinqtishedby lack of shoulder straps. .Siiice ofticers purchasetheir uniforms privately, some officers haveacquii-rd cotton field uniforms of fieltl-gray colorfor swiiiiit’r uur .(b) Wartime cluuii/es. As mentioned above,material shortages and production difficulties resultedin a lowering of the cjIi;ilily (,I the mat Inaterial,liesides the shoddy appearance of thelle\~cr coat. the most noticeable differences are the

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IIyigure 5.—Field gray wiform for crews of self-propelledgn//s. 7‘1~s~ wits uox* zereir death's Ireud collar patches.abscncc since mid-1933 of pocket pleats. and theuse of straight-edge instead of pointed pocketflaps. The color of the cloth alsn twds to\vartls agray rather than a warm green. (Compare inl’late I the private in field uniform, a-ho lvearsthe prewar coal, with the first sergeant in momtainuniform, who wears the later type of coat.)Nwessity finally has compelled adoption of theMotlcl 1944 coat (see Fi.qurc 3), the main apparenttlifferenccs of which are tailoring motliiications1)ermitting the use of less skillctl laborand the conservation of materials.(2) Tm~scrs. (a) Prewar trousers. Until1933, full trousers of the same field-gray mat&das the field uniform coat were issued to the GermanArmy. Suspenders are used with this typeof trousctrs which have two sets of suspender buttonss(wn in place. Nan)- of thcw trousers havewinforc~ments in the seat. iVan\ have semibrcwheslegs, so that the leg ends easily may befitted into the marching boot. Two slanting buttonctlfront pockets, a buttoned hip pocket, and awatch pocket with ring are provided. The trousersmay be tightened at the waist by means of twotapes and a metal buckle in the rear.(M Belted trousers (Rundbundlwsen). In1943 the German Army was issued field uniformtrouw-s with built-in (,loth belt after the style of_Ifi-ika ii0rp.r clothing. The decision to drop suspendw-trousers was governed by t\vo considerations:the iml~racticnl,;lit~- of suspenders whenonlv shirt mid trouscr- are worn, and the inconwnientand. iin(ler colllllnt conditions. dangerousnccehsity of renio\.ing tli? coat and battle equipmentto let tlo~vn the tl-ollser5. These trousers arcstill cut high. Like ski or mountain trousers, thelegs are tapered to fit illto leggings or shoe-tops.13) O:wcoat. TIIC tloubl~-breasted six-button,\\-ool-rayon overcoat is standard for all ranks,cxccpt that grncrnl offiwrs \\‘ear gold buttons andhave red lapel facings / ant1 administrative officialsin ,gc7icr;&office~ gl-ntlcs wear dark grewfacings). Collars, once of dark, bluish-green imitationvelvet, now tend to be plain ficltl-gray wool.The coat, which is cut narro\v at the waist, flaresat the bottom, and has t\\w side slash pockets. Theordinary leather belt nlay be xvorn, run throughslits on the sitlc so that it runs inside the rear ofthe o\-ercoat \\-ithout illterf~~ring with the clothbelt at the back. ()vt.rcoats have degenerated inquality of matc~rial in the same manner as the fieldcoats.IX—5

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451(4) Swcatcr. A light-weight wool-rayon, V-neck sweater always has been furnished as part ofthe field uniform. It is worn under the eoat. Agreen band around the neck distinguishes Armyswcatcrs; ;lir T;orw s\vcntcLri liavc a gray-blueband.(5) Glwcs. A pair of ti~ltl-gray knit n-oolrayonglo\~~ is furni~hctl in the winter with thefield uniform.(6) Underwear, (a) Prewar type. The typeof ;jrniy under\\-ear issued until 19-k.3 consists ofa long-sleeved undershirt and long underdrawers,\vorn in all seasons. They arc ’matk of medium-eight, tricot (machine-knit) cotton cloth, whichgratluall\- has incorporatrd incwasing amounts Ofrayon. Since the \var began. an increasing proportionof -\rmy untlcrwrar 1x1s 1~~7 tlycd greenior camouflage.(1)) 19/S shirt. In 1943 tllc. collarless undershirtwas replaced by a green tricot combinationshirt-undershirt with collar and two buttonedbreast pockets. The shirt remains a pullover type.The collar obviates the need for a sweatband insidethe coat collar. When worn with the coatcollar closed. the shirt sho\\~ slightly abovethe edge of the coat collar. \2’hcn the coat is wornI\-ith the collar hooks and top button open, theshirt collar is I\-orn uutsi(l~ the c.oat collar (see thel>t w-geant in Illountain uni101x1, I’lnte I). Theprovision of a fairly prr~sent;~lk shirt-undershirtmakes possible a coatlcss SUIIIIti(‘r uniform.c. L~OOWX~~~. (1) Footwraps and soc/:s. The(k-man soltlicr is furnished with long, woo-rayonsocks and with footwraps. The lnttcr are of thebest quality wool or of cotton Ilanncl, cut in largesquares. On? square is wrapped around eachfoot over the socks llcfore the shoe or boot is puton. Boots are fitted to tlvo l)air of socks, or onepair of socks and on? pair of it10t\\.I-aps.(2) Jack boots (MarschsticfcJ). Short bootshave been the traditional footx:c,ar of Ckrman soldiersfor centuries. This t!-pc cjf footgear, howcvcr,both requires an illortlinate amount oflrnther and causes upnwcssar~ wear on the heelduring the march. Thr traditional marching jackboot therefore has received much adverse criticismin the German military prc’ss. By 1941 its use\vas limited to infantry, engillecrs. and motorcyclists.Issutt finally has lw.11 conlpletely SUSI)endetl, although rsisting stocks \vill be used up.Figure.Anklct Short&—Cotton- OY linen-twill fatigue alld work uni-(3) lcg~~i~~~~.s. leggings wornform is the cut of the field amiforvt coat. with high shoes 110~ replace the jack boot. Theleggings are of cotton or linen tluck, with theIX—6

I bihJ~3-4 194~lower edge rimmed with leather. Each legging issecured on the outside with two leather strapswith metal buckles.(4) High shoes (Sclz~ziirsclzz&). High lacedleather service shoes have always been part ofthe field uniform issued by the German Army.They now replace the boot entirely, instead ofserving as alternate footgear.d. FATIGUE OR WORK CLOTHING. Prior tothe war and during its first 2 years, individualsmight be issued both a lvork suit and a fatiguesuit with the field uniform. Generally only onewas issued each man, the work suit being reservedfor those with heavy tasks, suc11 as motor maintenance.Both are cut in the same style, but thework suit is of unbleached linen woven as herring-,bone twill, while the fatigue suit is of a lighterlinen herringbone twill dyed a rush green (PlateIII). In 1943 a fatigue coat, cut in the style ofthe field uniform coat, was issued. This lattertype, often of a cloth containing a high percentageof rayon, may serve as a summer uniform.e. ISSUE. The field uniform as described aboveis issued to all troops except those requiringspecial uniforms or special clothing issue becauseof unusual tasks or because they are expected tooperate under abnormal terrain or weather conditions.4. Special Uniforms and ClothingSpecial clothing issued to German Army troopsvaries from minor changes or additions to thefield uniforms, to uniforms of completely differentcut, color, and material.a. BLACK UNIFORM. Prior to the \var, a blackuniform was furnished crews of German Armytanks and armored cars. This uniform, whichhas undergone slight changes, now is worn bycrews of "Elephants". by tank-destroyer andassault-gun crews in Panzer and Pn~~xr Grcnadicrdivisions, and by tank and armored-car crews.(1) Hcadgrav. (a) Bcwt. Until the winterof 1939-40, troops wearing the black uniformwore a black beret, which served as a crash helmet.This helmet type of headgear proved unnecessary.(1~) Black field cap. During the winter of1939-40, a black, wool-rayon field cap, in thestyle of the old-style Army field cap. replacedthe black beret.(c) 1931 black jicld rnp (Eilllzritsllziit,“r),Simultaneously with the introduction of the fieldgrayEinheitsmiit~e for the normal field uniform,the black uniform received a similar visored capUNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451in black cloth. Tnsigilin and braid for officcbrsfollow the field-gray cal) pattern.(2) Body clotlzi~ry. (a) Coat. The black.double-breastetl, wool-rayon coat issued withthe black uniform is kno\vn as the "field jacket"(Fcldjackc) It is illubtratcd in I’late II. Recentjackets lack the piping on the edge of the collar,and some ma). have large pockets on the leftbreast. The coat is made of the same qualityof wool-rayon cloth as the field uniform. It isdyed black to conceal dirt and grease stains. Ametal death's head is worn on each collar patch.(b) TI-ozrsr~s. The black, wool-rayon trousersof the black uniform are referred to as "Fieldtrousers" (FAdlloscll1, They rrsemble the latertype of normal fieltl uniform trousers in cut,with ski-pant legs. ‘l‘hey are fitted with tapes,however, so that they may be bound to the legat the ankle.(c) L’r~dcmear. Lntlerwear consists of longdrawers and a collared tricot shirt-undershirt withblack necktie. Until 1944. this shirt was gray.Issue since that date has lien green, and thercforeidentical with underwear for the normalfield uniform.(d) ?helo-piccc cozfcrall. For camouflage purposes,for a summer uniform. and for a workgarment a two-piece coverall of rush-green cottonor rayon is issued. It is cut identically with theblack wool uniform.(3) Footgm. Standard black service shoes,long socks. and foot\vraI)s are worn. The useof boots with the black uniform is contrary toGerman regulations.b. FIELD-GRAY UNIFORM FOR ARMORED-VEHICLE CREWS. X wool-rayon field-gray uniform,identical in cut with the black uniform, wasissued in the spring of 1940 to crews of assaultguns. This uniform is worn by the crews ofthe assault gum and tank destroyers of infantry,light infantry, and nlountain infantry divisions.The uniforms bear a death's head on each collarpatch. Crews of armored trains and of selfpropelledinfantry and antiaircraft guns wear thesame uniform with the usual field uniform collarpatches ([‘late II). A two-piece, rush-greencoverall. identical with that issuctl to troops wearingthe black uniform. also is issued to those wearingthe fieltl-gray ~III~form for armored-vehiclecrews.c. MOUNTAIN UNIFORM. The mountain uniformis similar to the normal field uniform withthe following exceptions:IX—7

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 7.—White cap cover for the rr2ouutaill cap.(1) Cap. The visored mountain cap. tlcrivcdfrom the visored Austrian cap Of the last war.is the original model for thy Al19-l.3 /Y;‘irlll~Qts7niitzc. The mountain cap nlap l)e distinguishedby a metal Edr/x~iss sw n to the left side of thecap (Plate I). A white camouflage cap cover isfurnished with the cap.(2) Coat nizd overcoat. Field uniform coatsand overcoats are worn, hut are enlbellishetl by anEdelweiss on the upper right slewe (f’latr I).(3) Wind jafkrt. The mountain windjacketis a light, double-breasted, long jacket of olivccolored,windproof, water-repellent duck ( J’latcIII). This is lrss common now than the parka,which appears to he superseding it.(4) Swmfcr. The mountain sweater. heavierthan the normal field uniform sweater, has a turtleneck for added warmth.(5) Trousers. Baggy trousers, desigtml andfitted SO as not to hind the tnountainrer at an!point, are provided German niountain troops.These trousers are of the usual fieltl-gray. \voolrayoncloth. Their ski-pant bottoms tic. withtapes at the ankles. Special mountain susp~ndersare issued with these trousers.(6) Parka and overpanfs. Until 1932. a whiteparka was issued on the basis of 10 per cent Ofunit strength. By the tim of the Caucasuscampaign, a new and improved type of parka,with overpants of the same material, was furnishedto mountain divisions. The parka is reversible,with a tan and a I\-hite side, and isdistinguished by three huttoned Ix-east l>ockets.The cloth is unusual. in that the rayon filxirsare designed so that some provide strength, whileIX—8Others swell when wet. ‘l‘ht~ s\\-cllixlg actionrenders the garinc7it \~nter--i~~~l~ell~~Ilt to a highdegree. When dry, the fiber shrinks, permittingproper I-cntilation through the garment. Theohjcctive of the cl,~sigllcTs \vas to avoid theaccumulatio~l( of sweat. I\-hich, ii the wearer shouldrest after heavy exertion, I\-oultl cause unduedampness and cooling and result iii colds, pneumonia,anal frostl~itc.(7) Caiii'as oz'crmittcns. These mittens withleather palms are furnished in addition to thefield uniform wool glo\-es to prc)vitlc extra insdatioiiagainst cold and to keep the \vOol ghv?Sdry.(8) Ski-nwuntain hoots. Heavily-hobnailed,higll laced shoe< arc lwovitlul as ski-nimntainboots.(9) Ix{/~/il2{/s. Until Ouolwr lo-F4. short,wrap leggings oi ficltl-grnv WllOl, >UCh as tllostxused by Austrian niountaiii trc1,q’s in World WarI, were standard for German mountaineers. Nowthese are Ixing replaced by the canvas leggingsishe d with the norn~nl field uiiiiorni.(10) Rock-climbing shoes. I-Tigli climbingshoes with rope or felt so1c.s at-r iswctl whennecessarv.(11j Camouflage clothincj. I‘rior to 1941, whiteparkas or lvhite suit.5u we i-hued to mountaintroops for opt.ration< in siio\v-covert’d regions.The present mountail parka and windprooftrousers have a tan and a white side.d. SPECIAL CI.OTHIXI; FOR MOTORCYCLISTS.Motorc>.clists recrivc as supplementary clothinga raincoat; a lmir of go,g~l~ : a pair of gauntlets;and, in wintu-, an extra s\vc,atc.r. wool ovc,rsocks,and a special coat. The gnuilllt.ts are of ovei-=coat cloth with trig-gcr finger. and mav have lcathelpalely. The iootlc

I MARCH 1945f. SUXIMER UNIFORM. Prior to 19A1, no uniformfor field sun7nier wear was issued. Sincethat date, unifornis clevclopetl for the .Ij‘r-ifiKovps have 11cen mxtle avxilal)le to trocp IJ~JLTZingin arid and trOlAca1 climates, such a3 lmvailin Italy, Greece, the Crimea, ant1 the Kuban delta.Mention alrcatly has I,ecn made of tllc ;~tlaptaticmof the normal firlcl uniform and norma1 fntigm5as a summer uniform. 7’17~ summer field uniformpropr inclutlcs the iollo~viiig itcms:(1) IIdgrav. The first .dfrifitr Ko/-p.s troopswere provided with tropical hcltnt.ts ant1 khakicotton field caps iii the cut Of the ok-style ficlcluniform cap. These soon were i-~placctl by avi sored khaki cotton tick1 cap col)ictl from the10u11tai11 cap.(2) Bod~r clotllirfg. IM y clothing consists ofluosc-mesh rayon or cotton uiitl~rshorts andslmrt-slee\-ed untlershirt; a t\\o-pocket, gra!Ghgrev11or khaki cotton shirt cari-\-ing dioulderstrapinsignia; and khaki shorts or long trouserswith lmilt-in cloth 1)clts. ‘I‘llough shirtsleevesmay he the uniform of the da)-, n roll-collar. Vncckcd, khaki coat is furnished. In spite of cottonshortages, the coat and trousers continue tobe of good quality cotton twill. Since late 1912.however, the four pleated pockets of the coathave been niotlificd in the saim fashion ZIS thoseof the normal field uniform coat. ‘me cottotwill breeches furnished in the vvry early daysof the Afrikn Korps are worn only hy those stillpossessing them.(3) ~OOt{JCW'. Ikier1 hoots \vitli cloth topsare no long-u ncces.snry, hut still rna~. 1)~ encountered.High brcmm leather hlioes arc nowthe standard Lvcar. ~\‘ool socks. rathc2- than footwraps,are worn.g. WINTER UNIFORMS. (1) Pre-1941 winterclothing. I’rior to the winter of 19-k-32, theGerman ,4rniy niack little provision for winterwarfare. Mountain troops were the Ijest equippedto fight under conditions of estrcmc cold andsnow; the remainder of the Army- received specialclothing only for slxcial missions and duties, asnoted above. Sentries were the only soldiers,Ikde s tlrivcrs and motorcyclists. who receivedspecially designed clothing. 7‘0 them were issuedsurcoats and felt overl~oots, Or, if tlir latter werelacking, straw overboots. Ortlinnr\- troops worethe wool toque, gloves, sweater, and overcoat inwinter.(2) Post-1941 wiutcv clothiiu/. .\s soo11 asthe necessity for great quantities of winter cloth-UNCLASSU itlDTM-E 30-451ing became obvious. th< German Army attemptednumerous improvisation-, based on manv varietiesof civilian, iililitai-y. anoi captured clothing. J:venInntrc S.- -hnproiised leinlcr clothing. The ordinary overcoathas been tenif'fr'd aromai the leas and the lower part/ the coat bound ;eith .

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Figure 10.—The toque. Two toques arc shozen, onecolored wliite to show the manner o~f wearing two inextreme coldFigure 9.—Padded coat and trousers worn under the newwinter uniform.IX—10though a standard winter uniform was developedin 1942 and issued for the winter of 1942-43,stocks have been inadequate. The necessity ofproviding heavy n-inter clotllillg for other thancombat troops has required CCUI~inued improvisations.These include rabbit-fur jackets and vests,as well as sleeveless and sl~c~ctl pile jackets ofrayon known as "breastwanners". Soviet pilecaps and I ~oots often are usetl. I;or sentriesa r c are comp~ll~tl to ruiiain fairlymotionless in the cold, overcoats and surcoats withextra linings are available. 1 Icavy sheepskin surcoats,originated by the German Air Force, alsomay be used. However, a most important developmentis the new winter uniform.(3) New winter uniform. The new winteruniform is designed to provide a confortable conbatuniform giving irecdom oi mo\-cment and useof ! . r t vet offering protection against extremecold and ovcrhcating (luring periods ofexertion. The uniform is worn over the normalfield uniform. Cartridge pouches are worn onthe normal leather belt, under the skirt of theparka. This feature aids in I)roviding essentialbody t o to prevent the accumulation ofsweat. Several clips of ammunition are kept availablein the parka pocket. The hooded parka has awaist belt, bottom drawstring. and double-buttonedflaps up the front that provide a windproof

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 11.—Improvised camouflage coat in the cut ofthe Army field uniform coat. The cloth is taken fromshelter duck material of an Italian shelter half.closure 1 . A toque is worn under the steel helmet,and when the wind is strong, a stfit, felt facemask may be fitted. The trousers have twoside pockets, and fairly short legs. These legsfit over special, white, rayon-canvas boots whichhave fabric soles and three-layer walls. Thelatter may be stuffed with straw or paper asadded protection against cold and moisture.Since these boots are not suited for mud conditions,ski-mountain boots or felt boots withleather soles and facings may be used instead.The parka, toque, and trousers are issued in threeweights. The most common is the mediumweight, in which the material consists of twolayers of windproof cloth with a rayon-wool in-I-igure 12.—Xezc winter uniform with mottled side out.IX—II

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Figure 13.—Flak personnel in summer uniform.terliner. The windproof cloth has the samewater-repellent features as the latest mountainparka. Since the complete uniform containsonly 9 per cent wool, the clothing is heavy forits warmth, and therefore not as efficient as theGermans had planned. The uniform originallyhad a white and a field-gray side, but by 1943 theneed for better camouflage had become so apparentthat a mottled design was substituted for thefield-gray. Two designs of mottle are used—one is that of the normal shelter half, and theother is that of the Army camouflage jacket(Plate III). Both types are in use, To facilitateIX—12recognition. cloth I)nncls in ihe color of the daymay be buttoned to the, sleeves ol the parka.h. C'AMO~.ILU;I- CI.OTHINC. The original premarissue of a camouflage slreltcr half proved insufficientfor the cxmouflagc of ii~tlivitluals. Afterconsiderable improvisation on the part of fieldunits, particularly in Italy, a standard Armylight-rayon camouflage jacket ( I’late III) wasissued and put into USC in I ‘ j - l34 4. 17arioustypes of field-made jackets, u\ing C;erman andItalian shelter lialvcs. arc \vitlely employed.Snipers may wear complete camouflage suits, includingface masks. Headgear camouflage often

I MARCH 1945TM-E 30-451is improvised, since the Army did not providea standard camouflage helmet cover until tinissue of the camouflage jacket. Hut a very practicalelastic band to fasten camouflage materialsto the helmet was furnished to all troops. Camouflageclothing is usually organizational, and isissued to snipers, personnel of outposts, and liketroops.£-!rSection II. GERMAN ARMY INSIGNIA1. GeneralGerman Army insignia are intended to establishclear differentiation between ranks and types ofservice, and at the same time to encourage individualcombat efficiency and proficiency in militaryarts. Direct appeal is made to vanity andto the human tendency to show off militaryprowess as expressed in terms of insignia anddecorations. Many of these insignia are basedon traditional German military insignia selectedfrom units famous in German popular and militaryhistory.2. Insignia of RankInsignia of rank mainly are determined byshoulder-strap devices (Plate IV and V). Whilethere arc many minor complexities having to (10with fine differentiation among various ranks,services, and functions, these do not concern theaverage case. A clear distinction is made amongcommissioned officers (Offiaicre), noncommissionedofficers (Untcrofftcicre), and enlisted menof various grades (Mannschaften). Because of theimportance of noncommissioned officers in combatand on the drill field, they are accorded special distinguishingmarks beyond the normal insigniaof rank. Along the lower edge of their coatcollar they have a silver or gray braid .4 inchwide. First sergeants, as senior company or batterynoncommissioned officers, wear two bandsof similar braid on each coatsleeve. Distinctionis made between the upper three and the lowertwo grades of noncommissioned officers. Theformer are known as Porte pccuntcroffizicrc; thelatter as Untcroffizicrc ohnc Portcpcc. Theformer are entitled to special considerations andprivileges, as are the first three grades of U. S.Army noncommissioned officers. These includewearing on certain occasions an officer's saberfigure 14.—Tank destroyer uniform of the Hermann(loeruui Ihviswn (shoulder insif/iiia of rank is missimi onthe uniform shown).IX—13

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451and a tassel known as the Portefiee, hence thetitle. Fatigue clothing carries the type of noncommissioned-officerinsignia used on Reichswehuniforms.3. Insignia of Arm and SpecialtyIn order to clarify an individual's duties, toafford easy recognition of line troops, and toavoid jealousy arising from rapid promotion ofqualified specialists, the German Army has madea somewhat ill-organized effort to distinguishline personnel of the arms; personnel of specialand administrative services, and personnel ofboth preceding categories who are so proficientor qualified that rapid promotion to suitable rankis necessary. The first group wear insignia ofthe line arms (normal insignia of rank and ofarm) ; the specialists and administrative officialstend to be designated by varied insignia (usuallyby introducing a basic dark-green color) ; thethird group (Sondcvfiihr~) wear modificationsof normal insignia. Sonderfiihrcr insignia forline duty is shown in color plates; insignia forSonderfi&er of the Corps of AdministrativeOfficials is somewhat similar as regards the collarpatch, but the shoulder strap is more difficultto differentiate. In peacetime and during theearly part of the war, further differentiationwas made to indicate reserve officers, Landwelrrofficers, officers recalled to active duty, and officersover the retirement age who might be requiredfrom time to time for consultation.4. FourrageresAll German officers are entitled to wear thefourragere shown on the officer's service dress inPlate II. Adjutants wear a single cord. Theadjutant's fourragere must not be mistaken forone of the 12 grades of markmanship awards(Plate VII), and 1st sergeant in service dress(Plate I) . The marksmanship awards sometimesare worn in combat.5. Use of Numbers and Letters on Shoulder Insigniaof RankAlthough the wearing of numbers and lettersfurnishing unit identification is forbidden in forwardareas, German soldiers do not always ohservethis regulation. Soldiers of the FieldArmy, however, usually wear such identificationin the form of slip-over cloth strips, with thenumbers running across the shoulder strap withthe length of the strip. In rear areas, numbersIX—14are worn as shown in Plates I\ and V. Arabicnumerals indicate the number { the regiment orbattalion to \\-hich the \\-carc‘r 11c~long5. Enlistedmen and the lolvvr I\vo grades of nonconlnli5sioned officers wear numbers in the color of theirarm; other noncommissioned officers wear silvernumbers, as do officer candidates. Officers weargold numbers. Lcttcr5 may 1~. coml)inetl withArabic numerals. In some cases (See Plate VI).tliesc intlicatc units of slx&d arms or of specialbranches of arms. In other cases, the letter Dand an nral)ic numeral indicate. (Ii\-i5ion headqual-ters personnel. 5iiicr i-e~-ulatl~1115 have changedfrequently since 10.30. the sy~tt~ of identiiicationby numbers ant1 letters i, clifticult to iollouwithout the aid of cuniplcx gui(lr4.Section III. GERMAN AIR FORCEUNIFORMS AND INSIGNIAI. GeneralAlthough many items of unii~lrms and clothingof special Xir Force design are provided, manyitems arc’ prcxurcxl from the Armv in suitablecolors. There is not. howr\~~r, the degree ofstandardization in .\rmy and .\ir I:orcc clothingthat would alqxxr tle5iral)le, 1nrticularly in viewof the number of riir I;orce ~1-0u~ltl troops perforniingthe same functions a> ccJnil)arnble Armytroops. This is cspccinlly trllr in regard to theuniforms provided for Africx, and 11OW used assummer field uniforms. Characteristic of most,4ir Force ullifornls is tlie gray-111~ color ofmuch of the uniforms and equilxncnt. Commentsmade on the decline of cloth quality in Armyuniforms art’ equally. alq~lical)l~~ to -Air Force uniforFigure 15.—Air Force national emblem, worn on theright breast of coals, overcoats, jackets, lump suits, andsummer shirts.

I MARCH 19452. Uniformsa. SERVICE AND DRESS UNIFORMS. The GermanAir Force no longer has service uniforms,except for a white summer coat and a dress messjacket for officers, and a service coat for generals.A service coat for all pcrsonncl was alreadyin the process of being replaced in 1939.This coat (Tztrlz~ork) resembles the present uniformcoat IWuflc~ockj , except that it is notdesigned to be buttoned up to the neck. (Comparethe private's and the colonel's coats on PlateVIII.)11. NORMAL FIELD UNIFORM. (1) Headgear.The Air Force field cap (Fliegernziitzr) is asimple wool-rayon cap similar in cut to the presentU. S. WAC garrison cap. The nationalcolors are worn below the national emblem.Officers wear silver braid around the edge ofthe turn-up. The Army Einhcifs77ziifac, in AirForce color and with proper insignia, has begunto replace the Fli~gcrmiitzc. The Army Ml935steel helmet, painted gray, is issued when required.(2) Body clothing. (a) Coat. The standardAir Force coat (Waffenrock) is a five-button coat,designed to be worn either with the collar closedat the neck, or as a roll-collared, V-neck coatwith the collar hook and top button open (Plate\‘IlI). Four pleated patch pockets are furnished,with the national emblem appearing over the rightbreast pocket. Two adjustable metal belt holdersof Army style are located toward the sides of theuniform. The sleeves end in large cuffs. Thecollar at one time carried piping on the loweredge in the color of the arm. Though this featurewas discontinued in 1940. such coats stillmay be found. Insignia of rank are worn on theshoulder and on patches located on the ends ofthe collar. In 1944 this coat was issued incotton-rayon instead of wool.(II) "Flight bloztsc" (Flicgerbhse). Air Forcetroops more commonly wear a short, cuffless. flyfront.wool-rayon jacket with slash pockets (PlateVIII). The jacket's collar may be worn open orclosed. Celt holders, insignia, and piping (if thelatter is worn) are placed as on the coat. Thejacket is intended for crews of aircraft, and thereforeis designed so that there will bc no buttons,patch pockets, or cuffs to catch on projecting partsof aircraft interiors. The jacket is sufficientlyconvenient and smart-looking, however, to be popularwith all Air Force troops.(c) Trowcrs. The gray-blue, wool-rayon.Air Force trousers are similar in cut at the waistTM-E 30-45Ito Army suspender trotlsers. Air Force trousers,however, arc al\va!.s slacks. and arc not fitted withnarrow or sk-pant lwtt1ws except in the case ofmountain trousers.(d) SIli/-t. Gray diirts of mottled gray-bluethread are \vorn with I)lnck tic. The shirts maybe fitted with shoultlc~ stl-aps to intlicate rank.(e) Underwear. Army underwear is worn.(f) Sweater. The \i r Force sweater is identicalwith the Army's, vxccl)t that the coloredband at the neck is r\ir Tporce gray-blue.(g, oT’r7’Cllof. A blue-gray version of theArmy overcoat is WOE-II. Patches are placed onthe collar. I:irst sc.r-:caiits I\-ear their sleevebands (I’latc 1.1II 1.(3) Foo/~/~w7~. The Air I;orce uses Army-typejack boots, shoes, ~ocI;~. and footn-raps. Leggings,when used, al-e Army It~ggings dyed blue-gray.c. A~~UNTAIN UTJIIY)RSI. Sormal Air Forceuniforms are combin~cl with Army issue, properlycolored when nec

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSlFIEDTM-E 30-451(2) Jump suit. The older types of jump suitusedin 1939-40 were of the pullover, coverallvariety. The present types button up the frontlike coats, and have snap closures to secure thebottom tightly around the legs—a feature borrowedfrom the older types. ,\mple zipper-closvtlpockets are provided. The material is a lightshelter duck, originally olive in color (Plate 1-X),but in present versions ahvays mottled. Thepresent jump suit, like older types, is worn ovc’rthe wool or sumnit’r uniform, hut caii quickly l)eremoved.(3) Cammfltryc jacket. Usually peculiar toparachute troops (and worn by the 1st l’arachuteDivision during the Battle of Cassino—hence the appellation "Green Devils") is a greenish,mottled camouflage jacket about the lengthof the jump suit. This is a fly-front. cotton, herringbonetwill garment \vith two pockets (I‘lath,IX).(4) Footpar. Several types of jump bootshave been issued. The earlier types laced alongthe sides and had heavy corrugat&rubl)er soles.Later types resemble the U. S. parachutist's boot.In battle, Army-type high service shoes may lxworn.g. WINTER CLOTHING. The Air Force LISCSthe Army winter uniform, and improvises in thesame way as the elder service. Often lvurn l lFlak sentries in very exposed positions is the.very heavy sheepskin surcoat she\\-n in co101plates. This coat may be \vorn by the entire guncrew, if necessary. It is, however, too heap\- forinfantry combat use.h. UNIFORMS OF THE I;allsrhi~ll~jiigr~-P~rl~~Division Hcmarl Gorving. This division follo\~~unusual practices in the issue 0i iinif0rni.s ai iinsignia. The collar patch is white for all ranks.while the color of the shoulder strap varies accordingto type of service. Tank crews an(lcrews of self-propelled guns wear Army blackor field-gray jackets and iield trousers, but withAir Force insignia.3. Insignia.\ir Force insignia are extremely complex. There.are four svstvms of indicating rank: that uwtlon the shoulder straps and on sleeve chevrons;that used on the collar patch ; that LIS~Y~ 011 flyingsuits ; and that used on ht h sleeves of the motorvehicle coat and on fatigue coveralls. Thecollar patches of no~~comn~issioned officers' ovei-coats, and their coat collars, are edged withIX—16silver braid in the nianiier of Army noncommissionedofficers' coats. The awards for combatflights (see color plates) easilv ma) r be mistakenfor pilots insignia I)ec;1ii5e 0f llrc,ir shape. Thepilot's insignia. ho\vc,\-~r. is worn as n nletal orcloth badge on the lower lett breast, whereas tinawardsfor combat flights are worn above theleft breast 1)ocli~t. Sot illustrated under a\v:irClsin the color l)l:~tc; i- tl1;ct I/11. 11i!$t ligllters,which consists of the award I or fighters with ablack instead of a silver winded arrow. AirForce personnel are award' d marksmanshipbadges of a design similar in that ot Armyawards. Other fourrageres an- worn, indicatingcommissioned rank, adjutant, "i merely length ofservice.Picture 16.—Xational ewhlew [ the . I nurd I'tirty l:litrGuard OVattrn-SS). This rin/'lrin is TOT/I on the Irflsleeves of routs, ,iz : errtnits, and wrl.r's. and afprars eitlirron the jront or on the le}l • ide oj caps.I. UniformsSection IV. ARMED ELITE GUARDUNIFORMS AND INSIGNIAThe Armed Klite Guard i II '//-.V.S') has followedthe Army closely in the provision of uniiormclothing. When first M-IH inlo the field,ll'affeu-SS units were distinguished in part bythe type of roll-collar Y-neek eoat shown in PlateXYIII . .Also distinctive were their camouflagejacket (Plate XYIII ). and their brown shirts withblack ties. For some time stocks of the .V.S' coathave been practically exhausted, and Army coatshave been used. Army shirts also are issued.There remain slight differences between the highgrade shelter-duck, water-repellent, windproof >S\S"camouflage jacket and the similar Army jaclic‘t:the .V.S' jacket has two slant, buttoned pockets atits side in later versions, and a different camou-Ilagc patterli.A new IVaffcn-SS uniform is a linen-cotton.herringbone t;;.ill. two-piece suit (Plate XIX).

I MARCH 1945.S.S" regulations forbid wearing insignia on the collarof this uniform, but troops have shown an increasingtendency to include all possible insigniadevices. However, no insignia are worn on theone-piece tank coverall ( Plate XVIII). In general.IVaffcn-SS uniform clothing differs from that ofthe Army only in respect to the above items, andin the more complete authorized issue to IVaffcii-SS troops. Moreover, when complete issue cannotbe made, the JFaffcu-SS troops always receivefuller issue than their Army neighbors. IVaffcn-SS troops now also receive the army winter uniform,which replaces the special SS pullover parkaillustrated in Plate XIX.UNCLA3SSFSEDTM-E 30-4512. InsignialVajfcn-SS troops wear shoulder insignia ofrank similar to those of the Army, but wear collarpatches of the Gcncral-SS. The sleeve insigniaof rank, worn on camoutlage jackets, coveralls,and similar clothing, is the same as that wornby corresponding Army grades. The grades ofsnipers' badges, shown in color plates, are issuedlo IVafjcn-SS as well as to Army personnel. Rifleregiments of .S^-Police divisions wear collarpatches similar to those worn by officers and menof the Army. The distinctive insignia of thell'affcn-SS is the SS national emblem worn onthe upper left sleeve. Noncommissioned officerswear silver braid along the edge of the collar inthe manner of Army noncommissioned officers.3. Uniforms and Insignia of the Security Service ofthe Waffeti-SSThis uniform consists of the ordinary *S\9 helduniform with Police shoulder straps to indicaterank, JKS* collar patches, and an SD badge (forSichcrhcitsdicnst) on the lower left sleeve.Figure 17.—Waffen-SS camouflage jacket with buttonedpockets.l-uiurc IS.—Uniform of I lie Security Service (Sichcr-Iicilsdicnsl) of the ll'uffen-SS.Section V.GERMAN DECORATIONStiennan decorations lr valor consist of thevarious grades of Iron Cross shown on PlateSSII . togr,thcr with the Honor Roll Clasp. Inactualit!-, iroil cram’s of the first and second~1asws 11iay hc aflutlctl m bulk to combat units,\\hcLthu or 11ot the personnel are individualI\tlezwv111g of such decorations. L\t one time thereappeared to be some plan on the part of Germanauthorities to keep Ic~c;tl inns of thy \xrious typesof cl~cc~raticuis. c~mlx~t .t’riices. and ordinary service,and ordinary service awards distinct and recognizableas Mich even to the relatively uninitiated.In briei. tlii~ pl:tn seemed to be to locatecampaign 2nd ordinary service awards above theleft breast poc‘1;c.t in -1l1(, form of rihbons. withl)articipation in notnblc, campaigns indicated bybadges on thc~ sleeve. (‘(mbnt and wounds wouldbe indicated b!- badge: of bronze, silver, and goldlocated on the left breast, while actual decorationsIX—17

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45iFigure 19.—German Air Force officers wearing decorations and awards.would be worn as ribhons in the huttonholc, at theneck, or in the form of the easily recognizableactual metal medal pinned on the uniform. Thisrule holds as a rough guide, but there are man\cxccptions, notable among which are the variousforeign ribbons for valor worn with other rihhnnsabove the left breast pocket. Rlark~manshipawards are worn in the form of fourrager c sthe right breast.The German Armed Forces place much cmphasison the morale effect of the various decorationsand awards, the numbers of which are almostincredibly large because of the authorizationof the wearing of Xazi I'arty and Policebadges, as well as foreign decorations and thoseof minor German states under the German Empire.Much of the paper-work of the GermanArmy is concerned with the awarding of varioustypes of medals and badges and their certificates.The German troops themselves prize these honorshighly, and wear them on the field uniform evenin combat.IX—18

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Section VI. AUXILIARY FORCES ANDSEMI-MILITARY ORGANIZATIONSI. GeneralThere are a host of puppet and auxiliary forcesand semi-military organizations which may takepart in combat alongside the Army, Kavy, and XirForce. Included among these at-e the various unitsraised from former citizens of the Soviet Union.While many of these troops were intended to haveinsignia peculiar to their organization, it has notbeen possible in practice to manufacture and issuethe necessary uniforms and insignia. The insigniafor these forces may be grouped into three sets:those for the Eastern Legions (Ostlcgio~c?~),those for the Russian and Ukranian Armies ofLiberation (with rank insignia after the Russianstyle), and those for Cossack units. In practice,German Army uniforms ant1 insignia often areused. Llilitary organizations with uniforms andinsignia also were formed from men recruitedfrom the former I3altic states. n Czech puppetArmy, with its o\vn uniforms and insignia. alsoexists. The Italian Republican At-my also mayuse German uniforms and WO~~~J~-.SS insignia.although Italian Republican insignia may be wornon German-made uniforms. Women's uniformedauxiliary forces include signal services for theArmy, Navy, and Air Force; antiaircraft personnelfor the Air Force; and remount units for theArmy. Such p~rsonnc1 have uniforms, insignia,and titles of rank peculiar to their organizations.Many uniformed l’arty organizations of a setnimilitarynature exist, as well as Frontier (Customs)Guards, Railway Police, State RailwayPersonnel, the Forestry Service, and other uniformedstate organizations. Uniforms and insigniaof several of the more important auxiliat-!organizations svt-ving \vith the armed forccs arcbriefly described below. These organizationsusualh' wear an arm band inscribed DeutscheWehrmacht when in forward areas. The Germansstate that such arm bands indicate that thewearers are members of the German ArmedForces.I r ujurc 20.—Labor Service private (left), sergeant (cenft,r),and genera! officer (right).t : igure 21.~ UCfomof an enlisted wan of the GermsStat,. Police.IX—19

I MARCH 19452. Volkssturftz Uniforms and InsigniaThe German J701ksstz~v~~~ has no authorized uniformor insignia except for an armband variouslystenciled Dctttscller W’clzrmaclzt or DcutschcsVolksstwwc with JJ7cl~r~~~arlzt directly underneaththe upper two words. These bands may be in avariety of colors: black ltxtters on red or \\-hitecloth, or white letters on yellow cloth. Clothing isissued accortling to \I-hat is aeailable in the area.J’olksstzrrr~z personnel are reportctl to he un\villillgto fight if furnishetl only with armbantls for featof being arrested as franc tircws. ICffort:: havetherefore been made to provitle Army issue whenpossible. This issue is suppl~mtntt~d by capturctlclothing: Italian, Czech, 1:rcnch, and so on. Uniformsof Kazi party organizations ma\. also lxworn. It is rel)ortctl that pt~rsonnel with civil andparty uniforms such as street car cr~U3. zookeepers, postmen, SA men. etc. I\-ill have suchuniforms tlyetl military fit>ltl gray. The onlyknown insignia of rank is the iollo\ving :UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451Erzqlish Coliar ratr11German Rauk I:qn;xlriit InsigniaVolkssturmmann. . Private .. No pipsGruppenfiihrer ...Squad Leader .. . One pipZugfiihrer ...... l’latoon Leader .T\\-o pips horizontall)~‘affcnmrister . . . Ortlnancc Officer. . Same a< xhoveZahlmeister .... pa&master Sam e . r Same as :II~ovcKompaniefiihrer . . Company Cornmander. . Three pips diagonall?Ordonnanzoffizicr . AtlminiqtrativeOfficer . . Same as aboveAdjutant .AdjutantBataillonfiihrer. t Same as nl)ove. . . Four pips in square. l iattalion Commander3. Labor Service Uniforms and InsigniaMembers of the Labor Service (K&clmvI)dt.rdicnst,or IZAD), wear uniiorms with chocolate-browncollars. The coats generally are cut inthe style of the Army field uniform coat. Therank' insignia resemble and roughly follow thoseof the Army, although distinctive titles arc enployed.A stylized spade is usctl for the capbadge, and appears on the belt buckle.4. Police Uniforms and InsigniaGerman State Police uniforms may readily bedifferentiated from Army uniforms by properidentification of the Police coat. This coat has fourFigure 22.—Company commander of the I'olkssturm.The overcoat is the standard Am'x issue, worn tei/h thefield cap MI'JIS. The man at '•:•;/.'/ :eears an Italian.Inny i»rv?v< :/patch pockets, the lower two bring plealless (Fig.21). The frontal clo>urc i-- secured by eightlNlttons. 1 : ot11 collar mtl cuf‘l \;~re brown in color,the latter each bearing t\\.o l1~itlc~15. \\%ilc thecollar insignia for lower rank-, resemble those ofthe Army, the collar patch rectangle is surroundedby a silver cord. However, puhce officers of general'srank wear .S'.Y collar patches (color plates),since the!. holtl ranks in bulb .S'.V and Police.Field and company grade police officers wearshouldt7- strap5 and collar patches 5imilar toequivalent Army ranks, and are addressed byr\~-niy titles of frank. .\ national emblem similarto the slcevc insignia for Army Military police(color plate>) i5 worn on the upper lelt sleeve,but no other national emblem i^ \\0371 on the coat.This emblem is repeated on Police caps. The backof the police coal has a d.IX—20

I MARCH 1945Section VII. INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENTI. Field Equipmenta. ISKI.T. The German soldier habitually wearshis IwIt, willi or \vithout ficltl equil)tiit. lit.NOFmally the enlisted man kvears a black leather belt,1jut a \I-eb belt goes with tlw tropical uniiol-m.The bolt ;il\\ays is worn \vitb a steel Imcl& I~ariiigthe I~aiich of service emblem. X11 groundforces 0i the Xriny (Herr) ha\-e a buckle embossedwith a circular crest in the center of whichappc’a13 a11 eagle. The circle is formetl by thewords "Gott mit ~11s" above the eagle and anxxth l~clow. The Air I’orce (L~rfte~fnf~) lx~cl&carrick an eagle in flight with 3 swastika in itsclaws. The figure is encircled by a nmxth. The~\rmetl Elite Guard (Wcrff r~ SS) buckle bearsTM-E 30-451an eagle whose outstretched wings extend acrossthe to]) of tlw lnicl\l~. The words "1leinr Elireheisst Treue" make a nearly complete circle belowthe eagle's wi1ig.s. The bird rests on anothersmaller chl) ~;i rs a sn.astika. Officers\vcxr bro~3i leather l)elt< lvitli a simple tonguemtl-lm-type ‘llUCl. ‘l‘he usual Germancartridge pouch is made of lc~;~thcr. It has threeseparate pockets, each holding 10 rounds of rifle;ilnmuiiitioii in t\\-0 clips. The uniform belt slipsthrough 1001)5 on tlw Iwli 0i tile amniunitimFigure 23.—Field equipment of the German infantryroldicr (fro/it Gcw). The royfritlqc pourhrs on thr hcltare partially held by leather suspenders. The "bread bag"and canteen with cup are carried on the right hip, andthe entrenching tool and bayonet arc carried on the lefthip. The "bread bag" is Imng on the belt, and for demonstrationpurposes is shown further forward than usual.'•'igurc 24.—Field equipment (rear vinv). Mcsskit, shelterquarter, and a small bag (concealed under the shelterquarter) are strapped to the combat pack. The canteenhangs front the "bread bag." (Mounted troops carry thecanteen on the bread bag's right-hand fittings). The upperend of the metal gas mask carrier is suspended by a slingover the shoulder, while the rear end is hung on the belt.IX—2I

I MARCH 1945pouch, which also has a ring into which the cartridgebelt suspenders may be hooked to helpsupport the equipment worn on the belt. Kormallytwo pouches are worn, one on each sideof the belt buckle, allowing the rifleman to carry60 rounds of ammunition. However, soldiers whoare not expected to use a great deal of ammunitionreceive only one pouch, and a leather loop with aring is substituted for thv second pouch to holdthe cartridge belt suspenders. Other types of carridgecarriers include submachine-gun ammunitionpouches, engineer assault pack pouches, andbandoleers. The submachine-gun pouches. n(JWusually made of webbing, hold six clips. They arcabout 9 inches long and are carried in a mamlersimilar to the ordinary pouch. The 120-roundbandoliers, usually of camouflage pattern. areworn by paratroops slung across the chest. Theyare held in place by loops slipped over the belt.Medical soldiers receive single-pocket, leather,first-aid pouches which are somewhat deeper andabout two-thirds as wide as the ordinary cartridgepouch.c. ENTKENCIIING SHOVEL. Although some ofthe old-style German entrenching shovels, tvhichare like the old U. S. army shovel, still exist,most German troops are equipped with the stantlart1folding shovel, similar to the standard C. S.entrenching tool. The German shovel consistsof a 6 by 8%-inch pointed steel blade hinged toan l&inch wooden handle. The hinge is providedwith a threaded plastic nut which locks the bladein any one of three positions: in line with thehandle for use as a shovel, at right angles to thehandle for use as a pick, or folded back againstthe handle for carrying. A leather case for carryingthe shovel is suspended from the cartridgebelt on the left hip. Since the shovel serves as anadequate pick, few entrenching pick-mattocks areused.d. BAYOIGET FROG. The bayonet hangs fromthe cartridge belt in a leather frog just aheadof the folding entrenching shovel or directly overthe old-style entrenching shovel. A loop on theshovel case holds the scabbard in place.e. BREAD BAG. The German soldier carries thebread bag (BY&be&cl) on his right hip, SUSpendedfrom the belt. This duck bag holds toiletarticles, the field cap when not worn, a towel, andother necessities of the combat soldier. Dismountedpersonnel carry the canteen snapped intothe left hook on the flap of the bread bag. It isheld securely in place by slipping the strap whichUNCLASS\F!EDTM-E 30-45IFigure 25.—Pnrorl~utists bnrldolic,r. Izoldiag 120 roundsof ammunition in rifle clips.runs around the calltcen through the loop on thelower part of the bread-bag tl~p. RIounted persomielcarry the canteen on thv right side of thebread bag. Formerly a special strap was used morefrequently to allow the breatl bag to be slungover the shoulder.f. CASTEES. The canttell. \vhich holds nearlyone quart. has a felt cover. The canteen cup,either round or oval. is str:~lq~~l upside downover the mouth of the cantc.rll. Tllc first of theseGerman canteens wl’erc m:~cl~. of aluminum, butabout 1932 a fe\v were made of a plastic impregnatedwood and recent once have been made ofenameled steel. I\Iountain ti-01q1s rccei\-e a slightlylarger canteen. Special medical canteens are issuedto medical troops.g. GAS ~\~ASE;. The only othc~r item whichcommonly is suspended in part from the belt isthe gas mask in its metal car{-icr. The top of thecarrier is held by a strap which I-UIIS around theright shoulder. Thv bottom ii l~ookcd to the hackof the belt. Paratroops recci\-r a special fabricIX—22

I MARCH 1945gas-mask carrier to reduce the danger of injuriesin landing.UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-4512. Combat Equipmenta. CARTRIDGE-BELT SUSPENDERS. There are anumber of different types of leather cartridgebeltsuspenders issued to German troops and webbingcounterparts for use with the tropical unform.The commonest of these arc the infantr!suspenders. These are issued to combat troopsof infantry divisions who also receive the conlbatpack and the Model 39 haversack. The infantrysuspenders consist of straps I\-ith hookson the front to attach to the cartritlgv pouchesand a single broad hook in back, which is slippedunder the cartridge belt. D-rings on the back ofthe shoulder straps may be used to holtl the topof the combat pack, the haversack, or other caquipment.The bottom of these suspenders are hcltlby auxiliary straps riveted to the suspenders infront just below the shoulders. Other commontypes include officers' cartridge-belt suspendersand cavalry suspenders.b. COMBAT PACK. Thr normal infantryman'scombat pack is a webbing trapezoid lvith a removablebag buttoned to the bottom. A singlestrap on the top half of the ~1 ~ irame is usedto attach the mess kit and two straps at the bottomhold the shelter quarter. tightly rollrd, overthe small bag. There are hooks at all four cornersso that the combat pack may be attached to theinfantry cartridge-belt suspenders. Aq small pocketon the inside of the bag flap holds the rifle-clexningkit. Kormally the tent rope. one day's ironrations, and a sweater are carried in the bag.However, many times the rope, tent pole, andpins are carried rolled inside the shelter quarter.If necessary a horseshoe roll of overcoat orpossibly a blanket may be attnchrtl to the combatpack by three straps, which run through the rectangulareyelets on the top and on each side ofthe pack.c. NESS KIT. The mess kit, formerly aluminumbut now made of enameled steel. is usuallycarried on the combat pack, although it is sometimesattached to the bread bag in thts same \vayas the canteen. Similar to the Russian a~ltl Japanese mess kit, it consists of a kind of deep potwith a cover which may be inverted for use as aplate.d. SHELTER QUARTER. The German shelterquarter serves both as a tent and as a poncho. Itis highly water-repellent duck cut in the form ofFic/itrc _36.—Four shc~ilcr ,juarfcrs pitched as a pyramidaltent. Tlwsc carry the II'afjerr-SS carrmlflage pattern.an isosceles triangle :il)out 6 feet 3 inches alongthe base and 8 feet 3 inches along the other twosides. There are buttons and buttonholes on allthree edges. The shelter quarter is covered witha camouflage mottle, either the characteristic armycamoullagc pattern or tli~ usual ?V Qfl cn SS pattern.Some have different patterns on each side,greens predominating on one side and browns onthe other. Each soldier also is issued two tent pinsand one ten-pole section for USC when the shelterquarter is made into 2 tent. Ordinarily four menpitch their sections tcgc+her to make a smallp)-ramirlnl tent, but c0her combinations are possible,thv most commons of which are eight- and16-man tents. The eight-man tent is constructedhy erecting two three-sided pyramids and buttoningan inverted shelter half in the space betweenthem. The 16man tent is made by joiningfour of the long sides of the eight-man tent.A regular, four-section, pvramidal tent is erectedon this base. This tcailt s;antls over 9 feet high.\I’orn as x poncho, the shelter quarter providesgo d protection from rain because of its excellent-atrr-repellent property. The soldier's head canbe thrust t!lrough a slit lvith the narrow point ofthe triangle in front. The tn-o rear points areIjrought for\\-artl and buttoned together. Slits areIcft Olin ior the armb. around which the ponchotit-apes almost as if it has sleeves. iLYotorcyclistscan fasten the shelter quarter around the thighs.3. Other Packsa. MODEL 39 ~TAVEKSACK. Troops to whomthe comhat pack is issued also receive the Model39 haversack. This s;quarA~aped canvas pack,reinforced lvith leather, has no attached shoulderIX—23

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Fi,qure 27.- --T& sh~ltcv gzmrtcr ZUOY,Z us a jw~ho. Alf’c7ffu-SS qzmrtcr is Sl1OWI.IX—24\straps. It is attachetl to the infantry cartridgebeltsuspenders by. four hooks like those on thecombat l’“‘k. SCrvicc s110cs. t\Vill trousc’r-s, a setof brushes. ant1 other nece5sar>. items arc carriulin the main x&o n of tllv 1)aCk. ‘I-owl.socks. aen-itig kit, ant1 shirt arc carried in tileflap pouch. The tent-pole section and two tentpegs are carried at the tup of the pack betweenthe nmin p011c11 ant1 thr. flap 1”~1lCll. The overcoator a blai~ket mav be carried on the packin a horseshoe roll. If for some reason both thelia~ersack ant1 the c.1Inllut pack have to I)e carriedat the same time, the combat pack is hookedinto the rings on the lipp~r c~lx:c. cif the haversackflap and secured by the but tun slap on theflap.b. MODEL 34 HAVERSACK. An older type ofha\-crsack still l)eing issued to wme (;ermansoldiers is the Model 34. This i> similar to theRlotlcl 39. but is iiitentlul to carry all the soldier'secluilmient.e. MOUNTAIN RUCKSACK. The duties andequipment of niount:liii troo1)s rc,cluirca a m mversatile pack than the ~;I~I.KKI~. ‘l‘hc mountainrucksack is a largtb olive-drab sack with ;tttachdshoultlcr straps. There ii a large pocket on th?outside below the cover flal). l.cxlllcr loops facilitateattaching articles 10 thy out,5itlv. ‘I‘hc ruclisackrests lower on the back than the haversack.d. Luftwaffe RUCKSACK. The design of theLuftivaffe rucksack is similar, though not identical,to that of the mountain rucksack. The chiefdifference is in color: the Air Force rucksack isblue-gray.e. TROPICAL RUCKSACK. The tropical rucksackis simpler than the mountain and Luftwafferuck5acli. Fl~~~lis at the umlers >nap into ringson tl i c~cxtritlge 1)vlt sus1~~iitl~rs.f. .~RTIL.I.I~RY L:T-C.LIS.\CII. .\l-tillc~lyllctl receivethe artillery I-~ick~~k. colisi5ting of a full marcliiilgpack and a combat 11ack.g. SAIHMXA(IS. Until Jtily l'U-1 n pair ofsatltllel~;~gs \vas issuctl to each Illcrtinttd soldier.but since then satldlclng5 arc coi~5i~l~rctl orgnnizatiotialecluipiiiciit. It is probable that the supplies of the old hlotl~l 33 now are nearly exhausted.It is being replaced by large ant1 smallsaddlebags. The larcc saddlt~ba~ is the "bors~"pack. Its contents inclutle tiles; kit. horseshoe.eight nails, four callis. calk fa.4cmer and hoofcleaner. surcinglc, cut-r!. comb. lnrrse brush, andpail. The small satltllclng, carric,(l on the rightjust behind the rider, carries the 9)Itlier's personal

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 304Iequipment. Sweater, iron rations, rifle-clcnningkit, toilet articles, tent rope. shoe-cleaning gear.and towel are carried inside the hag, \vhilc theel uarter is strapped to the outside. I-ifteenrounds of ammunition are carried on the coverflap. This small satldlebag may 1~ used as acombat pack if the rider must dismount. T~I.hooks on the four corners snap into the ringsof the cavalry cartridge-belt susp~ndtrs. Themess kit is removed from the large s;~tltllcl~g andstrapped to the outside of thr small sacl(llelqwhen it is used as a comhat pack.h. I carrietlin the pack. The pouches hold egg-shaped grenadeswith rifle ammunition in side pock&.‘ I ‘hcwis a special pocket on the right poucl~ for a gasmask without carrier. The men to whom thisassault pack is issued also receive Riotlcl 39 havcl-sack.Figure 28.—A IVaffen-SS mountain sergeant teaches theuse o) ice ax and cnnuf'oiis zvhile simulating the descent"I mi ice slope. I lie , rainpons arc strapped to skiiiniiiulitinhoots.4. Special Mountain EquipmentSpecial equipment issued to German mountaintroops is wry similar to civilian niountainccringequipment. Manila rope ahout x inch in tlianiet~lis issued in 100-foot lengths for mountain climbing,but it, of course, serves many other purposts.The equipment of German mount;Lintroops also includes ice axes, IO-ljoint craiiipoIiswhich are strappd to hoots for lwttcr trnctiollon ice, pitons, snaplinks, steel-etlged mountailiskis with Kandahnr type bindings, ant1 small o~nlsnowshoes. Small, light-weight, A-shaped teiitsare issued to mountain troops. Ret1 avalancliccords, avalanche shovels, and avalanche probesare provided for rescue work.5. Special Winter EquipmentSki troops in flat country are issued lighterskis than those given mountain troops. Thcitskis are not steel-edged and have a special hindingdesigned for cross-country trawl. This bindingclamps securely to a metal plate screwed tothe bottom of a special wooden-soled canvas overboot.Since all the plates are the same size. theFigure 2V.—German pack frames for heavy 'weapons arespecially designed jor the loads they are intended to carry.IX—25

I MARCH 1945binding fits all men, making the skis interchangrable.Small sleds, known as akajas and lookinglike small 7-foot, flat-bottomed canoes, are usedto transport supplies and heavy lveapons andevacuate wounded across snow. There are threetypes: the double-end boat. akaja, the weaponsakaja, and the plywood akaja. Also, other typesof sleds are improvised.6. Miscellaneous Equipmenta. DISPATCH CASE. Platoon and squad leaders,master sergeants, messenger carriers, and similarpersonnel wear a black leather dispatch case ontheir belts. Previously this case was issuctl toa greater number, but in 1943 the issue was restrictedto conserve leather. A leather map casewith a plastic window fits inside the dispatchcase. Several pockets are sewn on the front ofthe case to accommodate seven pencils, rules, mapreadinginstruments, and other equipment.b. PACK FRAMES. Pack frames, which areused by German troops to carry heavy weaponsand other heavy or clumsy loads, particularly indifficult terrain, are somewhat similar in appearanceto the metal tube frames sometimes used withframe rucksacks. There is no universal type )hutrather special ones for each type of load \vithspecial tubes and shelves to accommodate theparticular type of equipment carried.c. GOGCLES. The commonest German gogglesare the plastic-lens folding type, made with bothclear and amber lenses, one of each type frequentlybeing issued to each man. These arrthe "sun and dust goggles" which are issued toall members of motorized or mechanized unitsexcept vehicle drivers and motorcyclists, whoreceive a heavier model with smoke-colored lensesand leather, synthetic rubber, or felt framtas.The heavier goggles are also issued to some antiaircraftgunners and sometimes to mountaintroops, although mountain troops frequently getthe plastic goggles.d. FORK-SPOON. A combination aluminumfork-spoon is issued to each German soldier.The handles of the fork and spoon are rivetedtogether so that when extended the fork is onone end and the spoon on the other, but whenfolded the handles lie together and the tinesof the fork rest in the bowl of the spoon. Sincethe over-all length folded is only 5 % inches, thisUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451,,. \figure 30.—1'iicl table! stove (lisbit Kochcr) in half-openposition. When closed, the box of lisbit fuel tablets fitsinside and is fully protected at/uiiist breakage.combination utensil is c>asilp c;il-rietl. It is muchsimpler and lighter than a cotl~l~illation strainlesssteel knife, fork. 51)c)on. antl soinetimcs canopenerissued to German troop< during the AfricancampCaign.e. RATIOS HEATEKL. i si~:ill gasoline stove.I\-vigliing a little over a 11oul1~1. in ishutatl to specialunits such as mountain troops who must operate~untl~r difficult coiltlitions 1jut keep a high clegrceof mobility. This stove works by burning vaporizedgasoline, but it has no pressure pump. Pressureis I)uill up by heating the I~urner with gasoliilvor fuel tal)ltlts l)urllt in a small cup belowthe tank and maintained by the heat generated l)ythy stovv itself. More widely i~ue(l arv fueltablets, the ~oinnioi~~‘t of which is lC.shit: tabletsof h~,xaiii~tll~l~.i1~, tetraniinc. .l‘he iucxl is packedin a paper carton \vliich is c:lr-rietl in the fueltabletstove i lisbit Kochcr). In the carton thereare four cakes of five tablets each, one or moreof which may be broken fnun the cake andand hi-net1 at a time. This iuel is extremelyefficient. The fuel-tablet stove is made of threesections of zinc-coated steel. Two identical sections,which form the cover in the closed position,and the sides and mess kit supl)ort in thetwo open l~nsitiotis. are attached to a third s&ion,by a groiimict liingr. This thirtl section is ashallow pali on \vhiih the t;il)lets are burned.Dimples in the. tllet:tl ;It apl)rol~ri:~t~ I)ositions holdthe sto1.e in either the closed, half-open, or openpositions.IX—26

I MARCH 1945 -'"• " 0TM-E 30-45IGERMAN ARMY UNIFORMSFIELD UNIFORM, ENLISTED MAN MOUNTAIN UNIFORM, NCO VERCGAT ALL RANKS; NCOs add braided edging to collar as shown

fI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451GERMAN ARMY UNIFORMSSERVICE DRESS, OFFICER FIELD UNIFORM, OFFICER BLAC K '-••• :?£

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45!GERMAN ARMY UNIFORMSJAGER TROOPS CAP BADGE*r Q rn on tn£ lofl sidp DI Ihp fcipJAGER TROOPS SLEEVE BADGESUMMER UNIFORMCAMOUFLAGE JACKETshmr, and trop,mheh dMOUNTAIN WINDJACKET MOUNTAIN PARKA WINTER UNIFORMmounfol” and hger froopl and by llhle rmdproaf. .,,hl,v .m'orm has the reverse side in plajinp^rs or th& G^rrTôn Lîbor Scrvics.PLATE III

UF 1I MARCH 1945 \\'i\TM-E 30-451GERMAN ARMY: INSIGNIA OF RANKShoulder straps ore the main indrcotton of rank P!oncomm,>r . office'-, , Unterofftziere)ore further distinguished by o braided edge so the collar rlr ,~rwce, fieid, andfatigue CDD+S Certain noncommirsloned oFi;,er < vcly weor oft uffcmm and daspensewith the braded collar edgtng lllurtroted belox are :top *o b, 3 - :ollur patch, shoulderstrop, and the type of rqnk ,ns,gn,a worn or oath sleeve< I* erallv winter suits andGENERAL OFFICERS iGeneroleJlike uniforms.r DGENERAL OF THE ARMYGENERALLT GENERALMAJOR GENERALAL1IER GFNERALFIELDOFFICERS iStob r off?rwelCOMPANYOFFICERSCOLONELOberif(General SOA Corp.,NONCOMMISSIONEDLT COLONELOberst/eutnonfArtilleryOFFICERSSERGEANT MAJOR 1ST SERGEANT MASTER SERGEANT TECHNICAL SERGEANT 5TAFF SERGEANT SERGEANTStabsieldwebelMountain InfantryHauptieldwebe!(Sleeve braid on coot)OberfeidwebelArmored or AT UnitFeldwebe/Supply TroopsUnferfe/dwebelUnferoffiiier4th Engineer*

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451GERMAN ARMY: INSIGNIA OF RANKENLISTED MENCorporals in the Germon Army are nof roted : nancomm,woned officers, but ore placedalsamong what amount to several grader of ~‘,i:,ter These grade, may weor the sleeveinsignia shown below (chevronr or p~pi on thf ^lat, OV~KOO+, fatigues. and on other typesof uniformshown There are many classes of odm\n~~~rotws ofir~als; examples of a few typicolofunif orm There are shown Such oficrJs ^cy be dsstlnguirhed by their basic color ofarm, N IS dark greenADMINISTRATIVE CORPStabsgefreiterArtillery ce) (under 6 yOFFICER CANDIDATESNONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER CANDIDATESPRIVATEGrenadier, FusilieNCO CANDIDATES ARE USUA.I ' RATED AS A GRADE Of CORPORALN C O CANDIDATE v 0111 ERGANLUNGSSfi OFFICER CANDIDATE OFFICER CANDIDATE PROBATIONARY OFFICER Unte-oFTizieiean — ni 'C-J K'•ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICIALS -r yP,cai rank » g .CHAPLAINSOBSOLETE COLLARPATCHESCHAPLAIN BISHOPSGENERAL OFFICER FIELD OFFICER COMPANY OFFICER NONCOMMISSIONEDMinistry DirectorOFFICEROberslofasapor/ieleiSaddler Mr Sgl[May be mounted •datk green bo!PLATE V

I MARCH 1945 ' V • F.GERMAN ARMY: COLORS OF THE ARMSBright RedGENERALSGeneratePink with i on Strap*MOTOR MAINTENANCE TROOP5Kraftfohrparkiruppeen SrraMORTAWine RedSPECIALIST SERVICE,JAGDTruppemonderdienst,LIGHT ARMY .Orange RedMILITARY POLICECHtMICAL WARFARETROOPSNebettt uppenOra ngeORDN IANCEGold YellowRCN 1 BNS,CAV SQDNSline Cy •CJJ*J finsAuiklai •ungi Abt,Light BlueTRANSPORT S.SUPPLY TROOPSPinkTD BNS 4 UNITS(•xctpf of Gr»n ReSt»)Pi Jag Abr undFin he if. nGold°l DIVArmd i Armd (nrRent, Ar md Ren 8nLight Blue withSP SERV, ADMIN5, PAYMR BRSColon ore the boric indication of ormr (there ore noservices in the German Army). Color of arm is usually tobe found on shoulder strops, on the service cop, on oldstylefield cops, and on collar patcher of line officers' fielduniforms, and on collar patcher of service and dress unifxms.Piping in the color of orm oppearr on service anddress coots and trousers. In the instances recorded at right,letters on the shoulder strop Indicate either a seporotearm using the some color OS onother arm, or else afurther subdivision of function wtthin on arm. Numbersand letters moy also be used +o designate units.PinkMOBILE BNSSIGNAL TROOPSMEDICAL PERSONNEL(except Cav & Cyclist)Sehnefle Abfei/ungenPinkLight GreenCOMBAT & CONSTARMD RCN BNS.MTN & LT INF(Inc Motorcyclist Bm) Gebprgsjdger und ENGINEERSJogerPinkGross GreenHV TD BNS & UNITSSchw*r*pTJ6g AbrARMORED INFANTRYSPECIALIST OFFICERSund Binhtilen•.Inc. mtegral SP InfOffuierrang(Formerly AssaultGun Units!GunsBns&tlnitj)Pink with f o n StrapsARMORED TRAINSMtz Inf & IntegraLight GreyPROPAGANDATROOPSSPECIALIST INSIGNIA: OFFICERS AND NCOsFORTRESS ENGINEER FORTRESS ENGINEERS M5DICAI PERSONNEL'WQjFe.,“ng.p,on,ereFARRIER WOiHufbefcMaglshrmei,DMIN AND PAYMflMUSICIAN OFFICERS JAGD, SPECU BR» SPECIALISTMoiifcinipinenfen, SERVICf. SERVICESpecialist officers ond senior NCOr ot the arms may weorspecial symbols on their shoulder straps in addition tothe color of their arm. Speciolirt officers appointed because of special qualification (Sonderfbhrer) weor suchsymbols only if they ore medical officers; otherwise theyv,ear the collor patch shown above, ond the type ofinsignia of rank shown o+ right.BATTALION GRADESONDERFUHRERAbteilvngsfvhrerPLATE VI

C : 3 •MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451GERMAN ARMY: SPECIALTY BADGES (NCOs and Enlisted Men)The follawng badges ore worn on the lower rightarm of the coot and overcoot. The sysrem ofdesignation illustrated on the first three farrierbadges applies to the various other specialtybadger, the lozenge insignia being peculiar toforrier instructors. The new specialty bodge forsupply sergeant is bored on unconfirmed reports,but the design is believed to be approximatelyaccurate.MEDICAl ENLISTEDPERSONNELORDNANCE SERGEANTWaffenunferoffizierFORTRESS ENGINEERSERGEANTFertungrpmnmrFeldrebe,FORTIFICATIONMAINTENANCE SERGEANTWatlfeldwehet‘he following specialty badges ore also worn onhe lower right arm of the coat and overcoatWhile candidates may wear the strip of candilate'sbrad (see forrier candidate above), theyl o not follow the some system of designation byaraided edging as do the specialists above. Theniper's badges ore portly insignia of specialty,Ind partly rewords for octuol achievement in comtot.They ore to be worn over any other specialtylodges worn on the lower right arm.SNIPERSchorfscniirze:At leosf 20 enemy killed)SNIPERSchorfscfiiJh*(At least 40 enemy killed)WORN ON LOWER LEFT ARMUPPER LEFT ARMENGINEER ASSAULT BOATCOXWAINMILITARY POLICEFeidgendarmBrie(Officmrt: fi/ver tagiejMUSICIAN'S BADGES (On both shoulders)MARKSMANSHIP AWARDS: PI ~~r iubstrtvte ton~ for swords~Signal TrcFIFE AND DRUMCord color shield desigr and number of acorns (shells forCORPSMANSpiel leute ar+illeryJ vory to producvI ? grade5 Fourth grade shown.PLATE VII

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45!GERMAN AIR FORCE UNIFORMSSjtiwL.FIELD UNIFORM, EM, FRONTPvt; alder ilyle coat as shown may be worn by officeNCOl, and enlisted men.FIELD UNIFORM, EM, REARPvt; equipment carried is similar to that of the GetMOUNiiilh UNIFORM, NC0PARACHUTIST'S UNIFORMStaff igt; the "flight blouse" shown may be worn by• II types of GAF personnel.SERVICE DRESS, OFFICERcollar buttoned at the neckPLATE VIII'VERCOAl

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.45IUNCLAS31FGERMAN AIR FORCE UNISUMMER UNIFORM WINTER OVERCOAT • UMMFR UNIFORM, OFFICERSPARACHUTIST JUMP SUITTech qt. other llmllor ,yper. both plo,n and Cflaged. may be encovntrredFIELD JACKETFATIGUE SUITPLATE IX

I MARCH 1945 mTM-E 30-451GERMAN AIR FORCE UNIFORMSLIGHT FLYING SUITLINED FLYING SUITFAHGl I ' OVERAILboth sleeves of flying suits.2dSUMMER MOTORING COAT STANDARD MOTORING COAT FLiER'S LtAlHER JACKETiheufenont. KO r wear the type of rank 1”“g”lcPLATE X

UNCLES:;-'I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451GERMAN AIR FORCE: INSIGNIA OF RANK iCollor potch. shovlder rtrop and coveroliGENERAL OFFICERS IGENEROL EJGENERAL OF THE ARMY GENERAL LT GENERALGeneralfeldmarschail Genera/obersf General der farmFIELD OFFICERS fS tabs ofizlere/COMPANY OFFICERSCOLONEL LT COLONEL 15T LIEUTENANT 2D LIEUTENANTOberr, Oberjrleufnanf Ohe.-.'i-ufnonr Leutnant22nd fiok Reg, Cenerol stofl Corp. Civilian Air Traffic Control Fl> ii] Troops Signal CorpsNONCOMMlSSlONEO OFFICERS—-rms: ) A " ttoircraf^ Hauptwuchtmêr, Oberwachtme ister, Wochtme ~>.~ Un tr rwacht n1 Other Units: Houptfeldwebel, Oberfeldwebel, Feldwebel, Unfeifi~idrvehc:SERGEANT MAJOR 1ST SERGEANT MASTER SERGEANT TECHNICAL SERGEANT STAFF SERGEANTSfabsteldwebel Havpfwochfmeiiter Obvrfeldwebet FeldwebelFlying Troops Ut Flak Rgt Signal Troops Civilian Air Traffic Control 3d Hak RegtPLAXI

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451GERMAN AIR FORCE: INSIGNIA OF RANKiNLISTED MENSENIOR CORPORAL CORPORAL ACTING CORPORALHouptg*fr*iterOhergeireiierFlak Troop, Flying Troops Signal Troop.IFFICER CANDIDATESNC0 CANDIDATEStSENIOR OFFICER CANDIDATE OFFICER CANDIDAn VOLUNTEER OFFICERObsrfaWich Fahnrirh CANDIDATEConstruction Troops5th Flak Rcgtv&ly bc 0”” rant)GERMAN AIR FORCE: ENGINEERING CORPSEngmeerr having lo do with mechanical engtneer~ngrhe German Au Forcebelong to a rpeciol corpr and are dtrtlngutshed by ~,I-IO ra.lk lnrignio and(ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICIALS) S)xcial designations of conk All ronkr we xnk CI D R of ,he,r ierv,ceMAJOR GENERAL BRIGADlER CCJLONEL LT CO?ONELFlisgcr-Gsneral-GENERALFbger-fl.«gerenero/rngenieiJfobjingenieorflmger-OberrfingcnisurPLATE XII

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451GERMAN AIR FORCE: COLORS OF THE ARMS AND SERVICESGENERALS .iNERAL STA CONSTRUCTIONGenerokTROOPSGold Ycilo*FLllNG TROOPSADMINISTRATIVEOFFICIALSGold “elIor Br,qhl PPd Dori GreenWh,WFLYING TROOPS IPDNANCE OFFI GLNCRI\L OFFICERFoJ/sc/iirmlruppeOFFICIALSGold “ellowGo d Bee*SUPPL” SERVICES SIGNA. 7900 ’ GAF tNGlNEEllNGCOlPSder iuftwaffeWhile line arms and services wear the same:olor on both shoulder strop and collar patch,m+e that all but one of ihe divisonr of the Corps)f Administrative Officiolr wear wo colors. Thebasic color for most Administrative Officials islark green.Gold Yellor Light Gre-r. L.^ht Blue-PinkAIM” AND NA”” ;I”ILIAN AlP GAF NAVIGATIONPERSONNEL TRAFFIC CONTP CORPSDETACHEDIN THE G/\FDark BlueRECALLED OFFICERS MEDICAL PERSON'Offiziere miDienif/eisfurrgNo”f,‘e.liOrpSSONDERFUHRERSpecmhrt oficerr and NCOs, awarded commissions or ratings because of specmi quaiificotionr1523)COLONELObtrd1ST LIEUTENANT 2D LIEUTENANT -TIN G 1ST SGT SQUAD LEADERGrvppenfuhrerTYPICAL ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICIALSGENERAL OFFICER FIELO OFFICER COMPANY OFFICER WARRANT OFFICER NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERMmktry Dircrtor VAai Gcnl Weather Serv Officer (Mojl Flremon WO JAGD (nipeclor iMr Sgt)OberflugtufireUntetbrondmv, - •

I MARCH 1945 ÎSJI HIU'ILU * * TM-E 30.451GERMAN AIR FORCE: BADGES OF SPECIALTY-*«onPILOT AND OBSERVER AIR GUNNERRADIO AIR GUNNER AIR CREW MEMBEROPERATOR FLIGHT ENGINEER Uncertified as gunner)AWARDSThe followmg awards orefor the fype of servicemdicoted. They ore wornin the some place OS thespecialty badger above.GLIDER PILOT AIR FORCE PARACHUTIST WCXLD WAR , FLIERS GROUND COMBAT BADGE ! ANTIAIRCRAFT BADGEAWAPFIQ FftP nPPPATinNAI_Wornonu pp e r le ftbreort.Awarded in gold, mlver, bronze:AYVAKU5 FUR UrtKAMUNALlaurel pendant may be odded to gold words, (IS shownRECONNAISANCESPECIALTY BADGES- Worn on lower left sleeve by NCOr and menA”TOMOTl”E EQUIPMENT MEDlCAL PERSONNEL SEARCHLIGHT EQUIPMENT SIGNAL EQUIPMENT FLAK ORDNANCE SGTSADMINISTRATORS Sanitatfptrtonat ADMINIST~nx S ADMlNlSTRATclRS(Bono Tor condjuot£s)OTHER OrcJNANtE SGTS AIICIAFT EPUIPMWT GRADS OF TECH TELEPHONE OPEl!ATOR TELEPHCJNE SERGEANTS TELETYPE OPEI*TOrlSW.Ren”ntaroRnere *DMINISTR*TORS PREP SCHOOLS FernscbreiherflugzeuggerotverwoferTELETIPE SGGEANTS AIR RAID WARNING RADIO SERGEANTS i(ADIO DlRFCTlON FlNDERS RADIO DIRECTION FINDERFttrntchfibunlToffizierm PERSONNEL FuntunteroffiziereFlugmeldpersonnelRADIO INTEKEPTOPS LADlO INTERCEPTKIN SCTS TSECHNICAL AVN PEc!SONNEI PERSONNEL OF TENDER FLIING PE!iSONNEL FLAK PEFSONNELHorchfunktr Fliegertecknischet Pertonat CRASH BOATS, ETC (For 9 month,' ,crrkr)0RANGEFINDER CREWS SO”ND LOtATOP. CREWS SOUND LOCATOR. CREWS MOTOI VEHICLE DRW l ADMIN SGTS 6 TECH SGiS SIGNAL PERSONNELEntfernvngtmtttimuieGold border for 1 “1 wn i(For o*s, 1 yeor', serwrs)NON SIGNAL “NlTSPLATE XIV

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451GERMAN NAVY UNIFORMSBLUE UNIFORMBLUE UNIFORMpetty OfiW% Lt : ,g > .hownPEAJACKET KHAKI UNIFORM ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICIALWorn by 2d and 3d clos, petty oPrer, and rWarn i‘ f 011 personnel of Ihe Germon Nary PaniNote rol/or patch for BM 2 , c .-••-.t-r replacing gold iniignio.PLATE XV

UNCL'VI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451GERMAN NAVY-INSIGNIA OF RANK FOR BLUE AND WHITE UNIFORMSVICE ADMIRAL REAR ADMIRAL COMMODORE CAPTAIN COMMANDER LT COMMANDERViztadmlral Kontrmadmiral Kapitan zur S»

I MARCH 1945 IIMfl TM-E 30-451GERMAN NAVY: FIELD GRAY UNIFORMSFIELD GRAY UNIFORM, OFFICERSLieutenant (ig)teutnont I”, SeeFIELD GRAY UNIFORM, WOr, PO5Warrant Officer, Coast AmlleryOberfeidwebelFltC;RAY UNIFORM, SEAMENSeaman, 2d ClorrGetreiterINSIGNIA OF RANK FOR FIELD GRAY UNIFORM: OFFICERSCOMMODORE OR CAPTAIN COMMANDER LT CCJMMANDER LIEUTENANT>OFnfnou0r6 odor Kopiton zi/r 569 Frtgattenkapitan Korvetiankapifan KapitanleutnantWARRANT OFFICERS, PETTY OFFICERS, AND SEAMEN OF NAVAL COAST ARTILLERYCHIEF WARRANT OFFICER WARRANT OFFICER CHIEF PETTY OFFICER PETTY OFFICER 1, C PETTY • 'HICER 2 C PETTY OFFICER 3/CSlabiobor/./dw.b./ Fotdwbet MoatCOLLAR P*TCHESFOR FIELD GRAYUNIFORM COATSPETTY OFFICER A5PIRANTENLISTED MANBELOW PO GRADECOMMISSIONED OFFICERS WOi, POi, SEAMtNPLATE XVII

I ARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451lME DELITE GUARD (WAIFFEN-SS) UNIFORMSFIELD UNIFORM, EM MOUNTAIN UNIFORM 5P G”? . REW UIdIFORMTANK UNIFORM TANK COVERALL CAMC;>.AGE JACKETll i L,CVI oi the Woffen SS may ./Crt”ln troapr 8” the ArmyPLATE XVIII

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451ARMED ELITE GUARD (WAFFEN-SS): COLORS OF THE ARMS••••MB Ligiit Brown ^ ^ ^ _ Burgundy Red^^^^ H CONCENTR*TION CAVALRY AND ^ ^ ^ H jAGD^ ^ ^ H C*MP G”*RDS MTZ RCN• _ « • • Bright Red Lemon Yellow • • ^ H Dork Blue^^^^ H ARTILLERY SIGNAL AND ^^^^ H MEDICAL TROOPSPROPAGANDATROOPS•Light GreenLight BlueIHjjH VETERINARY CORPS MOUNTAIN SUPPLY ANDINFANTRYTECHNICAL SERVICES_____ Pink Sky BlueI^^^^ H TANK, ANTITANK RIFLE REGTS OF ADMINISTRATORS^^^B j 7ROOPS SS POLICE DIV5•Dark GreenMILITARY GEOLOGISTS RESERVE OFFICERS GENERAL OFFICERSW&en-SS troops wear collr~r patches similar to those I—•Orana. Redof the General SS (Aflgemeine SSj, but W&en-SS shoul-White , ^ _ _ BlockH|J*|HUU RtHACEMENT INFANTRY FNG1NEERSder straps are of+er the German Army ponern, except M B SERVICES.SH&P9 ENGINEERINGfor that of the Reichrfirhrer~SS jgE^gfR OFFICERSINSIGNIA OF RANK: GENERAL OFFICERSSS generals once worecollar patches with the folowinginsignia:Gencrol - 3 Isores, 2 pip.L, Gen —3 Ie.*e., 1 pipMoi Gsn— 3 IcovenBrig Ccn-2 IC.“.l, t pipREICHSFOHREFSS ‘olice generals now we t GENERAL LT GENERAL MAJOR GENERAL BRIGADIER GENERALChid of G.nl .nd C.n.rol0b.r.t d Gmnmrai dmr WaJ.n-SSW&.“.SS the same collar patches c (Ob^rgrupp.nfijhrer Woffen-SS Woffen-SS(H.i”,i

I MARCH 1945 • l WW* l HJMW g » U i »•-—•-••• •"' TM-E 30-451ARMED ELITE GUARD (WAFFEN-SS): INSIGNIA OF RANK-NONCOMMISSIONEO OFFICERS•AVBk I91 1 1SERGEANT MAJOR 1ST AND MR SERGEANT STAFF SERGEA SERGEANTSfurmicnorfunr»r Hauplichartohfr ObirtchaHuhre Scharfuhrtr UnterscharfijhreArtillery Cavolry Infantry Artillery ArtilleryINSIGNIA OF RANK: ENLISTED MENfill1 iCORPORAL ACTING CORPORAL PRIVATE 1ST CLASS PRIVATERolf.n/iihr.r torihuriB or 5S-Ofa«ri S5-Se/iut« or SS-SoldatInfantry Artillery Medical TroopsOrCwIALTYoDnUutd —Worn on lower lefi arm by officers, NCOs, and men. See olso Army sniper badgesSECURITY SERVICE FARRIER PERSONNEL TECHNICIAN OFFICERS SIGNAL PERSONNELoMEDICAL PERSONNELHufbvschhgpwrsonalTRANSPORT SERGEANTSSth.rrmeirferORDNANCE NCOi VETERINARY OFFICERS, NCOj OFFICERS IN LEGAL MUSICIAN OFFICERS MEDICAL OFFICERSWaffinvntfrfiihfr FUhrmr und Unttrfiihrtr WORK ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERSFiihrtr im GtrichlidienttTYPICAL ARM BANDSINSIGNIA FOR VETERANSTOTENKNOPF DIV & UNITS GERMAN IA DIVISION DAS REICH DIVISIONNORD MOUNTAIN DIVISION L1EBSTANDARTE PRINZ EUGEN MTN DIVISIONADOLPH HITLER DIVVETERANS OF SERVICE NAZI PARTY MEMBERSIN AW^fD FOBCES PRIOR TO 30 JAN 1933OR N POLICEAlter KampferSPECIAL COLLAR PATCHESo(above)BOSNIAN-CROATIAN TOTENKNOPf DIV PRINZ EUGEN MTN DIVMTN DIV4 UNITSThe chevrons +o lndlcote previous -rvice IW the armed farce< or policeare worn on the upper r,g“' ,,rm, and ore not lo be confused withchevronr +o indicate rank, 01 worn v* the upper left arm. The special collorpatches at left ore worn tnrteod ’ the 5tondard SS right collar patch.PLATE XXI

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451GERMAN DECORATIONS AND AWARDSKNIGHT'S CROSS OF THE IRON CROSSWithKNIGHT'S CROSS OF THE IRON CROSS I KNIGHT'S CROSS •.-F THE IRON CROSSWithIhe above figurer illustrate the manner of weorisome of the more common German decorations andqwordr The officer at left wears two tank destructiradger: the one ot right her Crmeo shield on or ,assault ond wound badger on breast, 1939 bar to914 Iran Cross I” buttonhole, and the Knight's Cr con ribbon at neck.KNIGHT S CROSS OF THE IRON CROSSIRON CROSS 1ST CLASS IRON CROSS 2D CLASS 1914 IRON CROSSWorn rlfhovt ribbonUwaliy ribbon only Od”WAR SERVICE CROSS WITH SWORDSSilrcr 0, bronzeWAR SERVICE CROSS WITHOUT SWORDSSilver or bronzePLATE XXII

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45I~NCL,iSSiKDGERMAN DECORATIONS AND AWARDSTANK DESTRUCTION BADGE WOUND BADGE .FANTRk 4SSAULT BADGEGold for 5 tanksTANK ASSAULT BADGE GENERAL ASSAULT BADGE CLOSE COMBAT BADGEGOId Iher, and br0n.eGUERILLA WARFARE MEDAL dlNTER DEFENSIVE CAMPAIGN IN EAST, EAST , SHIELDGold, silver, and bronze 1941-42 Gol d io r th e N a yCHOLM SHIELDDEMJANSK SHIELDGERMAN-ITALIAN MEDAL ARMY ANTIAIRCRAFT BADGE | ,’ w ii t DRIVER 5 BADGCLPLATE XXIII

I MARCH 1945 ^wwl^ " (J j \ L/ L.< ' -•-• •'• - s -'TM-E 30-451DIDDflUC FHD UAI HD AMI1 ^FDVIPF These ribbons ore a selection of those which may be worn" above the left breast pocket by Germon ditory personnel.i Hi tun10 11 121. IRON CROSS, 1914 5 EASTERN WINTER CAMPAIGN. lPl l a2. IRON CROSS, 1939 6. v/ M CROSS OF HONOR vron, Ll”L Flghtsrl 10 GEQAAN SOCIAL SERV3. WAR SERVICE CROSS 7 PART” SERVICE BADGE (21 “eorrl4. WAR SERVICE MEDAL ,2 ENTRY INTO AUSTRIAI20 23 2413. LNTRl INTO SUDETENLAND 17 GERMAN MOTHER'S CROSS 21 PR”SS’4N WAR LfiOP ROSS’14. WESTWALL SERVICE, ,939 10 18 FIREMAN'S RlBBON 22 PRUSSIAN LIFESAYING *rEDAL15. MEMEL RIBBON 23 SiLtSIAN EAGLE IT, “ . F>ght-ig *sj16 OLYMPIC GAMES MEDAL 20 AR P MEDAL 24P, fLDEN MILIT/\R” SERi’i c1055111I32 33 34 35 3625. BAVANAN MlllTARl SERVICE CROSS 29 BAVALlAN MEDAL OF VALOR 33 AUSTRIAN WAR SERVK : nEDAL26. KING L”DWlG CROSS 30 WURTTEMBERG MlllTARY SERVICE CROSS 34 TlSOL SLFWCF MCDAL27. PRINCE REGENT LUITPOLD MEDAL 31. AUSTRIAN MEDAL OF “ALOR 35 HAMBURG HANSA WAC . ROSS28. BAVARIAN MlllTARY SERVICE BADGE 32 KARL TROOP CROSS 36 BREMEN “AN% WAR cIUSSI iiniiiieit37 38 39 40 46 4837. LUBECI: HANSA WAR CROSS 41 CROATIAN MEDdl OF “ALGR 45 IT4LlAN SERYICE MED ’38. BULGARIAN MEDAL OF VALOR 42 SLOY*KIAN MEDAL OF VALOR39. BULGARIAN WAR SERVICE MEDAL 43 AFRICA RIBBON40. HUNGARIAN WAR SERVICE ,tiorthy, 14 ITALIAN MEDAL OF “ALOrl FINNISH LIBERATION CROSS I, CLASS49 54 55 56 57 58 59 6049 FINNISH LIBERATION CROSS 111 CLASS 53 SPANISH CAMPAIGN MEDAL 57 RUMANIAN MtD*L Of . RT” P AND LOIALT”*4 SPANISH WOUND MEDAL 58 RUMAh~AN FAITHFUL \ck*lCE CROSC hare.51 SPANISH RED MILITARY SER”,CE CROSS 55 SPANISH S”R”lVORS RIBBON 59 RUMANIAN MEDAL OF .niol(52. SPANISH WHITE MILlTAR” SERVICE CROSS 56. SP*NISH CCJMMUNIST RIBBON 60 RUMANIAN ORDER OF l ilF CROWN ,POl,,931I •11162 63 64 65 64 67 69 70 7261 RUMANIAN ORDER OF THE CROWN (Prs-,932 66. CROSS OF QUEEN MARIE OF RUMANIA 70 BRONZE CROSS OF VALQR AND SERVICE62. RUMANIAN FAITHFUL SERVICE CROSS (War, 67. RUMANIAN FLIERS' MEDAL OF VALOR 'for Eoirern Volunteers,63. RUMANIAN MEDlCAL SEIWCE CRCJSS 68. RUMANIAN FLIERS' ORDER OF VALOR 71 SILVER CROSS OF VALOR AND SERVICE64. RUMANIAN FAITHFUL SERVICE MEDAL (W.lr, 69. STAR OF RUMANIAFor Foitern Von-nfeers'65. RUMANIAN ANT,KOMM”NIST SERWCE72. GOLD CROSS OF VALOR AND SERVICE,Far Eastern Volunteers'PLATE XXIV

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451CHAPTER XGERMAN AIR FORCESection I. AIR FORCE HIGH COMMAND1. GeneralThe German Air Force {Luftwaffe), one of thethree branches of the German Armed Forces, isorganized and administered independently ofeither the Army or the Navy. Its three mainbranches are the flying troops, antiaircraft artillery,and air signal troops. It also includes parachuteand airborne troops, air engineers, airmedical corps, and air police, and a number ofspecial divisions formed of Air Force personnelfor service as regular fighting troops. It is organizedon a territorial rather than a functional basis, •with separate operational and administrative commands.This division of responsibilities has madefor a high degree of mobility among the flyingunits and thus has been responsible for much ofthe success of the German Air Force.2. Commander-in-ChiefReichsmarschall Goering serves in the dual capacityof Minister of Aviation (Reichsminister derLuftfahrt) and Commander-in-Chief of the AirForce (Oberbefehlshaber der Luftwaffe). AsCommander-in-Chief he is charged with the administrationand operations of the Air Force. AsMinister of Aviation he is a member of theCabinet and is responsible for the coordinationand supervision of civil aviation. Since Goeringhas many other duties in the German Government,however, the supreme command usually is exercisedby the State Secretary in the Ministry ofAviation and Inspector General of the Air Force.3. Air Ministry (Rekhslujtfahrministerium orR.L.M.)At the Air Ministry—the highest administrativeand operational authority of the Air Force—arefound the departments which control all Air Forceactivity. These departments fall into two groups:those of the General Staff and those concernedwith administration and supply.1. GeneralSection II. CHAIN OF COMMANDThe role of the Air Force in the conduct of thewar, and to a certain extent in particular operations,is determined by the High Command ofthe Armed Forces (Oberkommando der Wehrmacht).The chain of command is from the SupremeCommander (Hitler), through the OKWto the Commander-in-Chief of the Air Force(Goering). The latter directs the actual employmentof the Air Force through the Air Ministrying through his subordinate commanders of airo f units. However, when Air Force unitsare used in conjunction with Army or Navy units,all the forces involved come under a single operr-in- Chie f in accordance with the Germandoctrine of unity of command. In such circumcap- a commanding officer is chosen fromwhichever of the three branches predominates inthe operation, and he becomes directly responsibleto the OKW.2. LEcftflotteAll Air Force units are organized into tactical andterritorial air commands known as Luftflotten.Each LuftfEotte is assigned a particular commandarea, although this assignment is not necessarilypermanent, for an entire Luftflotte at any timemay be moved from one area to another at thedirection of the Air Ministry. Within its area,however, each Luftflotte not only controls all operationsof the flying units, but also supervises theactivities of all ground service units. Thus, inaddition to a large operations department, eachof has its own adjutant, legal, administration,, signal, and supply departments. All com-X—I

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451

O. X. W.OBERKOMMANDO OER WEHRMACHTHigh common* of the Armed ForrerllO. K. I.OBERKOMMANDO DER tUFTWAFFEICommander in Chief of Ihe G. A. F.IIUFTFIOTIEAdministrationFUKNACHRICHTEN(Communications)LUFTGAUi%FLUGNAFENBERELCHKOMMANGALURENlAirfield Regional Comnmnd,• FUEGERKORPSFLIEGERDIVISION JAGDDIVIS1ON FLIEGERDIVISI zGESCHWADEK6ESCHWADEHGRUPPEGRUPPESIFsEINSATZHAFENKOMMANDATURlN(Owra~ional Airdrome Commmd,STAFFELSTAFFElFigure Z.—German Air Force chaipt of command.•i, to«'

UNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451mands and formations subordinate to the Luftflotteare either essentially operational (Fliegerkorps,Jagdkorps, Geschwader, Gruppen, andStafeln) or administrative (Luftgaue). Thusthe administrative and operational commands meetat the Luftflotte headquarters, where their respectiveactivities are coordinated.3. FliegerkorpsOperational units within the Luftflotte commandarea are organized into subordinate operationalcommands known as Fliegerkorps. Through theseFliegerkorps, the Luftflotten execute the opertionaldirectives received from the Air Ministry.Each Fliegerkorps is a composite, mobile commandwith its own geographical area of controland operations. A Luftflotte may command oneor several Fliegerkorps, depending upon the sizeof the command area and the nature of operations.A Fliegerkorps may be detached at any time foroperations in another Luftjlotte area. The makeupof a Fliegerkorps is very elastic, both as tonumber and type of aircraft. It may consist ofseveral bomber Geschwader, several fighter Geschwader,in addition to a varying number of shortandlong-range reconnaissance Gruppen. On ‘occasionit may be limited to one function such as thatof a bomber command. The most important departmentof the Fliegerkorps command is that ofoperations. Although the Fliegerkorps also hasadjutant, legal, administration, signal, and supplydepartments, it depends almost entirely upon theLuftgau for administrative and supply services.The Fliegerkorps are numbered nonconsecutivelyin Roman numerals.4. JagdkorpsA Jagdkorps is an operational command, similarto a Fliegerkorps but whose function is limited tothat of a fighter command.5. FliegerdivisionA Fliegeriivision is an operational command similarto but of less importance than a Fliegerkorps.Most of the Fliegerdivisionen which existed priorto the war were replaced by Fliegerkorps. SeveralFliegerdivisionen still exist on the Eastern Front.6. JagddivisionA Jagddivision is a command subordinate to aJagdkorps.X-47. LebrdivisionThis division is unnumbered and is known simplvas the Lehrdivision. Its primary function was totest the latest types of aircraft, antiaircraft defenses,and air signals equipment from a tacticaland operational point of view. Lehr units areincorporated directly into the combat commandsand function as a part of the command's operationalstrength. Lehr personnel are supposed tohave had previous combat experience. This system,by giving the Lehr units an operationalstatus, enables them to experiment in actual combatoperations, rather than under simulated conditions.The Lehrdivision was organized into avariety of formations and commands. There weretwo Lehrgeschwader composed of o fand reconnaissance Lehrgruppen. Recently, however,only a few bomber Lehr units have beenoperational and they no longer appear concernedwith experimentation. There are also two Lehrregimenter,one concerned with antiaircraft defensesand the other with signal developments.Lehr units are not to be confused with experimentalunits whose duties are of a technical nature,‘ such as the testing of prototype aircraft.8. Geschwadera. GENERAL. The Geschwader is the largestmobile, homogeneous formation in the Air Force,and is used for long-range bombers, ground attackunits, and both single- and twin-engine fighters.It normally consists of about 100 aircraft,organized into three Gruppen. A fourth and, ina few instances, a fifth Gruppe have been addedto several single-engine fighter Geschwader. l Apparentlythe original intention was to have eachGeschwader operate as a unit by stationing allthree Gruppen at adjacent airdromes. However,although all Gruppen are now usually found onthe same battlefront, all three of them are unlikelyto operate from neighboring fields. In fact, it isnot uncommon at present for the Air Force towithdraw one or two Gruppen for rest or reequipmentand subsequently return them to operationsin another theater.b. COMMAND. A Geschwader is generally commandedby an Oberst ‘or Oberstleutnant knownas the Geschwaderkommodore. He has a smallstaff of officers for the adjutant, operations, or1 These fourth and fifth Gruppen are not to be confusedwith the Erganrungsggru~pen, which be contooperational training as discussed in Section VII.

IMARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451ganization, technical, signal, navigation, meteorological,and intelligence branches. Some staffsalso have a photographic officer. The staff has itsown headquarters flight (Stabs-Schwtirm) ofthree to six aircraft of the same type as thosewhich make up the Geschwader. This Geschwaderstaff is always maintained, even when the subordinateGruppen are separated for operations ondifferent fronts.c. TYPES. There are several types of Geschwader,known according to aircraft complementand/or operational employment as follows:Abbre-German title Aircraft type viationKampfgeschwader Bomber K.G.Schlachtgeschwader 1 ... Ground attackand antitank . .S.G.J agdgeschwader Single-enginefighter J.G.Zerstorergeschwader .. .Twin-enginefighter Z.G.Nachtjagdgeschwader .. Night fighter .. .N. J.G.Lehrgeschwader Tactical experimental... .L.G.Each Geschwader is designated by its abbreviationfollowed by an Arabic numeral: for example,K.G.77, NJ.G.26, Z.G.Ill, etc. The numerals arennecessarily in consecutive order.d. EQUIPMENT. Although all Gruppen in aGeschwader specialize in similar air tactics andare equipped with the same type of plane, themake and model may differ among the Gruppen.This variation is most prevalent in fighter Geschwader,but also occurs in a few of the bomberGeschwader. Thus a Kampfgeschwader may haveone G e schwader . the Dornier 217 andthe other two Gruppen with the Heinkel 111,Junkers 88, or the Focke-Wulf 200. Or the entireGeschwader may be equipped with the same makeof plane, such as the Messerschmitt 109, althoughone Gruppe may have a newer model while theother Gruppen have earlier ones.9. Gruppea. GENERAL. The Gruppe is the basic combatunit of the Air Force for both administrative andoperational purposes. It is a mobile homogeneousunit which is largely self-contained and whichmay be detached from its parent Geschwader foroperations in any command area. In fact, directivesfor the movement of flying units are almost1 Sturskampfgeschwader (Dive bomber) and Schnellkampfgeschwader(Ground attack) have been incorporatedinto, or superseded by the Schlachtgeschwadern.always issued in terms of Gruppen. Usually theentire Gruppe is based at the same airdrome.b. COMMAND. The Gruppe normally is commandedby a major or captain known as the Gruppenkommandeur.He h&s a small staff, consistingof the adjutant, operations officer, technical officer,and medical officer. There apparently is nospecial intelligence officer, since prisoners are sentdirectly to interrogation centers. Each Gruppealso has its own air signal platoon (Luftnachrich- .tenzug), known as a Technical Ground Station,and a staff flight (Stabs-Kette) of three aircraftgenerally of the same type with which the Gruppeis equipped.c. EQUIPMENT. The Gruppen are organizedinto three Stafleln, with the exception of singleenginefighter Geschwadern which recently havebeen organized into four Stafleln. Thus, mostGruppen are considered to have a table of organizationof 27 aircraft each (exclusive of thethree aircraft of the Gruppen-Stab) and Jagdgruppena table of organization of 36 aircraft(also exclusive of the Gruppen-Stab). Actualstrength, however, is likely to differ substantiallyfrom authorized strength; on many occasions ithas been found well below or above such figures.Gruppen attached to a Geschwader are numberedin Roman numerals in consecutive order. ThtfeI/K.G.77, II/K.G.77, and III/K.G.77 are thefirst, second, and third Gruppen, respectively, oflong-range bomber Geschwader 77.IO. StuffeZa. GENERAL. The Staffel is the smallest AirForce operational unit, and is generally corn-’manded by a captain or lieutenant known as theStafl elkapitii x One oficer serves as adjutant; thesignal, technical, and navigation branches are supervisedby the flying personnel in their sparetime.b. EQUIPMENT. A Staffed is considered. tohave a table of organization of nine aircraft, Itsactual strength, however, may be as low as fiveo six r or as much as 18 or 20 aircraft.For tactical purposes, it may be subdivided intoSchwiirme of five planes; into Ketten of threeplanes; or into Rotten of two planes. Each Staffedusually will have its own mobile repair shop forminor repairs in the dispersal areas; other motorvehicles must be drawn from the organization ofthe parent Gruppe.c. NUMBERING. All Staffeln in the Geschwaderare numbered consecutively in Arabic nu-X—5

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451merals. Thus, in all but Jagdgeschwader, the first,second, and third Staffeln constitute Gruppe I; thefourth, fifth and sixth Stafleln, Gruppe II; andthe seventh, eighth, and ninth Stafleln, GruppeIII. Where a fourth or fifth Gruppe exists, theStafleln will be numbered 10, 11, and 12, or 13,14, and 15, respectively. In Jagdgeschwadernhaving four Staffeln, the Gruppe I thus will containStaffeln 1, 2, 3, and 4; Gruppe II, Stafleln5, 6, 7, and 8; Gruppe III, Staffeln 9,10,11, and12, etc. In unit designations, the Gruppe numeralis omitted whenever the State1 number is indicated.Thus the fourth Staffel of K.G.77 is knownas 4/K.G.77, and no other reference to its positionin Gruppe II of K.G.77 is necessary.11. Semiautonomous Unitsa. GENERAL. Reconnaissance and Army cooperationaircraft operate and are organized assemiautonomous units, as Staffeln or Gruppen.These semiautonomous units fall into three generalcategories, all of which are numbered nonconsecutivelyin Arabic numerals of one, two orthree digits.b. LONG-RANGE RECONNAISSANCE. Long-rangereconnaissance aircraft are organized into Fernaufkltirungsgruppen,which are known as (F)or FAG units. Thus 3(F)123 is the third Staffelof Fernaufkltirungsgruppe 123.c. SHORT-RANGE RECONNAISSANCE. Shortrangereconnaissance and Army cooperation aircraftare organized into Nahaufkliirungsgruppen,which are known as NAGr or (H) units (due toformer name of Heeresaufkliirungsgruppen). Underthe old nomenclature still applying to someunits, the first Staflel of Nahaufkliirungsgruppe32 is therefore l(H)32. Under the more recentGruppen organization and numbering, the thirdStaflel of Nahaufkltirungsgruppe 1 for instance,is 3/NAGr 1.A. COASTAL RECONNAISSANCE. Coastal reconnaissanceand naval cooperation aircraft wereoriginally organized into Kiistenfliegergruppen(abbreviated K.F.Gr.). They are now known asSeeaufkliirungsgruppen (abbreviated SAGr.).Thus the third Staflel of Seeaufkliirungsgruppe196 is known as 3/SA4G7. 196.e. MISCELLANEOUS UNITS. Miscellaneous unitsalso are similarly organized and operated.(1) Nachtschlachtgruppen (Night Harassing)represent the relatively recent grouping ofpreviously loosely organized Stageha. Most ofthem are equipped with obsolete aircraft, althoughX—6coincidentally with their reorganization in Gruppen,these units have been modernized to someextent. Though some units in the East still havesuch aircraft as Arado 66, G0145, HESO, etc.,those in the West are equipped with modernJU87 and FW190. These Nachtschlachtgruppenare numbered in Arabic numbers and thus abbreviated—NSl,NS2, NS3, etc.(2) The Luftbeobachter Staffeln (Air Observers).(3) A number of specialized units such as minesweepingStageha, etc.12. Special Commandsa. Jagdflhrer. Separate fighter commandsknown as Jagdfiihrer, or more commonly as Jafii,have been established in each Luftflotte since theoutbreak of war. At first a Jafii was concernedprimarily with matters of policy and controlledoperations only on specific occasions. Yet, for aperiod, the Jafiis in France and Germany appearedto have had an overriding authority in directingall defensive fighter operations. Lately, however,itis believed that their functions have becomevirtually administrative.b. Fliegerfiihrer. Highly specialized operationson certain fronts have been put under the controlof special commanders known as Fliegerfiihrer.These Fliegerfiihrer control operations in a particulararea only and are directly responsible tothe Luftflotte commander in whose area they operate.For instance, the three Fliegerfidwer (3, 4,5) in Luftjlotte V, although primarily concernedwith antishipping operations and weather recomnaissance,controlled all types of combat aircraftin their area of operations.13. Luftglaua. GENERAL. The Luffgaue are the actual administrativeand supply organizations of the Luftwa@e.They are stationary or immobile commandswhose authority is limited to certain welldefined and permanently fixed geographical areas.A Luftgau commander is usually a General derFlieger or General der Flakartillerie, and theoreticallyis responsible to the LuftfZotte commanderwithin whose command area the Luftgau lies. Inactual practice, however, the Luftgazt commandersreceive most of their instructions direct from theAir Ministry, and the Luftflottenchefs interferelittle with Luftgau administration. The Luftgauepermanently established in Germany are numberednon-consecutively by Roman numerals;

IMARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451those in occupied countries are generally designatedby their location: for example, LuftgauNorwegen.b. FUNCTIONS. Each Luftgau is responsiblefor the following services within its commandarea:(1) Administration, supply, and maintenanceof all flying units.(2) Active and passive defense against airattack.(3) Operations of signal units.(4) All training other than that of auxiliaryunits.(5) Recruitment, mobilization, and training ofreserve personnel.c. SECTIONS. Each Luftgau has its own operations,adjutant, legal, administration, signal, andsupply sections. It also has a department for prohibitedand restricted flying areas which has noknown counterpart in the Luftflotte or Fliegerkorpsheadquarters. All training within the Luftgauarea is directed by a Higher Commander ofTraining. This officer is usually a Generalmajorand is subordinate only to the Luftgau cornmander.All other Luftgau services are maintainedthrough subordinate section commandswhich are designated by Arabic numerals precedingthe Luftgau unit designation. Thus 4/VIIIis the fourth section command in Luftgau VIII.d. AIRDROME COMMANDS. The main channelsthrough which the flying units draw on the servicesof the Luftgaue are the airdrome commands.Each Luftgau area is divided into about five airdromeregional commands (Flughafenbereichkonzmandanturen).The regional commands are inturn subdivided into five or more operational airdromecommands (Einsatzhafenkommandanturen).The regional command is essentially administrativeand is not necessarily located at anairfield. The operational airdrome command,however, exists only to serve the flying units attheir stations and is thus always found at an airdrome.The manner in which the Luftgau has decentralizedits authority through these commandsis as follows:(1) The airdrome regional commands arecharged with the Luftgnu's responsibility for supplyand maintenance of supplies and equipmentwithin their respective areas; meeting the physicalneeds of the flying units; defense of aircraft,equipment, and motor transport against. air at; airdrome development; and air movements.These duties are discharged by specialized unitswhich the Luftgau allots to the regional commandand which the regional command then redistributesamong the operational commands. For example,the Field Works Office (Feldbauamt) at the regionalcommand handles airdrome maintenancethrough its subsidiary Works Superintendent's, Offices which are stationed at the airdromes. Similarly,the Air Signal Company at each regionalcommand is divided into platoons which are stationedat the operational commands. A seniortechnical officer supervises aircraft maintenance 'in the region through his subordinate technicalofficers at the operational commands. The airdromregional command is thus largely self-containedand calls on the Luftgau for assistance onlywhen the units already assigned prove inadequate.(2) The airdrome regional command also actsas the intermediary between the Luftgau headquartersand the operational airdrome command.All orders, requests, reports, etc., traveling be;tween the two must pass through the regionalcommand ft - This staff numbers from 50 to 150officers and enlisted men and is headed by a cornmandantwho usually holds the rank of Genera&major.(3) The airdrome regional command's primarypractical task is that of transporting supplies andequipment from the depots to its subordinate operationalcommands. For this purpose it is generallyassigned a supply company (Nachschubkompa&e)composed of a supply column staff (Nachschubkolonnenstab),some four transport columns(Transportkolonnen), and two or three fuel*columns(Flugbetriebsstoffkolonnen).(4) The commander of the operational airdromecommand normally holds the rank ofmajor, captain, or first lieutenant. His adjutanthandles personnel matters. The personnel cornplementof an operational command numbersabout 350 officers and enlisted men, and the motortransport allotment is between 50 and 100 vehicles.(5) Airdrome maintenance at each operationalcommand is handled by a Works Superintendent'sOffice (Bauleitung), subordinate to the FieldWorks Office at the regional command. TheBauleitung has charge of most of the constructiondone at the airdrome (buildings, dispersal areas,defense works, camouflage, etc.), as well as thelaying of runways, extension of landing grounds,and installation of lighting systems. Reports onserviceability and bomb damage are radioedthrough the regional command to the Luftgau,,and thence to the Air Ministry for broadcast overX—7

I MARCH 1945the Air Force Safety Service network. The Bauleitungpersonnel is composed of civil servants andtechnical staffs. Any other specialized constructionunits which may be attached to the airdromesto repair bomb damage or enlarge facilities arealso directed by the Bauleitung.(6) The operational airdrome command is alsoresponsible for defense against air attack, forwhich it has both heavy and light Flak units.These guns and other aerial defense units arecommanded by the airdrome commander onlywhen there is no flying unit stationed at the field.Otherwise, defense is controlled by the commanderof that flying unit which is occupying theairdrome.(7) The telephone, teleprinter, and radio ateach operational airdrome command are operatedby an air signal platoon (Fliegerhorst-Luftnachrichtenzug)and commanded by. a signal officerWho is subordinate to the senior signal officer atthe airdrome regional command. The signal platoonalso transmits the meteorological ‘and airdromeserviceability reports and operates the AirMovements Control. This control directs onlynonoperational flying. Signal communicationswith aircraft in operations are controlled by thetactical ground station attached to the flying unit.(8) Aircraft maintenance at the operationalairdrome command—except for servicing andminor repairs which are performed by the groundstaff of the flying unit—is the responsibility of atechnical officer. This officer not only handlesoverhauls and major repairs, but also is responsiblefor maintenance of motor vehicles; for bomb,fuel, and other supply stores; and for equipmentstores and the armory. He is subordinate to thesenior technical Dflicer at the airdrome regionalcommand.(9) The requests by the operational airdromecommand for equipment and spare parts reachthe regional command through the technical officer.Requisitions for bombs, fuel, and ammunitionare made by the supply section. The operationalcommand also has an administrativesection which handles clothing, food, pay, billeting,and other accommodations; a record office;a photographic section; a medical section; and awelfare section.(10) Luftgaustiibe z.b.V. During campaignsthe Luftgaue provide the advancing air formationwith supplies and services through a systemof subordinate commands known as Luftgaustiibezur besonderer Verwendung (LzGftgaux—8UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451staffs for special duty) or, simply, Luftgaustiibez. b. V. units. These units may be designated byan Arabic numeral (Luftgaustii z. b V. 3) orby their location (Luftgaustiib Kiev). They aresent into the forward battle areas by their controllingLuftgau and are normally responsiblefor all services in an area occupied by a Flieger-Corps. After conditions have become relativelystabilized—for example, when operational airdromecommands have been established and supplystations and fuel and ammunition field depotshave been set up—the Luftgaustii z. b z. unitis withdrawn and the parent Luftgau assumesdirect command.Section III.I. Antiaircraft DefensesAIR FORCE ARMS AND SERVICESa. GENERAL. The bulk of the German antiaircraftartillery, inclusive of antiaircraft searchlightunits, is an organic part of the German AirForce. The German Army has antiaircraft artilleryunits of its own, but these units are only forthe organic use and protection of the Army unitsagainst air attack.For organizational charts of Luftwaffe andArmy antiaircraft units see Sections V and VI,Chapter II. For a discussion of antiaircraftweapons and equipment see Chapter VII, SectionIV.b. ANTIAIRCRAFT DEFENSE OF GERMANY ANDREAR AREAS.The Chief of the German AirForce is responsible for the air defense of territorialGermany as well as important installationsin occupied countries. The Aircraft Warning Serviceas a part of the Air Force is tied in with thecoordinated use of aviation, antiaircraft artillery,and barrage balloons. All air ai rmeasures also are the responsibility of the Chiefof the German Air Force.Antiaircraft defense of rear areas is carriedout through the Luftgaue mentioned above. Luftgauecoordinate their defenses with each otherin accordance with regulations published by theChief of the Air Force. The commander of eachLuftgau has a specialist under him who exercisescommand over the antiaircraft artillery units, includingsearchlights, assigned to the district.Other specialists include the commanders of barrageballoon units and of units responsible forcarrying out special defense measures. In actual

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451operations, in most cases the commands abovethe actual operating units act mainly in a coordinatingcapacity, feeding information to the operatingunits which act in turn on their own initiativein accordance with prescribed standing operatingprocedure.Within certain of the air districts there are specialair defense commands. Each of these coversspecial areas or cities of vital importance, defenseof which, under one command, is laid out with aconcentration of coordinated defense facilitiesinclusive of antiaircraft guns and searchlights,fighter aviation, barrage balloons, warning facilities,and the use of special devices such as smokegenerators.Operation of the antiaircraft defense systemcalls for close cooperation between fighter planesand air warning systems, and the antiaircraft gunswith supporting searchlights are cohsidered thebackbone of the static defense. For operationalcontrol, the antiaircraft command in a Luftguis usually divided into groups known as Flakgruppcn,and these groups in turn are dividedinto sub-groups known as Flakuntergruppen. Theheadquarters of the group is normally the con;trol center of the Flak defenses, and acts downwardthrough the sub-groups.In deployment of heavy antiaircraft guns inimportant static areas, there is a tendency towardthe use of concentrated sites known as Grossbatteries.These usually consist of three 4-, 6-, oreven S-gun batteries grouped together at one site,with fire control for all guns emanating from onecentral source.Antiaircraft searchlights are used in cooperationwith night fighters, as well as in their normalrole of illuminating targets for the gun units.c. USE OF ANTIAIRCRAFT WITH FIELD FORCES.For operation in the field, Luftwaffe antiaircraftunits are allotted to field task forces for protectionof Army and Air Force installations. Evenin moving situations, a certain amount of antiaircraftis present for the defense of importantsemi-permanent installations such as depots, parks,railroads, bridges, and airdromes. No hard andfast rule is laid down for this use of antiaircraftartillery. The size of the antiaircraft force defendingsuch areas will depend to a large extenton importance of the areas to be defended, plusavailability of Luftwafle antiaircraft units forsuch assignment. Luftwaffe antiaircraft organizationsand units operating with .the Army aresubordinated operationally and for command pur-poses to the Army unit concerned, and administratively (for replacements, etc.) to their parentAir Force Organization.Employment and composition of the higherFZak units will vary in accordance with local conditions. For a fuller 4iscussion of the organization and employment of higher antiaircraft unitsin the field, see Section V, Chapter II.d. DEFENSE OF RAILWAY TRAINS. The mountingof antiaircraft materiel on railway mounts forthe protection of railway trains and as a means offurnishing a highly mobile defense of lines ofcommunication has been highly perfected by theGermans. Antiaircraft guns on railway mountscan be used either in rear areas for protection oftrains operating there, or for the protection oftrains carrying troops or supplies to forward combatareas. Although the ZO-mm single- or fourbarreledFlak is normally employed for this purpose,the 37-mm, 8%mm and 105-mm guns willalso be encountered mounted on railway cars.2. German Air Force Signal Service (Luftndricbtenwesen)a. GENERAL. The importance of a comprehensiveand efficient air signal service in aerial warfareis obvious. Neither offensive nor defensiveair operations could be conducted without a completenetwork of signal communications, or withoutradio and radar equipment for the directionand control of aircraft, particularly in fighterdefense. So vital is the role of the German AirForce Signal Service that it has had a greaterproportionate wartime expansion than any otherarm of the German Air Force, and now has anestimated personnel strength of between 175,000and 200,000.b. FLEXIBILITY. The efficiency of the GermanAir Force has been enhanced by the flexibility ofits signal organization. This was particularlytrue when the Germans were advancing into newterritory, usually well prepared, on a temporarybasis, for the reception of flying units. As soonas the captured territory was firmly occupied, signalunits then established a more permanent landlinecommunications system. Under present circumstances,with the Germans on the defensive,the flexibility and mobility of the German AirForce are no longer dependent to the same extenton its signal organization. However, a workableGerman Air Force Signal Service is still ofparamount importance in the defense of Germanyagainst air attacks.Ix—9

I MARCH 1945u&tA$SlFiEDTM-E 30-451c. FUNCTIONS. These include the transmissionof all orders and communications nedessaryfor the operation and functioning of the GermanAir Force, if possible both by landline and bywireless; the establishment and supervision ofall navigational aids to aiwraft; the manning ofObserver Corps and radar in con&ction withair defense; control of air traffic, air safety andrescue services; and the interception of enemysignals.d. ORGANIZATION. (1) General. One of thedepartments of the German Air Ministry is theDirector General of Signal Communications (GE+eralnachrichtenfiihrer der Luftwafle). To handleits multiple duties, a flexible organization hasbeen developed, consisting of many self-containedspecialist companies. .The bulk of these companiesare allocated to the major operational andadministrative commands, and the others aregrouped into battalions or remain as individualcompanies attached to minor commands.(2) Section platoon and company. The basicoperational unit is the section (Truppe) of lo-20men. Each section specializes in one particularsignal activity such as telephone, teletype, cablelaying, construction, etc. Five to ten sections ofthe same type are organized into a platoon (Zug)of 80 to 100 men. Three to six platoons aregrouped into a company (Kounpanie) of 200 to300 men. All blatoons in a company specializein the same branch of signal activity, so that eachcompany is a self-contained specialist unit.(3) Battalion and regiwzent. Three to fourcompanies usually make up a battalion (Abteilung),although some have many more. Thestrength of a battalion, aside from its staff, dependson the number of companies. Three to fivebattalions normally form a regiment (Reginzenter),with a strength between 1,500 and 9,000and varying functions.(4) Allotment and numbering of units. Signalregiments and smaller units are allotted to theseveral different types of operational and administrativecommands requiring a permanent allocationof signal personnel. Allocation is on the basisof the size and requirements of the command.The relationship of the signal units to their assignedcommands often is indicated by the terminalnumber of the unit designation; e.g. Luftjlotte.2 had Signal Regiments 2, 12, and 22. HOWever,iyith the creation of many new commandsand the renumbering of others, the numbering10system for signal units is not as readily workableas formerly.(5) Special u&s. In addition to the standardunits, there is a special Research Regimentcharged with the development of new types ofsignal equipment and its employment. Aircraftspecially equipped for signal activities have alsoin many instances been allotted to various commandsand have proved extremely useful in conductingair operations in mobile situations.(6) Cowwnand. The supreme signal commandof the above units is exercised by the DirectorGeneral of Signals of the Air Ministry. Signalcommand of a Luftflotte is under a Chief SignalOfficer (Htihere Nachrichtenfiihrer 01Hiihere Nafii) who controls the senior SignalOfficer (Nafii) of the Fliegerkorps, Luftgaue,Flak-Kwps and Flak Division, and Airfield RegionalCow&nand. Subordinate to these are theSignal Officers (Nachrichten Ofizier or N. 0.)who exercise command in the lower subdivisionssuch as Operational Airfield Command signal platoons,and Geschzvader signal companies.e. SIGNAL EQUIPMENT. (1) General. German’signal equipment, generally speaking, hasbeen characterized by standardization of design,relatively few major types, and a high quality ofcomponents and workmanship. During the firstyears of the war, the Germans did not fully appreciatethe tactical possibilities of radar 1 andfor a time Allied radar development was wellahead of the German. However, the Germanshave made tremendous efforts to match Alliedtechnical &ogress and to overcome the varioustactical problems resulting from Allied superiority.(2) Ground radar. German ground radarfalls into three general categories: Early warningset (Freya, Mawmut or Wassermann) for longrange detection; Giant Wiirzburg primarily foraircraft interception control; and Small Wiir~burgdesigned for flak control, but also used forheight finding in the Aircraft Reporting Service.These various types of ground radar equipmentplay a large part in the German system of airraid warning and control of fighter interception.Many devices have been developed by the Alliesto nullify the effectiveness of the German equipment,but at the same time the Germans have1 The basic principle of radar is the transmission of a wirelesspulse of very short duration, the reflection of the pulse by theobject to be detected, and the reception of both the original andreflected pulses by a receiver adjacent to the transmitter. Electricalmeasurement of the time interval • between the two pulsesgives a direct indication of the distance of the reflecting object.Means are also provided whereby direction of the object fromthe transmitter, and in some cases its height, can be obtained.

I MARCH 1945developed numerous countermeasures. Thesemeasures and counhrmeasures have led to extremelyrapid development of new techniques andequipment both by the Germans and by the Allies.(3) Airborne radio and radar. German airborneradio and radar equipment may be classifiedin four general categories: Funkgerat (FUG),or radio aird radar equipment involving transmittersand receivers; Peilgerat (PeG), or navigationalequipment; Notsender (NS), or emergencytransmitter; and other types of miscellaneousequipment. Airborne equipment is an absolutenecessity for the successful conduct of air operations.Throughout the war, the Germans havedeveloped navigational, bombing, and fighter controlequipment. The latter is particularly importantat .the present time for the Germans whomust depend on adequate warning of Allied airattacks and efficient control of fighters and flakfor effective opposition.f. FIGHTER DEFENSE. (1) General During1941 and early 1942, the German Air Forcefighter organization was concerned mainly withdefense of targets in Northern France and theLowlands. The bulk of aerial combats then weretaking place in the relatively small area over thosecountries and over the English Channel; and awarning system, consisting of a coastal radar beltand visual observers, was adequate. But thegreater depth of penetration by Allied bombersin 1943 required that the German Air Force protecttargets in Germany as well as in occupiedterritory, and the defensive problem thus becameinfinitely more complex. Additional radar beltsand observer posts were required. German fightershad to be placed in tactically favorable positions,and they were forced to enlarge the scopeof their activity to cover all areas subject toattack. Such developments naturally .led to considerablechanges in the German Air Force fighterorganization and the methods of fighter control.The liberation of France and part of the Lowlandsin 1944 further complicated the German defensiveproblem by depriving the German AirForce of a large and efficient part of its earlywarning system, as well as many excellent airfieldsat a time when. the weight of the Alliedair assault was increasing.(2) Reporting and warning system. TheAircraft Reporting Service is a part of the GermanAir Force. Long-range radar sets determinethe range and bearing of the approaching aircraft,UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 3045’1and short-range sets measure height. Other typesof equipment distinguish between friendly andhostile aircraft. An Observer Corps networkwith strategically located posts also supplies aircraftwarning information, while in some instancespatrolling aircraft shadow the attackingaircraft. On the basis of the information fromthese various sources, hostile aircraft are plottedin a central headquarters, and the Germans in thepast have been able to construct a fairly accurateand current picture of Allied air operations.Proper warning then is given to all interestedagencies, and defensive fighters are put in theair to intercept the attackers. Information on thecourse and expected target of the bombers ispassed by radio to the airborne fighters until contactis made. The specific aerial tactics used bythe German fighters have varied considerablythroughout the war, but in general the precisemethod becomes the responsibility of the fighterpilots after contact is made. In spite of the excellentequipment and control methods the Germanshave developed, their defensive warningsand operations are considerably handicapped bythe loss of territory in Western Europe.3. Airborne ForcesSee Chapter X, section VII.4. Air Force Fighting UnitsSee Chapter II, sections V, VI.5. Air Transporta. GENERAL. German transport aircraft andgliders are controlled by a General Staff Departmentat the Air Ministry. This department,headed by a Kommodor und Lufttransportfiihrer,allocates and adminsters all transport units in theAir Force. The majority of the transport planesconsist of the JU 52. This old type has been retainedbecause of its adaptability to varied tasksand its ability to operate under’ difficult conditions.Since the production of JU 52's has beeninadequate to meet present transport needs, theGerman Air Force has drawn upon Italian aircraft,such as the SM 82. Production of newtypes specifically designed as transports, such asthe JU 252, JU 290 and the ME 323, has beenalmost negligible. The HE 111 has been adaptedto extensive employment as a freight carrier, andlighter planes, such as the Fieseler Starch (FI156), frequently are used for passenger-carryingX—l I

I MARCH 1945and liaison work. Transport and communicationsaircraft are organized for the following services:b. FOR OPERATIONAL UNITS. The Air Forcemaintains several minor air transport units whichare more or less’ permanently allocated to variouscommands. These units are not .intended to performany particularly heavy or large-scale transportwork such as airborne operations or longtermsupply. They are used rather for the numerousodd jobs of communications, liaison, andpassenger-carrying within the Luftflotte area, orbetween the Luftfiotte and Air Force headquartersin Germany. These units are distributedamong the commands as follows:(1) The staff of each Luftflotte and Fliegerkorpsis allotted a transport Staff el, with 12 or 13aircraft to be used for transport within Germanyproper as well as in forward areas.(2) Each Fliegerkorps is allotted a transportStaf el of 10 to 15 JU 52's in addition to a Kurier-StafeZ (communications) of lighter planes. TheFliegerkorps then may temporarily re-allot partor all of the JU 52's to the subordinate Geschwaderand Gruppen whenever the transport ofpersonnel, equipment, and/or supplies becomesparticularly urgent.(3) Each operational Gruppe is allotted severallighter types of communication aircraft.Formerly, each Gruppe also had at least one JU52 for transport purposes. Now, however, theGruppen usually rely on JU 52's temporarily lentto them by the Fliegerkorps headquarters.(4) Each Aufkl i irungsgruppe (reconnaissancegroup) has a Kurier-Staflel within the Fliegerkorpsorganization which is primariIy intended forliaison with Army commanders. These aircraftare at the disposal of Army personnel as well asthe Air Force reconnaissance officers.(5) Allotted to each F&o is a Verbindungs-SfafeZ (liaison) of communication aircraft whichis used for contact work between Army headquartersand those Air Force units which areproviding close or direct support for the Army.(6) The main air signal regiments of eachLuftjIotte and Fliegerkorps have their own Staff&zor transport aircraft. Some of these planesare equipped as flying signal stations, but manyare used simply for transporting equipment andpersonnel.(7) The higher commands, including the Oberkomma?zdoder Wehrmacht, the Oberkommandodes Heeres, the Oberkommando der Marine, andthe Oberkommando der Luftwaffe, each havex—12UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451their own Kurier-Staflel to carry mail and personnel.These aircraft operate on a fixed scheduleover all of Germany and remaining occupiedterritory. Individual aircraft may also be detailedon special urgent tasks.c. FOR CIVIL AIRLINES. A small number oftransports, primarily JU 52's, still are used onthose civil air routes which the Deutsche LufthansaA. G. operated before the war and continuesto maintain under strict military supervisionfor high priority communication.d. FOR K. G. Z. b. V. UNITS. The Kampfgeschwaderzur besonderer Ver-wendung (for specialduty), known more simply as K. G. z. b. V.units, include over two-thirds of the Germantransport aircraft and are actually the mainstayof the Air Force transport 'organization. Forlimited operations these aircraft still may besubordinated to and receive their directives fromthe Luftflotten and Geschwader. In the pastthey occasionally were allotted by the Air Ministryto the LuftfEottevz on a fairly permanent basis(for example, to a Luftflotte headquarters).Now, however, they usually are so allotted fora specific operation only (for example, an airborneoperation or supply mission). If only oneor two units are allotted to a Luftjlotte, the chiefquartermaster department of the Luftflotte willhandle administration, personnel, and aircraftserviceability. If several units are operating underthe Luftflotte, however, the Air Ministryusually will detail an air transport officer to theLuftflotte. This officer, who normally holds therank of Oberst, generally is assisted by a staff,which may include a technical officer, a personnelofficer or adjutant, and an operations officer, inaddition to a transport officer who apportions theloads.The organization of the K. G. z. b. V. unitsis extremely fluid, and although the original intentionapparently was to set up the units inGeschwader, the actual strength of most z. b. V.units rarely exceeds that of a Gruppe. TheseGruppen normally number 53 aircraft organizedinto four Staflelvt of 12 aircraft each plus a Grubpenstabof five planes.For purposes of transporting parachute troopsand air-landing infantry in airborne operations,transport aircraft are organized into Z. b. V.Geschwader. Each such Geschwader consists ofabout 200 aircraft organized into four Gruppenof four Staflelvt each. Each Stafl el has 12 aircraftorganized into four Ketten of three aircraft

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30451each. The organization of the Kampfgeschwaderthus closely parallels that of the parachute troopswhich they transport. A JU 52 can carry 10to 12 fully equipped parachutists. Thus one sectionof parachutists is carried by one aircraft; aplatoon of 36 men is carried by a z. b. V. Kette;a company of 120 to 144 men is carried by a2. b. V. StafeE; and an entire parachute battalionis carried by a z. b. V. Gruppe. Whenever possible,the men are moved by units, that is, aZ. b. V. Kette carrying a parachute platoon.e. SPECIALLY EQUIPPED TRANSPORTS. Anumber of JU 52's have been designed for highlyspecialized transport services. For example,many JU 52's, a number of which are attached toAir Force medical units, are fitted as ambulanceplanes with a capacity of 12 stretcher patients andfive sitting patients. Some JU 52's temporarilyhave been equipped with skiti, and others withpontoons for transporting men and supplies intoareas made inaccessible by snow or separated bybodies of water.f. GLIDERS. The Germans also are usingtowed gliders for air tragsport. Since they cQmbinea high load capacity with comparatively small%fuel consumption for the towing aircraft (or ofthe glider itself in the powered version), theyfirst were used in the Lowlands in 1940. TheDFS 230 and the Gotha 242 carried troops andsupplies from Italy and Sicily to Africa frommid-1941 until the conclusion of the Tunisiancampaign. In the fall of 1942, the ME 323powered glider caused wide comment in its operationsbetween Sicily and Tunisia. At the sametime it was revealed that each dive-bomber Staffeloperating from Tunisia had its own DFS 230 tocarry supplies from Sicily to Africa. Criticalsupply situations on the Russian Front and in theBalkans forced the Germans to employ gliders inmany instances. Though they have seen littleservice in the West to date, disruption of transportationlines through Allied aerial attacks maycompel further use of unpowered gliders.6. Sea Rescue ServiceThe Air Force Sea Rescue Service (Seenotdienst)was first established to take care of airmenshot down over the North Sea area and theEnglish Channel. Its services were extended tothe Mediterranean, the Black Sea, and the Baltic.Rescues are performed normally by the service'sown lit-craft, but where the hazards of waterlanding are too great, the actual rescue is madeby surface craft. These craft may be attachedto the service or may be simply lent to it for aparticular rescue.Seenotdienst units were subordinated to theLuftflotte within whose area they serve. Theseunits were organized into three sea rescue commands(Seenotjlugkomzunandos), each of whichis headed by a Seenotdienstfiihrer with the rankof colonel. Subordinate to these commands areregional commands, known as Bereichkommandos,which control the various Staffeln- and detachments.Single rescue planes were often attachedto combat units which operated over water.7. Meteorological Servicesa. GENERAL. The Air Force MeteorologicalService (Flugwetterdienst) is controlled by theAir Ministry. The chief responsibility of theFlugwetterdienst is to provide all flying units withdependable weather forecasts as well as all longtermforecasts for strategical planning. The twomain sources of Air Force meteorological informationare weather stations and weather aircraft.b. WEATHER STATIONS. At each airfieldthere is a relatively small Wetferstelle (weatherstation) which reports on conditions in its immediatevicinity. These reports are collected at regularintervals (usually hourly) by a Wetterbemtungszentral(weather reporting center) whichthen coordinates the reports of all the Wetterstellenwithin its area and prepares maps for theflying units. A center usually serves an areacovered by a Fliegerkorps and frequently is motorized.Some centers carry a Luftgau, unit designation,such as W. 2. B./XIII. The chain ofcommand from the airfield to Air Ministry iscompleted through meteorological officers stationedat Luftgau, Fliegerkorps, and Luftflotteheadquarters.c. WEATHER AIRCRAFT. Attached to eachLuftjlotte is a Wetterkiindigungstaflel (weatherreconnaissance squadron), commonly known as aWesta unit. These units normally have nine to12 aircraft equipped with automatic recordinginstruments. The crews include a meteorologicalofficer and a specially trained wireless operator.Combat aircraft often are detailed to reporton weather conditions encountered during theiroperations. The outstanding example of thistype of reporting is that of the long-range bomberunits operating from Norway. Weather reconnaissanceperformed by these units has becomealmost as important as their anti-shipping reconnaissance.x—13

I MARCH 1945Section IV. ARMY AND NAVY COOPERATIONAir Force cooperation may be of three types:direct or close support (tactical support); indirectsupport (strategic missions) ; and liaison.1. Direct or Close SupportClose support usually is confined to the actualbattle front and the area immediately behind it.It consists of bombing and strafing enemy groundforces, tanks, artillery, pillboxes, field defenseworks, antiaircraft defenses, forward dumps, andsupply columns. It also includes air cover asprotection for ground and Air Force units againstenemy air attacks, and against enemy air reconnaissance.All types of aircraft may be used forthese operations.2. Indirect SupportIndirect support involves attacks on targetsbeyond the battle area such as rear maintenanceand supply depots, enemy airfields, railroads, industrialcenters, etc.3. LiaisonLiaison between the Army and Air Force forUNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451both army cooperation and tactical reconnaissanceis provided by specially trained Air Force officersknown as Flivos (Fliegerverbindungsofziere).The German Air Force support is requested bythe Army units through their superior commands.The armies transmit the request to the competentheadquarters authority where a German AirForce liaison officer (Flivo) is stationed. Suchheadquarters are generally those of Army groups.German Air Force Signal Liaison officers (Fliegerverbindungsofiiziere(Ln)) are stationed withArmy corps headquarters and in some particularcases with division headquarters. A German AirForce Liaison Officer is specially assigned toArmy Headquarters for the purpose of directingclose cooperation between the Army and GermanAir Force reconnaissance units (Fliegewerbindungsofiziere(Aufkliirung)). For the controlof the close support missions, which as a resultof these requests are ordered by the German AirForce Command (Fliegerkorps or LuftflotteHQ), special German Air Force officers are stationedat the front line. These control officers(Fliegerleitofiziere) direct the flying formationsto their targets by radio from advanced observation’postson the ground.X—14

I MARCH 1945IINcLASSIF~~~TM-E iO-45,!. AircraftSection V.EQUIPMENTa. CONVENTIONAL TYPES. (1) General. Thedecision of the German Air Ministry to concentrateon mass production of a few selected typeshas led to the development of versatile aircraftcapable of performing several duties. Therefore,certain types of aircraft fall into more than onecategory; i. e., the Junkers 88 is both a twinenginefighter and bomber. The German AirForce has relied chiefly on the Focke-Wulf 190,Messerschmitt 109, and Junkers 88 to performthe major part of all fighter, day and night bomber,and reconnaissance missions. During thecourse of the war, however, improvements becamenecessary, and many sub-types have been produced.It was ‘important to prevent thesechanges from interfering seriously with productionschedules, and especially to avoid the substitutionof entirely new types. Therefore most ofthe improvements consisted of modernizationsand adaptations of existing types rather than thecreation of completely new models. The mostfavored improvements were the installations ofmore powerful engines, additional armament, andheavier armor plate. When these modificationsdid not achieve the desired end, the plane's structurewas changed. One of the outstanding weaknessesof early German planes—their lack of defensivearmament and protective armor—receivedincreased attention, and in many cases has beenadequately remedied.(2) Single-engine fighters (a) Gene&. TheGerman single-engine fighter force is made upof only two plane types—the Messerschmitt 109and the Focke-Wulf 190. Both types are producedin several versions and series, but the basicdesign of each has remained unchanged. Improvementshave been achieved mainly by installationof more highly powered engines and heavierarmament. The principal developments in thesefighters have been the introduction of specialhigh-altitude versions and the conversion of theFW 190 into a fighter-bomber.(b) Important operational aircraft. (1) Messerschmitt109. This plane was the standardsingle-engine fighter at the beginning of the war.At present, it is one of two standard single-enginefighters and is used primarily for high-altitudedefensive duties.(2) Focke-Wulf 290. This is the first single-engine fighter in the Air Force to use an aircooled,radial engine. Of a more recent designthan the ME 109, the FW 190 is a larger, cleanerplane. Its armor, armament, and simplifiedelectrically operated controls are essential featuresthat make it an exceptionally good medium-altitudefighter. It also is extensively used as afighter-bomber with a normal bomb load of 550pounds.(3) Twin-engine fighters. (a) General. TheGermans started the war with but one operationaltwin-engine fighter, the Messerschmitt 110. Attemptsat introducing improved models (ME 210and 410) encountered production difficulties, andthese aircraft have not proved very successful astwin-engine fighters or been operational in largenumbers. However, the German Air Force hasadopted two of its long-range bombers as twinenginefighters, the JU 88 and the DO 217. Thefighter version of the JU 88 appeared in 1941,and this. type since has been used in increasingnumbers, now constituting a very substantial partof the German twin-engine fighter force. TheDO 217 fighter is used primarily for night fighting,but has not achieved the success of the JU88. Generally speaking, the night fighter branchof the an d Force has constituted its mosteffective arm throughout the war.(b) Important operational aircraft. (1) Junkcrs88. Similar in appearance to its bomber prototype,except for the metal-panelled nose, thefighter version of the JU 88 is currently the mostformidable German night fighter. It is relativelyfast, heavily armed, and well protected. Thistype is employed for intruder and ground attackoperations in addition to night fighting.(2) Dornier 217. Likewise a modified bombermodel, the DO 217 is used as a night-fighter, buthas not proved as effective as the JU 88 in thiscategory.(4) Ground attack aircraft. The original JU87 "Stuka" dive bomber, while still in limited usefor night ground attack duty, has been largelysuperseded by faster single-engine fighters,equipped with bomb racks and known as fighterbombers.The latter aircraft, of which the FW190 is the best example, have the greater speedand maneuverability required by all ground attackoperations without the necessity of strong fighterescort. The ME 262 jet plane also is being usedfor this type of operation.(5) Multi-engine bomber?. The long rangebomber force has been relegated to a minor rolex—15

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451in German Air Force operations. Allied fightersuperiority, combined with the necessity of increasedGerman fighter production, largely hasrestricted bomber activities to mine laying andoccasional night bombing. Principal types usedare the JU 88, DO 217 and HE 111.(6) Transport planes. Although a pre-warmodel, the Junkers 52 three-engine, low-wingmonoplane is still the standard freight and troopcarrying transport of the German Air Force. Italso is used extensively for carrying and droppingparachute troops and as a glider tug. Otheroperational transport types include the six-engineMesserschmitt 323 and the four-engine Junkers290. Converted bombers, such as the HE 111,also are employed frequently for heavy transportduty.(7) Gliders. Gliders are of two types: poweredand tow. Both resemble a conventionalmonoplane, but the tow glider lacks an engine andlanding gear. The tow glider generally useswheels during take-off and then jettisons them,subsequently landing on a skid. Both types ofgliders are equipped with landing flaps and divebrakes, as well as navigation and landing lights.The principal types of tow gliders are the DFS230, GO 242 and ME 321. Principal poweredgliders are ME 323 and GO 244.(8) Army cooperation and reconnaissance aircraft.The standard type of Army cooperationplane, typified by the Henschel 126, has provedvery vulnerable to modern fighters and antiaircraftfire. This has resulted in the employmentof converted fighters, sufficiently. fast, maneuverable,and armed to undertake short-range reconnaissancewithout fighter protection. Such conversionusually consists of replacing some of thearmament with cameras. Recent development ofhigh-speed jet aircraft has furnished the GermanAir Force with a highly desirable reconnaissanceplane.b. GERMAN COMPOSITE OR "PICK-A'BACK"AIRCRAFT. This innovation, still in the experimentalstage, consists of a multi-motored planewith a large amount of explosive in the nose, surmountedand controlled by a single-engine aircraft.The latter directs the former in a divetowards the target and then releases it. Thereafterits operation is apparently by remote control.The usual components observed have beenthe JU 88 and the ME 109, but there is no reasonto believe that other similar types could not beadapted for this purpose.X—16c. JET- AND ROCKET-PROPELLED. (1) General.The perfection and application of jet and rocketpropulsion as motive power for aircraft are outstandingGerman aeronautical developments ofthe current war. To counter this new type aircraft,if it is employed on any appreciable scale,might well necessitate a general revision of defensiveand offensive aerial tactics. Requiredchanges or .improvements also might extend toinclude ground defenses against attacks by theseaircraft. To date the Germans have not employedjet or rocket aircraft on a sufficient scaleto permit full and accurate assessment of theircharacteristics and possibilities. Those currentlyin use, however, appear to possess significant advantagesover conventional types. In level flight,dives, and rate of climb all known conventionaltypes have been surpassed by aircraft with thistype of motive power. The propellerless powerunit is capable of operation on the lowest gradefuels, and the absence of many intricate parts,necessary in conventional types, probably greatlysimplifies assembly and repair methods.(2) Types. Operational types of German jetand jrocket aircraft thus far have been limited tothose powered by single or twin-units. Theyhave been employed to date as defensive fighters,as ground-attack or low-altitude bombers, and forreconnaissance. For the latter purpose they haveproved to be very effective because of their speed.(a) The only rocket-propelled aircraft knownto be operational by the German Air Force is theMesserschmitt 163 (ME 163). It is a veryfast, single-seat fighter. Although it has only asingle power unit, it has a remarkable rate ofclimb. Because of its present limited endurance,to date it has seen comparatively little use, particularlyin forward areas.(b) The Messerschmitt 262 (ME 262), atwin-unit, jet-propelled aircraft, has proved to bethe most successful of the German jet or rockettypes thus far developed. Employed as a fighter,as a ground-attack or low-level bomber, and forreconnaissance duties, it is the most versatile ofthe jet or rocket aircraft yet introduced by theGermans.(c) Other German twin-unit jet aircraft, eithercurrently operational on a limited scale or expectedto become operational in the near future,are the Arado 234 (AR 234) and Heinkel 280(HE 280). Both of these aircraft are somewhatsimilar to the Messerschmitt 262 in appearance

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIED TM-E M-451and are expected to be about equal in performance.d. NAVAL AND MARINE. At present, navaland marine aircraft are operated by the GermanAir Force on a limited scale. The use of theBV 138 for reconnaissance in the Norway andDenmark areas is the principal duty performedby this type of aircraft. Other types, such asthe HE 115 and AR 196, are employed for generalreconnaissance and liaison with the variousnaval testing units operating in the Baltic Sea,and for the performance of air/sea rescue service.In addition, naval aircraft such as the BV 222are occasionally used for marine supply and transportduty.2. Power Unitsa. ENGINES. The German Air Force hasequipped practically all operational aircraft withengines manufactured by three large companies:Daimler-Benz (D.B.); the Buyerische MoterenWe&e (B.M.W.); and the Junkers (Jumo).The trend of aeronautical engine development hasbeen toward more powerful engines with increasedaltitude performance. German aero-en;gine designers have obtained this by modifyingexisting engines to use GM-1 (nitrous oxide)and MW-50 (methanol injection) apparatus and,in certain instances, by coupling two existing enginestogether. Lack of time for experimentationwith new engines has led to the modificationof existing types which could be more quicklyput into service in war time.b. JET PROPULSION UNITS. An outstandingachievement in the field of aircraft power unitshas been the development of jet propulsion, anexample being the Junkers Jumo 004. This unitoften is referred to as a jet-propulsion turbine,or turbo jet. Propulsion is developed throughthe reaction to ejected hot gases which have beencreated by compressed air igniting with liquidfuel. As these gases pass out to the vents theytraverse a turbine, which in turn operates the aircompressor. Original momentum of the turbineis created by an auxiliary engine which disengageswhen the turbine has developed sufficient speedto create the required compression. German aircraftusing jet propulsion turbines include theMesserschmitt 262, Arado 234 and Heinkel 280.c. ROCKET-PROPULSION UNITS. A closed unit >'.in which fuel is burned or gasified, a rocket doesnot require air from the atmosphere for combustion.The gases leave through a nozzle at therear to provide thrust by jet propulsion. Fuelsare of three types: solids, (e. g., cordite); twoliquids, one a fuel, (e. g., gasoline), and thesecond an oxidizing agent (e. g., liquid oxygen) ;or a single liquid with or without liquid as acatalyst, (e. g., hydrogen peroxide with potassiumor sodium permanganate).3. ArmamentThe Germans started the war with only a fewtypes of aircraft armament, in order to standardizemanufacture and achieve large-scale production.As the war progressed, improvements becamenecessary and many changes and additionshave been made. In addition to increasing therate of fire, muzzle velocity, and caliber of aircraftarmament, the number of guns on GermanAir Force fighters has been greatly increased.The addition of the Model 108 30-mm cannon,a new weapon in aircraft armament, to FW 190's,ME 262's, ME 110 G's and ME 109 G's standsout as a great advancement, in terms of strikingpower. A detailed discussion of the varioustypes of aircraft armament can be found in ChapterVII, Section IX. , .4. ArmorThe armor protection in German planes variesin thickness from 4 to 20 mm. The total weightper plane may vary from 100 pounds or less insome army cooperation types to over 1,000 poundsfor a ground-attack plane. The demands ofmodern warfare have necessitated increased protectionof the pilot as well as of the engine andaccessory equipment. Other crew members arenormally protected by plates on the sides andfloor of the plane.5. Tabulated DataSpecifications given are for the principal types incurrent operation. The following type abbreviationsare used:LWM—Low Wing Monoplane.HWM—High Wing Monoplane.MWM—Mid-Wing Monoplane.TT—Twin tails.TB—Twin tail booms.X—17

- •FIGHTERSIAircraft Manufacturerand ModelTypeNormalCrewEngines, Modeland Rated HPWingSpanMax. SpeedMPHRadius of Action(40% NormalRange) (Miles)Typical ArmamentBomb orFreight Load(Pounds)NormalWeight(Pounds)ServiceCeiling(Feet)Single-Engine(1) Focke-WulfFW 190LWM 1 lxBMW801D14 cyl. twin-row,air-cooled radial—1755 HP34'6"385 at19,000ft.175 Forward fuselage2x7.9-or 13-mm.Forward wings2/4x20-mm.2x21-cmrocketsunderwings8,600 36,000(2) Focke-WulfFW 190 (Longnose)LWM 1 Jumo213—12cyl. liquid-cooled— 1700 HPorDB603—12 cyl.liq uid-cooled—1800 HP34'6" 435 (est.) 160 (est.) Forward fuselage2x7.9- or 13-mm.Forward wings2/4x20-mm.9,000(est.)36,000(est.)(3) MesserschmittME 109LWM 1 lxDB605A/l12 cyl. liquidcooled—1460HP32'8"400 at22,000ft.175 Forward fuselage2x7.9- or 13-mm.Forward wings2 x 20-mm.Prop, hublx20-mm.2x21-cmrocketsunderwings6,820 38,500Twin-engine(1) DornierDO 217 JHWM 3 2xBMW801D14 cyl. twin-row,air-cooled radial—1755 HP62'5"328 at20,000ft.470 Forward fuselage4x7.9-mm plus4x20-mm.DorsalIxl3-mrr..VentralIxl3-mm.27,500 29,000COCO(2) HeinkelHE 219MWM 2(est.2xDB 60312 cyl. liquidcooled—1800HP60'6"400 at22,000ft.(est.)600 (est. max.) Forward wings2x20-mm.Dorsal2x20-mm.Ventral4x24- or 30-mm.26,100 32,800

UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45.1 7;>3 85 §i#£"S^4II •2.1s ssE SE S~0J-afcoUJ,PiWHIS.ft f*O8ooc"10arsiOCwis5If53 sk kX—1?

-vrBOMBERSAircraft Manufacturerand ModelTypeNormalCrewEngines, Model,and Rated HPWingSpanMax. SoeedMPHRadius of Action(40% NormalRange) (Miles)Typical ArmamentBomb orFreight Load(Pounds)NormalWeight(Pounds)ServiceCeiling(Feet)Single-Engine(1) JunkersJU 87 (Stuka)(Dive-bomber)nkerstedGullWing2 1xJumo 211 J12 cyl. liquidcooled—1335HP45 '4*255 at13,500ft.280Forward fuselage2xl2.7-mm.Forward wings2x7.9-or 37-mm.Dorsal2x7.9-mm.2,20012,60018,500(2) Focke-WulfFW190(Fighter-bomber)Twin-Engine(1) HenschelHS129(2) DornierDO 217 K-2LWMLWMHWM1 lxBMW 801D14 cyl. twin-row,air-cooled radial—1755 HP1 2xGnome-Rhone14M 04/05,14 cyl. twin-row,air-cooled radial—800 HP4 2xBMW 801 A-214 cyl. twin-row,air-cooled radial—1595 HP34'6"44'6"80'6"370 at190ft.275 at9,000ft.325 at20,000ft.(est.)165220470Forward fuselage2x7.9-or 13-mm.Forward wings2/4x20-mm.Forward fuselage2x7.9-mm plus2xl5-or 20-mmpluslx30-mm or6x7.9-mm.DorsalPossibly 2x20-mm.Forward fuselage2x7.9-mm orlarger calibergercalIxl3-mm.Lateral2x7.9-mm.VentralIxl3-mm.Tail4x7.9-mm.5502206,6009,80011,40035,00031,50025,00025,000I3COCO2rn

uNCLASS\F\EDI MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45108 I•a ^ ai-aj-I E1 s a s 6"g ^ -5. J d, ~ O;S5•szinWP3iIo« 8I 3 , K 1O •= O6 BSxBMW14 cyl. tw:air-ccx)l rad ial1530 H est.OHI 1 c hx s = 00"-•00X—21

IMARCH 1945 UNCLASSIFIEDTM-E 30-451IIIIIIIf!(x,S O^X X, pXI+3Y O 8sSiCL,2SP3X •.-3 53§c 18 1 S

TRANSPORT AND GLIDER TUGSAircraft Manufacturerand Model1TypeNormalCrewEngines, Model,and Rated HPWingSpanMax. SpeedMPHRadius of Action(40% NormalRange) (Miles)Typical ArmamentBomb orFreight Load(Pounds)' NormalWeight(Pounds)ServiceCeiling(Feet)(1) AradoAR232(performance andcharacteristicsestimated)HWMTT3/42xBMW 801 A or L14 cyl. twin-row,air-cooled radial—1595 HP104'210 at18,000ft.350/400Forward fuselage1 MGLateral4MGs9,00045,00020,000(2) GothaGO 244(Twin-enginepowered versionof GO 242 glider)HWMTB22xGnome-Rhone14 m, 14 cyl.twin-row, aircooledradial—800 HP79'169 at10,000ft.145Forward fuselagel/2x7.9-mm.DorsalIx7.9-mm.Lateral4x7.9-mm.TailIx7.9-mm.4,400or23 men17,50019,000(3) JunkersJU52(4) JunkersJU9OLWMLWM3/453xBMW 132A A/T9 cyl. air-cooledradial—660 HP4xBMW 132 H9 cyl. air-cooledradial—830 HP95'11*115'165218 at3,500ft.210315Forward fuselageIx7.9-mm.DorsalIx7.9-mm.Lateral2x7.9-mm.VentralIx7.9-mm.Forward fuselageIx7.9-mm.DorsalIxl3-mm.VentralIx7.9-mm.5,000or22 men9,000or up to70 men23,10051,00016,000CO15,000 3iiifii

iTRANSPORT AND GLIDER TUGS—ContinuedIAircraft Manufacturerand ModelTypeNormalCrewEngines, Model,and Rated HPWingSpanMax. SpeedMPHRadius of Action(40% NormalRange) (Miles)Typical ArmamentBomb orFreight Load(Pounds)NormalWeight(Pounds)ServiceCeiling(Feet)(5) JunkersJU252LWM 63xBMW 80114 cyl. twin-row,air-cooled radial—1755 HP111' (est.)235 at18,500ft.UnknownDorsalIxl3-or 20-mm.Lateral?x7.9-mm.VentralIxl3-mm.TailIxl3-or 30-mm.. 12,000(est.)or 35men45,000(est.)26,000(est.)(6) JunkersJU290LWM 4/7TT4xBMW 801 L-214 cyl. twin-row,air-cooled radial—1500 HP138'243 at18,000ft.395/Forward fuselagelx20-mm.DorsalIxl5-or 20-mm.Lateral4 or 6x7.9-mm or2xl3-mm.VentralIxl3-mm, forwardandlx20-mm, rearTaillx20-mm.19,000 orup to90 men90,00019,000(7) MesserschmittME 323HWM 8/106xGnome-Rhone14N 48/49,14 cyl. twin-row,radial—965 HP181'195 at13,000ft.255Fuselage2x7.9-mm, upper2x7.9-mm, upperDorsal4x7.9-mm, forwardplus2x7.9-mm, rearLateral6x7.9-mm.Ventral2x7.9-mm.26,900or60/100men85,00023,000ooS

* * • • > • : < : •GLIDERSAircraft Manufacturerand ModelTypeNormalCrewEngines, Model,and Rated HPWingSpanMax. SpeedMPHRadius of Action(40% NormalRange) (Miles)Typical ArmamentBomb orFreight Load(Pounds)NormalWeight(Pounds)ServiceCeiling(Feet)(1) GothaDFS 230HWM 1 or 2 None 72'4" Dependenttug.on type ofLight MG can becarried2,800 or10 men4,700(2) GothaGO 242HWMTB2 None 79' Dependenttug.on type ofFuselage1 or 2x7.9-mm.DorsalIx7.9-mm.TailIx7.9-mm.5,300 or23 fullyequippedtroops12,500(3) MesserschmittME 321"GIGANT"HWM 1 or 2 None 181' Dependenttug.on ty pe ofLateralpossibly6x7.9-mm.26,000or130 men50,000RECONNAISSANCE AND ARMY COOPERATIONAircraft Manufacturerand ModelTypeNormalCrewEngines, Model,and Rated HPWingSpanMax. SpeedMPHRadius of Action(40% NormalRange) (Miles)Typical ArmamentBomb orFreight Load(Pounds)NormalWeight(Pounds)ServiceCeiling(Feet)(1) HenschelHS126HWM 2 lxBramo "Fafnir"323, 9 cyl. aircooledradial—1,000 HP477" 230 at15,000ft.210 Forward fuselage1 or 2x7.9-mm.CockpitIx7.9-mm.Dorsal2x7.9-mm.220 7,250 27,00055CA(2) FieselerFI 156HWM 2 or 3 lxArgus As 10C/3,8 cyl. air-cooled,inverted "V"—•240 HP46'8" 110at S.L.95 DorsalIx7.9-mm.220 2,250 15,000to in

NAVY TYPESIiAircraft Manufacturerand ModelTypeNormalCrewEngines, Model,and Rated HPWingSpanMax. SpeedMPHRadius of Action Bomb or Normal Service(40% NormalFreight Load Weight CeilingRange) (Miles) Typical Armament (Pounds) (Pounds) (Feet)(I) Arado LWM 2 1xBMW 132 K, 41 ' 195 at 185 Fuselage 220 6,600 21,500AR 196 (Float) 9 cyl. air-cooled S.L. Ix7.9-mm.radial—920 HP Forward wings -2x20-m.Dorsal- 2x7.9-mm.(2) Blohm&Voss HWM 5 or 6 3xJumo 205 D 88'7* 175 at 395 Forward fuselage 660 30,800 17,000BV138 T B 6 cyl. liquid- S.L. Ixl5-or 20-mm.(Fly cooled Diesel Dorsaling 700 HP Ixl3-mm.boatTailIxl5-or 20-mm.(3) Blohm&Voss HWM 10 5xBMW 801 A, 150'10" 200/240 1,400 to 1,800 Forward fuselage 45,000 45,000 18,000BV222 14 cyl. twin-row, at 15/ Ixl3-or 15-or (est.)(Performance air-cooled radial— 17,000 20-mm. up toestimated) 1595 HP ft. Dorsal 116 men2xl5-or 20-mm.Lateral!(4) Heinkel MWM 3 2xBMW 132 K, 72'6" 185 at 490 Forward fuselage 1,100 23,500 18,500HE 115 (Twin 9 cyl. air-cooled S.L. Ix7.9-andFloats) radial—920 HP Ixl5-mm.Engine nacelles2x7.9-mm.DorsalIx7.9-mm.COGO

I MARCH 1945TM-E 30-451Figure 3.—FIV 190 Siiiylc-Enginc Fiyhlcr-Bomber idth DB 60S i.iujinc.Fiijurc 4.—ME 109 F Sinylc-Enyinc Fighter-Bomber.X—27

IUNCLASSIFIEDMARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45!I igurc ?.--])() 217 J Tiein linguie Sight I'igX—28Figure 6.—J11 US C-6 Tivin-Engine I'tghler.

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-45IFigure 7.—.1//:' 1 Ill's in urlion.rr .V.--.1//; I/O 'l'-,ii)i-l:u>iiiir l-iulX—29

U 1 'i V~1 MARCH ,945 TM-E 30-451.-Ml: Illi l-i

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451Fiti12.—V-W 19(1 Sm,ilr-l.ii,iun- l-i,ili!rr-H->i::l>x—3I

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30.451Funirc IS.—no 217 K-2 Tww-f.iuiiae I'.-.mFigure 14.—HE 111 Twiu-ljiaiiic!!,

I MARCH 1945TM-E 30-451I ' i u u r r 1 0 . — J l ' S \ . 1 - 1 '/'-îii-l-ii.ii:,,- I: •:••!,,-,l : iijurc 17—JI' ,V,VUigurc 18.—JU ISS Twiii-lim/iiu- liom 1 ;-)-.X-33

! \ i !I MARCH 1945 •J i i ! ,. ITM-E 30.451V'unirc /'>.--/• 11' Jn o C /•,•»;--/ mum- ll-inh i , l i t r e J O . ( i i ) j . f l 7 . V . 1 ' - / . . ' • < / ! < ) , • / /•./.•••>•/Figure 21.—./(/ ji Three-Engine I'miisfurl/:iliaX—34

UN 1I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451/••/./f.';V -'-'. Ml.figure 23.—JU 90 Four-Engine Transport/Glider Tug.HI I nin.\port.Figure 21.—DFS 230 Glider.X—35

I MARCH 1945 TM-E 30-451I ir/urc Jo. —.'(' J"" I : i>iir-1-nun:,- 'I i\wsr-i n/•"!>;/;;-(• _V.--6'i') 212 Glider.sUmiX—36Figure 28.—MF. 321 "Cwn/if Glider.

I MARCH 1945UNCLASSi;30-451USFniurc So.—Il : i

I MARCH 1945 UNCLVo2;.TM-E 30.451Figure 3 2 . — I T 13s //(>,,-/ ,wi,

I MARCH 1945 UMCLASS;TM-E 30-451l : ujun. 35.--Ml: 1' / Y , ' / \ 7 / V i ; //:/, r. ,•/•/..(• /Vigurc 36. —Ml : 262 Jrl-I 'rpr!l,-tl Ttirbui,--'! i/v /•n/l,x—39

I MARCH 1945 UNCLASS\flED TM-E 30-451(KIEGMAUSBHOUNGSREGIMENnJnltiol Air Training ««glmo*SCHULE A>—11«3IEtementory Flying(FlUGZEUGFUHRERSCHU1E) A-3Elementary FlyingTraining School[course 3)(FLUGZEUGFUHRER-NISCHESCHUIE) SCHULE B)Flight EngineerAdvanced TrainingSchoolSchoolTraining SchoolIcownei 1 A 21(HUGZEUGFOHIEft-(KAMPFSCHULEGESCHIYAOESIBomber SchoollZEBSrO«EBSCHUlEOR NACHTJAGOSCHULEGESCHWADERITwin EngineFighter School(FMEGERSCHUTZENSCHULE)Air GunnerySchool(FERNAUfKLARER. SCHtUE GESCHR econ nai •*a rueSchool(SCKLACHr-SCHUiE GESCHGroond AHackSchoolIJAGDSCHU1EGESCHWADERISinsle EngineFighter School(ERGANZUNGS(EftGANZUNGSFERNAUFKLARER-UUFTNACHftlCH-NACHUAGD OflIERGANZUNGSZERSTcMEft GRUPFFlGRlfPFElTENSCHULEIKAMPfGftUPPE)VMroloi £ Telegraph Bomber Reserve Twin Engine R eco nna Issan ceOporcrtor School Training Unit Fighter Reiervo ReserveTraining UnitTraining UnitKlGXNl”NGSSCHlACrtr QKUPPE)Ground AttackReierve Train*IrtgUnH(ERGANZUNGSJAGDGESCHWADER)Single EngineFighter R/T Pool(AWIfUftERUNGS*SCHUIE)Observer SchoolIKAMPF.GESCHWADERIOperationalUnit(ZERSrORE* ORNACHTJAQOGESCHWADER)Operational Unit(FERNAUFKURERGESCHWADER)Operational UnitISCHUCHfGESCHWADEAIOperational UnittiAGDGKCrMMDEfi)Operational UnitFigure 37.—Gmman Air Force training program.1. GeneralSection VI.TRAININGAir Force training is the responsibility of theAir Ministry Training Inspectorate headed by theAir Officer for Training (General der Fliegeruusbildung).Air Training Divisions control the assignmentof recruits to training schools and assignmentof trained pilots to operational unitsupon orders from the Air Ministry. At theindividual flying schools all training is under thecontrol of a Director of Instruction Courses(Lehrgungsleiter), who is also responsible for themaintenance of the training aircraft.2. Recruit TrainingAll prospective Air Force personnel are sentto German Air Force Initial Training Regiments(Fliegerausbildungsregimenter), where for sixveeks to.three months they receive military orbasic infantry training. Upon completion of InitialTraining, pilot candidates enter ElementaryFlying Training Schools. Personnel to be trainedfor the air crew positions of flight engineer, gunner,wireless operator, or observer are enrolledin their respective individual schools.3. Elementary Flying TrainingPilot candidates proceed to and begin their actualflight training in the Elementary FlyingTraining Schools (Flugziigfiihrerschulen A). Allpupils take Course Number 1, a brief glider trainingcourse, and Course Number 2, (Motor Auswuhl),a preliminary course in powered aircraft.Unsuitable trainees are eliminated, and those acceptableare assigned to bomber or fighter trainingupon determination of their qualifications.Students in single-engine, fighter-pilot trainingcontinue through Course Number 3 (/agdvorschuZe),a branch of the Elementary FlyingTraining School, for preliminary instruction inX—40

I MARCH 1945URCLASSff®TM-E 30-451fighter aircraft. This course includes aerobatics,cross-country, and formation flying.4. Single-Engine Fighter TrainingThe single-engine fighter pilot progresses fromCourse Number 3 of Elementary Flying TrainingSchool to the specialized single-engine fighterschool (Jagdsckule) Geschwader where he learnsto fly operational fighter types. He also receivesinstruction in gunnery, blindflying,and formationflying. He is next assigned to a Reserve TrainingPool (Erganzungs Jagdgeschwader) wherehe receives intensive combat training prior tojoining an operational unit. The total time necessaryto produce a single-engine fighter pilot isfrom 7 to 8 months, including flying time of from107 to 8 months,5. Advanced Training or Conversion SchoolUpon completion of the Elementary FlyingTraining School (A) Course Number 2, thebomber, reconnaissance, ground-attack, and twinenginefighter pilots are sent to an AdvancedTraining or Conversion School {FlugzeugfuhrerschuleB). Here they are instructed in the han-

V&MARCH 1945personnel are assembled with pilots into crewsfor unit training in a specialized school Geschwader.I. GeneralSection VII.TACTICSIn more than 5 years of. warfare new tacticshad to be perfected to take advantage of improvementsor new developments in both Germanand Allied aircraft and armament. Other factorshave been the German Air Force's loss ofits original numerical superiority and the newproblems arising in the defense of the homelanddue to continually receding I front lines. As aresult, profound changes have and are still takingplace in German Air Force tactics. In general,however, it may be said that through the lastfew years the German Air Force has been increasinglyon the defensive. It has been unableto go on the offensive, except occasionally and ona limited scope. Thus,. the German Air Forcetactics were’ modified from one of bold attack toone of conservation of strength, assuming risksonly when decisive results appeared obtainable.Within the limitations of such enforced cautionthe German Air Force has held to its basic conceptsof surprise, concentrated attack and exploitationof the enemy's mistakes.2. Long-Range Bombersa. OPERATIONS EARLY IN THE WAR. TheGerman Air Force never has had a heavy bomberforce, Its long-range bomber force has consistedof medium bombers designed originally for close,as well as indirect, support. Typical of its intendedpurpose were the large-scale bombing attackson airfields which initiated the German campaignsagainst Poland, France, and the Lowlands.The inadequacy of this bomber force for strategicoperations was revealed .in the Battle ofBritain. The deficiency was never corrected, andthereafter the main employment of the long-rangebomber force was as close support, a functionwhich progressively declined as the German AirForce lost more and more its previous air superiorityto the growing fighter forces of the Allies.Units specializing in anti-shipping activitieshave comprised the most experienced and efficientbranch of the bomber force during the war. Theytoo eventually proved inadequate to their mainmission when major Allied landings were madeon the coasts of Europe ;X-42UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451b. RECENT TREND. In view of these factors,the German Air Force in the summer of 1944substantially curtailed its bomber force. Therelatively few units remaining operational are todayengaged in the following operations:(1) Level bombing from medium height, indusk or dawn attacks by small formations onbridges, railroads, dock facilities, and targets ofopportunity in the rear of battle areas.(2) Mining of coastal waters and estuaries atnight.(3) Occasional torpedo attacks on shipping.(4) Miscellaneous minor activities such as airlaunching of pilotless aircraft, "pick-a-back" attackson shipping, docks and bridges, etc.3. Ground Attacka. "STUKAS." Ground attack is the extremelyclose support of ground forces in the battle areaillustrated by the close teamwork of aircraft withadvancing Panzer columns which was the basicformula of Germany's Blitzkrieg. The "Stuka"dive-bombing JU 87 was the air artillery whicho_n short summons from the ground forces clearedroads blocks and reduced opposition. It alsoroamed behind the enemy's line disrupting trafficand creating confusion. For such tactics, completemastery of the air was a requirement. Inthe early campaigns, the skies were swept clearof opposition by sudden attacks on ‘enemy airfieldsfollowed by destruction in the air of suchaircraft as had escaped. Without such freedomfrom enemy fighter interception, the "Stuka" wastoo vulnerable and could not operate. This becameapparent in the later stages of the Tunisiancampaign. With the advent of appreciable Alliedfighter strength, dive bombing in daytime continuedonly in areas where the enemy lackedfighter strength such as the Partisan sectors ofthe Balkans or where special front characteristics,such as the vastness of the Eastern Front,made their employment still possible. In theWest, dive-bombing "Stukas" have been relegatedto individual night sorties chiefly against troopconcentrations, headquarters and other front-lineobjectives.b. TWIN-ENGINE FIGHTERS. The GermanAir Force unsuccessfully experimented with heavilyarmored twin-engine fighters to fill the placeleft vacant by the obsolescence of the "Stuka".The HS 129 never proved satisfactory and isdisappearing from the Eastern Front, its onlysphere of operations.

I MARCH 1945uNCLASSIF\EDTM-E 30-451c. SINGLE - ENGINE FIGHTER - BOMBERS. (1)The German Air Force then turned to the singleenginefighter to meet the ground-attack needs.The FW 190 equipped as afighter-bomber ,prevedsatisfactory, and re-equipment of the SchlachtUnits with this type apparently was intended.(2) The fighter-bomber tactics are familiar.They consist of medium-height approach by smallformations, ranging from a S&warm of fiveplanes to a half Gruppe, though occasionally concentrationmay be attempted. Troops, transportcolumns, and airfields are dive-bombed by eachpiane in turn, then strafed with the aircraft armament.Attacks against tanks or well defendedsites are likely to be made from approaches attreetop level, and main reliance may be on cannonand machine-gun fire.(3) Fighter-bombers, however, are still vulnerableto regular fighter attacks. It is thereforequite usual for them to be accompanied by a highcover of their own fighters, at least for the outwardleg of their journey.(4) The large numerical superiority of-theAllied fighters on the Western Front after theNormandy landings prevented the German AirForce from giving adequate protection to itsground-attack aircraft and thus denied the possibilityof any substantial close-support effort. Onthe Western Front today the fighter-bomber FW190 is found in night harassing units, where itjoins the JU 87 in attacks on headquarters, troop,communication and transportation systems. Thesenight activities have been further augmented byassigning similar tasks to some of the twin-enginenight fighters. These missions are generally individualfree lance operations.d. JET AIRCRAFT. Introduction of jet aircraftas ground-attack equipment is the latest GermanAir Force move in its endeavor to maintain closesupport by day for the German ground troops.Their tactics are based on the use of speed toescape antiaircraft defense fire or air interception.Jet aircraft attacks on airfields and troop concentrationshave been made occasionally with antipersonnelbombs from great height in daytime.Most attacks, however, are at dusk, principallyagainst bridges, dock facilities, railroads, etc, withsmall bombs. These attacks are made generallyby single planes in dives from medium or lowheight, If attacking in pairs, one aircraft is likelyto approach at medium height while the other followsat much lower level.4. Fighter Tactics 1~'a. MISSION. The mission .of the fighter aircraft,be it day or night, single- or twin-engine, isthe destruction of the enemy's air force and theprotection of its bombers, ground-attack planes,etc., against enemy fighter 'action. As the developmentof the war forced Germany more andmore on the defensive, the German Air Forcefighters have been increasingly occupied with theinterception of enemy bomber penetrations. Tatticshave been continually revised to meet problemspresented by new enemy equipment, greaterfire power, new enemy defense formations, andincreased enemy fighter cover. Only the mostgeneral principles can be outlined.b. INTERCEPTION. (1) Against enemy daypenetration, the German Air Force single-enginefighter tactic is to avoid if possible the fighterscreen protecting the enemy bombers. Before theadvent of Allied long-range fighters, the Germanfighters were wont to wait until the Allied bomberformations had reached a’ point beyond the rangeof their fighter cover. To insure such an unprotectedperiod, the German Air Force sometimesmade early attacks on enemy fighter cover to compelthem to drop their auxiliary fuel tanks andthus shorten their protective flights. Always onthe alert for opportunities, the German fighterswould take quick advantage of gaps between suecessivefighter cover waves.(2) Main tactics against the bomber formationhave remained the concentrated attackagainst one particular group of the enemy bomber .formation, preferably an outside or laggard one.Effort is made to bring the bombers to loosentheir formation and thus lose much of their advantageof combined cross fire. Individual attacksare from the sun if possible, but the main ;consideration being the defensive fire power ofthe attacked bomber, approach will differ accord-.ing to the type of aircraft faced. , Single passand mass attacks have both been employed.(3) Twin-engine day fighters were used fora time, especially in rocket attacks, for the purposeof breaking enemy formations. The vulnerabilityof the twin-engine fighter to enemy 7fighters brought an end to these tactics as soon $as the latter were able to accompany in force $their bomber formation all the way to and fromtheir target.(4) Against other fighters, German Air Forcesingle-engine fighter tactics follow whenever possiblethe usual basic principles of attack from the;

wmwI MARCH 1945sun, from above, and from behind. Speed andmaneuverability remain as always the decisivefactors. Tactics are based on the "Rotte" forma1 tion of 2 planes, number two flying wing manj protection for his leader.: c. NIGHT FIGHTERS. Against enemy nighti penetration, the German Air Force night fighters! have been equipped with both single- and twinengine- aircraft, but the latter has really been thebasic equipment of the force. Two main nightfighter-tactics have been the free lance, independenthunt, or the attack guided by radio from aground control. In either case the attack is bysingle aircraft and target location is generallydetermined by airborne radar, though in somecases it is accomplished by visual sighting.d. INTRUDER ATTACKS. Twin-engine fightershave carried out night intruder attacks. Thisconsists of attacks against returning enemy bomberaircraft on or near their bases as they prepareto land as well as strafing attacks against the airfields.5. Airborne Troopsa. ATTACK ON CRETE. In the early stages ofthe war Germany tried various methods of employingair-landing troops in the Lowlands, Norway,and the Balkans. Tactics for airborne combatbecame more clearly defined, however, in thecombined attack on Crete, which was the firstairborne invasion and capture of strongly defendedterritory across a body of water. Thepattern established then consisted of the following:(1) Short, intensive low and medium bombingand strafing of enemy positions in the intendedlanding area, immediately preceding or evensimultaneous with the landing of glider-borne andparachute troops.(2) As these troops proceeded, according toplan, to disrupt communications, silence local defenses,and seize airfields or other suitable landinggrounds, areas surrounding their immediateobjectives were subjected to continuous bombardment.(3) With the arrijal of the airborne infantryand engineer units closely followed by heavierelements, the parachute and other shock troopswere reinforced and this combined force continuedthe task of attacking enemy communicationsfrom the rear, drawing, off reserves, andclearing the area for the armored forces whichwere to follow.UNCLASSIFIED TM-E 30-451b. OPERATIONS SINCE CRETE. (1) Since thecapture of Crete, increasing transport commitmentson all fronts and Allied air superiorityhave placed almost insurmountable difficulties inthe way of such large scale ventures. The Germanshave, however, dropped parachutists andlanded glider troops in conjunction with landoperations.(2) In Russia, the Balkans, and the December1944 counteroffensive in the Ardennes, unitsvarying in strength from a platoon to a battalionhave been landed behind enemy lines to disruptcommunications, to seize such key points as railroads,roadheads, bridges, and power stations,and to engage in other sabotage activities. Whensuch tactics are employed, the troops, whetherthey are parachuted from the JU 52 or landedby the DFS 230, usually hold their positions alimited time before being relieved ‘by advancingground forces or attempting to work their wayback to their own lines.6. Supply by Aira. TIRPOSES. AS the complex of the warchanges, &stained operations on several frontsforced the German Air Force to use defensivelyaircraft that had previously been envisioned asspearheading short, decisive victories. The supplysituation has been so desperate on many occasionsthat the German Army has had to relyupon air transportation of personnel, supplies andequipment for its existence. This was evidentin Russia, North Africa, and the Balkans firstas an attempt to reinforce the Wehrmacht; whenthat failed, efforts were made to carry out evacuationby air. Although the JU 52 has beenthe mainstay in these operations, the German AirForce has employed nearly every type of its operationalaircraft. Most recent application of thedefensive mission of the German Air Force transportshas been the supply of isolated garrisons inthe Channel and Biscay ports and in other isolatedlocalities. These landings or dropping of suppliesare essentially emergency measures—carried onwhen all other means of supply are interrupted.b. METHODS. A landing operation, accomplishedby power-driven aircraft or by freightcarryinggliders, is the safest method of air supplyif proper landing facilities are available.Glider landings may be made in good or badweather after precise agreements on signals andmarkers have been reached. Power-driven aircrafthave the additional asset of being able to

. UNCLASSIFIEDI MARCH 1945 •HHfWBTHT" TM-E 30-451carry off wounded and make other evacuations, on.the return trip. Supply-dropping operations havebeen necessary in other instances. These usuallyhave been carried out by night, although somehave taken place during the day. Whichevermethod is used, careful arrangements have to bemade as to the time and locality of the dropping,and for the cessation of local defenses. Nightmissions, moreover, necessitate increasing the sizeof the dropping zone and more careful markingof the approach and target area with flares andother signals.

unclassified - Sturmpanzer.com

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?